) i | TWEEDDALE ey pe OL i ‘ ij uns UF ti i " \ f (i \ J ae RRO f Fat ’ Fi a aay el t o ai P on coriwnt i i ae oh W) | ; 1 i A / Rot f ith ’ \ oe : - 4 AAI nt co RE SEM ay at ip ; CONS ih d \: } «i ; f ad ay \ 1 \ a j ‘ Muy Lf \ iW ") i} / Le 4 i) ; ‘ i { ery (en . » ‘ . 9h iW i @ i at ore. i ‘| ; AP ON nS i fait | j Rhie (ey int J be i f e wpe any i WK he y t ny \ ' Ae i ‘ i ny 4 i ".’ \ +e i VVVCVUVVVTVVBIEVTSGTUVUTTUVIVsowtee THE JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL. eee VOL.°V. VRVVAAUTAVRAVIVAVAETATAETIATVESD Laltanpary owe ria a Jebiod ae pati ‘Al “3raro O2 JOURNAL THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL. —=_0 >> EDITED BY FASPES (PREN SEP, FackcsS SECRETARY OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL; HON. MEM. OF THE AS. SOC. OF PARIS; COR. MEM. OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOC. OF LONDON, ‘AND OF THE ROYAL SOCIETIES OF MARSEILLES AND CAEN; OF THE ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, &c. ee Pou JANUARY TO DECEMBER, 1836. ‘¢ Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science, in different parts of Asia, will commit their observations to writing, and send them to the Asiatic Society at Calcutta ; ; it will languish, if such communications shall be long intermitted ; and will die=away,;if they shall entirely cease.’’ SIR WM. JONES. PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, CIRCULAR ROAD. SOLD BY THE EDITOR, AT THE SOCIETY’S OFFICE. 1836. * F , , f Pm ‘ : Asti e NEL a 6 aes ha iia ae ela etme TA. 5 aay ge sat ‘sbaodad $e site beopon mee sey ned ones G ee eT respne sa ee iene ee 2% eee ee a ‘$44 ER 7 HE eo oo ol es et r ¥ Bos ‘* het eenlie’ Pe ee seine a ©, ‘Sheet He wh 1B see D we “hasan hs oe Ae AP énadiny yeast te * onty toad; iTnile e524’ i nnenes ay A ‘te UP Ete eee? TEES ye Ald ue bss hs = peek My wey waued 27 aie wet te ag ints, ‘ear ot ate PREFACE. —=>——— Our aspirations on launching a fifth annual volume of the Journal into the ocean of literature are no longer tremulous from a diffident anxiety as to its reception ; the tide of popular favor, or at least the diminutive wave of it which reaches the secluded estuary of oriental research, has buoyed us up with the most flattering encouragement, and an increasing body of con- stituents has still pressed forward to freight our humble bark with the productions of their industry and talent. To extract any of the too complimentary phrases of our correspondents in Paris, Vienna, and London, would be egotism ; and we must not forget that a proportion of their praise may be merely stimulatory—inciting us to take advantage of the golden op- portunities commanded by our position at the emporium, to amass a rich cargo for their more deliberate and erudite dis- cussion hereafter. Our errors also have not escaped their due measure of criticism, but even thus they have been productive of a good effect in drawing forth more correct information from other sources. The commerce in which we are engaged, to continue the metaphor in the terms of a late French prospec- tus, ‘* multipliera le capital de la science comme I’autre com- merce multiplie celui du numeraire.” However we may thus boast of having added to the stock of knowledge, we fear the ‘* capital du numeraire” has but little connection, beyond the analogy, with the out-turn of our spe- culation ; although, if the pecuniary prospects of the Journal are not much bettered this year, we have none to blame but ourselves for the unpromising aspect of our account current ! By increasing the letter-press more than 100 pages, and the plates in proportion, we felt we were exceeding the bounds of caution; yet we could not resist the attempt to keep pace with the communications entrusted to us for publication, even at V1 PREFACE. some sacrifice and risk. Had our edition been sufficiently ex- tensive to allow a large reserve for future sale, there might have been hopes of retrievyement—but the 500 copies have all disappeared, and of our early volumes it is almost impossible now to procure acopy. ‘The only method, then, left to meet this difficulty, is to levy a heavier assessment on our supporters for the future; and to this step, however reluctantly, we shall be obliged to resort from the beginning of the year 1837, still always adhering to our engagement of giving the maximum of matter for our means, and reminding our subscribers that we are not in fact heightening our charge, but enlarging our work ; seeing that from 32 pages we have gradually augment- ed the monthly quota to 80, a quantity which experience has proved to be more than can be covered by a rupee subscrip- tion. Our rates from 1837, therefore, will be 14 rupee per number to subscribers, and two rupees to others. The pecuni- ary details on which this measure is founded areas follows: PAYMENTS. 1836. RECEIPTs. Co.’s Rs. A. P. Co.’s Rs. A. P. To Balance due Ist Jan... 675 3 7 By Collections in 1836,.. 4319 00 To Establishment one yean 175 70 By Asiatic Society for co- To ie ae 143 14 3 pies supplied to Mem- To Binding, .... wet a 209) 14 57, bers in 1835, .---- 1088 00 To Printer’s Bill dis- By sale in England,... 336 8 0 charged, .... 4277 96 To Engravings and Litho- gyaphs,'.. saace« aces) LeOGn ome 7047 12 0 5743 91 OUTSTANDINGS. DEPENDENCIES. To printing Bills unpaid By Subscriptions due for for AB AG.) a eitt spr piace ea pe 1836, in Calcutta, .... 960 13 3 Ditto Mofussil, ........ 1100 00 Ditto Memb. As. Soc. 1284 00 Ditto, Madras, .. 05.22.50 1044 do 0 Ditto Bombay, ........ 830 3 9 Ditto Ceylon, .......... 183 10 7 12,268 12 0 10,880 38 Loss, supposing all the outstanding claims realizable, .....,.. 1,388 8 0 If, in our last volume, we could not refrain from noticing, as the most prominent object of interest in its contents, the sus- pension of oriental publications by the British Indian Govern- ment, and the general discouragement under which oriental studies were doomed to languish; we must not on the present occasion omit to make honorable mention of the patronage and PREFACE. Vil _ favor which has once more dawned upon science and literature in India under the present administration. The proceedings of the Asiatic Society, last year so full of painful discussion and unsuccessful appeal, this year shine forth with tokens of distinguished consideration. Consulted on the merit of pro- positions connected with historical research in the Peninsula and in Ceylon, its recommendations have met that attention which dignifies its proceedings, and tends more than any thing else to render it a substantive and useful institution. The sanction of its auspices has been courted, and has been ex- tended beneficially to publications of great magnitude and im- portance. It has itself engaged in a new sphere of operations, devolved upon it by the discussions of last year, which pro- mises, by a judicious combination with the sister Societies of France and England, to become equally advantageous to the European scholar, and profitable to itself. The Society of Paris has been the foremost to volunteer its co-operation in the completion of the series of suspended oriental works; but we have reason to know that the Royal Asiatic Society of London has not espoused their cause less warmly or less successfully, although the unavoidable delays of references to high antho- rities have prevented our yet reaping the fruits of their influ- ence and intercession. Many will consider with ourselves that the publication of a full edition of the oriental classics is a perfectly legitimate branch of labour for an Asiatic Society, and they may hope to see it permanently continued under endowment and protec- tion of the Government itself—It may indeed be regarded as a judicious modification of one of the earliest intentions of the institution promulgated in July, 1806, but hitherto left a dead letter on its minutes, ‘* that a series of volumes, to be entitled Bistiorneca Astarica, be published by the Society distinct from the Asiatic Researches, containing translations of short works in the Asiatic languages, and extracts and de- scriptive accounts of books of greater length, gradually extend- ing to all Asiatic books deposited in the Society’s library, and even to all works extant in the languages of Asia.” The translation and critical examination of Oriental works at the present day can be better undertaken by the distinguished Viil PREFACE. professors and philologists of Europe, and the only department of which we can hope to relieve them, with any chance of success, is the collection and correct printing of original texts through the supervision of our native Pandits and Manlavis. We therefore hope to see fresh volumes put in hand now that the series transferred by the Committee of Education is so nearly completed; and we would respectfully suggest, that the Government should make over to the Society all of the Sanscrit, Arabic, and Persian works that have hitherto issued from the Education Press, in order that one system of distri- bution and sale may be regulated for the whole series; and that, under the name of the BrstiorHeca Astatica, this body of Indian classicai lore may be encouraged and regarded in the light of a national undertaking, entrusted merely to the vigi- lant superintendence of the Society as the appropriate organ of their publication. But we are dwelling too long on a favorite project, and have but little space left to allude to the equally prosperous for- tune of the natural sciences during the present year. The sincere votary of science cannot have witnessed without plea- surable anticipations the introduction, altogether novel in this country, of the delightful and instructive experiments of na- tural philosophy among the social recreations of Government House. At these parties may be kindled into action many a dormant disposition to cultivate the sciences that has hither- to but wanted such astimulus; and the community at large may learn to appreciate the studies they have been accustom- ed to eschew as vain or recondite, by witnessing their practi- cal application and attractions. We have heard it suggest- ed as an improvement on the plan adopted by the illustrious Patron of the Society, to hold these soirées directly at the Socie- ty’smuseum, where the objects to be explained or exhibited might be prepared more at leisure, and where they would remain classified with others in the same collection ;—others again have advocated the giving of a more decidedly lectural character to the evening’s exposition. In London, where the President of the Royal Society holds similar meetings, his visitors are already: well grounded in the subjects treated of, and need but a glance at dny new invention or experiment to comprehend its drift: but’ ‘PREFACE. ib. in India the majority have not enjoyed the same opportunities, and their curiosity is merely raised without hope of entire satisfaction. But against this view it may be urged that a monthly lecture would be but a tardy mode of communicating knowledge, more especially if the subject were to be changed on each occasion. A course of lectures might be a good suc- cedaneum to the system, but the spirit of the monthly re-union must be general and exhibitory, to answer the object intended. Again we are insensibly falling into a review of matters be- yond the proper scope of a Preface, which should confine itself to the contents of the volume it precedes, or to the mutual concerns of the editor and his constituents. On the cover of more than one monthly Journal we have already explained to what extent we have been enabled to increase the number and accuracy of our lithographed plates this year, by putting in requisition the talents of our mofussil friends. When the facilities of drawing on transfer paper for lithographic printing become more generally known, we may expect still further advantage from its adoption by travellers, engineers, botanists, and naturalists, who are, or ought to be, artists also. It is now known from actual experience that a transfer drawing, packed in a tin roll, may be subjected to a journey of 1000 miles, either in the hottest or the dampest period of the year with impunity. Most of the imperfections in the plates of the Sewalik fossils are due to want of care in passing them on to the stone, rather than to imperfections in the original drawings. Some confusion has arisen this year, in the numbering and placing of the plates, from continual and unavoidable postponements which it is needless to particularize. One plate (of the Bhitart inscription) has been reserved for the ensuing volume, that full justice may be done to the able elucidation of its important contents. And here we may be allowed a moment’s exultation at the highly curious train of discovery, connected with this monument, which has been developed in the pages of the Journal. Not only has a dynasty before wholly unknown to the Indian historian, been traced by coins and inscriptions through seven generations in its own line, but two collateral alliances with other reigning princes x PREFACE. have been brought to light: while extracts from ancient Chinese authors, independently scrutinized in Europe, have helped to determine their exact chronological epoch. In numismatic research discovery has been no less rife. The theory of a Grecian origin has been extended to various other series of Hindu coins—and the only one (the Vardha series) which remained of a doubtful source, has recently been traced in a most satisfactory manner to the Sassanian coinage of Per- sia, as will hereafter be shewn. We may here correct an ignorant error into which we have fallen in describing the legend of Doctor Swryry’s coin of AcaTrHoctra—giving the epithet Qcorporn, as if derived from tpepw instead of tperw ; to this our at- tention has been called by several correspondents—and we there- fore thus conspicuously acknowledge our blunder. The true meaning of the epithet (written @cotperov though united to Bacthiccas) we conceive to be “ godly-dispositioned.” We must also caution our readers against implicitly adopting our version of the Bactro-Pehlevi character—for we are now in possession of the comparative ‘alphabet lithographed by M. Jacaorer, which differs in many respects from our system, grounding it upon the Syriac instead of the Zend.—Not having yet seen the author’s memoir on the subject, we are unable to make known his system, although we cannot doubt its supe- riority to our crude attempt. In fossil geology one immense step has been made this year, by the discovery of the remains of a quadrumanous animal, the nearest approach to the human being that has yet been found ina fossil state in company with the extinct monsters of primeval antiquity. This important addition has enriched the Dadupur museum; but no less interesting have been the addi- tions to its worthy rival the museum of Seharanpur. It is per- haps right to explain how it has happened that the papers of Lieuts. Baxer and Duranp have mostly appeared in the jour- nal, while those of Dr. Fatconrr and Captain CautTLry have graced the new volume of the Researches. ‘This selection was made from no difference in the relative value of these most interesting papers, but solely to accommodate best the draw- ings which accompanied them. We hope at some future period, to see the whole series collected together into a com- PREFACE. Xi plete and luxurious work on the fossil osteology of the Hima- layan range; but such an undertaking should await the explo- ration of the whole line, and should be made a national con- cern. At present the great fear is, lest the quantity of speci- mens dispersed in private collections on all sides, may deprive us of many fragments requisite to work out the forms of the curious new animals disinterred from this vast cemetery of the ancient world. We have partly redeemed our promise to our meteorological contributors: sufficiently so, we hope, to revive their exertions, and procure us a combined series of observations in different parts of India for the coming year, more extended than the comparative tables we have now published. We regret having been unable to supply Barometers to the numerous applicants who have volunteered to use them. The duty now levied on philosophical instruments, will tend still more to check their importation. Our readers will now readily excuse the absence of articles on the progress of the sciences in Europe, since that depart- ment has been zealously pursued by another periodical of ex- tensive circulation, in consequence partly of our neglect of it ; and a third rival has recently entered the field under promis- ing and powerful auspices. These have so fully made known many local inventions of scientific interest, that we have less regretted our inability to find space for their re-insertion. We would, on no account, however, wish to confine our pages to subjects more strictly Indian; on the contrary, we shall ever study to infuse into them a pleasing variety of original informa- tion on all subjects, of man’s performance or nature’s produc- tion, within the wide range prescribed to us by our allegiance to the Asiatic Society. justi oth te ° 2 pli f Cee old Sea b Iyer) Tf iy aoa: hattor fit Vi shear, { ant rok ‘ } a ~~ -igege 10 Laabies reese ns Gee MGS Peegee! + re : Ca ee via oat % a4 wh net, ‘syigisd Matersaly 4 i : it ee 1 ie d mo ® + r ‘ bei. ae id ' / bys A i an art on SI SS aaa en aiid ae eee “ie gp ¥ ‘ 4 are {5 ge ib ware vi ’ ; ; ¥ reso es 3 > Ee 1 Pe aed MVS a Lee "Ye PELL NN EGE. ~te fice LD AT, Yu te 4 ms i XO sit SFR daben tet Fie Re ed ow A She TE : i ; 4, ‘ ‘ ’ i « 4" Rath BRE, Vise Ob OPO tee + ' js \ pie q n ” sy) vee O¥R OW Pel ,TLQSAGLS Sats 4 proart ‘ ‘t nba Ai: aha) Thak Bo ac ad dia eg ROMY é re { t fa) PVG IL Ww -Tis : he ist) , i < F - e Py ; Ltd ati § } | etait ir i a bi’ f Mi x2! Le ites * ss eed > + a Al a 3 tig , > } i e 7 ™. —- » é zt Fe ap by - ~_— 7 Pie 6 . ‘ e ‘ F i ‘ 4) j f ¥ st yi MEMBERS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, 1836. [To whom the Journal is forwarded at the Society’s cost. The Right Honorable GrorGe, Lord AvucKLAND, Governor General of India, Patron. The Honorable Sir CHARLES THEOPHILUS METCALFE, Bart. K. C. B. Lieut.- Governor, Western Provinces. The Honorable Sir EnywarpD RYAN, Chief Justice, President, two copies. The Lord Bishop of Calcutta. The Honorable Colonel W. Morison. The Honorable T. B. MACAULAY. The Honorable Sir J. P. GRANT, Vice-President. The Honorable Sir B. MALKIN, Vice-President. The Honorable Sir Henry Fanet, Commander-in-Chief. The Rev. W. H. Miu, D. D. Principal of Bishop’s College, Vice-President. H. T. Prinsep, Esq. Vice-President. W. H. MacnaGuren, Esq. Vice-President. Ordinary Members Resident in India. Adam, W. Esq. Anbury, Col. Sir Thos. C. B. Engineers. Avdall, J. Esq. Bagshaw, R. J. Esq. Baillie, N. B. E. Esq. Baker, Lieut. W. E. Engineers. Bateman, Rev. J. Bell, J. Esq. Benson, W. H. Esq, Binny, C. Esq. Blundell, E. A. Esq. Briggs, Col. J. Bramley, Dr. M. J. Bruce, W. Esq. Burney, Col. H. , H. Esq. Bushby, G. A. Esq. Burnes, Lieut. A. Cameron, C. H. Esq. Caulfield, Lieut.-Col. J. Cautley, Capt. P. T. Colvin, J. R. Esq. , A. Esq. , Lieut.-Col. J. Engineers. Corbyn, F. Esq. Cunningham, Capt. A. Engineers. Dent, W. Esq. Dobbs, A. Esq. D’Oyly, Sir Charles, Bart. Drummond, Dr, A. Durand, Lieut. H. M. Engineers. Dwarkanath Tagore, Babu. Egerton, C. C. Esq. Ellis, Capt, E. S. Evans, Dr. George. _ Everest, Major G. ' Ewer, W. Esq. Falconer, Dr. H. Foley, Capt. W. [retired.] Forbes, Captain W. N. Engineers. Frith, R. J. Esq. Gordon, G. J. Esq. Grant, W. Esq. , J. P. Esq. Hare, D. Esq. Hodgson, B. H. Esq. Jackson, Dr. A. N, Langstaff, J. Esq. Lloyd, Capt. R. Loch, G. Esq. Low, Lieut.-Col. J. Macfarlan, D. Esq. Macleod, Capt. Macleod, J. M. Esq. Macqueen, Rev. J. McClintock, G. F. Esq. McClelland, Dr. J. Mansell, C. G. Esq. Manuk, M. Esq. Martin, C. R. Esq. , W. Esq. May, J. S. Esq. Melville, Honorable W. L. Mackenzie, W. Esq. Montriou, Lieut. C. Neave, J. Esq. Nott, Chas. Augustus, Esq. Pearson, Dr. J. Pemberton, Capt. R. B. Prinsep, C. R. Esq. , James, Sec. A. S. Phayre, Lieut. A. Qabir Uddin, Shah. Radhacaunt Deb, Babu. Ramcomul Sen, Babu. Ravenshaw, E. C. Esq. Russomoy Dutt, Babu. Ross, D. Esq. Sage, Capt. W. Seppings, J. M. Esq. Stacy, Lieut.-Col. L. R. Stocqueler, J. H. Esq. Strong, F. P. Esq. Stewart, Dr. D, Tahawur Jung, Nuwab. Taylor, Capt. E. G. , T. J. Esq. Thomason, J. Esq. Trevelyan, C. E. Esq. Trotter, J. Esq. , A. Esq. Tickell, Lt. S. Wade, Capt. C. M. Wilcox, Capt. J. R. Wallich, N. Esq. White, Capt. S. M. Walters, H. Esq. Associate Members, (Subscribers.) Brownlow, Piddington, H. Dean, E. Delhi Canal Dep. Dawe, W. ditto. Tregear, Vincent, Juanpore. SUBSCRIBERS, [Who are not Members of the Asiatic Society, 1836. ] The Honorable the Court of Directors, (by the Secretary to Government, Generai Department.) ONE COPY, Abbott, Lt. J. care of T. Ostell, Esq. Abercrombie, Lieut. W. Engrs. Messrs Watson and Co. Agra Bock Club, Agra. Allen, J. Esq. Calcutta. Anderson, G. M. Esq. Caleutta, Anderson, Lt. Seharunpur. Artillery Book Club, Dum-Dum. Bannister, Dr. W. Calcutta. Barlow, J. H. Esq. Contai. Batten, J. H. Esq. Almorah. Barrow, H. Esq. Calcutta. Beatson, Lieut.-Col. W. S. Calcutta. Beckett, J. O. Esq. Coel. Bedford, Capt. J. care of Lyalland Co. Calcutta. Bell, Dr. H. P. Calcutta. Bengal Club, ditto. Benares Book Club. Beresford, H. Esq. Purneah. Betts, C. Esq. Calcutta. Bird, R. M. Esq. Allahabad. Blake, Capt. B., care of A. Smith, Esq. Calcutta. , Lieut. M. T., 56th, Bancoorah. Boileau, Capt. J. T. Engineers, Bareilly. , Lieut, A. H. E. Engineers, G. T. S. Camp near Bancoorah. Book Club, 24th N. I. care of Mr. T. Ostell. Book Club, 13th Regt. care of ditto. Bonham, Capt. Arracan. Borradaile, H. Esq. Calcutta. Boulderson, H.S. Esq. Futtevghur. , S. M. Esq. Bareilly. Boutrous, F. Esq. Bridgman, J. H. Esq. Goruckpore. Brown, Capt. W. Seharanpur. , G. F. Esq. Juanpore. Brodie, Lieut. T. Assam. Browne, Lt. A. Meerut. Burkinyoung, Lt. Benares. Butter, Dr. D. Sultanpur, Oude. Byrn, W. Esq. Calcutta. Calcutta Periodical Book Society. Campbell, Dr. D. Mirzapur. ———, Dr. A. Nipal. , J. Esq. Cawnpore. , Dr. A. Moulmein. Carte, Dr. W. E. Hansi. Conolly, Lieut, E. B. care of T. Ostell, Calcutta. Conoylal Tagore, Babu, Calcutta. Cope, Gunner, Meerut. Cordier, Capt. Governor ofChandernagore. Cracroft, W. Esq. Dacca. Crawfurd, W. Esq. Banda. ——, J. Esq. Caleutta. Crommelin, Capt. A.Engrs.Barrackpore. Cunningham, Lt.J.D. Eng. Berhampore. Currie, F. Esq. Ghazipore. Curators of the Public Library, Calcutta. Chunar Book Club, care of T. Ostell, Esq. Calcutta. Cartwright, Capt. Agra. Davidson, Capt. J. E. Lucknow, Debudé, Capt. H. Engrs. Delhi. Dixon, Capt. C. G. Ajmere. Dorin, J. A. Esq. ditto. Douglas, H. Esq. Patna. Drummond, Capt. J. G. Allahabad. Dunlop, Lieut.-Col. W. Calcutta. Edgeworth, M. P. Esq. Ambala. Editor Calcutta Courier. Elliot, J. B. Esq. Patna. , H. M. Esq. Meerut. Erskine, D. Esq. Elambazar. Everest, Rev. R. Fagan, Lieut. G. H. Neemuch. , C. W. Esq. Seeonee, Jabbalpur. Fane, W. Esq. Allahabad. Fergusson, J. Esq. Calcutta. Fiddes, Col. T. Muttra. Finck, C. C. Finnis, Capt. J. Dinapore. Fisher, Lieut. T. Kachar. Fitzgerald, Capt. W. R. Engrs. Caleutta. Fordyce, Lieut. J. Goruckpore. Forster, Lieut. R. W. Shekawati. Fraser, H. Esq. Delhi. , A. Esq. ditto. , C. A. Esq. Futtehgurh. , T. S. Esq. care of Messrs. Lyall, Matheson and Co. Garden, Dr. A. Calcutta. Gerard, Capt. P. Subatoo. Gordon, R. Esq. Calcutta. Gorton, W. Esq. Benares. Grant, J. W. Esq. Calcutta. , Dr. J. ditto. Gray, E. Esq. Calcutta. Greenlaw, C. B. Esq. ditto. Gubbins, C. Esq. Delhi. Hamilton, H. C. Esq. Bhagulpore. Harding, Ben. Esq. Calcutta. Harris, F. Esq. ditto. Hart, T. B. Esq. 47th Regt. England. Harrington, Lieut. J. care of T. Ostel, Esq. SUBSCRIBERS. Hasted, G. Esq. Benares. Hearsty, Major J. B. Com. 2nd Local Horse, Sagur. Homfray, J. Esq. care of Messrs. Jessop and Co. Calcutta. Hone, Lieut. H. Secrole. Howrah Dock Company, Calcutta. Hutchinson, Major G. Engrs. ditto. Hutton, Lieut. T. Agra. Hugel, Baron, care of Messrs. Lyall, Matheson and Co. Hyderabad Book Society, Hyderabad. Heatly, S. G. Esq. Calcutta. Inglis, R. Esq. Calcutta. Irvine, Major A. Engrs. C. B. Calcutta. Jenkins, Capt. Francis, Assam. Jones, J. T. Esq. Bancock. Johnson, W. B. Esq. Patna. Kali Kissen, Maharaja, Bahadur, Cal. Kean, Dr. Arch. Moorshedabad. Kasipersaud Ghose, Babu, Calcutta. Kittoe, Lieut. Barrackpore. Kirkpatrick, W. Calcutta. Laing, J. W. Esq. Simlah. Lamb, Dr. Geo. Dacca. Lambert, W. Esq. Allahabad. Laughman, R. J. Esq. Dumow, Lindsay, Col. A. Dum-Dum. Liston, D. Goruckpore. Lloyd, Major W. A. Rungpore. Lowther, R. Esq. Allahabad. Lumsden, Capt. J. Futteyghur. Macdonald, Lieut. R. Sagur. Macdowall, W. Esq. Rungpore. MacGregor, Dr. W. L. Loodianah. Macleod, Col. D. Engrs. Caleutta. Macleod, D. F. Esq. Seeonee. Manson, Capt. J. Bittour. Marshall, Capt. G. T. Calcutta. Martin, Dr. J. Calcutta. Martin, Lieut. R. Engrs. Burdwan. Masters, W. Esq. Calcutta, Masson, C. care of C. E. Trevelyan, Esq. Mackay, Rev. W.S. Calcutta. Mackinnon, D.C. Allyghur. McCosh, Dr. J. Assam. Milner, Capt. E. T. care of Messrs. R C. Jenkins and Co, Military Board, Calcutta. Money, W. E. Esq Seharunpur. Moore, H. Esq. care of T. Ostell, Montgomery, Dr. W. Penang. Morley, C. Esq. Calcutta. Morris, G. J. Esq. Patna. Mouat, Lt. Sir J. A. Bt. Engrs.Caleutta. Muller, A. Esq. Calcutta. Murray, Capt. H. R. Noacolly. Mozafferpore Book Club, Tirhat, Millet, F. Esq. Calcutta. Military Library Society, Mhow. Mussooree Book Club. Mohun Lal, Munshi. Esq. xV Napier, Lieut. R. Engrs. Messrs. Cantor and Co. Nicolson, Capt. M. Jubbulpore. ———-_, S. Esq. Calcutta. Officers, 12th Regt. N. I. Kurnal. ———, 73rd N. I. Barrackpore. -————, 12th Regt. N. I. Allahabad. 22nd Regt. N.I. Nusseerabad, Oglander, Lieut.-Col. Ghazipore. Ommaney, Lieut. E. L. Engrs. Agra, - , M. C. Esq. Baitool, O’Shaughnessy, W. B., Prof. Med. Col. Calcutta. Parental Academic Institution, Calcutta. Parker, H. M. Esq. ditto, Persidh Narain Sing, Babu, Benares. Pigg, T. Esq. Calcutta. Playfair, Dr. Geo. Meerut. Poole, Col. C. ditto. Presgrave, Col. D. ditto. Prowett, N. H. E, Esq. Seharunpur. —_—. Rajkrishna Mukarjy, Hazareebagh. Ranken, Dr. J. Calcutta. Rattray, R. H. Esq. Calcutta, Renny, Lieut. T. Engrs, Camp near Si- tapore. Ross, Capt. B. Gwalior. Row, Dr. J. Barrackpore. Reid, Dr. A. Boolundshuhr. Sale, Lieut. T. H. Allahabad. Sanders, Capt. E. Engrs. Calcutta. Sandys, T. Esq. Patna, Satchwell, Capt. J. Agra. Saunders, J. O. B. Esq. Allyghur. Sevestre, Robt. Esq. Calcutta. Siddons, Lieut. Engrs. Chittagong. es at cee Esq. Calcutta, aw, 1. A. Esq. care of Messrs. B and Co, Calcutta, oe Sleeman, Capt. W. H. Jabbulpore. Sloane, W. Esq. Tirhoot. Smith, Col. T. P. Agra. , S. and Co. Calcutta. , Capt. E. J. Engrs, Allahabad. Smyth, Capt. W. H, Engrs. ditto. Speed, D. W. H. Esq. ditto. Spiers, A. Esq. care of Messrs. and Co. Spiers, Col. A. Ajmere. Spilsbury, Dr. G. G. Jabbulpore. Stainforth, F. Esq. Goruckpore. Stevenson, Dr. W. Lucknow. Stewart, — Esq. care of Messrs. Muller, Ritchie and Co. ¥ Stokes, Dr. J. Humeerpore. Swiney, Dr. J. Calcutta. Sylhet Light Infantry Book Club, Sylhet. Syttasharan Ghoshal, Calcutta, Stevenson, Dr. W. Malacca. Tandy, H. Esq. Agra Press, Thomas, E. T. Esq. Almorah. Thompson, Capt. G. Engrs. Hazaribagh ————, Capt. J, Engrs. Calcutta, Colvin XV1 Thoresby, Capt. C. Jeypore. Thornton, J. Esq. Azimghur. Tickell, Col. R. Engrs. Barrackpore. Trail, G. W. Esq. Kemaon. Tremenhere, Lieut. G. B. Engrs.Delhi. Trotter, R. Esq. Gyah. Turner, T. J. Esq. Futteyghur. Wdny, C. G. Esq. Calcutta. Warner, Capt. J. H. Bauleah. Waugh, Lieut. A.H. Engrs. Dehra Doon. SUBSCRIBERS. Wells, F. O. Esq. Allahabad. Western, Lieut. J. R. Engrs. Delhi. White, Rev. E. Cawnpore. Wilkinson, W. Esq. Pooree. , Capt. T. Hazaribagh. —, L. Esq. Assistant Resident; Bhopal. Wise, Dr. T, A. care of T. Ostell, Esq. —., J. P. Esq. Dacca. Wooburn, Dr. D. Sherghatty. Woollaston, M. W. Esq. Delhi. Subscribers at Bombay, &e. The Bombay Asiatie Society. Editor Bombay Literary Gaz. A. Burn, Esq. Assist. Surgeon, Akulcote. Capt. A. Burnes, Kutch. R. C. Chambers, Esq. Surat. Capt. Thos. Jervis, Engineers, Bombay. J.S. Law, Esq. Surat. Dr. J. McNeil, with the Persian Em- bassy, vii Bombay. J.J. Malvery, Esq. Bombay. C. Moorhead, Esq. Mahabaleshwur Hills. Dr. J. McLennan, Bombay. Capt. R. Mignan, ditto. Rugghonauth Hurry Chundjee, Bombay. Dr. Geo. Smytton, ditto. Lt. R. Shortrede, Poona. Shreecreestra Wassoodewjee, Chief Sez eretary’s Office, Bombay. Hon’ble J. Sutherland, ditto. Captain G. Twemlow, Arungabad. W. Wathen, Esq. Bombay. R. G. Noton, Esq. Bombay. Lieut. G. H. Hebbert. Colonel Pottinger, Kutch. Lieut. Fulljames, Gogo. Subscribers at Madras. Dr. Baikie, Neelgheries. Lieut. J. Braddock, Madras. Lieut. Balfour. R. Cole, Esq. Col. W. Cullen. Lieut, T. Ditmas. H.S. Fleming, Esq. J. M. Heath, Esq. Madras Club. Dr. Benza. Lieut. J. Campbell. J. Dalmahoy, Esq, Major Derville. Lieut.-Col. Frith. A. Gnaty, Esq. Rev. H. Harper. Lieut.-Col. Monteith, Engineers. J. Thomson, Esq. Capt. G. A. Underwood, Engrs. Col. J. S. Fraser. W. Gilchrist, Esq. Lieut. S. Macpherson. Dr. J. G. Malcolmson. J.C. Morris, Esq. Hon’ble W. Oliver. J. B. Pharoah, Esq. T. G. Taylor, Esq. H. C. Astronomer: Dr. J. Mouat, Bangalore. Subscribers in England. Lieut. J. S. Burt, Engineers. Sir Charles Grey. J. F. Royle, Esq. W. Saunders, Esq. G. Swinton, Esq. J. Stephenson, Esq. Subscribers in Ceylon. The Hon’ble G. Turnour. The Hon’ble Granville. The Kandy Library. Capt. Forbes. Rey. Mr. Clough. Periodical works with which the Journal is interchanged. Prof. Jameson’s Edinburgh Journal of Science. The Philosophical Magazine. The Metropolitan. Chinese Repository. Asiatic Journal of London. Monthly Journal, edited by S. Smith and Co. Calcutta. United Service Journal, ditto by J. H. Stocqueler, Esq. Literary Journal of the Madras Asiatic Society. Calcutta Christion Observer. The Journal of the Philadelphia Natural History Society. The Journal is circulated to all learned Societies entitled to receive a copy of the Asiatic Society’s Researches. CONTENTS. No. 49.—JANUARY. Page I.—Second Memoir on the Ancient Coins found at Beghrdm, in the Kohistan of Kabul. By Charles Masson, oc bc Aan | II.— Quotations from original Sanscrit. authorities in brent and illustration of Mr. Hodgson’s sketch of Buddhism, 2 ee III.—Sivatherium Giganteum, a new Fossil Wiadelve Genus, from the Valley of the Markanda, in the Sivalik branch of the Sub-Himaélayan Mountains. By Hugh Falconer, M. D., Superintendent Botanical Garden, Sehdranpur, and Captain P. T. Catiey Superintendent Doab Canal, me 36 1V.—Horary Observations of the Barometer, Thermometer, and Wet- bulb Thermometer, made at Calcutta on the 21st and 22nd of December, 1835, by Mr. H. Barrow, Astr. and Math, Inst.-maker to the H. C. ee 51 V.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, an ate ie Be VI -—Meteorological Register, de -» 60 No. 50. _FEBRUARY.. I.—Account of Rumbdéwe, one of the States in the interior of Malacca. By Lieut. T. J. Newbold, 23rd Regt. Madras Native Infantry, 5e wa GY IJ.— Quotations from Original Sanscrit Authorities in proof and illustration of Mr. Hodgson’s Sketch of Buddhism, : e2 ae Some yh IJI.—Notes explanatory of a Collection of Gedlogical Specimens from the country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. By J. G. Malcolmson, Assist- ant Surgeon, Madras Establishment, Pl. V. as 96 IV.—Description of a New Species of Columba. By B. H. Hiedecbu Bisa Resident in Népal, 2% “- oe ae ah 122 V.— Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, ae ar se -. 124 VI.—Meteorological Register, a at ay 5c Jo. 126 No. 51.—MARCH. I.—Memoir of the Life and Writings of St. Nierses Clajensis, surnamed the Graceful, Pontiff of Armenia. By Johannes Avdall, ave -- 129 II.—Discovery of Buddhist Images with Deva-nagari Inscriptions at Tagoung, the Ancient Capital of the Burmese Empire. By Colonel H. Burney, Re- sident at Ava, 3 - nts -- 157 I1I.—On the preparation of Opium ia the China market : gritten't in March 1835, and then communicated to the Benares and Behdr Agencies. By D. Butter, M. D., Surgeon 63rd B. N. I., late Opium Examiner of the Benares Agency, J 5A 165 1V.—Catalogue of a Second Collection of Fossil Bones presented to the reas Society’s Museum, by Colonel Colvin, 179 V.—Notice of a Visit to the Valley of Cashmir in 1836. By the ey adel 184 VI.—Note on an Inscription at Bamién. By Mr. C. Masson, 53 -. 188 VII.—Proceeding of the Asiatic Society, fc ae see 159 VIII.—Meteorological Register, AK de cin wan 192 XVIll CONTENTS. Page No. 52.—APRIL. I.—Account of the Mountain Tribes on the extreme N.E. Frontier of Bengal. By J. McCosh, Civil Assistant Surgeon, Goalp4ra, . 193 IIl.—On the method employed to remove the Vaulted Roof x St. Peter's Church in Fort William, illustrated by a Section, (Plate V.) ze 2208 IlI.—Statistical, Agricultural, and Revenue Return of Muthra District, made up to 1st October, 1835. By Capt. R. Wroughton, Rev. Surveyor, -. 216 IV.—Notes on the State of the Arts of Cotton Spinning, Weaving, Printing, and Dyeing in Nepal. By Dr. A. Campbell, attached to the Residency, .. 219 V.—Summary Description of some New Species of Falconide. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. ae > os oe ie +. 227 VI.—Synoptical Description of eis New Animals, enumerated in the Catalogue of Nipalese Mammals. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. . 231 VII.—Note on the occasional existence of fresh-water on the surface of the ocean. By Mr. C. Brownlow, i ae 239 VIII.—Note on the Cervus Duvaucelii of Bavicr!. ¢ or +h Elaphoides and Bah- raiya of Hodgson, ee . sts +. 240 IX.—Horary Observations of the Barometer, Tieng ounce, and Wet-bulb Thermometer, made at Calcutta on the 21st and 22nd of March, 1836. By Mr. H. Barrow, H.C. Mathematical Instrument-maker, ae +. 243 X.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, se ae i e+ 245 XI.—Miscellaneous :— 1.—Postscript to the Account of the Wild Goat of Nepél, printed in the Sept. No. of the Journal, page 490. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. 73 | 254 2.—Notice of the Basilosaurus, a new marine fossil Saurian, ‘discovered in America. By H. Piddington, Esq. “5 s 5: ats SE 3.—The Balloon, a de ae so aie oe 255 XII.—Meteorological Register, au a. <- he e- 256 No. 53.—MAY. I.—Johdéle and its former Dependencies of Jompdédle Gominchi. By Lieut. J. F. Newbold, A. D. C. to Brigadier General Wilson, C. B. GS . 257 IJ.—Interpretation of the Tibetan Inscription on a Bhotian Banner, aces in Assam, and presented to the Asiatic Society by Captain Bogle. By M. Alexander Csoma Korés. [See Pl. VI. fig. 3.] - » 264 IiI.—Note on some of the Indo-Scythic Coins found by Mr. C. Mave at Beghrdém, in the Kohistan of Kébul. By Johannes Avdall, Esq. M.A. S. 266 IV.—Notes on the Geology, &c. of the Country in the Neighbourhood of Maulamyeng (vulg. Moulmein). By Capt. W. Foley, a +. 269 V.—On the Revolution of the Seasons. By the Rev. R. Everest, 56 saree ys) | VI.—Recent Discovery of Fossil Bones in Perim Island, in the Cambay Gulph. By Baron Hugel and Mr. Geo. Fulljames, -. 288 VII.—Vable of Sub-Himalayan Fossil Genera, in the Didier Collection. By Lieuts. W. EB. Baker and H. M. Durand, Engineers, -- 291 VIII.—Note on the Teeth of the Mastodon a dents etroites of the Siwélik Hills. By Captain P. T. Cautley, Pl. XI. se at 904 IX.—Meteorological Register kept at Bangalore. By Dr. J. Mouat, Medical Surgeon, 13th Dragoons, Ge = -- . 296 X.— Meteorological Observations taken every hour, at Bangalore, in the Bigs pital of H. M. 13th Dragoons, from 6 A. M. of the 21st to 6 Pp. M. of the 22nd March, 1836, inclusive, in conformity with Sir W. Herschel’s in- structions. By the same, are ae oe e- 298 CONTENTS. xix Page XI.—Horary Observations taken at DAddpur, in conformity with Sir John Herschel’s Circular. By Col. Colvin, Lieut. Baker, and Lieut. Durand, Engineers, : ee on oe ne ». 299 XII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, . 302 XI1I.—Address read before the Bombay Branch of the Royal reece SOeiRey, on the 27th January, 1836. By the Rev. John Wilson, President, -. 304 XIV.—Miscellaneous :— 1.—On the Canis Vulpes montana, or Hill Fox. By J. T. Pearson, Asst. Surg., Cur. Mus. As. Soc. ae fe ce 313 2.—On the Soil suitable for Cotton, wobAcUe seo and the Tea ita By H. Piddington, ae Jip . we -. 314 3.—Action of Copper on Ink, sc 50 50 Bue 4,—Suspension Bridge at Fribourg in Swithenand: Ac ss XV.—Meteorological Register, oe ee as ee -. 320 No. 54.—JUNE. I.--Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities, with an attempt to fix the dates of the appearance of the last four ; being those of the Maha Bhadra Kalpa, (or Present Age.) By Captain J. Forbes, H. M. 78th Highlanders, fat ele se a eal IJ.—Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. By Johannes Avdall, Esq., M. A. S. a no os oe +. 331 III1.—Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions, ra 58 . 340 1V.—Descriptive Catalogue of Terrestrial and Fluviatile Testacea, chiefly ffm the North-east Frontier of Bengal. By W. H. Benson, Esq. B.C. 5S. .. 350 V.—Description of two new species belonging to a new form of the Meruline Group of Birds, with indication of their generic character. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. Resident in Nepal, off as Gosectets] ViI.—On a New Genus of the Meropide. By the same, cc -. 360 VII.—On a New Piscatory Genus of the Strigine Family. By the same, -. 362 ViII.—Report of the Society of Arts on Specimens of Rice, Wool, &c. from Nepal and Assam, cE On a -» 365 IX.—Proceedings of the Asiatic ‘Santetag ae a 44 -- 369 X.—Meteorological Register, Bs fa 5c ve °. 376 No. 55.—JULY. I.—Translation of a Tamba Patra, which was found in a field of the village of Piplianagar in the Shujdlpur Pargané by a Krisén engaged in ploughing, and presented to Mr. L. Wilkinson, the Political Agent at Bhopal by the Jagirdaér, Se 377 II.—Note on the white satin sinlvolderdd: Scarfs of the Tibetan Priests. By Major T. H. A. Lloyd. Witha translation of the motto on the margin of one presented to the Asiatic Society. By Alex. Csoma KoGrdsi, «. 39a II1.—Note on the origin of the Armenian Era, and the reformation of the Haican Kalendar. By Johannes Avdall, Esq. M. A. S. 46 384 1V.—Conjectures on the march of Alexander. By M. Court, ancien éleve a Vécole militaire de St. Cyr. Sa Bly V.—Experimental Researches on the Hetreseious of the Wet- bulb Hygro- meter. By James Prinsep, F. R. S. Sec. As. Soc. -- 396 VI.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, va es -. 433 VII,— Miscellaneous, aie +. 439 VIII.—Meteorological Revister: oe e+ 440 XX CONTENTS. Page No. 56.—AU GUST. I.—Extracts from the Mohit (the Ocean), a Turkish work on Navigation, in the Indian Seas. Translated and communicated by Joseph Von Ham- mer, Baron Purgstall, Aulic Counsellor, and Professor of Oriental Lan- guages at Vienna, Hon. Memb. As. Soc. &c. &c.. o. 441 {1.—Extracts translated from a Memoir on a Map of Eeshavar a the coun- try comprised between the Indus and the Hydaspes, the Peucelaotis and Taxila of ancient geography. By M. A. Court, in the service of Maha- réja Ranjit Singh, oy oe Be -. 468 1II.—Facsimiles of Ancient Inaevintiames Wibasmaphen, by James Prinsep, Sec. &c. oe ae : 482 1V.—Sub-Himélayan Fossil Remains of the. DédGpur ‘Colleehan By Tews. W. E. Baker and H. M, Durand, Engineers, sie Be -. 486 V.—Note on the States of Pérak, Srimenanti, and other States in the Malay Peninsula. By T. J. Newbold, Lieut., A. D, C. to Brigadier General Wilson, C. B. ote : a a5 SS =s 905 V1I.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Sevier or ee = -. 509 VII.—Meteorological Register, c oe ac oe +. 520 No. 57. _SEPTEMBER, I.—Examination of some points of Buddhist Chronology. By the Hon. George Turnour, Ceylon Civil Service, : ey HF -. §21 1].—Third Memoir on the ancient Coins Fistor at the site called Begh- ram in the Kohistan of K4bul. By Mr. Charles Masson, ote SCY III.—New varieties of Bactrian Coins, engraved as Plate XXXV. from Mr. Masson’s Drawings and other sources. By James Prinsep, Sec. . 548 {V.—Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions, lithographed by Jas. Prinsep, Sec. &c. &c. ae oe ae S05 -. 554 V.—Sketch of the State of Maar, Malay Beniisale By T. J. Newbold, Lieut., A. D. C. to Brigadier General Wilson, C. B. ie -. 561 VI.—Note on the discovery of a relic of Grecian Sculpture in Upper India. By Lieut.-Col. L. R. Stacy. Plate XXXI. Au s: 7. 907 VII.—Description of some Grasses which form part of the Vegetation in the Jheels of the District of Sylhet. By William Griffith, Esq. Assistant Surgeon, Madras Establishment, c s Oi TO VIII.—Notes on Delhi Point, Pulo-Tinghie, ee and on some Pelagic Fossil remains, found in the rocks of Pulo-Lédah. By Wm. Bland, Esq. Sur- geon, H. M. S. Wolf, ve : ° «. 575 1X.—Fossil Remains of the smaller Caron from the Sub- Himalayas. By Lieut. W. E. Baker and Lieut. H. M. Durand, Engineers, os «- 579 X.—Continuation of a Paper (Journal, May, 1835), on the Heights of the Barometer as affected by the position of the Moon. By the Rey. R. Everest, oo se os is e- 585 XI.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Sosiety, ae dc ac e- 587 XII.—Meteorological Register, o6 SC se e» 600 No. 58. — OCTOBER. I.—An account of some of the Petty States lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces ; drawn up from the Journals and Reports of D. Richardson, Esq., Surgeon to the Commissioner of the Tenasserim provinces. By E. A. Blundell, Esq. Commissioner, c = ae -- 601 II.—Outline of Political and Commercial Relations with the Native States on the Eastern and Western Coasts, Malay Peninsula. By T. J. Newbold, Lieut., A. D. C. to Brigadier General Wilson, C. B. -» 626 CONTENTS. Xxi1 Page III.—A brief account of Masid, known by the name of Farid Shakarganj, or Shakarbér. By Munshi Mohan Ll, so =- 635 IV.—New varieties of the Mithraic or Indo-Scythic Series of Gone and their imitations. By James Prinsep, Sec. As. Soc. &c. de ac -» 639 V.—Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions, lithographed by James Prin- sep, Secretary As. Soc. &c. Ax ; -. 657 VI.—Sub-Himalayan Fossil Remains of the DAddipur Collection, rs Lieuts. W. E. Baker and H. M. Durand, Engineers, ae - 661 VII.—Note on the occurrence of Volcanic Scoria in the ‘Senthiers Peninsula. By Lieut. J. T, Newbold, A. D. C. ae 5 -. 670 VIII.—Postscript to the account of Ursitaxus, panked 3 in the 19th Vol. of Researches As. Soc. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. = Js -. 671 IX.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, : oe aa OZ X.—A General Statement of the Labors and Brneeedines of the Expedition to the Euphrates, under the command of eset Chesney, Royal Ar- tillery, F. R.S. 42 Ae ae de sb -. 675 XI.—The Governor General’s Conversazioné, as A oe 682 X1II.—Meteorological Register, ae sik O8 -. 684 No. 59. _NOVEMBER. F I.—Notice of the Vallabhi dynasty of Saurashtra ; extracted from the Bud- dhist records of the Chinese. By M. Eugene Jacquet, Member of the As. Soc. of Paris, ate 6 ahs -» 685 II.—An account of some of the Petty States lying arch ‘of the meneaetin Provinces ; drawn up from the Journals and Reports of D. Richardson, Esq., Surgeon to the Commissioner of the Tenasserim Provinces, By E. A. Blundell, Esq., Commissioner, a6 -. 688 III.—Notes on the Antiquities of Bamian. By C. saa aaons be 407 IV.—New types of Bactrian and Indo-Scythic Coins, engraved as Plate XLIX. By James Prinsep, Sec. &c. o ws - «- 720 V.—Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions, Webeeraphed: By James Prinsep, Sec. &c. ae . - . e- 724 VI.—Some remarks on the development of Pollen. By William Grit, As- sistant Surgeon, Madras Establishment, ue SRV EY! VII.—Sub-HimAélayan Fossil Remains of the Dadipur Collection. By Lieuts. W. E. Baker and H. M. Durand, Engineers, . 739 VIII.—Descriptive Catalogue of a collection of Land and Preah water Shells, chiefly contained in the Museum of the Asiatic Society. By W. H. Benson, Esq. B.C. S. ar a ws sc Sc -» 741 IX.—Note on Zoological Sénidindute? By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. soy viEM X.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, <° o. 60 e» 753 XI.—Meteorological Register, 55 56 on aoO No. 60. DECEMBER. I.—Geological Notes on the Northern Conkan, and a small portion of Guze- rat and Kattywar. By Charles Lush, M. D. c 3 =) LOL 1I.—Note on Mastodons of the Sewaliks. By Capt. P. 7. Gauiley. Superin- tendent of the Doab Canal. Pl. XL. Ae Basie 1 III.—Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. By B. H. Sandgions Esq. 1.—Indication of a new Genus of Insessorial Birds, ne oO 2.—Indication of a new Genus of Waders, belonging to the piaitaniatic Family, a ee oe are aha 3.—Indication of a new Genus of the Falconide, oh Be) aE xxl CONTENTS. Page 4.—Indication of a new Genus of the Picide, with description of the type. A new species, also, of two new species of the Genus Sins Seer fwle) 5.—New species of Hirundinide, a5 Ped to 1V.—Description of the Shell and Animal of Nematenes a new Genus of Mollusca, inhabiting situations subject to alternations of fresh and brack- ish water. By W. H. Benson, Esq. B. C. S. : -. 781 V.—Note on the Genus Pterocyclos of Mr. Benson and So deauilonas of Mr. Pearson. By Dr. William Bland, 5G ago lee VI.—Note on the Nautical Instruments of the hegbe. By James Prinsep, Sec. 754 VII.—Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions, lithographed. By ditto, .. «- 795 VII1.—Description of Uch-Sharif. By Munshi Mohan Lal. Be -- 796 IX.—Specimens of the Soil and Salt from the Samar, or Sambhur lake salt- works. Collected by Lieut. Arthur ronen and analyzed by Mr. J. Stephenson, : : ae Toe X.—Remarks ona scilention of Pianal made at t Sadiya, Upper nseae, from April to September, 1836. By William Griffith, Assistant Surgeon, Madras Establishment, on duty in Upper Assam, Si vise OOO XI.—Note on a Remnant of the Hun Nation. [Vide Chap. 26 of ‘the ‘« Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire’’ under the head of ‘ Original Seat of the Huns.’’] By Captain W. Foley, = ao Sls XII.—Table shewing the breadth of the river - Satlaj sae the oe of its current at different stages, from Harrike Pattan to its junction with the Indus at Mithankot, oe <0, Oe XIII.—A Comparative view of the daily range slot the Baswbeeon in i dittaent parts of India. By James Prinsep, Sec. As. Soc. &c. . os O16 XIV.—Postscript to the Memoir on the Depr ession of the Wet- bulb Thermo- meter published in the July number. By the same, .. ae -. 828 XV.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, se ae ae ete XVI.—Meteorological Register, Se a <¢ -. 836 ERRATA. In the Journal for May, 1834, page 253, for ‘ 58°’ read ‘ minus 58°.’ In the No. for Dec. 1835, page 655 et. seq. the title of the Usbeck chief is print- ed WaAugG, instead of Wana, or —S3),. The term is rendered by the Missiona- ries regulus, and is perhaps equivalent to Raja under the Mughal governments. In the same volume, page 615, for ‘ Zenophon’ read ‘ Xenophon.’ Page 30 line 2 of note, for ‘ preferred,’ read ‘ postponed.’ (et passim) for ‘ Sangata,’ read ‘ Saugata.’ Page 30 line 3 of note, insert ‘ this’ before ‘ appears.’ ”? » dl 9, 32 » 34 », 36 pra ” 42 ” 44 9 47 ”? 57 ee ” 49 yy 72 ate: » 49 ” 79 oe 80 7) OO x. 80 An. ats he (els! Se LOW og LOE », 170 3) 172 pa IAs) TRLAG au vO + LAD », 196 Sire 13 299 3, 200 Me es 9, 202 5, 204 i a » 204 a ae > 264 ” 99 265 ” 9 for ‘ exotic,’ read ‘ the exotic origin of Buddhism.’ 18 for ‘ Boddhi,’ read ‘ Bodhi.’ 8 for ‘ Sraxaka,’ read ‘ Sravaka.’ 6 of note, for ‘ E. G. Elplinstone,’ read ‘ e. g. Elphinstone.’ 29 for ‘ shells,’ read ‘ cells.’ 21 erase ‘ on’ after the semi-colon. 44 for ‘ palatial,’ read ‘ palatine.’ 27 for ‘ this,’ read ‘ these.’ 48 for ‘ in vertical plates,’ read ‘ into vertical plates.’ 1 for ‘ insymmetrical,’ read ‘ unsymmetrical.’ 23 for ‘ circle,’ read ‘ arch.’ 6 for ‘as,’ read ‘ so.’ 4 from bottom, in note, for end, read ‘ ens.’ 1 of note, dele the brackets. 23 after ‘ percipient powers,’ add the words, ‘ the Karmika tenets amount to idealism.’ 4 from bottom, for ‘ Bauddhy,’ read.‘ Bauddha.’ 15 jor ‘ existence,’ read ‘ assistance.’ 26 for ‘ by,’ read ‘ but.’ 3 of the note, put the stop defore the word Sutra. 1 and 3 of the note, for ‘ Dharmadya,’ read ‘ Dharmodya.’ Col. Burney’s notice of Tagoung, for ‘ being,’ read ‘ building.’ 10 for ‘ tiers,’ read ‘ tears.’ 32 for ‘ obstructed,’ read ‘ abstracted.’ 37 and elsewhere, for ‘ venous,’ read ‘ vinous.’ 35 for ‘ mass,’ read ‘ mare,’ 9 foot note, ditto ditto. 19 for ‘ extraction,’ read ‘ extractive.’ 1 for ‘ paséwa, converted,’ read ‘ paséwa-converted.’ 12 for ‘ same,’ read ‘ Lama.’ 13 for ‘ Bis Bisa,’ read ‘ Bisa.’ 14 omit cut. 29 for ‘ lines,’ read ‘ Hills.’ 36 for ‘ Busa,’ read ‘ Bisa,’ (in all.) 18 for ‘ country,’ read province.’ 33 jor ‘ the spirit,’ read ‘ that spirit.’ 34 for ‘ Bennet,’ read ‘ Burnett.’ 11 for ‘ stones,’ read ‘ stone.’ — for ‘ Off,’ read ‘ out.’ 1 for 5 read Bs 3. NONSAN VANS eh 3 Q4 4 HL QL foo zy 1 Bh ke “a an 12 @& @& ° 13 leave out the word a z At the bottom for Bu read 43° Y i XXIV ERRATA. Page 265 line 11, of the Tibetan text for khed, read khyed. », 228 ,, 3 from below, for ‘ speculated’ read ‘ operculated.’ », 235 5, 19 insert the full stop (now after only) after ‘ presume.’ », 443 ,, 31 insert ‘ at’ before ‘ Cape Guarda fui.’ St) », 32 for ‘inch’ read ‘ inches.’ », 391 ,, 11 from bottom, for ‘ satures,’ read ‘ sutures.’ 3, 3093 ,, 18 ditto, for ‘ Hylvoides,’ read ‘ Styloides.’ » — 9», & ditto, for ‘ confortissime,’ read ‘ confertissime.’ », 304 ,, 19 from top, for ‘ malassan,’ read ‘ Malayan.’ » — » 3» from bottom, for ‘ Gangetica,’ read ‘ faciata.’ », 900 ,, 7 from top, for « ditto,’ read ‘ ditto.’ 3 — ,, 22 ditto, for ‘ instructis,’ read ‘ instructa.” —— 5, 356 ,, 5 ditto, (and in note,) for ‘ tabular,’ read ‘ tubular.’ % ——- 9, 23 ditto, for ‘ operation,’ read ‘ operculum.’ » 3097 ,, 2 from bottom, after sinus, insert to form a closed circle, the horns. 1» —- 5, 6 ditto, (note,) for ‘ Pesticia,’ read ‘ Justicia.’ », 398 ,, 2 from top, for ‘ tabular,’ read ‘ tubular.’ » —— 4, 13 ditto, for ‘ Demarara,’ read ‘ Demerara.’ » 418 ,, 8 after about, insert 27. 30 », 420 in heading of lower table, for increment d+ rs d, read 30 dx —d. £ 0 30 » 421 ,, 2 for simply, d — read simply, d — Pp »» In heading of lower table, under Barometer supply p. 424 line 3 for ‘ of wet-bulb,’ read ‘ of the wet-bulb thermometer.’ » 721 ,, 13 for ‘the god-nourisher,’ read ‘ the heavenly-minded,’ and cancel the subsequent remarks. » 723 ,, 24 for ‘ General Arnold,’ read ‘ Dr. Gerard.’ Capt. CunnincGHam having pointed out that the pin the legend of the Sa- mudra-gupta coin described in Vol. iv. p. 635, as dpati rurha, has an r sub- joined; we have again sought in the dictionary for a better explanation of the epithet and have found it in the word wyfqcy: apratiratha, * the warrior.’ Page 742 line 14 from top, for ‘ behind,’ read ‘ beyond.’ », 744 ,, 1 from bottom, for ‘ Butta,’ read ‘ Bulla.’ » 748 ,, 7 from bottom, for ‘ spora,’ read ‘ spira.’ < - ipa igh 5 from do., jor ‘ ingrescente,’ read ‘ nigrescente.’ et » 750 ,, 19 from top, for ‘ salcis,’ read ‘ sulcis,’ and for ‘ vinls, read * binis.’ » — » 7 from bottom, for ‘ carino,’ read ‘ carina,’ and for ‘ com- presso,’ read ‘ compressa.’ LIST OF PLATES Page Prare I. Sivatherium Giganteum, folded,..cncvercencercricensssrcrre 48 IJ. III. IV. Masson’s Bactrian Coins and Symbols,.cvvewcnne 24 V. Geology of Hyderabad, mwrnnwarnnoneecereccercare pieseenen OT WT? Section of Sti Peter's Chut chy ses cancion cierctgeenannnvecna: 198 VI. (bis) Buddhist image from Tagoung, XC. -0-esenenrcercere 241 VII. Nisaétus Nipalensis, 1 -anccmncasnrseserenercecrcsracerenreececere sees 227 VIII. Geology of Moulmein, ..--meacesenne palace ter eine b ee saasncere aches 280 IX. Facsimile of inscriptions at Chunar and Kemaon, ~....~. 342 X. Ditto of inscriptions at Wara and Moulmein, ~~. -.00« 340 XI. Mastodon Angustidens, folded, woeweornrernacncecrcerceercences ~ 296 XII. Large Map of Taxila, folded, ~.-rsencnue cE nha 469 XIII. (Caret.) XIV. Diurnal motion of the Barometer, win rnncrnsenenrncrrrrnene ~~ $16 XV. XVI. XVII. XVIII. XIX. Fossil Rhinoceros of the Sine BDA WY CS cee a og caer re ov ne eng evar anevers rentesacseresaane emacs GOL XX. Buddhist sculpture from the Panjab, +0. ccvccenerrenccerence 482 XXI. Curves of maximum Depression, ..rcrccewarcenrenensencenee 408 XXII. depression under varying pressure, 0.0. we ALL DROLET, VOssia PLOCONa) ree cicntentcnerscrneecncnncnecdee Sec er ne esas noc 572 Pee Zizamia- and Potamochloa, onc ncccnancenncsecoccowverssoreniecceccce sacs 570 XXV. (Caret.) MORV 1. Cultrumenis Plavipess cierececcrnces xeomcaninan nvancimonnsncnrsccsen: 264 XXVI. Seal from Asirgarh—Bronze head, cnc nnmecnvsererecerensere 486 XXVII. Fossil Carnivora of the Sub-Himélayas, nrc varevvacce 580 XXVIII. XXIX. Ceylon inscriptions, 20. cccmeonmeveen 554 and 556 XXX. Tridents in Garhwal with inscriptions, ~rcmeeernwenvence 486 XXXI. Inscription at Buddha Gaya, 0. srmcsseeaecenenansvecece Pecemeeese OOF XXXII. Bhitari inscription (will appear in Vol. VI.) XXXIII, Inscription in Asiatic Society’s museum, w..scnwenncccsee 124 XXXIV. Seoni inscription, two plates, ~ crerean raccene ve Soentonms Sion TOG XXXIV. Fossil Sus of Sub-Himélayas, on rcvanmncnncevenervcerrcencee 661 XXXV. (bis) Miscellaneous Bactrian Coins, ~worccrvewnnnccecene 548 XXXVI. Statue of Silenus, ....22--~~ eer ee neat nnceteceen OCT XXXVI. (bis) Connection of Mithraic with Hindu Coins, ...W.... 639 PEM VALE. CaniGuy CONS; iccpncencnrmacaronenansnas Se eee ape care Ae sanrrateroneconces sa GAD PIPER LX, SOcond Series CONTINUED 5 once nccccnncaceannosorcoseccsevorercersesrcevoceceee GOA XL. Fossil Mastodons of Siwaliks, «0 .nwsnrwenecace coventar wecesonneua E61 ALI. Map of Richardson’s route, .ccnceversevsewercocorensvenesecetenscore 605 XLII. (Caret.) XLIII. Development of Pollen, folded, w.ssccsomsersecceccerervcen sevevoe, 138 XXVi XLIV. XLIV. XLV. XLVI. XLVI. XLVIII. XLIX. LIST OF PLATES, Names of Places dn: Burm@se, * cm ncvesccciniansnmecenonecsmrentnte. (bis) Teeth of fossil Sus, 2 snccera ntieetaierncevinrateniewetoeee nrerarases (Caret.) Bactirian “Couns so cock ca sed nt cena neces Fossil Quadrumana of Sub-Himdlayas, vc crccerersearecorce Arabic Nautetal sonst imi Gints, 6 cccsiecoteccecee sins psincing cocoa acnaneeteegs IVT ea iwi PA oR gen ec tc ct nce ec oar ome fe hes Page . 601 664 720 740 784 794 Owing to the continual postponement of papers this year, and to the lithographer having numbered his plates without reference to the engrav- ings, many numbers have been given twice over, and the whole occur very irregularly. They will be found, however, correctly placed in the monthly numbers, with exception of Cultrunguis flavipes, which must be shifted to page 364—and of the plate circulated with the February Jour- nal which belongs to the preceding volume, Pl, LIV., along with the cor- rected catalogue of plates of that volume. JOURNAL OF Poe ASL ATIC SOCTE TY. No. 49.—January, 1836. I.—Second Memoir on the Ancient Coins found at Beghram, in the Kohistdn of Kabul. By Cuarres Masson. I had the pleasure last year to submit a Memoir on the coins dis- covered at Beghram, and now beg to offer a second, containing the results of my collection of the present year from the same place: the observations which these coins suggest I shall preface by a few remarks, tending to illustrate the locality of the spot where they are found, as well as some other points connected with it. I shall also submit, in this Memoir, the results of discoveries in other places, made during the year, so far as they refer to numismatolo- gy; in the hope to contribute to farther elucidation of the history of the countries from which I write. 1 The dasht or plain of Beghrdm bears N. 15 E. from the modern city of Kabul, distant by computation eighteen ordinary kos; and as the line of road has few sinuosities or deflections, the direct distance may probably be about twenty-five British miles. It is situated at the south- east point of the level country of the Kohistdn, in an angle formed by the approach of a lofty and extensive mountain range, radiating from the superior line of the Caucasus on the one side, and by the inferior range of Sidh Koh on the other. The former range separates the Kohistdn from the populous valley of Nijrow, and the latter, commencing about 15 miles east of Kabul, gradually sinks into the plain of Beghrdm. East of the Sidh Koh is a hilly, not mountainous, tract, called Koh Safi, which intervenes between it and the extensive valleys of Taghow. Through the open space extending from west to east, between these two hill ranges, flows the river formed by the junction of the streams of B 2 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. [Jan. Ghorband and Panjshir, and which forms the northern boundary of the site of Beghrédm. Through this space also leads the high road from the Kohistan to Nijrow, Taghow, Laghmdn, and Jeldlabid. The dasht of Beghrdm is comprised in an extensive district of the Kohistan called Khwojeh Keddrt ; to the north, the plain has an abrupt descent into the cultivated lands and pastures of the Baltéi Khele and Karindat Khan Khele families, which at the north-western point interpose between it and the river for the extent of perhaps a mile, or until the river leaves the base of a singular eminence called Abdullah Burj, which from the vast mounds on its summit was undoubtedly an appurtenance of the ancient city. East of this eminence another small space of cultivated lands, with two or three castles, called Karahfché, interposes between a curvature in the direction of the abrupt boundary of the dasAt, and the direct course of the river; east of K«rdhtchi rises a low detached hill, called Koh Butcher, which has an extent eastward of about a mile and half, intruding for that distance between the level dasht and the river ; at the eastern extremity of Aoh Butcher is one of those remarkable structures we call topes. Parallel to Koh Butcher, on the opposite side of the river, are the castles and cultivated lands called Muhammad Rakhi, and beyond them a sterile sandy tract gradually ascending to a celebrat- ed hill and Zedrat, named Khwojeh Raig Rawdn, and thence to the superior hill range before mentioned ; east of Koh Butcher, the level plain extends for about a mile, until the same character of abrupt termina- tion sinks it into the low lands of Julghar, where we find numerous castles, much cultivated land, and as the name Ju/ghar implies, a large extent of chaman or pasture. The lands of Jilghar, to the east, from the boundary of the dasht of Beghrdm, to the south, its boundary may be considered the stream called the river of Koh Damdn, which after flowing along the eastern portion of Koh Damidn, and receiving what may be spared after the irrigation of the lands from the streams of Shakr Darrah, Beydak, Tugah, Istalif, &c. falls into the joint river of Gharband and Panjshir at a point below Jilghar. Beyond the river of Koh Daman, a barren sandy soil ascends to the skirts to the Siah Koh and Koh Saft. Among the topographical features of the dasht of Beghram may be noted three small black hills or eminences, detached from each other, which in a line, and contiguous to each other, arise from the surface of the soil a little north of the river of Koh Damdn. To the west of Beghrdm are the level lands of Mahighir ; at the north west angle of the plain is the small village of Killah Boland, where reside about seven Hindi traders, some of them men of large capitals; and at the south-west angle are three castles called Killah Yezbashi, distant from Killah Boland about four miles. From Killah Boland to Jiilghar a. 1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 3 distance occurs of four and half to five miles; from Jiilghar to the skirts of the Sidh Koh, about six miles; from the termination of Koh Siah to Killah Yezbashi may be also about six miles, and from Killah Vezbashi to Killah Boland about four miles, as just noted. The whole of the intermediate space between these points, and even beyond them to the south-east and south-west, is covered with fragments of pottery, lumps of dross iron, &c. and here are found the coins, seals, rings, &c. which so much excite our curiosity. Notwithstanding the vast numbers of such reliques discovered on this extent of plain, we have hardly any other evidence that a city once stood on it, so complete and universal has been the destruction of its buildings. But in many places, we may discover, on digging about the depth of a yard, lines of cement, which seem to denote the outlines of structures, and their apartments; on the edge of the plain, where it abruptly sinks into the low lands of Balti Khele, from Killah Boland to Karahicht, is a line of artificial mounds; on the summit of the eminence called Abdullah Burj are also some extraordinary mounds, as before noted, and contiguous to the south is a large square described by alike surprising mounds; on one side of this square, the last year, a portion sank or subsided, and disclosed that these mounds were formed or constructed of huge unburnt bricks, two spans square and one span in thickness. This circumstance also enabled me to ascertain that the original breadth of these stupendous walls, for such we must conclude them to have been, could not have been less than sixty feet; probably much more. Among the mounds near Killah Boland is a large tumulus, probably a sepulchre, which appears to have been coated with thin squares of white marble; and near it, in a hollow formed in the soil, is a large square stone, which the Muhammedans call Sang-Rustam, or the stone of Rustam, and which the Hindis, without knowing why, reverence so far as to pay occasional visits to it, light lamps, and daub it with Sindiir or red lead. In the Muhammedan burial ground of Killah Boland is a fragment of sculptured green stone, made to serve as the head-stone to a grave; about four feet thereof is above ground, and we were told as much more was concealed below ; this is a relique of the ancient city, and we meet with another larger but plain green stone, applied to a similar purpose, in a burial ground called Shahidan, or the place of martyrs, under Koh Butcher. In a Zearat at Chartkir is also a fragment of sculptured green stone ; and it is remarkable that all the fragments of stone which we discover, and which we may suppose to have reference to the ancient city, are of the same species of colored stone. The traditions of the country assert the city of Beghrdm to have been overwhelmed by some natural catas- trophe, and while we vouch not for the fact, the entire demolition of the B 2 4 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. (JAN. place, with the fact of the outlines of buildings discoverable beneath the surface, seem not to discountenance the tradition. It is not however improbable that this city, like many others, may owe its destruction to the implacable rage of the barbarous and ruthless Geneuiz, who like Arriza described himself as the “ Ghazb Khudd,” or ‘‘Scourge of God.” That it existed for some time after the Muhammedan invasion of these countries is evidenced by the numerous coins of the Caliphs found on its site. That it ceased to exist at the period of Trmvu’r’s expedition into India, we have negative proof furnished by his historian SHerirupDIN, who informs us, that Timu’r, in his progress from Anderab to Kabul, encamped on the plain of Baran (the modern Bayan, certainly) and that while there, he directed a canal to be cut, which was called Mahighir, by which means, the country, before desolate and unproductive, became fertile and full of gardens. The lands thus restored to cultivation, the conqueror apportion- ed among sundry of his followers. The canal of Mahighir exists at this day, with the same name it received in the time of Trmv’r. A considerable village, about one mile west of Beghrdm, hasasimilar appellation. This canal, derived from the river of Ghorband, at the point where it issues from the hills into the level country, irrigates the lands of Bdydn and Mahi- ghir, and has a course of about ten miles. Had the city of Beghram then existed, these lands immediately to the west of it, would not have been waste and neglected, neither would Trmv’r have found it necessary to cut his canal, as the city when existing must have been supplied with water from the same source, that is, from the river of Ghorband ; and from the same point, that is, at its exit from the hills into the level country; and the canals supplying the city must have been directed through these very lands of Bdydn and Mahighir, which Timv’r found waste and desolate. The courres of the ancient canals of Beghram are now very evident, from the parallel lines of embankments still to be traced. The site of Beghram has, to the north, the river formed by the junction of the Ghorband and Panjshir streams, and to the south, the river of Koh Daman; but neither of these rivers are applicable to the irrigation of the circumjacent soil, the former flowing in low lands, perhaps one hundred and fifty feet below the level of the plain, and the latter scantily furnished with water flowing in a sunken bed. It may be farther noted, with reference to Timvu’r’s colonization of Mahi- ghtr, that the habitants of the district of Khwojeh Keddri, while for- getful as to whom their forefathers owed their settlement in this country, acknowledge their Turki descent, and alone of all the inhabi- tants of the Kohistan speak the Turki language. We might expect to detect a notice of Beghram in the Arabian records of the early caliphs, in the histories of the Ghaznavi emperors, and in those of GmneuHiz Kuan. 1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 5 That Beghrdm was once a capital city is evidenced by its fope, a sepulchral monument of departed royalty; while a second, situated in Tope Darah, about nine miles west, may probably be referred to it, as may perhaps a third found at Alisah/, at the gorge of the valley of Nijrow, distant about 12 miles east. The appellation Beghrdm must also be considered indicative of the pre-eminence of the city it characterizes ; undoubtedly signifying the chief city or metropolis. About three miles east of Kabul, we have a village and extensive pasture retaining this name, which indicates the site of the capital in which Kappuis and his lineage ruled, and whose topes we behold on the skirts of the neighbouring hills. Near Jeldldbdd, a spot called Beghram, about a mile and half west of the present town, denotes the site of the ancient Nysa; or, if the position of that city admit of controversy, of Nagara; its successor in rank and consequence. Near Peshdwar we have a spot called Beghrdm, pointing out the site of the original city; and that this epithet of emi- nence and distinction was continued, up to a recent date, to the city of Peshdwer, we learn from Ba’ser and Asut Fazu. We have indications in the Kohistan of Kdbul of two etlier ancient cities, which were undoubtedly considerable ones, but which we cannot suppose to have rivalled Beghrim in extent or importance. The principal of these is found in Perwan, about eight miles N. 19 W. of Beghram, and consequently that distance nearer to the grand range of Caucasus, under whose inferior hills it is in fact situated. The second is found at Korahtass, alittle east of the famed hill, and Zedrat Khwojeh, Raig Ruwan, distant from Beghrém about six miles N. 48 E. There are also many other spots in various parts of the Kohistan which exhibit sufficient evidences of their ancient population and importance; but these must be considered to have been towns, not cities. In the valley of Panjshir we have more considerable indications, and we are enabled to identify three very extensive sites of ancient cities; but which, from the character of the country, and the limited extent of its resources, we can hardly suppose to have flourished at the same epoch. In the Koh Daman of Kabul, or the country intervening between that city and the Kohistan, we discover two very important sites, which unquestionably refer to once capital cities: both occur in a direct line from Beghram to Kabul, under the low hill ranges which bound Koh Daman to the east, and contiguously also east to the river of Koh Daman ; the first com- mences about eight miles from Beghrdm, and is known by the name of Tartrung-Zar; the second is about the same distance farther on, and has no particular name, but is east of the seignorial castles of Luchi Khan, and the village of Korinder: at this site we find a tope, an indubitable evidence of royalty, and connected with it is a stupendous 6 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrdm. [Jawn. artificial mound on the west bank of the river, constructed with elaborate care: the base appears originally to have been surrounded with a magni- ficent trench, supplied by the stream with water. Here no doubt was some important structure, a palace or citadel. At this day the summit is crowned with dilapidated mud walls of modern construction, and the spot is known by the name of Killah Rajput. In the district of Ghor- band, west of the great hill range, which radiating from the Hindi Kosh, or Caucasus, forms the western boundary of Koh Damdn, we have very many important vestiges of antiquity, both in the principal valley and in its dependencies, particularly in one of them named Fendékistan: we have reasons to believe that coins are found there in considerable numbers, and that there are some interesting mounds; but as we have not seen this spot, we refrain from speculating upon its character. We have thus enumerated the principal ancient sites of cities in Koh Damdn and Kohistan, both as shewing the former importance and illustrating the capabilities of these fine countries, and as exhibiting the fluctuations, in ancient times, of the seat of royalty in them. Beghram, Perwan, Tartrung-Zar, and Killah Rajput have no doubt in succession been the abodes of sovereigns, as have most probably Panjshér and Korahtass. Our minuteness may moreover be excused, because in this part of the country we expect to detect the site of Alexandria ad Caucasum, or ad calcem Caucasi. It may be remarked, with reference to the sites of Beghram and Perwdn, that the former is called by the Hindis of the country ‘ Balram,’ and is asserted by them to have been the residence of Raja Bat; the latter they call Milwdn, and assert to have been the capital of Raja Minwan. Muitwan may bea Hindu appellation, but it has been also assumed by Muhammedans. We have it not in our power to consult the ancient authorities, who have noticed Alexandria ad Caucasum, or probably its site might have been definitely fixed; but when we know that it was also called Nauldbi or Nilabi, from being situated on or near the river Nauldbi or Nildb, we have no difficulty in seeking for its position, being acquainted with the geographical features of this part of Asia. The name Niladi could only have been conferred on the river of Ghorband, or on that of Panjshir, or to both, after their confluence; in the latter event, we are brought to the site of Beghram without the chance of error. The rivers of Ghor- band and Panjshir unite at a spot called Tokchi, bearing north a little west of Beghram, distant about a mile and half or two miles, and near the place called Inchdér, which is inserted in the map accompanying the Honorable Mr. Expuinstone’s work. JInchor is a solitary castle, pic- turesquely seated amid a large extent of fine chaman or pasture land. From its source the river of Ghorband, which is also that of Bamian, 1836. ] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. a has a greater extent of course than that of Panjshir ; but the latter is the more considerable stream. Atthe point where the river of Panjshir issues from the hills into the level country of the Kohistdn, is a spot now called Nildb; also at the very site of Beghram after its union with the Ghorband river, the united stream has the same name, in both instances derived from the great depth of the water, and its consequent limpid and blue appearance. In the valley of Ghorband is a spot called Nilad, which now by some contradiction is conferred upon the land adjacent to the river, and not upon the river itself. I incline to consider the river of Ghorband to be the Niladi of our ancient authors, and if it be found that the Nauldbi of Protemy, Straso, or Puiny, the writers who have probably mentioned it, be conducted by Drapsaca or Drashtoca, which may be concluded to be the modern Bamian, we can have no doubt of the fact, and the merit of being considered the site of Alexan- dria ad Caucasum, or ad calcem Caucasi, can only be contested by two sites, that of Nilad, in the valley of Ghorband, and that of Beghram. Near Nilab, in Ghorband, we find the remains of a most stupendous fortress; but however valuable as a military post, it does not seem calculated to have been the site of a large city. Beghram, on the contrary, possesses every advantage of situation, and would in these days, if revived, bid fairer to realize its pristine prosperity, than any other site in these coun- tries. With the term Alexandria ad calcem Caucasi, the situation of Nildb would precisely agree, and we learn also that the city so called was near the cave of PrometnEus. This appears to have been justly located by Wirorp, near the pass of Shibr ; and we find at Ferinjal, a dependency of Ghorband, between it and Bamian, or near Shibr, a most extraordinary cave, which we would fain believe to be that of Promsz- THEUS. With the term Alexandria ad Caucasum, the site of Beghrdm would sufficiently coincide ; while its distance from the cave of Ferinjal, or that of PromETHEUS, is not so great as to violate propriety in its being termed contiguous, while its propinquity to the base of Hindu Kosh, or Caucasus, would seem to justify its being entitled Alexandria ad calcem Caucast. That ALEXANDER established not merely a military post, but founded a large city, we ascertain, when we learn from Curttus, that he peopled it with no less then seven thousand menials of his army, besides a number, of course considerable, but not mentioned, of his military followers, and are distinctly informed, that the city in question became a large and flourishing one. No doubt, if this part of Asia were to come under European control, the re-edification of Beghram would be deemed a necessary measure, for a considerable city at this spot would not only provide for the due submission of the half-obedient 8 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. [Jan. tribes of the Kohistdn, but would secure the allegiance of those abso- lutely in rebellion or independence, as of Panjshir, Nijrow, Taghow, &c. It is impossible to cast a retrospective view over the regions of Afghd- nistan and Turkistan, to behold the cities still in existence, and the sites of such as have yielded to the vicissitudes of fortune, which owe and owed their foundation to ALEXANDER THE GREAT, without paying the tribute of homage and admiration to his genius and foresight. Above twenty centuries have elapsed, since the hero of Macedon marched in his triumphant career from the shores of the Bosphorus to the banks of the Hyphasis, subjecting the intermediate nations, but rendering his conquests legitimate, by promoting the civilization and prosperity of the vanquished. A premature death permitted not posterity to wonder at the prodigy of an universal monarchy, which he alone of all mankind seemed talented to have erected and maintained. No conqueror had ever views so magnificent and enlightened, and none ever left behind him so many evidences of his fame. Of the numerous cities which he founded, many are at this day the capitals of the countries where they are found; and many of those no longer existing would assuredly be revived, were these parts of Asia under a government desirous to effect their amelioration. The selection of Mittun by the British Government of India for their mart on the Indus, while the most eligible spot that could have been chosen, was also a tribute of respect to the memory of the illustrious ALEXANDER; for there can be no doubt that Mittun indicates the site of the Alexandria that he founded at the junction of the united streams of the Panjdb with the Indus, and which he predicted, from the advantages of position, would become a large and flourishing city. It may be that Mzttun under British auspices may realize the prophecy applied by the hero to his Alexandria. To return from this digression to the question of the site of Alexandria ad Caucasum or ad calcem Caucasi, we can only refer it to two spots, Ni/db in Ghorband, and Beghrdém : \ incline to prefer the latter, from the superiority of its local advantages, and from the certainty of its having been a large and flourishing city, as Alexandria is represented to have become. In favor of Nilab may perhaps be adduced the itinerary of Diognrrxs and Baton, the surveying officers of ALEXANDER, as preserved by.PLiny. We there find the measured distance from the capital of Arachosia to Ortospanum stated to be 250 miles, and from Ortospanum to Alexandria, 50 miles. The capital of Arachosia was unquestionably in the vicinity of the modern Kdndahar, and Ortospanum, although by some considered Ghazni, may safely be referred to Kébul, when we find in Protemy that it was also called Cabura, the first approximation to the present name 1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 9 Kabul, which we detect in our ancient geographers. The distance between the modern cities of Kabul and Kandahar, agreeably to admea- surements made under the Chaghatai Emperors of India, is ninety-two Jeribi koss, or nearly 210 British miles; the miles of Puiny are no doubt Roman ones, which were, I believe, a little less than our British statute ones: this slight difference will not however compensate for the excess in the distance fixed by ALEXANDER’s officers; but there are reasons to suspect that the ancient capital of Arachosia was situated some eighteen or twenty miles west of the modern Kandahar, at the base of a hill called Panchvahi, where traditions affirm a large city once flourished, and of which there is abundant proof in the huge mounds to be observed there. The ancient city of Kabul, which I infer to have been Ortospanum, was seated also some three or four miles east of the modern one; the distances here gained, with the difference between British and Roman miles on two hundred and fifty of the latter, (if they be, as above assumed, less,) will reconcile the measurements of the officers of ALEXANDER with those of the Chaghatai Emperors, and we can have little doubt but that Ortospanum is represented by the present Kabul. From Kabul to Beghrdm, the distance is not certainly more than twenty-seven British miles; but from Kabul to Nilab of Ghorband, the distance is nearly, if not fully, fifty miles, coinciding with the account of Diognerrs and Baron. It may however be observed, that different copies of Purny have in this instance various numbers, so that we feel perplexed to select the genuine ones; fifty I believe to be the least mentioned, and I have calculated with it, supposing it the more probable one. The same itinerary gives the distance between Alexandria ad Caucasum and Peucalaotis, stated to be 227 Roman miles: this latter place has generally been located near the modern Peshawar ; from Kdbul to Peshawar are estimated 112 ordinary koss, which, calculated at one mile and half each, yield nearly 170 miles, Beghrdm will be nearly equidistant from Peshawar with Kdbul, therefore the distance noted in the itinerary will coincide rather with the locality of Niléb, which may be about 30 British miles from Beghrdm, and ~ consequently 200 or more British miles from Peshdwar, equivalent perhaps to 227 Roman miles. But I do not feel confident that Peucalaotis has been justly referred to the site of Peshawar. It appears to have been the name of a province, the capital of which was Peucela; in these terms we detect a considerable affinity to the modern appellation Puekoli, applied toa district with capital of the same name east of the Indus, and above Attock, which in ancient times included a considerable territory west of the Indus. It is not certain that ALEXANDER visited the immediate vicinity of Peshdwar, although Hzeruzstion will have done c 10 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. (Jan. so; and it is probable that he crossed the Indus above Attock, or at a point in the modern district of Puekoli, perhaps the ancient Peucolaotis. A similarity of denomination may not always be depended upon, but when combined with other accordances, it becomes, as D’ANVILLE expresses it, ‘“‘ un moyen de convenance.’”’ I shall close my specu- lations on the site of Beghram, by remarking, that ALEXANDER in his march from Bactra to Alexandria ad Caucasum will have arrived at it by the route of Bamidn and Shibr, because ARRIAN informs us, that he passed Drapsaca on the road, which can hardly be mistaken for the former of those places. ALEXANDER crossed the Hindi Kosh or Cauca- sus in the month of May; when, supposing the seasons and climate of these countries to have been the same as at present, any other route over that mountain range was impracticable. The route from Bamidn to Ghorband is passable to kdfilas at all seasons of the year, and is no doubt the high road; but it has been closed during the last twenty-five years, by the insurrection of the Shaikh Ali Hazdrehs, who inhabit the small extent of country between Ghorband and Shibr. The route of Bamidn will have conducted ALEXANDER either to Nildb or Beghram; and these observations would have been unnecessary, had it not been supposed by some that his starting place was Anderdb: this assumption does not however seem warranted, and if grounded on the route that Timv’R followed, it should have been recollected that the Tartar conqueror crossed the Indian Caucasus in the month of July. It had been my intention this year to have secured every coin of every description that should be picked up from the dusht of Beghriim, and this purpose would probably have been effected, had I not been compelled to be absent at Jeldldbdd. A young man was however despatched thither, with recommendatory letters to my friends in the Kohistdn, and to him was confided the collection of all he might be able to procure. On my eventually reaching Kaddul, the young man joined with 1320 coins, from the appearance of which it was evident he had selected, and not, as ordered, taken all that were offered. It also appeared, that in consequence of the distracted political state of the Kohistdn in the spring, the Afghdn pastoral families had not as usual visited the plains of Beghram at an early season. In the autumn, more- over, from apprehensions of a rising in this part of the country, the Afghans sent their flocks to the Saf? hills, the persons tending which are the principal finders of these coins. Under these unfavorable circumstances, I twice repaired to Beghram, and at various intervals despatched my young men, and the total result of our collection this year was five silver and 1900 copper coins. These are of course generally 1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 11 of the same description and types as those illustrated in my Memoir of last year; but a few were procured of novel types, and a few altogether new, among which one or two may be deemed valuable. It is my object in this Memoir to detail these fresh discoveries, and to offer such remarks upon them, and the topics they involve, as may arise upon their consi- deration. My stay at Jelulabdd was, during the season of the year, unfavorable for the collection of coins; yet, independently of those extracted from topes, were procured 248 copper coins, among which two or three are novel ones, to be noted in their place. Subsequent to my arrival in Kabul, I purchased in the bazar there, six golden, 176 silver, and 142 copper coins: some of these are important? ones. I had also the fortune to secure a large parcel of silver Bactrians, a deposit discovered in the Hazdrehjat: among these are coins of a type likely to excite some interest. The coins extracted from the various topes opened this year, may also be deemed interesting, from the positive connection they have with the monuments enclosing them ; and valuable, from their superior pre- servation, having in many instances been inserted new; and presenting specimens as perfect and intelligible as we may hope to procure. I shall observe in this Memoir nearly the order adopted in my preceding one, with reference to classification and the succession of series, making however such modifications and distinctions as further discoveries seem to warrant. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. Class, Grecian Series, No. 1.—Coins of the recorded Kings of Bactria. As during the last year, we are without any evidence of THropotus I. and Tuxoportus II., the two first Bactrian kings ; and that their sway was confined to Bactriana proper, or the regions north of the Indian Caucasus, is confirmed by the non-discovery of their coins at Beghrdm. This fact can scarcely be doubted, when we have historical evidence, that a distinct and powerful kingdom existed, under SopHaGasENus, in the Paropamisan range, at the time of the expedition of ANtiocuus Maenus. This year has yielded five copper coins of Eutuypemus, the third Bactrian king; one was procured at Jeldlubdd; the four others from Beghram: their discovery seems to prove the extension of this monarch’s rule south of the Caucasus—a fact countenanced by probability, and the slight historical evidences we have of him. The solitary coin found at Jelélabad does not afford proof positive that Eurnyprmus governed there also, both because there is no certainty where coins purchased in bazars were produced; and it is not impossible but that it may have found its way there from Beghram, as the Afghan shepherds, resident on its plain during the summer, migrate to Lughman and the vicinity of Jeldlddud, 2 i2 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. (Jan. during the winter ; and the few coins they may bring with them, they disperse among the dealers in the small towns, as their trifling wants of oil, tobacco, &c. mayinducethem. Evuruypsmus being denominated of Magnesia, it may be questioned, in what manner he ascended the Bactrian throne, whether by the right of lawful succession, or of success- ful usurpation. At all events, he appears to have been a sovereign of great talents, worthy of his exalted rank. Of ArozLopotus, besides a large number of copper coins, we have this year procured five silver quadrangular coins, the type varying from those already known. ® Of the celebrated ManANDER, this season has afforded us some copper coins of novel types, and a large number of silver drachmas and hemi- drachmas, presenting alike some varieties in the types: we found not one of this prince’s coins at Jelaldbéd, where we indeed met with two of ApoLLovotus, but decline to draw inferences from solitary specimens. When we consider the coincidences observable on the coins of Mewnanper and Aro..opotus, some of which have even the same figures on the reverses with the resemblance of their features; and when we find them conjointly commemorated by Arrian and Troeus, the only two ancient authors who have recorded the latter’s name, we feel every inclination to conjecture that the ties of consanguinity must have connected them. As APpoLLopoTus is previously named by both these authorities, he may be supposed to have been the father, or perhaps elder brother, of MenanpER; and that he preceded the latter in sove- reignty would seem nearly certain, being borne out by every circum- stance attending the coins we discover. That the reigns of both these princes was of considerable duration is evidenced by the numerous coins we find, and by the variety of types they exhibit, proving them to have been struck at different periods. The busts of Aro.tuopotus on the two or three coins hitherto found, which exhibit them, have an extremely youthful appearance; and the portraits of Menanper display the transition from youth to manhood. That ApoLLtopotrus reigned in Bactriana proper, we doubt with Bayer, although his pretensions have been advocated by Colonel Top. That he was the son of Eurnypremus, we think certain, and that he was the father or elder brother of MEnan- DER, we think probable, and assuredly his predecessor; that he governed in the provinces south of Bactriana is certam, and there, according to the suggestions of ScuiEGEL, I incline to locate his original kingdom and that of Mzenanper; that this kingdom may have included some of the provinces of Bactriana Latior, or the regions immediately north of the Caucasus, is very probable, and would justify its monarchs’ being styled kings of Bactria by their historians. How far this kingdom 1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 13 extended eastward, we may not be able now to determine; but the non-discovery of the coins of ApotLoporus at Jelalabdd (holding two or three specimens procured from bazars, but found no one knows where, no exception to the remark) seems to prove that in his time an independent power must have existed there: this receives farther proof when we meet not there with the coins of his successor MenanpeEr, which abound so numerously at Beghrém. As ApouLoporus certainly invaded India, we may suppose him, without prejudice to the kingdom of Nysa, to have marched by the route of Khouram, Banna, and Multdn to the Hyphasis, on exactly the same route that was followed by Timvu/R; and in corroboration thereof, we find him brought to the Hyphasis, where he re-edified the city of Sangdla under the name of Huthydemia. There can be little doubt but that Sangdla owed its revival to APoLLODOTUS. That it sprang into new consideration under the auspices of a son of EvuTHYDEMUS, can scarcely be questioned, and every circumstance seems to point out that son to have been Apottopotus. The coin discovered by Dr. Swiney, which bears the epithet Philopater, not a little confirms this fact. Mrnanper, whether the son or brother of AroLLopotus, seems fairly entitled to be considered his successor. This prince followed up the Indian conquests, while he preserved his dominion in the provinces south of Bactriana; but these latter, on his decease, probably will have been assumed by Evcrartipss the I., or the Great, king of Bactriana proper. Mrnanper, we know, was interrupted in his warlike operation by death; but when, and where, is not recorded by history, which has been alike faithless to the actions of one of the most illustrious sove- reigns that ever held a sceptre. The coins of Eucratipes [., so numerously found at Beghrim, are not to be discovered at Jelélébéd any more than those of ApoLLopotus and MENANDER, considering always a single specimen no evidence that coins of that species were once current there, but rather that they were not: this circumstance farther substantiates the existence of an inde- pendent monarchy at Nysa, and that it was sufficiently powerful to maintain its integrity inviolate; for Eucratiprs was no doubt a warlike and ambitious prince. Before adverting farther to Evcraripes, we may be excused in offering two or three observations as to Demerrrivs, a recorded son of EvurnypeEmus, and employed by him in his negociations with ANTIocHUS. If he stand simply recorded as a son, it neither proves that he was the elder son, although probable, or, that he was the only son. As it was probably by his means that Euvruypremus subverted the kingdom of Gas, in the Paropamisan range—an event which could not have occurred until the close of the reign of EuraypEmus; as SOPHAGASENUS, the father 14 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. [Jan. of Gas, was his cotemporary at the period of the expedition of Anrti- OcHUS, we may suppose that Demerrius retained the sovereignty of the countries he conquered, and extended his conquests in Arachosia, now thrown open to his arms. Accordingly, in a route of Istporus of Charox the name of a city, Demetrias of Arachosia, occurs, which would seem referred with justice by ScHLEGEL to the son of Eurny- peMus, and which points out the direction of his empire. Without power of reference to the route of Isrporus, in which the name Deme- trias occurs, we may observe, should it be found in any of those from the western provinces, as Ariana, &c. to the eastern ones on the Indus, we should incline to place it in the valley of the Turnek, between Kandahér and Mokur, in the country now inhabited by the Thoki Gulzyes, where we have evidences that a powerful capital once existed, which may have been that of Demerrius. The attack of Demetrius, or his son, of the same name, upon EvucratipEs may have arisen from the irksomeness naturally to be felt at the vicinity of a powerful and ambitious prince, who, by the extension of his empire, had sufficiently evinced his desire of aggrandizement. History, which records Demzrrivus as the aggressor in this war, also records that Evcratipss had possessed himself of Ariana, and we find that he was also master of the regions south of the Indian Caucasus, thus pressing upon the confines of Arachosia at the two extreme points of east and west. Aggression on the point of Demetrius may therefore have been a measure of necessity, or even of prudence, it being certainly more politic to aggress than to be reduced to repel aggression. It has not been our fortune to meet with a coin of Demetrius, or to be acquainted with the type of that procured by Baron Myenporrr at Bokhara; but unless the reverse be decidedly Bactrian, a bust adorned with the skin of an elephant would not be sufficient evidence, in our estimation, to allow its appropriation to the son of EurHypEmus. Thave a letter from M. Martin Honicsercer, from Bokhdra, by which I learn that he has also procured there a coin of Demerrius, but he has not described its character. It may be noted that these two coins of Demetrius, the only ones, we believe, hitherto discovered*, have been elicited at Bokhdrd. Among the coins obtained by M. HoniepercEr at. Bokhdrd, and which he thought worthy of enumeration, probably as being both Greek and silver ones, are transcribed in his memorandum, 1 Vasileos Antiochu. 1 Vasileos Dimitriu. 1 Vasileos Megalu Hiokraksu. 3 Vasileos Euthidimu. 5 Eucratides. * Thereisa beautiful little Demetriusin the Venturacollection; see vol 1V.—Ep. 1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 15 As Demetrius did not succeed his father in Bactriana proper, and reasons may be alledged for suspecting that ApoLLoporus also did not, the question naturally arises, to whom are we to assign the empire of Bactriana in the interval between the demise of Eurnyprmvs and the accession of EvcratipEs—a space of fourteen years according to the table of Scutecet. I have mentioned the discovery of a parcel of Bactrian drachmas and hemi-drachmas in the Hazdrehjdt, which we purchased from a Hindi at Charrukar, who some three years since re- ceived them from a Hazaureh. I have not yet been able to ascer- tain the spot, or under what circumstances these coins were found. The parcel, 120 in number, comprised seven quadrangular silver coins of ApoLLoporus, 108 silver coins of Mrenanpemr, and five silver coins of AnTrmacuus. The day preceding that on which this parcel of coins came into my possession, I received from the dushts of Beghrdm, a silver coin of the same last-named prince, Anrimacuus. The beauty of the coins of Anrimacuus, the excellence of their execution and designs, with the purity of the Greek characters of the legend, allow us not to place this prince subsequent to Eucratiprs, whose coins in these particulars they surpass. Among 5000 or more copper coms, procured from the dasht of Beghrdm, we have not discover- ed one of AnTIMAcHUS, and the detection of a single silver coin does not seem to afford evidence that he ruled there, when the absence of his copper coins seem to prove that he did not. Where then must he be placed? We feel the inclination to conjecture him to have been the son and successor of Eurnypgemus in Bactriana proper. The reverses on the coins of ApoLLopotus and Mrenanner are not strictly Bactrian, or in relative connection with those we discover on those of the undoubted kings of Bactriana, Eurnypemusand Evcratipss; the horseman in charge on the reverses of those of ANTIMACcHUs is So, and forms the link between the horse at speed on the coins of Eurayprmus, and the two horsemen in charge on those of Evcratipes. The monograms on the coins of ANTIMACHUS coincide with some on the coins of MzenanpeEr, and if we can suppose them to be numerical ones (which however I affirm not to be certain) suggest the opinion that they were cotemporaneous princes, it bemg possible both were deduced from a common era. We feel perplexed when we are only allowed by the table of ScuurcEL, an interval of fourteen years, and when we have three princes who may claim to have reigned between EvrnHypremus and EucratipEs ; it may however be suspected that the accession to sovereignty of the latter, unless historically fixed, is antedated ten years. No one of the very many coins of this prince we meet with, presents a monogram clearly nume- rical, which yields a higher number than 85; while the highest number 16 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrdém. (Jan. found is 108, as preserved on the silver didrachma in the Earl of Pem- BROKE’s cabinet, noted by PinkERTON and indicating the close of his reign. Neither do the features of EucraTipEs, as preserved on his coins, exhibit the striking variation of youth to manhood observed on those of MENANDER, and do not authorize us to allow so long a reign as 35 years. I incline to date his accession at the epoch 84, of the Bactrian era, and to fix the duration of his reign to 25 years: thus gaining between it and the demise of Evrnyprmus an interval of twenty-four years; but even this increased interval does not suffice for the reigns of ApotLopotus, Mz- NANDER, and ANTimacHuS. ‘Those of the two former, particularly of MENANDER, were certainly of some duration, as evidenced by their numerous coims of various types discovered. Apoxtiopotus, from the youthful bust displayed on his coins, may be inferred to have died young ; but Menanper, we think, must be allowed to have attained mature manhood, or the age of forty to forty-five years: while his numerous coins, shewing the traits of extreme youth, seem to attest his accession to sovereignty at an early period of his life, and consequently confirm the length of his reign. Many of the coins of both these princes have alphabetical monograms, which, if accepted as numeral ones, may assist us in our conjectures. Onthe copper coins of Menanper we find HA or 81, which can only refer to the Bactrian era. On the silver coin found by Colonel Top, we find Ia or 14, which can only refer to his individual reign. HB or 82 is also found on the coins of Menanner, which brings us nearly to the number indicated by HE or 85, the lowest number to be found on the coins of Eucratipes. That this prince succeeded Mzn- ANDER in the government of the countries immediately south of the Caucasus appears unquestionable; but it was most likely by forcible assumption : for had he been the lawful successor of MenanpeER, he was not of a character to have relinquished his Indian possessions, where it would appear almost certain he did not reign: these observations are necessary, because the adoption of a monogram by MEenanper, which may be supposed to indicate the Bactrian era, might induce an opinion that he was the predecessor of Eucratipzs in Bactriana proper; while other circumstances we have noted seem to prove that he was not, independently of the ambiguous nature of the monograms themselves. The age depicted on the busts of APpoLLoportus, and on those of the early coins of MENANDER, seem so nearly to agree, that while we would fain consider the latter as the successor of the former, we can scarcely suppose him the son, and our alternative is to conjecture him the bro- ther. If Msenanper be admitted to have reigned in Bactria, we fancy ApoLLopotvus must be also; and it may be granted that their joint reigns might conveniently fill the interval between EutHypemus and Evcra- 1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrdm. 17 TivEs of twenty-four years, if our calculation thereof be conceded; but when we find the principal scenes of the military operations of these princes were in India, joined with other circumstances, as well as the dis- covery of the coins of ANTIMAcuHus, the probability appears to be that they ruled originally, as before advanced, in the regions immediately north and south of the Indian Caucasus. Euruypsmus, a monarch of great capacity, would appear to have been fortunate in his sons, (possibly by various mothers, for polygamy was a vice, according to Currtus, that the Greeks adopted from the barbarians,) by whose means he extended his territories, and greatly increased the dignity of the Bactrian empire. It may be supposed that he apportioned his empire amongst his sons, allowing them te retain the countries they had individually subjected: thus we may account for the kingdom of Demerrius in Arachosia; for that of ApotLopotus and Mrenanper in Bactriana Latior and the regions south of the Caucasus ; and we may perhaps be allowed to consider ANTI- mMAcHus as the eldest son and successor of his father in Bactriana proper. . That this distribution of power was agreeable to the parties concerned, we may conjecture, when, in absence of direct information, there are grounds for belief that no war originated between them. The epoch of ANTIMACHUS cannot, we suspect, were only the excellence of his coins adduced, be dated posterior to that of Eucratipus; after whose death, the knowledge of Grecian arts and sciences may naturally be supposed to have declined: indeed the copper coins of Eucraripxs himself, although a powerful monarch, exhibit a striking inferiority of execution, compared with those of KutrHypsemus, which the coins of AntTimacuus ‘tival. We may suppose the reign of KurnypEemus to have been tke most brilliant of the Bactrian monarchy, or that in which the Grecian arts were most cultivated and flourishing. 1 amnotallowed to place ANTIMAcHUs priorto APoLLopoTus ; forI have shewn how strong are the latter prince’s claims to be considered the foun- der of Huthydemia, which, if admitted, decide him to have been the son of Eurnypemus. Neither can we place him subsequent to MENANDER, because we have indubitable proof that Eucratipes, by some means or other, succeeded Munanper, in the rule of the countries dependent on Bactria ad Caucasum : had ANtImacuus governed there, his coins would certainly have been found at Beghram, with those of Eurnyprmus, who must have preceded him, and of Euvcraripes, who must have followed him, and in common with those of Apottopotus and Mrenanper. Nei- ther did he succeed Mrmnanper in the sovereignty of his Indian con- quests; for ther his coins would have exhibited Indian characters on the reverses, rather than Bactrian ones: there can be no doubt but that the coins of ANTIMAcHUS are genuine Bactrians. Convinced that D 18 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. (JAN. ANTIMACHUS must have reigned posterior to HutHypEmus, and anterior to Evcratipes, while he could neither have preceded Aprotiopotus, nor succeeded MunanpeER, we have no alternative but to place his reign between the two former princes, and to suppose him cotemporary with the two latter: thus nearly yielding decisive proof that he was the son and successor of EurHyprmus in Bactriana proper. To omit no circumstances likely to throw light upon the subjects under discussion, I advert to the nature and character of the deposit of Bactrian coins, which yielded five of ANTIMACHUs, seven of APOLLODO- Tus, and 108 of Mznanper; for matters apparently trivial may some- times furnish valuable hints. A person, from some motive or other, con- ceals a sum of money, the coins of which he will possess the larger number are those of the reigning prince; it is however easy to imagine that he may have a few of the prince who preceded in rule, and a few of any neighbouring or cotemporary sovereign. The person, who made the deposit thus preserved for us, we may presume, did so in the reign of Mrenanper, which accounts for the notable proportion of that prince’s coins ; the few of ApoLLopotus seem to point him out as the predecessor of Menanoper, and the fewer of ANTIMACHUSs intimate, that he was a neighbouring and cotemporary prince. The length to which I have carried my observations on these coins, and the topics they involve, might justify my being taxed with prolixity, did they not relate to a subject so interesting and intricate as that of Bactrian history; and I shall conclude them by inserting a new table of the reigns and successions of the Bactrian sovereigns, agreeably to the suppositions, the probability of which I have advocated. TABLE. TheodotusI. established his sovereignty B.C. 255, reigued 12 years---- Ito 12ofBactrianzra: Theodotus 11. began to reign ------++-- B.C, 243, reigned 23 years---- 32 to 350f do. Euthydemus began to reign ---------+-- B.C. 220, reigned 25 years---- 35 to 60o0f do. Antimachus began to reign ---++-+++-++ B.C. 195, reigned 24 years:--- 60 to 840f do. Eucratides began to reign --------++--+- B.C. 171, reigned 25 years---- 84 to 1090f do. Successor of Eucratides began to reign-- B.C. 146, reigned years unknown,109 to period unknown, Note.—The period B.C. 125, fixed for the destruction of the empire, liable to much distrust- I continue to discover the coins of Evcratipes in the same numbers, but have met with none of new types. I have noted that this monarch’s coins are not found east of Kdbul, affording the presumption that his sway did not extend thither. Among the coins collected this year, I have not discovered one by which we can identify the successor of Evcratipus; but among the new which may claim to be considered Bactrian, we have one with the classical name of DiomepEs. | We are also without any trace of Hetioctes, who would appear to have no claim to be introduced among the early Bactrian sovereigns; 1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 19 but if the coin discovered of him be clearly Bactrian, which the reverse probably would decide, he may still be admitted his rank among the later sovereigns of the Bactrian dynasty, or among those arising from its destruction. We have this year procured intelligible specimens, which enable me to decipher some of those left in doubt nm my Memoir of last year; and have fallen upon twe or three altogether new, from the characters on the reverse, might be considered Bactrian; at all events, they are Greek, and 1 submit my opinion on them in the succeeding observations. With so many coins before us of princes who have move or less pre- tensions of bemg Bactrian sovereigns, we may feel tempted to doubt whether the Grecian authority in Bactriana was subverted by the Getz at so early a period as that assigned, unless the fact be supported by the fullest historical evidence. It may be, the recorded subversion amounted to no more than a temporary inroad of barbarians, which may have indeed involved the loss of royalty in the family of Eucratipss, and its assumption by some fortunate leader, who repelled the invasion; the probability appears to be that the Greek power in Bactriana, in the first instance, weakened by the incursions of the Getz and other Scy- thic tribes, was ultimately annihilated by the overgrown empire of Parthia. But a Greek authority must have existed to a much later period in the countries west of the Indus, which would appear to have been finally subverted by the Sakyan princes, who had established them- selves in the regions east of the Indus. Without attaching extraordinary importance to the hyperbolical strains of a Carmen Seculare, we may observe, that Horace, who flourished about the commencement of the Christian zra, enumerates among the objects of sufficient magnitude to engage the attention of Aveustus, the Bactrian empire, which we would have to have been destroyed above 120 years before the time he wrote :— ‘“‘ Tu civitatem quis deceat status Curas, et orbis solicitus, times Quid Seres, et regnata Cyro Bactra parent, Tanaisque discors.”’ Class Grecian—Series 2. Unrecorded Kings of Bactria. 1 have thought proper to include in this general series all the coins, of whatever description, which may have Bactrian characters on the reverse legends. I by no means however wish to assert that all these princes ruled in Bactriana proper, perhaps no one of them did so. This series at present includes Antimacuus, Hermaus L., II., [11., Diomepss, An- TILAKIDES, Austus*, ADELPHORTES, PaLERKES, BasiIList, ALOUOKENES, AzvI.,II., Demerrivs, (?) and three other coins among the unidentified * Lysius.—ED. + AziLisos.—ED. Dee 20 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrdém. (Jan. ones, or in all seventeen names: of these I am willing to transfer Antimacuus to the regular Bactrian dynasty, Hermazus L,, II., to the dynasty of ApotLopotus and Menanoper, and ApELPHoRTES, BasiLis, and Azo, to a dynasty which I hope to prove, one day, to have existed distinctly at Massaga. Class Grecian—Series 3. Coins of AGaTHociss, PANTALEON, &c. This year yielded me the same proportion of the coins of these princes, and I suspect we have found two other coins, which, with reference to the characters, may be classed with them, viz. Nos. 30 and 32 of the Greek coins now enumerated: if this be correct, we shall have five princes of this series. Class Grecian—Series 4. Coins of the Nysean Kings. Of these kings we have the topes or cenotaphs at Jeldlabdd: there appear to have been two great families; that of Hzermxus and his descen- dants, whose coins are distinguished by the figure of Hercutss, with his club on the reverse, and those of the princes, whose coins have a horseman on the obverse, and the figure of Cerss on the reverse: to these must unquestionably be added the great king whose coins bear the legend BAZIAEVC BASIAEWN SOrHP MErAC, and I make no doubt UnappHerros: the latter family is the more ancient; and if our views are right, came originally from Massaga. There are thirteen topes cer- tainly, perhaps fourteen, at Jeldldbdd, which may safely be referred to these princes ; five or six to the family of Hzrmzus, and the remainder to that of the others ; if three of these be not the topes of saints, rather than of kings: this I infer from their position on eminences, and the absence of coins with the relics found in them. Note.—Of the prince whose coinage is delineated as fig. 37 in the Jast Memoir, I have procured many other coins: but none enabling me to identify his name: these coins, like the former, all from Beghrdém. Class Indo-Scythic—Series 1 and 2. Coins of KanERKos amd Kappuis. I have discovered that the topes of Kabul refer to the families of these princes, as do a number of topes near Chaharbag, or Jeldlibdd ; but these latter I very much suspect to be duplicates of the former. This year has given us a number of golden medals of these princes, which are noted below. I have not been yet enabled to locate the capital of the princes whose coins form the other series of this class. Recapitulation of Greek coins collected from Beghram, 1834. Copper of Buthydemus, .. 06.05.50. 00 cece eledses (3 Apollodotus:). ii BNadabe sia tidhelaleio siden WoL Menander;,:).,cite ne sattadcy cotrweebiesccs) 06 HLUCTatideS snc ariscuee ee eielon sicinetaotesne cau Diomedess ssc ssaeeaceonkecs eae 1 Adelphortes; BAZIAENS eraaasareose aa Gosi = AVY $a ANS apdutiarseoe? Ss BACIAEWMC< CAAs MANHPKDY sey ai iVHAICeF JB. Fassins Lith!Press. Calcutta. ae we a , - dee a esis on a 5 fh s . oy 24 lene tg om a hi nae rhe. qe AL. - Fat Goins of the NyswanKings 95° r ine Ad & 2 eP de, ao acet 68 SB. Tassins Lith¥ Press. Caleta. Monogrammucal and Symbotical Characters of Bactrian Coins. ig ue AL LLALA.K. 100. of SilverCoins Menander of Copper Coins SCP PARLE A A BEB WTH. R$ ee: Hermes IT. B: ae 4 od Hermes II. 4 os ? a aera :* “ YY he Lennie Couns peer: Of the Indo Scythic Guns STB. Tassin's Lith’ Press. Calcutta. ee ee Sw eee ee. ee 0 ~~ i ae ee ali icacatate = } ! y; SL otay teiMiksot wiee ts pores rene on sedeanlae atehy re 1836.) Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 25 =-The characters on the legend are pure Bactrian, as are those on the coins of Avsius (Lystvs), figs. 15 and 16, of Series 2, Class Grecian, of last year. Hermeus. No. 19. (Fig. 12.) Obverse.—Bust, with tuft or pod on top of head. Legend Greek, BAZIAEQNS SQNTHPOS EPMAIOY. Reverse.—Horse. Legend Bactrian. The type of this coin was given in our memoir of last year (fig. 38). The pre- sent year we procured a more perfect specimen from Jelalibad: the coin is cer- tainly Bactrian, judging by the characters on the legend of the reverse, and the pod on the head of the bust, together with the nature of the reverse, seem to militate against the opinion, that this coin may represent the quadrangular coin- age of Hurmaus before noticed. Adelphortes. Nos. 20, 21. (Figs. 13, 14.) Odverse.—Mounted warrior. Legend Greek, BASIAEQS STIAATPIOY AIKAIOY AAEASOPTOY. (See vol. iv. Pl.XXI. fig. 9.) Reverse.—Seated female deity, with mace or truncheon in right hand. Legend Bactrian. This type was represented last year as fig. 44. Jelalabad this year yielded two fair specimens, from which the Greek legend is undoubtedly as above inserted ; the reverse legend is as manifestly Bactrian. Palerkes. No. 22. (Fig. 15.) Obverse.—Standing figure with trident in right hand. Legend Greek,.... BASIAEWN MEFAADY MAAHPKOY. (See vol. iv. Pl. XXI. fig. 9) Reverse.—Seated figure. Legend Bactrian. This type was represented last year as fig. 40. A more perfect specimen pro- cured this year from K4bul, identifies the legend to be as above cited, the word BAZIAEWS being undoubtedly the one not plain. Basilis (Azilisos.) No. 23. (Fig. 16.) Obverse.—Horseman. Legend Greek.... portion legible ETAAoY. AZIACoY. Reverse.—Elephant. Legend Bactrian. This is a single specimen procured at Kabul, the legend entire would probably have been BACIAEWC BACIAEWN METAAc® BACIAICoY. Alouokenou (Qy.) (Megalou Nonou ?) No. 24. (Fig 17.) Obverse.—Figure of Hurcues erect, with club. Legend Greek, obscure. (Seevol.iv. Pl. XXI. fig. 10.) Reverse.—Infantry soldier, holding wreathe in right hand, and armed with sword, spear and shield. Legend Bactrian. This type was presented last year, as figs. 39 and 43. We have not discovered a single coin of this type during the present year, but introduce this figure here from the probability, on referring to the specimen we held, that the name of the prince was AAOTOKHNOT ; the only doubt is as regards the letters KHN. Asou (Azou.) No. 25. Obverse.—Horseman. Legend Greek, portion visible BASIAEQ.... E.... AAOY ASOT. (See vol. iv. Pl. XXII. fig. 9.) Reverse.—Humped cow. Legend Bactrian. This is one of two specimens procured at Kébul; the entire legend would undoubtedly be BAZIAEQS BAZIAEQN METAAOY A>OYr. E 26 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrdm. (Jan. No. 26. Obverse.—Humped bull, with monogram over the hump, and another under the head. Legend Greek, obscure. (See vol. iv. Pl. XXII. figs. 1, 2, 3.) Reverse.— Monstrous animal, with symbolical monogram over the back. Legend, characters doubtful. One of three specimens procured at Jelalébad; the legend is in pure Greek characters, and by comparison is undoubtedly BASIAENS BASIAEQN METAAOY AzOY. The characters on the reverse legend I apprehend not to be Bactrian, but rather Nyszean. The monograms on these coins vary : one specimen gives the form i over the hump of the bull, and this coincides with the monogram on No. 25, with fia over the animal on the reverse: this form oceurs on No. 23. Unidentified Coins. No. 27. Obverse.—Elephant. Legend defaced. (Vol. iv, Pl. XXI. fig. 11.) Reverse.—Seated figure with trident. Legend defaced. This is a single specimen from Kabul. In absence of the legend, it may be pronounced Greek. No. 28. Obverse.—Rampant lion. Legend Greek, obscure. Reverse.—Humped bull. Legend Bactrian. (Omitted by mistake; like Azos coin.) This type was represented last year ; the present has afforded no new specimen, and we introduce it again, that it may not be lost sight of, and because we sus- pect part of the legend to bear the character AHME®O. We at first inclined to read it AHMHTPIOY, but we presume the character €, which is decisively plain, will not allow it. No. 29. (Pl. II. fig. 18.) Obverse.—Bust, head bound with fillet or diadem. Legend Greek, portion legible OHTOPO. Reverse.—Enthroned figure, probably Jupiter. Legend Bactrian. This is a single specimen from Beghrém, which had nearly given us the name of another Greek king, for after the insertion of the word BASIAEQS, there will be only room for one or two letters more, the first O may perhaps be a A. No. 30. (Fig. 19.) Obverse.—Helmed bust, bearded. Reverse.—Standing figure. Legend, unknown characters. This is a single specimen from Beghram ; the characters on the reverse are singular, and may have some affinity with those on the coins of AGATHOCLES and PANTALEON. No. 31. (Fig. 20.) Obverse.—Bust, head bound with fillet or diadem. Legend Greek, but defaced. This is a single specimen from Beghram. A fragment of a coin, the reverse quite smoothed. No. 32. (Fig. 21.) Reverse.—Figure erect, legend, unknown characters. This is a single specimen from Beghram, the obverse had been hammered smooth: the characters, besides being singular, appear to vary on either side of the inscription ; those to the right resemble the legends of AGATHOocLEs and PANTALEON. Class Grecian—Series No. 4. Coins of Nysean Kings. Nos. 33 to 40. (Figs. 23 to 29.) Obverses.—Busts, head bound with fillet or diadem. Legends Greek, but illegible. These figures represent the types of the very numerous coins of this descrip- tion found, which have invariably on the reverse an erect figure of HERCULES, resting on his club. They are given to shew the varieties of the legends, as well 1836.) Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrdm. 27 as their incompreheusibility. Of all the coins of this class those of HERMaus are Only intelligible (figs. 24 and 25, of our last year’s memoir), and this prince seems to be entitled to be held the first of the line. From a tope at Jelalabad we extracted ten copper coins similar to fig. 40. The princes of this family appear to have been numerous. At Jeldlabdd we have five, if not six topes to be referred to them. No. 41. (Fig. 30.) Obverse.—Horseman. Legend Greek, but obscure, portion visible OAIAIII2Z1. Reverse.—Female figure. Legend Nyszan. Single specimen from Kabul. The horseman on the obverse, and the legend on the reverse, enable us to refer this coin to the Greek Nyszan dynasty, but ‘the legend is too difficult for interpretation. Class Indo-Scythic—Series Nos. 1 and 2. Pi. ll. Fig. 1. Obverse.—Bust of king looking to the right. Sceptre in right hand, four-pronged monogram behind the head. Legend Greek BACIAEVC OOH- MO KAASICHC. This is one of six golden medals of the same prince, extracted from a tope at Gool Durrah near Kabul. The reverse is not given, in no wise differing from that delineated in memoir of last year, fig. 24 of Indo-Scythic coins. The six medals essentially agree ; but as the position of the bust varies, and there are other trivial but unimportant differences observable on all of them, they will have been struck at various times. Fig. 2. Obverse.—Bust of king looking to the left. Sceptre in right hand. Legend Greek characters, PAO NANO PAO OOHPKI KOPANO. Reverse.—Deity or saint looking to the right, lines of glory around the head, four-pronged symbol in front of figure. Legend Greek, NANA. ' This golden medal was found in the same tope with the preceding one and the next to be described. The reverse NANA, enables us immediately to iden- tify the prince as one of the Kanerkos family. The nature of the legend has been so fully displayed in the Journal of the Asiatic Society, that it becomes needless to dwell on it. Fig. 3. Obverse.—Bust of king looking to the left. Sceptre in right hand. Legend Greek, probably same as on preceding coin, portion legible PAOOOKH- PKIKO PANO. Reverse.—Figure of Deity or saint looking to the right. Right hand extended, four-pronged symbol in front of figure. Legend Greek HIIPO. (? Mithro.) This golden coin found with the preceding ones noted in same tope. Fig. 4. Obverse.—Erect figure of prince looking to the left, right hand in act of sacrificing upon an altar, left hand holding staff. Legend Greek NANOPAOKA NHPKIKOPA .... Reverse.—Figure of Deity or saint looking to the right, with four-pronged symbol on right hand of, and other in front of, the figure. Legend Greek NANAPAO. Gold coin purchased in Kabul, the addition of PAO on the obverse legend may be noted clearly, from position indicating holy. Fig. 5. Obverse.—Helmed bust of prince, looking to the left, head surrounded with circles of glory. Sceptre in either hand. Legend Greek PAONANO PAOOOVOKIKOPA. Reverse.—Figure of Deity or saint standing to the left, circles of glory around E2 28 Quotations from original Sanscrit (Jan. the head, right hand extended, four-pronged figure in front of figure. Legend Greek APO, Gold medal purchased in Kédul. This coin is interesting from the fine bust on the obverse, and from the new legend on the reverse*. No. 6. Obverse.—Figure of prince clad in mail, in act of sacrifice, left hand supporting tridental staff. Legend characters intended for Greek PONOPOO BONOOPOVOBOKO. (See observations on Kadphises Coins of vol. 111.) Reverse.—Female figure, standing by side of cow. Legend apparently intend- ed for OPNO, No. 7. Obverse.—Same as preceding. Legend probably intended for RAO NONO POOBO RAONOKO NONO. (See ditto.) Reverse.—Same as preceding. Legend probably OPNO. (Doubtless OKPO.) These two go!d coins were purchased at Kabul. They appear to be the gold coins of the prince whose copper coinage is delineated in fig. 12, Indo-Seythic coins of last year. No. 8. Obdverse.—Seated figure. Legend Greek, portion legible KOPANO. Reverse.—Deity or saint, looking to the right. Four-pronged symbol in front of figure. Legend Greek NANA. (See vol. iv. Pl. LI. jigs. 4, 13.) No. 9. Obverse.—Seated figure as in preceding. Legend illegible. (Do. fig. 5.) Reverse.—Deity or saint, looking to the left, with wreath in extended right hand. Four-pronged symbol in front of figure. Legend not apparent. These coins (copper) were procured at Kabul, and introduced because, with reference to the seated figure on the obverse, they were of a type different from any we met with last year, although they clearly refer to the KanERKos family. Little need be remarked upon these Indo-Scythic coins, which appear to be likely to become more intelligible: suffice it to say, that eight topes in the neighbourhood of K4bul, at least, may be referred to princes of these families of KaNERKOS and KappuHis. Sassanian Coins. At the foot of Plate III. are inserted a few specimens out of the 187 silver coins of this class, extracted from the principal Tope of Hiddah, near Jelélabad. The majority were small coins, like fig. 6. Monograms. Plate IV. comprises all the varieties of monogram hitherto observed on the coins of APoLLopotus, Menanper, EvcraTives and their descendants. Most of them are at once perceived to be combinations of Greek letters ; but whether used as expressive of dates, or as the initials of the die-engraver or mint-master of the day, is not yet determined, although that they are the latter seems the more probable conjecture. The later symbols on the Indo-Scythic and Leonine coins, &c. are of a different class, and do not seem formed from alphabetical combinations. IJ.—Quotations from original Sanscrit authorities in proof and illustration of Mr. Hopvason’s sketch of Buddhism. {The following paper has been printed in the Transactions of the London Asiatic Society; but, from accidental circumstances to which it is not necessary further to allude, somewhat inaccurately. * Probably this is a transposition of the letters of AOPO.—Ep. 1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 29 The shortest way of amending these errors, and supplying at the same time some further information calculated to make the paper more generally intelligible, is to reprint it at Calcutta, This the author has, accordingly, now enabled us to do, the new information being given in the shape of additional notes, which it would indeed have been scarcely worth while to print separately from the text to which they refer. It is not our custom to republish articles already printed, and we do so nowonly under express invitation from the author, whose researches in Buddhism, aided by local advantages possessed by no other writer, it is of the highest importance to have correctly reported and preserved.—Ep.] PREFACE. Several distinguished orientalists having, whilst they applauded the novelty and importance of the information conveyed by my Sketch of Buddhism*, called upon me for proofs, I have been induced to prepare for publication the following translation of significant passages from the ancient books of the Sangatas, which still are extant in Nepdl in the original Sanscrit. These extracts were made for me (whilst I was collecting the workst in question) some years ago by Amirta Nanpa Banpya, the most learned Buddhist then, or now, living in this country; they formed the materials from which chiefly ] drew my sketch; and they would have been long since communicated to the public, had the translator felt sufficiently confident of his powers, or sufficiently assured that enlight- ened Europeans could be brought to tolerate the ‘ingens indigestaque moles’ of these ‘original authorities ;’ which however, in the present instance, are original in afar higher and better sense than those of De K6rés, or even of Upuam. Without stopping to question whether the sages who formed the Bauddha system of philosophy and religion used Sanscrit or high Prdcrit, or both, or seeking to determine the consequent pretension of Mr. Upuam’s authorities to be considered original}, it may be safely said, that those of Mr. Dz Koros can support no claims of the kind. * Transactions of the Royal Asiatic Society of London ;—necnon, Transactions of Bengal Society, vol. xvi. + The collection comprises, besides 60 volumes in Sanscrit, procured in Nepdl, the very names of which had previously been unknown, some 250 volumes, in the language of Tibet, which were obtained from Lassa and Digarcht. But for the existence of the latter at Calcutta, Mr. De Korés’s attainments in Tidctan lore had been comparatively useless. The former or Sanscrit books of Nepdl are the authorities reliedon in this paper. Since the first collection was made in Nepdl, very many new works in the Sanscrit language lave been discovered and are yet daily under discovery. The probability now is, that the entire Kahgyur and Stangyvr may be recovered, in the original language. The whole series has been obtained in that of Tibet, 327 large volumes. + These authorities however, even if allowed to be original, appear to consist entirely of childish legends. I allude to the three published volumes, The 30 Quotations from original Sanscrit (JAN. The native works which the latter gentleman relies on are avowedly Tibetan translations of my Sanscrit originals, and whoever will duly reflect upon the dark and profound abstractions, and the infinite simally- multiplied and microscopically-distinguished personifications of Bud- dhism, may well doubt whether the language of Tibet does or can adequately sustain the weight that has been laid upon it. Sanscrit, like its cognate Greek, may be characterised as a speech ‘* capable of giving a soul to the objects of sense, and body to the abstractions of metaphysics.” But, as the Tibetan language can have no pretensions to a like power, those who are aware that the Sangatas taxed the whole powers of the Sanscrit to embody in words their sys- tem, will cautiously reserve, I apprehend, for the Bauddha books still extant in the classical language of India, the title of original authorities. From such works, which, though now found only in Nepdl, were com- posed in the plains of India before the dispersion of the sect, I have drawn the accompanying extracts ; and though the merits of the *‘ doing into English” may be small indeed, they will yet, I hope, be borne up by the paramount and (as I suspect) unique authority and originality of my “ original authorities,” a phrase which, by the way, has been somewhat invidiously, as well as laxly used and applied in certain quarters. received hypothesisis that the philosophers of Ayudhya and Magadha, (the acknow- ledged founders of Buddhism) preferred the use of Sanscrit to that of Pracrit, in the original exposition of their subtle system, appears to me as absurd as it does probable that their successors, as Missionaries, resorted to Pracrit versions of the original Sanscrit authorities, in propagating the system in the remotest parts of the continent and in Ceylon. On this ground, I presume the Pracrit works of Ceylon and Ava to be translations, not originals :—a presumption so reasonable that nothing but the production from Ceylon or Ava of original Pracrit works, comparable in importance with the Sanscrit books discovered in Nepal, will suffice to shake it in my mind. Sir W. Jonss I believe to be the author of the assertion, that the Buddhists committed their system to high Pracrit or Pali; and so long at least as there were no Sanscrit works of the sect forthcoming, the presumption was not wholly unreasonable. It is, however, so now. And Sir W. Jones was not unaware that Magadha or Bihar was the original head-quarters of Buddhism, nor that the best Sanscrit lexicon extant was the work of a Bauddha; nor that the Brahmans themselves acknowledged the pre-eminent literary merits of their heterodox adversaries. But for his Brdhminical bias therefore, Sir W1LL1AM might have come at the truth, that the Bauddha philosophers employed the classical language. Sir WiLL1AM was further aware, that the old Bauddha inscriptions of Gayd, Sanchi, Carli, &c. are Sauscrit, not Pracrit. To me this last circumstance is decisive against the hypothesis in question. Throughout Madhya Des and the Upper Deccan, the numerous monuments of the Buddhists bear inscriptions in Sanscrit, and Sanscrit only. The Pali inscription at Gayd is recent, and avowedly the work of Burmese. [It is chiefly Burmese, not Pali.—Ep.] . 1836. ] Authorities on Buddhism. 31 It is still, I observe, questioned amongst us, whether Brdhmanism or Buddhism be the more ancient creed, as well as whether the latter be of Indian or extra Indian growth. The Buddhists themselves have no doubts upon either point. They unhesitatingly concede the palm of superior antiquity to their rivals and persecutors the Brahmans ; nor do they in any part of the world hesitate in pointing to India as the cradle of their faith. Formerly we might be pardoned for building fine-spun theories of exotic upon the African locks of BuppHa’s images: but surely it is now somewhat too late*, in the face of the abundant direct evidence which we possess, against the exotic theory, to go in quest of presump- tions to the time-out-of-mind illiterate Scythians, in order to give to them the glory of originating a system built upon the most subtle phi- losophy, and all the copious original records of which are inshrined in Sanscrit}, a language which, whencesoever primevally derived, had been, when Buddhism appeared, for ages proper to the Indian continent. The Buddhists make no serious pretensions to a very high antiquity : never hint at an extra Indian origin. Saxkya Sinua is, avowedly, Kshetriya; and, if his six predecessors had really any historical existence, the books which affirm it, affirm too, that all the six were of Brahmanical or Kshetriyalineage. Sangata books treating on the subject of caste never call in question the antique fact of a fourfold division of the Hindu people, but only give a more liberal interpretation to it than the carrent Brahmanical one of their dayt. The Chinese, the Mongols, the Tibetans, the Indo-Chinese, the Ceylonese and other Indian Islanders, all point to India as the father- land of their creed. The records of Buddhism in Nepal and in Tibet, in both of which countries the people and their mother-tongues are of the Mongol stock, are still either Sanserit or avowed translations from it by Indian pandits. Nor is there a single record or monument of this faith in existence, which bears intrinsic or extrinsic evidence of an extra Indian origin§. * Recent discoveries make it more and more certain, that the cave temples of the Western Coast and its vicinity, are exclusively Bauddha. Every part of India is illustrated by splendid remains of Buddhism. t The difference betweenhigh Pracrit and Sanscrit, could not affect this ques- tion, though it were conceded that the founders of Buddhism used the former and not the latter—a concession however, which should not be facilely made, and to which I wholly demur. ¢ See the Bauddha disputation on caste. Royal Asiatic Society’s Transactions. § See Crawrurp’s remarks on the purély Indian character of all the great sculptural and architectural monuments of Buddhism in Java. Also Barrow’s remarks to the same effect in his travels in China. The Chinese Pusd, is Vis- varupyd Prajnd or the polyform type of Diva Natura. See Oriental Quarterly 82 Quotations from original Sanscrit [Jan. The speculations of a writer of Sir W. Jonzs’s day (Mr. Joinvitzz), tending to prove argumentatively, from the characters of Buddhism and Brdhmanism, the superior antiquity of the former, have been lately revived (see Asiatic Journal No. CLX.) with applause. But besides that fine drawn presumptions are idle in the face of such a mass of direct evidence as we now possess, the reasonings of JoINVILLE appear to me altogether based on errors of fact. Buddhism (to hazard a character in few words), is monastic asceticism in morals, philosophical scepticism in religion; and whilst ecclesiastical history all over the world affords abundant instances of such a state of things resulting from gross abuse of the religious sanction, that ample chronicle gives us no one instance of it as a primitive system of belief. Here is a legitimate inference from sound premises. But that Buddhism was, in truth, a reform or heresy, and not an original system, can be proved by the most abundant direct evidence both of friends and of enemies. The oldest Sangata works incessantly allude to the existing superstition as the Murcharya or way of the serpent, contradistinguishing their reform- ation thereof as the Bdéddhi-charya or way of wise; and the Brahma- nical impugners of those works (who, upon so plain a fact, could not lie), invariably speak of Buddhism as a notorious heresy. An inconsiderable section of the Sangatas alone, ever held the bold doctrine of mortal souls: and the Swabhavika denial of a creation of matter by the fiat of an absolutely immaterial being springs, not out of the obesity of barbarian dulness, but out of the over refinement of philosophical ratiocination. JoInviuun’s idea of the speculative tenets of Buddhism is utterly erroneous. Many of them are bad indeed: but they are of philosophy all compact, profoundly and painfully subtle-sceptical too, rather than atheistically dogmatic. At the risk of being somewhat miscellaneous in this preface, I must allude to another point. The lamented Apzn Remusar sent me, just before he died, a copy of his essay on the Sangata doctrine of the Triad ; and Mr. Upuam, I find, has deduced from Remusat’s interpretation of that doctrine, the inference (which he supports by reference to sundry expressions in the sacred books of Ceylon), that I am in error in deny- Magazine, No. xiy. pp. 218—222, for proofs of the fact that numberless Bauddha remains have been mistaken for Brahmanical by our antiquaries, and even by the natives. In the same work I have proved this in reference to CRawFurRp’s Ar- chipelago, Oriental Quarterly, No. xvi. pp. 232, 235. Yet, no sooner had I shown, from original authorities, how thoroughly Indian Buddhism is, than it was immediately exclaimed ‘oh! this is Nepdlese corrup- tion ! these are merely popular grafts from Brahmanism.’ The very same charac- ter belongs to the oldest monuments of Buddhism extant, in India and beyond it; and I have traced that character to the highest scriptural authorities. 1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 33 ing that Buddhism, in its first, and most characteristic form, admits the distinction of Clerus et Laicus. It is difficult expressly to define that distinction ; but it may be seen in all its breadth in brdhmanism and in Popery ; whilst in Islamism, and in the most enthusiastic of the Christian sects, which sprung out of the Reformation, it is wholly lost. According to my view, Apostolic Christianity recognised it not*; the congregation of the faithful, the Church, was a society of peers, of brethren in the faith, all essentially equal, in gifts, as in place and character. On earth, there were no indispensable mediators, no exclu- sive professional ones; and such alone I understand to be priests. Again, genuine monachism all over the world, I hold to be, in its own nature, essentially opposed to the distinction of clergyman and layman, though we all know that monastic institutions no sooner are rendered matters of public law and of extensive popular prevalence, than, ex vi necessitatis, the distinction in question is superinduced upon them, by the major part of the monks laicising, and the rest becoming clergyt. There are limits to the number of those whom the public can support in idleness : and whoso would eat the bread of the public must perform some duty to the public. Yet who can doubt that the true monk, whe- ther ccenobite or solitary, is he who abandons the world to save his own soul ; as the true clergyman is he who mixes with the world to save the souls of others ? The latter in respect to the people or laics has a distinctive function, and, it may be also an exclusive one : the former has no function at all. Amongst entirely monastic sects, then, the exclusive character of priest is objectless and absurd: and who that has glanced an eye over ecclesiastical history knows not that in proportion as sects are enthusiastic, they reject and hate, (though nothing tainted with monachism) the exclusive pretensions of the clergy! Whoever has been able to go along with me in the above reflections can need only to be told that primitive Puddhism was entirely monastic, and of an unboundedly enthusiastical genius}, to be satisfied that it did not recog- nise the distinction in question. But if, being suspicious of the validity * TI would not be understood to lay stress on this opinion, which is merely adduced to illustrate my argument. + History informs us that, soon after monachism supervened upon our holy and eminently social religion, there were in Egypt as many monks almost as peasants. Some of these monks necessarily laicised, and the rest became clergy. The community of the Gosdins, aud several others, of strictly ascetical origin, exhibit the same necessary change after the sects had become numerously followed. { Its distinguishing doctrine is that finite mind can be enlarged to infinite; all the schools uphold this towering tenet, postponing all others to it. As for the scepticism of the Swabhavikas relative to those transcendent marvels, creation and providence, it is sufficient to prove its remoteness from ‘‘ flat Atheism,”’ sim- ply to point to the coewistence of the cardinal tenet first named. F 34 Quotations from original Sanscrit [Jan. of argumentative inferences, he demand of me simple facts, here they are. In the Sata Sahasrika, Prajna Paramitd, or Racha Bhagavati, and also in the nine Dharmas (the oldest and highest written authorities), it is affirmed more or less directly, or is clearly deducible from the context, in a thousand passages (for the subject is not expressly treated), that the only true followers of Buppua are monks, the majority bemg ccenobites, the rest, solitaries. The fullest enumeration of these followers (Bhikshu Sraxaka or Srdmana, Chailaka, and Arhata or Arhana or Arhanta) proves them to have been all monks, tonsured, subject to the usual vows, (nature teaching to all mankind that wealth, women and power, are the grand tempters,) resident in monasteries (Vihdr) or in deserts, and essentially peers, though of course acknowledging the claims of superior wisdom and piety. The true church, the congregation of the faithful, is constantly said to consist of such only; and I am greatly mistaken indeed if the church in this sense be synonymous with the clergy ; or, if the primitive church of Buppua recognised an absolutely distinct body such as we (i. e. Catholics, Lutherans, and Kirkmen) ordinarily mean when we speak of the latter. The first mention of an exclusive, professional active, minister of religion, or priest, in the Bauddha books, is in those of a comparatively recent date, and not of scriptural authority. Therein the Vajra Achdrya (for so he is called) first appears arrayed with the ordinary attributes of a priest. But his character is anomalous, as is that of every thing about him; and the learned Bauddhas of Nepal at the present day universally admit the falling off from the true faith. We have in these books, Bhikshus Sravakas, Chailaks, and Sdkya-Vansikas*, bound by their primitive rules for ten days (in memory of the olden time) and then released from them; tonsured, yet married ; ostensibly monks, but really citizens of the world. From any of the above, the Vajra Acharya, is drawn indiscriminately ; he keeps the keys of the no longer open treasury ; and he is surrounded * An inscription at Carli identifies the splendid Salivdhana with the head of the Saka tribe, which is that of Saxya Sinna. The Sékya-Vansikas, or people of the race of Sakga, appeared in Nepdl as refugees from Brahman bigotry, some time after Buddhism had been planted in these hills. Sdékya is universally allowed to have been the son of king SuppHopana, sovereign of Magadha or Bihar. He is said to have been born in the ‘‘ Asthan of Kapila Muni,’’ at Ganga Sagar, according to some; in Oude, as others say. His birth place was not necessarily within his father’s kingdom. He may have been born when his father was on a pilgrimage to the shrine of the Saint Karina. Sa’xya died, according to my authorities, in Assam, and left one son named RanuLA BHapRaA. The Sakas were Kshetriyds of the solar line, according to Bauddha authorities: nor is it any proof of the contrary that they appear not in the Bréhmanical genealogies. See note in the sequel. * 1835.] Authorities on Buddhism. 35 with untonsured followers, who now present themselves for the first time. I pretend not to trace with historical nicety all the changes which marked the progress of Buddhism as a public institute ani creed of millions up to the period of the dispersion : but I am well aware, that the primitive doctrines were not, because they could not be, rigidly adhered to, when what I hold to have been at first the closet speculation of some philosophers, had become the dominant creed of large kingdoms. That the latter character was, however, assumed by Buddhism in the plains of India, long before the dispersion, seems certain ; and, as many persons may urge that the thing in question is the dominant public institute, not the closet speculation, and that whatever discipline pre- vailed before the dispersion must be held for primitive and orthodox, I can only observe that the ancient books of the Sangatas, whilst they glance-at such changes as I have adverted to, do so in the language of censure; and that upon the whole, I still strongly incline to the opinion that genuine or primitive Buddhism (so I cautiously phrased it, origi- nally) rejected the distinction of Clerus et Laicus; that the use of the word priest by Upnam, is generally inaccurate ; and that the Sangha of the Buddhist triad ought to have been invariably rendered by Remusat into ‘ congregation of the faithful’ or ‘ church,’ and never into ‘clergy’ or ‘priesthood.’ Remusat indeed seems to consider (Observa- tions, 28-9, and 32), these phrases as synonymous ; and yet the question which their discrimination involves is one which, in respect to our own religion, has been fiercely agitated for hundreds of years ; and still, by the very shades of that discrimination, chiefly marks the subsisting distinction between the various Churches of Christ ! Following the authority he has relied on, Mr. Upuam was at liberty, therefore, to adopt a sense which would consist with my interpretation of phrases such as he alluded to, and which, of course, I found copiously scattered over the works I consulted. I always rendered them advisedly into English, so as to exclude the idea of a priesthood, because I had previously satisfied myself, by separate inquiry and reflection, that that cardinal tenet was repugnant to the genius of the creed, and repudiated by its primitive teachers. This important point may have been wrongly determined by me ; but assuredly the determination of it upon such grounds as Mr. Upuawm’s is perfectly futile. Such words as Arhanta and Bandya, (which, by the way, are the correct forms of the Burmese Rahatun and the Chinese Bonze,) no more necessarily mean, priest, clergy, than do the Latin, fideles and milites, as applied to Christianity ; and as for the word Sangha, it is indisputable that it does not mean literally priest*, and that it does mean literally congregation. * Observations, p. 29. F 2 36 Quotations from original Sanscrit (Jan. If, as Remusar and UrHam appear to insist is the case, every monas- tic follower of Buppwa be a priest, then Bandya or Bonze* must be rendered into English by the word ‘ clergyman.’ But there will still remain as much difference between Bandya and Sangha as, in Christian estimation, between an ordinary parson of the present day, and one of the inspired primitive professors. Of old, the spirit descended upon all alike ; and Sangha was this hallowed and gifted congregation. But the glory has passed away, and the term been long sanctified and set apart. So has, in part, and for similar reasons, the word Arhata. But Bandya, as a generic title, and Bhikshu, Srdvaka, and Chailaka, as spe- eific ones, are still every-day names of every-day people, priests, if it must be so, but, as I conceive, ascetics or monks merely. In the thick night of ignorance and superstition which still envelopes Tibet, the people fancy they yet behold Arhatas in the persons of their divine Ldémas. No such imagination however possesses the heads of the fol- lowers of Buddha in Nepal, Ceylon, or extra Gangetic India; though in the last mentioned country the mame Arhata is popularly applied to the modern order of the clergy, an order growing there, as in Nepdi, (if my opinions be sound) out of that deviation from the primitive genius and type of the system which resulted necessarily from its popular dif- fusion as the rule of life and practice of whole nations. In conclusion I would observe, that, in my apprehension, Remusat’s interpretation of the various senses of the Triadic doctrine is neither * The possible meaning of this word has employed in vain the sagacity of sundry critics. In its proper form of Bandya, it is pure Sanserit, signifying « person entitled to reverence, and is derived from Bandana. Equally curious and instructive is it to find in the Sanserit records of Buddhism the solution of so many enigmas collected by travellers from all parts of Asia; E. G. E: purnsTone’s mound is a genuine Chaitya, and its proper name is Manikdlaya, or the place of the precious relic, The mound is a tomb temple. The ‘ tumuli eorum Christi altaria’ of the poet, is more true of Buddhism than even of the most perverted model of Christianity ; the cause being probably the same, originally, in reference to both creeds, viz. persecution and martyrdom, with consequent divine honours to the sufferers. The Bauddhas, however, have in this matter gone a step further in the descending scale of representative adoration than the Catholics ; for they worship the mere image of that structure which is devoted to the inshrining of the relics of their saints ; they worship the architectural model or form of the Chaitya. The Chaitya of SamMBuu NaTH in Nepdl is affirmed to cover Jyoti rupya SwaYAMBAU, or the self-existent, in the form of flame: nor was there ever any thing exclusive of theism in the connexion of tomb and temple: for Chaityas were always dedicated to the celestial Buddhas, not only in Nepdl, but in the plains of India, as the Chaityas of Sanchi, of Gy4, and of Bag, demonstrate. The Dhyani Buddhas appear in the oldest monuments of the continent and islands, 1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 37 very complete, nor very accurate. In a religious point of view, by the first member is understood the founder of the creed, and all who, follow- ing his steps, have reached the full rank of a Maha Yunika Buddha; by the second, the law or scriptures of the sect; and by the third, the congregation of the faithful, or primitive church, or body of original disciples, or even, any and every assemblage of true, i. e. of conventual ascetical observers of the law, past or present. In a philosophical light, the precedence of Buddha or of Dharma indicates the theistic or atheistic school. With the former, buddha is intellectual essence*, the efficient cause of all, and uncerived. Dharma is material essencet, the plastic cause, and underived, a co-equal by unity with Buddha ; or else the plastic cause, as before, but dependent and derived from Buddha. Sangha is derived from, and compounded of, Buddha and Dharma, is their collective energy in the state of action ; the immediate operative cause of creation, its type or its agent}. With the latter or atheistic school, Dharma is Diva natura, matter as the sole entity, invested with intrinsic activity and intelligence, the efficient and material cause of all. Buddha is derivative from Dharma, is the active and intelligent force of nature, first put off from it and then operating upon it. Sangha is the result of that operation ; is embryotic creation, the type and sum of all specific forms, which are spontaneously evolved from the union of Buddha with Dharma§. The above are the principal distinctions, others there are which I cannot venture here to dwell on. With regard to Remusat’s remark, ‘‘ ou voit que les trois noms sont placés sur le méme niveau, comme les trois representations des méme étres dans les planches de M. Hopeson avec cette difference que sur celles-ci, Sanga est a droite, et Dharma a gauche,’ I may just add, that the placing of Sangha to the right is a merely ritual technicality, conformable to the pujd of the Dakshinichars||, and that all the philo- sophers and religionists are agreed in postponing Sangha to Dharma. * Bodhanatmaka iti Buddha, ‘ the intellectual essence is BuppDHA.’ + Dhéranatmaka iti Dharma, ‘ the holding, sustaining or containing substance is Dharma.’ Agam, Prakriteswari iti Prajna, ‘ the material goddess is Prdjna,” one of the names of DuArma. The word Prajna is compounded of the intensive prefix pra, and jnyana wisdom, or jna to know. It imports the supreme wisdony of nature. Dharma is the universal substratum, is that which supports all forny and quality in the versatile world. t Samudayatmika iti Sangha, ‘the multitudinous essence is Sangha :’ multi- tude is the diagnosis of the versatile universe, as unity is of that of abstraction. § Prajnaupaytmakany Jaggata. || The theistic sects so call themselves, styling their opposites, the Swabhavikas and Prajnikas, Vimachars. Tne Pauranikas, too, often designate the Tantrikas by the latter name, which is equivalent to left-handed. 38 Description of the Sivatherium, [Jan. I possess very many drawings exhibiting the arrangement mentioned by Remusar ; but all subservient to mere ritual purposes, and conse- quently worthy of no serious attention. The Matantara, or variorum text of the pujarts of the present day, displays an infinite variety of formulz*, illustrated by corresponding sculptural and pictorial devices, embodied in those works, and transferred from them to the walls and interior of temples existing all over the valley of Nepal. [To be continued.] II1.—Sivatherium Giganteum, a new Fossil Ruminant Genus, from the Valley of the Markanda, in the Sivdlik branch of the Sub-Himdlayan Mountains. By Hucu Fanconsr, M. D. Superintendent Botanical Garden, Sehdranpur, and Captain P. T. Cautiny, Superintendent Doab Canal. [The fossil here described is of such importance that we make no apology for reprinting the following article entire from the outcoming volume of the Physical Researches of the Society, having prepared the engraving of the head, so as to serve both editions : it should be remarked, in regard to the engraving, that the figure of the palate and teeth is on rather a larger scale than the rest.—ED. | The fossil which we are about to describe forms a new accession to extinct Zoology. This circumstance alone would give much interest to it. But in addition, the large size, surpassing the rhinocreos ; the family of Mammalia to which it belongs; and the forms of structure which it exhibits; render the Sivatherium one of the most remarkable of the past tenants of the globe, that have hitherto been detected in the more recent strata. Of the numerous fossil mammiferous genera discovered and established by Cuvimr, all were confined to the Pachydermata. The species belonging to other families have all their living representatives on the earth. Among the Ruminantia, no remarkable deviation from existing types has hitherto been discovered, the fossil being closely allied to living species. The isolated position, however, of the Giraffe and the Camelide, made it probable, that certain genera had become extinct, which formed the connecting links between those and the other genera of the family, and further between the Ruminantia and the Pachydermata. Inthe Sivathe- riumt we have a ruminant of this description connecting the family with * See the classified enumeration of tke principal objects of Buddha worship appended to this paper. Appendix B. + We have named the fossil, Sivatherium, from Siva, the Hindt god, and @npiov bellua. The Sivdlik or Sub-Himalayan range of hills, is considered in the Hindu mythology, as the Litiah or edge of the roof of Stva’s dwelling in the Himdlaya, and hence they are called the Siva-ala or Sib-ala, which by an easy transition of sound became the Sewdlik of the English. The fossil has been discovered in a tract which may be included in the Sewdlik range, and we have given the name of Siva- therium to it, to commemorate this remarkable formation so rich in new animals. Another derivation of the name of the hills, as explained by the Mahant or High Priest at Dehra, is as follows: Sewalik a corruption of Siva-wdla, aname given to the tract of mountains between the Jumna and Ganges, from having been the residence of Iswara SIva and his son Gane's, who under the form of an Elephant had charge of the Westerly portion from the village of Ditdhli to the Jumna, which portion is also called Gangaja, gaja being in Hindi an Elephant. That portion Eastward from Dédhli, or between that village and Haridwar, is called Deodhar, from its being the especial residence of Deota or Iswara SIVA: the whole tract however between the Jumna and Ganges is called Siva-ala, or the habitation of Siva: unde der. Sewdlik. 1836.] a new Fossil Genus of the Sivdlik range. 39 the Pachydermata, and at the same time so marked by individual pecu- liarities as to be without an analogue in its order. : The fossil remain of the Sivatherium, from which our description is taken, is a remarkably perfect head. When discovered, it was fortunately so completely enveloped by a mass of stone, that although it had long been exposed to be acted upon as a boulder in a water-course, all the more important parts of structure had been preserved. The block might have been passed over, but for an edging of the teeth in relief from it, which gave promise of something additional concealed. After much labour, the hard crystalline covering of stone was so successfully removed, that the huge head now stands out with a couple of horns between the orbits, broken only near their tips, and the nasal bones projected in a free arch, high above the chaffron. All the molars on both sides of the jaw are present and singularly perfect. The only mutilation is at the vertex of the cranium, where the plane of the occipital meets that of the brow: and at the muzzle, which is truncated a little way in front of the first molar. The only parts which are still concealed, are a portion of the occipital, the zygomatic fosse on both sides, and the base of the cranium over the sphcenoid bone. The form of the head is so singular and grotesque, that the first glance at it strikes one with surprise. The prominent features are—Ist, the great size, approaching that of the elephant : 2d, the immense developement and width of the cranium behind the orbits: 3d, the two divergent osseous cores for horns starting out from the brow between the orbits: 4th, the form and direction of the nasal bones, rising with great prominence out of the chaffron, and overhanging the external nostrils in a pointed arch: 5th, the great massiveness, width and shortness of the face forward from the orbits: 6th, the great angle at which the grinding plane of the molars deviates upwards from that of the base of the skull. Viewed in lateral profile, the form and direction of the horns, and the rise and sweep in the bones of the nose, give a character to the head widely differing from that of any other animal. The nose looks something like that of the rhinoceros ; but the resemblance is deceptive, and only owing to the muzzle being truncated. Seen from in front, the head is some- what wedge-shaped, the greatest width being at the vertex and thence gradually compressed towards the muzzle ; with contraction only at two points behind the orbits and under the molars. The zygomatic arches are almost concealed, and nowise prominent: the brow is broad, and flat, and swelling laterally into two convexities; the orbits are wide apart, and have the appearance of being thrown far forward, from the great produc- tion of the frontal upwards. There are no crest or ridges: the surface of the cranium is smooth, the lines are in curves, with no angularity. From the vertex to the root of the nose, the plane of the brow is ina straight line, with a slight rise between the horns. The accompanying drawings will at once give a better idea of the form than any description. Now in detail of individual parts; and to commence with the most important and characteristic, the teeth: There are six molars on either side of the upper jaw. The third of the series, or last milk molar, has given place to the corresponding permanent tooth, the detrition of which and of the last molar is well advanced, and indicates the animal to have been more than adult. The teeth are in every respect those of a ruminant, with some slight individual peculiarities. The three posterior or double molars are composed of two portions or semi-cylinders, each of which incloses, when partially worn down, a double crescent of enamel, the convexity of which is turned inwards. The last molar, as is normal in ruminants, has no additional complication, like that 40 Description of the Sivatherium, [Jan. in the corresponding tooth of the lower jaw. The plane of grinding slopes from the outer margin inwards, The general form is exactly that of an ox or camel, on a large scale. The ridges of enamel are unequally in relief, and the hollows between them unequally scooped. Each semi- cylinder has its outer surface, in horizontal section, formed of three salient knuckles, with two intermediate sinuses; and its inner surface, of a simple arch or curve. But there are certain peculiarities by which the teeth differ from those of other ruminants. In correspondence with the shortness of jaw, the width of the teeth is much greater in proportion to the length than is usual in the family: the width of the third and fourth molars being to the length as 2.24 and 2.2 to 1.55 and 1.68 inches, respectively : and the average width of the whole series being to the length as 2.13 to 1.76 inches. Their form is less prismatic: the base of the shaft swelling out into a bulge or collar, from which the inner surface slopes outward as it rises: so that the coronal becomes somewhat contracted ; in the third molar, the width at the coronal is 1.93, at the bulge of the shaft 2.24. The ridges and hollows on the outer surface descend less upon the shaft, and disappear upon the bulge. There are no accessary pillars on the furrow of junction at the inner side. The crescentic plates of enamel have a character which distinguishes them from all known ruminants: the inner crescent, instead of sweeping in a nearly simple curve, runs zig-zag-wise in large sinuous flexures, somewhat resembling the form in the Elasmotherium. The three double molars differ from each other only in their relative states of wearing. The antepenultimate, being most worn, has the crescentic plates less curved, more approximate and less distinct: the penultimate and last molars are less worn, and have the markings more distinct. The three anterior or simple molars have the usual form, which holds in Ruminantia, a single semi-cylinder, with but one pair of crescents. The first one is much worn and partly mutilated: the second is more entire, having been a shorter time in use, and finely exhibits the flexuous curves in the sweep of the enamel of the inner crescent : the last one has the sim- ple form of the permanent tooth, which replaces the last milk molar: it also shews the wavy form of the enamel. Regarding the position of the teeth in the jaw ; the last four molars, viz. the three permanent and the last of replacement, run in a straight line, and on the opposite sides are parallel and equi-distant : the two anterior ones are suddenly directed inwards, so as to be a good deal approximated. If the two first molars were not thus inflected, the opposite lines of teeth would form exactly two sides ofa square: the length of the line of teeth, and the intervals between the outer surfaces of the four last molars, being almost equal, viz. 9.8 and 9.9 inches respectively. The plane of detrition of the whole series of molars from rear to front is not horizontal, but in a slight curve, and directed upwards at a consider. able angle with the base of the skull: so that when the head is placed, so as to rest upon the occipital condyles and the last molars, a plane through these points is cut by a chord along the curve of detrition of the whole series of molars at an angle of about 45°. Thisis one of the marked characters about the head: Dimensions of the Teeth. Length. Breadth. Inches. Inches. I PEI RTO TATE Ov oq pomonnodoodoodmoooNod or odoot oo. — 2.35 Penultimate GADMismee at Wen cteletotentele ste vievcllee © ele stele 425 82,20 2.38 -Antepenultimate do. ....... Voleiecott’s) slevereby chee ie: ciabatta stole svete 1.68 2.20 Last simple molars 510) sccheis's eaverereie thas wx olen 4s Yovaereis teiauele ea» 2.24 Second do. dos. seis. bie cine Sonosdcagoeone Ie Soeanaad 1.70 1.95 BAYSC TGs COG « wieiclesis orc in eaten ae cite victctetnieieManiafevnlclalaieici ns lane 1.90 1836.]} a new Fossil Genus of the Sivalik range. 41 Outer Inner Surfaces. Surfaces. Interval between the surfaces of last molar,..........+.«. 9.9 5.5 Do. do. do. UNIV LOGLAT tere ote crete cre She 5.5 Do. do. do. SECONMAUGO LM satin sie steers 8.4 4.5 Do. do. do. FSC COs acs ails Sats, ae 6.4 3.2 Space occupied by the line of molars 9.8 inches. Bones of the Head and Face.—From the age of the animal to which the head had belonged, the bones had become anchylosed at their commis- sures, so that every trace of suture has disappeared, and their limits and connections are not distinguishable. The frontal is broad and flat, and slightly concave at its upper half. It expands laterally into two considerable swellings at the vertex, and sweeps down to join the temporals in an ample curve ; and with no angu- larity. It becomes narrower forwards, to behind the orbits; and then expands again in sending off an apophysis to join with the malar bone, and complete the posterior circuit of the orbit. The width of the bone where narrowest, behind the orbit, is very great, being 16.2 inches. Partly between and partly to the rear of the orbits, there arise by a broad base, passing insensibly into the frontal, two short thick conical processes. They taper rapidly to a point, a little way below which they are mutilated in the fossil. They start so erect from the brow, that their axis is perpen- dicular to their basement; and they diverge at a considerable angle, From their base upwards they are free from any rugosities, their surface being smooth and even. They are evidently the osseous cores of two intra- orbital horns. From their position and size they form one of the most remarkable features in the head. The connections of the frontal are no- where distinguishable, no mark of a suture remaining. At the upper end of the bone the skull is fractured, and the structure of the bone is exposed. The internal and outer plates are seen tobe widely separated, and the interval to be occupied by large shells, formed by an expansion of the diploe into plates, as in the elephant. The interval exceeds 23 inches in the occipital. On the left side of the frontal, the swelling at the vertex, has its upper lamina of bone removed, and the cast of the cells exhibits a surface of almond-shaped or oblong eminences, with smooth hollows between. The temporal is greatly concealed by a quantity of the stony matrix, which has not been removed fromthe temporal fossa. No trace of the squamous suture remains to mark its limits and connection with the fron- tal. The inferior processes of the bone about the auditory foramen have been destroyed, or are concealed by stone. The zygomatic process is long, and runs forward to join the corresponding apophysis of the jugal bone, with little prominence or convexity. A line produced along it would pass in front, through the tuberosities of the maxillaries, and to the rear along the upper margin of the occipital condyles. The process is stout and thick. The temporal fossa is very long, and rather shallow. It doesnot rise up high on the side of the cranium : it is overarched by the cylinder- like sides of the frontal bone. The position and form of the articulating surface with the lower jaw are concealed by stone which has not been removed, -There is nothing in the fossil to enable us to determine the form and limits of the parietal bones ; the cranium being chiefly mutilated in the region which they occupy. But they appear to have had the same form and character as in the ox: to have been intimately united with the occipitals, and to have joined with the frontal at the upper angle of the skull. The form and characters of the occipital are very marked. It occu. pies a large space, having width proportioned to that of the frontal, and considerable height. It is expanded laterally into two ale, which com= G 42. Description of the Siwatherium, (Jan. mence at the upper margin of the foramen magnum, and proceed upwards and outwards. These ale are smooth, and are hollowed out downwards and outwards from near the condyles towards the mastoid region of the tem- oral. Their inner or axine margins proceed in a ridge arising from the border of the occipital foramen, diverging from each other nearly at right angles, and enclose a large triangular fossa into which they descend abruptly. This fossa is chiefly occupied by stone inthe fossil, but it does not appear shallow, and seems a modification of the same structure as in the elephant. There is no appearance of an occipital crest or protube- rance. The bone is mutilated at the sides towards the junction with the temporals. Both here and at its upper fractured margin its structure is seen to be formed of large cells with the diploe expanded into plates, and the outer and inner lamine wide apart. This character is very marked at its upper margin, where its cells appear to join on with those of the frontal. The condyles are very large, and fortunately very perfect in the fossil; the longest diameter of each is 4.4 inches, and the distance measured across the foramen magnum, from their outer angles, is 7.4 inches: dimen- sions exceeding those of the elephant. Their form is exactly as in the Ruminantia, viz. their outer surface composed of two convexities meeting at a rounded angle: one in the line of the long axis, stretching obliquely backwards from the anterior border of the foramen magnum ; on the other forwards and upwards from the posterior margin, their line of commissure being in the direction of the transverse diameter of the foramen. ‘The lat- ter is also of large size, its antero-posterior diameter being 2.3 inches, and the transverse diameter 2.6 inches. The large dimensions of the foramen and condyles must entail a corresponding developement in the vertebre, and modify the form of the neck and anterior extremities. The sphenoidal bone, and all the parts along the base of the skull from the occipital foramen to the palate, are either removed, or so concealed by stone, as to give no characters for description. The part of the brow from which the nasal bones commence is not dis- tinguishable. The suture connecting them with the frontal is completely obliterated: and it is not seen whether they run up into a sinus in that bone, or how they join on with it, Between the horns there is a rise in the brow, which sinks again a little forward. A short way in advance of a line connecting the anterior angles of the orbits, there is another rise in the brow. From this point, which may be considered their base, the nasal bones commence ascending from the plane of the brow, at a considerable angle. They are broad and well arched at their base, and proceed for- ward with a convex outline, getting rapidly narrower, to terminate in a point curved downwards, which overhangs the external nostrils. For a considerable part of their length they are joined to the maxillaries : but. forwards from the point where they commence narrowing, their lower edge is free and separated from the maxillaries by a wide sinus: so that viewed in lateral profile their form very much resembles the upper mandible of a hawk, detached from the lower. Unluckily in the fossil, the anterior margins of the maxillaries are mutilated, so that the exact length of the nasal bone that was free from connection with them cannot be determined. As the fossil stands, about four inches of the lower edge of the nasals, measured along the curve, are free. The same mutilation prevents its being seen how near the incisives approached the nasals, with which they do not appear to have been joined. This point is one of great importance, from the structure it implies in the soft parts about the nose. The height and form of the nasal bones, are the most remarkable feature in the head: viewed from above they are seen to taper rapidly from a broad base toa sharp point ; and the vertical height of their most eonvex part above the brow at their base, is 32 inches. 1836. } a new Fossil Genus of the Sivdlik range. 43 The form of the maxillaries is strongly marked in two respects : 1st, their shortness compared with their great width and depth: 2nd, in the upward direction of the line of alveoli from the last molar forwards, giving the appearance (with the licence of language intended to convey an idea of resemblance without implying more) as if the face had been pushed upwards to correspond with the rise in the nasals ; or fixed on at an angle with the base of the cranium. ‘The tendency to shortness of the jaw was observed in the dimensions of the teeth, the molars being compres- sed, and their width exceeding their length to an extent not usual in the Ruminantia. The width apart, between the maxillaries, was noticed be- fore; the interval, between the outer surfaces of the alveoli, equalling the space in length occupied by the line of molars. The cheek tuberosities are very large and prominent, their diameter at the base being 2 inches, and the width of the jaw over them being 12.2 inches, whereas at the alveoli it is but 9.8 inches. They are situated over the third and fourth molars; and proceeding up from them towards the malar, there is an in- distinct ridge on the bone. The infra-orbitary foramen is of large size, its vertical diameter being 1.2 inch; it is placed over the first molar, as in the ox and deer tribe. The muzzle portion of the bone is broken off at about 2.8 inches from the Ist molar, from the alveolar margin of which, to the surface of the diastema, there is an abrupt sink of 1.7 inch. The muzzle is here contracted to 5.8 inches, and forwards at the truncated part te about 4.1. The palatine arch is convex from rear to front, and concave across. No trace of the palatine foramina remains, nor of the suture with the proper palatine bones. The sphceno-palatine apophyses and all back to the foramen magnum* are either removed or concealed in stone. In front, the mutilation of the bone, at the muzzle, does not allow it to be seen, how the incisive bones were connected with the maxil- laries : but it appears that they did not reach so high on the maxillaries as the union of the latter with the nasals. The same cause has rendered obscure the connexions of the maxillaries with the nasals, and the depth and size of the nasal echancrure or sinus. The jugal bone is deep, massive and rather prominent. Its lower border falls off abruptly in a hollow descending on the maxillaries : the upper enters largely into the formation of the orbit. The posterior orbital process unites with a corresponding apophysis of the frontal, to complete the circuit of the orbit behind. The zygomatic apophysis is stout and thick, and rather flat. No part of the arch, either in the temporal or jugal portions, is prominent: the interval between the most salient points being greatly less than the hind part of the cranium, and slightly less than the width between the bodies of the jugals. The extent and form of the lachrymals, cannot be made out, as there is no trace of asuture remaining. Upon the fossil, the surface of the la- chrymary region passes smoothly into that of the adjoining bones. There is no perforation of the lower and anterior margin of the orbit by lachry- mary foramina, nor any hollow below it indicating an infra-orbital or lachrymary sinus. It may be also added, what was omitted before, that there is no trace of a superciliary foramen upon the frontal. The orbits are placed far forwards, in consequence of the great pro- duction of the cranium upwards, and the shortness of the bones of the face. Their position is also rather low, their centre being about 3.6 inches below the plane of the brow. From a little injury done in chiseling off the stone, the form or circle of the different orbits does not exactly cor- respond. In the one of the left side, which is the more perfect, the long * With the exception of a portion of the basilary region, which resembles that of the Ruminants. a 2 44 Description of the Sivatherium, [Jan. axis makes a small angle with that of the plane of the brow: the antero- posterior diameter is 3.3 inches, and the vertical 2.7 inches. There is no prominence or inequality in the rim of the orbits, as in the Ruminantia. The plane of therim is very oblique: the interval between the upper or frontal margins of the two orbits being 12.2 inches, and that of the lower or molar margin 16.2 inches. * Dimensions of the Skull of the Sivatherium Giganteum. Eng. Inches, Métres. From the anterior margin of the foramen magnum to the alveolus of TStHimolaicy Leste sae cle eeteratMeraittes elec Diaamteitls siisetcn is cles ae 18.85 .478 From do. to the truncated extremity oltihemauzzles si. . eoak. eels 20.6 -5268 From do. to the posterior margin of the last molar, ............. 10.3 +262 From the tip of the nasals to the upper fractured margin of the cra- Myltins Ghisaqn bo dooORooNS Bis ates Mere tose in valts ovelerstalevescyepetarsiigeia aie Vata begs sierare 18.0 -4568 From do. do. to do. ALONE Lhe CULVE Ny. cctetislee teic etree oe 19.0 +4822 From do. do. along the curve, to where the nasal arch begins to MISE ENO MU MEIE DROW, cela “sabels ie arcystale el erat Me eteisu ate ovate iciche rate ets ereetore BS 7.8 .198 From the latter point to the fractured margin of the cranium, .... 11,2 -284 From the tip of the nasals to a chord across the tips of the horns,.. 8.5 216 From the anterior angle, right orbit, to the first molar,. Rs eleveleterecomeinte 9.9 .251 From the posterior do. do. to the fr actur ed margin of the cranium, 12.1 -3075 Width of cranium at the vertex (mutilation at left side restored), AD OUTIL Taio -sloreds lorcle) atetelatalstacatastolavel thle oteicherehels ota cere Teatelatetastcte ste 22.0 -559 Do. between the orbits, upper borders,. vie efuwie Chale wjeieljele aie \scis)s) se aN -3095 PD O's. cspeyeinte's wate ercxe dos, lower sborGersrc. carmen pres tories BPs averse 16.2 .4108 Do. behind ‘the orbits at the contraction of the frontal, . a ynuo fejleve “ore, sail OES -3705 Do. between the middle of the zygomatic arches, ...........-2ee0. 16.4 -4168 Do. between the vodies of the malar bones,.............0cceee oe 16.62 .422 Do. base of the skull behind the mastoid processes (mutilated on OLE ASHCS Sy teshsle jeter etal otel's)alet=)ie she koe! ietaloleletetint olla l~ ces et seeetoueote uae oe 19.5 -496 Do. between the cheek calern aie of thepmaxillaries,f... .c:ec:-c miele 2S -3095 Do. of muzzle portion of the maxillaries in front of the first molar, 5.8 -149 Wo: of do. where truncated (partly restored); .... <5 +0 cas. 6 cate ; 4.1 .104 Do. between the outer surfaces of the horns at their base, bie eeretate 12.5 .312 Dots: cdo. 24. dotiinacturedtipstof@ibto, (46%. ssc eemielae oe 2 ) W365 01847 Perpendicular from a chord across tips of do. to the brow, ........ 4.2 165 Depth from the convexity of the occipital condyles to middle of fron- TAM eT Med ve AMOS 5 checks «sel sisiel sales ioloue olesabeleteiadere cots oenetaieie ue mira Ree tote 11.9 -302 Do. from the body of the sphcenoidal to do. between the horns,.. 9.94 .252 Do. from middle of the palate between the 3rd and 4th molars do. at POOLE) NaASals') 1. seis. Kio TotebeteNclaepale sy eteteuetome tatieteas hele stencieree 7.52 .192 Do. from posterior surface last molar to extremity of the nasals, .. 13.0 +331 Do. from grinding surface penultimate molar to root of the nasals, 10.3 - 262 Do, from the convexity near the tip of the nasals to the palatial sur- face. in front of the fest MOlatewes «cis ee eee eps co ccis sles ors cle sible ete 5.53 14 Depth from middle of the ale of the occipital to the swell at vertex OFALOME ALG NY Holey ni eiewlesclerciolele iwi olateelstee ete l ale iekcrete hilerreiehvota ewer ieee 8.98 .228 Do. from inferior margin of the orbit to grinding surface 5th molar, 7.3 -186 Do. from the grinding surface lst molar to edge of the palate in RO NAOT Mie PASTS OG SOG Gold 36 SS obo case ESBS BOSU As Hass 2.6 -066 Space from the anterior angle of orbit to tip of the nasals, Sderuiden 10.2 2595 Antero-posterior diameter Leth OTUs ver oer ce ore tet ene sc nietee eine 3.3 .084 Vertical do. COTM GOERS ar ae 27 - 0685 Antero-posterior diameter of the foramen magnum, .............. 2.3 -058 Transverse do. Osi ioiese se isieicieiest elas hate nel oe stol iby 2.6 -066 Monrydiameter Of cachiCOndyle) ss lestetarcle te lsoea.oleis eis ehen Irn iets diets alates 4.4 «112 SHOES ORFEPANSVETSE CO. OF COscscricmnics os cece e cine comiote ceca. 2.4 0603 Interval between the external angles of do. measured across the POMANVEM, se nnets (vers hehe c crete Mere dia telerelelotclolerciarcustels Rime cieteretapocanels!¢ SM fc 188 Among a quantity of bones collected in the neighbourhood of the spot in which the skull was found, there is a fragment of the lower jaw of a very large ruminant, which we ‘have no doubt belonged to the Sivatherium:; * To facilitate comparison with the large animals described in CuyiER’S Osse- men Fossiles, the dimensions are also given in French measure. 1836.] a new Fossil Genus of the Sivdlik range. 45 and it is even not improbable that it came from the same individual with the head described. It consists of the hind portion of the right jaw, broken off at the anterior third of the last molar. The coronoid apophysis, the condyle, with the corresponding part of the ramus, and a portion of the angle are also removed. The two posterior thirds only, of the last molar remain ; the grinding surface partly mutilated, but sufficiently distinct to show the crescentic plates of enamel, and prove that the tooth belonged to aruminant. The outline of the jaw in vertical section, is a compressed ellipse, and the outer surface more convex than the inner. The bone thins off, on the inner side towards the angle of the jaw, into a large and well marked muscular hollow: and running up from the latter, upon the ramus towards the foramen of the artery, there is a well defined furrow, as in the Ruminantia. The surface of the tooth is covered with very small rugosities, and striz, as in the upper molars ofthe head. It had been composed of three semi-cylinders, as is normal in the family, and the advanced state of its wearing proves the animal from which it proceeded to have been more than adult. The form and relative proportions of the jaw agree very closely with those of the corresponding parts ofa buffalo. The dimensions compared with those of the buffalo and camel are thus: Sivatherium. Buffalo. Camel. Depth of the jaw from the alveolus last molar,.... 4.95inch. 2.65inch. 2.70inch. (Greatest thickness Of dO. Fi. .f. 1. ss. es wees cs 2.3 1.05 1.4 Widthotmiddle: of last molar, . 6... ssc es eels 1:35 0.64 0.76 Length of posterior 2d of do. ........e. ce ecee ce 2alg 0.95 1.15 No known ruminant, fossil or existing, has a jaw of such large size ; the average dimensions above given being more than double those of a Buffalo, which measured in length of head 19.2 inches (.489 métres) ; and exceeding those of the corresponding parts of the rhinoceros. We have therefore no hesitation in referring the fragment to the Sivatherium Giganteum. The above comprises all that we know regarding the osteology of the head from an actual examination of the parts. We have not been so for- tunate hitherto, as to meet with any other remain, comprising the anterior part of the muzzle either of the upper or lower jaw*. We shall now pro- ceed to deduce the form of the deficient parts, and the structure of the head generally, to the extent that may be legitimately inferred, from the data of which we are in possession. Notwithstanding the singularly perfect condition of the head, for an organic remain of such enormous size, we cannot but regret the mutilation at the muzzle and vertex, as it throws a doubt uponsome very interesting points of structure in the Sivatherium: lst, the presence or absence of - incisive and canine teeth in the upper jaw, and their number and character if present ; 2nd, the number and extent of the bones which enter into the basis of the external nostrils ; and 3rd, the presence or absence of two horns on the vertex, besides the two intra-orbital ones. * In a note received from Captain CAuTLEY while this paper is in the press, that gentleman mentions the discovery of a portion of the skeleton of a Sivatherium in another part of the hills: See Journal As. Soc. Vol. IV. ‘‘ During my recent trip to the Siwdliks near the Pinjér valley, the field of Messrs. BAKER and DuRAND’S labours, I regretted much my inability to obtain the dimensions of one of the most superb fossils I suppose that ever wasfound. It was unfortunately discovered and excavated by a party of work people employed by agentleman with whom 1 was unacquainted; and although I saw the fossil when in the rock, I was prevented from getting the measurements afterwards. This specimen appeared to consist of the femur and tibia, with the tarsal, metatarsal, and phalanges of our Sivatherium.’’ It is much to be regretted that such an opportunity should have been lost of adding to the information already acquired of this new and gigantic Ruminant.—Sec, 46 Description of the Sivatherium, [Jan. Regarding the first point, we have nothing sufficient to guide us with certainty to a conclusion, as there are ruminants both with and without incisives and canines in the upperjaw; andthe Sivatherium differs most materially in structure from both sections. But there are two conditions of analogy which render it probable that there were no incisives. 1. In all ruminants which have the molars in a contiguous and normal series, and which have horns on the brow, there are no incisive teeth. In the camel and its congeners, where the anterior molars is unsymmetrical and separat- ed from the rest of the series by an interval, incisives are present in the upper jaw. The Sivatherium had horns, and its molars were in a conti- guous series: it is therefore probable that it had no incisives. Regarding the canines there is no clue to a conjecture, as there are species in the same genus of ruminants both with and without them. 2. ‘The extent and connections of the incisive bones are points of great interest, from the kind of developement which they imply in the soft parts appended to them. In most of the horned ruminantia, the incisives run up by a narrow apophysis along the anterior margins of the maxillary bones, and join on to a portion of the sides of the nasals ; so that the bony basis of the exter- nal nostrils is formed of but two pairs of bones, the nasals and the incisives. In the camel, the apophyses of the incisives terminate upon the maxilla- ries without reaching the nasals, and there are three pairs of bones to the external nostrils, the nasals, maxillaries and incisives. But neither in the horned ruminants, nor in the camel and its congeners, do the bones of the nose rise out of the plane of the brow with any remarkable degree of saliency, nor are their lower margins free to any great extent towards the apex. They are long slips of bone, with nearly parallel edges, running between the upper borders of the maxillaries, and joined to the ascending process of the incisive bone, near their extremity, or connected only with the maxillaries ; but in neither case projecting so as to form any consider- able re-entering angle, or sinus, with these bones. In our fossil, the form and connections of the nasal bones, are very different. Instead of running forward inthe same plane with the brow, they rise from it at a rounded angle of about 130°, an amount of saliency without example among ruminants, and exceeding what holds in the rhi- noceros, tapir, and paleotherium, the only herbivorous animals with this sort of structure. Instead of being in nearly parallel slips, they are broad and well arched at their base, and converge rapidly to a sharp tip, which is hooked downwards, over-arching the external nostrils. Along a consider- able portion of their length they are unconnected with the adjoining bones, their lower margins being free and so wide apart from the maxillaries, as to leave a gap or sinus of considerable length and depth in the bony parietes of the nostrils. The exact extent to which they are free, is un- luckily not shown in the fossil, as the anterior margin of the maxillaries is mutilated on both sides, and the connection with the incisives destroyed. But as the nasal bones shoot forward beyond the mutilated edge of the maxillaries, this circumstance, together with their well defined outline and symmetry on both sides of the fossil, and their rapid convergence to a point with some convexity, leaves not a doubt that they were free to a great extent and unconnected with the incisives, Now to determine the conditions in the fleshy parts, which the structure in the bony parietes of the nostrils entails. The analogies are to be sought for in the ruminantia and pachydermata. The remarkable saliency of the bones of the nose, in the Sivatherium, has no parallel, in known ruminants, to guide us; and the connection of the nasals with the incisives, or the reverse, does not imply any important difference in structure inthe family. Inthe Bovine section, the Ox and the Buffalo have the nasals and incisives connected: whereas they are 1836. ] a new Fossil Genus of the Sivdlik range. 47 separate in the Y4ék* and Aurochs. In the Camel, they are also separate, and this animal has greater mobility in the upper lip than is found in other ruminants. In the Pachydermata, both these conditions of structure are present and wanting in different genera ; and their presence or absence is accom- panied with very important differences in the form of the corresponding soft parts. It is therefore in this family that we are to look for an expla- nation of what is found in the Sivatherium. In the Elephant and Mastodon, the Tapir, Rhinoceros, and Palzothe- rium, there are three pairs of bones to the external nostrils ; the nasals, the maxillaries, and incisivest. In all these animals, the upper lip is highly developed, so as to be prehensile, as in the Rhinoceros, or extended into a trunk, as in the Elephant and Tapir ; the amount of developement being accompanied with corresponding difference in the position and form of the nasal bones. In the Rhinoceros, they are long and thick, extending to the point of the muzzle, and of great strength to support the horns of the animal: and the upper lip is broad, thick, and very mobile, but little elongated. In the Elephant, they are very short, and the incisives enor- mously developed for the insertion of the tusks, and the trunk is of great length. In the Tapir, they are short and free, except at the base, and pro- jected high above the maxillaries ; and the structure is accompanied by a well developed trunk. Inthe other Pachydermatous genera, there are but two pairs of bones to the external nostrils, the nasals and the incisives : the latter running up so as to join on with the former ; and the nasals, instead of being short and salient, with a sinus laterally between them and the maxillaries, are long, and run forward, united to the maxillaries, more or less resembling the nearly parallel slips of the Ruminantia. Of this genera, the Horse has the upper lip endowed with considerable mobility ; and the lower end of the nasals is at the same time free to a small extent. In all the other genera, there is nothing resembling a prehensile organ in the upper lip. In the Sivatherium, the same kind of structure holds, as is found in the Pachydermata with trunks. Of these it most nearly resembles the Tapir. It differs chiefly in the bones of the nose being larger and more salient from the Chaffron ; and in there being less width and depth to the naso- maxillary sinus, than the Tapir exhibits. But as the essential points of structure are alike in both, there is no doubt that the Sivatherium was invested with a trunk like the Tapir. This conclusion is further borne out by other analogies, although more indirect than that afforded by the nasal bones. ist.—The large size of the infra-orbitary foramen. In the fossil, the exact dimensions are indistinct, from the margin having been injured in the chiseling off of the matrix of stone: the vertical diameter we make out to be 1.2 inch, which perhaps may be somewhat greater than the truth ; but any thing approaching this size, would indicate a large nerve for transmission, and a highly developed condition of the upper lip. 2nd.-—The external plate of the bones of the cranium is widely separated from the inner, by an expansion of the diploe in vertical plates, forming large cells, as in the cranium of the Elephant : and the occipital is ex- panded laterally into ale, with a considerale hollow between, as in the Elephant. Both these conditions are modifications of structure, adapted for supplying an extensive surface for muscular attachment, and imply a thick fleshy neck, with limited range of motion ; and, in more remote sequence, go to prove the necessity of a trunk. * CuvieR. Ossemens Fossiles, tome iv. p. 131. + Cuvigr. Ossemens Fossiles, tome iii. p. 29. 48 Description of the Sivatherium, (Jan. 3rd.—The very large size of the occipital condyles, which are greater both in proportion, and in actual measurement, than those of the Elephant, the interval between their outer angles, taken across the occipital foramen, being 7.4 inches. The atlas, and the rest of the series of cervical verte. bre, must have been of proportionate diameter to receive and sustain the condyles, and surrounded by a large mass of flesh. Both these circum. stances would tend greatly to limit the range of motion of the head and neck. But to suit the herbivorous habits of the animal, it must have had some other mode of reaching its food; or the vertebrae must have been elongated in a ratio to their diameter, sufficient to admit of free motion to the neck. In the latter case, the neck must have been of great length, and to support it andthe load of muscles about it, an immense developement would be required in the spinal apophysis of the dorsal vertebre, and in the whole anterior extremity, with an unwieldy form of the body generally. It is therefore more probable that the vertebra were condensed, as in the Elephant, and the neck short and thick, admitting of limited motion to the head: circumstances indirectly corroborating the existence of a trunk, 4th.—The face is short, broad, and massive, to an extent not found in the Ruminantia, and somewhat resembling that of the Elephant, and suit- able for the attachment of a trunk. Next with regard to the horns :— There can be no doubt, that the two thick, short, and conical processes between the orbits, were the cores of horns, resembling those of the Bovine and Antilopine sections of the Ruminantia. They are smooth, and run evenly into the brow without any burr. The horny sheaths which they bore, must have been straight, thick, and not much elongated. None of the bicorned Ruminantia have horns placed in the same way, exactly between and over the orbits: they have them more or less to the rear. The only ruminant which has horns similar in position is the four-horned Antelope* of Hindustan, which differs only in having its anterior pair of horns a little more in advance of the orbits, than occurs in the Sivatherium. The correspondence of the two at once suggest the question, “ had the Sivatherium also two additional horns on the vertex?” The cranium in the fossil is mutilated across at the vertex, so as to deprive us of direct evidence on the point, but the following reasons render the supposition at least probable : 1st.—As above stated, in the bi-cavicorned Ruminantia, the osseous cores are placed more or less to the rear of the orbits. 2nd.—In such known species as have four horns, the supplementary pair is between the orbits, and the normal pair well back upon the frontal. 3rd.—In the Bovine section of Ruminantia, the frontal is contracted behind the orbits, and upwards from the contraction, it is expanded again into two swellings, at the lateral angles of the vertex, which run into the bases of the osseous cores of the horns. This conformation does not exist in such of the Ruminantia as want horns, or as have them approximated on the brow. It is present in tke Sivatherium. On either supposition, the intra-orbitary horns are a remarkable feature in the fossil: and if they were a solitary pair on the head, the structure, from their position, would perhaps be more singular, than if there had been two additional horns behind. Now to estimate the length of the deficient portion of the muzzle, and the entire length of the head :— In most of the Ruminantia, where the molars are in a contiguous unin- terrupted series, the interval from the first molar to the anterior border of the incisive bones is nearly equal to the space occupied by the molars ; in some greater, in some a little less, and generally the latter. In other * The Tetracerus or Antilope Quadricornis and Chekara of authors. SIVAT HE RIUM on a scale of one - seventh "94 ty Capt pat Elth oct y Jes Ainsep Je m Lvace Pldtig Te CGICANTEUM. of the orupinal. Wi ihe WH | / | (| | i ‘ LT === Zi td N Cs Hn : (== | SSS Sie —$ 1 >); yy i —— Wa it | if | Hi iH) } had WH Ht 1836.] a new Fossil Genus of the Sivalik range. 49 Ruminautia, such as the Camelide, where the anterior molars are insym- metrical with the others, and separated from them by being placed in the middle of the diasteme, this ratio does not hold ; the space from the first molar to the margin of the incisives being less than the line of molars. In the Sivatherium, the molars are in a contiguous series, and if on this ana- logy we deduce the length of the muzzle, we get nearly 10 inches for the space from the first molar to the point of the incisives ; and 28.85 inches for the whole length of the head, from the border of the occipital foramen to the margin of the incisives ; these dimensions may be a little excessive, but we believe them not to be far out, as the muzzle would still be short for the width of the face, in a ruminant. The orbits next come to be considered. The size and position of the eye form a distinguishing feature between the Ruminantia and the Pachy- dermata. In the former, it is large and full, inthe latter, smaller and sunk. en ; and the expression of the face is more heavy in consequence. Inthe Sivatherium the orbit is considerably smaller in proportion to the size of the head than in existing ruminants. It is also placed more forward in the face, and lower under the level of the brow. The rim is not raised and prominent, as in the Ruminantia, and the plane of it is oblique: the inter- val between the orbits at their upper margin being 12.2 inches, and at the lower, 16.2 inches. The longitudinal diameter exceeds the vertical in the ratio of 5 to 4 nearly, the long axis being nearly in a line from the naso- maxillary sinus across the hind limb of the zygomatic circle. From the above we infer that the eye was smaller and less prominent than in ex- isting ruminants: and that the expression of the face was heavier and more ignoble, although less so than in the Pachydermata, excepting the horse ; also that the direction of vision was considerably forwards, as well as lateral, and that it was cut off towards the rear. This closes what we have been led to infer regarding the organs of the head. With respect to the rest of the skeleton, we have nothing to offer, as we are not at present possessed of any other remains which we can with certainty refer to the Sivatherium*. Among a quantity of bonest collected from the same neighbourhood with the head fossil, there are three singu- larly perfect specimens of the lower portions of the extremities of a large ruminant, belonging to three legs of one individual. They greatly ex- ceed the size of any known ruminant, and excepting the Sivatherium Giganteum, there is no other ascertained animal of the order, in our col- lection, of proportionate size to them. We forbear from further noticing them at present, as they appear small in comparison for our fossil: and besides, there are indications in our collection, in teeth and other remains, of other large ruminants, different from the one we have described. The form of the vertebra, and more especially of the carpi and tarsi, are points of great interest, to be ascertained ; as we may expect modifi- cations of the usual type adapted to the large size of the animal. From its bulk and armed head, few animals could be strong enough to contend with it, and we may expect that its extremities were constructed more to give support, than for rapidity of motion. But, in the rich harvest which we still hope to reap in the valleys of the Warkanda, it is probable that specimens to illustrate the greater part of the osteology of the Sivatherium will at no very distant period be found. * See Note to page 17.—SEc. ; + We note here a very perfect cervical vertebre of a Ruminant in our possession, which must have belonged to an animal of proportions equal to that of the Sivathe- rium, but from certain characters, we are inclined to suspect that it is allied to some other gigantic species of Ruminant, of the existence of which we have already tolerable certainty. Of the existence of the Elk, and a species of Camelide, Lieut. Baker of the Engineers has shewn us ample proof. H 50 Description of the Swatherium, &c. [Jan. The structure of the teeth suggests an idea regarding the peculiarities of the herbivorous habits of the animal. In the description it was noticed that the inner central plate of enamel ran in a flexuous sweep, somewhat resembling what is seen in the Elasmotherium, an arrangement evidently intended to increase the grinding power of the teeth. It may hence be inferred, that the food of the Sivatherium was less herbaceous than that of existing horned ruminants, and derived from leaves and twigs: or that as in the horse, the food was more completely masticated, the digestive organs less complicated, the body less bulky, and the necessity of regur- gitation from the stomach less marked than in the present Ruminantia. The following dimensions, contrasted with those of the Elephant and Rhinoceros, will afford a tolerably accurate idea of the size of the Siva- therium. They are characteristic, although not numerous :-— “Indian 1-horned Elephant. Sivatherium. Rhinoceros. From margin of foramen magnum to the first HUIOUAT tere isiere octavo cecas\rapatate ois /atsie cole rare egeieeere 23.10 inch. 18.85 inch. 24.9 inch. Greatest width of the cranium,............ 26.0 22.0 12.05 Do. do. of face between the malar bones,.... 18.5 16.62 9.20 Greatest depth of the skull, ...... 5.0005 ees 17.80 11.9 11.05 Long diameter of the foramen magnum, .... 2.55 2.6 2.6 SING od.95)4c Gl, SShaos Oasis 1 Ontcilremenes 2.4 2.3 1.5 Average of the above, ............ siainio Oeicig 15.06 12.38 10.22 If the view which we have taken of the fossil be correct, the Sivathe- rium was a very remarkable animal, and it fills up an important blank in the interval between the Ruminantia and Pachydermata. That it wasa ruminant, the teeth and horns most clearly establish ; and the structure which we have inferred of the upper lip, the osteology of the face, and the size and position of the orbit, approximate it to the Pachydermata. The circumstance of any thing approaching a proboscis is so abnormal for a ru- minant, that at the first view, it might raise a doubt, regarding the correct- ness of the ordinal position assigned to the fossil ; but when we inquire further, the difficulty ceases. In the Pachydermata, there are genera with a trunk, and others with- out a trace of it. This organ is therefore not essential to the constitution of the order, but accidental to the size of the head, or habits of the animal in certain genera. ‘Thus in the Elephant, nature has given ashort neck to support the huge head, the enormous tusks and the large grinding apparatus of the animal; and by such an arrangement, the construction of the rest of the frame is saved from the disturbance which a long neck would have entailed. But as the lever of the head became shortened, some other method of reaching its food became necessary; and a trunk was appended to the mouth. We have only to apply analogous conditions to a ruminant, and a trunk is equally required. In fact, the Camel exhibits a rudimentary form of this organ, under different circumstances. The upper lip is cleft ; each of the divisions is separately movable and extensible, so as to be an excellent organ of touch. The fossil was discovered near the Markanda river, in one of the small valleys which stretch between the Kydérda-din and the valley of Pinjér, in the Sivdlik or sub-Himélayan belt of hills, associated with bones of the fossil Elephant, Mastodon, Rhinoceros, Hippopotamus, &c. So far as our researches yet go, the Sivatherium was not numerous. Compared with the Mastodon and Hippopotamus, (H. Sitvd/ensis, Nobis, a new species cha- racterized by having six incisors in either jaw ;) it was very rare. Northern Doéb, Sept. 15, 1835. 1836. ] Horary Observations of the Barometer, &c. 51 IV.—Horary Observations of the Barometer, Thermometer, and Wet-bulb Thermometer, made at Calcutta on the 2\st and 22nd of December, 1835, by Mr. H. Barrow, Astr. and Math. Inst.-maker to the H. C. [Having ourselves inadvertently omitted the hourly observations appointed by the Meteorological Association at the Cape to be taken on the above day, we are most happy in being able to supply the omission from Mr. BaRRrow’s register. As the Barometer registered monthly at the Assay office stands .014 higher than Mr. B.’s, that quantity must be added to the Bar. indications at 32° (in col. 7) to produce an accordance.—ED. ] The barometer and wet-bulb thermometer were in a large room to the north, the doors and windows of which were open during the whole time. In the reductions* ‘030 has been used as the constant for capili- ary attraction, and it is only necessary to add that the barometer is of the mountain construction, with a screw at the bottom to bring the surface of the mercury to zero. (Calcutta mean time.) Attach- | Exter- { Barome-|Depression 1835. Barome-jed Ther-|/Wet-bulb nal ter re-| of Wet-| = Date. | -HOUF-| ter. mome-} Thermo-|Thermo.| duced | bulbTher-| 2 3 ter. meter. |meter. | to 32°. | mometer. 5 ae 21 Dec. 6 A.M./30,006 65,0 63,0 55,0 29,937 2,0 H. B. 4 ,024 62,2 61,0 963 Se hee a So 8 ,038 64,0 62,0 62,0 972 2,0 |H. B. 9 ,068 66,7 | 63,0 66,0 5993 3,7 10 ,070 68,3 63,9 69,5 ,991 4,4 1] ,054 69,8 64,0 71,6 971 5,8 Noon. ,030 70,1 63,9 72,2 1946 6,2 1 ~ 429,990 70,9 62,5 73,1 1903 8,4 2 974 Wil 62,0 73,2 ,887 9,1 3 972 71,6 62,2 73,5 883 9,4 4 1972 71,0 | 62,1 72,0 ,885 8,9 5 6 1989 69,2 63,7 66,2 ,907 5,5 7 30,012 68,0 64,5 64,0 1934 3,5 8 »028 67,0 64,5 63,1 953 2,5 9 037 67,0 64,0 62,0 »962 3,0 10 ,040 66,3 64,0 60,8 »967 2,3 ll ,030 66,0 63,5 59,5 7958 2,5 22nd. Midnight.| ,016 65,4 63,0 59,1 »946 2,4 1 2 ,000 65,0 63,0 58,0 1931 2,0 3 29,984 64,0 62,0 58,0 1918 2,0 4 982 64,0 62,0 57,0 ,916 2,0 5 986 62,8 61,8 57,0 ,924 1,0 Kk. B. 6 30,012 62,9 61,5 57,0 949 1,4 7 ,016 62,2 61,0 57,2 955 1,2 8 036 63,2 61,8 61,0 972 1,4 H. B. 9 ,064 67,0 62,0 66,9 5989 5,0 10 06S 69,1 63,5 70,5 1987 5,6 11 ,040 70,5 63,0 73,0 1954 7,5 Noon, ,020 71,9 63,0 74,0 5930 8,9. 1 000 72,2 63,0 75,0 ,909 9,2 2 29,980 72,1 63,0 75,3 ,890 9,1 3 968 72,9 63,9 75,3 875 9,0 + ,972 72,3 63,0 73,5 ,881 9,3 5 ,977 71,9 | 63,0 71,0 ,887 8,9 6 30,000 70,5 63,6 67,5 914 6,9 * Of column 3, but not of column 7, which is fortunate, as we do not apply. any correction for capillarity in our own register.—Eb. H 2 52 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Jan. V.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Wednesday Evening, the 6th January, 1836. The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryavy, President, in the chair. Sir Cuaruss D’Ovty, Bart.; E. A. Bhunpewz, Esq. and Dr. H. Fat. CONER, proposed at the last meeting were duly elected members. The meeting then proceeded to the annual election of office-bearers, when by scrutiny of names, The Rev. Dr. Mitt, W. H. Macnacuten, Esq. Sir J. P. Grant, and Sir B. Mauxrn, were chosen Vice-Presidents for the ensuing year ; and Messrs. H. T. Prinsep, J. R. Convin, C. E. Trevetyan, C. H. Cameron, D. Hare, Ram Comun Sen, Captains Forses and Pemperton, and Dr. Pearson, members of the Committee of Papers. The Secretary communicated the results of the past year’s proceedings. The number of new members added to the list in 1835 had been, Ordinary, Members, < weisjatel-\eletereloini & . z & > i PCHOLEY a oO "1 “Mm “MU ‘ou “M “os ‘ou “MS "MS “MN “ag “AA “a “MS AN “a “MU *“M ‘oO “MS ‘Oo a 6) a ‘u ‘oO M te ie ‘u *u °O “u “MU bd 0) "MU *MU ‘ou ‘u “MU "0 ‘u “MU fo} “MU “MU “u “MU “MU ‘oO ‘a *MU ‘oO “MU “mu ‘u ‘u “u *O “MU “MU *O *“u “u “u “MU "MU ‘Oo "MU “MU “mM “MU “3 “0 “MU "MU “MS ou *0u me) *ou “ou “MoM ‘u ‘u “MO "ou "ou bd # § “u *u au hen oS = Ms) > 5 FS Ff 5 om “pul uleYy c‘18 |e'er 068 [0°29 Sug (8°89 on 7 oOfTg 8°9P 6°S? 9°67 OL? G97 0°67 P'Sh Plt 9‘0P 8°68 Le Z‘EP colt be 8 iBao = (255 =] Ben =e ae 5 *SsaWolXg a}auUIOWIIEY FL, 191819903) 8 | 69 i) | | | *19j9NI0I13 -AyY eH $6 nA mes =e > NQ Ato oS 8 a a moo cy aoa an i 4 = ama SS "woIsh "JIC §,2l[seT Of 01 — a= aN A ee ~ oy Cee ee a x see — Coerceecs MOCORACSMIMIAARASATONMSADTMMHOA ce a = a aA As 1G et et SHS SO ICD Rig es Oroonmo Lan! *ssoideq *L “W 40 HI 8°89 L‘8L eel ‘eZ 6BL P69 1°69 L‘L9 086s GOL GIL 0°29 £°S9 6°G9 a a AN ee a) Vermt “rte Ul 13} aumouliey L e0L‘0 £28 88° 968° Pols TeL‘ 1696 £99' Gz9‘ T19‘ 109° oe9* Leg‘ ool‘ 119° 699° *poonpap ‘ual *sby SEM JI—Uoptes [LorULJOg oY} UT peuIOy Ay[ernjeu sem ad1 ‘YIgT ay} yoIYSIU ay) UC ‘ported Suoy AISA @ 103 BIpuy ut p Ors. 961° O8t' re 093° 898° 966° Gres ‘A *d f 7@ SUOT}VAIOSIO 966° 086‘ 610‘ 800‘ 86‘ 86° 6165 9866 006‘ £865 616‘ B16‘ 906‘ 66‘ 66 ‘ 966‘ 8265 946‘ 8165 668° 26° P16: 096‘ 016 G8 (0°L | S°L | 6°99] IP9O\ZIh0 {090'ha\*ueayy ‘ ¢ € ‘ ol LOL , , {err 1€ G8 | ‘LZ | 2‘9 | LOL] 6PLS loge’ |set 08 16 | ZS | 9° | 869] OLS \9ab* Bar‘ 66 v6 | 1° | L*h | 9°89) $69* orbs IIITS 82 88 | BL | €°9 | 6°S9| GE9* l09P. 660‘ 1K $8 | 6°L | LZ | L‘G9| 29% |ecps seo‘ 9% 68 | 0°9 | 8°¢ ee Le9° \6pR‘ on o% I'L} 16 £80 £3 L°6 | L°99 ogo‘ &@ Le \ $699 £605 BS 98 | £9 | 1°9 | 69] 06S‘ \9er* |9z0' 13 #8 | €°Z | e*Z | e°€9) SLE° j9eh* {8005 02 €8 | PZ | 18 | e°69| OSS laps s Iseu‘ 61 OL | 0°6T| GOT} 6629] 098° l96%* |9c0‘ 81 BIT] ‘99 id LI 6L | 0°8 | 98 | 1°F9| 06S‘ Is6rS |880‘ 9L LL | 0°6 | 92 | 1°99] G29 |OFPS [290° ro 18 | 0°8 | 9°Z | 9‘¢9| 8E9° IsGe* j9e0‘ tI 6L | &'8 Be 6°99] GE9° | IFS a el 8°01) 8°E9 I cae #8 | 0° | 0'8 | g*c9| 029‘ IsaH‘ 80S Il 66 | 1°89 810. | Or 8 | 69 | 6'8 | 9*¢9| OG9* lar’ |eL0‘ 6 8Z | £°8 | 8 | g*99] 989% |9Ge° cen" 8 8 | 8°2 | aL | 1°99] EL9° |4PE* lOG0S L 88 | 0°9 | L‘¢ | e*g9) SL9* |Z7E* 610‘ 9 a6 | Lh | 8b | peo] OILS Iaee* |oroe g 68 | &°S | Eg | e*g9| 989% juLe* j9c0% 7 B9 | 2°69 090 | ¢ G6 | °S | 1°¢ | e*g9| 989°0|ZcE* 800° 4 00L| 0°29 00°62} T (ic) oe ap Son SE) 25) Pel g3 ee | eS lobe Ba] S) oF] wo] E° orimpoel < e| > _| 54) 9 ad SET oO a So Lome} oS @ 4 pw a Fh ® 3 RA) Eo) FS) oe Sal a aged elie a ehh sch Nee @ > 4] Ries] 9 alesse! (Ek = "MW “Vv OT 8 SUOT}EAIOSGO = 9881 ‘Asonune, fo yuo ay2 “of ‘vjqnIjnQ ‘20fQ hossp ay} qo yday ‘4aysthaxy 70916070.100]9 fT *y}10U ay} 03 seovfd r9y30 pue NYT, ut ynsHUeTd aouUatiadxa Y}UOU ySapfod ay} Uaeq sey sIUT, JOURNAL OF fir ASETEATIC SOCIETY. No. 50.—February, 1836. I.—Account of Rumbéwe, one of the States in the Interior of Malacca. By Lieut. J. F. Newsoup, 23rd Regt. Madras Native Infantry. Rumbéwe has generally been accounted by the Portuguese and Dutch Governments at Malaccaas the principal of the states in the interior ; but their ideas, like our own, until of late years, of the relative situation of these states, both political and geograpical, appear to have been very erroneous. At the present time, indeed, much interesting matter remains in obscurity, and must remain until the peninsula has been more thoroughly explored. These notions of the superiority of Rumbdwe over the sister state arose probably from the circumstances of its proximity to, and early connexion with, Naning ; and from that of its capital being the crown- ing place of the deputed sovereign from Menangkdbowe. Tradition ascribes its name to a large Marabéwe tree, anciently growing near its western frontier, on one of the banks of the Mara- béwe stream, not far from its embouchement into the Rumbdéwe branch of the Lingie river. There was a small hamlet here, when I visited the place in 1832, consisting of four or five Malay houses. The word Marabdwe is supposed to have been corrupted into Rumbowe. The area of Rumbéwe proper, not including the dependencies, is said not to be quite so spacious as that of Naning. The nearest point of its frontier is distant about 25 miles N. W. from the town of Malacca. Boundaries.—It is bounded towards the N. E. by Srimindnti and Stingie Ujong ; towards the south, by part of Naning and Johdle ; to the west, by part of Naning and Salengore, and to the east, by part of Sriminanti and Johéle. K 62 Account of Rumbowe, one of the (Fes. The boundary marks with Srimindnti are the mountains of Lépat, Cdjang, and Guinong tijoh ; with Singie Ujong, Bukit Augim, part of the right branch of the Lingie river, and Parentian tingth ; with Naning* ; with Johdle, the hill of Bukit Pabet ; and with Salangore, the Lingie river. Rumbéwe contains two divisions, viz. Rumbéwe Uli and Rumbdéwe Ilir ; each under its four Sukids, who are all subject to the control of one Panghili. The Lingie river forms the channel of communication, by water, of Rumbéwe with the straits of Malacca, into which it falls about eight miles to the eastward of Cape Rachddo. This river is about 450 yards broad, and takes a north-by-easterly course into the interior, to the distance of about six miles, when it divides into two branches. The one to the left, called Battang Pennar, goes up to Lingie, and the Siingie Ujong tin mines, taking a N. W. by N. course; and the one to the right, called Battang Pendgie, takes a N. E. by E. course, to Bander, in Rumbowe. It has its rise among the mountains of this state. The three principal posts of Rumbdwe are situated on the banks of Battang Penagie ; viz. Sempong, six miles from the mouth at the point of the river’s bifurcation; Padds, on the right bank, five or six miles further up; and Bander, about eight miles beyond Padis. The river, up to Sempong, is navigable for vessels of 125 tons, ranging from 33 to 7 fathoms, high-water, and vessels of nine tons may pass up, without much difficulty, to Padds ; and to Lingie, on the other branch. In entering the mouth of the river care must be taken to avoid the eastern bank, in consequence of hidden rocks, which run off to sea. The channel near the western bank is deep and safe. Regarding Padds, the following remarks are extracted from some notes taken during a trip up the river in 1833. Two or three miles in advance of Ramoan China Kechil, on the right bank of the river, on the summit of a small hill commanding it, is Raja Aut’s (the Lang de pertiian Besar) stockaded house. The place is named Padds, froma small stream that flows into the river about a quarter of a mile nearer Sempong. The river, several hundred yards above and below Padas, had been partially blocked up by large trees felled completely across, In one place we passed through a formidable chevaux de frise of point- ed stakes, bound together, and running from bank to bank. On this part of the river the stockade bears most: it is most judiciously placed to annoy an enemy passing up with so many obstacles in his course. We contrived to get over them with consi- * See paper on Naning, vol. IV. 297. -1836.] States in the Interior of Malacca. 63 derable difficulty, although the trees had since been cut in two, and broken down. At high-water, they might however be readily passed. The river was blockaded in this fashion during the Naning distur- bances, and the engineer on this occasion was no other than our friend in the boat, the Laks-amdna of Rumbéwe. Sempong, as before stated, is situated at the point of the river’s bifurcation. In 1833, it consisted only of two or three huts; in the foremost of which was a small battery, consisting of seven swivels, and an iron 3-pr. of sufficient range to command both branches of the river. It is the place selected by the Rumbéowe chiefs to levy the duty on the tin passing down from Sdngie Ujong. At the close of 1833, and commencement of 1834, many fugitives settled here, in consequence of the disturbances at Lingie, together with a small colony from Sumatra, under a Panglima named Kammer. ‘The place is now strongly stockaded by the Jang de pertuan Mida Savap Sapan, by whom every encouragement is held out to settlers. Population.— Rumbéwe, including Kroh and Tamping, contains about 9,000 inhabitants. The principal places are Bander, Se-npong, Chembong, Kaling, and Battu Ampar. Chembong, with its environs, is said to contain about 600 houses, and drives a petty trade in timber, dammer, and wax, which are bartered for opium, cloths, iron utensils, and tobacco. Chembong is the residence of the Panghili of Rumbéwe ; Bander, Padas, and Sempong those of the Iang de pertians. Besides Malays are several aboriginal tribes inhabiting the steeps of the mountains, and the forests, who subsist principally by hunting. The natives give them the general appellation of Orang Benia, people of the soil or country. They are subdivided into several tribes: among the most remarkable of which are the Udai, Sakkye, Jakiéin, and Rayet Utan. I have seen several specimens of the two last, but do not perceive any material dissimilarity between them, save that the latter, by enjoying freer intercourse with the Malays, have become more civilized; at least, as far as a shew of dress and ornaments is implicated. _ They differ much from the descriptions given of the Semang in the interior of Quedah, and the thick-lipped, woolly-haired Papian. ‘Their features are of the Malay caste; their hair sometimes straight, like that of the generality of Asiatics, but more frequently curling ; at the same time, very different from the frizzly locks of the African. Their stature is shorter, but they do not differ much in complexion from the Malay. ' The Malays entertain a high estimation of the skill of those singular tribes in medicine, and the knowledge of the virtues of herbs, roots, K 2 64 Account of Rumbéwe, one of the [Fes. plants, &c. investing their sages, Piyongs, even with supernatural powers, such as the Tiijoh Besawye, &c. These tribes are to be found over the whole of the interior of this part of the peninsula, particularly in Ulé Colang, Sungie Ujong, Johéle, Jompéle, Jellabu, Uli Maar, and Segimet. They are skilled in the com- position of the celebrated upas poison, with which they tip the points of their arrows. The Sdmpitan, along tube, through which the poison- ed darts are blown, and a spear, are their favorite weapons. The cloth that encircles their loins is made from the fibrous bark of the Terrap tree: The influence of their Botins, or chiefs over the election of the Pan- ghili of Séngie Ujong, has been mentioned. In Johile, they exert a similar power. It may be also remarked here, that in Rumbdwe there are two distinctions of the high Malayan tribe called Bidoanda, viz. Bédoanda Jakiin, and Bédodnda Jawa. The Panghilis of all these states must necessarily be of one of these two tribes. Government.—Rumbdwe was formerly under the immediate sway of its Panghalu and Ampat Siké ; but of latter days, the Jang de pertian Miida claims equal, if not superior power to the Panghili. The first chief who assumed the title of Jang de pertian Mida of Rumbéwe was Raja Assit, the son of the second Menangkabéwe prince Raja Avit; he was appointed by the then Jang de pertian Besdr (his son-in-law Raja Iram), with the concurrence of the Panghalis of the four states ; and it is stated, had assigned to him, as a subsistence, two-sixths of the duty levied on the tin passing down the river from Svingie Ujong, (the duty was then 2 dls. per bhar,) and the revenues of the districts of Kroh and Tampin, near the foot of the mountain of that name. In 1812, Assiz was driven out of Rumbéwe, as previously mentioned, by the Panghili and Sukids, assisted by Raja Aut; and died in Naning in 1814 or 15. Raja Aus supplanted him; but, being elected as Jang de-perttian Besar in 1832, was succeeded in the Miida- ship by his son-in-law, the present chief, Sayap SaBan. This office being an mnovation on ancient usage is, consequently, secretly disliked by the Malays, especially where its privileges are so ill defined and unsettled; and one in which right would appear syno- nymous with might. Another change within the last few years has taken place in the constitution of this state ; instead of the council of the Ampat, or four, Sitikis, it consists now of eight, or the Suku Iang de-lépan; who, with the Panghili, now form a deliberative body, like the Archons of Athens, of nine. 1836. ] States in the Interior of Malacca. 65 The Panghili is alternately elected from the two tribes, Bédounda Jakéin and Bédodnda Jawa. The following circumstances, according to tradition, led to this custom: “When the king of Johore appointed nine Panghilis over the nine Negris in the interior of Malacca, the heads of the leading tribes in Rumbéwe, viz. those of the Bodoanda Jakén and Jawa, disputed regarding the superiority of their respective claims to the honor. His Highness of Johore, after due deliberation, came to the decision that the selection of a Panghili should not be made from one tribe exclu- sively, but that each should have the privilege alternately.” This judgment, we are assured, gave entire satisfaction, and at all events, seems to have been adhered to in subsequent elections. lt must not be omitted here to state, that the title of Lélah Mdha- rdja was given by the king to the Panghilis of the tribe Bédounda Jakién, and that of Sédia Rdjato those of the Bédodnda Jawa; with the exception of this custom, the office of Panghili is hereditary, agreeably to the law of Perpati Sabatang prevailing in Menangkdbowe, and provided the heir be not insane or an imbecile. The present Panghili is of the tribe Bédoanda Jakin, he succeeded his predecessor Bahdgo, of the tribe Bédodnda Jawa, in 1819. Sukis.—Under the Panghéliarethe eight Sivkis, or heads of the tribes, into which the population of Rumbdwe is divided; and who act as their representatives in councils of state, where like the former Skis of Naning and Svingie Ujong, they possess considerable influence. Nothing of any public importance can be agreed on without their concurrence ; and their unanimous vote on disputed points bears down that of the Panghili. The Jang de-pertéan Besar and Muda always exert more or less influence over their councils. The signature of the Sukis is necessary to the ratification of any treaty, or other similar public document. Formerly there were only four Sékus who had share in the councils, viz. those of Rumbéwe Ilir ; but latterly those of Rumbdéwe Uli have been admitted, as alluded to above. This change was effected by the policy of the two Jang de-pertians, in order to lessen the influence of the Panghéli and former Sikis, and to increase their own. The names of the tribes and titles of the individuals who represent them are as follow: Rumbéwe Ilir. ( Rumbéwe Uli. Tribes. Heads of tribes. Tribes. Heads of Tribes. _ Battu Ampar, ..... Gompar Mahér§ja. Paya Kamba Darrat, .... Sama Raja. Paya Kamba Barrat,.. . Méra Bongsa. Battu Ballang,.............+. Andika. VEGIHCAl, oclas ets coe Sangsfira Pahléwan. | | Sa Melongang,........... Mendalika, Tiga Nénik, ....... Bongsa de Balang. J | Sri Lummah,...... Senda Maharaja. To this list may be added the names of four inferior tribes, which: 66 - - Account of Rumbéwe, one of the [F rs. being scanty in number, and most of them of foreign origin, are repre- sented by the heads of the more important tribes, viz. Tiga, Battu, Anak Malacca, Anak Achi, (children of Malacca and Achin,) and Tan- nah Dattar. ‘The Bododnda tribes are represented by the Panghiilis. Malays, strangers to Rumbowe, while residing there, are amenable to the head of the tribe to which they belong. Settlers are immediately classed in their respective tribes. Those from Menangkdbdwe generally enter that of Battu Ampar, which is the principal of the five tribes that originally emigrated from Menangkabowe ; viz. those of Muncal, Bdttu Ballang, Tiga Battu, and Tannah Dattar. A man marrying into another tribe becomes a member of that of the woman, as also the children. Some of the tribes have peculiar privileges; it is said that the Bédodndas, though guilty of the highest crimes, are exempt from capital punishment ; banishment and fines being the only penalty to which they are liable. The circumstance of the Panghilids of the independ- ant states being necessarily Bédoandas has already been adverted to*. Although the Malays, like the Greeks and Romans, entertain the highest veneration for old age, still the claims of descent supersede those conferred by years, particularly with regard to the heads of tribes, who have precedence in the councils of the state, conformably to the rank of the tribe they represent. An instance of this, and the power sometimes exercised by the Sikis in election, fell under my own observation. At Svingie Sipat, on the frontier of Rumbdwe, in 1833, among the assembly of Malay chiefs there, I observed a boy, whose dress and weapons betokened some rank, and to whom a considerable degree of deference was shewn by the natives. On inquiring, I found him to be the head of the principal tribe, and that, although a younger brother, he had been elected by the Sukas as the head of his tribe or clan, in consequence of his elder brother’s imbecility. This boy affixed his name, or rather his mark, (for neither he nor any of his seven compeers could write,) immediately after the Panghili of Rumbéwe, before the rest of the Sékés, some of whom were venerable old men, and grown grey in office. Mantris.—There are two Mantris in Rumbdwe, viz. Surou Raja, and Anvixa Mantri, both of the tribe Bédodnda Jawa. Their functions are ill defined, but are principally, I believe, to assist the chiefs with their advice. * The division of the people of these states into tribes, some of which bear the names of places in Menangkabéwe, is a strong additional proof of their origin. 1836.] States in the Interior of Malacca. 67 They have no vote in councils, and their influence must be almost entirely personal. Laksdmana.—The Laksdmanasare also two, Passar and Kuatis. The navigation of the river and maritime matters are entrusted to these officers. Panglimas.—The war-chiefs, or Panglimas, are four in number, viz. two Panglima Prangs, Panp1xa Raja, and Panglima Dallam. Their duties are similar to those of the former Panglimas of Naning. Pertéma.—There is another officer, appointed by the Jang de pertiéian Besar, whose functions, fortunately for the liege subjects of Rumbdwe, are seldom called into exercise. This is the Pertdma, or executioner. The modes of putting criminals to death are generally confined to the Panchong ‘eo and Sdlang pls. The former is decapitation: the latter has been already described. Passing up the Rumbdwe river, on some high ground on the left bank between Sempong and Padas, a leafless, blighted tree was pointed out to me by one of the Laksdmanas who stated the foot of it to be the place where criminals, subjects of Rumbdwe, were put to death by Sdlang pu. Religion.—The inhabitants of Rumbowe, like those of the other states of the interior, with the exception of the aborigines, profess the tenets of Islém. They are divided into seven Miikuns, or parishes, to each of which is attached a mosque, with distinct establishments of priests, as in Naning. A Kazi named Ha’s1 Hasuim Sri Lummau presides over the whole. The religious customs, fasts, and festivals are similar to those observed in Naning. Visit to Rumbéwe.—As Rumbéwe has seldom been penetrated by Eu- ropeans, the following memoranda, from my note book, of a visit paid to the chiefs at its capital, Bander, in 1832, by the then Governor of the Straits, the-Honorable Mr. Ispetson, and Brigadier Witson, C. B. may not perhaps be wholly devoid of interest. Early on the morning of the 21st October, I joined from camp at Alorgajeh, the Governor’s suite at Tabu, the principal village of Naning, and late the residence of the ex-Panghtili Duout Sayan. After breakfasting under one of the thatched quarters that had es- caped the pioneer’s axe and brand on the late evacuation of this out- post, the party started on horseback along a foot-path, through a wood- ed country with the Rumbéwe hills on the right, to Chirdna pitih, the last village of Naning. This was formerly a populous place. And the residence of the ex-Panghiili’s sons, but we found it now entirely de- serted, and its houses falling into rapid decay and ruin. Here it was 68 Account of Rumbdéwe, one of the [Fes. stated that Duoit Saran had a manufactory for gun-powder during his late resistance to the Company’s troops. Leaving Chirdna pitih to the left,the path abruptly turns to the right, over or rather through a muddy sdwah, and leads towards the foot of Gunong Tampin. Along the skirt of this mountain, through a dense forest, the party had to travel in Indian file, the narrow foot-path being in several places blocked up by large forest trees lying across to Qabar Feringt, or the Frank’s grave, which is a mere mound in the jungle. This is one of the boundary marks of the Rumbéwe and Naning territo- ries, and is traditionally said to be the grave of a Portuguese officer, slain by the natives in one of those frequent skirmishes which took place between the followers of the gallant ALBuquERQUE and the “ re- bellious Menangkabéwes.”’ The path to Céndéng, from Qabar Feringi, lay through the jungle at the foot of the Rumbdéwe range, and gradually improved as we approached that village. Cdéndéng is a populous hamlet, the first in the Rumbowe side of the boundary line, and is situated at the foot of the mountain of Génong Rumbéwe, on whose steep sides, amidst luxuriant forests, appeared singular patches of partially cleared ground, and a few rude huts, the habitation of the lords of the woods and rocks, the Jakins. None of their sylvan eminences however, nor their attendant Hamadryades, condescended to favor the party with their appearance. From Céndéng to Pddang Léko, the forest decreased in size and denseness, and here and there were traces of clearing and cultivation. A few small verdant patches, not deserving the name of plains, and two or three rivulets, were passed through. The distance from Céndéng to Padang Loko is about three miles. From Padang Léko to Ligon, the roadis bad, passing for the most ‘part over heavy rice-grounds. The cultivation increased progressively as the belt of forest, the natural boundary between Naning and Rumbéwe, was left behind, until we reached the banks of the Rumbowe river at Lagon. This stream was just fordable ; its waters muddy, and evident- ly swoln by the rains. After passing by a miserable path over a very extensive and well cultivated sheet of rice-ground, where the horses were frequently up to the saddle flaps in mud, fording another stream, and crossing a broad swampy plain, from the grassy tufts of which flew the startled lapwing and whistling plover, the cavalcade halted before the mud fort of Bander. From its gate issued a motley crowd of well-dressed Malays, brandishing spears, muskets, pemurasses, (a sort of blunder- buss,) and umbrellas of state, white and yellow, headed by the Muda of Rumbdwe, and one of the sons of the Lang de pertian Besar, Raja Aut. 1836.] States in the Interior of Malacca. 69 The Governor, and Brigadier Witson, were received by these chiefs with every demonstration of welcome and respect, conducted into the fort, and ushered by Raja Aut into a large temporary building, appa- rently erected for the occasion, opposite the Raja’s primitive palace of thatch. A salute from the fort jinjals was then fired, much to the discomfi- ture of one of the pieces, which, possibly from not being accustomed to powder, burst into divers rust-incrusted fragments. Refreshments were served in, on a large flat tray; they consisted principally of dried fruits, dates, conserves, and sweetmeats, in which, as usual, sugar and oil were manifestly predominant. These were placed on small China dishes, and a number of minute cups of the same material, filled with the steaming infusion of Souchong, fresh from China, sans sucre et sans lait, were warmly pressed upon us. In the evening, Raja Ai introduced two antique ladies, dressed with almost more than Spartan simplicity. The one his mother, the Princess Dowager TuAnxku Purr, and the other, his venerated kins- woman, his aunt. These ogresses of high degree would have rivalled in flow of language and exuberance of gesticulation the most vivacious dowagers, date 1770, Madame pu Drrranp always excepted. TuAnxu Purtn is represented to be a woman of strong masculine mind, and to have considerable influence over her son Raja Aut. The fort of Bander consists of low mud walls, now covered with grass, inclosing a space of ground about 80 yards square. Around and outside of the walls runs a strong and high palisade. Six high cavaliers of wood, roofed in with atap, overlook the faces of the work. On each of their platforms two iron guns are mounted, except on that over the gate-way, where there is a serviceable brass gun, bearing the mark of the Dutch East India Company; the date 1756, A. D. and the maker’s name, Perer SEsst. Besides the 12 guns in the cavaliers, were 18 or 20 jinjals lying about the parapets. The houses of the RAja and his personal attend- ants are within the area comprised by the fort walls. After passing the night on mattresses and pillows, covered with dirty red silk, embroidered in gold, and which had evidently been abstracted from the Zendna, the party left Bander early on the following morning. The Governor and Brigadier Wison proceeded en route to Malacca via Pddas and the Lingie river. Lieut. Batrour, of the Madras Artil- lery, and myself, returned by Brissé, to camp, which we reached the same evening. L 70 Account of Rumbéwe, one of the Malacca States. {Fes. Sayap Skzan, the present Lang de pertian Mida of Rumbéwe, is the son of an Arab named Sayap Israutm by his concubine Sri Kamis, a Malay slave girl, a Khdna-zada of Zain-up-Din, formerly Capitan Maliyu in Malacca. He is a native of Chembong in Rumbéwe, whither his father, a rigid zealot, had proceeded to promulgate and expound the tenets of the Koran. ¢ His son, Sayap SABAN, principally resided in Rumbdéwe, but occa- sionally at Malacca. Being naturally ambitious, he early sought to connect himself by marriage with the ruling families in Rumbdwe, and Siac, in Sumatra. He first married a daughter of the Lang de perttan Mida of Jallabu, Raja Sapun, a son of the second Menangkabdowe prince, Raja Apit. He then crossed the straits, and obtained the hand of one of the Siac chief’s daughters. His next matrimonial con- nexions were with Raja Aut’s family. Sayap SABAN is young, active, and intriguing; but at present well disposed to the British Government. Without the bigotry of his father he entertains a thorough contempt for the apathetic opium-eating Malay chiefs, his colleagues in power. He has a taste for war, and proved of great service in placing his father-in-law, Raja Ati, over the heads of his competitors. His activity both for and against the troops in the Naning expeditions are well known. By his own talents and address, the religious influence of his father, and from his Arab extraction, a circumstance to which the Malays invariably pay great deference and respect, and his high connexions, in the securing of which he has shewn great tact and forethought, this adventurer has risen to the Mada-ship of Rumbéwe, and is now aspiring to the entire sovereignty of the states in the interior. Brnniz, the present Panghili of Rumbdwe, is an elderly, grave person, with an unpleasing cast of features purely Malayan. He is at heart inimical to the claims of the Mada and Raja Aut. During the dis- turbances at Lingie, in 1833, he shamefully deserted his stockade, leaving it with several guns, and a quantity of ammunition, in the hands of the vassal chief Karas; not without being strongly sus- pected of having received a considerable bribe for this piece of treachery. He assisted the ex-Panghili of Naning during the time he was in arms against Government. BrEnnIE is addicted to opium-eating, and like other Malays of this class, is. not, as experience has shewn, proof against the temptations of a bribe coming in the shape of this fasci- nating drug. Among the Svkdés, few are men of any talent or worthy of any particular notice. PakKar, an aspirant to the Panghili-ship, and Surow 1836.] Quotations from Original Sanscrit Authorities. 71 Raja, one of the Mantris, are much looked up to by the Malays, with whom their opinions and councils have considerable influence. I had an opportunity of hearing a very long improviso speech from the latter of these Malayan Ciceros, at Siingie Sipat, on the boundary question. His position, unlike that of European orators, was a squat- ting one, on his hams, with the knees pliantly folded in front. The style of his address, like that of the generality of Asiatics, was grave and pompous; but the flow of his words easy and unbroken, except by a few little attentions bestowed on his betel-pounder ( Godik), by which his right-hand was kept in almost continual motion. The speech, however, was so long, that the Panghili of Rumbéwe was fairly snoring before the customary Ah, bagitu lah ! announced the finale of the effusion. Touching the gift of eloquence, I have observed that the Malays of the interior have generally a better and freer manner of expressing themselves than those of the coast; the language in which they clothe their sentiments is far more figurative, and full of metaphors, drawn from natural objects, and cannot fail to strike the hearer as highly pleasing and simply poetical. Their popular traditions are seldom put to writing, beng committed to memory by some of their elders, and sometimes by old Malay ladies of rank, who are regarded by the simple natives, much in the light of a casket containing a valuable gem. Many of their customs are singular and peculiar, and deserving of more attention than has hitherto been paid them. 11.— Quotations from Original Sanscrit Authorities in proof and illustration of Mr. Hopeson’s Sketch of Buddhism. [Continued from page 38.] QUOTATIONS. The Swabhavika Doctrine. 1. All things are governed or perfected by Swabhdva* : I too am governed by Swabhdva. (Ashta Sahasrika.) 2. Itis proper for the worshipper at the time of worship to reflect thus: Iam Nirlipt+, and the object of my worship is Nirlipt; I am that God (Iswara) to whom I address myself. Thus meditating, the worshipper should make puja to all the celestials: for example, to Vajra Satwa Buddha, let him pay his adorations, first, by recollecting that all things with their Vija mantras came from Swabhdva in this or- * Swa, own, and bhdva, nature. Idiosyncrasis. + Intact and intangible, independent. cds. 2 72 Quotations from original Sanscrit [Frs. der :—from the vija* of the letter Y, air, from that of the letter R, fire ; from that of the letter V, or B, water, and from that of the letter L, earth ; and from that of the letter S, Mount Suméraz. On the summit of Sumer is a lotos of precious stones, and above the lotos, a moon crescent, upon which sits, supremely exalted, Vajra Satwa. And as all (other) things proceed from Swabhdva, as also does Vajra Satwa, thence called the self-existentt. (Puja kand.) 3. All things and beings (in the versatile universe) which are alike perishable, false as a dream, treacherous as a mirage, proceed, according to some, from Swabhdva, (nature,) and according to others, from God, (Iswara ;) and hence it is said, that Swabhava and Iswara are essentially one, differing only in name}. (Ashta Sahasrika.) 4. At the general dissolution of all things, the four elements shall be absorbed in Sdénydkar-Akdsh (sheer space) in this order: Earth in water, water in fire, fire in air, and air in Akdsh, and Akash in Siunyata, and Sinydta in Tathata§, and Tathata in Buddha, (which Maha Stnydta||) and Buddha in Bhavana, and Bhdvana in Swabhdva. And when existence is again envolved, each shall in the inverse order, progress from the other. From that Swabhava, which communicates its property of infinity to Akash, proceeded into being, in Akdsh, the letter A. and the rest of the letters ; and from the letters, Adi Buddha] and the other Buddhas ; and from the Buddhas, the Bodhi-Satwas, and from them the five elements, with their Vija Mantras. Such is the Swabhdvika Sansar ; which Sansdr (universe) constantly revolves between Pravritti and Nirvriiti, like a potter’s wheel. (Divya Avadan.) * Root, radix, seed. + This may teach us caution in the interpretation of terms. I understand the dogma to announce, that infinite intelligence is as much a part of the system of nature as finite. The mystic allusion to the alphabet imports nothing more than its being the indispensable instrument and means of knowledge or wisdom, which the Buddhists believe man has the capacity of perfecting up to the stand. ard of infinity. t See the note on No. 3, on the Yatnika system. § Tathata, says the comment, is Satya Juyan ; and Bhdvana is Bhdva or Satta, i. e. sheer entity. || See note on quotation 1 of the section A’di Buddha. § Here again I might repeat the caution and remark at quotation 2. I have elsewhere observed, that Swabhavika texts, differently interpreted, form the basis of the Aiswarixa doctrine, as well as that the Buddhas of the Swabhavikas, who derive their capacity of identifying themselves with the first cause from nature, which is that cause, are as largely gifted as the Buddhas of the Aiswarikas, deriv- ing the same capacity from A’di Buddha, who is that cause. See remarks on Remusat apud Journal of Bengal Asiatic Society, Nos. 32, 33, and 34. 1836. ] Authorities on Buddhism. 73 5. Maha Sinydta is, according to some, Swabhdva, and, according to others, Jswara; it is like the ethereal expanse, and self-sustained. In that, Maha Sinydta, the letter A, which the Vija Mantra of Updya*, and the chief of all the Vizja Mantras of the letters, became manifest. (Rucha Bhdgavati.) 6. Some say creation is from God: if so, what is the use of Yatna or of Karma t+? That which made all things, will preserve and destroy them; that which governs Nirvritti, governs Pravritti also. (Buddha Charitrakévya. ) 7. The sandal tree freely communicates its fragrance to him who tears off its bark. Who is not delighted with its odour? It is from Swabhava. (Kalpalata.) 8. The elephant’s cub, if he find not leafless and thorny creepers in the green wood, becomes thin. The crow avoids the ripe mangot. The cause is still Swabhdva. (Do.) 9. Who sharpened the thorn? Who gave their varied forms, colours, and habits to the deer kind, and to the birds? Swabhdva/ It is not according to the will (tchchha) of any; and if there be no desire or intention, there can be no intender or designer§. (Buddha Charitra.) 10. The conch, which is worthy of all praise, bright as the moon, rated first among excellent things, and which is benevolent to all sentient beings, though it be itself insensate, yields its melodious music, purely by reason of Swabhdva. (Kalpalata.) 11. That hands and feet, and belly and back, and head, in fine, organs of whatever kind, are found in the womb, the wise have attri- * Upaya, the expedient, the energy of nature in a state of activity. See the note on No. 6, of the section A’di Sangha. t+ See the note on quotation 9 of this head. Yatna and Karma may here be rendered by intellect and morality. t These are assumed facts in Natural History; but not correct. § Here is plainly announced that denial of self-consciousness or personality in the causa causarum which constitutes the great defect of the Swabhdvika philosophy: and if this denial amount to atheism, the Swabhavikas are, for the most part, atheists ; their denial also of a moral ruler of the universe being a neces- sary sequel to it. Excepting, however, a small and mean sect of them, they all affirm eternal necessary entity ; nor do any of them reject the soul’s existence be- yond the grave, or the doctrine of atonement. Still NewTon’s is, upon the whole, the right judgment, ‘ Deus sine providentia et dominio nihil est nisi fatum et natura.’ The Swdébhavika attempts to deify nature are but a sad confusion of cause and effect. But, in a serious religious point of view, I fail to perceive any superiority possessed by the immaterial pantheism of Brahmans over the material pantheism of the Buddhists. Metempsychosis and absorption ara common to both, 74 Quotations from original Sanscrit [Fes. buted to Swabhava ; and the union of the soul or life (A’tma) with body, is also Swabhava. (Buddha Charitra Kavya.) 12. From Swabhdva (nature) all things proceeded; by Swabhdva all things are preserved. All their differences of structure and of habits are from Swabhava: and from Swabhava comes their destruction. All things are regulated (suddha) by Swabhava. Swabhdva is known as the Supreme. (Puja kand,—from the Rucha Bhagavati, where the sub- stance is found in sundry passages). 13. Akash is Swabhavika, because it is established, governed, per- fected (suddha) by its own force or nature. All things are absorbed in it: it is uncreated or eternal; it is revealed by its own force; it is the essence (A'tma*) of creation, preservation, and destruction ; it is the essence of the five elements; it is infinite; it is intellectual essence (Bodhandtmika). The five colours are proper to it; and the five Buddhas ; and the letters. It is Sénydta; self-supported; omnipre- sent: to its essence belong both Pravritti and Nirvritti. This Akdsh, which is omnipresent, and essentially intellectual}, because infinite things are absorbed into it, is declared to be infinite. From the infinite nature of this Akash were produced all moving things, each in its own time, in due procession from another, and with its proper difference of form and habits. From the secret aature of Akdsh proceeded likewise, together with the Viz Mantra of each one, air with its own mobility ; and from air, fire with its own heat; and from fire, water with its intrinsical coldness ; and from water, earth with its own proper solidity or heaviness; and from earth, Mount Suméru with its own substance of gold, or with its own sustaining power (Dhdtwdtmika) ; and from Sumeru, all the various kinds of trees and vegetables; and from‘ them, all the variety of colours, shapes, flavours, and fragrances, in leaves, flowers, and fruits. Each derived its essential property (as of fire to burn) from itself; and the order of its procession into existence from the one precedent, by virtue of Swabhdva, operating in time. The several manners of going peculiar to the six classes of animate beings (four-legged, two-legged, &c.), and their several modes of birth, (ovi- * One comment on the comment says, A’tma here means sthén or dlaya, i. e. the wbi of creation, &c. + Akdsh is here understood as synonymous with Smydfta, that is, as the elemental state of all things, the universal ubi and modus of primal entity, in a state of abstraction from all specific forms: and it is worthy of note, that amidst these prima! principles, intelligence has admission. It is therefore affirmed to be a necessary end, or eternal portion of the system of nature, though separated from self-consciousness or personality. In the same manner, Prdjna, the sum of all things, Diva natura, is declared to be eternal, and essentially intelligent, though a material principle. 1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 75 parous, &c.*) all proceeded from Swabhiva. From the Swabhiva of each mansion or habitat (Bhavana) resulted the differences existing between the several abodes of all the six orders of animate beings. The existence of the foetus in the womb proceeds from the Swabhiva of the union of male and female; and its gradual growth and assumption of flesh, bones, skin, and organs, is caused by the joint energy of the Swabhdva of the foetus, and that of time, or the Swabhdva of the foetus, operating in time. The procession of all things from birth, through gra- dual increase, to maturity ; and thence, through gradual decay, to death, results spontaneously from the nature of each being; as do the differ- ences appropriated to the faculties of the senses and of the mind, and to those external things and internal, which are perceived by them. Speech and sustenance from dressed food in mankind, and the want of speech and the eating of grass in quadrupeds, together with the birth of birds from eggs, of insects from sweat, and of the Gods (Devatds) without parentage of any sort : all these marvels proceed from Swabhdva, (Comment on the Puja kand, quotation 12.) The Aiswarika System. 1. The self-existent God is the sum of perfections, infinite, eternal, without members or passions; one with all things (in Pravritti), and separate from all things (in Nirvritti), infiniformed and formless, the essence of Pravritti and of Nirvrittit. (Swayambhi Purina.) 2. He whose image is Sdnydta, who is like a cypher or point, infinite, unsustained (in Nirvritti), and sustained (in Pravritti), whose essence is Nirvrittt, of whom all things are forms (in Pravritti), and who is yet formless (in Nirvritti), who is the [swara, the first intellectual essence, the A’di Buddha, was revealed by his own will. This self- * By etcetera, understand always (more Brahmanorum). That Buddhism forms an integral part of the Indian philosophy is sufficiently proved by the multitude of terms and classifications common to it, and to Bréhmanism. The theogony and cosmogony of the latter are expressly those of the former, with sundry addi- tions only, which serve to prove the posteriority of date, and schismatical seces- sion, of the Buddhists. M. Cousin, in his course of philosophy, notices the absence of a sceptical schoo] amongst the Indian philosophers. Buddhism, when fully explained, will supply the desideratum; and I would here notice the precipitation with which we are now constantly drawing general conclusions relative to the scope of Indian speculation, from a knowledge of the Bréhmanical writings only—writings equalled or surpassed in number and value by those of the Budddists, Jains, and other dissenters from the existing orthodox system of Vydsa and Sankara A’chirya, _ ' + Pravritti, the versatile universe; Nirvritti, its opposite, this world and the next. Pravritti is compounded of Pra, an intensitive, aud vritti, action, occu- pation, from the root vd, to blow as the wind; Niruritti, of Nir,a privative, and vritti, as before. 76 Quotations from original Sanscrit (Fes. existent is he whom all know as the only true Being; and, though the state of Nirvritti be his proper and enduring state, yet, for the sake of Pravritti, (creation), having become Pancha-jnydndtmika, he produced the five Buddhas thus ; from Suvi-suddha-dharma-dhdtuja jnyan, Vairo chana, the supremely wise, from whom proceed the element of earth, the sight, and colours; and from Adarshana-jnyan, Akshobhya, from whom proceed the element of water, the faculty of hearing, and all sounds; and from Pratyavekshana-jnydn, Ratna Sambhava, from whom proceed the element of fire, the sense of smell, and all odours; and from Samta-jnyan, Amitdbha, from whom proceed the element of air, the sense of taste, and all savours; and from Krityanushtha-jnydn, Amogha Siddha, from whom proceed the element of ether, the faculty of touch, and all the sensible properties of outward things dependent thereon. All these five Buddhas are Pravritti kémang, or the authors of creation. They possess the five jnyans, the five colours, the five mudras, and the five vehicles*. The five elements, five senses, and five respective objects of sense, are forms of themt. And these five Buddhas each produced a Bodhi-Satwa, (for the detail, see Asiatic Society’s Transactions, vol. xvi.) The five Bodhi-Satwas are Srishti- kamang, or the immediate agents of creation; and each, in his turn, having become Sarvaguna, (invested with all qualities, or invested with the three gunas,) produced all things by his fiat. (Comment on quot. 1.) 3. All things existent (in the versatile universe) proceed from some cause (hétu): that cause is the Tathdgata} (Adi Buddha); and that * See Appendix A. + The five Dhyani Buddhas are said ta be Pancha Bhita, Pancha Indriya, and Pancha Ayatan dkar. Hence my conjecture that they are mere personifications, according to a theistic theory of the phenomena of the sensible world. The 6th Dhydni Buddha is, in like manner, the icon and source of the 6th sense, and its object, or Manasa ani Dharma, i. e. the sentient principle, soul of the senses, or internal sense, and moral and intellectual phenomena. In the above passage, however, the association of the five elements is not the most accredited one, which (for example) associates hearing and sounds to Akash. + This important word is compounded of Tatha, thus, and gata, gone or got, and is explained in three ways. Ist, thus got or obtained, viz. the rank of a Tathdgata, obtained by observance of the rules prescribed for the acquisition of perfect wisdom, of which acquisition, total cessation of births isthe efficient con- sequence. 2nd, thus gone, viz. the mundane existence of the Tathagata, gone so as never to return, mortal births having been closed, and Nirvritti obtained, by perfection of knowledge. 3rd, gone in the same manner as it or they (birth or births) came; the sceptical and necessitarian conclusion of those who held that both metempsychosis and absorption are beyond our intellect (as objects of knowledge), and independent of our efforts (as objects of desire and aversion—as contingencies to which we are liable) ; and that that which causes births, causes 1836. ] Authorities on Buddhism. 77 which is the cause of (versatile) existence is the cause of the cessation or extinction of all (such) existence: so said Sdkya Sinha. (Bhadra Kalpavadan.) 4, Body is compounded of the five elements : soul, which animates it, is an enamation from the self-existent. (Swayambhu purdna.) 5. Those who have suffered many torments in this life, and have even burned in hell, shall, if they piously serve the Trt Ratna (or Triad), escape from the evils of both. (Avadin Kalpalatd.) 6. Susanovu (a Raja of Benares) was childless. He devoted himself to the worship of [swara (A’di Buddha) ; and by the grace of Iswara a sugar-cane was produced from his semen, from which a son was born to him. The race* remains to this day, and is called Ixsuava Axv. _ (Avadan Kalpalata.) likewise (proprio vigore) the ultimate cessation of them. The epithet Tathdgata, therefore, can only be applied to A’di Buddha, the self-existent, whois never incarnated, in a figurative, or at least a restricted, sense;—cessation of human births being the essence of what it implies. I have seen the question and answer, ‘ what is the Tathagata? It does not come again,’ proposed and solved by the Raksha Bhagavati, in the very spirit and almost in the words of the Vedas. One of a thousand proofs that have occurred to me how thoroughly Indian Buddhism is. Tathagata, thus gone, cr gone as he came, as applied to A’di Buddha, alludes to his voluntary secession from the versatile world into that of abstraction, of which no mortal can predicate more than that his departure and his advent are alike simple results of kis volition. Some authors substitute this interpretation, exclusively applicable to A’di Buddha, for the third sceptical and general interpretation above given. The synonyme Sugata, or ‘ wellgone, for ever quit of versatile existence,’ yet further illustrates the ordinary meaning of the word Tathdgata, as well as the ultimate scope and genius of the Buddhist religion, of which the end is, freedom from metempsychosis ; andthe means, perfect and absolute enlightenment of the understanding, and consequent discovery of the grand secret of nature. What that grand secret, that ultimate truth, that single reality, is, whether all is God, or God is all, seems to be the sole propo- situm of the oriental philosophic religionists, who have all alike sought to discover it by taking the high priori road. That God is all, appears to be the prevalent and dogmatic determination of the Brahmanists ; that all is God, the preferential but sceptical solution of the Buddhists; and, in a large view, I believe it would be difficult to indicate any further essential difference between their theoretic systems, both, as I conceive, the unquestionable growth of the Indian soil, and both founded upon transcendental speculations, conducted in the very same style and manner. * That of Sakya Sinha, and said by the Buddhists to belong to the solar line of Indian Princes. Nor is it any proof of the contrary, that the Paurdnika genealogies exhibit no trace of this race. Those genealogies have been altered again and again, to suit current prejudices or partialities. The Brdhmans who M 78 Quotations from original Sanscrit (Fee. 7. When all was void, perfect void, (Sunya, Maha Siinya) the trili- teral syllable Awm became manifest, the first created, the ineffably splendid, surrounded by all the radical letters (Vija Akshara), as by a necklace. In that Aum, he who is present in all things, formless and passionless, and who possesses the Tri Ratna, was produced by his own will. To him I make adoration. (Swayambhu purdna). The Karmika System. 1. From the union of Updya and Prajna*, arose Manas, the lord of the senses, and from Manas proceeded the ten virtues and the ten vices; so said Sdkya Sinha. (Divya Avadan. } 2. The being of all things is derived from belief, reliance, (pratyaya,) in this order : from false knowledge, delusive impression ; from delusive impression, general notions ; from them, particulars ; from them, the six seats (or outward objects) of the senses; from them, contact; from it, definite sensation and perception; from it, thirst or desire; from it, embryotic (physical) existence ; from it, birth or actual physical exist- ence; from it, all the distinctions of genus and species among animate things; from them, decay and death, after the manner and period peculiar to each. Such is the procession of all things into existence from Avidya, or delusion: and in the inverse order to that of their procession, they retrograde into non-existence. And the egress and regress are both Karmas, wherefore this system is called Kdrmika. (Sdkya to his disciples in the Racha Bhagavati. ) 3. The existence of the versatile world is derived sheerly from fancy or imagination, or belief in its reality ; and this false notion is the first Karma of Manas, or first act of the sentient principle, as yet unindividualized ? and unembodied. This belief of the unembodied sen- tient principle in the reality of a mirage is attended with a longing after it, and a conviction of its worth and reality; which longing is called Sanscar, and constitutes the second Karma of Manas. When Sanscdr becomes excessive incipient individual, consciousness arises (third Karma) ; thence proceeds an organised and definite, but arche- typal body, the seat of that consciousness, (fourth Karma ;) from the last results the existence of [the six sensible and cognizable properties of] natural} objects, moral and physical, (fifth Karma.) When the obliterated throughout India every vestige of the splendid and extensive litera- ture of the Buddhas, would have little scruple in expunging from their own sacred books the royal lineage of the great founder of Buddhism. * See the note on quotation 6 of the section A’di Sangha. Also the note on quotation 1 of the Yatnika system. t+ So I render, after much inquiry, the Shad Ayatan, or six seats of the senses external and internal; and which are in detail as follows: Rupa, Savda, Ganda, 1836. ] Authorities on Buddhism. 79 archetypally embodied sentient principle comes to exercise itself on these properties of things, then definite perception or knowledge is produced, as that this is white, the other, black; this is right, the other wrong, (sixth Karma.) Thence arises desire or worldly affection in the archetypal body, (seventh Karma,) which leads to corporeal conception, (eighth,) and that to physical birth, (ninth.) From birth result the varieties of genus and species distinguishing animated nature, (tenth Karma,) and thence come decay and death in the time and manner peculiar to each, (eleventh and final Karma.) Such is the evolu- tion of all things in Pravritti; opposed to which is Nirvritti, and the Rasa, Sparsa, Dharma. There is an obvious difficulty as to Sparsa, and some also asto Dharma. The whole category of the Ayatans expresses outward things : and after much investigation, I gather, that under Rupa is comprised not only colour, but form too, so far as its discrimination (or, in Kaérmika terms, its existence) depends on sight; and that ali other unspecified properties of body are referred to Sparsa, which therefore includes not only temperature, roughness, and smoothness, and hardness, and its opposite, but also gravity, and even extend- ed figure, though not extension in the abstract. Here we have not merely the secondary or sensible properties of matter, but also the primary ones ; and, as the ewistence of the Ayatans or outward objects perceived, is said to be derived from the Indriyds, (or from Mdnas, which is their collective energy,) in other words, to be derived from the sheer exercise of the percipient powers. Nor is there any difficulty thence arising in reference to the Kérmika doctrine, which clearly affirms that theory by its derivation of all things from Pratyaya (belief), or from Avidya (ignorance). But the Indriydés and Ayatdns, with their necessary connexion, (and, possibly, also, the making Avidya the source of all things,) belong likewise to one section at least of the Swabhd- vika school; aud, in regard to it, it will require a nice hand to exhibit this Berkleyan notion existing co-ordinately with the leading tenet of the Swabhdvikas. In the way of explanation I may observe, first, that the denial of material entity involved in the Indriyé and Ayatan theory (as in that of Avidya) respects solely the versatile world of Pravritti, or of specific forms merely, and does not touch the Nirvrittika state of formative powers and of primal substances, to which latter, in that condition, the qualities of gravity, and even of extended figure, in any sense cognizable by human faculties, are denied, at the same time, that the real and even eternal existence of those substances, in that state, is affirmed. Second, though Dharma, the sixth Ayatdn, be rendered by virtue, the appro- priated object of the internal sense, it must be remembered, that most of the Swabhdvikas, whilst they deny a moral ruler of the universe, affirm the existence of morality as a part of the system of nature. Others again (the minority) of the Swabhdvikas reject the sixth Indriya, and sixth Ayatdn, and, with them, the sixth Dhydni Buddha, or Vajrad Satwa, who, by the way, is the Magnus Apollo of the Tdntrikds, a sect the mystic and obscene character of whose ritual is redeemed by its unusually explicit enunciation and acknowledgment of a ‘* God above all.’’ The published explanations of the procession of all things from Avidya appear to me irreconcilably to conflict with the ideal basis of the theory. ’ mM 2 80 Quotations from original Sanscrit [Frs. recurrence of Nirvritti is the sheer consequence of the abandonment of all absurd ideas respecting the reality and stability of Pravritti, or, which is the same thing, the abandonment of Avidya: for, when Avidya is relinquished or overcome, Sanscéra and all the rest of the Karmas or acts of the sentient principle, vanish with it; and also, of course, all mundane things and existences, which are thence only derived. Now, therefore, we see that Prauritti or the versatile world is the consequence of affection for a shadow, in the belief that it is a substance; and Nirvritti is the consequence of an abandonment of all such affection and belief. And Pravritti and Nirvritti, which divide the universe, are Karmas; wherefore the system is called Kdrmika. (Comment on Quotation 2.) 4. Since the world is produced by the Karma of Manas, or sheer act of the sentient principle, it is therefore called Karmika. The manner of procession of all things into existence is thus. From the union of Updya and of Prdéjna, Manas proceeded; and from Manas, Avidya; and from Avidya, Sansedr ; and from Sanscdr, Viynydna; and from Vijnydna, Namaripa ; and from Ndmartpa, the Shad Ayatan* ; and from them, Vedana; and from it, Trishna; and from it, Upadin ; and from it, Bhava; and from it, Jati; and from it, Jaramarana. And from Jdtirupya Manas, (i. e. the sentient principle in organized animate beings) emanated the ten virtues and ten vices. And as men’s words and deeds partake of the character of the one or the other, is their lot disposed, felicity being inseparably bound to virtue, and misery to vice, by the very nature of Karma. Such is the procession of all things into existence from Manas through Avidyd ; and when Avidyd ceases, all the rest cease with it. Now, since Avidyd is a false knowledge, and is also the medium of all mundane existence, when it ceases, the world vanishes; and Manas, relieved from its illusion, is absorbed into Updya Prajnat. Pravritti is the state of things under the influence of Avidyd ; and the cessation of Avidya is Nirvritti: Pravritti and Nirvritii are both Karmas. (Another comment on quotation 2.) * i. e. colour, odour, savour, sound, the properties dependent on touch, (which are hardness, and its opposite, temperature, roughness and smoothness, and also I believe gravity and extended figure,) and lastly, right and wrong. They are called the seats of the six senses, the five ordinary, and oneinternal. In this quotation I have purposely retained the original terms. Their import may be gathered from the immediately preceding quotations and note, which the curious may compare with Mr. CoLesrookn’s explication. See his paper on the Bauddhy philosophy, apud Trans. Roy. As. Socy. quarto vol. t The Vamdachdras say into Prajna Updya: see note on quotation 6 of the section’ A’di Sangha. 1836. ] Authorities on Buddhism. 81 5. The actions of a man’s former births constitute his destiny™. (Punya paroda. ) 6. He who has received from nature such wisdom as to read his own heart, and those of all others, even he cannot erase the characters which Vidhatrit has written on his forehead. (Avadan Kalpalatd.) 7. As the faithful servant walks behind his master when he walks, and stands behind him when he stands, so every animate being is bound in the chains of Karma. . (Ditto.) 8. Karma accompanies every one, every where, every instant, through the forest, and across the ocean, and over the highest moun- tains, into the heaven of Indra, and into Pdtdla (hell); and no power can stay it. (Ditto.) 9. Kawn&u, son of king Asoxa’, because in one birth he plucked out the golden eyes from a Chaityat, had his own eyes plucked out in the next; and because he in that birth bestowed a pair of golden eyes on a Chaitya, received himself in the succeeding birth eyes of unequal- led splendour. (Avadan Kalpalata.) 10. Sa’xya Sinwa’s son, named Ra’HutaA BHaApRA, remained six yearsin the womb ofhismother Yasopra. Thepainandanxiety of mother and son were caused by the Karmas of their former births. (Ditto.) 11. Although I had required (Sdhkya speaks of himself) a perfect body, still, even in this body, defect again appeared ; because I had yet to expiate a small residue of the sins of former births. (Lallita Vistara.) The Ydtnika System. 1. Iswara (A’di Buddha) produced Yatna from Prajna§ ; and the cause of Pravritti and Nirvritti is Yatna ; and all the difficulties that * Daivyd, identified with A’ di Buddhaby thetheistic, and with Fate, by the atheis- tic doctors. The precise equivalent of the maxim itselfis our ‘ conduct is fate.’ + Bramha, but here understood to be Karma. t+ Chaitya is the name of the tomb temples or relic-consecrated churches of the Buddhists. The essential part of the structure is the lower hemisphere : above this asquare basement or Toran always supports the acutely conical or pyramidal superstructure, and on all four sides of that basement two eyes are placed. Wherever the lower hemisphere is found, is indisputable evidence of Buddhism, e. g. ‘the topes’ of Manikdlaya and of Peshawar. In nicies at the base of the hemisphere are frequently enshrined four of the five Diydni Buddhas, one opposite to each cardinal point. Akshobhya occupies the eastern nich ; Ratna sambhdva, the southern; Amitabha, the western, aud Amog/asidiha, the northern. Vairochana, the first Dhydni Buddha, is supposed to occupy the centre, invisibly. Sometimes, however, he appears visibly, being placed at the right-hand of Akshobhya. § This, as I conceive, is an attempt to remedy that cardinal defect of the older Swdbhdévika school, viz. the denial of personality, and conscious power _and wisdom in the first cause. To the same effect is the Karmika assertion, 82 Quotations from original Sanscrit [Fes. occur in the affairs of this world and the next are vanquished by Yatna (or conscious intellectual effort). (Divya Avadan.) 2. That above mentioned Jswara, by means of Yatna, produced the five Jnydns, whence sprang the five Buddhas. The five Buddhas, in like manner, (i. e. by means of Yatna,) produced the five Bodhi satwas : and they again, by the same means, created the greater Devatds from their bodies, and the lesser ones, from the hairs of their bodies. In like manner, Brauma’ created the three Lokas* and all moving and motionless things. Among mortals, all difficulties are overcome by Yatna ; for example, those of the sea by ships, those of illness by medi- cine, those of travelling by equipages—and want of paper, by prepared skin and bark of trees. And as all our worldly obstacles are removed by Yatna, so the wisdom which wins Nirvritti for us is the result of Yatna; because by it alone are charity and the rest of the virtues ac- quired. Since therefore all the goods of this world and of the next depend upon Yatna, Sa’kya SinnA wandered from region to region to teach mankind that cardinal truth. (Comment on Quotation 1.) 3. That A’di Buddha, whom the Swabhdvikas call Swabhdva, and the Aiswarikas, Iswarat, produced a Bodhi satwa, who, having migrated through the three worlds, and through all six forms of animate exis- tence, and experienced the goods and evils of every state of being, appeared, at last, as Sukya Sinha, to teach mankind the real sources of happiness and misery, and the doctrines of the four schools of philo- sophy{; and then, by means of Yatna, having obtained Bodhi-jnyan, and having fulfilled all the Pdramitds (transcendental virtues), he at length became Nirvdn. (Divya Avadan.) 4. Sa’kya Sinna, having emanated from that self-existent which, according to some, is Swabhdva, and according to others, is Iswara, was produced for the purpose of preserving all creatures. He first adopted the Pravritti Marga (secular character), and in several births exercised Yatna and Karma, reaping the fruits of his actions in all the three worlds. He then exercised Yatna and Karma in the Niruritti that Manas proceeded from the union of Updya and Prajna. Karma I under- stand to mean conscious moral effort, and Yatna, conscious intellectual effort, Their admission in respect to human nature implies its free will, as their assig- nation to the divine nature implies its personality. * The celestial, terrene, and infernal divisions of the versatile universe. + Passages of this entirely pyrrhonic tenure incessantly recur in the oldest and highest authorities of the Buddhists; hence the assertion of the preface that Sugatism is rather sceptical than atheistically dogmatic. t Expressly called in the comment the Swobhdwika, Aiswérika, Yatnikd, and Karmika systems. I find no authority in Sangata books for the Brahminical nomenclature of the Bauddha philosophical schools. 1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 83 Marga (ascetical or monastic character) essaying a release from this mortal coil, fulfilling the ten virtues from the Satya to the Dwdpara Yuga, till at last, in the Kali Yuga, having completely freed himself from sublunary cares, having become a Bhikshuka*, and gone to Buddh Gyd, he rejected and reviled the Braéhmanical penance, did all sorts of true penance for six years under the tree of knowledge on banks of the Niranjana river ; conquered the Namuchimarat, obtained Bodhi-jnyuan, became the most perfect of the Buddhas, seated himself among the Bodhi satwas, (Ananda ‘ Bhikshw’ and the rest,) granted wisdom to the simple, fulfilled the desires of millions of people, and gave Nate to them and to himself. (Lallita Vistdra.) 5. 1836. ] Authorities on Buddhism. 87 the giver and the ikon of that wisdom; the ever living (Sanatanzt) ; the inscrutable; the mother of Buddha*. (Puja kand.) 13. O Prdjné Dévi! thou art the mother (Janani) of all the Bud- has, the grandmother of the Bodhi-satwas, and great grandmother of all (other) creatures! thou art the goddess (Isdénz). (Ditto.) 14. Thou, Sri Bhagavati Dévi Prajna, art the sum of all the sci- ences, the mother of all the Buddhas, the enlightener of Bodhi-jnydn, the light of the universe! (Gunakdranda Vyiha.) 15. The humbler of the pride of Namuchi-mara, and of all proud ones : the giver of the quality of Satya ; the possessor of all the sciences, the Lakshmi; the protector of all mortals, such is the Dharma Ratna. (Ditto.) 16. All that the Buddhas have said, as contained in the Mahd Yana Sétra and the rest of the Satras, is also Dharma Ratnat. (Ditto.) 17. Because Buddha sits on the brow, the splendour thence derived to thy form illuminates all the ethereal expanse, and sheds over the three worlds the light of a million of suns, the four Devatds, Brahma, Vishnu, Mahésa, and Indra, are oppressed beneath thy feet, which is ad- vanced in the Alir-Asan. O Arya Tard! he who shall meditate on thee in this form shall be relieved from all future births. (Saraké Dhardt.) 18. Thy manifestation, say some of the wise, is thus, from the roots of the hairs of thy body sprang Akash, heaven, earth, and hades, together with their inhabitants, the greater Devatds, the lesser, the Daityas, the Siddhds, Gandharbas, and Nagas. So too (from thy hairs), wonderful to tell! were produced the various mansions. of the Buddhas, together with the thousands of Buddhas who occupy them§. From thy own being were formed all moving and motionless things without exception. (Ditto.) 19. Salutation to Prajna Dévi, from whom, in the form of desire, * Sugatja, which the Vdmdachadrs render, ‘ of whom Buddha was born ;? the Dakshindchars, ‘ born of Buddha,’ or goer to Buddha, as wife to husband. + Hence the scriptures are worshipped as forms of A’di Dharma Siétra, means literally thread (of discourse), aphorism. Sédkya, like other Indian sages, taught orally, and it is doubtful if he himself reduced his doctrines to a written code, thongh the great scriptures of the sect are now generally attributed to him. Sitra is now the title of the dvo%s of highest authority among the Bauddhas. t+ Composed by Sarvajna Mitrapada of Kashmir, and in very high esteem, though not of scriptural authority. § These thousands of Buddhas of immortal mould are somewhat opposed to the so called simplicity of Buddhism !! whatever were the primitive doctrines of Sékya, it is certain that the system attributed to him, and now found in the written authorities of the sect, is the very antipodes of simplicity. N 2 88 Quotations fram original Sanscrit [Fus. the production of the world was excellently obtained*, who is beauti- ful as the full moon, the mother of A’di Buddha, (Jinindra Matra,) and wife of (the other) Buddha, who is imperishable as adamant. (Sddhana Mala.) 20. That Yoni, from which the world was made manifest, is the Trikonakar Yantra. In the midst of the Yantra or trikon (triangle) is a bindé (point, cypher) : from that bind, A'di Prdjnd revealed herself by her own will. From one side of the triangle A’di Prajnd produced Buddha, and from another side, Dharma, and from the third side, Sangha. That A’di Prdjnd is the mother of that Buddha who issued from the first side ; and Dharma, who issued from the second side, is the wife of the Buddha of the first side, and the mother of the other Buddhas. (Comment on quotation 19.) 21. Salutation to Prdéjnd Puramitd, the infinite, who, when all was void, was revealed by her own will, out of the letter U. Prdjnd, the Sakti of Updya, the sustainer of all things, (Dharmiki) the mother of the world, (Jagat-métra ;) the Dhyénr ipa, the mother of the Buddhas. The modesty of women is a form of her, and the prosperity of all earthly things. She is the wisdom of mortals, and the ease, and the joy, and the emancipation, and the knowledge. Prdjndé is present every where. (Sadhana Maia.) Adi Sangha. 1. That A’mitabha, by virtue of his Samta-jnydn, created the Bodhi- satwa named Padma-pdni, and committed to his hands the Jotost. (Gunakaranda Vyiiha.) * Dharmadya-sangata Kamrupini, variously rendered, ‘ well got from the rise of virtue,’ ‘ well got from the rise or origin of the world;’ also as in text, Dhar- madya, the source of all things, signifies likewise the Voni, of which the type is atriangle. See 20. The triangle is a familiar symbol in temples of the Buddha Saktis, and of the Triad. f, The point in the midst represents either A’di Buddha or A’di Prajna, according to the theistic or atheistic tendency of his opinions who uses it. Our commentator is of the Vamdchér or Atheistic school, and such also is his text. + Type of creative power. Vay 2 AWAY Y RA € BATTY 9 La ~ s . NN amy cS eqenmsy ¢ WAAAY Yo ex qatfa | QNBAaMIas ( Rafawawaqs x aaagqaaad 2 aafagiuraqrs 2 Barfequawcsaarey & aqanfasfauamard = ¢ wie faa vats sarufa San Baete waaay o yifraarafamadd = sqafiaaat ¢€ Waadywiadd eo Za afaat: | ara farer fauafeat 2 ufeercafwat 2 vagina 2 ufaafwar 4 saafwat ¢ ufaafaafaar 9 sfwuraafwar = Haatea ¢ Waafwat ye Ta AAT: | waaay: &% dara: & faarwara: 2 azwgaanry: & Waray 8 Ta wa | Waa: 8 aaa R ready: =e feray ez qaqd 4 xfaqeraatfeaarar: | WT Btrewryat Frayer | wqagaa w. afeireayat z Bwuaaesuyal 8 Wayarwyar ev AVIA Y Wawel ¢ WHAT © BIIUya = yaaa ¢« BAARMA Yo WAAHITMAT VY Tarawa YX WaNAMAAT ve SIITATAT (8 HAISGHWYAT Vy SUIT (CF BMAALAZA ro BUFSHIRYaT UY adiat fants aya: SaUAAT Ve SIGTLYA x oO 93 94 Quotations from original Sanscrit {Frr. APPENDIX B. Classified Enumeration of the principal Objects of Bauddha Worship. Ekamndya. Upaya. ‘Adi- Buddha. Maha-Vairochana. Ekamndyt. Prajna. Prajna-paramita. Dwaydmndya. 1. 2, Upaya. Prajna, { Root of theistic doctrine. 1. 2. Prajna. Upaya, { Root of atheistic ditto. Trayamndaya. 2. iG 3. Dharma. Buddha. Sangha. 2. I. 3. Sangha. Buddha. Dharma. ie 2. ae Buddha. Dharma. Sangha. Pancha-Buddhamnaya. 4. 2. 1. 3. 5. Amitabha, Akshobhya. Vairochana. Ratnasambhava. Amoghasiddha. Pancha-Prajndmnayl. 4. 2. hs 3. 5. P4ndara. Lochan4. Vajradhdtwisvari. Mdémaki, Tara. Pancha-Sanghamndya. 4. 2. ite 3. 5. Padmapani. Vajrapani. Samantabhadra. Ratnapdni, Viswapani. Pancha-Sangha- Pr ajnamndyt. 4. 2. 1. 3. 5. Bhrikuti-taré. Ugratéré. Sitataraé. Ratnatara. Viswatdra. Matdntara-Pancha-Buddhdmndaya. ile 2. 3. 4. 5. Vairochana. Akshobhya. Ratnasambhava. Amitdbha. Amoghasiddha. Matdntara-Pancha-Prajndmndyt. We 245 ° 4. 5- Vajradh4twisvart. Lochané. MAmakt. Pandaré. Tard. Matdntara-Pancha-Sanghamnaya. 1. 2. 3. 4, 5. Samantabhadra. Vajrapdni. Ratnapdni. Padmapéni. Viswapani. Matdntara-Pancha-Sangha-Prajndmndyt. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Sitatéré. Ugratdré. Ratnatéré. Bhrikutitéra. Visvatard. Matdntara-Pancha-Buddhamndya. 4. 2. 1. 3. 5. Amitabha. Amoghasiddha. Vairochana. Ratnasambhava. Akshobhya. Matdntara-Pancha-Prajndmndyt. 4. 2. ile 3. 5. Tara. Mdémaki. Vajradhdtwisvari. Pdndar4. Lochana. Shad-A’mndya-Buddhah. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Vairochana. Akshobhya. Ratnasambhaya. Amitabha, Amoghasiddha. Vajrasatwa. 1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 95 Shat-Prajndmndyt. Ve 2. Se 4, 5. 6. 4 Vajradhétwisvari. Lochan4. Mémaki. Pdndaré. Tara. Vajrasatwatmika. Shat-Sanghdmnaya. }. 2. 3. 4, . . Samantabhadra. Vajrapdni. Ratnapani. Padmap4ni. Viswapéni. Ghantapani. Ménushtya-Sapta-Buddhamnaya. 1. 2. 3. 4, 5. 6. Te Vipasyi. Sikhi. Viswabhaé. Kak@tsanda. Kanakamuni. Kasyapa. S4kyasinha. Matdntara-Mdnushtya-Sapta-Buddhamndya. 6. 4. 2. es 3. 5. le Kasyapa. Kakftsanda. Sikhi. Vipasyi. Viswabhf. Kanakamuni. S4kyasinha. Prajnd-Misrita-Dhydni-Nava-Buddhdmndya. 2. 1. Bie Akshobhya. Vairochana-Vajradhatwisvari. Ratnasambhava. 8. 6. 4. = 5. ie 9. Pindaré. Lochana. Amitaébha. Amoghasiddha. Maémaki. Tara. Dhydni-Nava-Buddhdinndya. 4, 2. Te ‘ 3. 5. Amitabha. Akshobhya. Vairochana. Ratnasambhava. Amochasiddha. 8. 6. 7. 9. Vajradharma, Vajrasatwa. Vajraraja. Vajrakarma. DhyGni-Nava-Prajndmnayt. 4. 2. 1B 3. 5. Péndaré. Lochandé. Vajradhdtwisvari. Mdmaki. Tara. 8. . . : Dharmavajrini. VajrasatwAtmika. Ratnavajrini. MKarmavajrini. DhyGni-Nava-Sanghamndyah. 4. ° 1. 3. 5. Padmapdni. Vajrapdni. Samantabhadra. Ratnapani. Viswapéni. 8. 6. 7. 9. Dharmapani. Ghantapdni. Manipani. Karmapani. Misrita-Nava-Buddhémndydndm ete Misrita-Nava-Sanghamndydh. 2. . oe Maitreya. Avalokiteswara. Gaganaganja. 6. 4, 5. ilo Manjughosha, Samantabhadra. Vajrapani. Sarva-nivarana-vishkambhi. 2 5. 9. Kshitigarbha. Khagarbha. Misrita-Nava-Buddhamndyanam ete Nava-Dharmamndyéth Paustakah Buddha- Dhar - ma-sangha-Mandale Péijanakrame étan Milam. 2. 1. 3. Gandavyaha. Prajn4-piramitaé. Dasabhimiswara. 6. ; 4. . B Saddharmapundarika. Samadhiréja. Lankavatira. Tathagataguhyaka. 8. . Lalita-vistara. Suvarna-prabha. Nava-Bodhisatwa-Sangha-Prajndmndyah. 4. 2. l. 3. 5. Sitataéra. Maitrayani. Bhrikutitéra. Pushpatara. Ekajata. 8. 6. 7- g. Dipataré. Vdgiswari. DhGpatar4. Gandhatara. Nava- Devt-Prajndmnayt. 2. ie a 8. 4. Vajravidérini. Vasundharé. Ganapati-hridayé. Maérichi. Ushnisha-vijaya. 4 8. 9. Parnasavari. Grahamatriké. Pratyangiré. Dhwajdgrakeyfri. oO. 2 96 Notes on Geological Specimens from [Fxs. Misrita-Nava-Dharmamnayah. 4. 7 le 3. 5. Pandaré. Lochané. Vajradh4twiswari. Mémaki. Tara. Ss. 6. 7. 9. Pratyangiré. Vajrasatwatmiké. Vasundharé. Guhyeswari. Manushiya-Nava-Buddhaémnayah. 4. 2. 1. 3.. 5. Sikhi Ratnagarbha. Dipankara. Vipasyi. Viswabht. 8. 6 e 7 ° 9. Kasyapa. Kakutsanda. Kanakamuni. Sékyasinha. Mdanushtyé-Nava-Buddhdémndydi. die 2. 3. 4. 5. Dipankara. Ratnagarbha. Vipasyi. Sikhi. Viswabha. 6. A 8. . Kakutsanda. Keene! Kasyapa. Seine Ménushtya-Nava-Prajnémnéayt. I. 2. 3. 4, 5. Jwalavati. Lakshanavati. Vipasyanti. Sikhdémélini. Viswadhara, 6. : 8. Ee Kakudvati.. Kianithancandlint) Mahidhara. Scan Nava Bhikshu-Sanghamndyah. 1. 2. 3. 4. : Pradipeswara. Ratnaraja. Mahamati. Ratnadharé. A'kdsaganja. 6. : 8. ; Sakalamangala. Kanakaraja. Dharmodara,. Pe Iti Srt-Ekamndydadi-Navaémndya-DevatéGh Samaptdah. N.B. The authority for these details is the Dharma Sangraha, or catalogue raisonné of the terminology of Bauddha system of philosophy and religion. III.—Notes explanatory of a Collection of Geological Specimens from the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. By J. G. Maucoumson, Assistant Surgeon, Madras Establishment. Pl. V. I had the pleasure of forwarding from Madras, a selection of geolo- gicalspecimens, collected in May, 1833, between the cities of Hyderabad and Nagpur. I regret, that circumstances prevented my doing this sooner, and that the notes in explanation of the localities whence they ' were obtained, must now be short and imperfect ; I hope, however, that the specimens themselves will be of use in illustrating the geology of a tract of country hitherto undescribed, and which connects the formations of the south-east of the Deccan, with those in the neigh- bourhood of the valley of the Narbada. From my inability to identify, describe, and figure the numerous fossils, discovered in the tract of country between the Godavery and the town of Hinganghat, 47 miles south of Nagpur, and the importance of these, in reference to the questions as to the relative age of the great trap formation of the Deccan, and of the west of India, and the clayslate formation of Voysxry, with its associated sand- stone*, and the periods of elevation of the granitic rocks, on which * See his account of the diamond mines of Banganapilly.—As. Res. xviii. SDULES20fFT Ob GP FEE SIZE IMI HAM 5 sone c Ly, YALA Gee YL Pe a ake PIOPI TLOIU POUT YY POOH) WY, my Gs pop vy "G f 0 Ae aiaine & durg yp hy Wy (RS nee AER Ka Yu ‘P00 LIRILE | SIP PYYOPOY #% * # A Dy rose ee Wy A soon, om s eS : , YOY, = DAP IWAG pa es pun 3 Z cm OR aM eg : EE (f A 202, Ltes Y Wy Me Ly GTypos oe WILID LP SIQIY* DLO ID YO] GL Z. 2 Ayn 4, ge NY 18s 2 . z} iy \ NM app.teuLopbitoo ITHALOIYOD fO . poyoyr Simi Hi ii tue” esoae ae MYoUuLly, fopranurve, = ~ yg “Faso bs of Puro- LISQUYLD $f Yepuryy© Se Wy; e < 2un song. 2 (brogug- why 2) 210Y PIN BLO UL] PIY EF cponpunsy° sink ‘wie, lo 2 PaUTYy UWOLy cL AYRU00LLTIYNA aS Hys332g WNW 3 4 7 iy, 2 bo 5 “ . on OW 7p Ws) AN {2 oh? ., Sy ee 9EBF re SG de IDE) a POUL TY) © Hye Z ¢ é Wy, Ay g yerk yee Ny 4S = JIVIDYU0 SPPSSOTOUILOYY We apotinn LD % Oe shy, Ee. bi prepanap nobruscog wood9¥y _ aos fc MLO pel ) yen F gn A Id APA 7 1836.} the Country between. Hyderabad and Nagpur. 97 they appear universally to rest; I am induced, contrary to my former intention, to take to England with me, those specimens of which there are no duplicates. The separation of the collection would greatly lessen its value, by depriving me of the opportunity of comparing, with each other, and with arranged collections, the fragments of those of which duplicates were not preserved, and of thus restoring the fossils of which no perfect specimen was found. A selection of the most perfect were, also, sent to Mr. Lyrxt, but as he considers it requisite that numerous species should be ascertained previous to arriving at any conclusion as to the age of the fossiliferous rocks, it may be for the advantage of Indian geology, to submit the rest of the specimens to him; and on the characters being determined, to return a portion of them to India. There are, however, a sufficient number of duplicates to illustrate the outlines of the geology of the interesting tract of country referred to, and to connect the singular phenomena observed, with others, to the west and east of the route, and in the countries of the peninsula to the south, and the Bengal provinces to the north. The outline map includes several places, inserted in the plans published along with Dr. Vorsry’s papers and Captain JenxK1n’s Account of the Mineralogy of Nagpur, p. 199, of the 18th volume of the Asiatic Researches; the interval between which, it will assist in filling up. I shall seldom use mineralogical terms, except I have had an opportunity of comparing the specimens with those collected by persons well acquainted with the science; and when they do occur, an examination of the specimens will afford the means of correcting any errors that may be fallen into. The geological relations of the Strata were ascertained with as much care as the nature of the country permitted, and no exertion was spared in tracing them as far as pos- sible, both on the plains, at the foot of the hills, and their most inaccessible summits. My avocations however were unfavourable, and a person more at leisure would find an ample field to reward his labours. He must, however, be prepared to pursue his examinations in the height of the hot season, when the grass and wood jungle are less luxuriant, and the plains free from their covering of jawdré and other grain. Some account has already been published* of the country between Masulipatam and Hyderabad, on which I had not an opportunity of making many observations. One or two points, however, deserve to - be noticed, as the specimens collected in this part of the‘route are similar to those found north of Hyderabad as far as Nirmal, and throw some light on appearances on which important inferences have been too hastily founded. * Asiatic Researches, vol. xviii. 98 Notes on Geological Specimens from [Frs. At page 70, volume il. of the Guranines tn ScIEnce, a desire is expressed by a gentleman at home, stated to be of high scientific acquirements, that specimens should be collected from the face of the hill of Beirwarah, where it has been cut through by the Kistnah river; and the author of the queries seems to be impressed with a belief, that a lake had formerly existed some way above it, towards Warapilly. The distance, however, between the Warapilly ghat and Beirwarah, is considerable; and I do not think, that there are any decided appearances at the former of the blue limestone of the clay- slate formation™ having constituted the margin of a lake. The strata at the upper part of the rising ground to the north of the river are as hard as those lower in the valley, or on the opposite bank. A specimen of this rock, of a pure white color, and of great hardness, which I broke from the summit of the ascent above Warapilly, well known to travel- lers from the difficulty of riding over the large smooth slabs of marble, and which would have been admirably adapted for lithographic purposes, had it been free from minute crystals of quartz, was sent to you about three years ago by Captain Smiru of the Madras Engineers. The junction of this rock with the granite to the north, could not be seen, the country being flat, and covered with lowjungle. Jaspers and fragments of trap are found in the bed of the river, and the granite to the north is intersected by numerous dykes of greenstone, usually run- ning from 8. E. by E. to N. W. by W. To the south of the river, the country is lower, and for some way beyond the town of Dachapilly, the limestone, usually dipping slightly to the south, continues to be the surface rock ; which, whenever I have met with it, onthe Kistnah, at Cuddapah, near Auk, and the diamond mines of Banganapilly, and at Tarputri in Bellary, or in the neighbourhood of the Wurdah, affords the best indications of success to experiments in boring ; copious springs spontaneously rising from it, or being lost in the interstices between its nearly horizontal strata. At Beirwarah, the river Kistnah appears to have cut a channel through the short ridge of hills, which terminates on either side in rather precipitous cliffs, and admits the stream into the great alluvial plains extending to the mouths of the Kistnah and Godavery. Above, the country has much the appearance of having once been an exten- sive lake, the bottom of which now forms the rich plain extending to Condapilly to the N. W., and Munglegherry to the south of the river. It * IT use this term of Dr. Voysny, but think its adoption more objectionable than argillaceous limestone, used by Colonel CuLLEN in the Madras Transac- tions. It would be better to characterise it as ‘‘ blue limestone,”’ ‘‘ Cuddapak limestone,’’ or other term involving no opinion as to its geological relations. 1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 99 is probably here, that Captain Hurgert’s correspondent observed that the “hardness and composition of the rock appeared to differ, accord- ing to the pressure they have been subjected to.” I believe, that, spe- cimens of the rocks of the bottom of the hill, have been sent to the Asiatic Society by Dr. Bunza, and that they are composed of the pecu- liar gneiss of the coast. Felspar is common, and some of the varieties possess considerable beauty. There are the remains of a rock pagoda cut ina mass of compact felspar, above the road, leading along the edge of the precipice over the river, portions of which have fallen, the natural fissures of the rock exposing it to this kind of decay. On the top of the hill the soft friable white rock, No. 2*, is found, and is carried away by the natives for the purpose of whitening the walls of their houses. It corresponds exactly with specimens from Vizagapatam, described as gneiss by Hrynz, and containing imperfect garnets. It is not, however, either its site as lying above other rocks, or its ex- posed situation, that has led to its decay, so much as the composition of the ridge where the edges of the strata rise to the south. The strata dip at a very considerable angle a little to the south of east. A care- ful survey of the hills from the summit shows, that they are short insulated ranges, such as are found over the Circars and other tracts, rising from a level country; and that had a lake existed in the plain above, every slight rise of the river would have carried its waters round their shoulders to the north and south. The rise in the line of bearing of the strata of the hill north of the river, and the appearance of that to the south, do not support the opinion that the lake was drained by the river deepening its channel. I do not know whether it can be supposed to derive any support from a tale told of the river god (Krishna) having induced the patron of the hill, who seems to be a form of Shiva, to permit him to get his head through, and that then he forced a passage. The granitic hills of Condapilly are seen a few miles to the N. W.; and in the midst of the plain, rising out of it like an island, are some great masses of hornblende rock, No. 6; and Dr. Benza informs me that he saw dykes of the same kind of green- stone passing through the gneiss at Beirwarah. A mile and a half further on the road to Hyderabad is a quarry of granitic rock, devoid of hornblende, and containing only a very little felspar and a few scat- tered garnets. A little beyond this, the rocks assume the decided cha- racters of the great granite formation of the Deccan, with which Dr. Voysny’s papers have made your readers acquainted. The geological structure of the Circars is in nothing so peculiar, as in the extensive * The numbers refer to specimens deposited in the Society’s Cabinet.—Ep. 100 Notes on Geological Specimens from [Frs. distribution of the singular sandstone-like gneiss described by Huyne; and which, in hand specimens, it is often impossible to distinguish from the sandstone also found in many localities: and I do not know a more interesting subject of inquiry, than that of ascertaining whe- ther this singular rock is metamorphic, and the sandstone altered by the intrusion of the great masses of porphyry so commonly found near these equivocal rocks, and by the numerous greenstone dykes and masses scattered over the whole of these districts. The diamond mines of Mulavelly are at no great distance from Condapilly, to the right of the road, situated in a basin between hills covered with jungle. The sides of which, one-third from the top, were found by Dr. W. Davip- son to be strewed with a sandstone conglomerate; but he was pre- vented getting to the top by the approach of night. Fragments of this are found in the gravel, of which I believe specimens have already been sent to the Society, intermixed with much kankar: and from some pits in the valley, most of the lime used in the district is pro- cured. The soil of the country on the Hyderabad Military road, after leaving the alluvial plain above Beirwarah, is formed of decomposed granite, but contains much lime. This admixture, and the kankar nodules, are probably of recent origin; as I observed, in a valley to the right of the road north of the hill fort of Yeralagundah, about 18 miles from Beirwarah, a stream trickling over granite rocks, and depositing lime on all the branches and rocks around. Some pieces of stone of considerable size have thus been formed, and recent specimens, con- taining remains of branches, or of grass, easily crumble to pieces, and are carried away by the stream. The source of the spring I was pre- vented from ascertaining, by the approach of night; and as an excuse for leaving this and other interesting circumstances unexplored, I must state, that being in Medical charge of the European regiment, during a sickly season, I could not command my own time of marching, or sufficient leisure. The character of the granite of the Deccan continues well marked throughout the remaining part of the route to Hyderabad, and dykes and imbedded masses of a fine crystalline greenstone or hornblende rock of great hardness are frequently seen. These last have occasion- ally irregular shapes, and in one or two instances, that of the italic or other irregular curve; and near Secunderabad, they appear to be connected with the dykes, in the neighbourhood of which they are found. It was also frequently observed, that the various substances entering into the composition of the granite in the neighbourhood of these dykes or masses, formed very large and distinct crystals; and the imbedded greenstone, though often intimately united with the 1836.) the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 101 granite, was in others more loosely connected, and easily separated by the progress of decomposition, leaving rounded cavities in the rock. A circumstance of more importance, however, is the occurrence of the beds of kankar in this tract, being, as far as I have observed, al- ways near some of the greenstone dykes or beds, and frequently under or intermingled with masses of granite, which is in a rapid state of decay: these are usually rounded, partly from the progress of decom- position, and sometimes from the tendency to concentric forms, which it occasionally undoubtedly assumes. The small detritus is in some places accumulated to a great depth, and it has been stated by Dr. Curistiz, that this debris is, at a considerable depth, again consoli- dated by pressure. In the Edinburgh Journal of Science, 1828-29, this is also mentioned asa fact, common to the rocks of other parts of India. With every respect for his authority, I cannot avoid the con- viction, that the inference was founded on imperfect observation, and that it has since been employed in Europe, in support of an ill-founded theory. No. 15, is ‘* Mhurrum” or gravel found in deepening a well at Bolaram, (six miles from Secunderabad,) upwards of 50 feet deep, during the very dry season of 1832, and is not in the slightest degree consolidated. A loose block, which had resisted decomposition, was found above it, and contains mica, (No. 15,) a rare ingredient in the granite of Hyderabad. Much of the debris at Secunderabad is, how- ever, consolidated by lime, which is seen to agglutinate the fragments, or to pass in vein-like lines or nodules through the gravel. Occa- sionally there are only a few fragments of quartz or felspar scattered through the kankar, or they appear to be inserted into the surface, as in No: 10, which is extremely hard. Generally, however, the agglu- tinated gravel is friable, and the cement less obvious. The debris is also sometimes united into pulverulent masses, by the oxidation of the iron contained in the sienite ; but this takes place at the surface, and seldom acquires any great degree of hardness. Specimens of the granite in the neighbourhood of Hyderabad are numbered 14; and the appearance of the surface of that polished by the continual passage of hyenas, in the entrance of the caverns formed in the pile of gneiss or granite of the “ Chita hill,’ near the cantonment, has been described in the 1st volume of the Journal of the Asiatic Society, (No. 12.) The greenstone occasionally has distinct crystals of felspar scattered through it, without the porphyry thus formed, losing the remarkable degree of toughness possessed by the black rock; but, as observed by Sir H. Davy, the decomposition of the felspar is more _rapid than of the other parts, (No. 19.) The greenstone is familiarly P 102 Notes on Geological Specimens from (Fes. known by the name of “‘ black granite,” and forms, when finely polish- ed, the beautiful tombstones of the Golconda mausoleums, and the pillars of that in which Hyper and Tippu Suxtrawn are deposited, at Seringapatam. The remarkable quartz veins in the neighbourhood of Hyderabad have been described by Voysry and Curisriz ; it is there- fore only necessary to mention, that they occasionally exhibit a more or less regular crystallization, and at the same time, acquire the fine tints of the amethyst. It is seldom that they are sufficiently regular and perfect for the purposes of the lapidary; such specimens were, however, discovered a few years ago, close to the European barracks, and at a little distance from a great greenstone dyke, but not in direct contact with the quartz bed containing the crystals, which, on the contrary, passes into the ordinary sienitic granite of the country. The colour of the amethystine quartz seems to be derived from magnetic iron ore, which is disseminated in grains both through the milky quartz and the granite, amongst which they are found, and has not been noticed elsewhere in the neighbourhood. The amethystine quartz was again met with 60 miles north of Secunderabad, near Bekantrpettah, in loose masses, along with that variety of laterite found near Beder, and described by Voysry, and which is seen along the coasts of Malabar and at Boranghur in the Southern Concan resting on basalt. The rising ground on which they were found is composed of granite; but the country around is of a black trap soil, and numerous low flat ranges of basaltic hills are seen to the north, the east, and the west. A vein of white quartz is also met with as at Secunderabad, but the specimens differ, in containing irregular shaped geodes of agate, lined with crys- tals, or a red opake mamillary quartz, approaching to calcedony. The iron in these is usually imperfectly mixed with the quartz, and from the appearances above described, and the quartz having in several specimens been changed into a red jasper, the surrounding trap may be supposed to have altered the rocks. The colouring matter seems to have been afforded by the laterite, which is found in the neighbour- hood apparently in dykes, and in contact with the quartz which inter- sects the granite: but there being no section, and the water-worn surface only being visible, no evidence could here be obtained, in support of any of the opinions entertained by geologists, relative to this singular formation. The amethysts are also found south of Jan- ganapilly, and at Kamareddypettah, and Mr. W. GeppEs met with them, of a greenish yellow tinge, south of Balcondah. Granite Tract between Hyderabad and the Nirmul Hills. The valleys and some plains about Bekanirpettah are composed of black soil, mixed with calcedonies, &c.; and to the west of the road 1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 103 are some flat hills, which | had not an opportunity of examining. They corresponded in their steep sides and flat summits with the trap hills to be presently described, and Mr. Grppzs informed me, that they are formed of amygdaloidal trap, based on decaying granite. With these interruptions, the granite continues to Kamareddypettah, but the mamillary eminences, and the tors and logging stones formed from their decomposition, are of more rare occurrence. The granite, however, still continues to exhibit the lamellar structure, and is easily split into large slabs. In some instances, where the lamelle are thin, the vertical fissures which frequently intersect them in right lines, and greatly assist the progress of decomposition, cause the rock to break into regular rhomboids. The last ‘‘ tor stones’’ observed on the road to Nagpur were north of Jakrampilly, where they occurred on a lofty hill, on which there is a small pagoda. After leaving the basaltic hills near Bekantrpettah and Jungampilly, black soil is seen in the valley below a large tank, and some dykes of greenstone pass the road in the direc- tion of S. by E. to N. by W. at Kamareddypettah: the granite is lamellar white, with black mica and some hornblende, and fragments of amethystine quartz are scattered about. A little to the north of the town, on ascending a very gentle ascent, the red soil and granite give way to black soil, derived from decomposed trap rock, which is concen- tric on the top, but lower down is arranged in imperfect strata. On descending the hill to the north, the black soil conceals the granite for a short distance ; but at the bottom of the hill, and in the bed of a small water-course, it is seen of the same appearance as before. Immediately beyond this, there is a very remarkable hill, which is seen from a considerable distance standing out from the gently indulat- ing country, and possessing the peculiar form of the trap hills of the Deccan. It lies five miles north of Kamareddypettah, and four miles south of the village of Nugger, and is marked on the specimens as the “hill of Nugger.” On approaching it by a very gradual ascent, the soil changes to black; and all at once the hill rises with nearly perpendicular sides, constituting a narrow ridge, about half a mile in length, and of a shape approaching to that of an Italic / running nearly N. by E. toS. by W. The hill is entirely formed of basalt, as its form had led me to expect. Above and in the body of the hill it has a concentric globular structure, the external layers of which are remarkably soft, and on the top of the hill resemble a peperino ; lower down it is soft, of a greenish color, and soapy feel, (Nos. 66 and 69.) The nuclei left undecayed on the top, are exceedingly hard and tough, ef a deep black colour, and contain large crystals of olivine, and small _globules of calcedony. Many small but very characteristic specimens Pp 2 104 Notes on Geological Specimens from (Fes. of this last mentioned mineral, which had been imbedded between the concentric nodules, were picked up (No. 67). At the bottom of the hill, the basalt loses its concentric form, and occurs in tables or lamine, having the appearance of having been subjected to violent forces. It sounds under the hammer when struck. Various specimens of the trap are much loaded with iron, sometimes in grains of a reddish brown colour; at others, it appears as if it had been partially smelted, and is not very different in its appearance from some examples of laterite. Much of the “kankar” that abounds in the soil is coloured with iron, while other portions are perfectly white ; it is not, however, confined to the soil, as it was observed to have formed between two laminz of the basalt, and by the gradual deposition of the lime, to have nearly broken up the upper stratum. From between some of the vertical fissures in the tables, and round the large rounded masses that occur in them, a formation of ‘‘ kankar” projects in several places half a foot from the surface of the rock. It was evident, that the water loaded with lime, percolating through the alluvial black soil, or through the rock itself, gradually deposits the earth, where its accumulation is favoured by circumstances, of which the most important is the occur- rence of an impervious rock or soil below that supplymg the lime; and this explains the absence of organic remains in this recent forma- tion, except where, in soils rich in lime, it forms round the roots of plants, and unites with itself, here and there, a fresh-water shell. No. 47, is a specimen illustrative of these views, taken from the south bank of the Godavery. The rock over which the river flows is granite, intersected by some great dykes of greenstone, (No. 44,) whose surface has a smooth metallic coating where washed by the stream. They project eight or ten feet, and are divided into numerous rhomboidal masses by fissures, into which lime has been deposited; and in the bed of the river, numerous fragments of calcedonies, zeolites, and other minerals found in volcanic rocks, are partially cemented by lime. The banks are mostly composed of black cotton soil, and the lower part is covered with small irregular loose slabs, resembling the dried cow-dung used for fire; which are found in situ projecting from the bank, and connected above with portions formed round the roots of plants, and below with other layers spread out between different strata of the alluvial earth. From the top of the hill of Nugger above spoken of, numerous in- sulated hills, and short ranges of a similar form, are seen to rise from the granitic tract to the east and west, but they do not observe any particular line of bearing, although the whole group seems to pass ’ ina direction from east to west, like the other basalt ranges of the ~ 1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 105 table land. From this hill to four or five miles north of Nirmul (a large town nine miles north of the Godavery) as in almost all other parts of the peninsula, is intersected by numerous greenstone dykes, which generally run from N. by W. to S. by E. These dykes are of great importance to the agriculture of the country, as the granitic soil is extremely thin and poor, except in the valleys, where the clay form- ed by the decomposed felspar accumulates, and bears fine crops of rice, for which water is collected in tanks, often in a great measure form- ed of natural mounds of rounded or angular fragments of greenstone, which is little subject to decomposition. At Jakrampilly, there is a remarkable dyke of this kind, which can be traced for several miles by a series of tanks on one side of it: it is also remarkable in exhibiting, where it rises into a small hill near the village, the gradual transition of the granite into the greenstone, and in the latter, having a tendency to split into regular forms. When once a fissure, however small, is formed, the rain washes a gradually increasing portion of lime and other soluble parts of its surface into the interstices, until the masses are separated, in which the alterations of temperature probably assist. It is difficult to account for the manner in which the greenstone passes into granite in this instance; but it is evident, that it has been raised by the granite above the continuation of the dyke at either end of the hill. I have been more minute in the description of the hill of Nug- ger, principally with the view of affording some information relative to the distinction of the basalt ridges, which have burst through the gra- nite of the Deccan, from the greenstone dykes, which are of such frequent occurrence. The presence of olivine; the soft wacke in which the globular basalt is embedded ; the less crystalline structure ; the pas- sage into amygdaloid containing calcedonies, zeolites, &c. and the gra- nite in the neighbourhood of all the smaller masses of basalt, differing little from that at a distance, may perhaps be sufficient to distinguish these important rocks from each other. The separation of the differ- ent ingredients of the granite into large crystals, and the insulated masses of greenstone found in it near the dykes, prove, that the rock had been softened by heat ; but judging from the appearance and great length of many of these dykes, I do not think that they were of con- temporaneous formation with the rock through which they pass. Near one of these, at Secunderabad, a smooth, wall-like dyke of white gra- nite passes through the sienite. At Balcondah, 21 miles north of Jakrampilly, these dykes occur on the large scale, and the granite is much separated into its constituent parts, the felspar being of a fine red colour. Nine miles further north, in the bed of the Godavery, the felspar is of a still more beautiful red 106 Notes on Geological Specimens from (Fas. colour; but good specimens could not be removed. Veins of quartz also occur at Balcondah, with turbid milky spots, as if altered by heat, and large imbedded crystals, (No. 42.) * Sichel Hills ; locally known as the Nirmul range. Nirmul is surrounded by granite hills, containing much hornblende and a little schorl; and the summits of some of them appear to resem- ble the greenstone of Jakrampilly, but they were not examined. After passing some small ranges of hills, the ascent of the Nirmul chain commences five or six miles north of the town, and the road continues amongst lofty hills covered with forest, by a succession of ascents and descents, for 40 miles, when it descends by the Muklegandy ghat to the town of Eidlabad, nearly on the level of the flat country of Berar. The southern ascent of Nirmul ghat, is the most deep and difficult, the hills not rising in a series of terraces as they do to the north; yet it is not easy to ascertain the precise direction of the part of the hill range over which this pass leads, on account of the projecting spurs and low hills at their base, the thick forest with which it is covered, and from its having something of a curved form. The general direc- tion is from W. N. W. to E. S. E., which corresponds with that of the Sichil range, to which these hills belong, and which extends from the great lake water of Lonar to the neighbourhood of Munga- pett, where the silicious fossil wood (marked “ fossil wood,” Munga- pett), was found in 1828. On approaching the hills, the granite is observed to become soft, and to decompose rapidly. In the bed of a stream it has a remarkable concentric appearance, which was also ob- served in the centre of the hills south of Thitnoor, where it is covered by trap, on which fossils were found. No schistose rock was found here, but 20 miles to the east of Nirmul, and a few miles south of the mountains, hornblende slate occurs on the granite, and along with it the magnetic iron ore described by Voysuy in the Journal of the Asiatic Society, vol. II. It is nota sand, as might be inferred from his de- scription ; but the grains of iron are either mixed with the hornblende or occur in a sandstone-looking gneiss, from which the hornblende had disappeared. Specimens of the rock, which I saw dug up, and of the sand formed by pounding it on protruding masses of granite, are for- warded. The softer pieces were at once reduced to powder, while the harder were first roasted; and the one was then easily separated by washing in small shelving hollows dug in the clay. It is then melted, and its quality said to be improved by using teak branches: the iron is soft, but part is used in the mixture from which wootz steel is form- ed. The strata of the schists have been broken and elevated, but the * Also called ‘‘ Shesha.’’ 1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 107 dip and direction are in no two places the same. Here also, the granite was seen, in the bed of a torrent, in thin concentric scales, not unlike the extremities of petrified trees, caused by the unequal waste of the component parts, the quartz projecting unaltered. On approaching the hills, the soil gradually became black, with scat- tered fragments of calcedony; and at the first part of the ascent, which is for some distance very gradual, a singular fragment (No. 49) of semi-vitrified matter was met with, containing small white crystals of felspar. It could not be distinguished froma piece of granite fused in a steel furnace, with which it was compared by Dr. Voyssy. At the same place there were fragments so much like iron slag, that till I found them in a large mass resembling a dyke, I supposed that they were the product of a furnace, (No. 49.) The granite continues the surface rock a little further, passing into a black hard basalt, inter- mixed with many white spots, apparently of felspar ; but Isaw none of them rounded or distinctly crystallized, forming amygdaloid or green- stone porphyry, such as occur at the lower part of the pass leading to Eidla4bad. On ascending the last part of the base of the hills, the surface was strewed with calcedonies, quartz, (No. 52) and other minerals of the same family, and amongst them, a few fragments of a softish white clayey and silicious stone, containing small shells of fresh water families. The trap then became softer, more vesicular with calcedonies, zoolites, &c. imbedded, and the surface covered with tabular crystals of the same kind as those so remarkable in the Poonah trap rocks; and latterly concentric, the external layers decomposing, and the nucleus lying in a soft greenish wacke. I spent several hours in ascending the highest points of the range, but was unable to discover any beds of fossil shells ; large blocks of quartz were, however, observed, with a singu- larly angular surface, and sometimes with fine capillary crystals, much of which was found with the fossil fragments ; and afterwards, in the same position and partaking of the characters of the fossiliferous masses found in siti. These blocks were seen extending along the steep face of the hill at the same level as if they had been forced out of the mountain, or rather, as if the basalt, when erupted, had covered, and partially melted the bed on which it lay, and thus caused the sin- gular appearance of those blocks. The highest summit east of the pass is caped by some horizontal strata, having some resemblance to sandstone that had been altered and blackened by heat; what its real nature was, I could not determine. The hills, for 44 miles by the road, are ene in terraces with steep sides and flat summits, rising now and then into conical eleva- tions, with rounded or flat tops, and inclosing narrow valleys, abounding 108 Notes on Geological Specimens from — “[Frr. in streams, or small table lands with water every where near the surface. On some of the ridges, the globular basalt becomes columnar, near which no trace of fossils, and hardly any calcedonies have been found. A thick wood and grass jungle, composed of very different plants from those most common on the granite hills, cover the whole tract, and render it unhealthy for the greater part of the year. In a deep valley, about the middle of the hills, where the Kurm or Kurrum river passes through them, the basalt is seen to rest on friable granite, (as near Nirmul to the south and Eidlabad to the north, and at one or two other places,) and a level plain of considerable extent and deep black colour extends to Etchoda to the neighbourhood of the shelly rock. The fossils were first found at Munoor, and between that village and Thitnoor, which is near the top of the Maklegandy ghaut. The most remarkable were found in the beautiful grey chert*, which either projects from the basalt in which it is imbedded, or rests in large blocks on the surface. The side on which they rest is remarkably smooth and even, while the others are rough and covered with bivalve shells of great size, and some of them having the epidermis still entire, resembling a recent bed of shells on the sea shore. A few univalves also occur converted into flint, and it is remarkable, that one small bivalve, thus altered, retains its colours. The masses are evidently in siti, and have probably been consolidated by the basalt, with which they are surrounded, or on which they rest. Some specimens exhibit a mixture of sand and mud, merely slightly agglutinated and intermixed with fragments of shells; the greater part is converted into chert spotted with fragments, or containing the shells in a perfect state; in other places, the materials have arranged themselves into an enamel- like substance around irregular cavities containing fine crystals of purplish quartz, and in one specimen a formation of calcspar has taken place. Throughout the rock perfect bivalve shells, both closed or open, occur in the situation in which they had lived and been entombed. The most perfect are closed, and some of them are easily separated from the rock to which they are slightly united at a few points only ; they are filled with the stone, mixed with fragments of minute shells, and some are entirely converted into chert, which retains the form even of the ligaments so completely as almost to lead one to expect to be able to open them. Between Munoor and Thitnoor, masses of red chert project from amongst the basalt, and contain various shells, mostly univalves of small size, and some of them evidently belonging to fresh water genera. Near to these many fragments of different kinds were found * See labels on specimens. 1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 109 lying loose on the surface, and abounding in shells of various families. (See specimens.) Those in the green crystalline mass, resembling an ore of copper, were in many instances converted into quartz crystals, retaining the perfect form of the shells; one of these of exquisite beauty, which has been unfortunately broken, was found in the interior of a larger one: others were imbedded in a tough white clay rock, so soft as to soil the fingers. The greatest part consisted of a siliceous rock, partly converted into a black bituminous flint, or a coarse quartz, partially altered into calcedony, into which the majority of the shells were converted. Some, on the contrary, retained the structure of the shell unaltered, and effervesced with acids. Amongst these, the fragments containing the fossil seeds of chara, associated with fresh-water shells, were found. The gyrgonites were not observed at the time the specimen was found, but the rock to which it belonged could not be far distant, as the shells are of the Same species as in other specimens, having a similar mineralogical structure. In other fragments, remains of grasses appearing half con- sumed were seen; and in the large protruding mass of red chert, containing shells converted into calcedony, I discovered what I take to be the tooth of an herbivorous quadruped. A few of the shells I believe to be marine, and at the distance of half a mile, the principal masses of grey chert, containing the large marine shells, were found. On descending towards Thitnoor, granite is seen at one place, and above, much quartz, having a slag-like surface of the kind seen above Nirmul occurs. A few specimens of black chert, with shells, were picked up in the bed of a nulla at Thitnoor, where it was also found in sitd. A loose piece of reddish and green flint, with shells, was also met with in a ravine three miles further north. Much lime and kankar was here mixed with the black soil, or was deposited in the water- courses; the greater part probably derived from the decomposed basalt, or from such layers of a soft white limestone, as were found between the laminz of basalt, in digging pits to obtain water for the troops,” when encamped at Etchoda. A compact stratified limestone, however, occurs in the vicinity. The pass from Thitnoor, called the Muklegandy ghat, is formed of several terraces, of which three only are remarkable, and a steep descent between each. The surface rock of the second terrace is a rough, white limestone, which appeared to be consolidated in nodules, until it was broken, and found to consist of a great variety of shells, many of great size, but difficult to remove entire, forming a rock of a crystalline texture. The strata are horizontal, and in one place, where it is cut through by a torrent, the rock is 12 feet thick, and zs seen to Q 110 Notes on Geological Specimens from [Frs. rest directly on granite of a reddish color. The shells are of very vari- ous forms : several belong to the genus Ostrea of Linnmus ; one very perfect Cardia was entire, both valves being connected, and one frag- ment, of a very large shell, has the water-worn appearance often seen on the sea-shore. The edges of the large shells are harder than the rest of the rock, and stand out from it, which has led the natives to compare its surface to the impression left by the feet of sheep, and to name it ‘‘ Bakri ke paun ka patthar.” Over the surface, many frag- ments of basalt, calcedonies, &c. are scattered, derived from a lofty spur of the higher point of the mountain, which rises precipitously from the terrace within a few hundred feet of the fossil strata. A very remarkable mass of soft peperino, resembling ashes, of which a specimen is forwarded, seemed to proceed from the limestone, where it begins to be lost amongst the debris of the mountain; and amongst the loose frag- ments, were some very tough clayey stones, having the forms of small univalve shells adhering and embedded. The facts above described, and the nature of the different fossil beds, more especially this great accumulation of marine shells resting imme- diately on granite, and the fossil seeds of charze, now perhaps first found in India, leave no doubt on my mind, that this wild mountain country, now covered with a dense forest, had once been the bed of an inland sea or great estuary, on whose shore the chare and associated fresh- water shells had flourished. On descending the pass towards Hidlabad, the rock changes to amygdaloidal trap, with occasional masses of greenstone porphyry, having large crystals of felspar imbedded. The opake milk-white quartz, and the beautiful white porous crystalline mineral, which accom- pany the fossils, were found here, and were not met with elsewhere. At the foot of the pass, granite re-appears, and protrudes in great masses from the soil, for about four miles on either side of the town of Eidlabad*. Basaltic Tract between Hidlabad and Nagpur. The greater variety of rocks that occur between Eidlaébad and Nag- pur, and the interesting appearances they exhibit, will render it necessary to enter somewhat more into detail_in describing the localities whence the specimens were collected; so as to afford the means of determining their relations to each other, and to the fossil deposits already described 5 as well as to the great western trap formation, and the stratified rocks to the north and south. * The localities of some other minerals found in the Nirmul hills are marked on the specimens. The blood-red chert found in the valley of Ankni is remarkable. ; 1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Ndgpur. Yl The bed of the small river of Eidlabid (see map) is covered by numerous fragments of the argillaceous blue limestone, so well known as underlying the diamond breccia in the Cuddapah district south of the Kistnah. Three miles higher up, the stream runs over the slightly inclined strata of a fine white sandstone, having some quartz fragments imbedded, rising towards some lofty ranges of trap formation to the east, (the Manik-gurh hills*,) and are some places converted into a quartz-like mass, as is seen in some of the Cuddapah sandstones. It probably rests on the blue limestone, which is seen to pass into a soft bluish or reddish clayslate in the bank of a stream a few miles north. About 10 miles N. of Eidlabad, the limestone is found on the surface, forming smooth slabs, having much calcareous spar and rock crysta] between the strata, and in their veins through the rock, and in the course of the natural figures, numerous small round perforations are arranged in lines, and occasionally filled with soft calcareous matter. On a rising ground south of Zeynad, the marble had occasionally a dip of 40 degrees; but for the most part it was nearly horizontal, and the direction of the dip was quite irregular. In the nala of Zeynad, which runs over limestone, there is much tuff, having small pieces of the limestone imbedded, and evidently formed from the water of the stream (specimens No. 85); a similar formation is, however, found in a few places on the high level ground to the S. W. To the east of the village a gently rising ground extends nearly N. E. and. W. for about three miles, and terminates in a small hill, which rises rather abruptly. The slope is formed of nearly horizontal slabs of marble, the edges of the strata being exposed by the gradual rise of the surface. In following the ridge to within half a mile of the little hill to which it rises, a singular appearance presented itself: a dyke of perfectly vertical strati- fication, about three feet in thickness, projects two feet from the general surface; its exterior is singularly irregular and altered, the constituents of the rock being formed into crystalline or flint-like minerals of lime, argil, or silex, while the internal structure retains the characters of the blue limestone. On following this natural wall for about half a mile, it is concealed by globular basalt, which has burst through the strata, and in forming the termination of the little ridge, has covered the surrounding limestone, of which a portion has been so singularly dis- placed. The basalt is vesicular, and resembles much of that found in the Nirmul hills. No fossils were found here; but in the ascent from -the second terrace of the Muklegandy ghat, where the great bed of marine shells was incumbent on granite, the same limestone was seen * Tne Manik-gurh hills run from N. by E. to S. by W. almost at right angles to the Nirmul range. Q 2 112 Notes on Geological Specimens from (Fxs. in sith, greatly broken up by the eruption of the precipitous trap ridge, on which it was seen. The thickness of the grass and wood jungle prevented its being traced with sufficient accuracy. Fragments of the same rock were also seen at Thitnoor; and a very similar rock was observed in horizontal strata at Muneer, not far from some great blocks, containing marine fossils, in one specimen of which small univalve shells were found. Butas this locality was only examined by torch light, I could form no judgment as to the formation being the same ; although the total absence of fossils in the blue limestone, - over extensive tracts nm which I have searched for them, incline me to think that they are different. The relative age of the blue hmestone and great trap formation, to which these hills belong, being ascertained by these and other facts ; it may be hoped, that a careful comparison of the fossils will assist in determining the period to which other rocks occurring to the north and south belong. I have not been able to detect amongst them any of the Himalaya fossils; but some fragments found in indurated clay at Jirpoh, near the hot springs in the valley of the Nerbada, and in a specimen from the Gawilgurh fossil rock, described by Dr. Voysry in the 18th vol. of the As. Res. appear to belong to some of the same shells. The march to the Payngunga river is over a flat country of black soil, modified in some places by a mixture of earth derived from slate clay, which appears occasionally at the surface, and of the same kind as that found below the limestone of Cuddapah, or which takes its place under the diamond breccia of Banganapilly. Jaspers, striped red and white, are found in the black soil. Scattered over this extensive plain are a number of small conical hillocks of white kankar, apparently formed by springs issuing from the centre, and now dried up: in some of them the apex is a little depressed. Several long straight ranges are seen at a distance, generally flat on the summits, but occasionally rising into cones, with a lengthened base, corresponding to the direc- | tion of the hills. About half up the greatest height a remarkable line extends all along, on which the summits appear to rise as on a terrace, or like the parallel roads of Glen Roy. The pebbles of the Payngunga are principally calcedonies of a red- dish color and the blue limestone. No. 93 is a specimen of the calcareous sandy tuff from the banks of this fine river; it is found as high as 25 feet above the water at the fort; and is always horizontal, with black soil between the layers, which are from an inch to three feet thick. The surface is irregular, but seldom or ever shoots into branches like the tuifa of the Godavery, and holes occasionally occur in 1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 113 the layers, from a deficiency of lime; in other places, it projects three or four feet, in consequence of the soft soil being washed away. In one of the specimens, numerous recent shells are imbedded, which corre- spond in situation to a layer of these left in the sand by the last fall of the river ; and it is evident, that the tuffa is formed from the infiltra- tion of the lime with which the black soil and the water of the river abound, into layers of sand. In all these rivers, and in the stream of Bibbery and others running into the Godavery above Badrachellam, beds of limestone conglomerate, cementing agates and calcedonies, are continually forming. The country between the Payngunga and Kair has at all seasons Many springs and streams of pure water; which give a lively and beautiful green to the vegetation, when the surrounding country is burned up by the scorching heats of May*. The first of these streams is at Lingtee, the water of which is loaded with lime, which it depo- sits on its bed in a thick incrustation of tuff. Loose pieces of branches, petrified by lime, were found on the banks, and a wall of kankar six feet high in contact with No. 95, seemed to have been formed from a spring which had gushed from a fissure in the blue limestone, which is here the surface rock, and rests on a reddish, very friable slate clay, as is seen in a section a mile further down the stream. The black flint, No. 96, resembling anthracite, was found higher up. This stream, which, in the driest weather, has sufficient water to drive a mill, is said to have its source about six miles distant in a low range of hills, over which the road passes more to the east, a little to the north of Ur- juna, and three and a half miles from Lingtee. At this village, a small stream takes its rise in a hot spring, whose temperature, as it gushes from beneath the wall of a half ruined reservoir was, in Decem- ber, 1833, almost 87°. Copious springs also rise in the bed of the little stream ; and globules of gas are extricated from round holes in the mud; but on endeavouring to collect a quantity, it was found that there were considerable and irregular intervals between each jet of air, nor did it always issue from the same place. The springs rise through the blue limestone so often mentioned, which, in a section in the north bank, is seen to have been raised by some violent forces, in a very singular manner, so as to form a series of irregular piked gothic arches, overlaid by partially broken but horizontal strata. The spaces within the arches are filled with fragments of the same rock, all evidently forced from below. The bed of the stream has a covering of sand, * The same was observed of the beautiful stream at Bibbery, in the month of May, 1828, and inclines me to think, that it derives its source in springs like - those of Kair, to be presently described. It rises in the Nirmul range. 114 Notes on Geological Specimens from [Fes. which, some way below, is agglutinated by lime into a tolerably hard rock. The sand is derived from a quartoze sandstone, which crops out in two or three places from the ascent south of the spring. The strata are not horizontal, but neither the dip nor line of bearing could be observed. North of Urjuna the rock is concealed by the soil as far as the Pindee ghat, nearly a mile distant, which passes over the steep low range, in which the Lingtee nulla rises. Its top is rounded, but on either hand, several conical summits are seen outlying from the range, which extends for some way from N. W. to S. E. On leaving the plain of Urjuna, the blue limestone disappears, and the hill is found to be composed of the usual black concentric basalt, the nuclei of which are exceedingly hard, and contain much olivine: they are imbedded in a soft grey or greenish wacken. I was surprised to find the road and a ravine descending from the hill strewed with the limestone I had left below, and did not quite credit the guide, who pointed to the top of the hill as the locality from which they came. I, however, soon came to it in sitt, in its characteristic large smooth slabs, which render it so difficult to pass on horseback. They were observed to be slightly convex upwards, to be very much fissured in various directions, and if taken in the mass, to have a slight anticlinal dip, although on the top the slabs were horizontal and several places remarkably altered, as if they had been half fused ; the argillaceous and siliceous matters hay- ing arranged themselves into beautiful streaks of a pale blue enamel, passing into calcedony, or crystallized in minute prisms. Some parts of these strata had acquired a deep black color, and a flinty hardness. On descending the hill on the opposite side, the same appearances presented themselves, and left no doubt of the limestone having been raised from its connections by the intrusion of the basalt, which had slightly bent the strata, and in doing so, had caused the numerous fis- sures, and the alteration of structure. North of the Pindee ghat, there are a number of very low rising grounds, flat on the top, and composed of black globular trap rocks: and on the valleys, many large coarse masses of calcedony are scattered; of which, on a slight exa- mination, I saw none in the hills. Near this, the limestone, No. 97, was found in the bed of a nulla. A little further on, there are two very black conical hills of trap, and at their feet, great fragments of rock crystal, but of no beauty, and having cavities lined with calce- dony. From hence to Kair, the country is more level, rising however a little, to the right of the road; and four miles from the Pindee ‘ghat, and the same distance from Kair, I found the sandstone, Nos. 99 and 100. It was only seen in a small nulla where its strata appeared 1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 115 to be horizontal, and was white, red, or of a fine yellow, easily decom- posed, and having small metallic veins passing through its substance, No. 100, and in one or two places, passed into a breccia, cemented by lime. No other rock is found at a higher level. I had been induced to examine this extensive slope, as the occurrence of the blue limestone suggested the probability of a sandstone or breccia being found above it, as at Cuddapah, before I discovered the sandstone at Urjuna, and near EHidlébad; I was therefore much gratified by finding it, although different in mineralogical characters. The country did not afford any section, but the sandstone probably rests on the blue limestone, which is met with at a lower level, two miles to the north-east. A mile and a half south of Kair*, the road crosses a small river, where there are “some masses of travertine several yards square, which have been carried down by the stream: they are entirely composed of petrified branches and leaves, with a cement in some parts of considerable thickness, and more or less crystalline, or resembling kankar. The stream rises near the town in copious hot springs, whose water is considered to be exceedingly pure and delicious ; but when taken from one of the springs, where it can be directly received, was found to be acid to the taste, and, on boiling, deposited lime, which the carbonic acid had held in solution. Bubbles of gas are also extricated with the water, from one of the springs. The lime separates in its course, giving a whitish appearance to the water of the pools, while it sparkles near the springs and in the rapids, as was the case also at Lingti. The temperature of the spring, in 1831 and 1833, was 87° and is the same in May, June, and December ; but the difference to the feelings, accord- ing to the temperature of the air, is so great, as to have led to the belief that it is cold in the day and hot at night ; the thermometer, however, showed that it was the same at 3 Pp. mM. and 5 a. m. of the 5th June, when that of the air was 100° and 81°. The principal spring rises at the root of a great Banian tree below the pagoda, and is stated by the devotees to flow in the same profusion the whole year, which they account for by saying that it flows from the Ganges at Benares. This and other springs forma stream, that increases as its course is followed downwards, notwithstanding that much is directed to gardens, and a fine sheet of paddy in the bend of the river thus formed. About half a mile below the spring, the first formation of rock is found cross- ing the stream like a dyke, but of considerable breadth ; others more remarkable are found lower down, and after a winding course of 24 miles, it seems to cease. The congeries of branches, roots, and even * This small town must not be confounded with a large place of the same name on the Godavery. 116 Notes on Geological Specimens from [Fzs. trees, sometimes hollow, and always in concentric rings of deposit, forms a beautiful sight when in masses of several tons weight. The strata were seen in one place to be 12 feet thick, and to rest on the common black alluvial soil ; near this, it had filled the original bed of the stream, and forced it to find another channel : and in two places, a fall of three or four feet, forming a pretty cascade, seemed to be occa- sioned by the growth of the rock, and the wearing away of the channel below. The deposit often conceals the remains of plants, with a smooth coating of considerable thickness and firmness, frequently rounded in irregular sections of large circles ; in others, in nodulous forms of great beauty, covering over the extremities of the smaller or larger branches, and occasionally preserving the wood in an hermetically-sealed cavity. The roots of the Banian now and then pass into the empty tubes, as if they were the mould on which they are formed ; others probably form on the weeds, which flourish in the wildest luxuriance along the banks : one of these I found to be 24 feet in height. Recent shells, such as now inhabit the stream, were found in many places enveloped in the stone. One fine specimen of /ymnea was attached to the side of the rock, asif it had been arrested there by the deposit of stone around it, and which has taken its shape ; its fine surface, where it adhered, being that of the fresh shell ; while the coating exhibited the color and fracture of the tuffa of the hillocks south of the Payngunga, and others exactly similar, near the town of Kair. Roots and branches were seen to lie in the deep water without a coating of stone; but the series of observations so accurately described by Mr. LyE.u was completed, by finding where the stream fell over some rocks, a plant still living, whose roots were thickly interwoven, and the leaves on a level, and just above the water, cemented into a mass of firm white tuffa. (Specimens of the water and tuffa were formerly sent.) The spray seemed, therefore, to produce the deposit more quickdlys : but specimens of moss growing below the water were also converted into sharp brittle spicule. Below, some blocks were softened, and as if in part redissolved. Amongst the petrified plants, one tree 14 foot in diameter was seen : and also a few leaves ; but these were rare, I suppose from their rapid decay and smooth surface ; one of them seemed to belong to a species of lotus seen in a pool above, and another seemed to be the leaf of aloe. In some places the tuffa was sandy, and in one or two slightly tinged with iron ; some of it hada fine crystalline appearance, and considerable hardness ; while other specimens could not be distinguished from kan- kar. A tendency to the formation of a bluish white scum was observed on the surface of the still water, both here and at Lingtee: a slight 1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 117 smell resembling sulphur was also occasionally perceived ; and at the latter, our people procured water of a very offensive taste, although per- fectly clear, from a well which I did not see. The water abounds with animal life, and the banks are covered with a profuse vegetation, amongst which many fine insects were seen; and in the hot season, all forms of life seem to gather round this oasis in the black burned-up country around. The banks and water affording so much food, vast numbers of birds of different species, game, doves, kings-fishers, herons, &c. are collected together, whose habits a natu- ralist might spend months in observing, without exhausting the field of inquiry. All the springs seemed to be equally loaded with calcareous matter, and similar formations by springs now closed up are seen on a rising ground down the river. Here too, the globular trap again appeared on the surface in several places, of small extent ; one was a little to the west of the greatest formation of travertine, and another below the ford where the hard nuclei were surrounded by layers of a grey friable wacke like that of the Nirmul hills, and are curiously divided into compart- ments by tuffaceous partitions. Near to this, the blue limestone is again found in extensive slabs, slightly raised from its horizontal position ; but as usual in no regular direction, the strata occasionally meeting each other at an obtuse angle. The same remark applies to the rock as seen to the north of the springs on the road to Won, and to almost every other place where I have met with it. Near the last mentioned bed of basalt, some irregularly inclined strata of blue rock, having a granular sandstone-like aspect, were seen, and at no great distance, large loose masses of vesicular scorie were found, (specimens Nos. 109,115.) But the most interesting appearances are seen, in a small irregular rising ground, above the pagoda at the principal spring, which will be best understood by an inspection of the specimens 104. The basis of the rock is a tough white limestone, projecting from the gentle rising ground in very irregular masses, passing into curious and beautiful jasperous minerals, often coated with minute rock and other crystals ; and the whole is perforated by large cavities, and even holes, evidently formed when the rock had been erupted in a semifluid state. Much tuffa is associated with these altered rocks, filling up many of the cavi- ties, and having various minerals imbedded. I believe that few places exhibit so many of the most interesting effects of volcanic action, as the small district around Kair ; more especially in altering a stratified rock of apparently uniform structure, so as to form a great variety of mine- R 118 Notes on Geological Specimens from (Fes. tals*. A good deal of sandstone has been used in the old buildings, which the inhabitants stated to be brought from Sacra, five miles to the west. To the north of Kair, the limestone resumes its blue color; the soil is black, and a little further on, mixed with calcedonies, &c. In the nulla at Won, quartz sand, sandstone, anda mineral resembling pud- ding-stone were picked up; and at the foot of the hill, the remarkable vegetable fossil figured in the fifth number of the Madras Journal, and now deposited in the museum of the Bengal Society. The small hill of Won is composed of sandstone of different colors, red, white, and yellow, and waved lines of a black color from disseminated iron, pass through it in various directions—the composition of which is the same as that in which the fossil is contained, and No. 100, from between Urjuna and Kair. The strata have been elevated by the convulsions to which the rest of the district has been subjected, and have a dip from the apex of the hill, varying from 35 to 55 degrees: their direc- tion on the southern face of the hill, is nearly from E. to W., but to the west they turn off towards the rising ground oa which the town is situated, the line of bearing of the strata being from S. E. to N. W. The swell of the hill extends some way to the east, but the country is on the whole level. This sandstone is also found to the eastward in the basin of the Wurdah and Godavery, beyond Chanda. Sand derived from these rocks forms the soil for two miles north of Won: between that and the Wurdah, it consists of the basaltic black soil, and the gravel of that river is composed of calcedonies, agates, &c. of which a calcareous conglomerate, in horizontal strata, two or three feet thick, has been formed, No. 123. At Waronah, white sandstone and a yellow slate, apparently belong- ing to the clay slate formation to which Voyrsry refers the blue lime- stone, is used in building; and one ebtained from a hill five miles dis- tant, which I had not time to visit. Most of the pagodas between Hingan ghat and Chanda are built of the same materials. Between Waronah and Chiknee the country is level, well cultivated, and the water within a few feet of the surface ; much fever prevails after the rains, although there is no wood or marsh. Basalt protrudes from the level soil, and near it, the bed of a small nulla displays strangely altered strata of the red slate clay, seen at Lingtee, whichis broken up, and intermixed with crystalline nodules and layers of calcareous * In some specimens, the surface has the appearance of a semifused brick, which had assumed something of a regular arrangement, whilst the centre is composed of the blue limestone little altered. 1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. Hg spar, having a red clay in the interstices. The specimen (No. R. 5) gives an imperfect idea of the singular appearance of this rock. At Dyegham, two miles further north, and about the same distance south from Chiknee, it is seen dipping to the west of south at a consider- ‘able angle, is much fissured, and is reticulated with beautiful veins of calcareous spar, filling up the vertical interstices, which vary from a line to half an inch in breadth ; they intersect each other in all direc- tions without disturbance, and were evidently formed at one time. To the east of this, and of the village of Chiknee, there is a very gentle rise of the country, and concentric basalt and great round trap boulders are seen wherever the soil has been removed. On this are found numerous great blocks of indurated clay, of remarkable hard- ness, and exhibiting all the varieties of that mineral, of flinty slate, of compact schist, and of semi-opal*. Many of these masses are also found imbedded in the basalt ; and on a very careful examination, the inference could not be avoided, that they owed their different appear- ances to the greater or less heat to which they had been exposed. Most of them are full of large and small univalve shells, many of which are of fresh-water genera. Many of the shells are changed into opal, others are covered, or their shape taken and preserved by quartz crystals; while the shells of a few can be separated unaltered, and effervesce with aids. The spines of the small shells are often insulated in cavities in the rock, and their crystalline surface is often very beautiful, when examined with the microscope. Some vertebrz and the head of a fish were met with ; but from the great toughness of the rock, part only could be broken off, anda portion of the same block was converted into a red flint, with shells changed into opal. A large loose block of a slaty structure was found near this, containing fragments of very large bivalve shells of great thickness, along with. wood converted into a black flint, intersected by fine veins of a light purple opal; and other bivalves which had been crushed together, were found in a flinty state on the upper part of the rising ground. I do not think that I go beyond the limits of correct inference, in sup- posing these shells to have lived ina mud formed from the decompo- sition of the clay-slate found in the neighbourhood, and through which the trap is seen to have burst. * Loose specimens of this rock was seen by Mr. W. Geppzs, Surgeon of the Madras European Regiment, in 1829, who directed my attention to ascertain their position. + Shells were first found here by Mr. W. Geppzs, late of the Madras Medi- eal Establishment. R 2 120 Notes on Geological Specimens from (Fes. The country to Naugri continues to be composed of basalt, which is in some places tabular, with green earth between the laminz; and the soil is covered with calcedonies, ribbon and pudding stone, jaspers, resembling those found in the Nirmul hills, to which the whole cha- racter of the formation remarkably assimilates, and leaves no doubt of their belonging to one great period of protrusive violence. At Naugri, fossils like those of Chiknee are formed; and with the conical masses of calcedony, having a smooth flat base of cachelong, the centre being filled with quartz crystals and calc spar; which were afterwards seen in siti at Hingan ghat, inserted between the globular basalt with the apex downwards, the peculiar appearance of the base being perhaps caused by slow cooling. At Hingan ghat, a number of blocks, loose, of a black and red chert, containing silicified branches of dicotolydonous trees, and a very perfect portion of a palm (date?) tree were discovered: and the same kind of rock, but without fossils, protruded from the basalt a little below Colonel Lamsron’s tomb. The basalt was globular, but seems to have had a tendency to form five or six-sided prisms, The rest of the route to Nagpoor is over a level country, from which a few insulated trap hills rise abruptly, on whose summits basaltic columns are occa- sionally met with. On the south side of the small range of hills near the city, these columns are very regular, and inclined to the south, at an angle of 45°, in consequence of which many of them have fallen. The flat top of the hill forms a pavement of the ends of similar co- lumns perpendicular to the horizon. The round flat topped hill of Sitabuldee, which is accurately described by Voysry in the 18th volume of the As. Rs. is separated a few hundred yards from the extremity of this range, and rests on a decomposing granitic rock; its great and irregular masses show a similar tendency to crystalline arrangement, and thin sheets of calcedony are found in the joints. To connect these observations with those published in the As. Re- searches and Journal, on the countries south of the Nerbada, it is necessary to mention, that at the cantonment of Kampty, eight miles north of Nagpoor, the sandstone is met with in the north bank of the Kanan river ; and a mile higher up, the granite has been forced through the strata, bending or converting them into quartz rock. The crystals of felspar and plates of mica are remarkably large, and mica slate is seen in a quarry a few hundred yards distant. Beyond this are some small hills of upraised gneiss; near to which a conical hill of curiously altered rock, resembling that above the hot springs of Kair, has burst through a limestone, which it appears to have converted into a fine crystalline bed, like that found in the primitive districts of Scotland. 1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 121 From the summit of this volcanic rock the basaltic hill of Sitabuldee and others are seen to the south and west; and at the same distance to the north, the rounded mica slate and granitic hills of Ramtesk, which extend into the Bengal territory south of Sagur. An examination of the map will impress more strongly, than any thing I can urge, the importance of examining the whole Sichel or Shesha range, from the great lake water of Lonar, (to which the atten- tion of your readers was called in the number of Journal for June, 1834,) to the fossil beds of the Nirmul hills ; and from thence to Bibbery, the fossiliferous localities above Mungapett, and the hot springs of Byorah and Badrachellam. Other hot springs are also said to be found in the Nirmul range, regarding which I could get no correct information. There are three other points to which it may be well to call the attention of such of your readers as may have an opportunity of visit- ing these localities. lst. Whether the Sichel hills really terminate about Mungapett, or are continued in broken ranges towards Rajamundry? I have long considered it probable that the dykes so common in the Circars are connected with the great basaltic ranges which cross the Deccan in nearly the same direction; and Dr. Benza has recently discovered a bed of marine fossils on the top of a basaltic hill five miles south of Rajamundry, and a little above the alluvial plains of the mouths of the Godavery. 2nd. Whether the basaltic hills near the Manjerah river, on which Dr. Voysry discovered fossils, are connected with those of Bekanur- pettah and Nugger above described; and whether they belong to the same geological period as the Nirmul hills ? 3rd. I entertain little doubt that the basaltic formation of the valley of Berar and the basin of the Panah river, which falls into the Tapti, belongs to the period of eruption which elevated the Nirmul fossils from the bed of the sea; before, however, coming to this conclusion, with reference to the northern part of the valley, the connection be- tween the localities of the Nirmul and Chiknee fossils with those of the Gawilgurh hills (A. R. vol. 17th) must be ascertained. 4th. The exact relations of the crater of Lonar to the great volcanic district to the N. W. where fossils have not yet been met with. But as the difficulties opposed to the investigation of the greater part of such wild and unhealthy tracts will probably prevent these desiderata being soon supplied ; I hope that a sufficient number of orga- nic remains have been obtained from the central point of the district, to enable an experienced geologist to arrive at a tolerably correct esti- 122 Description of a New Species of Columba. (Fes. mate of the relative age of part of the great trap formation of the N. W. of India, which the President of the Geological Society in the anniversary address to that body in 1833, stated to be quite unknown: ‘‘no vestiges of secondary or tertiary formations having been detected within the region described.” IV.—Description of a New Species of Columba. By B. H. Honason, Eisq. Resident in Népal. The following description of a new species was originally sent to the Society six years ago, but it does not appear to have been published. It has since been described as new by the Zoological Society in 1832. With the description went a drawing, coloured, and large as nature. Owing to the tardy appearance of the Society’s quarto volume, the papers that did appear there had been forestalled: thus red-billed Erolia, but also my Circzetus Nipalensis, take precedence, by two years, of GouLp’s Ibidorhyncha Struthersii and his Hematornis Undulatus, which are the same species under new names. Both birds are types of new genera: see the Journal of the Zoological Society under date Dec. 27th, 1831, quoted, pp. 170 and 174. I described them both two years and some months previously: as the dates of the papers and the proceedings of your Society can prove*. Order Rasorzs. Family, Corumpipz. Genus Columba. Species new. Columba Nipalensis, (mihi.) This elegant species is found in the woods of the valley of Népal. It is seen exclusively in the wild state, and is very shy, seldom or never entering the cultivated fields for the purpose of feeding, but adhering almost always to the woods, and living upon their produce, in the shape of grass, seeds, and berries. Except in the breeding season, it is very gregarious, and it breeds, I am told, only once a year, laying its eggs in June and July. I cannot bring it exactly under any of the dBCDariant allotments of the numer- * We can offer no further explanation of the loss of the author’s MS. than was before given (J. A. S. IV.) neither can we find the plate to which he al- ludes. But we take this opportunity of circulating a lithograph of the Erolia and bearded Vulture described in vol. IV., which may serve as a peace offering to the justly offended author. —Ep. t+ A. orbits and tarsi plumose. B. orbits plumose, tarsi naked, tail even. C. orbits plumose, tarsi naked, tail wedged. D. orbits naked. a. feathers of the neck and quills simple. b. feathers of the neck notched at tips. ¢ quills bifid at tips. 1836.] Description of a New Species of Columba. 123 ous species of this genus, according to the specification of those allot- ments in the 14th vol. of SHaw’s Zoology, as will be perceived by the following enumeration of characteristic particulars. There is a naked space round the eyes. Two-thirds of the tarsi are plumose, the remaining third only being naked, and the toes also are naked. The quills are simple at their tips. The feathers of the neck are sub-elongated and acuminated at their tips. The tail is even. In an earlier vol. of Suaw, the Abcdarian division of the species is not carried so far as in the vol. just mentioned: and the following disposition of species, to be found in vol. xi. p. 2, of that work, has at least nothing inconsistent with the enumeration of significant particulars above given in reference to our bird. A. tail equal. a. orbits naked, feathers of the neck elongated, and acuminated at their tips. Comparing, for the sake of further illustration, our bird with the Columba Livia, or common pigeon, it differs in being larger; in having the soft membrane at the base of the bill less tumid and mealy; in having a somewhat longer tail, and shorter, and more lowly feathered tarsi, not to mention the naked space round its eyes, and other diagnos- tic particulars, which have been separately explained. The wings are about the same length as in the common species ; but owing to the tail being longer than in that species, they have the appearance of being shorter, and they do not reach within two inches of the extremity of the tail. What further illustration of this species may be needed will be best gathered from a perusal of the details of size and proportions given below, and contrasted with those of the common pigeon. I now proceed to the plumage, in respect to which our bird bears a strong resemblance to the Parabolic pigeon. The principal colour is a dark slaty blue, deepened into more or less perfect black in the quills and tail feathers ; and shewing clearest on the lower part of the back, on the lesser tail and wing coverts above, on the thighs, and on the whole of the tail and wing coverts below. Upon the lower part of the hind neck, the upper part of the back, the lesser wing coverts above, and the most part of the body below, the principal colour is almost superseded by a rich purplish tinge; and all the feathers so tinged, save those of the upper back and of the sides of the body, are further adorned by being broadly margined or pointed with pale clear bluish grey. The head and top of the neck are wholly of the softest bluish grey, which colour, as it descends the body, forming in its descent the margins and points just noted, gradually decreases in quantity, and fades in hue. It pre- 124 Asiatic Society. [Fzs. vails rather on the lower than upper surface of the neck, and in respect to the body, is no where seen above, except in the shape of Some roundish dots of nearly pure white on the lesser wing coverts. The bill is black, shewing faintly a purplish tinge, which is more clearly visible in the basal membrane of the bill, and on the naked orbits. In front, the legs and feet are black green; elsewhere, they are yellowish. The claws are clear, lively yellow. The iris of the eyes hoary grey or white. The female is as large almost as the male, from which she differs only in having the bluish grey of the head less clear and pale, and in wanting almost entirely the purplish tinge, which adds so much beauty to certain parts of the plumage of the male, especially the upper pert of his back, and the lower part of his belly. This species is, I fancy, questionless new ; and as it seems to be peculiar to these mountains, if not to Nepal proper, Columba Nipalensis would be a very appropriate name for it. Dimensions and weight of the Columba Livia and Columba Nipa- lensis. C. L. C.N. Feet. inches. feet. inches. Tip of bill to tip of tail, .. 00-2 e eee se cece ee eene eR | Eg Length of bill (to the gape), ....--+e-sse-seeeeeee 0 0,5 0 il TDIEEGLOR HAL, ‘ys cieue dishes ctele opk erase cstetarsy clsrsvere cys exe raielo aN aareD 0 6 POOL & WING; ca os 4s. ac o's adeeiserte tc sete ve ome OO Meme 09 Expanse of Wings, ....seeesecercesctceeseeeseeee 2 O 2 13 Length of tarsi, ........... : ey, ON 5 LE 0 1,4 Ditto of central toe, and nail, .. (5.0... « 2464..%s-sinee eens 0 lg Weirht pit 222. bre She's wa Mla tele, o iy Rpiahwn mea eeOz, 123 oz. Valley of Nepal, Dec. 1829. V.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Wednesday Evening, the 2nd March, 1836. W. H. Macnacuten, Ese. V. P. in the chair. Lieut.-Col. J. Convix, Engineers, Lieut. Col. L. R. Sracy, Joan NeAvE, Esq. C. §., Lieut. A. Cunnineuam, Engineers, and Raja Visaya Govinpa Sineua Behadur, proposed at the last meeting, were ballotted for, and duly elected members of the Society. Read a letter from Mr. Atexanper Berartie, withdrawing from the Society. Read a letter from W. H. Macnacuren, Esq. Secretary to the Govern- ment of India, Political Department, acknowledging the receipt of a copy of the communication from His Excellency Prince Esrrruazy. Read the following reply from Government to the Secretary’s letter, written in pursuance of the resolution of the last meeting, in regard to 1836.] Asiatic Society. 125 the oriental manuscripts and printed volumes of the Fort William College Library*. To James Prinsep, Esq. ek Dept. Secretary to the Asiatic Society. IR, 1 am directed to acknowledge the receipt of your letter, dated the 6th instant, and in reply to state, that the Governor of Bengal accepts the offer of the Asia- tic Society to provide rooms for the accommodation of, and to hold accessible to the public, the Oriental portion of the late Library of the College of Fort William, and has ordered the books to be made over on the following conditions : The books are to be the property of the Government until the Honorable Court of Directors shall decide whether they shall be made over absolutely or not, the Society to be ruled of course by their decision. The Government to allow the Asiatic Society a monthly sum of 78 Rupees, (stated by the Secretary of the College to be the minimum expence for custody of the books,) in consideration of the Society’s providing for establishment and keeping the books clean and in proper repair. All other charges to be provided by the Society. The above allowance to cease, in case of the property in the books being made over to the Society. Fort William, * H. T. PRINSEP, the 24th Feb. 1836. Secy. to Govt. Resolved, that the Society acquiesce in the terms proposed by the Go- vernment, and that the Secretary do take measures for receiving the books and granting receipts for them to the Secretary of the College Council in the course of their daily transfer. Library. The following books were presented : Memoirs of the Astronomical Society, vol. 8th—dy the Society. Transactions of the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of Calcutta, vol. 2nd—LlLy the Society. The following by Professor Borr : Grammatica Critica Linguae Sanscritae, two editions, 1829, 1832—dy Pro- Jessor Bopp. Glossarium Sanscritum, 1830—by ditto. Nalus, Maha-bharati Episodium, 1830—by ditto. Diluvium, cum tribus aliis Maha-bharati praestantissimis Episodiis, 1829— by ditto. eer einige Demonstrativstimme und ihren Zusammenhang mit verschiede- nen Propositionen und Conjunctionen im Sanskrit und den mit ihm verwand- ten Sprachen, 1830. Uber den Einfluss der Pronomina auf die wortbildung im Sanskrit und den mit iam verwandten Sprachen, 1832—by ditto. Ardschuna’s Reise zu Indra’s Himmel, uebst anderen Episoden des Maha- bharati—by ditto. Conjugations System, 1 vol. 12mo. 1816—by ditte. Die Sundfiut, 1 vol. 12mo. 1829—by ditto. Geological Report of an examination, made in 1834, of the elevated country between the Missouri and Red Rivers, by G. W. FraTHERSTONHAUGH, U.S. Geologist, presented by the American Philosophical Society. The following books were received from the book-sellers : Bridgewater Treatises, Prout’s Chemistry, 1] vol. Kirby on Animals, 2 vols. Roget’s Physiology, 2 vols. Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia, England, vol. 5th. eo , Greeks and Romans, vol. 2nd. * The resolution, by inadvertence, was omitted in the printed proceedings. It was to the effect, that as Government had been pleased to transfer the European portion of the College Books to the New Public Library, the Society begged to tender accommodation in its rooms for the Oriental portion of the same, the Go- vernment agreeing to pay the establishment necessary for its due preservation while in deposit. 126 Asiatic Society. [Frs. Illustrations of the Botany, &c. of the Him4layan Mountains, and of the Flora of Kashmir, by J. F. Royer, Esq. Museum of Antiquities, &e. Facsimiles of inscriptions on two slabs of stone at the entrance of a very ancient Temple, supposed to be Buddhist, on the Hill Fort of Gua- lior, taken by Mrs, Sanz, were forwarded by Major Surueruanp, Resident at Gualior. Extract of a letter from Colonel H. Burney, dated Ava 15th January, announced the transmission via Rangoon, of a small box containing some Buddhist images found by Captain Hannay at Tagoung, 100 miles above Ava on the Irawadi. ‘‘ Captain HANNAy’s last letter is dated from Tsen-bo, (the Sembooa of the Map of the Burmese Empire compiled in the Surveyor General’s Office in 1825,) three stages above Baman. He must have reached Mogoung on the Sth instant. He speaks in the highest terms of the general appearance of the country, and estimates the population, particularly on the right bank of the Irawadi, to be much more numerous than I had imagined. At Baman he was much interested by the Chinese, who were inquisitive but civil; and he estimates the breadth of the Irawadi at Baman, to be full two miles during the rainy season! The Sherelee and other rivers falling into it are too inconsiderable to have any con- nexion with M. Kiaproru’s Tsan-po. ‘‘T am writing to you in great haste. The cold at Ava this year is unusually great ; the thermometer at this moment has fallen to 45°, and I am sitting in an open verandah without a fire, and shivering under a piercing northerly air, which seems to be coming directly from the snowy mountains.’’ Extract of a letter from W. Ewer, Esq. was read on the subject of the interlined writing on the Lath at Allahabad, which he reported to be in too imperfect a state to be copied or decyphered. Mr. Ewer reminded the Secretary that he had communicated a draw- ing of the trident at Barahaut and the inscriptions on it 10 years ago. A letter from Col. Sracy was received, on the point in dispute of the relative antiquity of the striking of coin in India. A tabular view of the statistics of Muttra was presented by Captain R. WrovenTon, who promised to furnish similar tables of all divisions of the country measured by himself as a part of the grand revenue survey. An accurate meteorological register, kept in Nipal by Capt. Rosinson, for 1835 was received from the Resident at Katmandhu. A register of the thermometer for the same year, from Mr. Epcewortu at Amballa. The following models from Nip4l were preseuted by Dr. A. Campspetu. 1. Sugar-cane mill, or press, called Tusa by the Newars, and Rulw by the Parbattiahs. 2. Oil press, called Chikon-sa. 3. Water-mill, called Pan-Chaki of the northern Doab, and western hills, and Kau by the Newars. 4. Spade, called Koo by the Newars, Kodali by the Parbattiahs. 5. Crutch, called Kurmughan by the Newars, used for breaking the clods and pressing the soil. 6. Roochi-mughan, used by the Newars to cover sown wheat, and Gayha, or upland rice. 7. Chassu-mughan, used to smooth the flooded beds, in which the seeds of the Malsi and Toki is sown, and also prepare the soil for sowing vegetables,” pepper (red), ginger, &c. 8. Roo Retcha, used for weeding the flooded rice. 9. Chong Kooki, used in weeding the Gayha, or dry land rice, coud (a vetch) or other drill crops. 10. Rooe, used for spreading grain to the sun, and collecting it in heaps after its removal from the straw. 1836.] Asiatic Society. 127 11. Ooghan-Okua, used for husking grain. 12. Rooti, used for making Chaul (rice) from Dhan, and for pounding bricks. 13. Chou Rummu, bhangy. 14, Plough, used by Parbuttiahs. 15. Keka, used to separate seeds from the cotton. 16. Yeau, spinning wheel. 17. Weaver’s loom. 18. Rool, carpenter’s adze. 19. Phoho, used as a saw. 20. Daha, carpenter’s chisel. 21. Lamp. 22. Tulip. 23. Specimen of Gapgy upland rice. 24. Ditto of rice in the valley of Nipal. 25. Ditto of variety of rice called Malsi. 26. Two specimens of mustard seeds. 27. Specimen of pea stalactite. 28. Ditto of Nipal soap. 29. Two pen cases and inkstands. 30. Two inkstands. 31. Two Buddhas. 32. Nip4l sword. 33. Ditto ditto. Also the following Nipalese Musical Instruments: 1. Phonga, (trumpet,) Newari. 2. Mohalli, (flageolet,) ditto. 3. Singha, (horn,) Nipal. 4. Nug Pheni, or Turi, Parbattiah. 5. Bansuli, (flute or fife.) . Beli or Krishna Beli, Newari flute. Also, several specimens of Cotton and Woollen cloth manufactured at Nipal, Tibet, and Bhoote, marked from No. 18 to 23. Physical. The Secretary presented, in the name of Mr. W. Cracrort, a very fine collection of the fossil impressions of vegetables and fossil woods in the coal and shale of Newcastle in New South Wales, just received from that place, along with a number of geological specimens and many rare shells, encrinite, &c. : 3 Mr. C. Berts presented a piece of fossil wood from the sandstone above the coal beds of Burdwan ; to which the natives give the name of Asurhdr, or “ giant’s bone.” Three specimens of soil, and five of minerals, of Nipal, and a collection of skins of birds, presented by Dr. A. Campsext of Nipél. A stuffed Albatross, presented by J. Catnip, Esq. H. C. Pilot Service. A specimen of Eurinorynchus Griseus, or Pigmy Spoonbill, presented by NewcomBE, Esq. This bird is one of the rarestin the world ; but a single specimen having been found before: the Curator was requested to draw a description of it for publica- tion. A specimen of Remora, presented by C. W. Smiru, Esq. A note on the Cherotherium, one of the new pachydermatous genera, discovered in the Sivalik range, by Messrs. Fanconer and CauTLEY, was read. The letter accompanying it notices the discovery also of the remains of birds, in the same rich fossil field. VI.—Meteorological Register. 128 Darema aaa *paioysisor oq aInyng UT [[IM 9] ‘WUOUINIZsULs,AjaID0S [eAOY oy} Jo az¥ol[dnpoyy ‘puelsuq Woy JoJeWOIeg pxepurys Amo Jo [eATIAe Jes ay} GoUNOUUL 07 Addey mou are oA, “4991109 ST JUUINIJSUL UMO INO 07 SUOTIPAIASqO a1} B9Npax 0} UOTeNba oy} : uUMyOI 06k Ye ‘IVT>, OY} 01 aInyesodu1a} oy uOT9a1I09 YM Suore pardde st uomoaI109 smI—oqny Jo Ayrre[[Ide 10j payser102 ‘pasoddns om se ‘jou oxe puv ‘ssurpear jenjor ayy SULEJUOD ULUNOO SLYOULOIL JsIY IY, *Jaquinu 4st] Amo u21 paysyqnd ‘suoreasesqo [eotNjeWUL0Ie ALLOY s,MOIAeg IJ UO 9}0U IMO UL EyeIsIW SuIpI} v y9a1109 0} Faq a M “urex jo Tey AAvay e—pjoo Ayjensnun *a[quuen 4 88 g‘9¢ 6L | L°6 | SOL | e'bZ (e8°0.| B10‘ |b189 98 352 | HL | T°TL 99L*0\€18°62 1166S,“ UeayK, op op op "MS ‘Mu *O 0°16 \e‘rs cL | Ser | O°ST | S*LL |en6 | OGB* \zoz‘} 28 | 0°8 | 2°8 | 8°ZL| OGL‘ |FG0" | F88‘ 66 op op op “MU “a ‘u e%s |0‘S¢ 9°91 | SSLL W9L' EL | 8°01 ples 8 op oy Op bese an et B°€g jo‘ss 09 | PeT | OTLT | PSL |T98* | BES ozes OL | OSET| VET] ECL! ELL* [96S 16965 KG op op op “MS “AML "AA 068 10°99 99 | #*er | L°ST | GFZ |Te8* | 8z0‘ lgze‘t IZ | ¢*S1| B°EL| G*GZ| LeLZ* |916* {out 9G op *rea[o op “aS “MS “MA ace 7° 69 | BSL | OPT | FEL \c9BS | GhOS Ip1g% FL | L611) E°1T) O°E4) Tos’ |Zes" egos Gs op op op MS “MS °0 6°88 |e‘69 og | 86 | POT Gibd GB. | 950 |ete‘h 26 | TE | OF | B°GZ| GELS |ZES‘ |FZOS ix op “ium op “au SANS ers I1°S¢ 68 |8°Z |9°8 | 9°62 |aG8° | 80‘ lnggf G6 | BF | L°o | SSIZ| OLZ* 846° |gt0* £3 ae) Oe eo) fo op ‘u ‘ou 0 6F8 10‘0S 8 | 38 | 16 18 ‘IZ |eLZ« | F9r' geg‘y £8 | 8°Z | 0°8 | Of02) TEZ* \6FE* |080% (XG ‘ouy _ op “Ieaja | “MU 1) @ s‘9L |e*0¢ OFT | 8°69 886° 9° | o°b9 660° 1G *dULIva]O ‘auy “DOJ “Au ‘Mu °O OLL \2°6r cL | £56 | POT | SOL \9PZ* | P96‘ loot GL | 8 | 8°6 | 6°29} Z99* |9EFS |g60* 06 op “snyedys spUs 2 gS al L‘ch \2°09 ae | 08 | SB | SOL \eGL° | FEL‘ \oFG*4 G6 | O'F | 6'F | £569] 9ZL‘ JOTE® |g¢0* 61 ‘ramoys “Apo *4ysB010A0 ‘yynuNs | ‘au “ou ‘a g9L |L‘8¢ 96 | 9 | BE | O°OL GGL" | OPIS lGggq 88 | EE | fe | 6°89) FEO. j9Ie® joTOS 81 pAramoysoug = *a[ZZ11p *Kur103s “a 20 Mae i E19 \o°B¢ 96 | 4°€ |b | $69:\GOL* | O16 lergq LG | BE | ‘PF | 1°69) GUL* |F8S° jose. Ff ZT *quye'UL-4S" Uy op *snyNUINd “119 sau FOS ers "CT GOL |c9¢ (ET | B°G/, £08" L‘8 | L‘89 P56" 91 op op *snjedjs “119 | +o “a ) PEL \o‘l¢ OBL | OL ole‘ eZ | $°89 9F6. SI -Apnojo *4SVOI9AO by 6.9) “M s) a) . P08 |c¢09 6°L | BEL 168° PP | $89 A 856 PI } “77numo “1ynuIN9 *yseodaAO | * A “MS smu 406 B6L |P8¢ 06 |6°9 | O°L | LépL |1s8" | 86 lGgs| 96 | OF | OF | 0°32) GOL‘ [BIT Jogsé €1 pyauiy quia —-Apnojo “Apnop>? [A smu smu BT fF aicd Igcog | se | Oc [G'S | GZ |9gR | Bb6S lgog*] £6 | O's | BF | Ores] LOL‘ |6PLS lorcs | ar “qu ye ‘Ud ou op OR IDOE es. dS) OAS 88 le19 | 98 | PB | I'L | GOL OTK. | 068‘ |goa} 18 | 0°6 | B°L | B'ez| BIB’ |TET lGr6. | IT “ya “bs'yyato *snpnumno-at9 “phos “MS “AS 5S 6°88 |0‘e9 16 | 6°9 | 69 | SLL \oe6" | FB lgr7T ¥6 | OF | L‘E | O%FL| OER" |BZ0" | roBt Ol f ‘ouy op ‘ivaja s|«ms = “MUO 86 [etI9 | aL | SET | Of€T | O22 Ze. | OBL‘ \arz4 BB | o°2 | G9 | O'T2) GEL" 960" |aba’ | 6 *9Z9901q Ysery op “SOF PI] | "MMU 80 L18 jos | 69 | BEL | BSL | Pe |998° | 868° |tos4 Le | 08 | EZ | T's] BLL |PEES Joos’ | 8 op op aoe *o 20 £0 0°88 |0‘0¢ Of9L | B°LL seg’ 66 | E01) . 90 FZ op op *ABS05 ‘MS "MU ‘Oo P88 le‘ a9 | OL | B°SE | L*pL \Bb8S | 8b‘ logga| 18 | 256 | O'TT| 6'1z] GOL! |6FS' Igtok | 9 *rea]o *avayo ‘Azey f*MUu MU ‘Oo L‘18 \p*0g #9 | PST | BEL | 1'FL |BPB° | BLO‘ log‘ 69 | O'ET| E*TT| O'Zz) G4Z* BPG! Jocn’ | ¢ op op op au tau ‘0 &°88 le‘pe 89 | TIL | GOL | aps ove. | GFOS logg4 IZ | 6'TT| efor} LétZ} 422° loss’ {400 i ou “ue SHAD) | eR) ONF oo *0 ros lize | $2 | OCIL| £66 | Ges |ees | BE logg| o8 | 2°6 | 0'6 | Occz| BLL. IBGIS loos | ¢ *AQSTUL ‘yuo 4stUr ut | «MS MS TMA 9°06 |e*co 68 | 49 | 6°S | eFZ |gh8° | O86 laze 26 | O'€ | ae | B°GL| GOB. |9ZI ace. Fs oa taterauta) *AzeYy, phat) 2) ‘MS “MS ‘a | 9°86 109 ¢6|0°9 | L°¢ | gL leZa* | 960° legal 96 | oS | Liz | 1Z| S9L0|GLe° |pen‘oe) T > = > = Kd is og ia ~ ap] 2 og Is oa] ee | 8 Swn ; : 2 |> - 8 | 2] 2 | 0] 2ege/ 8/82] ae) SF RNE She 82 Be | as eel & = : ey z : B. ; SB Se be se | Os. e a Bal eo) Sons tl ate ee ee al eeedib mn ceRied so b 5 03 oO J i=) =} of g wl 88a tee] eBlasis w|soleas| &> A -h = j a 2 | mo [SS Pole | Fe|S8| Sloasai Pole @i|ee/ 8) s8| se] 7 BL PL See e] | SPP a gee" a] ©) 8s] 8] 8 - 2 L s ' ' 2 . Y . 2 | somanyxy o *TayIVOM *purAA A9JOWOUNIOY L, “W *d f 18 SUOT}ZAIASGO “Mi "VW OL 38 suorizeAtasqoO let Ja\sisoy Bs "9E81 ‘hunnigag Jo yruopy ay7 wof “njynaqny ‘a0Q hossp ayy yo yday ‘uajsthay 109160)0.10879 JOURNAL Or Hie AS bk: ALL. S.0:.0:LE,.T Y, No. 51.—March, 1836. ¥.—Memoir of the Life and Writings of St. Nrerszs Cuasensis, sur- named the Graceful, Pontiff of Armenia. By Jonannes AvDALL. (Submitted to the Asiatic Society, Ist May, 1829*.] At a period when Armenia was labouring under the lamentable effects of intestine broils and foreign invasions ; when she was subject- ed to the ruinous consequences of dissensions that existed between the leaders of the Armenian and Greek Churches, when tyranny and per- secution of the most violent kind strode hand in hand in her territories, Providence deemed it necessary, out of sympathy for the sufferings of human beings, to raise up a person, who, by a happy combination of the qualities of a great mind, with those of a good heart, might be a proper instrument of knitting more closely man to man, and of removing dis- turbances from the Church of Christ, whose very essence is formed of love, meekness, and peace. The individual, in whom the illustrious subject of this Memoir found a father, was called Aprrat, a prince famed for uncommon bravery and glorious achievements, who flourished in Armenia near the close of the eleventh century. He claimed his origin from the Pehlavic race, and had the happiness of perpetuating his memory by giving birth to four sons, known under the appellations of Basiz, SHanan, Gregory, * This paper was handed to us by a Member of the Committee of Papers of the Asiatic Society for 1829, on his departure for the Cape. It had been wnfortu- nately mislaid among his papers. Although, (as the author’s presentation letter says,) ‘‘ it is not of a scientific nature, and consequently little adapted to the taste of the present age,’ still, considering that it is descriptive of the public acts of the greatest author and divine that flourished in Asia in the middle of the 12th century, and illustrative of the religious differences that separate the Church of Armenia from that of Greece, it cannot fail to interest many of our readers.—ED. s 130 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marcu, and Nizrses. The latter was born in the year 1100, im the castle of Zovs, which was the hereditary property of Apirat. Allied by the ties of consanguinity to Grecory ViKayasER™, who then wielded the pontifical sceptre in Armenia, Apirat entrusted to him the education of Gregory and Nrerszs, who were, by the direction of their guardian, admitted into the monastery raised on the summit of the Black Moun- tain. Gregory VikAyAsER, when he had attained to a good old age, was by the repeated solicitations of the prince Basi the Sly, and his illustrious lady, induced to change the place of his residence, and spend the remainder of his days near them, at Rapan, situated in the vicinity of the city of Cheson. On his departure from the monastery of the Black Mountain, he took with him his wards, Gregory and NiErszs, haying entertained favourable anticipations of their future greatness and celebrity. Some time after his having eventually settled in the Red Convent, near Cheson, perceiving that his career was daily drawing to a close, he sent for Parsick, whom he had previously nominated his successor, and for Basin the Sly, to whose kind care and protec- tion he intrusted the lads Grecory and Nrerszs, the former being of the age of about 13 years, and the latter only 10 years, old. He also added, in the presence of those by whom he was surrounded, that, agreeably to his nomination, Parsicx should immediately after his death be invested with the pontifical authority of Armenia. On the elevation of the latter to that high station, he began to shew the greatest regard for the welfare and education of his wards, Gregory and Niersgs, and according!y placed them under the superintendence of Bishop StePHEN, a divine of high attainments and profound erudi- tion, in order, that they might by his immediate tuition be instructed in theology and the literature of the west. Grecory and Nigrszs con- tinued to proceed in their education with two other fellow scholars, named Sarxizst and Ienarius, whose valuable productions have per petuated their fame in the recollection of posterity. * Vikayaser (fey p) is the compound of U44y martyr, and «&p love, sig- nifying lover of martyrs, which is an epithet given to GreGory in consequence of the extreme veneration which he displayed for the memory of martyrs, and the great avidity with which be translated their lives from the Greek and Syriac languages. t+ These two worthies are peculiarly distinguished among the divines, who flourished in Armenia in the twelfth century. At the special desire of the pon- tiff Grecory, Ignarius wrote a commentary on the Gospel of St. Luke, which is held in general admiration for the perspicuity of its style and the sensible observations with which it abounds. Sarxres claims an equal share of vene- ration from his countrymen for his valuable productions, which have been handed down to us. They consist of Commentaries on the seven General Epistles, on 1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 131 Parsicx having established the seat of his pontificate at the desert ef Shughr, in the vicinage of Cheson, felt great interest in frequently visiting the Red Convent, in order that his occasional presence might enhance the utility and efficiency of the institution. Two years after this, considering that the qualifications and good conduct of Grecory were worthy of sacerdotal dignity, Parsicx conferred on him the order of priesthood, when he had just attained the age of 15 years. Removed from the Red Convent, Gregory remained with Parsicx in the pontifi- cal house, where the latter with paternal care and exertions instilled into the mind of the former such principles of virtuous habits and sound doctrine, as might befit him for the high office which he was destined to fill. Having enjoyed the pontifical authority for about eight years, Par- sick was cut off by sudden death. Before, however, this melancholy event, he summoned the dignitaries of the church of Armenia, as well as some of the nobility of the country, and in their presence, nominated his ward GreGory as successor to the pontificate, presenting him with his pontifical robes and sceptre. Accordingly, the bishops and clergy of the nation having assembled in the Red Convent, anointed Gregory with great honors Pontiff of all Armenia. Though of the age of twen- ty years only, the mental and moral qualities of Grecory peculiarly adapted him for the responsibility of the high situation. Gregory having, by new improvements, strongly fortified the castle of Zovs, which had devolved on him after the death of his father, re- moved thither the seat of his spiritual government. After the lapse of several years, Nrersss, at the particular desire of his brother Gregory, quitted his monastic seclusion, and entered into clerical orders. During the ceremonies of his ordination, the pontiff Gregory bestowed on him the appellation of Nrersszs, in veneration of the memory of Nimrszs the Great*, who was of Parthian and Pehlavic extraction. By what name he was originally designated, no mention is made in the works of any of our historians. His profound learning and exemplary virtues soon raised him to the high dignity of a bishop, in whose capacity he was from time to time sent by the pontiif on visitations to the most populous provinces of Armenia, for the purpose of enlightening the minds of the ignorant, and pouring the balm of comfort into the hearts of the afflicted. Wherever he visited, his footsteps were marked with the Prayers of St. Grecorius NaREKENSIS, and on the Prophecy of Isatan. That of the General Epistles was published in Constantinople in the year 1744; but those of the two latter have not as yet been discovered. * For particulars of the life of Nimrsus the Great, vide my translation of the History of Armenia, vol. i. page 181. s 2 132 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marca, national improvements and spiritual good. By his peculiarly mild tem- per and upright principles, he was held in general estimation, and con- sidered a very valuable member of the fraternity to which he belonged. At this period, it must be recollected, the city of Antioch was in the possession of the Latins, who found it necessary to convene a general assembly for the purpose of taking into consideration some heavy charges that were preferred against Ropoupu, the Archbishop of that city, to his holiness Innocent the Second. Being deservedly distinguished among foreigners for the intense zeal they displayed both in the cause of Christianity and humanity, the pontiff of Armenia and his brother Nrerszs were invited to become participators in the proceedings of the council. They met witha very honourable reception from the Latins, whose admiration of the graceful tone of their conversation could only be equalled by the surprise with which they caught every senti- ment which fell from the lips of those bright ornaments of the Armenian ‘church. On the conclusion of the meeting, which led to the deposition ‘of Ropotrs# from his episcopal dignity, the pontiff Grecory went on a pilgrimage to the city of Jerusalem, and his brother Nrersrs having returned to the castle of Zovs, performed the duties of a proxy during the absence of his brother from the seat of his pontificate. Dissensions now arose among the Armenians and Syrians residing in some part of Mesopotamia, through the dissemination of the heretical doctrines ef the Thondrakian sect*, which were calculated to mislead the simple and the illiterate. THuxkuran, an Armenian nobleman, eminently distinguished for his exemplary piety and _ benevolence, viewed the progress of these heresies with great apprehensions for the safety of the established Church of Armenia, and in consequence, endeavoured to check the evil, by communicating the state of things to the pontiff Grecory, and soliciting him to take measures for effectually exterminating the sect. The latter, after givmg the subject due consi- deration, communicated with his brother Nrerszs onthe best way of pro- * The founder of this sect was an Armenian by the name of SumBAT, who flourished in Armenia in the beginning of the ninth century. He was born in Zarehavan, a village situated in the province of Zalcotin ; but in consequence of his long residence in Thondrak, he received the appellation of Thondrakensis, and his followers were known by that of Thondrakians. His mind was imbued with the heretical principles of the Paulicians, and the whole course of his life was marked with the greatest moral depravity, impiety, and wickedness. Like the Sadducees, he disbelieved the doctrine of future rewards and punishments, and in imitation of the opinions of Ericurus denied that God was the creator and preserver of the world. He refused his assent to the creed of the graces of the Holy Ghost, the efficacy of the Sacraments of the Church, and the existence of sin, laws, and justice. 1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 138 tecting the Church from the impending danger, and imposed upon him the task of addressing a general letter to the Armenian inhabitants of Mesopotamia, descriptive of the confession of the orthodox faith of the Armenian Church, and contradictory of the heterodox opinions of the Thondrakians. Nzrsrses performed the injunctions of his brother in such a successful manner, as to silence those who were inimically dis- posed towards the Church, and to restore peace and unanimity amongst the community of that place. In the year 1142, the Grecian emperor JouANNES PoRPHYRIGENITUS led a considerable army into the country of Cilicia, in order to put down the power of the Scythians, which had already begun to assume a formidable appearance in that quarter. During his short stay in the city of Anarzaba, the emperor expressed a desire of having an interview with the Armenian pontiff Grecory and his brother Nigrsses. On their being presented to the emperor, they met with a kind reception, and were seated next to his imperial majesty. A conversa’ then ensued relative to the doctrines and ceremonies of the Armenian Church, and the sound judgment with which they answered the interrogations of the emperor, excited his regard and admiration. This afforded him a favourable opportunity of acquiring a correct notion of the state of the Armenian Church, and of removing from his mind that unjust prejudice with which he was in the habit of viewing the Armenians. The exam- ple of their monarch was soon followed by the majority of the people, who began to relax in the persecution with which they afflicted a nation whom by a common faith they ought to have protected from similar cruelties, when inflicted by the unbelieving Musulmans. Apprehensive, through the perturbed state of the country, of an attack upon his paternal castle of Zovs by foreign invaders, the pontiff Grecory consulted his safety by quitting the place of his residence, and fixing the seat of his pontificate in the fortress of Hiromcla. Built on the confluence of therivers Marzmanand Euphrates, and strongly fortified by nature, Hiromcla proved an insuperable bar against an invasion. Formerly it was in the possession of the prince Basit the Sly, and now it was under the control of the countess Joscetyn. The pontiff Greeory and his brother Nizrszs met with a very hospitable reception from this illustrious lady, who felt the greatest delight in rendering their situation comfortable, and was exceedingly pleased with their charming and edifying conversation. On the decease of her husband, who had been seized by Novursp- Din*, the chief of Aleppo, and who died in confinement, the dowager countess Joscetyn thought it safe to quit Hiromcla for Europe. * Mirus’s History of the Crusades, vol. i. p. 309. 134 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. [Marcu, Previously, however, to her departure, she made over the management of the fortress to the pontiff Gregory and his brother Nierszs on the following condition: ‘1 am about to quit this place,” said she, “ and proceed to my country. I leave this fortress as a trust in your hands, with a desire that in case my son happen to come to this quarter, you shall deliver it over to him as his patrimonial property; but if other- ‘wise, you shall be entitled to its possession.” On the arrival of young JoscELyN in Hiromcla, he was made master of it in conformity with the desire of his mother. After a short residence in this place, JoscELYN determined to quit it for Europe. In consequence of this intention, the fortress was sold to the Armenian pontiff Gregory, who, according to the historians VarDAN and Krraxvus, established in it the seat of his pontifical government, and raised there a very magnificent Church, embellished with splendid cupolas. About the year 1165, when Grecory had attained to a good old age, and enjoy 1 the pontifical office for a period of 53 years, he began to be solicitous for the nomination of a successor. He expressed a desire of conferring that spiritual dignity on his brother: Nr=rsss, who was also past the meridian of life. The latter, though the offer was several times made to him by Gregory, was unwilling to accept it. Finally, anticipating the approach of his death, Gregory ordered a gene- ral meeting of all the Armenian bishops, monks, and priests to be held in the pontifical house at Hiromcla, for the purpose of considering the best mode of nominating a successor to the pontificate. In this assem- bly, after making an impressive speech on the approaching termination of his career, and the necessity of electing a successor worthy of the high station which be filled, he expressed his choice of investing his brother Nizrses with the pontifical authority, which proposition met with the unanimous and cordial approbation of the audience. NrzRszs, who had made up his mind to exchange the troubles of a busy life for the sweets of solitude, in vain endeavoured to decline the offer of that responsible situation. Overcome by the repeated solicitations of the assembly, he was at last obliged to accept the office of the pontificate, with a view of promoting the general welfare of the nation. Immedi- ately after this, Grrecory anointed Nrersss pontiff of all Armenia, and adorned him with the pontifical robes. He placed in his hand the sceptre of authority, and saluted him with the greatest reverence and submission as the head of the Church. When the ceremonies of the -election were over, Nirrsxs rose and delivered a most excellent speech, expressive of his acknowledgments for the high honor that had been conferred on him, and descriptive of the nature of the responsible duties which he was bound to perform in the spiritual dignity to which he 1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 135 was elevated. By this oration the audience were not only assured of the zeal and interest which he would feel for the welfare of his flock, but were also struck witha forcible conviction of the goodness of the heart and the grandeur of the mind, from which these graceful sentiments emanated. It was owing to a peculiarly sweet tone of his expressions, and a remarkably fascinating flow of the sentiments of his inspired mind, that he was distinguished by the appellation of the Graceful, CinpSu;h» as he was latterly known by the cognomen of CuasEnsis, ypwegh in consequence of exercising the functions of his sacerdotal office in the fortress of Hiromcla. About three months after the elec- tion of Nrersss, his brother Grecory departed this life Anno Domini 1166, and was entombed in a sepulchre prepared during his life time. Soon after the death of his brother, Nr=rszs, the pontiff, set about improving the state of the churches, and promoting the spiritual wel- fare of his flock. And as the Armenians in that time, like those in our days, were dispersed in various parts of the globe, that is to say, in the territories of Armenia, in Greece, Persia, Georgia, Aluans, Egypt, and other quarters, he found it essentially necessary to extend spiritual. comforts even to his distant congregation, by sending to them pious and able missionaries, for the purpose of curing the wounds of the afflicted, and enlightening the minds of the ignorant. Not contented with the good that was likely to result from the zealous exertions of these preachers of the gospel, he, at the early part of his pontificate, and by the unanimous consent of his bishops, addressed a general epistle at great length to the people of his Church, which was couched in sentiments full of heavenly wisdom*. In this letter, after mentioning the death of his brother Grecory, and taking a short view of the relative duties imposed upon him by his being elevated to the pontifical throne, he states the orthodox creed of the Church of Armenia, which is immediately follow- ed by preceptive exhortations best adapted to persons of every age and rank. ‘The letter itself is divided into different sections, the first of which is directed to conventuals, who are assimilated to the stars ; the second, to the primates of monasteries, who are compared to the eyes ; the third, to the bishops, who are likened to the head, counte- nance, and stewards ; the fourth, to the priests, who are made to re- semble parents ; the fifth, to the nobility ; the sixth, to the military order ; the seventh, to the citizens ; the eighth, to the husbandmen and peasantry ; and the ninth, to the female sex in general. The immedi- ate object of the writer was to excite a love of virtue and piety amongst his congregation, and to be instrumental in eradicating from their * This pastoral epistle was published in Venice with a Latin translation in the year 1829. 136 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. [Marcu, minds such unwholesome principles, as are calculated to render human nature waste and deformed. There are also extant several epistles written by Nizrszs to different individuals, about matters temporal and spiritual, amongst which his correspondence with the authorities of Greece, relative to the contemplated union of the Greek and Armenian Churches, claims pre-eminence. Of this I shall have occasion to give a detailed account in the following pages : The attention of Nrerszs the Graceful was chiefly engrossed by a fervent desire of introducing various useful plans of improvement into the Church of Armenia. He succeeded in his endeavours of reforming it from the remnants of those irregularities, which were some of the baleful consequences of foreign invasions, and which were still predo- minant in several parts of Armenia. He strove with great vigilance to restore to the Church that splendour, which it enjoyed during the glorious reign of the Christian kings of Armenia. He ordered old copies of the Prayer Book of the Armenian Church to be brought to him from various distinguished monasteries of Armenia major, and by a careful comparison of their contents, he modelled the liturgy with considerable improvements, which is to this day in general use amongst all the Armenians. He made several additions to the Prayers that were read on Good Friday and the Pentecost. According to the autho- rity of MuxuirTHak, the pontiff, it appears that up to the time of Nrzrsus the Graceful, the Church of Armenia performed the ordination of priests and bishops conformably to the custom and ceremonies of the Greek Church ; but Nrerszs, on his elevation to the pontifical throne, adopt- ed a new mode of ordination, not materially different from those of the sister Churches. Prior to the beginning of the twelfth century, poetry was a perfect blank in Armenian literature. Though metrical pieces_and songs can be traced in our history to have been repeated and sung by the Arme- nians in different periods, yet no record is handed down to us as to the existence of regular poetry in the Armenian language. According to. a faithful writer* of that time, great credit is due to Nizrsgs the * Nierses LAMBRONENSIS, a contemporary and relation of Nierses the Graceful,"pays a handsome and just tribute to his genius, learning, and virtues in a poetical panegyric which he composed on him shortly after his death. In alluding to the honor due to him for his being the first who introduced poetry into the Armenian language, the panegyrist writes thus : Sndk- push unui fry gwifioy. ‘¢ Who first with grace Homeric numbers strung, \nwtuenp nunhg qunoy And touchingly in fair Armenia sung, His verses soothe and elevate the soul, ’b Soqiapub qunjl maLoye And bend our stubborn hearts to their control.’” herd qufyunu kup Spo WS oy: 1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 137 Graceful as the first poetic writer in Armenia, whose talented produc- tions have deservedly gained him the title of the Prince of Armenian Poets. Gifted by nature with a great genius, Nierszs devoted his leisure to the composition of melodies, anthems, and hymns, which are to this day sung in our Church to the admiration of all. Some of these poetical pieces are acrostic, the first letters of the stanzas com- posing the name of the author or the entire alphabet of the Armenian language. He also wrote several treatises and panegyrics, both in prose and verse, on dominical feasts, patriarchs, martyrs, and angels. During the days of his priesthood, he composed a brief history of Ar- menia in verse, from the period of Harc to the twelfth century. A variety of miscellaneous pieces are also extant by this author, several of which he wrote before his elevation to the pontifical throne. At the express desire of his nephew Apirart, he produced in verse a pathe- tic Elegy on the destruction of the devoted city of Edessa by the victorious army of Zencut,the chief of Aleppo, which memorable event took place on the 23rd of December, 1144*. This little work, which abounds with vivid descriptions and patriotic feelings, was for the first time published at Madras in the year 1810. Another edition of it was lately published by the Asiatic Society of Paris. The European public may shortly expect an English translation of it, which I have undertaken to executet. On his being raised to the dignity of a bishop Nierses produced another excellent work entitled 37 ()pgfh “ Jesus _ the Sont,” which is a poetical description of the principal events that are recorded in the Old and New Testaments. During this time he composed that admirable prayer which commences with “I confess with faith,” gwewwnd forunaduitfS, and which is now so popular amongst the generality of the Armenians. It consists of twenty-four verses, typical of the twenty-four hours of the day, and the number of the books of prophecy. Regarding this prayer, the author says in the records of old manuscripts, ‘‘ 1 have written this in a plain and easy style, that it should be intelligible to general readers.” It is held in such great estimation by my countrymen, that a translation of it into twenty-four languages was published in the year 1823 by the Mukhi- tharian Society in Venice ! Nrersss was not unaware of the benefit of combining wtile dulci in the variety of his literary productions. He * Miuxs’s History of the Crusades, vol. i. p. 307. t+ The Armenian text was published at Calcutta in 1832. The translation has not yet appeared.—Ep. ~ This work is very popular with the Armenian literati, and has run through several editions, the latest of which was published at Venice in the year 1830. T 138 Memoir of St. Nierses, Clajensis. (Marcu, wrote several entertaining fables and pleasing enigmas, with a view of affording to his countrymen a source of innocent pleasure of the mind. Besides those already enumerated, he produced several other little works, which, like many valuable antiquities, have not escaped the de- vouring jaws of time. The fame of the sanctity and wisdom of Nrersss the Graceful hay- ing spread through various countries of the globe, many distinguished individuals addressed him letters comprising questions on the most dif- ficult points of religion, which he answered with such skill as to carry conviction to the mind of every reasonable being. At the special desire of VarpAN, one of the venerable monks of the convent of Hagh- bat, he undertook writing a commentary of a sublime panegyric on the Holy Cross, the production of David the philosopher, distinguished by the cognomen of the Invincible. When the work was completed and presented to Varpan, he highly admired the profound learning and the inspired sentiments with which it abounded. There are also a few philosophical treatises extant im our language, which some of our histo- rians attribute to the pen of this bright luminary of the Armenian Church. Great intimacy existed between Nrerses and Groretius, primate of the convent of Haghbat, who was eminently distinguished for his piety and rectitude of conduct. The latter, who held a constant communica- tion with the former, solicited him in a letter to use his endeavours to procure a copy of the Memoirs of St. Sarxresthe General. Nuimrszs . succeeded in obtaining the work, which was written in the Syrian lan- guage. He ordered it to be translated into Armenian by a Syrian priest, named Micuaxx, who was tolerably conversant with the Arme- nian language. ‘This translation was subsequently revised by Nizrsxs in the year 1156, while he was a bishop. A copy of this work, written in Hiromcla, in the year 1198, about twenty-five years after the death of Nixrszs, is preserved in the library of the Mukhitharian Society at Venice. Annexed to this work, which appears to have been transcrib- ed from the manuscript of Nisrszs himself, is a commentary of the general Epistles of St. James, St. Peter, St. Joun, and St.Jupz, writ- ten in a concise and comprehensive style, and compiled from the works of Greek and Syriac theologists, whose names are specified. But who was the compiler of this work is not known, as no mention is made of him in the old records. In another copy of the same, which was writ- ten in the year 1335 at the convent of St. THapprus, situated in the province of Artaz, the compilation of the work is attributed by the transcriber to Nierses. ‘This is, however, a mere conjecture, for it can be clearly perceived from the style that it is not the production of 1836. ] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 138 Nigrszs. Perhaps a transcript made by him from the original was left in the pontifical house at Hiromcla. In the evening of his life, Nrzerses commenced writing a commen- tary on the Gospel of St. Marruew. He had performed it as far as « Think not that I am come to destroy the law or the prophets : I am not come to destroy, but to fulfil,” when the termination of his earthly career put a stop to its completion. After the lapse of a considerable time, it was finished by Jonannes ZorzeReEnsis. There is another work by the talented Nizrsrs, which was intended as a guide for monastic life, and which he wrote while he enjoyed the dignity of priesthood. The profound learning which characterises his writings, the peculiarly beautiful style in which they are composed, and the divine spirit of benevolence which pervades every page of his compositions, are con- vincing proofs that the author of them was endowed with a mind of most extraordinary powers, and filled with divine inspiration. His voluminous lucubrations, which have been handed down to us by the unanimous applause of past generations, are highly creditable both to his head and heart as a man, a patriot, a divine, and a philosopher. Few can rise from the perusal of his works without being moved by feelings of reverence and admiration for the greatness of the mind from which they have emanated. Nuizrsus LAMBRONENSIS, the grandson of Gene- ral SHAHAN, the brother of Nimrsts the Graceful, who was one of his distinguished contemporaries, and had many opportunities of personally experiencing his mental and moral qualities, pays a just tribute to the memory of this paragon of learning in a poetical panegyric which minutely treats of the many amiable virtues with which he was adorned. The panegyrist properly dwells on the meritorious exertions, which Nierszs the Graceful made to promote the public good, on his exem- plary piety and devotion, his rigid and abstemious habits, his continual studies and philosophical reflections, and the warm sympathies with which his heart glowed in relieving the distress of the poor, the orphan, the widow, the sick, the captive, and others who were doomed to suffer miseries and calamities. During the pontificate of Nizrsxs the Graceful, there still appeared in some parts of Armenia remnants of a peculiar tribe of Armenians, known under the appellation of || p&opefg AnEvorvIES*, (the Sons of * This people had probably derived their mode of worship from the ancient Persians, and perfectly agreed in the tenets of the Guebres of the present day. They adhered to the doctrines of Zerpasutor ZoROASTER, who considered the sun as the grand receptacle of fire, and placed the existence of the Deity in the fiery element spread over all the universe. T 2 146 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marcnw, the Sun,) who had continued in their ancestorial superstitions, and not deviated from paying homage to the sun since the days of Grucory the Illuminator, the second Apostle of Armenia. Through the zealous exertions of the Armenian missionaries, whom the pontiff Nizrszs sent to different quarters of the country, the darkness of paganism, ' that had so long overhung the heads of these unbelievers, gradually began to vanish, and after the lapse of a few years, the whole of that tribe embraced Christianity, and were admitted into the fellowship of the Church of Armenia. Contemporary with Nizrses the Graceful, there was in Armenia Muxuirnar, an assiduous follower of AuscuLapius, and eminently dis- tinguished for his Medical and Astronomical knowledge. He had the gratification of cultivating the friendship of Nirrszs, from whose conversation he derived the greatest delight and spiritual comfort. At the particular request of this celebrated naturalist, Nrzrszs wrote a beautiful poem, descriptive of the beauties and excellencies of heaven- ly bodies. He added to it another small poem on the Creation of the World, and the mystery of the incarnation of our Saviour*. The latter is acrostic, the first letters of the verses of it composing this sentence IYfbltup pdhaqs piu, ?f tkpubsul quyw pus “ Doc- tor Muxnitruar, accept from Nierses this poem!” I hope it will not be considered here out of place to say, that this learned phy- sician has left a very valuable work on Medicine, which is replete with wise observations and useful experiments. It was composed during the time, and by the desire, of Grecory the pontiff, the successor of Niersss the Gracefult. One of the most remarkable actions that marked the earthly career of Nrersss the Graceful, was the contemplated union of the Armenian and Greek Churches. This desirable object, which originated from a most unexpected event, was undertaken during the life time of his brother Grzecory, the pontiff, and prior to his being invested with the supremacy of the Church of Armenia. But alas for the peace of Christianity! before the laudable undertaking was carried into execu- tion, both Armenia and Greece were unexpectedly deprived of the only instruments by which such a happy change possibly could have been effected ! During the last days of the pontificate of Grucory, dissensions arose between the two Armenian princes, THorossz the Great Panse- * These two little poems are also published in conjunction with the work called «© Jesus the Son.”’ + This rare Manuscript work was discovered in the Royal Library of Paris, and published in Venice two years ago. 1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 141 bastus and Lord of Cilicia, and Osuin the Sebastus and Lord of Lambron. ‘The reason of this unfortunate difference was, that the former insisted upon the latter to profess obedience to himself, and to decline becoming tributary to the Greeks, while Osun thought it safer to continue his allegiance to the Greek emperor, than to acknow- ledge the ascendency of THorosz. Blinded by selfishness, and provoked by mutual resistance, they were at last necessitated to have recourse to an appeal to arms, which was attended with fatal consequences to both parties. The pontiff Grecory, viewing these unfortunate circumstances with a spirit of national sympathy, imposed upon his brother Nirrszs the task of effecting a reconciliation between the two princes by his mild and fascinating address. Niprses succeeded in his endeavours of restoring to them peace and friendship, which were soon after followed by a happy alliance between them, THoross marrying his daughter to Heruvm, the son of Osuin. On the celebration of this marriage, OsHiN desired NizrsEes to accompany him to Lambron, with a view that its inhabitants might be benefitted by his edifying instructions and evan- gelical discourses. During their journey they had occasion to enter the city of Mamestia, which was then in the possession of the Greeks. Here they met ALExius, the protostrator or generalissimo of the Greek army, who was the son-in-law of the emperor MANvEL, and had come thither with the design of visiting the frontiers that belonged to the Grecian empire. On his first interview with Nizrsss the Graceful, A.Exius was struck with admiration by the grace and learning which pervaded every part of his conversation. One day religion being the topic of their conference, ALExius expressed a desire of being fur- nished with information as to the cause of the division of the Church of Christ into so many doctrinal opinions. The promptitude with which Nrzrsss answered every question that was put to him, created in ALExIus a deep sense of veneration for him as an erudite divine, and left no appearance of doubt in his arguments. NurErszs convinced him that the difference of opinions between the Christian Churches merely existed in words and forms, and assured him that the creed of the Armenian Church was consonant to that of the Church of Greece. Axrxius desired Ni=rszs to commit the whole of their conversation to writing, which he promised to present to the emperor, and to exert every nerve in effecting a union between the two Churches. He also proposed to him the solution of a few important points, which from their intricate nature had created a difference of opinion between the divines of the Greek Church. 142 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marcu, Nierszs accepted the proposition with great interest, and accord- ingly wrote an epistle to him full of sound doctrine and incontrovertible proofs. He commenced the latter by saying, “1 was extremely delighted by the opportunity of holding a conference with you, O philanthropic and pious nobleman, respecting the doctrines and forms of the Armenian Church! But as sentiments embodied by human utterance are liable to be effaced from the tablets of memory, by the lapse of time, by reason of the cessation of our remembrance, I do not hesitate to furnish you with a written account of all that you were pleased to hear from me. I shall endeavour to perform my task with as much propriety and precision, as my time and abilities will admit of. Encouraged by the love of knowledge, with which you are distin- guished, I feel no small alleviation in the execution of my difficult undertaking. It may not be perhaps superfluous to add, that all my arguments are drawn from that pure source of religious truth, for which our divine fathers of old are so deservedly characterised.” This preamble is immediately followed by an orthodox confession of the Holy Trinity, and of the incarnation of our blessed Saviour. It is here asserted, that the Church of Armenia admits the duality of nature in Christ, and that the Armenians by the term “‘ one nature,’ acknow- ledge by implication an unconfounded union of the divinity and. human nature of our Saviour. It is also added that the Armenian Church, according to old customs, commemorates the nativity of our Saviour on the 6th of January, and that it is a gross fabrication that the Arme- nians observe the Annunciation day on the preceding day of the Epi- phany. That in consequence of a want of olives, the Armenians make preparation of unction by the oil of odorous flowers. That they pay due reverence to pictures. That in constructing crosses of wood, nails are with no other intention affixed to them than with that of joining the parts together ; while those made of silver and gold are without nails. That the prayer YJacpe G&S “ Holy God*,” is offered in the Ar- menian Church to Jesus Christ, and not to the Father, or the Holy Ghost. That the custom of partaking of milk, butter, and cheese, on * About half an hour previously to the commencement of high mass, the following short prayer is addressed to the Son in the Armenian Church: Yoere US; wocpe le Sqor onc pp he wir tnS , op fuuskguip quot Ep» ayapdE-us dE 4+ “ Holy God, Holy and Mighty, Holy and Immortal; who’ wast crucified for us, have mercy upon us.’’? An erroneous impression had been made on the minds of the Greeks, that this prayer was indiscriminately addressed to either of the persons of the Holy Trinity, and by this conviction, they traced a fundamental error in the doctrines of the Armenian Church. 1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 143 Saturdays and Sundays during the lent, has now become obsolete amongst the Armenian people, and though it is still continued by a few of the nobility, its entire abandonment will be effected in a short time. That the custom of using pure wine, unmixed by water, in the Holy Communion, has obtained in the Armenian Church since the days of the blessed Grecory the Illuminator. Finally, the writer explains the nature of the abdomedal fasting, which is observed by the Arme- nians a few weeks before the commencement of the Lent. ' ALEXIUS, on receiving from Nizrsss the foregoing epistle, expressed his grateful acknowledgments for the same, and permitted him to take his departure for Lambron, after having bestowed on him every mark of honor suitable to his rank and office. Ni»rszs having remained in the latter place for a short time, quitted it for Hiromcla, where he met his brother Grecory, the pontiff, and related to him every particu- lar of the communication that had passed between him and the Grecian generalissimo ALEXIUS. On the fulfilment of the immediate object of the letter of Nimrszs the Graceful, on its being put into the hands of the emperor Manuz1, and the patriarch Micuazx, they immediately ordered it to be trans- lated into Greek, and felt great satisfaction at the opportunity that had offered itself of effecting a union between the Greek and Armenian Churches. The perusal of the translation filled their minds with admiration of the mild spirit and rare talents of the writer, and afford- ed them encouragement to carry the contemplated scheme into exe- cution. Hereupon the emperor sent a deputation to Armenia, consist- ing of SumBar and Aruxku, both of Armenian extraction, with a letter to Gregory the pontiff, dated September, 1167, expressive of his ear- nest desire of seeing the consummation of the happy union which was in contemplation. In order to proceed in this undertaking. with faci- lity and success, he wished that Nizrsss the Graceful should be sent to Constantinople, thinking that the presence of both parties might in a great degree be conducive to an amicable settlement of the existing differences. The following is a copy of the letter in question : *“* Manuext Comnenus PorpuyRiGENITUs, ever mighty and great, Augustus, emperor of Greece, and faithful king of God Jesus Christ, to his holiness Lord Grueory, the excellent pontiff of Armenia, sendeth love and greeting. It is the imperative duty of all those, who by the medium of the baptismal font have entered into the fellowship of Christ, to have due regard for the fulfilment of divine justice, and to display special care and zeal for the advancement of love, peace, and unanimity amorgst that class of people, who have Christ as the foun- dation of their religion. They are bound to use their unremitting endeavours to knit all the Christians with the bonds of union ; to make them followers of one shepherd, who became incarnate to save us from perdition, to bring them under 144 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marcu, the guidance of one pastoral crook ; to cause them to ‘ lie down in green pas- tures’’ of orthodox faith ; to render them participators of the vital stream of wholesome doctrines, and to gather them within the pale of one Catholic Church. Elevated by Providence to the highest station that can be allotted here to a human being, I consider the duties of governing my empire less sacred, less beneficial, than those which oblige me to be instrumental in effecting an union of the Christian Churches. Impressed with this conviction, I shall, as far as time and circumstances will permit, strive to consummate an object, which involves the temporal and spiritual welfare of mankind. ‘It is not less becoming to your excellent fraternity, who have made the scriptures and the laws of God your chief studies, and rendered yourselves con- versant with the orthodox doctrines of the fathers of the Church, to use your frieadly and influential co-operation in securing the welfare of the inward man, by collecting from the only source of life the dews of truth and salvation. Of your desire to promote this laudable object, we have been informed by our belov- ed son-in-law Auexius, who delivered to us a letter bearing a detailed account of the conference that had taken place between you and him concerning the contemplated union of the sister Churches. Itis our intention to give due deliberation to the state of the Armenian Church, and to institute inquiries into the creed thereof. A translation of the letter of your holiness was read by us with uncommon interest, and afforded us a source of the greatest satisfaction. Assured of the moral and Christian virtues, for which your holiness is so emi- nently distinguished, we feel real pleasure in rendering our aid to the consum- mation of an object highly desirable both to God and man. ‘¢ With this view we would propose to you to dispatch your brother NreRrsEs to our capital, as we are perfectly convinced that a man of his extensive informa- tion, varied knowledge, virtuous conduct, and amiable disposition, will not only be able to afford satisfaction to the Head of our Church, and the synod in general, but particularly tend to remove the difficulties which will otherwise be experienced from time and place. Let the insignificant cause of division, which subsists between the two Churches, be removed if it he within the scope of pos- sibility ; and let not Christ, who redeemed us from eternal punishment by his precious blood, be considered a stumbling block, but the Head of the corner and the True Foundation of our faith, which unites us together im spirit. Let Christ be the centre of all our religious inquiries, the Anchor of all our spiritual aspi- rations, and the Director of all our ecclesiastical affairs. In him we founded our belief, to him our hearts were fixed, and by him our wounds were healed. From the Great Bestower of so many blessings you will no doubt obtain for your zeal in the sacred cause of Christianity that recompence which is reserved for the enjoyment of the elect. We have thought it necessary to depute our faithful servant SuMBAT, bearing this letter, with directions to induce you to despatch your brother NizrsEs to Constantinople. He is also authorised to give you such other information, as might have a connexion with the immediate object of his mission. You may safely credit all that will be said by him on this sub- ject. Adieu !’’ While preparations were in progress at the capital of Greece for depatching the embassy to Armenia, the pontiff Grecory terminated his earthly career. The Church of Syria was also at the same time 1836.} Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 145 deprived of its supreme pastor, whose station was immediately filled by an able and worthy successor. News of the proposed union of the sister Churches having spread throughout the Christian countries which held a close intercourse with Armenia, the patriarch of Syria deputed two learned bishops to Hiromcla, for the purpose of taking a part in the proceedings of the council, which was shortly to be held by Niersss the Graceful, for furthering the views of the intended union. On the arrival of the embassy at Hiromcla, Sumsar delivered the imperial letter to Nrerszs the pontiff, communicating to him many inter- esting particulars on the part of the emperor, and persuading him to accompany him to Constantinople ; but the duties of his high office rendering his absence from the pontifical house indispensable at that very juncture, NrersEs sent a reply to the emperor, full of spirit and wonderful observations. As the letter itself is of great length, I shall here only give an outline of its contents : ‘* I had the honor to receive the letter of your Imperial Majesty, addressed to my late lamented brother and immediate predecessor in the pontificate of Armenia. By the perusal of the inspired sentiments expressed in it by your godly Majesty, our hearts thrilled with that inexpressible delight which a person feels on recovering from the influence of sleep, and enjoying the vivifying beams of the glorious orb of day. It is gratifying to us to observe, that your Majesty is worthy of not only bearing the name of the true EMMANUEL, but also of his co-operation in ‘ breaking down the middle wall of partition between us.’ En- dowed with these peculiar gifts of heaven, your Majesty is condescendingly pleased to accost us with a cheering voice, and propose measures for eradicating from amongst us that hatred, which has proved so baleful to the interests of Christianity, and the welfare of our country. I am so exceedingly delighted with your Majesty’s invitation, that I would, even if I were dead, like LAzarvs, arise from the grave, and obey the divine voice which summons me to your presence ; but violent disturbances abroad, and the urgent duties of my avocation at home, present insuperable barriers to my paying a visit to Constantinople. Notwith- standing these obstacles, I should still feel diffident to attempt discussing a ques- tion of so much weight in your august presence, from a conviction that the sphere of my knowledge would look like a mere drop in comparison with the vast ocean of your Majesty’s qualifications. All that were great and noble in Armenia, to our national misfortune, have now ceased to exist. The only com- fort, with which we cheer our hearts in the melancholy gloom that overhangs our civil destinies, is derived from the circumstance of our Church being based on the solid foundation of Catholic faith. We place our confidence in the mercies of God, that the divine power which excited love and good-will amongst us, shall consummate a happy union between the two Churches. ‘* Should your Imperial Majesty be graciously pleased to visit Armenia, for the furtherance of this desirable object, you will, by that act of condescension, display in your soul the stamp of that humility, with which the heavenly King came to the world to bestow salvation on mankind. We are sure that you will join with us in the conviction, that the lustre of glory reflected on your mighty empire by U 146 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marcw#, splendid victories, and the aggrandizement of territories, will be cheerless and evanescent when contrasted with that of restoring peace to the Church of Christ, by blunting the weapons of the incorporate enemy, and suppressing envy and hatred, which like cankers have preyed on the very vitals of our spiritual exist- ence. Our Lord Jesus Christ, viewing the baneful consequences of pride pre- dominant in human nature, had recourse to humility as to an infallible cure of the spiritual infirmities under which mankind were labouring ; and by means of his divine love and meekness, conciliated the hearts of those who were estranged from him by the infringement of his laws and ordinances. In imitation of the example set to us by our blessed Redeemer, it behoves your Imperial Majesty to make your dictatorial authority subservient to mildness and humility, in remov- ing the cause of estrangement that exists between the two nations. As a tree which is bent to the ground is liable to be broken by a sudden and violent effort to restore it to its upright position, so a division amongst the members of Christ, rendered obsiinate by time, is incapable of being removed by force. It stands in need of a long and patient application of spiritual ointment, I mean the exer- cise of a kind, mild, and conciliatory spirit on the part of your Imperial Majesty towards the Armenians placed under the sway of your government. ‘‘ Many of your people, to our great national misfortune, consider that the only means of conforming to the laws and justice of God, and of being worthy of inheriting the kingdom of heaven, consist in pouring upon us torrents of abuse, in destroying our Churches, in breaking our crosses, in overturning our altars, in ridiculing our religious ceremonies, and in harassing and persecuting the ministers of our Church. This unchristian animosity is carried to such a pitch, as to shame the horrid cruelties of the worst of unbelievers. Galled and perse- cuted by Moslem despotism, we have hitherto in vain sought protection in the sympathies of Christianity. Hence it must be inferred, that such a course of action not only fails to unite the divided, but tends to divide the united. The first effectual recipe, that can be applied to our spiritual distempers, is to make an exchange of the inveterate hatred for human love and kindness, and as a matter of consequence, to stimulate thereby the inhabitants of Armenia major to an acquiescence in the projected union. We humbly solicit your Imperial Majesty to order special prayers to be offered up in all the Churches throughout your empire, that the Almighty may be pleased to crown our undertaking with suc- cess. We have taken care that similar measures shall be adopted by our clergy in every quarter of Armenia. ‘¢ We have also particularly to request, that in case Providence assist us in discussing matters ou the intended union in a general council, no mark of dis- tinction or superiority should be observed between the Greek and the Armenian. Let no tone of authority be assumed by the former in denoting such points of the doctrines of our Church as are nof accordant with those of yours, and no fault be imputed to the latter in boldly supporting the truths and dignity of their Church. Marks of distinction are only observable in tne discussion of civil and temporal affairs. It is true that you claim pre-eminence in the attain- ment of knowledge and the exercise of earthly power; yet all those who are strengthened by the graces of regeneration in the baptismal font, are according to St. Paul ‘one in Christ Jesus.’ If, therefore, it may be pleasing to the Al- mighty to smile on our endeavours, and to bring our undertaking to a successful termination, we shall, in the assembly to be convened for the purpose, lay Christ 1836.) Memorr of St. Nierses Clajensis. 147 as the Rock and the Head of the corner over the two sundered walls of our Churches. Let not the subject be discussed with that fruitless and violent mode of controversy, which has hitherto beeu carried on by the sister Churches with detrimental consequences on both sides. Let brotherly love, unanimity, and an ardour after divine truths distinguish the whole course of the proceed- ings of the council. Let us, in accordance with the injunctions of St. Paul, bear one another’s burden, and the infirmities of the weak, and so fulfil the law of Christ.’ In laying open our spiritual distempers to the observation of one another, let each party reciprocally look for, in the other, a sympathising and confidential physician. Whatever may be beyond the reach of our penetration, let it be referred to the testimony of those whose judgment and experience have rendered them distinguished in the decision of similar questions. Able physi- cians do not consider their qualifications under-rated by taking medicines from the hands of their scholars, when they are labouring under the attacks of sick- ness. The eyes, though sharp enough in seeing the objects presented to their gaze, fall short of beholding themselves and the members of the body by which they are surrounded; and on their being attacked with soreness, they seek a cure from the eyes and hands of another. What has been stated above, will, we hope, be considered sufficiently satisfactory to your Imperial Majesty. We have communicated to you multum in parvo, and have desired your ambassador to furnish you with such other information, as may be thought to content the ar- dour of your curiosity. Adieu! Augustus Emperor! May your Majesty live long under the protection of the Almighty.’’ At the express desire of SumBat, who was at the head of the em- bassy, Nirrszs the Graceful drew out another form of the Creed of the Armenian Church, being assured that it would tend to throw more light on the disputed points of religion, and carry conviction to the mind of every philanthropic inquirer. The contents of this letter were a clear, distinct, and comprehensive recapitulation of all that he had stated in the former one, presented to Auexius, the son-in-law of the emperor. The letter commenced with the following beautiful preamble : ‘It now becomes us to address ourselves to you, not with eloquence of speech, in which we are deficient, but in the truth of the spirit, in which we were in- structed by those favoured with divine inspiration. We do not attempt giving colour to a schismatical darkness, by clothing our Creed with the light of ortho- dox faith, as we have unjustly been supposed to do by others guilty of a similar line of conduct; but what we have stored in the invisible spirit, we embody the Same in visible writing, by the testimony of our minds, and the dictation of the Holy Ghost, who sees, judges and examines the utmost recesses of our hearts.’’ After making long and sensible observations on the mystery of the Holy Trinity, and the incarnation of Jesus Christ, leaning on the in- controvertible testimonies of the Fathers of the Church, he proceeds thus : ‘* Concurring in the fundamental principles of the Christian religion, we be- lieve that the word, who was made flesh according to St. JoHN, was not changed into flesh by being divested of his divine nature, but that by an unconfounded ul 2 148 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. [Marcn, union with body, he was actually made flesh, and continued without flesh, as he was from the beginning. We believe that there are not two persons in Christ, one with flesh and the other without flesh; but that the very Christ is both with flesh and without flesh. He was made flesh by human nature, of which he partook, and remained without flesh in divine nature, which he had from the beginning. He is both visible and invisible, perceivable and unperceivable by the touch, be- ginning and unbeginning in time, the Son of Man, and the Son of God, co- essential with the Father in divinity, and concomitant with us in humanity.’’ After taking a comprehensive view of the mystery of the incarna- tion of our Saviour, he dilates on His divine and human wills, and clearly demonstrates, that the will of the humanity of Christ was always and in every respect obedient to that of his divinity : ‘¢The human will had no ascendancy over the divine, as in us the passions very often domineer over the reason; but the divine will always exercised its dominion over the human: for the actions of the human were all guided and directed by the power and sway of the divine. ‘Tn accordance with the doctrine of the wonderful union of the divine and human wills that exist in the person of Christ, we concur in the consistency of attributing his operations to a natural and supernatural agency. We do not ascribe his superior actions only to the divinity, unconnected with the humanity ; nor his inferior acts only to the humanity, unconnected with the divinity. Were it not truly proper to connect the great with the little, how could it consistently be said that the Son of Man descended from heaven, and that God was crucified and bled on the cross? To the unconfounded union of both the divinity and humanity we attribute the divine and human operations of Christ, who some- times as a God acted inthe superior power of God, and sometimes as a man, acted in the capacity of man, as it is easily demonstrated by the whole course of his dispensations from the beginning to the close of his divine mission. He felt hunger as a man, and fed thousands with a few loaves asa God. He prayed for us and on our behalf as a man, and accepted with his Father the prayers of all his people as a God. In humanity he was brought as a lamb to the slaughter, and was dumb as a sheep before her shearers; but he is the Word of God, by whom the heavens were created, in his divinity. He died in human nature as a man, and raised the dead by divine power asa God. He suffered the pangs of death as a man, and conquered death by death as a God. It was not the one that died, and the other that conquered death; but it was Christ himself, who died, who lives, and who vivifies the dead. For the same Christ, being a man, and of a mortal nature, and being a God, and of an immortal nature, not divid- ing into two the unconfounded union of the divinity and humanity, so as to render the one untormentable and immortal, and the other susceptible of tortures and death, he suffered on the cross for the salvation of mankind with the inex- plicable combination of these contrarieties, yielding in human nature to tortures and death, and in divinity, being free from pain, and immortal. He that died in human nature, was alive in divinity ; he that was tortured on the cross, remained also free from the pangs of tortures; he that perspired through fear, levelled on the ground his assailants; he that was unjustly humiliated and strengthened by angels, strengthens all his creatures; he that is Creator of the universe, coequal in divinity with the Father, was born from his creature, and 1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 149 partook of our nature. He is proclaimed by the preachers of the gospel to be perfect God and man, uniting in his person divinity and humanity in a manner far surpassing the union of the soul and body; for the former, being commended into the hands of the Father, was separated from the latter, but the divinity con- tinued inseparable from both of them*.”’ The preceding creed is immediately followed by a detailed account of the forms and ceremonies observed in the Armenian Church, similar to that which the writer had previously drawn out at the particular request of Auexius. It is concluded by the following short para- graph : ‘‘In the perusal of our letter, wherein the creed and the observances of our Church are explained in a comprehensive style, we humbly hope that your Gracious and Imperial Majesty will not deny us the candour and sincerity with which our sentiments are embodied in writing. Let us not be suspected of parasitical subterfuges in the communication of our thoughts, and let it be remembered that we have stated in this nothing which is at variance with simple trutb, and the genuine effusions of our hearts.’’ The motives of the writer in making this assertion were to silence the mouths of such miscreants of his nation, as had gone over to the ~Church of Greece, and were invidiously endeavouring to baffle the consummation of the proposed union, by rendering the doctrines and ceremonies of the Armenian Church censurable in the eyes of the Emperor and Patriarch of Constantinople. On the return of the embassy to the Court of Bee the letter of Niersts was put into the hands of the emperor Manuet, who per- sonally presented it to the patriarch. A translation of it being read before a numerous assembly of the dignitaries of the Greek Church, they were struck with admiration at the irresistible arguments which it comprised. They were stimulated by its contents to the abandon- ment of the inveterate hatred which they bore towards the Armenians, and unanimously agreed in effecting the contemplated union between the two Churches. The emperor, excited by an intense desire of pro- moting this sacred cause, proposed to pay a visit to Armenia, accom- panied by some of the learned theologists of Greece, with a view of meeting Nirrsus the Graceful, and holding with him a conference on the religious differences that existed between the two nations ; but he was unfortunately prevented from the fulfilment of his intention by the * This clear, lucid and unequivocal confession of faith is enough to carry convic- tion to the minds of the most fastidious of our accusers, that the Church of ARME- NIA is totally free from the heresies of Eurycures! Let it also satisfy such misinformed, misled, and misguided, writers as Mr. Coartes MAc FARLANE, author of the sublime Tale of CoNSTANTINOPLE, entitled ‘‘ Tot ARMENIANS,’’ that we Armenians are not Eutychians, as he is led to believe from the misrepresentations of the Romanists. 150 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. [Marc, commotions which at that time prevailed in the west. He conse- quently chose the alternative of deputing in May, A. D. 1170, to Hiromcla, Luzion Master Tuzorianey, a Greek divine, eminently distinguished for his theological and philosophical attainments, with Jouanngs, the learned Abbot of an Armenian monastery, from Philip- polis, generally known by the appellation of Uraman, bearing an imperial letter addressed to the pontiff of Armenia, in these terms :— “Tt afforded us great joy to learn your willingness to effect a happy union between the sister Churches, and acquiescing in your laudable views, we have deputed learned and pious men to confer with you on our behalf, and use every means in their power to remove the wall of partition between us.”’ On the arrival of the deputation at Hiromcla, Turorianey and JoHANNeEs were kindly received by the Armenian bishops that were assembled by Nrrerszs the Graceful in the pontifical house, for the pur- pose of adopting the best mode of carrying the proposed union into execution. Nurrszs, on the letter of the emperor being presented to him by Turorraney, shewed the latter every mark of honor and kind- ness, which his rank and the immediate object of his mission required. THEORIANEY had brought with him a copy of the letter of Nimrsxs, addressed to the emperor, with a view of obtaining an explanation on some points that appeared doubtful to them, and of satisfying their minds as to the reality of some assertions that were made by those who were inimically disposed towards the Armenian Church. To these ends an assembly of the Armenian and Greek bishops was held in Hiromcla, who commenced discussing the important points with deco- rum, mildness, and moderation. THEoRIANEY, in the course of perusing the letter of Nrerszs to the assembly, proposed, in proper order, several questions for solution, to which Nrerses made replies, full of convin- cing proofs. The course of discussions comprised queries on the duality of nature and will in the person of Christ, (about which point great stress was laid on this saying of Cyrinuus: ‘‘ The incarnate Word is of one nature,’ which admits of various constructions,) the exact day of the commemoration of the nativity of our Saviour, the propriety of the prayer *‘ Holy God,” which was offered in the Armenian Church, the preparation of the holy unction, the necessity of performing pray- ers within the Church, and the decrees of the council of Chalcedon. At the conclusion of the meeting, Nrerssgs, in his endeavours to remove an erroneous impression from the mind of THEor1AnEy, that the Arme- nians were monophysites, cited from a work of JoHannzs the philoso- pher, a renowned pontiff of Armenia, several proofs corroborative of the duality of nature in Christ. ‘The work in question,” said he, “‘ which was before imperfectly known but to a few of our nation, was afterwards unanimously adhered to by my predecessors in the ponti- 1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 15] ficate of Armenia.” The work was, at the desire of THEORIANEY, pro- duced at the meeting, and a few passages of the same being read to him, he highly admired its wholesome doctrine. A transcript of it was accordingly made out at the request of Turor1ANEey, who wished to take it to Constantinople for the inspection of the emperor and patriarch. The proceedings of this council were committed to writing by TuHeoriANney, as it appears from the panegyric written by Nrersxs Lamsronensis on Ninrses the Graceful. THrorianny’s account of this meeting was, in the year 1578, published in Greek and Latin, in conjunction with the records of the fathers of the Church. Before the mission had quitted Constantinople for Hiromcla, the emperor Manvet communicated to Mrcraut, the patriarch of Syria, his intention of acceding to an union of the Greek and Armenian Churches. THrort1Aney, on his arrival at Hiromcla, wrote to Micuaegn, soliciting his presence at the Council of union which was shortly to be held in the pontifical house of Armenia. The latter deputed a proxy in the person of Jouannzs, bishop of Cheson, who, reaching Hiromcla after the meeting had terminated, felt great displeasure at the acquies- cence of Nierses the Graceful in the doctrines of the Greek Church, and began to censure him, as the representative of his patriarch, for such a line of conduct. Nusrsss, by sensible observations, convinced him of the propriety and necessity of the union, and desired him that on his return to Syria he should use every means in his power to secure the consent of Micuasrt to the removal of the religious differences which had for ages disturbed the peace of the sister Churches. On the departure of THrortanny for Constantinople in October in the year 1170, Nisrsss addressed a letter to the emperor, of which the following is an outline. ‘In delivering your Imperial letter to us, THEORIANEY assured us of the love and good-will, which you are graciously pleased to exercise in increasing the spiritual and temporal welfare of our nation. The proposal of effecting this happy union between the two Churches could proceed from no other source, than from a mind gifted with the choicest blessings of heaven, and entirely devoted to the service of its Creator. Enriched with every thing that is great and good, you burn with the desire of becoming a partaker of our spiritual poverty. On a conference held between us and the learned divines, whom your Majesty was pleased to depute, the veil of the unjust aspersions with which the two nations were covered, was rent asunder. By: the collision of contrary opi- nions, the truth, which was surrounded with a mist of falsehood, burst to light, and shone with redoubled splendour. The result of the council of union is conducive to carrying conviction to the mind of every reasonable being, that the Greeks are free from the heresy of the Nestorian* division, and that the * For the Nestorian heresies, see Evsrsrus’s Ecclesiastical history, tom. iii. pp. 256 and 257, 152 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. [Marcu, Armenians are also free from that of the Eutychian* confusion. Concurring in the fundamental principles of religion, the Armenians and Greeks are united together by the grace of God in the similarity of the creed of the Catholic and Apostolic Church. Fixed in the determination of our happy union, I shall address all our bishops residing in different quarters of Armenia, and ask their consent to some important points proposed by you for our acceptance, lest by their being excluded from taking a part in the furtherance of this desirable object, the result of our endeavours may prove contrary to our sanguine expec- tations. I have also, conformably with the desire of THrEORIANEY, furnished him with another letter descriptive of the confession of our Church.’’ In this letter, after treating of the incarnation of our Saviour, in ac- cordance with the tenor of his former one, he adds, that it is consist- ent with the orthodox faith to admit duality of nature in Christ, by reason of his perfect divinity and perfect humanity; that the Arme- nians, by attributing one nature to the incaraate word, on the authority of Cyriuuus, confess an unconfounded and indivisible combination of the divine with the human nature; and that the Church of Armenia anathematizes those who, in the sense of the heretical doctrine of Evutycues, may confessedly ascribe one nature to Christ. On the return of THEoRIANEY and Jonanngs Uruman to Constanti- nople, they felt great satisfaction in presenting to the emperor the letter of Nrersxs, together with an account of the proceedings of the council. The perusal of these interesting documents afforded the greatest delight to the emperor, the patriarch, and the other dignitaries of the Greek Church. Their joy at the favourable prospect of their undertaking could only be increased by a sense of veneration, with which they were impressed on their being informed by Turor1aney of the piety, mildness, and pleasant address of Nrersxs the Graceful. The fame of the amiable qualities of the pontiff of Armenia rivetted the hearts of the Greeks to the cause of the sacred union, and made them exclaim with admiration, ‘‘ Behold the wise course pursued by the pontiff of Armenia, and consider the orthodox creed followed by him- self and the whole of his congregation! Thanks to Heaven, that in these * The heresies of Eutycues are thus alluded to by Euvsrsivs in his Ecclesi- astical History : ‘As & oby KAnOels E’utuxhs obk eAHAveE* Ta 5E, Kat maparyeyduevos EdAw. eiphret yap, duoroy@ ex dvo0 pbocwr yeyerncbat Tov Kupioy juwy mpd Tis Everews* wera SE Thy wow, piay plow duodroya. bs odd Td oHpa Tod Kupiov buoovo.oy juiy reyev civat’ KaPorperTror mev- : Eurycues igitur, cum ad synodum vocatus non venisset, ac deinde coram convictus esset hec dixisse: Fateor Dominum nostrum Jesum Christum, ante unitionem quidem duas habuisse naturas: Post unitionem vero unam duntaxat naturam confiteor. Sed et corpus Domini negabat ejusdem esse substantie cujus sunt nostra: depositus est.—Eusebii Ecclesiast. Histor. tom. iii. p. 261. 1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. . 153 days of degeneracy we see a pastor of the Church adorned with so many Christian and moral virtues!” The hatred which the Greeks manifest- ed towards the Armenians gradually began to abate, anda sort of generous sympathy was felt by the former, for the lamentable degrada- tion to which the latter were reduced in a political point of view. They could not, however, reconcile themselves to the idea, that the Armenians, after conforming to the fundamental principles of orthodox faith, and admitting duality of nature in our Saviour, should still persist in as- serting one nature in the union of his divinity and humanity. Though the arguments, with which the Armenians endeavoured to clear their minds on this subject, were perfectly sound and correct, yet the Greeks could not overcome their reluctance to make such concessions to them, and were consequently anxious that this obstacle to their union, together with a few others of minor importance, originating from certain observances of the Armenian Church, might prudently and speedily be removed. Hereupon the emperor came to the determination of sending another embassy to Hiromcla, consisting of the abovementioned THErorIaANEy and Jonannes Utuman, who were furnished with letters from the emperor and patriarch MicuaeEt, bearing date December, 1172, and instructed to urge Nr=rsszs to apply himself with increased interest and assiduity to the fulfilment of the object in view, lest the death of either of them might put a stop to the successful termination of their under- taking. Nine points connected with the creed of the Church of Greece were distinctly stated in the imperial letter, for the consideration and subsequent acceptance of the Armenians. It was also proposed by the emperor, that those points, but particularly that of the duality of nature in Christ, should be discussed, and admitted by the Armenians in a general council to be held for that purpose. Should they, how- ever, be reluctant in conceding to some of the points alluded to, they might communicate their objections in a letter addressed by their pontiff to the emperor. The proposed points are the following : I. Anathematize those who admitted one nature in Christ, that is to say, EutycueEs, Deoscorus, Srvertius, Trmoruevs, and the follow- ers of their heresies. II. Confess in our Lord Jesus Christ, one Son, one person, one hypostasis formed of two perfect natures, which are inseparable, indi- visible, unchangeable, unalterable, unconfounded; so as not to consi- der Christ in a separate sense the Son of God and the Son of the holy Deiparous, but to acknowledge in him unconfusedly the Son of God and the Son of Man, and to confess him to be both God and Man in the duality of his nature. Confess in him the duality of actions and x 154 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. [Marc#, natural will, both divine and human, not resisting each other, but the human will following and obeying the divine. III. The prayer ‘‘ Holy God’ should be offered in your Church by the omission of “ who wast crucified for us,” and the conjunction ‘‘ and.’’ TV. You should conform to the Church of Greece in commemorating the feasts, that is to say, the Annunciation day, on the 25th of March; the Nativity, on the 25th of December ; the Circumcision, on the eighth day after the birth of Christ, to wit, on the Ist of January ; the Baptism on the 6th of Janu- ary; the Presentation of our Saviour to the temple on the fortieth day after his birth on the 2nd of February, and in like manner, agreeing with us in observing all the dominical feasts, as well as those of the holy Virgin Mary, of St. Joun, of the Apostles and of others. V. The preparation of the unction should be made of the oil of the fruit of trees. VI. The Communion Service should be performed with lea- vened bread, and wine mixed with water. VII. Let Armenian Chris- tians, both clergy and laity, remain within the Church, during the hours of prayer and the performance of communion service, with the exception of public penitents, who are prohibited by ecclesiastical canons from staying in the midst of the Church during the time. VIII. You should accept the fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh general assemblies. IX. The choice of the nomination of your pontiff should be vested only in the emperor of the Greeks. On the arrival of the embassy at Hiromcla, Turortaney and Jo- HANNES UtTHMAN met witha very kind reception from Nisrsess the Graceful, who having respectfully received the letters of the emperor and patriarch of Constantinople, communicated the contents of them to the principal bishops and friars of the Armenian Church, who had repaired to Hiromcla from the mountains of Taurus and the frontiers of Mesopotamia. Though they were easily persuaded to concede to the chief points proposed by the Greeks, yet great difficulty existed in obtaining the consent thereto of other Armenian bishops, whose number amounted to upwards of three hundred, and who were living in different distant quarters, especially in the frontiers of Armenia major, save the body of monks who resided in monas- teries, and who were almost of an equal number. Consequently, Nrersss thought it necessary to summon these worthies to the general meeting which was shortly to be convened for taking into considera- tion the points proposed by the authorities of Greece, and communi- cating the result of the assembly in a suitable letter to the emperor. He conceived the unanimous voice of all the principal dignitaries of the Church of Armenia indispensably necessary in the adoption of the points, which were the connecting links of the sister Churches, lest, he 1836. ] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 155 feared, an unfortunate division might be created amongst the Armeni- an ecclesiastics, and the result of their undertaking be attended with lamentable detriment. The ambassadors of the court of Constantinople applauded the wise precautions which marked every act of the pontiff of Armenia, but seeing that the council could not possibly be held before the setting in of the summer, they determined to depart from Hiromcla. Nrerszs, in conjunction with Turorianey, addressed letters to Micuant, the patriarch of the Syrian Church, communicating to him the points which were proposed by the Greeks for their acceptance, and soliciting the favour of his presence in the council that was shortly to be held at Hiromcla for that purpose. Micuar. being prevented by his various avocations from going to Hiromcla, sent in his room the friar Turo- porus, who was eminently distinguished for his profound learning and conversancy with the Syrian, Greek, Armenian, and Turkish languages. On the arrival of the latter at Hiromcla,he was received by Nrerszs with every kind of respect due to his rank.A discussion arose between them on the import of the words “‘ substance” and “‘ nature,” which, according to the doctrine of Aristotle, admitted of various constructions. THro- porus, widely differing from the sentiments expressed by Nrerszs on this subject, immediately took his departure from Hiromcla. In the mean while, THrorraANnry and JoHannes Utuman returned to Con- stantinople, furnished with letters addressed by Niersxs to the emperor Manuex and the patriarch Micuart. NuiersEs promised them to convene a general council for the decision of the question of the in- tended union, and to endeavour to make the concessions they required. «‘T shall assiduously try,” says he, ‘‘t6 overcome the long received customs of my countrymen, which prevail on them with the power of a second nature, and to force them to an acquiescence in such of the points proposed in your letters, as may possibly be reconciled to their minds. In so doing, we shall only be actuated by a desire of promot- ing divine love and peace amongst us, but not by an idea of turning from errors into truth. The acceptance of the rest of the points either must be overlooked by you, or left to time, and the happy union which shall shortly be effected amongst us.” Immediately after this, Nrersrs addressed letters to all the Armenian bishops, abbots, and friars residing in different quarters of Armenia, Syria, Aluans, Georgia and Persia, communicating to them all that had passed respecting the union of the sister Churches. He also desired them to pray to the Almighty for the consummation of the laudable object in view, and to take an early opportunity of going to Hiromcla for the purpose of being present in the council that was x 2 156 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marcu, shortly to be convened. Moreover he deputed one friar StzpuHEn with a letter, inviting the Armenian clergy of Ani and Haghbat to the pro- posed assembly. But alas! how often human endeavours and expectations are frus- trated before they have attained to maturity! On the lapse of a few months, while Nrersus was engaged in preparations for holding the council of union, his earthly career was by the inscrutable dispensa- tion of God terminated, Anno Domini 1173, in the seventy-third year of his age. He enjoyed the supreme dignity of a pontiff for seven years, and in that period ordained only seven bishops. His remains lay in state for several days, during which time numbers of Armenians thronged to the pontifical house with a desire of kissing the hand of the deceased. Among those who had assembled there to pay their last tribute of veneration to the virtues of the deceased pontiff of Ar- menia, were Nisrses Lampronensis and several bishops and friars of distinction. This melancholy event plunged the nation into the greatest distress, for they had lost in Nierszs the Graceful a vigilant pastor, a kind father, a faithful friend, a gifted divine, anda most zealous advocate of the truth of Christianity. Grecory Basin, the nephew of the deceas- ed pontiff, who was living at a great distance from Hiromcla, on hear- ing of the dangerous illness of the latter, immediately repaired thither to see his uncle ere he breathed his last. On his arrival at that place, he found Nirrsss dead. He evinced the greatest sorrow at the lamen- table catastrophe which had fallen on his family and the nation in general. The funeral of the deceased pontiff was performed with the greatest pomp and honors, that his rank and exalted station deserved, being attended by almost all the dignitaries of the Armenian Church, the nobility and other distmguished members of the nation, whose heartfelt sorrow, at the irreparable loss which the Church and the state had sustained, could distinctly be read in the melancholy expressions of their downcast countenances. His remains were deposited in a sepulchre which was dug near that of his brother Grecory, and a very splendid mausoleum was afterwards raised over him, bearing upon it a suitable inscription commemorative of his moral and Chris- tian virtues. News of this melancholy event reaching Constantinople, filled the heart of the emperor with the most poignant grief, and spread general regret throughout the Greek empire, every Greek sympathising with the Armenians for the loss which they had sustained in the person of their gifted pontiff. When his grief had comparatively subsided, the emperor wrote a letter of condolence to Gregory Basizt, who had by 1836.} Discovery of Buddhist Images, &c. 157 the unanimous voice of the nation succeeded his uncle in the govern- ment of the Church of Armenia. The progress of the religious union of the two nations, which was unfortunately impeded by the Church of Armenia’s being deprived of its head, was renewed by the commu- nications of the emperor with the pontiff Grecory, who, emulating the laudable example of his immediate predecessor, manifested equal zeal and inclination in the restoration of peace to the bosom of the Church of Christ. Before, however, the question of the long wished- for union was happily decided, Greece was deprived of her most illus- trious, pious, and virtuous ruler, in the year of our Lord 1180, which melancholy catastrophe proved a death-blow to the nearly-finished structure of peace, and blasted in the bosoms of every Armenian and Greek the hopes of their future union! I].—Discovery of Buddhist Images with Deva-ndgari Inscriptions at Tagoung, the Ancient Capital of the Burmese Empire. By Colonel H. Burney, Resident at Ava. [Read before the Society, 6th April, 1836.] I have the pleaure to forward to you a couple of images of GAuDAMA in Terracotta, which Captain Hannay has just sent down to me from Tagoung. On both there is an inscription, apparently in the same old Deva-nagari character, as in the inscription No. 2, of the Allahabad column, and probably consisting of the same words as those on the image of Buddha found in Tirhut, and in the other ancient inscriptions . described in No. 39 of the Journal of the Asiatic Society*. Tagoung, written Takoung, (or according to Sir W. Jonzs’s system, Takaung, but pronounced by the Burmese Tugoung,) vou will find placed in our maps a little above the 23rd degree of north latitude, and on the eastern or left bank of the Hrawadi river. Captain Han- nay, however, has ascertained its latitude by an observation of the sun to be 23° 30’ N., and several Burmese itineraries in my posses- sion make its distance from Ava 52 taings, or about 100 miles. The Burmese consider Tagoung to have been the original seat of their empire, and the site of an ancient city, which was founded before the time of Gaupama, by acolony that emigrated from Central India. Some faint remains of an old city are still to be seen on this spot, where among the ruins of some pagodas, Captain Hannay found the images I now send you. No one here can decypher the character of the inscriptions, but on showing to some of the learned, the account * This is precisely the case :—even to the form of the letters—the dialect how- ever seems to be Magadhi or Pali, dhammd and pabhava for dharma and pra- bhava, &c. See the accompanying plate.— Ep, 158 Discovery of Buddhist Images [ Marcu, of the Bauddha inscriptions given in the 39th No. of the Journal of the Asiatic Society, the words “ Ye dhamma, &c.” were immediately recognised, and supposed to be those placed under these images of Gavupama also. The two figures seen standing on each side of Gau- DAMA in one of these are not, as I had supposed, his two favorite disciples, MouceaLan and TuAREpoutrara, but figures of a preceding Buddha named Dr'penxara, who first delivered the prophetical annun- ciation to Gaupama, whilst the latter was existing in the state of Tuoomepa hermit, declaring that after myriads of years, which he would take in perfecting himself in every virtue, he would attain the state of a Buddha. The learned Burmese confirm Dr. Mixus’s opinion, and Mr. Honeson’s information, that there is no connexion between _ the last two lines and the first two produced by M. Csoma bE K6rés, in the 39th No. of the Journal of the Asiatic Society. The last two, they say, are intended to show the points of instruction delivered, not by Gaupama only, but by every preceding Buddha, and they translate the Pali thus : “The not doing of every kind of evil, fulfilling of good, and purify- ing and cleansing the heart: these above mentioned are the precepts of Buddhas.” With the first two lines beginning “ Ye dhamma,” the Burmese books connect the following anecdote : On the third year after Gaupama had attained the state of a Buddha, whilst he was residing at Welawoon monastery in the city of Yazagyo, (Rajgiri,) one of his disciples, named AsHzen AtHazi Mart’ HEE, went into that city to receive charitable donations, and was met by Oopa- DEITTHA, the son of the female Brahman TuAre, and a disciple of THEIN-ZEN PaRABAIK, some kind of heretics so called. OopapErTTHa asked AsHen Atuazt Mart’Hexr, who was his teacher, what were his opinions ; the latter replied, ‘“‘ My teacher is the most excellent Lord Gaupama, his doctrine$ are as boundless as the sky. I am but lately become a Yahan, and know a little of them only.” OopapriTTHa begged that he would repeat a little of them only, when Atnazt Marr’ HEE recited the two lines beginning with the words Ye dhamma ; but the moment he finished the first line, OopADEITTHA was converted. He then-followed the other to Gaupama, who received him as a disciple, and changed his name into THAREPOUTTARA, or the son of Ture the female Brahman, by which name he was ever after distin- guished as one of the favorite disciples of Gaupama, and is always figured as seated on his right hand, whilst Movecaran, the other favorite disciple, is seen on the left hand. Hence, these words have ever since been considered, as Mr. Hopeson states, as a confessio fider 1836.] with Deva-ndgari Inscriptions at Tagoung. 159 among Buddhists. Before giving the Burmese explanation of these two lines, I must premise, that according to their system of belief, there are four Theettsa, fundamental truths, or moral laws in the uni- verse, a knowledge of which Gaupama attained intuitively at day- break of the morning on which he was perfected into a Buddha under the pipal-tree at Gaya, and therefore, one of his titles is Thamma tham-bouddhattha, said to mean, he who intuitively acquired a know- ledge of the four Theettsa. These four Theettsa are called Doukkha Theettsa, Thamoudaya Theettsa, Niraudha Theettsa, and Megga Theettsa. 1. Doukkha Theettsa means the law of suffering and being, to which all sentient beings are certainly subject whilst revolving, according to the destiny of their good or evil conduct, in the three different states of existence, whether as a Nat or inferior celestial being, a man, or a brute. 2. Thamoudaya Theettsa is the law of evil desires and passions, by which all sentient beings are certainly affected. 3. Niraudha Theettsa is the termination of or emancipation from the operation of the two preceding laws. Not being subject to age, sickness, death, or misery, and being in astate of ease, quiescence and duration uninterrupted. This is Neibban. 4. Megga Theettsa is the cause or the way of reaching the last, and is explained by some to be the Meggen Sheet ba, or the eight good ways, which, as translated by Mr. Jupson, are right opinion, right intention, right words, right actions, right way of supporting life, rightly directed intelligence, caution, and serenity. Others explain it to be the Meg le dan, four grand ways, or four grand orders of Ariya, each subdivided into two classes, and an Aviya is a man who has extinguished evil desires and passions, and attained proficiency in certain virtues and miraculous powers. Now the Burmese say, that Gaupama’s doctrine shows, that the first of the above Theettsas is the effect, and the second the cause, and that the third only can emancipate us from the eternal thraldom and suffering of the two first, and that this third is to be obtained only by means of the fourth. The lines are thus literally translated : “The law (of suffering and being) proceeds from a cause, which cause (the law of evil desires and passions) the Tathagata preaches, and Niraudha, the means of overcoming or terminating those (two laws). These are the opinions of Maha Thamana, or the great Yahan. Dhamma, according to the Burmese, is not ‘‘ human actions,” or “all sentient existences” only, but the law which governs or affects them, the fundamental law of the moral world. All that the Burmese know of the emigration from Central India, 160 Discovery of Buddhist Images (Marcu, and of the founding and history of the old city of Tagoung, is given in the 8rd volume of the Chronicles of the Kings of Ava. Here is an abstract of the tale. Long before the appearance of Gaupama, a King of Kauthala* and Pinjalarit, desiring to be connected by marriage with the King of Kauliya, sent to demand a daughter, but receiving a refusal on the ground of his being of an inferior race, he declared war and destroyed the three cities of Kauliya, Dewadaha, and Kappilawot, which were governed by the Thaki race of kingst. These cities were afterwards restored, and the Taki line re-established ; but on the occasion of the above disaster, one of the Thdki race of kings, Apur’rasa, the king of Kappilawot, retired with his troops and followers from Central India, and came and built Tagoung, which was then also styled Thengat tha ratha and Thengat tha nago. Here had stood a city in the times of the three preceding Buddhas. In the time of KexkuruHan it was called Thanthaya pira ; in that of Goundcoun, Ratha pira, and in that of KatrHaBa, Thendwe. On the death of king Asui’rAsa, his two sons, Kan YAz4 yes and Kan YAza no@ay, disputed the throne, but agreed by the advice of their respective officers to let the question be decided in this way, that each should construct a large building on the same night, and he, whose building should be found completed by the morning, should take the throne. The younger brother used planks and bamboos only, and covered the whole with cloth, to which by a coat of white-wash he gave the appearance of a finished building. At dawn of day, Kan YAza' aren, the elder brother, seeing the other’s being completed, collected his troops and followers, and came down the Hrawadi. He then ascended the Khyendwen, and established him- self for six months at Kule{ Toungnyo, calling it Yazdgyo, and sent his son Moopootseittra to be king over the Thoonaparan Pyoos, Kanyan, and Thet, who then occupied the territory between Pegu, Arracan, and Pagan, and had applied to him for a prince. Kan Ya’z’a- GYEE then built the city Kyouk padoung to the east of the Guttshapa nadee, and resided there for 24 years. From thence he went and took possession of the city of Dintawadee, or Arracan, which had origi-- nally been founded by a king Mayayoo, and having constructed forti- fications, a palace, &c. took up his residence there. * Kauthala, (Kosala) Dr. Wiuison considers to be the same as the present territory of Oude. Some of the Burmese consider Pinjalarit to have been a kingdom in the Punjab. + See No. 20 of the Journal of the Asiatic Society for an account of the origin of the Shakya race, which the Burmese call Thaki and Thakya Thaki. { Kule is a territory to the southward of Manipur. 1836.] with Deva-ndgari Inscriptions at Tugoung. 161 The younger brother, Kan Yaza Naay, took possession of his father’s throne at Tagoung, where the undermentioned 33 kings reigned in succession. 1, Abheeraja. 18. His son Thendwé Y4z4. 2. His son Kan Y4za ngay. 19. His son Thihala Yaza. 3. His son Zaboodeepa Y4za. 20. His younger brother Han-tha Yaza. 4. His son Thengatha Yaza. 21. His son Wara Y4za. 5. His son Weippana Y4za. 22. His son Aloung Y4z4. 6. His son Dewata Yaza. 23. His son Kaulaka Yazé. 7. His son Munika Y4z4. 24. His son Thuriya Y4z4. 8. His paternal uncle Naga Y4zé. 25. His son Then-gyi Yaza. 9. His younger brother Einda Y4z4. 26. His son Taing-gylt Yaza. 10. His son Thamoodi Yaza. 27. His son Madu Yaza. 11. His son Dewa Yaza. 28. His son Menlha-gyi Yaza. 12. His son Maheinda Yaza, 29. His son Than thu thiha Yaz4. 13. His son Wimala Yaza. 30. His son Danenga Y4z4. 14. His son Thihanf Yazé. 31. His son Heinda Y4za. 15. His son Dengana Yaza. 32. His son Mauriya Y4zé. 16. His son Kantha Yaza. 33. His son Bheinnaka Yaza*. 17. His son Kaleinga Y4za. In the reign of the last-mentioned king, Burinnaka YAXz4, the Chinese and Tartars from the country of Tsein, in the empire of Gan- dalareet, attacked and destroyed Tagoung. That king, collecting as many of his people as he could, retired up the Mali river, where upon his death his followers were divided into three portions. One portion proceeded to the eastward and established the 19 Shan states, whence they are called king Bunrnnaxa’s race. Another portion came down the Hrawadi, and joined the Thunaparanta kingdom, which was inha- bited by the Kanyan and Thet people, and was the seat of Mu’put- sEITTA and other kings of the Thaké race. A third portion remained near the Mali river, with the last king’s principal wife named NaAca Zzrn. About this period, Gaupama appeared in Central India, and a dispute occurred between king PatHanapy KaurHaLa of Thawotihi+ and a king of Kappilawot, named Mauna Nama. The former had applied for a daughter in marriage, and the latter, unwilling to deteriorate his race, sent, instead of one of the princesses of royal blood, a daughter named Watnasa Kuezrtiya, whom he had by a slave girl. She was however received as a queen, and bore a son, who was named prince Wir’Hat/Hoopa. When this prince grew up, he paid a visit to Kappilawot, and on his departure, the spot which he had occupied was termed the place of a slave-girl’s son, and washed with milk. Hearing this, the prince vowed revenge, and * The title of these kings is Radja, but the Burmese pronounce it Y4za. + Sravasti in Oude, according to Dr. Wizson. Y 162 Discovery of Buddhist Images (Marci, declared that as soon as he became king, he would wash the necks of the Kappilawot people with blood. Accordingly, on his accession to the throne, he set out three times with an army to attack the Thaki race of kings, but was stopped by Gaupama. On the fourth time, Gaupama, foreseeing the future destiny of those kings, would not interfere, and king W11’Hat'Hoora destroyed Kappilawot, Dewadaha, and Kauliya, three cities in the empire or country of Thekka, the seats of the Thaki race of kings. On this occasion one of the Thaki race, named Daza Y4za, retir- ing from Central India, came first and established himself at Mauroya, which now goes by the name of Mweyen. Thence he proceeded and founded the city of Thendwé ; and changing his residence once again, he came to Malf, and met with the before mentioned queen Nsca Zein, the widow of king BuEernnaxa. Finding her to be of the same Thak: race as himself, he married her, and founded the city of Upper Pagan. He next rebuilt the ancient city of Tagoung, calling it Pinjalarit, and Pinja Tagoung, or the fifth Tagoung, and finally esta- blished himself there, assuming the title of THapo Zasooprra Daza YAz4, dividing his followers into classes, organizing an army, and granting titles and honors. The’ undermentioned line of kings reigned in succession over this new Tagoung. 1. Thado Zabudipa Daza Yaza. 10. Thado ya Haula. 2. Thado Taing ya Yaza. 11. Thado Poung shi. 3. Thado Yat’ha ya. 12. Thado Kyouk shi. 4. Thado Tagwon ya. 13. Thado Tshen louk. 5. Thado Lhan byan ya. 14. Thado Tshen dein, 6. Thado Shwe : 15. Thado taing gyit. 7. Thado Galoun ya. 16. Thado Men gyi. 8. Thado Naga ya. 17. Thado Maha Yaz4. 9. Thado Naga Naing. None of these kings reigned long, the country having been much molested by evil spirits, monsters and serpents. The last mentioned king having no son by his principal queen Kernnari-DeEw1, made her brother Kuzsaputa the heir apparent or Crown Prince. At this time the people of Dintawadi came to the spot inhabited by the Pyiis, and attacked and carried off king TamBuLa, who was of the Thaki race, and lineally descended from king Mupurseirra, the son of Kan Yazacyrer. His queen, Nan Kuan, retired with as many followers as she could to the lake of Thakya. In the 40th year, after Gaupama’s death, whilst Toapo Mana YAza’ the 17th king of Tagoung was reigning, an immense wild boar appeared, and committed great destruction in his country. The Crown Prince went forth against the animal, and pursued it for several days, 1836.] with Deva-nagari Inscriptions at Tagoung. 163 until he overtook and killed it near Prome; and then finding himself so far from home, he determined on remaining where he was as a hermit. Here he was joined by two of his nephews, named Mana ToamBawa and Tsuta THamBawa, twins borne by his sister the queen of Tagoung, but being blind, the father had insisted upon their being put to death. The mother, after secreting them for some time, placed them at last on a raft, and set them afloat on the Hrawadi. The Royal Chronicles give an interesting account of the voyage of the two Princes, who are cured of their blindness by a monster at Tsagain*, and who at length reach the country near Prome, and are recognized and received by their uncle. The Kanyan and Pyis had quarrelled after the people of Arracan had carried off their king, but the former, being victorious, settled themselves near Prome under their queen Nan Kuan, whilst the Kanyans retired, and established them- selves at Sandoway and on the borders of Arracan. Through the recommendation of the hermit Prince of Tagoung, the queen Nan Kuan married one of his nephews Mauna TuamBawa, who became king of the Pyés, and established the Prome or Thare Khetiara empire, 60 years after Gaupama’s death, 484 B. C. After the destruction of the Prome Empire, a king Taamauppanrir, nephew of the last king of Prome, founded Pagdn; but the country being much molested by certain wild animals, a young man named Tsaupr’ destroyed them, and the king gave him his daughter in marriage, and appointed him his successor. He declined the throne however in the first instance, and placed his old teacher Yar’THE- GYAUNG upon it; and on the death of the latter, the young man ascended the throne of Pagdn in the Pagdn era 89, A. D. 167, with the title of Pru’ rsaup1’. But this Pyv’ rsaupr, or third king of Pagén also is said to have been of the Tugoung royal race, and a Thdké Prince. His father, Tuapo Aparrrsa Y4z4, was lineally descended from the 17th king of Tagoung, Tuapo Mana Ya’za’, but during his reign Tagoung having again been destroyed by evil spirits and monsters, as -well as by the Chinese and Tartars, he had quitted the country, and settled with his family in a private capacity at Malt, supporting him- ‘self as a gardener. After receiving a suitable education, the son Pru’ Tsaup1 came down to Pagdn,in order to seek his fortune, and then distinguished himself by killing the wild animals as before-mentioned. No further mention of Tagoung can I find in the Royal Chronicles, until we come to the 6th vol., in which, after being told that a daugh- ter of ArHenKuAyA, the founder of Tsagain, was married to THapo TSHEN-DEIN, of the Tagoung royal race, and had ason named Yauu’La, * City directly opposite Ava. Se 164 Discovery of Buddhist Images, &c. (Maren, who was seven years of age, when king Tuesuapaps alias Mrn- Byouk ascended the Tsagain throne, and to whom at the age of 16 that king had granted the city of Tagoung as a jaghir, together with the title of THapo MEN-BYA. We are informed, that in the Burmese year 725, A. D. 1363, when the Shan chief Tao KuygenN Bwa came dewn from Mogoung and Monhyeen to attack Tsagain, his army was first stopped at Tagoung by THapo mEN-ByA, but that the Shans soon took that city, and completely destroyed it, its governor flying to Tsagain with a single elephant. This governor, THADO MEN-BYA, afterwards took possession of the Tsagain and Penya kingdoms, and in the Burmese year 726, A. D. 1364, founded the city of Ava, and the line of the kings of Ava. Tagoung, after the Shans destroyed it, does not appear to have been restored, and it is now but a village with a few ruins. The dis- trict of Tagoung is the jaghir of the late Wungyee of Rangoon’s daughter, who is one of the inferior queens, styled Tagoung Men-tha- mi, princess of Tagoung. THapo was a title peculiar to the Tagoung royal race. It is remarkable, that some of the names in the two lists of the kings of Tagoung correspond. The Burmese chroni- cles give no details of the reign of any of these kings, excepting of the first in each list, and of the last in the second list. One old work, Zabudipa kwon-gya, takes notice only of the second list of sovereigns ; and states that Daza Yaza retired from Central India, and came to Tagoung, about 300 years before the appearance of GAUDAMA. As the last mentioned, or 17th king, Mana Y4za, is also stated to have ascended the throne 20 years after Gaupama’s death: this would allow a duration of about 18 or 20 years to the reign of each of the king’s preceding, corresponding with the average of king’s reigns as fixed by Sir Isaac Newton. The great point with the Burmese histo- vians is to show that their sovereigns are lineally descended from the Thak¢ race of kings, and are ‘“‘ Children of the Sun* ;” and for this pur- pose, the genealogy of even Atompra, the founder of the present dynasty, is ingeniously traced up to the kings of Pagdn, Prome, and Fagoung. The countenances of the figures in the accompanying images are very different from those you see in all modern Burmese mages}. * One of the king of Ava’s titles is Ne dwet bhuyen, Sun-descended Monarch. + They are very nearly of the same character as those found at Sarnath, and may have been made there or at Gaya for exportation, as is the custom to the present time.—Ep. 1836.] On the preparatian of Opium for the China market. 165 IiI.—On the preparation of Opium for the China market : written ia March 1835, and then communicated to the Benares and Behar Agencies. By D. Burren, M. D. Surgeon 63rd B. N. I. late opium examiner of the Benares Agency. 1. In committing to paper, for the use of my successor in office, the following observations, I would beg, once for all, to disclaim the idea of their being infallibly correct: for, although they are the re- sult of ten years’ attention to their various subjects, I am aware of the disadvantages under which an individual labours, upon whom falls the task of first writing upon any subject involving the discussion of ob- scure questions, and who is thus deprived of the benefit of the judgment of other persons; and am prepared to find my remarks hereafter greatly modified by the progress of discovery. 2. The great object of the Bengal Opium Agencies is to furnish an article suitable to the peculiar tastes of the population of China, who value any sample of opium in direct proportion to the quantity of hot- drawn watery extract obtainable from it, and to the purity and strength of the flavour of that extract-when dried and smoked through a pipe- The aim, therefore, of the agencies should be to prepare their opium so that it may retain as much as possible its native sensible qualities, and its solubility in hot-water. Upon these points depend the virtually higher price that Benares opium brings in the China market, and the lower prices of Behar, Malwa, and Turkey opium. Of the last of these, equal (Chinese) values contain larger quantities of the narcotic princi- ples of opium ; but are, from their greater spissitude, and the less care- ful preparation of the Behar and Malwa, incapable of yielding extract im equal quantity and perfection of flavour with the Benares. 3. It therefore becomes a question, how the whole process of the production of opium, from the sowing of the seed to the packing of the chests for sale, should be conducted so as to preserve with the least injury its native flavour and its solubility. 4. There can be no doubt that the quantity and richness of the milk obtained from each poppy-head depend greatly upon the geologi- cal and other physical conditions of the locality which produces it ; especially the soil, sub-soil, manuring, and irrigation; and also upon the seed which is employed. But as these matters are, in the present circumstances of the Bengal agencies, little open to choice or control, the first practical enquiries which claim our attention relate to the extraction of the juice and its treatment while in the hands of the koeris. 5. Of the various processes for the preparation of sugar and medi- cinal extracts from vegetable juices, it is well known that distillation in 166 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Marcu, vacuo is incomparably the most efficient in preserving unaltered the original taste of the sugar, and the taste, solubility, and therapeutic powers of the extracts. It is also known that this process owes its superiority to the exclusion of the chemical as well as the physical agency of the atmosphere, to its rapidity of exsiccation, and to the comparative lowness of temperature at which it is performed. When sugar-cane juice, after even half an hour’s exposure to the air, is boiled in a narrow deep vessel, and under the pressure of the atmosphere, vaporisation goes on so slowly that the sugar has time to undergo the vinous and acetous fermentations, whereby a certain portion of it is converted into vinegar, before the heat can be raised high enough to check this change; and the high temperature, to which it is so long exposed during this slow vaporisation, chars another portion, and conyerts it into molasses. Other vegetable juices, under similar cir- cumstances, undergo analogous transformations: much of their sub- stance is converted into vinegar; and the high temperature causes a partial decomposition of the rest: oxygen also is largely absorbed from the atmosphere, and greatly impairs the solubility of the dried extract. 6. On the principles which flow from these facts, it would be, chemi- cally speaking, advisable to prepare opium by distillmg in vacuo, large quantities of the milk just as it has oozed from the capsules; and I have no doubt that opium thus prepared would possess in an unprece- dented degree the desired qualities of solubility and strength, and purity of flavour, as well as narcotic power; and can imagine, that under a system of open trade in opium, this process would be commer- cially profitable. It would, however, be inapplicable under a mono- poly constituted as the present system is; and I have mentioned it only with the view of pointing it out as the acme of that perfection in the preparation of vegetable juices to which we can, with our present means, only approximate. 7. That the approximation may proceed as far as possible, it will be necessary, first, that the poppy juice shall at the time of collection, contain a minimum of water; so that its reduction to the proposed degree of spissitude may be effected in the shortest time, and be there- fore attended with the least exposure to the air at a high temperature, and with the smallest consequent loss of solubility and of specific qua- lities that may be practicable. 8. The goodness of the soil, and the management of the irrigation, are circumstances which powerfully affect the strength of the juice at the time of its collection: but a third agent, still less amenable than these to control, now comes into play, the precipitation of dew on the 1836.] On the preparation of Opium for the China market. 167 surface of the capsule. When a current of wind, or a cloudy sky, prevents the formation of dew, it is found that the scarifications made in the capsule about the middle of the preceding day are sealed up by the slight oozing of juice, which had immediately followed the inci- sions; and the quantity of opium obtained is small. When, again, the dew is abundant, it washes open the wounds in the capsule, and thus facilitates the flow of the milk, which in heavy dews is apt to drop off the capsule entirely, and be wasted. But when the dew is in mode- rate quantity, it allows the milk to thicken by evaporation, and to col- lect in irregular tiers, (averaging one grain of solid opium from each quadruple incision,) which on examination will be found to have a greater consistency, and a ‘‘rose-red” (Werner) colour towards the external surface, while the interior is semi-fluid, and of a “ reddish- white” colour. This inequality of consistence constitutes the grain of raw opium, of which I shall have to speak hereafter. 9. In the collection of these drops of half-dried juice, it is very apt to get mixed with the dew, which, in the earlier hours of collection, continue to besprinkle the capsules, and which here does a double mischief—first, by retarding the inspissation of the general mass of the juice; and, secondly, by separating its two most remarkable con- stituent parts—that which is soluble, and that which is insoluble in water. So lhttle aware, or so reckless, even under the most favourable construction of their conduct, are the koéris of the injury thus caused by the dew, that many of them are in the habit of occasionally wash- ing their scrapers with water, and of adding the washings to the collection of the morning: in Malwa, oz is used for this purpose, to the irremediable injury of the flavour of the opium. On examin- ing the juice thus mixed with water, it will be found that it has separated, as above-mentioned, into two portions, a fluid and a more consistent ; the latter containing the most of the resin, gluten, caout- chouc and other less soluble constituents of opium, with part of the super-meconiate of morphia; and the former containing the gum, some resin, and much of the super-meconiate of morphia, and much of the colouring principle, which, though pale at first, is rapidly affected by light, and acquires a very deep “reddish or blackish brown” colour. Many koéris are in the habit of draining off this fluid portion into a separate vessel, and of bringing it under the name of paséwd, for sale, at half the price of opium, to the Benares agency, where it is used as léwa, (paste for the petal envelopes of the cakes.) Others, after allowing the soluble principles to become thus changed into an acescent, blackened, sluggish fluid, mix it up with the more consistent part of their opium, and bring the whole for sale in this mixed state ; 168 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Maxcn, the consequence of which is that they are subjected to a penalty, called battd upon paséwd, and regulated by the estimate of the opium ex- aminer, of the quantity of paséwd contained. This penalty is the only efficient check upon this most pernicious practice of the koéris: for on the generality of the gomashtas, it is difficult to impress the neces- sity of their looking after the koéris during the collecting season. Were goméashtas in general fit for their offices, the name of peséwd might be banished from the Bengal agencies ; all that is required for that purpose being that they should instruct all their mahtas and koéris, to exclude dew as much as possible from the opium at collec- tion—never to add water to their opium, then or at any other period ; but at the end of their day’s collection, to rub it together in a mortar or similar vessel, breaking down the grain of it above-mentioned, so as reduce the whole to a homogeneous semi-fluid mass, which should be dried as quickly as possible in the shade, in a current of air free from dust, by spreading it on any clean flat surface, and turning it over ten or twenty times. With this management, one afternoon in the dry collecting season would suffice for bringing to the spissitude of 70 per cent. the collection of each day, which could then be secured, along with the rest of the koéris’ opium, in a vessel of any form, safe from deterioration by internal change. It is a common belief, that all new opium must ferment*: but that is a fallacy occasioned by the low de- gree of spissitude at which opium is generally received at the Bengal agencies, and by the consequent fermentation and swelling up which almost constantly occur, when such opium is allowed to stand for some hours in large vessels. 10. So very large was formerly the admixture of paséwé in the opium brought to the Benares agency, that it was thought necessary, for the sake of its appearance, to draw off as much as possible of the black fluid, by storing it, for weeks, in earthen vessels, perforated with ahole. Of late years, there has been a great amendment in this re- spect, and the draining system has therefore become unnecessary ; an event which ought to be followed by the abolition of the inconvenient receptacles in which it was carried on, and by the general substitution of movable wooden cases and drawers in their stead. 11. Paséwd, ina pure and concentrated state, is a viscid, dark reddish-brown fluid, transparent in thin plates. Its homegeneous phy- sical constitution prevents its assuming to the eye that appearance of consistency which is presented by ordinary opium. In the former, all * Dr. Avet believed that fermentation was necessary for the development of the narcotic principles, and considered the fermentation as of a panary species, n which the gluten played a principal part. 1856.] On the preparation of Opium for the China market. 169 the ingredients are in a state of true chemical combination, with the ‘water contained ; while, in the latter, many of the ingredients are only in a state of mechanical mixture, a condition which almost neces- sarily gives an appearance of solidity beyond all proportion to the actual quantity of solid matter contained. Hence, paséwd, and opium containing paséwd, are less consistent, and would, to the inexperienced eye, appear to contain much more water than pure opium of the same actual spissitude.; a source of much perplexity to any one who tries for the first time to estimate, by the consistence, the real spissitude or dry contents of different samples of opium containing more or less of paséwi. A tentative process is the only one by which a person can qualify himself to estimate the spissitude with tolerable accuracy. He should, before allowing the parkhiyas to state their estimates of the spissitude, form one in his own mind, and make a memorandum of it, noting his reasons for assigning the degree of spissitude on which he has fixed. The result of the steam-drying test, to which small sam- ples of all opium are subjected in the Benares agency, wil) then enable him to judge on which side, whether under or over-estimate, he has inclined to err, and to avoid the error in his subsequent operations. 12. The constituents of paséwd are in a state of chemical combi- nation; and the slow addition of water will not subvert that condi- tion. But the sudden affusion of a large quantity of water on con- centrated paséwé instantly resolves it into two portions, a dark coloured fluid containing the gum, colouring matter, and super-meconiate and acetate of morphia, anda lighter coloured powder, consisting of the resin and some gluten, and a minute portion of caoutchouc. In mak- ing léwd, therefore, from paséwd, or from inferior opium, the necessary quantity of water should be slowly added, and thoroughly mixed pre- viously to the addition of more water. Pure opium is lable to the same resolution of its component parts, from the sudden affusion of water: if the latter be slowly added and thoroughly mixed, the gela- tinous opium will absorb it, forming a species of hydrate, and will retain its tremulous consistence; but if the water be suddenly added in considerable quantity, an immediate separation of the more and less soluble constituents occurs, and the opium loses its gelatinous and adhesive character. When opium is dried up to a certain point, below the spissitude of 80 per cent., it loses the power of absorbing water without decomposition, and cannot be brought to the gelatinous state. It might’ be expected, that by adding 30 parts of water to 70 of dry opium powder, we should produce a combination possessing the con- sistence and other physical characters of fresh standard* opium; but * So called, because this is the degree of spissitude required at the Bengal Z 170 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Marcr, the compound has little consistence, and will be found to contain inso- luble portions, which have lost their power of forming hydrates with water: yet its spissitude remains exactly that of standard opium, the precise quantity of dry opium employed in making it being recovera~ ble from it, but in a darkened and deteriorated condition. The above observations have a practical bearing upon the manufacture of léwd, as has already been noticed, and upon the degree of spissitude which opium, either in the hands of the koéris or in the agency godowns, should be permitted to acquire: it should be limited to 66 or 67 per cent. for the former, and 70 or 72 for the latter; because, with every additional degree of spissitude above this, the solubility is impaired in an increasing ratio. 13. Among some thoughts on the subject committed to writing six years ago, I find the followmg remark and query: ‘The whole of the original milky juice will pass through a finer filter than that used by the Chinese in making the extract for smoking: is it possi- ble to dry the opium, retaining its property of such minute division. and diffusibility ; or is it necessary for the complete separation of the water from the resin, gluten, caoutchouc, &c. that some absorption of oxygen should take place, and some consequent diminution of their solubility, or rather miscibility with water?’ My reason for noticing this query is the subsequent solution of the proposed problem by M. Previte of Calcutta, in the highly similar case of animal milk, which he appears to have succeeded in drying to a powder with no perceptible injury to the diffusibility of its curdy and oleaginous principles. This is the very result that should be aimed at im the preparation of opium for the China market. 14. When the juice of the poppy has been properly dried, that is, rapidly, in a cool shade, and protected from: dust, it possesses, at the spissitude of 70 per cent., (that is, containing 30 per cent. of water,) the following properties. It has, in the mass, a ‘reddish brown” colour (Werner), resembling that of copper (the metallic lustre ob- structed); and, when spread thin on a white plate, shews considera- ble translucency, with a ‘ gallstone yellow” colour, and a slightly gra- nular texture. When cut into flakes with a knife, it exhibits sharp edges, without drawing out into threads; and is tremulous, like jelly, or rather strawberry jam, to which it has been aptly compared. It has considerable adhesiveness, a handful of it not dropping from the hand inverted for some seconds. Its smell is the pure peculiar smell agencies for the full price allowed by Government. On parcels of opium, infe- rior to this in spissitude, a penalty is levied, called battd upon consistence. 1836.] On the preparation of Opium for the China market. 171 of opium, heavy and not unpleasant. In this condition it is said to be “standard” or “ awwal’’ opium. 15. When the juice, again, instead of being thus exposed to the air, has after collection been kept in deep vessels, which prevent eva- poration, it presents the following appearances. A specimen of it which has the spissitude of only 60 per cent. has the apparent consis- tence or substantiality of standard opium of 70 per cent. But on minuter examination, it will be found, that this apparent firmness of texture is a deception, resulting from the mechanical constitution of the mass; it being made up with but little alteration of the origi- nal irregular drops collected from the capsule, soft within, and more inspissated without; this outer portion, as long as it remains entire, giving the general character of consistency to the mass, just as the shells of a quantity of eggs would do. For when the opium is rubbed smartly in a mortar, this fictitious consistence disappears, exactly as that of the eggs, if pounded, would do; and in point of apparent consistence, as well as of real spissitude, it is reduced to the proportion which it properly bears to standard opium. When opium thus retains the original configuration of the irregular drops, it is said to be ‘“‘kacha” or ‘‘ raw: when these are broken down into the mi- nute grain mentioned in the description of standard opium, it is said to be “‘ pakka’”’ or ‘‘ matured,” whatever may be the actual spissitude of the opium, whether 50 or 70 per cent. An opinion has been en- tertained, but on what grounds I know not, that the breaking down of this large grain is an injury to the opium: to myself it seems plain that as the large grain always disappears before the opium attains the spissitude of 70 per cent. and as this vesicular constitution of the raw a) opium retards the evaporation of its superfluous moisture, the more inspissated shell of each irregular drop checking the evaporation from its more fluid interior, the object should be to reduce the whole with the least possible delay to a nearly homogeneous mass, in which state the inspissation of opium advances with much greater rapidity. 16. Connected with this subject is a question which has been raised, whether the inspissation of opium stored in large quantities in the agency godowns is effected more quickly, by removing, from time to time, imto another receptacle, the pellicle of thick opium which forms on the surface of the mass; or by turning over the mass fre- quently, and thus constantly mingling with it the pellicles successively formed. As agreeably to the general law of chemical affinity, whereby the last portions of any substance held in combination, and in course of gradual expulsion, are retained with increasing obstinacy, the in- spissation of thin, is, ceteris paribus, always more rapid in its pro. z2 172 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Marcu, gress than that of thick opium; it is clear that the removal of the pellicle, by which opium of minimum spissitude is constantly exposed to the air, must accelerate the inspissation more than the turning over of the whole mass would do: because the latter process exposes to the air opium which is gradually acquiring a greater degree of con- centration, and from which the evaporation will gradually be slower and slower. As evaporation takes place from the external surface only, it may be proper here to advert to the propriety of making all reser- voirs for opium below the standard spissitude as numerous and shal- low as may be permitted by the means of stowage; every practicable method being at the same time adopted to facilitate ventilation across, and to exclude dust from, the extensive surfaces exposed; and as little ight being admitted as may be suitable to the convenience of the people at work. 17. It might be expected, from the ingenuity of the natives of this country, and from their imperfect notions of fair trade, that they would resort to a great variety of means for increasing, by adulteration, the weight of such an article as opium, in which fraud might be made so difficult of detection. But in fact, it is seldom that they attempt any thing of the kind, beyond keeping their opium at a low spissitude ; an act by which, under the present searching system of examination, they cannot profit; and which, from its occasioning a deterioration of their opium through fermentation, entails the levying of a batta upon its quality, and therefore, in those cases, an inevitable loss. It is impos- sible that opium left to itself in the open air, during the parching sea- son of the hot winds, could remain at the low spissitudes of 50 and 60 per cent. at which it is frequently brought to Ghazipur towards the end of that season: and we must therefore conclude, that artificial means are resorted to, in order to maintain it in that condition ; either the frequent addition of water, or the burying it in a damp piece of ground, which is said to be sometimes done for the sake of security, When these malpractices have been carried too far, the gluten under- goes, in a greater or less degree, the process of putrefaction ; the mass of opium first becoming covered with mould, and acquiring an opaque «yellowish grey” colour and a pasty consistence, in which every ves- tige of the translucency and grain of the opium is lost; and the smell becoming venous, sour, and at last abominably feetid; in which condi- tion the deteriorated opium is fit for none of the purposes of the manufacture, and is always destroyed, and its original value forfeited, by the koéris. It is to be hoped that their experience of the unvary- ing consequences of such folly, and the introduction of a superior class of gomashtas, will in time convince them of the advantage, as well as 1836.] On the preparation of Opium for the China market. 173 the facility, of bringing in all their opium at very nearly the standard spissitude. In some cases it would appear, from the fluid state in which they bring it for sale, as if they expected every drop of water which they add to it, to be assimilated and converted into opium. Occasionally, it would seem that they had admitted some suspicions of its having been watered too much; and their only remedy is to drive off the superfluous water by boz/ing - an operation which speedily reduces the mixture to a blackened and charred condition, easily recognized. 18. A more ingenious fraud, but which is seldom practised, is, that of washing out the soluble and most valuable part of the opium, and bringing for sale the residual mass. In this process, the opium loses its translucency, and the redness of its colour: it loses its adhesiveness also, not adhering to the hand like opium which has not been robbed of its soluble principles ; and by these marks, without going further, the fraud is detected. Sand is now and then added, to increase the weight ; and is at once detected by its grittiness when rubbed between a plate and a spatula. Soft clayey mud is also, but very rarely, used for the same purpose : it always impairs the colour and translucency ; and can, as well as sand, be detected, and its quantity accurately ascertained, by washing the opium with a large quantity of water, and collecting the sediment, which is the clayey mud. Sugar and gur, or coarse molasses, are sometimes employed to ad- ulterate opium: they invariably ferment, and give it a sickly, sweetish, venous, or acescent odour, easily known. Cow-dung, the pulp of the dhatird, or thorn-apple, and the gummy resinous juice of the Jé/, or Bengal quince, are seldom met with as fraudulent ingredients: the first may be detected by drying it to a powder, or by washing it with water, either of which processes brings under the eye the undigested shreds of vegetable matter constituting the animal’s food; but the two last are extremely difficult of detec- tion, if not added in quantity sufficient to affect the colour and smell of the opium, which generally happens in the few instances of their occurrence. The seeds of the dhatuird are apt to get mixed with the opium, and afford a ready means of detection. A strange, but not uncommon, mode of adulteration is the addition of pounded poppy seeds: if reduced to a fine powder, the oleaginous seeds might enter into an imperfect chemical union with the kindred resinoid prin- ciple of the opium: but the fraud is never so skilfully effected as to produce this result ; and the hard particles of the seeds are perceptible to the touch and sight. Ma4lwa opium, though less now than it was 174 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Marcn, eight years ago, is in general largely contaminated with oil, which is easily separated by dissolving the opium in water ; and I have seen, in a few instances, the same fraud attempted within the Benares agency. As the oil is always in a rancid condition, its presence is betrayed by its odour, as well as by the glistening appearance which it communi- cates to the opium. 19. By long exposure to the heat of the sun, the texture of opi- um, whatever be its spissitude, undergoes a remarkable change, through the conyersion of part of its gluten into a species of bird-lime. Its shortness or property of exhibiting sharp edges, when cut into flakes with a knife, disappears; and it draws out into long threads. These two varieties of texture may almost always be recognized in cakes of Behar and Benares opium respectively ; the former being ex- posed to the sun, in the process of drying the cakes, and the latter not. This diversity of treatment occasions a difference between the hygrometric properties of the cakes of the two agencies; the Behar cakes acquiring a more speedy but less permanent hardness than the Benares: whereby, though firmer in the shell towards the end of the hot winds, they are more liable than the Benares to soften and lose their shape during the rains. The immediate cause of this difference appears on making a clean section of the shells with a sharp knife. It will thus be found, that in the Benares shells, the /éwd remains visibly interstratified with the petals, dark-coloured, and tenacious ; while in the Behar, it is in a great measure absorbed by the petals, which are apparently in intimate contact with each other, and is not to be distinguished from them; the combination being more easily ef- fected by hygrometrie changes of the atmosphere than the independent strata of leaf and /éwa in the Benares cakes. 20. While, as at present, a considerable amount of inferior opium is produced, not safely applicable to any other purpose than the manu- facture of /éwd, its sacrifice is no great loss. But if all the opium brought to the agencies were of good quality, the substitution of some less expensive vegetable paste would be an important desideratum. Any strong cheap mucilage or farinaceous paste, or perhaps some indigenous imitation of bird-lime, would answer for the inner portion of the shell; and an exterior coating of a resinous, waxy, or oily nature, impervious to water, would defend this from the moisture of the air. 21. In cutting open a cake for examination, the above points should be attended to. It should also be observed whether the exter- nal and internal surfaces of the shell are smooth: the former not knotty or fissured, and none of the interior leaves of the latter detach- ed among the opium: there ought, also, to be no vacuities between. 1836.] On the preparation of Opium for the China market. 175 the strata of the leaves, such as*are sometimes found, lined with mould, in faulty cakes, and the shell altogether ought to be thin, com- pact, and of equal thickness throughout. The shape ought to be as nearly spherical as possible: that being the geometrical form which under the smallest surface contains the greatest quantity of matter, and which consequently affords the least scope for the extrication of air and ultimate injury to the shape of the cake when that air escapes. Greater attention to having the earthen cups, in which the cakes are dried, perfectly hemispherical, instead of parabolical as they now are, would contribute to the desired sphericity. 22. In opening a cake, the next thing to be attended to is the manner in which the two hemispheres of the opium separate: the Behar will be found to retain its shortness, while the Benares draws out into threads. The smell should then be attentively observed and noted down, being strongest immediately after the opening, and giving at that instant the fairest indications of the state of the opium with respect to preservation; the pure narcotic, venous, or acescent odour being then most strongly perceptible: in this respect the Benares will generally prove superior to the Behar. It is an important character ; for the Chinese are great epicures in the flavour of opium, and object to it when it smells at all sour. 23. The surface of the opium should then be narrowly inspected, and the tint and shade of colour, both by reflected and transmitted: light, noted down, in terms of Werner’s nomenclature; also the ap- parent quantity of paséwa if any be present, which is almost constantly the case with Behar opium, where it appears like dark glistening fluid, lining the little cells in the surface of the opium. As the depth of the colour of opium in the caked state depends on the quantity of paséwé in it, or the degree in which it has been deteriorated by exposure to the sun, the lighter the shade, the better is the opium. 24. The chemical analysis of opium, after all the trouble that has been bestowed on it, is still in an unsatisfactory state. A perfect ana- lysis, such as we possess of Peruvian bark, and of some other medicinal plants yielding vegetable alkalies, ought to eliminate the whole of the active principles, leaving nothing at its close but an inert mass pos- sessed of no therapeutic power: and the essential principles thus ob- tained should equal (or, as in the case of quina freed from its bulky fibrous accompaniment, surpass) in activity, a quantity of the original substance equal to that from which it was extracted. But how greatly inferior are the powers, over the animal economy, of a grain of mor- phia, in whatever state of purity or saline combination, to the quantity of opium that is required to furnish that single grain! Yet, for all that 176 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Marcu, we can, chemically, see, we obtain by our analysis the whole of the morphia that is contained in opium. I suspect that the narcotic power is partly lodged in some unknown substance (not narcotine) insoluble in water: for I have, after careful and repeated washing, until it ceas- ed to colour the water, found the insoluble residuum to act as an opi- ate with considerable energy. Although morphia, in a state of purity, can, like sulphur, be fused without change; yet, when in com- bination with the other constituents of opium, it is partly destroyed by a much lower degree of heat, greatly under that of boiling water ; for the pharmaceutical and Chinese extracts are found to contain very little morphia: still, the former, as is well known, exert great medici- nal power, out of all proportion to the quantity of morphia which analysis evolves from them. From all these considerations it would result, that the proportion of morphia obtained, by the analysis at present known, cannot be regarded as a true exponent of the total narcotic power of the opium which yields it. An additional source of fallacy in comparing the produce of different countries exists in the varying proportions which they contain of colouring matter or extrac- tion ; a principle for which morphia and narcotine have a strong affi- nity, forming insoluble compounds* with it; and which, as well as narcotine, is much more abundant in Indian than in Turkey opium. Hence a considerable loss in the purification of morphia from the former, and an apparent, and probably real, inferiority in its quantity ; although we know that good India opium is equal to Turkey im narco- tic power. 25. Roxsiquer’s process is the one employed by the opium exam- iner in Calcutta. The chief precautions necessary to ensure success and uniformity in its results are, not to use too much water at first; to see that the magnesia is brought to a red heat; not to expose any of the subjects of analysis to the sun, or to artificial heat, except in the washing and final solution in alcohol of the morphia; not to use too strong a spirit in washing the morphia and excess magnesia; and to employ the strongest alcohol for its final solution before crystalliza- tion. SERTUERNER’s process is useful where it is not necessary to obtain the morphia in a separate state : and in practised hands affords speedy and tolerably accurate information. It is probable that Rost- queET’s process will in time be superseded by that of the late Dr. Witiram Greeory of Edinburgh, which does not acquire the expen- sive use of alcohol, and yields more morphia, by 30 or 40 per cent. ; affording, in fact, the cheapest medicinal preparation known of Turkey * This may partly account for the medicinal activity of the mass of opium aabove noticed. 1836.] On the preparation of Opium for the China market. 177 opium. It consists in the exhaustion of the opium with water under the temperature of 90°; concentration of the solution at a low temper- ature ; precipitation by slight excess of ammonia; elutriation of the precipitate with cold water; exsiccation of it at a temperature below 212°, and reduction to powder; solution in cold water by muriatic acid, slowly added in slight excess; filtration and concentration to the consistence of syrup; after which, the preparation on cooling, becomes a mass of crystals of muriate of morphia, moistened with a dark-colour- ed solution of uncrystallizable muriate of narcotine and resinoid colouring matter. This solution is abstracted from the crystals by strong pressure between folds of bibulous paper; and the solution, erystallization, and expression repeated once or twice ; after which, the salt is obtained in radiated bunches of snow-white silky crystals, con- taining 37 parts of muriatic acid and 322 of morphia. But for the unfortunate super-abundance of narcotine, and comparative paucity of obtainable morphia, in Indian opium, the manufacture of the muriate on a large scale might advantageously be established, at one of the Bengal agencies, for the supply of the Indian medical department with. this admirablepreparation, the marc (?) of which would be available for the manufacture of léwa. 26. Connected with the subject of analysis is another which claims some attention from the opium examiner, the accuracy and sensibility of the weights and balances used in his department. Neither of them should ever be allowed to be soiled with opium ; and the former should occasionally be compared, to see that all weights of similar denomina- tions mutually correspond within one-tenth of a grain, andthat the larger and smaller weights are equally accurate multiples and sub-multiples of each other. The knife-edges of the balances should occasionally be shar- pened, so that they may turn with as little friction as possible ; and the three points of suspension, whenever deranged, should be brought into a perfectly straight line, by bending the beam with the hand: if the centre edges be too low, the balance will, when loaded with its proper weights, be in a state of unstable equilibrium, and will cause great mistakes ; and if they be too low, the balance will lose its sensibility, and cannot be depended upon within perhaps two grains. Care should also be taken that the distance from centre-edges to arm-edges are exactly equal; from accidental violence, this element of accuracy is very apt to be deranged, and causes great confusion when overlooked. 27. Were all the opium brought for sale unexceptionable in quality, free from paséwd, and liable to batté on account of deficient spissitude only, there would be, supposing the batta levied with tolerable accu- racy, little difference at the end of the manufacturing season, between 2A 178 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Marcn, the registered receipts and expenditure of opium: and, supposing it levied with strict accuracy, there would be a small loss, occasioned by accidental spilling of semi-fluid opium, adhesion to the persons and clothes of the work-people, and other unavoidable sources of wastage. But as, in the present state of things, batta to a considerable amount is levied on quality, the effect of its deduction, if not kept separate from the batt4 on spissitude, would be to shew, at the end of the year, a deceptive deficiency of receipt compared with expenditure. Batta upon quality, or paséwd, therefore, should not be admitted into the godown accounts ; and should be confined to the account between the receiving-officer and the koért. 28. There are no satisfactory experimental means, except perhaps by the specific gravity, of ascertaining the precise quantity of paséwd in opium. It will hardly drain at all from opium of higher spissitude than sixty per cent. and not readily from opium of even that spissi- tude, unless assisted by a slight fermentation, which greatly facilitates its flow: the paséwad trickling down the sides of the air-vesicles thus formed, The only convenient rule for the adjustment of batta upon paséwd, or upon quality generally, is, that absolute paséwd, if not too thin, and the worst opium purchased for the Company, being paid for at half the price of standard opium ; for different grades of inferiority in quality between those two conditions, as fair a gradation of penal. ties shall be fixed, as can be formed from an estimate of the sensible qualities. 29. It has been thought, that specific gravity might prove an ac- curate index of the spissitude of opium; which is, however, not the case ; its soluble principles, and that portion of its insoluble constitu- ents which, slightly modified, unite with the soluble in forming paséwé acquiring in their transition to this altered state, a considerable in- crease of density. Opium, therefore, containing paséwd, is much heavier than an equal bulk, at the same spissitude, of pure opium. I have found this condensation to bear same proportion to the quantity of paséwad apparently contained: and it might, probably be found to indicate with considerable accuracy the proper amount of batta to be levied for paséwd, were such nicety desirable or conveniently attain- able. 30. The Regulation of Gavernment, which requires Civil Surgeons to report upon the relative values of parcels of confiscated opium, ac- cording to the quantity of foreign matter which they may contain, is obscure on two important pcints: Ist, whether, and beyond what degree of thinness, water is to be considered as foreign matter ; and, secondly, whether and beyond what degree of deterioration, 1836.] Catalogue of a Second Collection of Fossil Bones. 179 fermented and paséwd, converted opium, when contained in the con- traband article, are to be considered as ‘“‘ foreign matter.” I have been in the habit of regarding them as foreign, when the water ex- ceeded 30 per cent., and when inferiority in quality was palpable; because a different practice would defeat the end, for which the regu- lation was framed, of securing a fair reward to the informer. Under a less strict interpretation of the rule, he would be tempted to double the weight of the seized opium, and consequently his own reward, by adding to it, a sufficient quantity of water, or of bad opium, such as may at all times be clandestinely purchased for a trifle in the poppy districts. 1V.—Catalegue of a Second Collection of Fossil Bones presented to the Asiatic Society's Museum by Colonel Couvin. [Exhibited at the Meeting of the 6th April.] Colonel Cotvin’s first dispatch consisted of six large chests of fossil bones, in their rough state, attached to the matrix rock, as they were originally brought in from the hills by the native collectors employed by him to dig. They still remain unclassified in the museum, but the detailed examination that has been given to the second dispatch by Lieutenants Duranp and Baker, whom experience has already made expert in recognizing fragments, even much mutilated, will materially assist in arranging the former specimens, while it leaves little to be done with the present beyond publishing their catalogue at once for the satisfaction of geologists, and preparing the specimens for the inspection of visitors. There areamong them many noble fragments of known animals, which challenge comparison with those of any col- lection in Europe : these it will be a first object to make known by ac- curate drawings or by plaster casts. There are also numerous skulls, jaws, teeth, and bones decidedly new to fossil osteology, but the admira- ble fidelity and scientific knowledge with which the major part of these is now under illustration by Dr. Hucu Fatconer and Captain Caurtiey, in the Asiatic Researches, from their own, even more extensive, cabinet, supplants the necessity of attempting a full investigation here. All points in which differences from their generic or specific descriptions are recognized, it will be the duty of our curator to bring to notice. The synopsis published in the Journal for December last, page 706, comprised the varieties of organic remains, up to that period extracted from the upper deposits of the tertiary strata of the Sivdlik or Sy}. Himdlaya range of hills. Most of the same are to be found in Colonel Coxvin’s collection, Some recent additions of a highly interesting 2a 2 180 Catalogue of a Second Collection of Fossil Bones [Manrch, nature have however been made above, of which I have been apprised in my private correspondence with Seharanpur. Lieutenant Duranp has just dug out a nearly perfect head of a Paleotherium, from the vicinity of the spot whence Captain CauTLry had previously extracted the Anoplotherium of Cuvier. The Dadupur museum possesses a fragment ‘ of the lower jaw of a huge new animal : the teeth not sufficiently perfect to determine its nature: it is probably of some grand new pachydermatous animal, equalling the elephant in size.’ Both the rhinoceros and the camel have characters of indubit- able variation from known species. Of both these, notices are now in preparation. The acquisition of fossil birds was noticed at the meeting of March: Dr. Fatconer supposes them to be bones of large Gralla. This is, as he says, a fair test of the justice he and his fellow labourers are doing to the enquiry: it is not every museum in Europe that has fossil birds to shew! A note this moment received announces the ac- quisition of “‘a superb specimen of gigantic size of an unknown species of crocodile: it forms an intermediate section in the genus be- tween the true crocodile or magar, and the leptorynchus or gharidl. The muzzle is cylindrical, as im the latter, but greatly shorter ; and the teeth are thick and shorter, as in the magar: they protrude in relief above the jaw three inches, and are 1 inch and 2 lines in diameter !”” There is also in Col. Cotvin’s collection a Saurian head, apparently new. I have ventured to alter the numbering of the catalogue, to save repetition, by bringing bones of the same animals together, the original having been written out by Lieutenant Baxer just in the order they came to hand. It will be observed, that great pains have been taken to unite together with cement specimens which were broken in extraction, and in clearing them from matrix. The necessity of the latter operation will be acknowledged on perusal of the following ex- tract from Colonel Cotvin’s note to me of the 4th October last. “ The quantity I found collected here on my return, and what had to be brought in proved to be so great, that in the matrix they would have loaded a boat; during the rains, therefore, I employed a number of people to clear them, and though a vast number have thus been rejected as superfluous, or too mutilated to be useful, still a great deal has been packed that might perhaps have well been left behind, had I not feared to attempt a selection.” The same letter adds :— -“‘T have been unfortunate in not meeting with specimens of teeth of the Sivatherium, or complete heads of the hog. I had one lower end of the radius of what appeared to be the camel, but as a few specimens also deemed ‘‘ camel” had come into the Dadupur museum*, I made * Since certified by the discovery of an entire bead. 1836.} _ presented to the Asiatic Society’s Museum. 181 over this bone to it with the view of identification, and should the further search prove successful, you will receive specimens of the animal from Lieutenant Baxer. “The clearing away of the matrix, besides rendering the specimens less cumbrous for transmission, enabled, I should hardly say us, for it was my young friend, here to give names to most of what are now sent. The locality of each I found it impossible to particularize, as the parties, whom I sent out to collect, ranged about in the lower hills, picking up whatever they found, and heaping all together, until they had amassed several cart loads; but the eastern limits of their search were the branches of the Sombe, which are about due south of the Chir mountain; and to the west, their search extended to about half way between Ndhan and Pinjér. The only distinction worth noticing is, that the hard or brown fossils (those mineralized with hydrated oxide of iron) did not come out of the same stratum as the blue and friable (calcareous) ones; the latter being from the west of Ndhan. You will perceive the difference of the matrix on several of the speci- mens only partially cleared. I have never had leisure to visit the sites myself, and would therefore add nothing on this subject until I shall have enjoyed the opportunity of a personal inspection.” The Society will doubtless be eager to do every honor to the munifi- cent donor of these splendid fossils, if it has any real wish to acquire the reputation of possessing a valuable museum. The foundation of our fossil collection was but laid four years ago, and already through the contributions of Colonel Burnry, Dr. Spiuspury, Captain Smirn, Mr. Duan, &c. now enriched by Col. Convin’s vast store of. speci- mens, it has become necessary to devote an entire apartment to this instructive department of natural history. Our smallest return of gratitude to those who have been at such considerable expence in pro- moting the Society’s interests, will be to do honor to what has been so generously bestowed, by making up fit cabinets to exhibit them to the best advantage, and by spreading the knowledge of them as expedi- tiously and widely as possible. J. P. See. Catalogue of Colonel Colvin’s Fossil Bones. MastTopon ELEPHANTOIDES. 1 Upper jaw, very perfect. 2 —-, fragment. 5-6 Lower jaw, part of the right half. 7 —, ditto left half. 8 Symphysis of ditto, (or of elephant.) 11 to 26 Fragments of molars, of both jaws. 31 Axis of a large mastodon (?) very perfect. 32 Cubitus, upper extremity, with olecranon. 182 Catalogue of a Second Collection of Fossil Bones (Marcu, Mastopon Latipsns, identified with Elephantoides, Fat. 36 Lower jaw, right half. ELEerHAS PRIMIGENIUS. 41 Upper jaw, right half. 42 to 47 Lower jaws, left half, and fragments. 48—49 ——_—_—_-., right half. 50 —————-, left half of a younger animal. 51—56 Molars, fragments of. o7 59 , of smaller animals. 60 Upper jaw of a small animal, much mutilated. 61 to 80 Tusks, fragments of various sizes. 81 Femur, upper and (? mastodon). 82—87 — , lower end. 88—91 Eumerus, upper end. 92—95 » lower end. 96 Cubitus, upper extremity. 97 Tibia, perfect specimen. 98—101 , upper extremities. 102—104 Calcaneum. 105 Axis, of very large size. HipropoTaMus. 111 Cranium. 112 Upper half of the head, very perfect in bone. 114—117 Upper jaw, perfect, and fragments. 119—123 Lower jaw, in various preservation. 124 Fragment of ditto, with two central incisors. 125—126 Condyles of ditto. 127—129 Fragments of molar teeth. 130 135 Canine teeth, fragments of upper. 136 , of lower jaw. 140 Pelvis, fragment of the. 141—143 Femur, lower extremity. 144 Cubitus, upper extremity, with olecranum. RHINOCEROS. 150 Upper jaw, fragment. 151—153 Lower jaw, fragments much mutilated. 154 Teeth, three fragments of molars. 155 Axis, doubtful. 156—8 Scapula, three fragments, doubtful. 159—163 Humerus, upper extremity. 164 ——, lower extremity. 165 Cubitus, upper end. 166—169 Femur. 170 Radius. 171 Tibia, with tarsal and metatarsal bones attached. 172—175 , fragments. 176—180 Metatarsal entire. 177—179 Metacarpus. 1806 Calcaneum, perfect. 181 Astragalus, perfect. Sus. 182 Right jaw of some animal of this genus. Bones of Pachydermatous animals not classified. 185 Lower jaw of a small animal. 186 Molar teeth, much mutilated. 187—210 Vertebre, cervical; 191, process of dorsal, 192. 212 A very large specimen of do. 213—219 Humerus, fragments of lower extremity. 1836.} 220 221—223 224—229 230—232 233—235 236 237—238 239—246 247—248 249—250 251 260 261—264 265 266 267 268 269 270—271 280 282 283—289 290—293 294—295 296—297 305—306 310 311 312 316 317 318 319—321 325—326 327 328—344 345—358 260 366—367 368—372 373 374—375 376—379) 330—383 384—406 407 —409 410—429 presented to the Asiatic Society’s Museum. Femur, upper extremity of. Condyle of do. Tibia. Radius, lower extremity. Carpus and tarsus. Metacarpus, small. Metatarsus. Phalanges. Astragalus. Omoplate; socket of do. 251—253. Pelvis; socket of do. 252. Horse. Upper jaw, attached to the humerus of a rhinoceros, &c. Molar teeth. Atlas ? Femur, lower extremity. Radius, ditto. Cannon bone, Astragalus, Phalanges. Bos. Head of some species of ox. Left upper jaw, fragment of. Lower jaw, fragments. Molar teeth. Femur, upper extremity, Horn, fragments. ANTELOPE. Head and horns, portion of the. Occiput. Upper jaw. Lower jaw, or of a small deer ? Posterior part of head, (or of a deer?) DEER. Upper jaw, molars enveloped in matrix. Ditto of smaller animal. Lower jaw, with metatarsal attached—alone 313, 314. Left lower jaw of young animal with milch teeth. Posterior molar of large deer : smaller 318. Germ tooth (?) Antlers, fragments of. Bones of various Ruminants, unidentified. Cranium with occiput. Lower jaw, back part, large animal. Molars of a large animal, 345. Cervical vertebrz, small : three connected, 359. , of a gigantic ruminant. (? Sivatherium.) Dorsal vertebra. Lumbar vertebre. Sacral vertebre. Very large vertebre. Axis. Atlas, large, one broken, Scapula, glenoid cavity of, 380. Humerus, upper extremity. , lower extremity, Femur, fragments. Tibia. 183 184 Notice of a Visit to the Valley of Kashmir. (Marcu, 430—439 Radius, upper extremity. 440—449 ; lower extremity. 450 , with carpal and part of metacarpal. 451 —, perfect, with part of ulna, fragments, 452. 453 Calitus. 4541—466 Carpal and tarsal bones. 467—527 Metacarpal and metatarsal bones. 528—537 Astragalus. 538—551 Calcaneum, very large. 552—462 Phalanges. 563 Ribs, fragment of. Hyana. 600 Upper jaw, in good preservation. 601 Canine and Ist molar of do. 602 Lower jaw, entire, and fragment, 603. 604 Cranium. 605 Three molars of some canine! animal. 606 Metatarsal bones of some carnivorous animal, SAURIAN. 700—717 Vertebre of Saurian reptiles. 718 Cranium of Gharial. 719—724 Plates of crocodilide. Besides about 120 fragments not identified, received with the second dispatch; the whole of the first donation unregistered, and some gigantic testudinous plates, presented by Col. Cotvin personally while ‘in Calcutta. Gigantic ELx, (presented by Mr. Conductor W. Dawez,) found in the Ganawer Khal, near the Haripdl branch of the Sombe river. ID sy 4! Portions of the antler. D 5 Axis of second cervical vertebra. D 6 Cervical vertebra of do. BuFrrato ? presented by the same. 1 Head of bos or buffalo with one horn. 2 Piece of horn, supposed to belong to the same. D D V.—WNotice of a Visit to the Valley of Kashmir in 1836. By the Baron HucGet. [Read on the 6th April.] On my way to Bombay to embark for Europe, I take the liberty of addressing you a few lines, requesting your doing with them what you think best: they relate to my journey to Kashmir. I was in hopes of being able to send you a more elaborate memoir, but my time is very much limited, that I am afraid of postponement, and hasten rather to offer you afew notes as they were collected. I understand that Mr. Jacquemont’s travels are now published. I think therefore that it may be of some interest to the Indian reading public, to have before it some observations, not influenced by the above mentioned work, made by a traveller a few years later, to compare them together. As 1836.) Notice of a Visit to the Valley of Kashmir. 185 before a regular publication of my residence in 1835 can be made in Europe and reach India, that of Mr. Jacaurmont will have lost much of its interest as a new topic, I do not hesitate to come forward with my notes in their original form, how unfavourable to them it may be. Kashmir in a political and financial point of view, has been muchover- rated : not in a picturesque one. The valley in its length, from N. W. by W. to S. E. by E. is little more than 80 miles long; the breadth crossing the former line, varying from 30 miles to 6. I speak of the actual plains: from the eternal snow of the Pir Panjahl to the Tibet Panjahl are 50 to 60 miles : both ranges run nearly parallel in the first direction, with a great number of peaks. The height of the passes from Bimbar to Kashmir, and that from Kashmir to Iscardo is the same, 13,000 feet; the highest point of the Pir Panjahl, 15,000 feet by the boiling point. The city of Kashmir 6,300 feet* ; Kashmir town, Dalawer Khan Bagh on the 19th November, gave meridional altitude 72° 4’, artificial horizon, which shews its northern latitude to be 34° 35’. Population.—Four years ago about 800,000; now not exceeding 200,000. The valley is divided in 36 perganahs, containing ten towns and 2,200 villages. Kashmir town contains still 40,000 inhabitants ; Chupinian, 3000; Islamabad and Pampur, 2000. It was not the bad administration of the Sikhs, but a famine brought on by frost at the time the rice was in flower, and cholera in consequence of it, that re- duced the population to one fourth of the former number by death and emigration: many villages are entirely deserted. Chirar town con- tains now 2000 houses and only 150 inhabitants! Revenue.—Last year very nearly nothing, Ransi’t SincH wishing that the country should recover : this year (1836) he asks 23 lakhs from the Governor Mounan Sineu, which the country cannot give. The emigration has brought to the Panjab and Hindustén many shawl manufacturers, and Kashmir will most likely never yield again what it did a few years ago. Nirpur, Lodiana, and many other places can bring to the market shawls cheaper than Kashmir, where every article of food is dearer than in the Panj4b and Hindustan. Twelve passes, Pansah/ in the Kashmir language (from which Pir Panjhal of the Musalmans) now exist; three to Tibet (Iscardo and Ladak) ; eight to the Panjab; one to the west. In former times there were only seven: the defence of which was entrusted to Malliks with hereditary appointments: four passes are open the whole year: one to Ladak, the western pass, (Baramulla,) and two to the south. * Three thermometers brought it very near to the same height. DB 186 Notice of a Visit to the Valley of Kashmir. (Marcu, Wuler lake is 30 miles from E. to W. Brahmans, the only Hindtts in Kashmir, 25,000 in 2000 families ; they are Vishnuvaites and Sivaites, divided into three divisions, who alk intermarry: they are darker than the other inhabitants, owing to a colony sent for from the Dekhan about 800 years ago, after the abo- riginal Brahman race was nearly extinguished by the persecution of the Muhammedans. There is not in the valley the slightest appearance of its having been drained: the pass through which the Jhelum found its way is one of the most beautiful of the world : its bed 1000—1500 feet deep : I do not believe more in the traditions of the Kashmirian Brahmans than in the fables of Manethon. All the remaining temples are Bauddha, of a different shape from any I have ever seen; only one small one reminds me of the caves of Ellora : I have observed no Dagoba. Koran Pandan, near Islamabad, Anatnagh of old, is not only the largest ruin of Kashmir, but one of the splendid ruins of the world :—noble proportions ;—material black marble. I wasnearly ledintoerror,at first thinking its form Grecian. The building had nothing on a closer examination which could justify such a hypothesis. Very few temples remain in Kashmir in tolerable preservation, having mostly been destroyed by a fanatic Musalman*, whose zeal did not succeed in overturning them all. The only trace of fossil remains in the valley is ina limestone, which contains small shells. Nature has done much for Kashmir, art more; the whole valley is like a nobleman’s park : the villages, being surrounded with fruit trees, and having in their centre immense plane and poplar trees, form large masses, having between them one sheet of cultivation, through which the noble river winds itself in elegant sweeps. The botany of Kashmir is not rich, and is very nearly allied to that of the Himalaya, between Massuri and Simlah : in the valley itself not a plant is to be seen of indigenous origin : the northern declivity of the mountains is rich in vegetation, the southern steep and barren. The Chunar is the Platanus Orientalis, which so far from being a native of Kashmir does there produce ne germinating seeds, and is multiplied by cuttings, which, since the Moghul Emperor, have not been kept up. It is a very extraordinary phenomena to witness the Nilumbium speciosum growing where the orange tree is destroyed by frost. Misri yaleb is not a native of Kashmir. . I made a remark on the Pir Panjhal, which I afterwards had occa- sion to observe several times, and which is new to me: that the freez- * Sikandar, Bhutshikan, A. D. 1396. 1836.] Notice of a Visit to theValley of Kashmir. {87 ing point on the thermometer advances at great elevations in a similar proportion as the boiling point retrocedes: thus the water boiling for instance with 191, the sun with 44 degrees Fahr., did not make any jmpression upon a piece of ice lying ona black soil, the latter not being moistened*. This must be the case, although I do not recollect to have seen it mentioned: on a certain height above the surface of the globe, the freezing point and the boiling point must meett, heat and cold being phenomena belonging exclusively to our globe. My ob- servations led me to believe, that this may be at 84,100 feet above the surface of the sea, or in other words that there finishes our atmosphere. The burning gases at Jwalamuki are of a very extraordinary nature, nothing of sulphur or naphtha in them. They have a most delicious smell, something like a French perfume with ambergris. The flames, about 10 in number, come out of a dark grey sandstone on perpendicular places : temples are built over them: I attributed the effect to priestcraft, until in one of the temples called Ghurka Debi, I was allowed to try experiments, and remained alone: I blew out the flame, which did not re-ignite from itself : there is nothing particular on the places where the flame came out: no change in the colour or substance of the stone, or im its hard- ness. Water in small quantity is formed in little reservoirs under the flames, being the produce of them: this water takes fire too from time to time, when enough inflammable matter is collected on the surface. I took a bottle of it for you, which Captain Wane will be sokind as to forward to you for examination} ; it has however now undergone a ter- rible alteration by putrefaction, and ] am afraid that you will not be able to analyse it. The taste of it when fresh can distinguish nothing of its composition: it is not unpleasant to drink, and of a milky-greenish colour. No traces of volcanic matter near it. Ihave picked up many coins, which appear to me new; of some I am certain : those of the Kashmirian kings, of the Bauddha time, found near the town Bi Bahara (no doubt a corruption of Vidya vihara, temple of Wisdom, if my Sanscrit does not forsake me): I intended sending them to you, but they found their way in oneof my tin boxes: I cannot guess in which, and for this reason do not open them: whenever I come to them I shall send you them, or their exact likeness. * The explanation of this circumstance should rather be sought in the dryness of the air at such an elevation; and the consequent rapid evaporation which carried off the ice as it melted—ice itself will, it is well known, wholly evaporate ina vacuum.—Ep. + By Daxton’s tables, the aqueous tension of freezing water is 0.20 inch ; there- fore water will boil and freeze together at a height of 130560 feet, or about 25 miles.—Ep. ¢ This hadnot yet reached us: nor the coins, which we desire much to see.—Ep, DBD 188 Note on an Inscription at Bamydn. (Marcu, VI.—Note on an Inscription at Bamyan. By Mr. C. Masson. [Read at the Meeting of the 6th April.] Of the antiquities of Central Asia, the Idols at Bamyan have long been known and celebrated in Europe. To ascertain their character is still a desideratum. An inscription found in so fortunate a situ- ation, as at the summit of the niche in which stands the larger, and by inference, the more ancient of the idols directly over its head, will, if capable of being interpreted, dispel much of the mystery attaching to it and its associates. It contains but six characters as here exhibited*, appears to be entire, and although the copy of it was taken four years since, I think its fidelity may be depended upon. When in possession of Mr. Prinsep’s plates of the Pehlevi Alpha- bets, this inscription was compared with them, and its characters appeared to me to approach nearest to those of the Pehlevi of Sassa- nian coins from Marspren. Observing the apparent recurrence of the two first letters, and concluding that the alternated characters must be consonants and vowels, of the latter of which A was the more likely to be used as the more common, | sought its equivalent in the Pehlevi alphabet noted, and found it might be expressed by u. Marking also the number of the characters of the inscription, in union with the duplication seemingly of A or U, the word NANAIA occurred to my imagination, and attempting to write it in the Pehlevi of the alphabet, I produced DINU The first five letters were so similar to those of the inscription, that I judged I might without imputation of temerity bring the circumstance to notice ; and as for the final letter, if we are pretty sure of all the preceding ones, we may reasonably be satisfied with that also. The aof the alphabet, or p has indeed a?, or doubt, attached to it, while the final letter of the inscription resembles the A or 4 of other alphabets. The idols of Bamyan, perhaps less ancient than many of the caves or temples there, have not an antiquity beyond the reach of verification, and while we pause whether or not to ascribe them to the princes we call Indo-Scythic, we dare affirm that they were constructed during the period of the Sassanian sway in Persia, or 220 A. D., and the era of Muhammedanism. Kabul, 1836. C. Masson. * See Plate VI. fig. 1; we confess the similitude of the marks, which Mr. Masson takes for letters, to the Péhlevi alphabet is but just sufficient to hazard a conjecture upon. Nanaia, a female, would not be applicable to a male figure : —wNanao or Nanano (lunus) would be more consonant with the Péhlevi, and even with the form of the supposed letters. —Eb. 1836. ] Asiatic Society. 189 VII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Wednesday Evening, the 6th April, 1836. G. J. Gorpon, Esq. Senior Member present, in the chair. Lieut.-Col. CauLFreLp, was proposed as a Member of the Society by Mr. James Prinsep, seconded by Mr. Pippineton. Mr. J. S. Sroprorp requested that his name might be withdrawn from the Society. Mr. Sroprorp had deposited 80 Rupees with the Secretary, to cover the cost of four volumes unfortunately lost by the wreck of his pin- nace, until they shall be replaced from England. Read letters from Lieut. A. Cunnineuam, Engrs., and Raja Visava- Govinpa Sinena, acknowledging their election as Members. . Also, from Professor T. Rosen, acknowledging his election as an Honor- ary Member. A private letter from M. Eve. Burnour, Secretary to the Asiatic Soci- ety of Paris, noted the arrival of the 100 vols. of the Tibetan Kahgyur, and of the other dispatches sent by General ALLarp. Read letters from the Secretaries to the British Museum, and the Royal Asiatic Society, returning thanks for the Tibetan Dictionary and other works. Extract of a letter from Professor Witson, intimated the distribution of the Tibetan works sent home for the various continental learned socie- ties. It also reported that a portion of the Moorcrorr papers had been finally placed with Murray and Co., for commencement of publication. Professor WILSON estimates that the whole will occupy, when re-written, and shorn of repetitions and redundancies, two octavo volumes. The terms agreed upon are, that 50 copies are to be at the Society’s disposition. Any final loss on the publication to be made good by the Society: and the relations of the author to participate in any success. Read a letter from M. Csoma ne Koros, saying that although the fac simile from Iskardo, taken by Mr. Vienn, was evidently Tibetan, it was in too imperfect a condition to be decyphered. Library. The following books were presented to the Society : A copy of the Appendix of the third volume of the Transactions of the Royal Asiatic Society—dy the Society. The Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, No. 4--by the Society. A children’s map of the world in Bengali—by Rdja Kdlikrishna. A daily register of the tide in the harbour of Singapur, from Ist Sept. 1834, to 3lst Aug. 1835—dy the Government. Meteorological Register for the months of January and February, 1836—dy the Surveyor General. The Indian Journal of Medical Science—by the Editor. The following received from the book-sellers :— The Political and Statistical History of Guzerdt, translated from the Persian by James Birp, Esq., and published by the Oriental Translation Fund. Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia—Literary Men, vol. 2nd. 190 Asiatic Society. (Marcu, The following letter from the Minister of Public Instruction in France, addressed to the President, was read : ‘* Paris, le 24 Juillet, 1835. ‘* Monsieur le Président, La Société Asiatique de Calcutta, en mettant & la disposition de feu M. Vicror JacauEmonrt, tous les matériaux scientifiques qu’elle possédait, lui a donné les moyens de rassembler des documens d’un haut interét sur les Indes Orientales. En témoignage des services rendus A notre compatriote, je vous prie, Mon- sieur le Président, de vouloir bien faire agréer A la Société de Calcutta un ex- emplaire de Vouvrage qui se publie en son nom, par les soins de sa famille et sous les auspices du Gouvernement Frangais. Je tiens 4 votre disposition, Monsieur le Président, les livraisons qui ont deja paru : Vous pourrez les faire retirer du Depdt des Livres de Souscription au Ministére de l’Instruction publique par tel moyen que vous jugerez convenable. Ageréz, Monsieur le Président, l’assurance de ma haute considération. Le Ministre de l’ Instruction publique, GUIZOT.” Resolved, that the President be requested to return thanks for this mark of consideration in the French Government, and that the Secretary take im nediate steps to obtain possession of the work in question. The Secretary announced the transfer’ and deposit in the Society’s rooms of the Sanscrit, Persian, Arabic, and Hindui Manuscripts from the College of Fort William. The number of the Sanscrit worksis 1130 volumes: of the Arabic and Persian 2676 volumes. A catalogue raisonnée of the whole had long since been prepared by the College officers, of which the meeting resolved it should be recommended to the Committee of Papers to undertake the immediate publication, adding to it such other original works as the Society might possess on its own shelves. The Secretary apprized the Meeting of the completion of the 2nd volume of the Mahabharata, copies of which were ready for distribution to the subcribers. Museum of Antiquities. Read a Note on an Inscription at Bamyan, by M. C. Masson. [Printed in the present number. ] The two Buddhist Images, with Deva-négari incriptions, mentioned ina letter from Colonel H. Burney, Resident at Ava, read at the last Meet- ing, were received, and a paper was read on Tagoung, the place of their discovery, an ancient capital of the Burmese empire. [Printed in the present number. | A drawing of the full size of the sculptured impression of Gaurama’s foot in Ava, was presented by Ensign Puayre, with a description of the contents of the several compartments. The image brought to the notice of the Society by Lieutenant Krrror, in January 1835, sought out by Mr. Dean and transmitted for the Mu- seum, had arrived with Col. Coxtvin’s dispatch. This image dees not seem to possess any characteristic difference from the ordinary sculpture of the Hindus, as had been imagined. The dress and attitude are of common occurrence ; the feet rest on the lotus plant. The head has been struck off, doubtless in the period of the earlier Muhammedan incursions. 1836. ] Asiatic Society. 191 Specimens of spears and other warlike instruments from New Zealand were presented by C. K. Rogtson, Esq. Physical. The Secretary announced the arrival of the second dispatch of Colonel Convin’s donation of Sub-Himdlayan fossils, which were placed in the Museum, and lighted up for inspection of the Members present. The catalogue of this splendid collection, drawn up by Lieuts. Duranp and BAKER, is printed in the present number. The meeting resolved that the spe- cial thanks of the Society should be presented to Colonel Cotvin, and that suitable cabinets should be constructed for containing and preserving his donation. With the foregoing were received the remains of the fossil Elk and fossil Buffalo, presented by Conductor Dawe, and alluded to in his letter read at the Meeting of the 6th May 1835, The cervical vertebra and portion of antler were depicted in the 44th plate of vol. iv. The Bovine head, a very fine specimen, and materially different from Dr. SprisBury’s from Narsinhpur, will be published shortly. The following acquisitions to the museum of natural history were made : A live specimen of Histriv Cristata, common Porcupine, presented by Mr. James Prinsep, to whom it was given by Mr. Srepnrnson, who found it in the Bakra mound in Tirhut. a A specimen of Cercocobus Sabeus, presented by C. C. Ecrrron, Esq. Specimens of the skulls and horns of Cervus Muntjak, Antilope Cervi- capra, Antilope Chikara, Antilope T’har, and Capra Jemlahica, horns of the Antilope Hodgsonii, and Cervus Aristotelis, the skull of a species of Sciuropterus, and the head and bills of Buceros Malabaricus and Platalea Leucorodia, presented by Lieutenant Vicary. A specimen of Cerinaceus Auritus, and one of the Nilgherri Wood- cock, presented by W. H. Smount, Esq. Specimens of Pitta Brachyurus, Picus Tiga (?) and Pterocles Qua- dricinctus, presented by Lieutenant Vicary. [The Picus i figured in HARDWICKE and Gray, and described by Horsr- FIELD, Linn. ans. vol. xili, and Latruam, Gen. Hist. vol. iii., has only three toes; but both the figure and descriptions agree so exactly in all other respects, with the present specimen, which has four, that I have little hesitation in referring them to the same bird. J. T. P. Cur.] A specimen of Striv Flammea ; presented by P. Homrray, Esq. Specimens of the nest of Hirundo Esculenta, the Esculent Swallow, in several stages of preparation, by Ensign A. P. Puayre. Seeds of the Cane tree, from the Straights, presented by Dr. Vos. Mr. Hopeson transmitted an account of a new genus of Carnivora, to which he proposes to assign the name of Ursitaxus. The skullof the animal was intrusted by him to the Secretary for the inspection of Members. [This paper will appear in the Physical Researches. ] On the motion of the Secretary, it was resolved, that the Right Honorable Lord Avuckuanp be solicited to accept the office of Patron of the Society ; and that the President be requested to communicate with His Lordship on the subject. VITI.—WMeteorological Register. cee a I ET SE ES EES EE I SE ST SY *N Sollur NE OL9AeS SOW $44SIU Ye pAgZ 943 UO oULITTINY Y *‘payvoim a1oMm syvog Auvut AoA o10YM 687)NI[VD JO *N Sotl Coe neue ae ae inveand Ae nore yi ‘ ‘JaIeUIOIeG Mau ay} ‘([euINOL ay} JO *[OA pugeyy Ul peqisdsap) I9}e —W A * pur wy ye 4amo) CEN’ spurs ‘UOT]eIDad xa 04 A.eajuoo at ‘ ! : wate tov ayy Surdidde zoe st SIU we te 9801 ‘ Fad Cab andeae ey Suueduios Aq “weaemoy ‘uses oq [[IM sy *Joastad sf UraIst9 O13 JO I pl a ie aerucnee, Rete: Ra ged ee ie ioe iaturt Sones ehors ait joaiwoudnp v sv ‘uewmon Aq apeur ‘uOpuoTy wrOAy padlaoor ATO}E] JUSUINAYSUT 94} POOYSIOpUN aq 07ST ,,194 le sey eqn} ayy a Aa or ‘ 7 % A 6 UeoyN : ‘ ‘ ‘ ‘ ‘ "68 (ILI | 319s (282° 06 | ¥°9 | UZ | L°6L| Gro‘ 1\e68°8e(0z6 “sjjenbs yuonbaay aqenes s£0 4 4'e6 [0'99 | 22 [eoL | B'ht | 6°€8 (ILI rg, |e ea pera eer aac er zs ‘ ite ; ; z« ‘ O‘9T | 9° | T'98 |EFB‘T | BBPS |TEL‘e69° | 99 | O“Gt) v‘er| ZL : ‘ ‘any a oe it eMac, O66. — £9 | 201 [o'er | U98 inse't | OLF! pedi eoe’ | 88 | 8i2 | 2'8 | G08) LO‘ L/918 ate ne Be *ava]9 op abe nee. Cece Bee eer ee Te Hamel y. poo | Sco |r. | 108) GeO Tee" foe, Rae) Be op op ma te oe ae 9°¢9 e8 | 001 | Ter | P88 lePr't | g90° 118° ell +6 | 8°P ee Gar 046 '0\846 ae aca 18 op op . i F A 6 "90 ICL | 2°18 Be uv a © 93 op oun pel eo ae oe GO Wetog: (ete oBl | Vi9k ia ‘ ce | gee | Senvl tastolacos lover (eno® | 92 soul *“ulel ured : , . S16 I2%6S 18126 | 9‘ | €'18 |290'T | 6ae* lo6g bes’ 7 16 9%¢ | 8¢ | 8°82! 196‘0 860 610. legs oe “119 “und “110 ‘uInd Suey. a8 MM IN a°88 \e2¢ | og (06 | 8'6 | 8°62 \9660 gon! 99° - 88 ue) : gto age ae hee 16° 1 e¢ *AQstuL op Pahee : : ; ‘ ‘ 76 ‘ ‘PL | O28 |SOL'T | Le9% eog'|oge’ | 26 | O°9 | Bf9 | e62} LoO‘T| LEG ‘ ‘urd gjeamy = * SB. AO svete Pe ae e se" ote gre a aoe bk 86L |\S00‘T | 808° JET9* 6LL' +6 bp 6%¢ | g‘8Z 0E6%0 960 996° ee fe ae le ie ont ‘aay aes Sage Ante ‘og |1'Z9 | ze | OOL| ‘tr | S'@8 |060'T | Gas! \6i8IBZZ° fos | 9°8 | o*9 de 880°1|606 te 02 *ATaMoys op : f 2 se oF “6L | 1°88 gy ee 63 | 1 ‘ SRE oe ae Sees Usk, Sere nas e00 (00 | op jo | om [ae toner) 19: fac lyets | op | eve oe eta] ago'tleene fone (peas | op ‘Imp t : , ; Bs |cteL | Le |€6 | o%6 | 9°98 \See'T | PEG log ‘ 4 | os Dolan PZ o E S S Be|ZE)e9| ss) se PERE RSE 2a| PE Sriae | es lceeizead & wy i, fe} SE] og & a7] —O a i "o2 S- Mc er Or") oo = ot BE rls g ° " > 4 Bel Rs is} 54 i=] = a 5 al o i=} S41 4g]: 5 Yiospan ge ? 3 e OX) Bo 5126 2» wloB ule vlco|s8|2o | » S188 3 ~ S STB") gs /25 |) es oe (SesfalPols i nelee |e! esiSeat = : # rele eel 6 RS bee ed BF | SapeSe) & mle: ? i Sg BE aE aa k= : s io) =} *SOUTOI] XH ? “WV QT J@ SUOTJCAIISqO S 5 “pul JOJIWOUTIEY,L “W ‘d f }e SUOTIBAIOSGO i : JOyIVI AA purmM rassi30y ‘9EST ‘youn Jo yzuopy ay} Los ‘njjna}n9 ‘ag hossp ayz yn yday ‘saisthaxy jn016070.109,a AT NN ET AS a ES EE SS Jourw As.S0L. Vol.V. Pi. VI SECTION OF St PETERS CHURCH, FORT WILLIAM. LYDIA TINS N AWW Ah { CON: CZ) 5 0 L0 20 Ketorences «x Loundation of masonry lo sustain the stress of the Shores L Houndatiom beam l-ce O nrighes. fiting he moulding of ‘the Pillars d Strang beam ce Struts L Strang SUL ee Moveatte centre supporting the atsle Vaults under aemotilton j £ Section ofa suspension platform from which the workines were able lo demolish the Nave vault 30 40 50 Feet Ue SecuTuy, L Lhe suspension ropes jastened lo the towers 2 Leams to whol the punkahs were sus- ferided s Holes made tr the [lacs and billresses Jor the recejtion of the punkate beans t Lorlions of the pillars broke off i conseyuence Of Ue ensertion of the frittiheah | a beams ~ i” GC. Hutchinson des. JOURNAL OF Pee sels TiC: SOCTET’Y. No. 52.—April, 1836. ¥.—Account of the Mountain Tribes on the Extreme N. E. Frontier of Bengal. By J. McCosu, Civil Assistant Surgeon, Godlpara. [Read at the meeting of the 4th Nov. 1835] The following pages have been compiled from original manuscripts lately put into my hands by Captain Jenkins, Agent to the Governor General on the N. E. Frontier, with kind permission to make what use of them I thought proper. Some of these letters were written from his own personal observation; others by Major Wuirs, Political Agent for Assam; as also by Mr. Bruck, commanding the Gun Boats at Sud- dia, so that the information contained in this digest may be relied upon. From the lively interest lately taken in the regions hereafter described, on account of tea growing there indigenously, and the probability of their speedily assuming an important aspect in the statistics of India, any facts concerning such districts will, I hope, prove not uninteresting to the public. Few nations bordering upon the British dominions in India are less generally known than thost mhabiting the extreme N. E. Fron- tier of Bengal ; and yet, in a commercial, a statistical, or a political point of view, no country is more important. There our territory of Assam is situated in almost immediate contact with the empires of China and Ava, being separated from each by a narrow belt of mountainous country, possessed by barbarous tribes of independent savages, and capable of being crossed over in the present state of communication in 10 or 12 days. From this mountain range, navigable branches of the great rivers of Nankin, of Cambodia, of Martaban, of Ava, and of Assam derive their 2, 194 Account of the Mountain Tribes (ApriL, origin, and appear designed by nature as the great highways of commerce between the nations of Ultra Gangetic Asia. In that quarter, our for- midable neighbours, the Burmese, have been accustomed to make their inroad into Assam; there, in the event of hostilities, they are certain to attempt it again ; and there, in case of its ever becoming necessary to take vengeance on the Chinese, an armed force embarking on the Brahmaputra could be speedily marched across the intervening country to the banks of the greatest river of China, which would conduct them through the very centre of the celestial empire to the ocean. This beautiful tract of country, though thinly populated by strag- gling hordes of slowly procreating barbarians, and allowed to lie profitless in primeval jungle, or run to waste with luxuriance of vege- tation, enjoys all the qualities requisite for rendering it one of the finest in the world. Its climate is cold, healthy, and congenial to European constitutions ; its numerous crystal streams abound in gold dust, and masses of the solid metal: its mountains are pregnant with precious stones and silver; its atmosphere is perfumed with tea growing wild and luxuriantly ; and its soil is so well adapted to all kinds of agricultural purposes, that it might be converted into one continued garden of silk, and cotton, and coffee, and sugar, and tea, over an extent of many thousand miles. This valuable tract of country is inhabited by various races, several of which have acknowledged our authority, some that of the Burmese, and others that of China; but a considerable number have sworn allegiance to no power ; and maintain their independence. Of these tribes the most considerable are the Miris, Abors, Mishmis, Kang- tis, Bor-Kangtis, Singphos, Muamarias, and Nagas. Miris. ‘ The Miris occupy that stripe of alluvial land along the northern bank of the Brahmaputra, from the large island Majuli (the extreme boundary of the present Rajah of Assam), to the river Dihong the northern branch of the Brahmaputra ; and are bounded on the north by the hill country of the Abors. Tul of late years, this district was deserted on account of the ravages of the Abors; but on our afford- ing them protection, the original inhabitants have returned. The land is still very thinly populated, and the only cultivation is along the banks of the great river. Their head village is Motgaon. The manners and habits of the Miris are wild and barbarous, their per- sons filthy and squalid ; they use a language different from the Assa- mese, and make use of bows and poisoned arrows as a defence against their enemies. They are expert marksmen; and the poison used is so 1836. ] on the extreme N. E. Frontier of Bengal. 195 fatal, that even a scratch of their arrow is followed with certain death. They eat all sorts of wild animals, not excepting those killed by their OWnh poisonous arrows. The Miris are an industrious race, and partial to living in the skirts of the forests, clearing new ground, which they cultivate for a year or two, and then move off to another place, when the soil is exhausted. A great deal of opium is grown by the Miris, which they barter for grain with the Assamese. Abors and Mishmis. These tribes inhabit an extensive range of mountainous country along the southern exposure of the great Himalaya chain, from the 94th to the 97th degrees of E. longitude, and border with Thibet and China. It is difficult to form a conception of the extent of these tribes, but they are not to be despised ; for during the insurrection of the Muama- rias, no less than 17,000 Abors joined to drive that tribe out of Assam. It is probable that at no ancient period these two tribes were unconnected, but the Mishmis are now considered by the Abors as dependent upon them, and treated as slaves. Besides the Mishmis here mentioned as subservient to the Abors, there are several other tribes of them; such as Muzi-Mishmis and Taen-Mishmis, inha- biting the extreme branches of the Lohit or eastern channel of the Brahmaputra, who are probably independent. These tribes possess one of the lowest grades of civilization ; they occupy numerous vil- lages along the precipitous shores of the two great northern branches of the Brahmaputra, the Dihong or Sampo, and the Dibong. Their houses are so constructed, that the perpendicular side of the rock forms one wall: the floor is made of bambus, with one side support- ed on the rock, and the other on beams driven into the ground. The space underneath is inhabited by the cattle, and the interstices in the floor afford the double advantage of showering down all the offal to the herd below, and preventing the accumulation of filth and nastiness. Hospitality—Though the snows of their mountain home have narrowed their means of subsistence, and limited their intercourseto their immediate neighbours, yet they area hospitable and even a social race ; and a constant round of festivity is kept up from one end of the year to the other. Each chieftain kills the fatted bullock in turn ; all his associates are invited to partake of the good cheer : the host is in his turn a guest at the next feast; and thus a reciprocity of entertain- ment is insured. Nor are these hospitable rites allowed to be forgot- ten ; the scull of every animal that has graced the board, is hung up as a record in the hall of the entertainer ; he who has the best stocked 2c 2 196 Account of the Mountain Tribes [AprIL, Golgotha, is looked upon as the man of the greatest wealth and libe- rality ; and when he dies, the whole smoke-dried collection of many years is piled upon his grave as a monument of his riches, and a memorial of his worth. Migration.—These people, accustomed to a temperature at and about the freezing point, seem to dread an exposure to the heat of the low countries during the summer, and make their descent to their markets at Suddia only in the cold weather, and take their departure to their snows as soon as the Simala tree puts forth its blossoms. Trade.—They bring along with them a few bags of musk, and musk-deer skins; some ivory; a few copper pots, which they obtain from the same country; and a considerable quantity of a vegetable poison called Bis-Bisd, used in poisoning arrows. These they exchange for glass beads, of which they are very fond, and cattle, for the purpose of eating. The musk is for the most part adulterated ; a portion of the genuine musk being abstracted to make into artificial bags, and its place filled up with dried blood. Poison.—The poison is of a very superior quality, and is in great request by all the neighbouring nations for destroying wild animals, It is contained in a small fibrous root, which they tie up into little bundles. It is prepared by pounding the root to powder, and mixing it up with the juice of the Otenga tree, to give it tenacity, and make it adhere to the arrow head. They keep the planta great secret, and take the effectual precaution of boiling it before leaving their homes, so as to destroy all possibility of its being propagated. Road to Thibet.—The route to Thibet, adopted by pilgrims, leads through the Abor country, along the course of the Dihong or Sampu, and is accomplished in sixteen days from Suddia. The route, as mentioned by Mr. Brucz, is as follows : From Saddia to Kaj-jin, five days’ journey; thence to Lak-qui, one day ; Gha-lum, one day ; Ma-ma-nu, one day; Dulld, one day ; Omono, one day ; Hulli, one day; Sum-lay, one day; Han-nay, one day ; Kum- day, one day; Ri-shah, one day; Bhd-lu, one day. Bhdlu is the frontier town of Thibet. About four days’ journey beyond it stands the city of Ro-shi-mdh, containing fine buildings, and a large civilized population, and a government purely Chinese. The Grand Lama himself, and all head officers throughout Thibet, are appointed by the Emperor of China, and receive allowances from the Chinese government. The chief of Suddia seems to have consi- derable influence with the Thibetans, and the intermediate hill tribes. Almost all pilgrims apply to him for a passport, and he is in the habit .1836.] on the extreme N. K. Frontier of Bengal. 197 of sending an escort with them as far as Ma-ma-nu, whence they are passed along from one tribe to another till they arrive in the country of the Grand Lama. There is another route into Thibet vid Brahma- kind, through the country of the Mishmis; but it is at all seasons of the year covered with snow. There is but little trade now carried on with Thibet, and that little is chiefly effected by pilgrims. The few things imported are smoking pipes of Chinese manufacture, woollens, and rock salt. In exchange for these they give musk, ivory, and Bisd poison. Assamese captives at one time formed a considerable trade; but since these latter came under the protection of the British, that lucrative branch has been exterminated. During the flourishing period of the Assam dynasty, we are informed*, that the kings of Assam were in the habit of sending presents to the Grand Lama, and that a caravan consisting of about 20 people annually resorted from Lassa to the Assam frontier, and transacted merchandise to a very considerable amount with the Assamese. The Thibetans took up their quarters at a place called Chouna, two months journey from Lassa: and the Assamese, at Geganshur, a few miles distant from it. The trade of the former consisted of silver in bullion to nearly a lakh of rupees, and a large quantity of rock salt. This they exchanged with the Assamese for rice, silk, lac, and other produce of Bengal; but this trade has for many years been discontinued. Kangtis. The Kangtis, the most civilized of all these mountain tribes, inhabit that triangular tract of country bounded by the Lohit on the one side, by the Dibong on the other, and by the mountainous country belong- ing to the Mishmis on the third. They are descended from the Bor- Kangtis, a powerful race situated on the sources of the Irawadi. About 50 or 60 years ago, they emigrated from their native country, and availing themselves of the civil war then raging throughout Assam, they took forcible possession of the country they now enjoy, ejected the reigning chieftain, the Suddia Cowa Gohaing; andthe Kangti chief, usurping his name and jurisdiction, reduced his subjects to dependence or slavery. The Kangtis, by a vigorous mode of govern- ment, and holding out an asylum to refugees from other states, soon rose to eminence. They are now a superior race to all their neigh- bours; they are tall, fair, and handsome, considerably advanced in civilization, and are endowed with no small share of military courage. Their religion is Buddhism ; but Hinduism is gaining progress. They are amongst the few tribes who have a written character, and can read and write the Burmese language, and understand it when spoken. * HAaMILTON’sS Gazetteer. 198 Account of the Mountain Tribes [AprIL, Their own language, though written in a character a good deal re- sembling the Burmese, is quite different, and closely resembles the original Ahom. Every boy is taught to read and write it, by the priests. Suddia is the capital of the Kangti country, and the chief- tain is known by the name of the Suddia Cowa Gohaing, and claims descent from the royal family of Assam. Suddia is situated on the right bank of the Kunil or Kundil nallah, and about six miles above its junction with the Lohit. It isa place of some importance, and has a population of about 4000 men, exclusive of women and children. Its trade is rapidly increasing ; all the necessaries of life are procurable: its exports are gold and silver ; amber, musk, and ivory ; Kampti daus, Chinese and Burmese trinkets ; Bisa poison, and dye-stuffs, called Mishmi-tita and manjit. The Mishmi-tita, manjit, and lime, triturated with water, and allowed to digest in an earthen pot for a month, makes a beautiful permanent red dye. The daus are of a high order, and are so much prized as to bring 12 Rs. a piece. They are manufactured by a rude wild race, called Kunungs, (slaves to the Kangtis,) who are situated on the extreme branches of the Irawadi, who can neither read nor write, and are little removed above the brutes. Suddia station—The country around Suddia is composed of the richest alluvial soil, well adapted for cultivation ; but is generally flat and liable to inundation. A large portion of it is waste, and over- grown with jungle: it is closely surrounded by the snowy mountains, which are only about thirty miles distant; and the water of the river is so cold, that of itself it serves to cool wine for table. Force.—Suddia is the most advanced post we possess on the N. E. Frontier. Three companies of the Assam Light Infantry are sta- tioned there, under the command of a European officer, invested with political authority. Two gun-boats are also stationed there, also under the command of a European: each boat has one 12-pr. mounted on slides, and is well manned and equipped for service: one of the boats is manned by Kangtis, who give much satisfaction. There is also a small stockade erected, with a few guns mounted. Suddia has hitherto preserved a healthy character. It is likely soon to become the head- quarters of. the Assam Infantry. The Suddia Cowa Gohaing, though he pays Government no tribute, acknowledges the Company’s supre- macy, and is bound to furnish a contingent of 200 men. That con- tingent is supplied by arms and ammunition at the expense of Govern- ment; they are drilled by the Subadar of the Assam Light Infantry, four months in the year, and the arms, when in want of repair, are forwarded to head-quarters at Bishnath, 1836. } on the extreme N. E. Frontier of Bengal. 199 - The Suddia Cowa Gohaing is believed to be a firm friend of Chan- dra Kant’s, the ex-rajah of Assam; when formerly driven from the kingdom, the Suddia Cowa had influence enough at the court of Ava to obtain the assistance of the Burmese to restore him to his throne ; and now that Chandra Kant is again deposed, he is thought to be constantly intriguing to have him again placed on the throne. Bor-Kangtis. The Bor-Kangtis are a numerous and powerful race, situated amongst the mountains whence the Irawadi takes.it origin. They are under the government of Ava, and supply a contingency to the Burmese army. Experienced Burmese officers are constantly traversing their country, for the purpose of drilling them, and inspecting their arms and ammunition. The capital of the Bor-Kangtis is Manchi, on a remote branch of the Irawadi. This place was visited by Lieuts. Wiicox and Bururon in 1827, by an overland route, cut across the mountains from Suddia. The journey occupied about 12 days: they were kindly received by the Bor-Kangti chief, who gave them every information about the sources of the Irawadi, and convinced them that from the smallness of the streams, it was impossible for any of them to afford a channel for the waters of the Sampu. The main stream of the Ira wadi is there fordable, and not more than 80-yards broad. There is a silver mine in the Bor-Kangti country; but it has never produced more than 8000 rupees a year. It might be turned to much more advantage ; but the possessors are afraid of increasing its revenue, lest by doing so, they should excite the avarice of their neighbours. There are also mines of lead and iron in this country. Miinglung Kangtis. We have lately come into intimate contact with another tribe of Kangtis called Munglung: these from dissension amongst themselves, and from the oppression of the Burmese, have lately dispatched about 200 of their tribe to stipulate for settlements in the British dominions, and report on the prospect of the country around Suddia. Should their report prove favourable, about 5000 more have expressed their desire to emigrate. : Singphos. By far the most powerful and the most formidable of these hill tribes are the Singphos; they are also the most numerous, and are scattered over the greatest extent of country. They are bounded on the north by the Lohit river; on the east by the Langtan mountains, which separate them from the Bor-Kangtis ; on the south by the Patkoi range, which divides them from the Burmese Singphos, from whom they are descended; and on the west, by a line drawn south from Suddia, till it meets the last mentioned mountains, 200 Account of the Mountain Tribes [Aprit, The Singphos are divided into 12 tribes, each having its own chief or Gaum ; but every chieftain maintains his own separate independence, and seldom unites with any other, unless it be to purish some aspiring chief obnoxious to them all, or in making plundering excursions upon neighbouring states. The Singphos have for several generations been the terror of the wretched and degenerate Assamese, and were in the constant habit of making irruptions into their country, sometimes as far as their very capital itself; of plundering their temples, laying waste their country, and carrying off the inhabitants into slavery. Since the British troops have had possession of Assam, these inroads have been prevented; but as might be expected, they are somewhat impatient of that restraint, and have once or twice endeavoured to resort to their old habits. To give an idea of the extent to which the devastations were carried on, the late Captain NrurviLix, received from the Singphos alone upwards of 7000 Assamese captive slaves, and perhaps there are 100,000 Assamese and Manipuris still in slavery throughout the dominions of Ava. About five years ago, a body of them amounting to about 3000 men, armed with spears, daus, and a few musquets and jinjals, under a chief called Waxum Koonsig, made an advance against the station of Suddia, with the confident intention of carying away in chains every seapoy present, and of driving the British out of the country. This was a plot of three years’ concocting ; large stores of grain were accu- mulated in convenient depéts, and shackles for 10,000 prisoners were all in readiness; but the whole force was shamefully repulsed by the then political Agent, Capt. Neurviiue, at the head of a handful of men of the Assam Infantry, and a few armed Kangtiand Muaméaria militia, and driven in consternation into their lines. The Lubona only of all the 12 chiefs took part in this irruption, and he has taken an active hand in the late disturbances, headed by the Duffa Gaum. All the chiefs have claimed our protection, though no tribute is exacted from them; with one or two exceptions, they have acted up to their engagements. ; The Busa Gaum or chief is a man of superior understanding, and was entrusted by the late Agent to the Governor General, the lamented Mr. Scorr, with a good deal of confidence, and had an allowance from Government of 50 rs. a month, as an organ of communication with the other chiefs, and a spy upon their actions. The late Capt. NEuFVILLE was also confident in his integrity, and made proposals to him to desert his own country, and live on lands to be granted him at Burhath and 1836.] on the extreme N. i. Frontier of Bengal. 201 Jaipur, and allow his native hills to become a wilderness, and form a natural barrier against the incursions of the other tribes. The population of the Busa Gaum is about 9 or 10,000 men, exclu- sive of women and children. He furnishes a contingent of about 100 men, and is supplied with arms and ammunition. The most influential of the unfriendly chiefs is the Duffa Gaum. Only a few months ago he made a hostile incursion against our ally the Busa Gaum, and massacred every man, woman, and child he could get near; the Busa Gaum narrowly escaped with his life, and some of his own family were cut to pieces. After two or three skirmishes, the marauders were dislodged, and driven to their hills, by the force at Saddia; but the Duffa, instead of repenting of his atrocious act, and retiring to his home to await the consequences, commenced playing the despot in another quarter, threatening every one with his vengeance who acknowledged British protection, and even beheaded some who refused to conform to his will. By the latest accounts, the state of affairs in that district were very troublesome, and the whole of the Assam Infantry disposable are already on the move for its protection. A feud has for a long time existed between the Busa and the Duffa Gaums, and the inroad lately made by the latter admits of some palli- ation, as it avenged a similar one formerly made by the Busa Gaum. Rude as is the state of society amongst the Singphos, they are not without the distinction of caste; but are divided into Thengais, My- yungs, Lubrungs, and Mirups. They have no religion properly their own, but have patched up a creed from amongst the superstitions of all their neighbours, and deco- rated their rude temples with ruder idols of all religions. The Singphos are not a branch of the Shan tribes: tradition traces their origin to the confines of China or Thibet: the language is entirely different from that of the Shans, and is unwritten. Polygamy is patronised, and every man keeps as many wives as he chooses, free women or slaves; and treats the offspring of both with- out partiality. Infanticide in all its shapes they abhor. It is the custom of the country to bury the dead. Those of the poorer classes are interred soon after death; but the chiefs and prin- cipal individuals are sometimes not buried for years. The reason alleged for this consummation of the funeral rites, is to allow the widely scattered relations of the deceased to have time to attend, who would not fail to take deadly offence at their not being allowed an opportunity of paying reverence to the ashes of the head of their family. Not knowing the art of embalming, the body after death is removed to a distance from any habitation, till decomposition is completed. 2D ' 202 Account of the Mountain Tribes [Aprin, After that it is deposited in a coffin, and conveyed to the house of the deceased chief, where it lies in state, surrounded with all the insignia the illustrious individual enjoyed when alive. When all the relatives have assembled, or communicated their not being able tu attend, the coffin is committed to the earth, and a mound of clay, surrounded with a curious trellis-work of bambus, is raised to his memory. If the person has died a violent death, a buffalo is sacrificed as a propitia- tion to their deities, and the head is fixed to a cross, and placed near the grave; but if he has died in the course of nature, no sacrifice is considered necessary. According to the law of inheritance, the patrimony is divided between the eldest and the youngest son; while any children that may inter- vene are left to push their own fortunes as they best can. The eldest son succeeds to the title and the estate, while the younger, carrying away all the personal and movable property, goes in quest of a set- tlement for himself. Tea.—The tea tree grows wild all over the Singpho country, as also upon all the hills in that part of the country, and is in gene- ral use by the natives as a wholesome beverage. The tea tree, according to Mr. Bruce, was known to be indigenous to these climates about ten years ago; and during the Burmese war, large quantities of it were sent into Saddia by the Busa Gaum. How long the subject might have lain dormant is doubtful, had not the affair been again brought to the serious notice of Government, at a time the most favour- able for doing so, by the scientific investigations of Capt. Jenkins and Lieut. CHarLeTon of the Assam Infantry, to whom we must acknowledge ourselves indebted for a revival of its existence, and for the boon it must necessarily confer upon our country*. Mr. Bruce has lately been on a tour to the Singphos, and mixed in social intercourse with them. He saw many thousands of the trees growing in their native soils, and brought away some plants and specimens of the leaves and seeds. ‘The trees were of a very consi- derable size, so as to merit a higher rate of classification than a plant or ashrub: he measured one of the largest, and found it 29 cubits long, and about four spans in circumference at the base. Mr. Bruce mentions the following as the native process of making tea, though he does not seem to have witnessed it. First, the leaves are collected from the tree, and put into large boilers containing water. As soon as the water boils, the decoction is drawn off, and * This paper was written before the appointment of the scientific deputation to the tea districts, whose report may be now shortly expected.—Eb. 1836.] on the extreme N. E. Frontier of Bengal. 203 thrown away, and the leaves, being taken out of the boiler, are put into a pit dug into the ground, and lined with some sort of leaves, to prevent the tea coming in contact with the earth. When the pit is filled with tea leaves, it is then spread well over with a thick layer of the other leaves, and after all, covered over with earth, so as to exclude all air. In this state it is allowed to remain for two or three months, when the pit is opened, and the tea sold on the spot to traders, who pack it closely up in the joints of bambus, earthen’ pots, &c. and transport it to other parts of the couutry on mules for sale. He also mentions, that many thousand maunds of tea are manufactured at a place called Polong, and exported to China. Where Polong is situated, I have not been able to determine. In addition to the tea tree, the Singpho country has lately been discovered to abound in many valuable gums, well adapted for var- nishes. Burmese Singphos.—The Singphos of Assam are separated from the Singphos subservient to the Burmese, by the Patkoi chain of moun- tains ; and though these two races are entirely unconnected with one another, and independent, yet a constant friendly intercourse is main- tained between them. The Burmese Singphos occupy a very exten- sive tract of country on both sides of the Irawadi, and from the Patkoi mountains eastward to the borders of China. Trade with China.—As the Chinese carry on a very considerable trade with these Singphos, and through the medium of their country with Assam, I shall endeavour to mark out particularly the line of communication between the two countries. The Chinese pro- vince of Yunan being separated from a navigable channel of the Irawadi, only by a mountain chain, inhabited by Shans, tributary to Burmah, the Chinese merchants, by a short land journey across these mountains, convey their merchandise on mules, to a place called Catmow, on the banks of that river. There the Irawadi is a large stream. The channel is unincumbered with rocks, trees, or sandbanks ; the shores are composed of a stiff hard clay, not liable to tumble down, and present every facility for navigation. The exact position of Catmow seems undefined. The merchants, having loaded their goods on boats, easily procurable, commit themselves to the gentle current, dropping down with the tide due south, day and night, and on the third or fourth day arrive at the mouth of theriver called Nam-yang. After ascending this river four or five days in a north-west direction, they come to a town called Mung-kung, or Mugaum, the chief depdt of Chinese trade situated at the junction of two smaller rivers, the one called Nam-kung, or the Mugaum river, the other, Nam-yang, 2p 2 204 Account of the Mountain Tribes (Apri, retaining the name of the united stream. The Mugaum river is navi- gable for 40 or 50 miles above the town, and for small canoes, a good deal farther, and extends in a northern direction. The Chinese wares are transported up this river as far as practicable, and afterwards con- veyed overland through Hukung and Busato Assam. The journey from Mung-kung to Assam occupies from 15 to 20 days. Route into China.—There are two other routes to China besides the one mentioned, the one by a place called Senwa, and the other by May-nay, both of which run direct into Burmah, but little more is known about them than their name. The intercourse between China and Assam by any of these roads is extremely tedious, and can only be followed by a trading people, who traffic as they move along, with- out regard to time or distance. A knowledge of the extreme naviga- ble eastern branches of the Brahmaputra has pointed out a much shorter and more convenient pass, and this was travelled by Lieuts. Witcox and Burtton on their visit to the Bor-Kangtis. Following up the river Noa Dihing, which flows into the left bank of the Lohit, a few miles above Suddia, they were able to proceed by water convey- ance to within nine days’ journey of Mung-lang, on the banks of the Irawadi, and without experiencing any serious difficulty or mcon- venience farther than the jungly state of the country. Importance of a Road.—A road passable even for mules or oxen between the navigable branches of the Noa Dihing and the Irawadi could not fail to be of great national benefit, and would open a channel for the direct importation of all the valuable productions of Central Asia. It would also tend to the complete civilization of the savage mountaineers, who inhabit these regions, and enable a force to pene- trate into the centre of the country, whither they can at present retreat with comparative impunity. It is doubtful how far those tribes would contribute to the formation of roads, or the furtherance of any attempt on our part, to extend our intercourse into the interior ; they have hitherto been jealous of any encroachment, and not many years ago, gave proofs of the spirit by murdering the individuals who conducted Lieut. BennetT to the Patkoi boundary. But the time, it is to be hoped, has already arrived when these fertile tracts will be taken under our especial protection ; when the untutored . barbarian must submit to civilization and improvement, and his wilds and his wastes to the ploughshare and the hoe of British agriculture. The most important articles of trade exported by the Chinese from the Singpho country are gold dust, precious stones of various colours, and ivory. Gold Dust.—The gold dust is procurable from most of the streams 1836.] on the extreme N. E. Frontier of Bengal. 203 of the Brahmaputra; but the gathering it is but a poor trade, and is now but little followed. The place most celebrated for its precious stones is Mung-kung or Mogaum. Precious Stones.—On a range of hills near it, a great number of deep mines are dug, and the working of them affords occupation for many thousand inhabitants. When a stene of moderate weight is found, it is hoisted to the mouth of the shaft by a windlass erected for the pur- pose. But they frequently meet with large masses, which they have not the power of moving: these they contrive to break to pieces. Mining.—The workmen begin by kindling a strong fire all over and around the precious stones, till it is well heated; they then mark off with some powerful liquid, the piece they wish to break off, a large stone is suspended from the top of the shaft perpendicularly over the piece to be broken off, and when all is ready, the stone is cut away, and falling with great impetus upon the mass below, breaks off the fragment exactly according to the line drawn with the liquid. It is difficult to account for this mysterious liquid being able to prevent the whole mass from being splintered, and how it should preserve such a line of separation ; yet such is the native belief, and it is not impro- bable that its effect is merely imaginary, or that is practised from some superstition. These stones are afterwards cut into convenient pieces by means of a bambu bow with a string of twisted wire, the string being applied to the stone and used as a saw, while its action is assisted by some sort of pulverized mineral*. As might be expected, much bloodshed is frequently the consequence of finding these hidden treasures. When any doubt arises about the party who first discovered one, or about the right of possession, bloody battles ensue with short swords in hand be- tween whole villages. Large emeralds are allowed to lie around the pits unclaimed by any one: no one venturing to carry them away, lest every one should fall upon them in vengeance. These precious stones are afterwards carried on mules to China, and are sold at very high prices, some of them bringing 7 or 800 seers weight of silver. The Burmese governor levies a tax of two seers on every 10 that are exported. These mules are driven along in gangs of 20 to 30; the drivers go armed with swords and matchlocks, and guide their beasts of burden by word of mouth. The route they pursue to China is via Catmow or the Irawadi, and the overland journey from Mung-king to Catmow occupies about nine days. Amber.—Besides the mines of precious stones, there are several amber mines in the province of Huking, which are wrought to con- * Doubtless corundum : this is the common mode of cutting hard stones.—Ep. 206 Account of the Mountain Tribes APRIL, siderable advantage. The amber is cut into cylinders about } inch in diameter, and two inches long, and is worn as an ornament stuck through a hole in the lobe of the ear, both by Assamese and Burmese. Ivory.—A large quantity of ivory is exported by the China mer- chants. It is almost all obtained by the Singphos, from shooting the wild elephants with poisoned arrows fired from a loaded musket. When once they get upon the tract of a herd, they continue the pursuit for days together, taking up favourable positions upon trees, or lying in wait in the long grass, till they can take a fatalaim. Vast numbers of these noble animals are destroyed in this manner, both by the Sing- phos and Kangtis ; they are as susceptible to the fatal effects of poison as the smaller animals, and fall down dead immediately after being slightly wounded. Their teeth are struck out by the hunters, and the carcasses are left to be devoured by the beasts of prey. Chinese returns.—In return for these valuable commodities, the Chinese bring into the Singpho country, nankins, silks, lacquered and China ware, lead, copper, and particularly silver. A great portion of the silver that comesinto Assam through the Singphos is stamped with Chinese characters. It can scarcely be called a coin, but a piece of bullion; and appears to have been made by scooping out a small round hole in a piece of clay, then filling it with molten silver, and before it becomes cold, impressing it with the Chinese stamp. Not two of these lumps of silver are of the same value or size: their intrinsic worth is ascertained by their weight, and is found to vary from two to 10 rupees. Bullion.—Though the metal is very pure, it is called kacha rupa, and one sicca weight of it is fixed as equal to only half a sicca of the pro- perly coined metal. No inconvenience arises in purchasing articles of small value; the hill tribes take out their dau, and chop it into pieces even to the portion of a pice. This kacha rupa is eagerly purchased by the chiefs in Upper Asam, who, after adulterating it largely, cast it into their own coin, and thus realize an enormous profit. These chiefs have most of them mints of their own, and are in the habit of coining rupees for any one who will give them the raw material, retaining only 10 per cent. for their trouble. Muamirias or Mattuks. The country of this tribe is bounded on the N. by the Brahmaputra, on the 8S. by the Buri Dihing; on the E. by a line drawn S. from the mouth of the Kunili nallah to the Buri Dihing, and on the W. by a line drawn from the mouth of the river Dibunu to the Buri Dihing. About 1793, these people rose in arms against the reigning Rajah GovuriNATH S1nu, and after many bloody engagements with the royal 1836. ] on the extreme N. E. Frontier of Bengal. 207 troops, at last succeeded in driving him from his throne and kingdom, and in appointing a successor of their own choice. During the period of their ascendancy, they committed the most dreadful ravages upon the country, and the original inhabitants: great portions of it were deserted, and even till this day, it has never regained any thing near its former prosperity. But these lawless plunderers were not allowed long to enjoy the fruits of their conquests ; they were speedily driven from the capital by 1000 sipahis, under Captain Wetsu, and retreated to the districts which they now inherit. The head of this still power- ful clan is known by the name of the Marrux Rajah, or more com- monly, by that of the Bara senapati (great general). During the Burmese war, he maintained his independence ; but on our taking Rangpur, he claimed our protection, and has since manifested his sincerity, by a zealous endeavour to render every assistance in his power in the advancement of our plans. The greater part of the country allotted them is a desert waste, and only the banks of the river Diburi are inhabited. The population amounts to about 60,000 men, inclusive of women and children. The capital is Rangagora. The state is allowed about 500 musquets and ammunition according to treaty, and supplies a large contingent. They profess the Hindu religion; but act so little’in accordance with its tenets, that enlightened Brahmins scarcely acknowledge them. The Bara senapati, with all his affability and apparent deference to our authority, is by some considered not entitled to perfect and unlimited confidence. Situated between two powerful states, the British and the Burmah, his policy seem to be to maintain good terms with both; and in the event of another Burmese invasion, it is to be feared, he would preserve neutrality, till he saw how the scale was likely to turn, and then join the stronger party. Nagas. The next border tribes met with in proceeding westward are the Nagas. To assign limit to their country seems almost impossible, and even to number their numerous tribes, no less so; they are scattered all over the mountainous ridge that divides Assam from Manipur, to which state some of them are tributary, some to Assam, and some even to the Burmese. There is no one individual tribe of any formi- dable consequence amongst them, and there is but little inclination to coalesce, they being constantly embroiled in petty feuds. Their houses are built on the most inaccessible points of the mountain, and planned for every-day defence. They are represented by the inhabi- tants of the plains as robbers and murderers, .and are so much the dread of all, that little of their economy is known. 208 On the Method employed to remove the Vaulted Roof of [Apriu, Brine Spring.—One of the most remarkable circumstances relating to their country is the number of brine or salt springs in many parts of it. At Burhath, on the river Disung, there are about 20 of these brine springs, from most of which the Nagas are in the habit of making salt. These wells are dug to a considerable depth, and the brine varies in intensity, probably according to the access of fresh water from the surface ; and being situated in a valley, and having no protection from the rain, they are generally filledin the wet season. The consequence is, that the manufacture is carried on only in the cold weather. Manufacture of Salt.—Some of the best of these wells give 10 sicca weight of dry salt to the seer of water, and others, only three or four. The process of evaporation is carried on by filling the joints of large bambus with brine and suspending them in an earthen trough, filled with water, which answer for the purpose of a boiler, and in this rude way, the brine in the bambus is evaporated, till salt is formed. These mud troughs are every season broken down, and being triturated with water, afford a strong brine from which other salt is formed. So tedious and unskilful is the manufacture, that the salt made from these wells cannot be made at less price than the same quantity of salt transported from Bengal. II.—On the Method employed to remove the Vaulted Roof of St. Peter’s Church in Fort William, illustrated by a Section, (Plate V.) Works of engineering skill come peculiarly within the limits point- ed out by the motto on our title page, as fitted for the Researches of a Scientific Society or Journal: ‘The performances of man,” of such a class in this country, and under British rule, are, it is true, but rare and trifling compared with the noble efforts of art, which grow up from day to day under the eye of an observer in Europe. There, letting alone tunnels and railways of gigantic enterprize, we hear of half an elliptic arch sprung by the celebrated Brunet from a buttress and carried to a semi-span of seventy feet, without centering, by the mere adhesion of the cement !—of an iron suspension bridge at Fribourg in Switzerland thrown over a ravine of 170 feet deep, in a single bold span of more than 900 feet from rock to rock, far surpassing the Menai bridge, or even the designed bridge from St. Vincent’s rocks at Clifton, which latter we regret to hear has been abandoned, in consequence of the riots in Bristol, and the destruction of that wealth which would have been so well bestowed upon this noble work. 1836.] St. Peter’s Church in Fort Wiliam. 209 We have but little indeed to bring forward in rivalry of such mag- nificent undertakings; howbeit, there have been schemes of vast magnitude projected, and some under a Viceroy suchas Lord W. Brn- TINCK, partial to engineering pursuits, might ere this have been put in execution. The draining of the Salt-water lake, (were it conceded to be a salutary measure) would be feasibleenough. The line of wharfs or jetties on the Strand is actually planned and estimated for. The Rajmahl line of survey is a splendid specimen of mapping; and although we have no anticipation of seeing it undertaken, the results of the inquiry will, we hope, be given to the public in a volume, with all its sections, by its projector our Indian Belidor. Of architectural achievements we have less to boast. Twenty years since, money was bequeathed by a rich native for the erection of a College at Hugli, and yet nothing has been done unto this day. Are architects wanting, or are the curators anxious to appropriate the money for other purposes? We have seen more than one tasteful design, but how is an artist ever to satisfy the views of a numerous committee, not more than one or two of whom perchance have any notion of architectural propriety? In feeble imitation of the Parliamentary Church Committee at home, we have a private fund created by rupee contributions for the erection of places of worship in the interior; but it is far too poor to aim at orna- ment in its humble structures. The Martiniere is the only public in- stitution, erected within the last year or two, that has rea] pretensions to correct taste in its exterior elevation. It is strangely disfigured by a high wall round the ground, and the arrangements of the interior have been marred by an imperfect conception at starting, of what would be required in it. An observation forces itself upon us when viewing the noble portico of this building, of the Scotch Church, or of the mint, withtheir handsome flights ofstonesteps ;—that the purity of Greciantemple architecture can- not or ought not to be preserved under the altered circumstances of the present age. Menno longer resort on foot in daily processions to the sacred vestibules of their gods. They drive in comfortable carriages, and would fain dismount under shelter from the sun and the rain. Is it not a fault of grievous magnitude then, that neither of these three buildings possesses a carriage access ? and that at the Mint, for instance, bullion cannot get within 100 feet of the hall of weighment, except on coolies’ heads. The Government house is in this respect better provid- ed; but here the basement entrance has been made an eyesore, anda mere secondary object, instead of the primary one, being in constant use. ‘The portico of the Martiniere was intended for carriages, but this object was sacrificed to the gaining of space for a play-ground, and the road 25 210 On the Method employed to remove the Vaulted Roof of [Aprit, is now brought up at right angles with the foot of the steps, which has an unseemly and awkward effect. The native architect in the palaces of the east provides not for car- riages, but how suitable is the lofty arched gate with its music galleries for the train of towered elephants and horsemen issuing from the interior court. Under the sloping chhaja or cornice of the native dwelling, or baithak-khineh, the architect inserts iron rings for the strip- ed pavilions it is intended to bear. They look natural to it, as they are necessary to the climate ; whereas how may not the Ionic facade of the Martiniere be disfigured hereafter, perhaps, by venetians run up between the columns of its fine portico, as in the left wing of the Government house, or by matted hoods gracing the southern windows of each wing ? Too much stress cannot be laid on the proper adaptation of style to the climate. The architect’s duty is but half performed, if he provide not for every contingency to which his building may be subject, whether in respect to durability or to convenience; and even when the former is attended to, the latter is too frequently neglected. A striking instance of the bad effects of inattention to apparently trivial objects of this nature is afforded in the subject of the present notice. Major Hurcuinson designed and executed a gothic vaulted church roof in brick, the first attempted in India. He neglected to make provision for the hanging of punkahs, and upon a representation of their being wanted, the executive department, with little calculation of the disturbance of equilibrium or strength of materials, ordered holes to be cut at the head of the clustered columns, to admit beams to swing them. Had the architect at first, as he has now done, let in iron rods to sustain the punkah ropes, his work would have been uninjured, and Government have been saved double, nay triple, expenditure ; and his fame have been preserved from unmerited censure. Few people in such cases calmly inquire into particulars; they ask, who raised the fabric, and upon his head lay the onus of the failure. Weare glad, with reference to this last fact, at having obtained per- mission to make public the report of the real circumstances given in to the Military Board in June, 1832, with its explanatory section. It is necessary to recapitulate to such of our readers as are unac- quainted with the facts, that about six years ago the vaulted roof of St. Peter’s was condemned as unsafe, and was ordered to be demolished. The keystone or vertex of the central and side vaults had opened from end to end, and other dangerous symptoms were observed. Committees were held, and a variety of opinion as to the cause elicited, but the necessity of demolition was general, and Major Hutcuinson was 1836.] St. Peter’s Church in Fort William. 211 intrusted with a task seemingly as difficult as the original construc- tion, and fraught with more danger to the workmen employed. The true nature of the case will strike every one who looks attentively at the accompanying section, namely that the cutting of the holes for the punkahs was the origin of the whole mischief. Had the cracks in the roof existed at the time, it can hardly be imagined that orders could have been issued to cut away the only props of the superstructure. The effect of such an improvident order was however fully represented at the time by Lieut. Mattock, Major H. being then in England. It is probable that the chief engineer relied upon his experience of the firm tenacity of the materials: that he had good reason to do so in many respects is proved by the fact recorded in the report, that the semi vault stood firmly when the keystone was knocked out, and was with difficulty broken away piecemeal. Hence it appears, that after all, the roof might have stood with per- fect safety had the punkah holes been refilled with care, and the side- vault been braced together with light iron rods, as in the well known Musée des Arts et Metiers at Paris. The continuity of the main arch from the crown of the upper vault, through the flying buttresses to the ground, does not appear to have been broken; and if so, the opening or crack was of little consequence. Yet in face of all the above facts, the restoration of the vault was interdicted, and in lieu of a solid “ vaulted roof embracing the highest branches of constructive science, after the manner and principles pursued by freemasons in the beautiful gothic edifices of Europe,” it was resolved to descend to an imitation in wood-work with a flat roof above. Though of minor importance and beauty, the wooden roof is well spoken of in the Report of the Committee of Survey: ‘“ The groined roof of the nave is, we believe, the first work of the kind ever attempted in this country, and involving as it does the practical application of some of the most difficult principles of constructive carpentry, the suc- cessful completion of such a work under all the difficulties attendant on the employment of native carpenters, who had to be instructed in every stage of the work, is highly creditable to the skill and science of the executive officer, Major Hurcuinson.” Before closing these preliminary remarks, we would fain notice the painted glass windows of the west and east ends of the nave. They are decidedly lions in our town, admirable specimens of rich transpa- rent colouring, not frittered in small fragments, but in the new style, of colours burnt in on large panes of 24 by 16 inches. The design of St. Perzr receiving the keys is from RapHanu’s Car- toon; Moszs and Aaron are on either side, and the four Evangelists 2E 2 212 On the Method employed to remove the Vaulted Roof of [Aprit, fill the compartments below. The Faith, Hope, and Charity of the west windows are taken from the designs of Sir JosHua Reynoxps in New Church, Oxford. From the great size of the panes of thin glass the difficulty of repairing any of them, if broken, will easily be understood. Yet by an accident, two panes were broken in putting up. The head and neck of Hope was smashed to atoms by the falling of a bambu! Al- though it is hard to excuse the occurrence of any accident where pre- cautions should have rendered it impossible, we cannot but praise the ingenuity with which it was repaired, so that the damage is not per- ceptible. The fragments were united together with a transparent var- nish on another pane of colourless glass. The only question is as to the durability of the cement; we should fear it would grow brown by age and exposure. Report on the Demolition of the Vaulted Roofs of St. Peter’s Church. «« A continuous and perfect equilibrium of the several parts of a build- ing, and the concentration of all the forces, whether vertical or lateral, on a few principal supports, which for the sake of lightness, elegance and economy, are calculated to sustain no more than their allotted pressure, being fundamental principles in Gothic architecture; the demolition of such a structure (more especially if the equlibrium has been destroyed by the weakening of those supports) must at any time, even with the aid of powerful means, be considered an undertaking of much difficulty and danger; but in this country, with the assistance of native workmen alone, it becomes a duty demanding the utmost vigi- lance and attention ; consequently in the removal of the vaulted roofs of St. Peter’s Church, it became of primary importance to ascertain, with precision, the extent and character of the existing derangement of equilibrium, as a correct basis for calculation and design, in the opera- tions to be pursued. With this view, a particular and most minute inspection of all the several parts of the edifice was made, of which the following was the result : Foundations—With regard to the foundations, it was ascertained, that the sinking, which had taken place from the nature of the alluvial soil, was exceedingly small* ; any tendency there might have been to sinking in the main pillars having been counteracted by the heavy reversed arches extending under the basement from pillar to pillar. * The sinking of the pillars most injured by the punkah beams not exceeding gth of an inch, which was as little as could be expected from a general settlement in a brick building, and by no means capable of affecting the equilibrium. 1836. ] St. Peter’s Church in Fort William. 213 Vaulted roofs of side arches and pillars.—The vaulted roofs of the side aisles were found in a most dilapidated state, as likewise the main pillars at the points d’appui of the springing of the ribs, upon which rested the load of the side vaults. Upon the removal of the punkah beams (r*) shewn in the accompanying section, (which had never been removed by any Committee) it was at once evident that the principles upon which the equilibrium and consequent stability of the side vaults and pillars depended, (and according to which they had originally been constructed,) were entirely destroyed ; viz. 1st, the thickness of butment inwards, originally given to the main pillars, had been reduced in the direct line of thrust from 4 to 2 feet, by the perforation of large holes, for the insertion of beams upon which to suspend punkahs ; 2nd, the adhesive continuity of the cemented materials (upon which the stability of pillars composed of brick and mortar so entirely depend) had been completely disturbed in the vicinity of the holes, from the blows of the iron instruments by which they had been made; 5rd, the springing of the main ribs, upon which the side vaults rested, had been wholly cut away on either side as exhibited at (ss), by which the vaults, deprived of their supporting points, sunk down both in haunch and vertex from their original position, thereby greatly increasing the force with which they pressed against the main pillars; 4th, the mainpillars being so greatly weakened by the perforation of the holes, and the disturbance of the cemented material, yielded inwardly} to the extent of 44 inches from the perpendicular, and became cracked entirely across; the parts marked (¢¢) splitting off from some of them. Thus all equilibrium was inevitably destroyed. Vault of the nave, flying buttresses, cleristory walls, &c.—The above facts being established, the examination was carefully extended to the vault of the nave, the flying buttresses, the external and cleristory walls and towers: but with the exception of some cracks in the flying Ton. Cwt. Reveishingdm exchiaisles:) s220 sabe ol. )ftee SORE SS LS Og IUBNGROMN UVC s BicYolie wilsse. = oti oibuci sist cntis, 5, 8Meson exehlan dies, 1a vos tbe gtowevenial shal SMelcuosdtces Sa oat 10 independently of the weight of the punkahs. + The exact estimation of their increased force is a question of much diffi- culty, from its being connected with circumstances not within the reach of calculation, viz. the amount of injury accruing to the arch and pillar by the penetration of the rain into the spandrils and through the arch ; also the amount of pressure from the sinking of the abutment of the cleristory walls, which rest- ed in part on the arch: but that it must have been very great will be evident to every one acquainted with the rules and principles of construction. t A slight deflexion of the pillars inwardly had been observed before the punkah beams were inserted. This deflexion, Sir CurtstopHer WREN states, is to be observed in all the Gothic Cathedrals in Europe, from which it would appear to be a circumstance incidental to this style of Architecture ; but that it is not productive of any important derangement of equilibrium, is fully proved by the great durability of the Gothic structures in Europe. 214 On the Method employed to remove the Vaulted Roof of ([Apri, buttresses, owing to the sinking of the side vaults, the whole was found in such good condition, as to remove any apprehension as to the firmness and stability of the main vault, &c. which being well support- ed by the flying buttresses, and those of the outer walls, no external shores were judged necessary; and as in its construction it was wholly independent of the side vaults, it was concluded, that notwith- standing the shocks it might be expected to receive from their demo- lition, yet that they might, when properly secured, be proceeded with in perfect safety, without any fear of danger arising thereby to the main vault. Accordingly, the only point which demanded immediate attention was the counteraction of the imminent danger to be appre- hended, from the further sinking and spreading of the side vaults, by which, the main pillars in their shattered condition were liable to be forcedinwardly, and thereby to entail the consequentand sudden downfal of the entire building. As this danger could only be prevented by the construction of such massive shores on the nave side, which should be able to resist every power that could possibly be exerted by the spreading of the side vaults, the following plan of shoring, preparatory to the removal of the side vaults, was adopted, and pursued with success. Mode of shoring.—A solid bed of masonry (a) was laid for the firm support of the foundation beam (6), upon the extremities of which were fixed in mortises the uprights (cc) ; these were hollowed out to fit closely to the main pillars, their base or lower ends being enlarged and strengthened by the additional blocks (gg) to which they were firmly joggled, and bolted, in the manner shewn. The straining beam (d) being then fixed at one end in the upright (on a line with the shattered part of the pillars and strain of the side aisles) by a semicircular tenon working in a similar mortice, the other end cut to a tenon with a slight angle, was by means of three jack screws (as shewn in the distance, forced up a smooth inclined mortise well greased, cut in the opposite upright, and thus brought into a horizontal position. The shores or struts (ee), let in obliquely upon the foundation beam (0d), were then fixed in the mortises cut in the uprights, and straining beam (d), and firmly wedged up into their places and secured by the footsil (f); thus, the thrust of one aisle was brought into play against the thrust of the other, and further spreading of the side vaults effectually prevented. Centres for supporting the roofs of the side aisles—The above work having with great care and labour been accomplished, four strong cen- tres or framings were next constructed, as shewn in jig. 2; which whea put together, were, by means of wedges underneath, brought firmly up to the masonry of the vault; and thus securely supported, the 1836.] St. Peter’s Church in Fort William. 215 work people were enabled by means of crow-bars and pick-axes to commence the demolition of the side roofs without any apprehension of danger. These frames being made movable, the expence of centre- ing up the entire side vaults was avoided. The vaulted roofs of the aisles were thus safely removed, without the slightest injury arising to the centre roof of the nave, thereby confirming the correctness of the opinion formerly advanced that no danger would arise to it. § [o) i) 2 aloois wot co} el yo] op Swot oa yg : 4 Pte ~a2 2s Wed ee eel23|S3|2| BF | ®s/pebgiazl 25] aac 2 | ez leveled s ‘ is E ° a 5 o SRS a eel] ¢s C9 ff OBR SE Gal ero tS eT INS ala = : E. F E. = S| Se 2e | pai ee ool. aleeole | om eel es St | tal RSISEO oO ; Hd eS : F S e CrP ol sl|ee| eas) Slzoess | ae eezisFlas|sef| ssicsa, = : oe 2 ga eo Bred her eg foo [ar S| RE "(ORIS@ ei rl ol “Ss Fel F | GR | SeISss] s E ae Sale: Kg AC ed as a ag ewan a es SL i ee 2 | *SouleInxX 5 © *TOYyIeIA MA *pulm Reap eo enL “MW *d f 78 SUOTIVAIESqO ‘W °V QT 98 SUOTIZAIESqO os 1a1sisoy “9881 ‘qudp fo yjuopy ay? Lof ‘njIna1n) ‘a0fQ hussp ay) qn day ‘sajsthaay 7091b0]0.10a7a FAT 256 JOURNAL Or Seer AST ATEC “SOCTETY. No. 53.—May, 1836. 1.—Johéle and its former Dependencies of Jompdle Gominchi. By Lieut. Newso.p, A. D. C. to Brigr. General Witson, C. B. Johéle. Of Johdle, the third of the four Menangkabowe states, still less is known than of Rumbdéwe and Sungie Ujong. An Englishman of the name of Gray, (whose information is to be taken, however, with caution,) is said to have been the only European who has penetrated into the interior of this state. He passed through part of it in 1827, on his return to Malacca from Pahang, whither he had performed a journey overland, across the peninsula, to barter opium for the gold dust of the latter place. His route lay through Naning, part of Rumbowe, Srimenanti, Jampéle, Ulu Seruting, Ulu Braugh, and Ulu Pahang. The journey was performed in 14 days. From Tabu, in Naning, to Jompéle, he was four days passing over mount Lanjut, to the villages of Gadang and Tanjong; over mounts Miko, Pabi, and Punting Pahat, through the villages of Passir, Juno, and Pila, in Srimenanti; and from Pila to Jompéle, “ one day’s walk.” Mr. Gray describes the country he passed through, to have been in a state of high cultivation, particularly at Miko, and in the vales of Punting Pahat, Jiéino, and Passir. He observes that the paddy at Miko is preferable to that of Malacca, and that it is supposed by the people that the ground there is better for cultivation, one gantang of seed never producing less than a hun- dred-fold. The produce of mount Miko is sapan wood, dammer, and canes of the species termed Pinang-lawyers in abundance. Jompdle, he con- ® 21 258 Johole and its former Dependencies of (May, jectures, to be about 90 miles distant from Malacca. Pahang is esti- mated at 300 miles distance from Jompoéle. From Jompdéle to Pahang the journey is by boat down the river Seruting to the large lake of Braugh, called Tassek Braugh; which is said by Mr. Gray to be nearly fifty miles in circumference, and is formed by the flow of water from the neighbouring mountains. If this account be correct, the lake Braugh exceeds in dimensions the recently discovered inland lakes in Sumatra. The natives, however, have described this lake to me to be of much less extent; narrow but long. Its communication with the Pahang river, which empties into the China sea, is by a river called the Braugh. Regarding the navigation of these rivers, Mr. Gray observes: “ In some parts of the Seruting and Braugh, a brig might go up, and in other parts, nothing but a small boat; on account of the water being above the fallen trees, so that the boat must be lifted before it can proceed, on account of the overflowing banks of the river.” The Pahang river, from the place where it receives the waters of the Braugh, down to the town of Pahang, is wide and deep. These streams are deepest in the months of November, December, and Janu- ary. From the month of March to that of August, Mr. Gray was informed, that it is impossible to proceed from the Seruting river to Pahang, on account of the paucity of water. The general depth of these rivers, in January, he ascertained to be between 40 and 60 feet ; but on his return in February, he found their depth diminished by one- half. There are afew villages on the banks of these rivers, but for the most part they are covered with lofty forests, tenanted by the rhino- cerous, tapir, tiger, elephant, and scarcely more civilized Jacoon. Mr. Gray met with great kindness and hospitality from the inha- bitants of the different estates through which he passed. He fell, however, a sacrifice to his exertions, dying of jungle fever, contracted during the journey, twenty-five days after his return to Malacca. Boundaries.—Johdle is bounded on the north by Ul« Pahang and part of Rumbdwe : to the south by part of Naning and Miar or Segdmet : to the east by Segamet, and to the west by Srimendnti and part of Rumbdwe. The boundaries with Malacca are from Bukit Puttés to Battang Malacca, and from Battang Malacca by Bankéng* Chéndéng to Mount Ophir. * Bankéng Chéndong is a large tree, growing in the forest that separates Assahan from Mount Ophir. The tree was still in existence when I visited Mount Ophir in 1833. te 1836.] Jompole Gominchi. 259 With Segdmet and Méar, its boundaries are Murbdwe sa rdtis (the hundred Marbdwe trees) and Binkéng Chéndéng; with Rumbdwe, Bukit Pabz ; and with Srimendnti, Bukit Pila. Population, &c.—The population of Johdle is estimated at 2,080 inhabitants. The principal villages are Nuri, Londong, Tney, Taman, and Bennong. Johéle is governed by a Panghili and Ampat Suki. The former, like his brother chief of Sungie Ujéng, is elected by the Siékis, and by the Batin di ablas, or twelve heads of the Jacoons. The name of the present Panghili is Anu Brxr, or Banouita, and his title Johan Lélah Percasseh ; he resides at Nuri, is an intelli- gent looking person ; plain, simple, and collected in manner, and much respected by his people. The tribes are those of Bododnda, Sa Melbngan, Tiga, Battu, and Miinkal. | Srimendnti and Jompdéle, were formerly considered dependencies of Johéle, but now assert their independence, as also does Gominchi. The Panghili, Lussye, ofthe latter place died lately, and his brother Mauam- mEpD Kari succeeded him. Pdéndok Passir, a small state under the influence of Srimendnit, was also a dependency of Johdle, and is ruled by a petty Panghili of its own. Besides the usual rights of revenue, the Panghilii of Johdle levies ten per cent. on the produce of the tin mines, together with a tax on the gold of Gominchi, which will be shortly alluded to. Trade.——The trade of Johdle consists chiefly in gold dust; 20 catties of which are said to be produced annually. Tin, about 300 piculs. Fruits, ratans, jaggery, and fowls are brought in considerable quantities down to Malacca. Jompéle.—Jompéle was anciently a dependancy of Johdle, but is now nominally governed by Raja AuianeG, a son of the third Menangka- bowe prince, Raja Ham. The Panghila and Ampat Séku exercise almost independent sway. The name of the present Panghilé is Hassan; the tribes are those of Bodoanda, Sa Meléngan, Anédk Malacca, and Tiga Bittu. Jompole is in the high road of the Pahang traders travelling across the peninsula to Malacca; it is situated on a small river of the same name, which flows into the Muar river, [one of the largest streams on the western coast of the peninsula,] by which it has communication with the Straits of Malacca. By the rivers Seruting and Braugh, an easy intercourse from November or October to February is kept up with Pahang and the eastern coast. The Raja here levies a duty on the opium, tobacco, cloths, iron utensils, salt, &c. passing through 2 2 260 Johéle and its former Dependencies of (May, Jompéle to Pahang, as wellas on the gold dust and silk cloths of Pahang returning to Malacca. Jompéle produces a considerable quantity of tin, sapan wood, rice, dammer, ratans, and a little gold, which is sent down the Muar river to Malacca (eight days pull), and also to Pahang. The population of Jompdle is estimated at 2,000; it is divided into three Miikims ; viz. those of Limbajon, Turéntong, and Qualla Lenney. Gold.—The following account of the gold mines at Chimendros, with the exception of the part relative to the assaying of the metal, which is from personal observation, is almost entirely drawn from native information. Bukit Chimendros is a hill situated in Gominchi, a territory subject to the Panghiléi of Johdle, and bordering on the eastern frontier of Naning. It is covered and surrounded by an uninhabited forest of great extent, intersected by numerous rivulets, which derive their source from the hill. Veins of quartzose rock run over it at various depths (generally from 12 to 20 feet) below the surface, forming the matrix in which* the gold is found in small broken streaks. The rock is enclosed in a bed of a sort of white clay, indurated more or less, termed Ndpal. The method pursued by Chinese and Malays for separating the metal from its matrix resembles that adopted by the Hungarian miners, with this exception, that the process of amalgamation is not practised by the former for this purpose. The Kling assayers of gold, however, avail themselves of it in their vocation,. as will presently appear. The Malay miners, as soon as the precise spot and minute have been determined by their diviners, Pawangs, or other charlatans supposed to be skilled in discovering the hidden treasures of the earth, commence clearing the ground of trees, brushwood, &c. and then proceed to remove the roots and vegetable soil by means of Biliongs and Chonkoles, (the Malayan adze and spade,) until the bed of Napal is laid bare. These implements are now put aside, and a heavy sort of iron crow-bar, (Perjong) is had recourse to. The first layer of Napal is soft and whitish; the second has a red- dish tint. The last is a black incrustation resembling brick in hard- ness, and hence called by the natives Tambrker Quali ; this is commonly two fingers’ breadth, in thickness, and being removed, discovers the * A specimen of this rock, in which a small portion of gold is imbedded, or rather disseminated, has been forwarded to the Society. 1836. ] Jompole Gominchi. 261 white vein of rock, the matrix of the gold, and termed the Reting. It is generally between three and four feet in diameter: underneath lies a bed of whitish earth, below which gold is never found. The next process is that of breaking up the Beting, for which pur- pose the Perjong is employed. From the extreme hardness of the rock this is a very laborious and tedious task. The coarse pieces are then pounded in a sort of large mortar cut from the quartz rock. The pulverized stone is then passed through sieves (Kisye) of ratan, and carried in small baskets to a running stream, where the smaller stony particles are washed away, while the gold dust, with the grosser pieces, sink to the bottom of the conical vessel in which it is subjected to the action of the stream. The refuse is picked out, and the gold dust again carefully washed and collected in a cocoanut shell or leaf of the Pallas tree, and con. veyed to the Bongsal, where it is dried by means of a red hot piece of charcoal being repeatedly passed over its surface. After the adherent finer particles of the sand have been removed, it is weighed into quantities, generally of one tael each, which are carefully folded up in small pieces of cloth. These packets constitute the Bunkals of commerce. In Sumatra, according to Marspen, the parcels or Bulses, in which the gold is packed up, are formed of the integument that covers the heart of the buffaloe. The Bunkals are, as in Sumatra, frequently used as currency instead of coin. The weights* for gold formerly used as Chimendros and Taon (a place about half a day’s journey thence) are as follow : 2 small sagas (Saga ie 1 large saga (s4ga besar). 8 Sdga besdr, ..... = 1 Maiam. 16 Maiams, = 1 Tael or Bunkal. 20 Taels, . = 1 Cattie. The Saga is a sort of small scarlet pea with a black spot, the Abrus Maculatus. Besides Chimendros and Taon, I have not heard of any place on the peninsula where gold is obtained from the solid rock. On Sumatra it is frequently found in this state. The gold dust at Pahang and Jellye is procured in the same manner as that in the mines at the foot of Mount Ophir, already described in a paper published in this Journal; (vol. i. page 497.) The mines at Reccan are estimated to produce annually about 20 catties of gold dust. * At Malacca 10 Sdga besar or 4 Képongs are equal to one maiam. 262 Johéle and its former Dependencies of (May, The Panghili of Gominchi first levied a tenth on the produce of these mines, but in consequence of large quantities of gold dust being secretly carried off, before the tenth had been levied, he substituted a sort of poll tax, amounting to a maiam of gold per annum, from each person working at the mines. The Panghili of Johéle is in the habit of sending five or six buffaloes a year to the mines, receiving for every head of cattle two taels of gold. These heavy drawbacks have caused the mines to become unpro- fitable to the speculators, and almost deserted. The former of these imposts, I believe, could readily be endured ; but the latter ad libitum sort of exaction destroys all hope of reasonable profit. The following is an estimnte of the various degrees of purity of gold dust, produce of the peninsula. It will be necessary to premise, that mata, is a term denoting the degrees of fineness for gold, of which there are 10, as fixed by the native assayers. Gold of 10 mutu is equal therefore to gold of 24 carats: gold not reaching eight muta is called mas mida, or young gold; and gold from eight to 10 mtu, mas tuah, or old gold. Gold of Reccan, ose pl elistalfavalcteyctete, oe Mino ey mk 10ce be Mount! O phi eee ie.cie aialwihuolevten ole, a Qaiee ip Chimendros and gi Taon, eutie? Pahang, Jellye, I Tringanu, cent Catantan, From Calantan gold of 10 miétié is sometimes obtained. The assayers of gold are generally Chuliahs or Klings, who acquire by constant practice the power of determining to the fraction ofa mutui the purity of any specimen of gold dust brought from the east- ward*. As they would be perhaps liable to imposition were this the only trial they subjected the metal to, they have recourse to the Battu wut or touchstone. This is a roughish black stone, apparently basalt, brought from continental India, and generally set in a small frame of bronze or brass. The assaying needles are generally from 20 to 24 in number, ranged on a string, and alloyed in known proportions of copper and silver, marked on the surface, from three to 92 muta. The needle and gold to be assayed are rubbed on the touchstone in parallel streaks, in the usual manner ; a lump of the adhesive wax called Lilin kalilitis then applied to the surface of the touch-stone, which brings off the two thin lamina of gold. * The natives are, I believe, totally ignorant of the assay by cupellation and acids. 1836. ] Jompdle Gominchi. 263 The difference between the two being more visible on the wax (which is coloured black for this purpose with a fine charcoal made from the plantain leaf) than en the stone. This is the reason the native assayers give for the removal of the streaks of gold from the stone to the wax, though to me no difference was perceptible : possibly the following may afford another clue to the practice of the natives in this particular. In this wax the impressions of the gold, which would be lost on the stone, go on accumulating; a ball of it, which my native inform- ant had used for the last 30 years, he supposed to contain above two taels of gold. The metal is separated from the wax by means of heat applied gra- dually, in such proportions as barely to cause the wax to pass off in the form of smoke: the residuum is then subjected to the process of amalgamation. Half of the gold thus obtained is dedicated in alms to the poor, or on religious offerings, at the shrine of some favorite Saint or Wali; generally to that of Miran Sahib at Nagore. The calculation of a Malay, long employed in the mines at Chimen- dros, makes the average quantity of gold produced from 40 lbs. of the pulverized stone, 24 grains of pure metal. Lumps of virgin gold, weighing from five to six ¢ae/s, have been found in the alluvial soil here and at Faon. In Jellye, a mass weighing upwards of a cattie has been discovered: this will appear trifling if placed in comparison with that which Reaumur mentions as having been shewn to the Royal Academy at Paris, weighing 448 oz. Hes affirms that when one of the highest mountains of Paraguay fell down, about 50 years ago, there were disco- vered in it pieces of gold weighing from two to fifty pounds each. 5 Prt) asso J 95 UPd ie Seal of Johdle, dated A. H. 1216. [The date on the seal is reversed, a mistake that we have not unfrequently observed on Indian coins with Persian inscriptions. As this is the last Essay on the Malacca States with which Lieut. NEweo.p will be able to favor us, it may be as well to point out where the preceding are to be found: Visit to. Mount 'Opliir, 2. c.cc.c-01.. vol. If. pi 497. Account of Naning, .... ate 4 IU, oy GOL SEV. aoe Ditto the four Men: angkabowe "States, san Uaveees 241. Ditto Sangie Ujong, ..<.secsevsecce 99 EVs 5; 537.—Eb.] 264 Tibetan Inscription on a Bhotian Banner. [May, II.—Interpretation of the Tibetan Inscription on a Bhotian Banner, taken in Assam, and presented to the Asiatic Society by Captain Boeie. By M. Atexanper Csoma Korost. [See Pl. V1. fig. 3.] [te a letter to the Secretary of the Asiatic Society ; see also Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, 4th May, 1836.] According to the request conveyed in your letter of the 30th April, I have translated the piece of magical superstition which you have faithfully transcribed from the Bhotian board. With exception of the salutation at the beginning and the conclusion, and a few terms in the middle, the whole is in the Tibetan language. The purport of it, as will be evident from the tenor of the translation, is, to obtain the favour and protection of several inferior divinities, to increase the prosperity, &c. of the person and family for whom the ceremony was performed, and this magical piece was erected or set up. It may be that the flag-staff, with the wooden board containing this inscription, was carried before the Tibetan chief in his march, and so used as an ensign ia war; but it is more probable that it belonged originally to the house top or terrace of the prince in Bhotan: for the houses of great personages in that country are generally decorated with such ensigns of victory at the four corners of the terraced roof. They are called in Tibetan 3Q'H A rgyal mtshan (ensign of victory), and always contain inscriptions of similar purport with this. In regard to the orthography of the piece, it frequently occurs in Tibetan writings and books, that the vowel signs are removed from their proper places, on account of the dependent letters of the line above ; several cases of this occur in your transcript. The intersylla- bic points at the end of a line are generally also omitted, except with the conjunction \&" which will also be remarked here. I have made a copy in Roman characters, and have also endeavoured to make a lite- ral translation: the words in Italics I cannot properly interpret. Om svasti, Pesgogneed by the Tibetians om soti, is rendered by them in their language wr Aya’ Wan’ 3a om bdé-legs-su gyur-chig : «« Oh may it please, may it be prosperous.” Inscription on the back of the wooden Board (fig. 3. Pl. V1.) 2 TT We si 7 a jax Qdsy ANN &5'5G" aA’ aay SN'AON'W EQGRa AQ" AX SN ar ay Aaa gt Da NNSA” YN" mS" Q@x. 1836.} Tibetan Inscription on a Bhotian Banner. 265 iy a BY aASM Lyq y WAG? AQ’ SN HAA ana nA N74 Vv a A QraG’ Ar a Near 4qq" Dr QEy YRr 4G" we ~ V BAN HAAN’ FG" QHy Haag’ Jara qq" a ~ 4 n BY NLS 9H" R'LG’ Ao'Q’ a QQ’ N'Q54 an Xr We isy SOV AVA NAN’ AAN'SS” YN x. v v a“ v ae v pa v “ ae t BLAM pp peier 1836.] On the Revolution of the Seasons. 281 chronological register of mythological times :—if the latter, the names of the reigning monarchs are omitted as immaterial, and the simple fact announced, “ in the year so and so, so many reigns ;”—but even this is conjectural, and unless errors have been committed in copying the figures, they do not run in any seeming order. The word sak- karak is the Talain rendering of the Sanscrit sakardj, year ; in Barmese written sakkarej: the terms Jré kun and nhan are unknown to my in- formant. A WS ° V.—On the Revolution of the Seasons. By the Rev. R. Everest. In the Journal of April 1235, I gave the result of a comparison of the amount of rain-fall at Calcutta, with different positions of the moon, as far as regards her declination. The averages shew that a greater quantity of rain fell on the days when the declination was large, say from 20° to 28°, than when it was small. Now, as there are some years in the lunar cycle in which the declination never reaches to 20°, it followed, as a probable, though not a necessary, inference, that in those years there would be a deficiency of rain. Shortly afterwards I met with this note, (HumBoxpr’s New Spain, translated by Biack, vol. di. page 86.) ‘‘ Toaupo pretends to be able to deduce from a great number of observations, that the very rainy years, and consequently the great inundations, return every 19 years according to the terms of the cycle of Saros—Rozier, Journal de Physique 1783.” The recurrence seems here spoken of as an exploded error. I have therefore used whatever means lay within my reach to obtain information as to what really has been the variation of the seasons in this country for along time back, and I will now state the results. But I must first premise respecting the note just quoted, that great inundations are not a necessary consequence of very rainy years. Should the rain fall regularly or equably, it will be less likely to occasion an inundation, than a much less quantity fallmg in a very short time. This will be more particularly the case in rocky and mountainous countries, where the channels are more easily choaked. In wide-extended plains, like those of the Nile and the Ganges, the rise of the river will form a more probable criterion of the amount of the rainy-season, though not a certain one. To revert, however, to the point proposed. The year 1829, was that of the minimum decli- nation of the moon, and from the early part of 1827, to the end of 1831, the declination is never stated in the Almanacks at above 20°. For this, or rather for a period somewhat more extended, viz. from 1826 to 1833, inclusive, we have the following facts recorded. 20 282 On the Revolution of the Seasons. [Mar, 1826, ae Great drought in N. 8S. Wales; Lieut. Brereton’s Travels. 1829, 1832. Public prayer by the Emperor of China for rain on account of extraordinary drought. Minimum of rain by Calcutta Register. 1833. Great drought through all the Upper Provinces, extending from Bundelkhand to Kashmir. Let us next turn to Mr. Kyp’s Register of the Height of the Hugli, (see Journal, April, 1835;) and as that has been objected to as evidence, I must be allowed to say a word in its defence. It is true that the level of the Hugli at Calcutta is affected by the tides in the Bay; but according to Mr. Kyp’s account, such an occurrence is very rare, an inundation from the sea not happening more than once in a century. Remembering then that the ninth year before 1829 or 1820, was that of the moon’s maximum declination, we find that the three or four years immediately before or after that were higher, on the average, than those farther off. Again, if we take 1811, the ninth year before 1820, and 18 years before 1829, we find that in the years nearest to it the river was lower than in those farther off. If we take the joint evidence of the height of the river, and the Calcutta register, we may assume that 1813 was the minimum year of rain; the 10th year after that or 1823, was the maximum year of rain: and in the ninth year again after that, or in 1832, came a minimum again; a period of 19 years, or a complete lunar cycle, having intervened between one minimum and its succeeding one. With a view of ascertaining whether such a variation held in other localities, E obtained from the collector’s office here, a memorandum of the character of the seasons as to rain for 21 years back. It was dictated from memory by an old native officer of the establishment, who would of course have the records of the office to refer to; and these in a climate where the crops depend so much upon the quantity of rain, would of themselves be a tolerable guide. It begins thus: 1812, great drought; 1813, moderate; 1814 to 1823, (both inclusive, a period of 10 years,) four years very abundant, four years, abundant, two years moderate. From 1824 to 1833, (both inclusive, a period of 10 years,) one year very abundant, two years abundant, three years moderate, three years, drought; one year, 1833, great drought. The seasons of great drought are here placed 21 years apart, instead of 19, as in the former case. Evidence of this kind, like that from the height of the river, though not free from objection, can hardly be deemed unworthy of credit, when it is corro- borated from other sources. There is one advantage, however, which 1836.] On the Revolution of the Seasons. 283 information of the two kinds above-mentioned, possesses over the results of a solitary rain-guage, however carefully kept, viz. that they are an index, imperfect as they may be, to what has happened over a large tract of country ; whereas the rain-guage can only inform us as to one particular spot, and rain-guages in general are so much affected by peculiarities of situation, that the results afforded by any one singly, must be considered as liable to doubt. To obviate this objection, I have placed together in a table all the different series procurable, of a date posterior to 1820, (see Table No. 1.) Most of them are to be found in the different Nos. of the Journal; and the localities are between Dacca, (E. Long. 90°,) and Delhi, (E. Long. 78°,) between Nagpur, (Lat. 21°, North,) and Delhi, 28° 40’ (N.) To these are added the observations at Madras, which I have obtained through the kindness of the Astronomer there; at Macao, in China, (Journal, July, 1832,) and at Edinburgh, (see BrewsteEr’s Philosophical Journal, passim.) In Table No. 2, are given the only three series that I have for the years between 1800 and 1821. The two first (Madras and Macao) are merely the preceding parts of the series given in Table 1. The last from Carlsruhe, in Sweden, is given in the Edinburgh Philoso-. phical Journal for 1821, there quoted from the Bibliotheque Universelle for November, 1820. The original appears to be given in French inches and lines, and I have not reduced them to English measure, as the doing so would not affect the question at issue, viz. whether some years of the lunar cycle are more rainy than others. Now to make a more correct comparison of the different years, we must first reduce the numbers given in Table 1. to a common mean. Thus, we have Dacca for eight years, (1827, 1828, 1829, 1830, 1831, 1832, 1833, 1834;) and the mean of the different sums given is 72°80 inches ; at Calcutta, for the same eight years, the mean is 60°37 inches. The difference between these, 12°43 inches, we may reasonably suppose to be owing to the localities. Subtract, therefore, from each item of the - Dacca series, the mean difference 12°43; the remainders will be reduced to the mean of Calcutta*. Proceed in a similar way with the other series, only of course where the climate is drier than that of Calcutta, the mean difference must be added, and not subtracted. The series in Table No. 2, may be included in the comparison by treating them in a similar way, and then considering them only accord- ing to their position in the lunar cycle. Thus, if we take 1821 for the first year of the cycle, 1803 (or the eighteenth year before that) may also be reckoned as the first year; 1802 and 1820, will of course be the last years. Place the whole in columns numbered according to their distance from 1802 and 1820, and an average may be taken * The more correct mode would be to multiply the Dacca series by on —Ep. 202 284 On the Revolution of the Seasons. (May, of the whole, as in Table, No. 3. From this it appears that the average of nine years nearest the maximum is 66°34 inches, and of nine years nearest the minimum, 61°21 inches, making a dif- ference of 5°13, or nearly sth of the whole between the two periods. If it be objected, that such a difference is too trivial to be decisive, we may answer that the difference shewn in the table is less than the real one. In all the series, except those of Dacca and Macao, a quan- tity has been added to bring them to the mean of Calcutta, and of course where two quantities differ, and a third quantity is added to each, they are brought nearer to a ratio of equality*. Secondly, if we consider each series separately, (see Tables 1. and 2,) we shall find that each confirms the opinion of the years of ma- ximum declination being the most rainy, except the Macao one, in which the reverse holds good. Thus the average of 1812, 1813, 1814, and 1815, (four years near the minimum,) is 80°50 inches. That of 1816, 19, 20, 21, 22,23, 24, (seven years about the maximum,) is 61°46. Again, that of 1825, 26,27, 28, 29, 30, 31, (seven years about the mini- mum,) is 71°00 inches. So that this guage, as well as the others, favours the idea of a recurrence contemporaneous with the recurrence in the lunar cycle. We may here remark, that the idea of certain localities reciprocating, or experiencing at the same time contrary variations of climate, appears, at first sight, more probable than that the quantity of precipitation over the whole globe should be abundant for a series of years, and then deficient, the great cause of evaporation, viz. the heating power of the sun, remaining all the while the same. It will be noticed, that among the series are two from northern Europe (Edinburgh and Carlsruhe). The inference might have been drawn without them, but they were added, as being the only others of any length I had at hand, to complete the cycle. Notwithstanding the testimony of the Swedish guage, it is very doubtful whether such a variation as is there shewn is general over Europe. I say so: First. Because of the way in which the idea is treated in the note from Humsoutpt above quoted. Secondly. From the silence of modern writers in meteorology respecting it. Thirdly. What English registers I have been able to examine (and they are for short periods, not above three or four years) do not shew a preponderance of rain towards the maximum declination of the moon, but rather the reverse ; so that, from that, as well as from other sources of information, we might conjecture the variations there would rather agree with those of the Macao guage, than of the Indian ones. In naming the places visited, either just before, or after the year 1829, by drought, the following was omitted: ‘‘ During the three * This would have been obviated by following the course mentioned in the note, page 283.—Ep. 1836.] On the Revolution of the Seasons. 285 years prior to 1834, there had been a complete drought, which had brought a famine upon these islands, and, in consequence, some thousands of the inhabitants had died.”—Sketches of Cape de Verd Islands.—United Service Journal, July, 1835. As these islands lie in a latitude between that of Calcutta and Madras, the fact, is inter- esting, but I have no accounts to refer to for the state of things during that period, in the intervening countries of Egypt, Abyssinia, Arabia, anc Persia. Lastly. It will be objected, that a regularly ascending and descend- ing series has not been made out. This is true; but as the number of series from which to take the averages has increased, so has the tendency to it become more appa- rent. There is one circumstance, however, which may serve to prevent a regular ascent and descent from ever becoming perceptible, viz. the place ofthe perigee. Having been lately engaged in an examina- tion of barometric heights with regard to this, I have noticed that the average amount of variation from the mean, either in excess or defect, is greater about the time of perigee, as it also is about that of maximum declination. Now there are some years in which the day of perigee coincides about the solstices with that of maximum declination, and these years are usually the extreme ones, both of moisture and drought. I subjoin a sample. Perigee Perigee Perigee Perigee Perigee and Max. | and Max. and Max. and Max. and Max. NorthDecl.| South Decl | South Decl.| South Decl. | North Decl. 1814-1815.) 1818-1819.) 1822-1823. | 1826-1827. 1831-1832. Calcutta, (4:2 55°42 50°25 Madras, | 32.27 77°08 27°62 26°61 88°67 20°07 Macao, | 95°70 95°70 51°80 The three numbers in the Calcutta guage are, one, the highest, and two the lowest up to 1833 ; the six numbers in the Madras guage are the four minima and two maxima noted up to the same period. Of the three numbers from the Macao guage, one only is an extreme, -but the other two are very large either way. Some other circum- stances, also, would lead to the belief, that peculiar localities receive the changes both of drought and moisture earlier than others. Thus the last drought was at its height in Bengal in 1832, and also at Madras; but it did not reach either Delhi or the Nilgherries to the westward until 1833. This of course introduces a new source of confusion. There is one other way of attempting to trace the variation of the seasons, and that is by a comparison of the prices of corn in different years at different places ; but this must be deferred for the present. [May, On the Revolution of the Seasons. 286 | "+ | t+ 168.18/19-92/90-TE] OF-6T s2-6tlot-ce 00-1% |09-12|00-92|09-¢2]00-92| ** |09-92 oz-szlor-or 00-82|00‘F|08-c¢| ** ‘omasyreg 06-9|00-6¢] °° | °° |08-8F/0¢.r9|oz-cojos-rsjog-zot] “7 fo] cp pt pp | Sa oe fee Ae ee Pee aueoa 60-02|29-22/80-22/z2-£9|20-0F/S¢.g¢|22-ze|s9-crl 7 | tof ct | tt | tt 188-bo/9p-19]T2-Te. TT-TE}OT-99} °° | ce [oot ‘seapeny — ee oe ff ee | OZ8L GIST ISI8L IZi8t I9IST ISISI IFIST '€T8l 'ZT8L ‘LIST 'OL8T '608T 'SO8T 1Z08T ‘YOST 'SO8T IPOST '€O8T IZOST ‘LO8T oe | | “IZSL 07 snoraaud suvah YZ ur saanjd quasaffip yo uazjnf aany yoy, moy fo suns jonuup ayz buinays "SON WT1AV, “sofesoae ay} wo.y parjddns uaeq aaey pue ‘aarjoagjap Aqyerjred ore stoysidey eIyNI[eD oy} YSl193se Ue YIIM payer steak 94} U[—“FLON a - ES OG 68.7% | 02-SE | 98-62 | €2-GSS | 69-6E | L£Z-CL | ZF-26 | F9-02 = oe ke sees Ca S.inq arp | ote oe Ome "eg 0£-SZ | 06-2¢ | 0€-6S | 09-FOT] 08-1¢ , 08-62 | O€-F2Z | 09-89 | O2-SG | 09-€9 | 09-89 | °° °° ° +> Sova 9Z-ZE\ZT-OF|S6-9E| 20-06 | O€-0F | IP-FE | 60-ZE | 68-2ZE | £9-88 | 12-09 | F6-S¢ 16-€¢ 19-93 | 08-89 | GI-ZP | “°° °° °° Sseapeyy 07.47\¢8.9¢] 1-FI oe aie ee ee al ee vie aie oe oe ee ee pigae (oP <2) erry a e =° i. x Ch-GP | 82-93 | GZL-EE | €8-6PF “% fa Ss at “ae a "'* {oodyeqng ee ee as ee 08-F9 00-Z¢ 09-9F 02-1¢ ee ee ee ee ee ee ee OO O20 20 OLAS oe ‘* a7 PILE 1€-G9 00-€€ | $36-0¢ 19-9P 66-ES 19-¢9 hey Mg = <= ee? alta aS) ‘a10d3eny re “* 109-EF| 89-LG | 26-69 | 8ZL-9F te “a i = a a ae a os seers felooouRg ** 190-89/08-29} 02:99 | 00-68 | 06-66 | 08-08 | 08-9F | 00-%2 | 2, = y = = eres Wager TYG | 0G-G8/£Z-8919&-091 GZ-0S | 8Z-8¢ | b6-S9 | EL-6G | 62-2G | 9S-F9 | oP-GG “ad 0€-29 | 02-L2 gt: ne seco sees heqinaleg GESl | PES] SESt] sesr | Test | OF8t | 628t | SZ8L | Ze8t |! %928T | GOST | xPo8l | ¥€C8L |! Cc8l | TZ8t 'OZBL ours sunah quaiafip up saovjd guasasip up uapjnf aavy joy}; saya um mony fo sung jonuup ay7 burmayg ‘L ‘ON Wavy, 287 *(a10deny Jo oyeunrty) *GEz ‘T] [OA “00g Sy [eUINOL 998) FI] JeaX ay} 10J St SyoyouAg OY} UAT POpHpoUr OM} BY} JO ‘ON 4SLT OUT, » ¢1-C eo ee ee eer oe eer ee ee ee ee se oe es eo eos ee ee oe es oe ‘g0ua.10gIq 16-19 “**""" “pr “eT ‘ar ‘Tt ‘ot ‘6 ‘8 ‘2 ‘9 “tt t‘sawak jo oSesoay bE 99 *""**" “BT Zt ‘OT ‘GT ‘Gp fe {3 ST ot *fsapak jo advioay €8-€6 89.69|89-19 126-89 €2-8S)/E1-29 18¢,¢9]¢T.29|82-E9|b2-65]T9-29|ST-69] °° °°" ** ‘edeseny | F8-69 | 1-98 |02?22/92-12106-19)¢8-2¢ _—_——~- | -———— | —_—-.. b6-69 | FO-1Z |F0-091F2-49|F7-69)F9-26 —— OO Oe | | FE-LClFE.£9 0C-6S%. |¥8-6S\$2.F91F2-€9 |PS,F9!] °° 1F8-69'F6-991FE-89|Fs-99| “°' *faqnAsping ¥ 8-69 06-9F 10€-€5109.86|08-F |08-€2108-29/09-29 02-6F|09-25|09-29 i Hiseee es Copan 0Z-68!0¢-SPIOF-LOL ee ee ee ee ae oe | ee ee ee Ge.£¢|8G-25]69-L¢ |28-PS| 21.6] ¢6-S01'66°2212z-82/6F-06'G68-£F 121-92 |0F-F9 \ ar £6-6PF)€6-29, *" Aes “" 1 ** 10G.12/62-82|6F-8F|68-8h|88-68 ** 1€6-89}0€-69 |96-€9!¢¢.6¢]69-99 |ZE°6F1ZS-9¢]FZ-86| °° ug i 06-6 | 00-¢¢ | °° 3 08-2F 06-86 = is “" (PS PElSh.26)23-P £6.28 06-FF ,98-F6/00-18/Ge-2¢,€8-02 °° *SBIpeyy ee ee ee ‘ysanquipoy On the Revolution of the Seasons. 6 “7 |S We0562/8t-28lep-6e| °° ‘ee 1B. ae | ae, oe eee ee ee oe on oe oe oe oe ee.29 9T-1S 09-8¢ IZ-L9 e° es ee ee ae ee eeeee ‘ssodyayqnygy oe oe ee oe oe oe oe 16-O8/11-8F |TZ-29 1€-LF oe oe oe ee oe oe oe o Bee Ges Sane { 98-68 GT-PPI9E-ZLiS0-OF 10€-2G/99.¢q|F0-19 99°cZ| ** J te | ss [ te | ce | cect ttt ferodgeyy oe oe oe Bic: ** irer¢lep-rolee-ezlec-oc | c- On oo a on ee oe on ais sere es looong ‘ < 1, [Oo [hSeGS]£8-08122-PS/£9-92/29-18 (ZE-89|Le.peiZS-19 | *° | ts Jott tose poss [ose | tt etttss sseoong os 2 “*_[0$+48/€2-89}9€-09|92-06)/82-89/2-€9 |£2-65/6Z-2¢/9¢-F9 |zH'Ge] °° loe-zo]oz-z2Z| “° | oo | Tot eaanoqeg 81 Al (OL ASRS peels (elo) Tal elle | 56 S| ce be ao ag leh Go We Gai T "D)4nI]0) fo wvaut ay? 0) paanpas burag ajoym ay] pun ‘ajahg ayy fo ysuuf ay7 so uayng buag (‘uormvuyoog wnueny fo 70Y} 4azfo yrau 98047 40) 1E8I PUD COB sumah ayz ‘aahg wvunT ay) fo Sivah juasafip ur saonjd juasafip ur pyaf yoy; ung fo sarrzuonb aayninduos ay, bumayg "€ ‘ON a1avy 1836.] 288 Discovery of Fossil Bones in Western India. (May, VI.—Recent Discovery of Fossil Bones in Perim Island, in the Cambay Gulph. [Read at the meeting of the Ist June.] The following notice of the interesting discovery of this new deposit of fossil bones has been obligingly communicated to me in a letter from the Baron Hucen, dated at Bombay the 17th April. Although its pub- lication anticipates the arrival of the specimens themselves, it would be an injustice to science and to Dr. Lusu to delay for a moment so important an announcement. The acknowledgments of the Society are due both to the discoverer and to the Baron Hues, for the preference given to our museum for their preservation. I hope the circum- stance may lead to fresh exertions in the valley of the Narbada, where doubtless much still remains to be explored.—J. P. Sec. “* You will receive shortly a few fossil bones from Perim Island, in the Cambay Gulph. Dr. Lusu has the merit to have found them, but with- out exploring them at all. I had no time to go over from Surat, where Dr. Lusu showed methem. I requested him to send them to you through Mr. Waruen. One is an imperfect bone of a mastodon or elephant— another the head of a boar unknown, and one belonging, I think, to a ‘ Rongeur ;’ but what induces me particularly to wish them at Calcutta is, that there is a horn in its matrix, which, connected as these fossils must necessarily be with those of the Narbada, might belong to that species of Bos mentioned in your Journal: it is decidedly not of a Buffalo. I was so anxious to reach Bombay, that I could not possibly go to Perim myself. I did however manage to send a boat over; and I received yesterday 41 pieces of fossil bones : the greater part belonging to the mastodon latidens, of which the teeth, in a perfect state, did not leave any doubt ; some of the bones are of an immense size, one frac- tured piece of the tusk measuring from the centre to the outside of the circle 5% which gives 103 inches diameter, or 34 inches in circumfer- ence : some of them are in the same hard matrix you will see imbedding the horn ; some evidently rolled by the sea. There are some curious teeth among the fragments I possess, and two triangular shaped pieces similar to the horn of a rhinoceros : the teeth are however too large to belong to that animal. I may perhaps send the most curious specimens round to you; butI am at this moment too much pleased with my dis- covery to part with them. It appears that the island abounds with fossils, and it is a clear proof either that the Narbada must have found only lately its way to the Cambay gulph, or that some other revolution must have 1836.] Discovery of Fossil Bones in Western India. 289 separated the little island from Kattiwadr. Having no opportunity to leave this for either Persia or the Cape, I may still perhaps be able to go to Perim and Gogo, to trace the fossils on the main land of the peninsula.” HvuGEL. Since the above was set in type, and just before striking off the sheet, I have been favored with the subjoined additidnal information from a new correspondent, Lieut. Futtyamus, which I hasten to make known through the Journal, while I venture to assure him the thanks of the Society for his projected exertions to enrich its museum. Who will not become an enthusiast amid such discoveries? It is but four years since the existence of strata containing fossil bones was denied in India, or at least supposed to be confined to Assam and Ava. We are proud to think that the Journal has been in some measure the humble means of stimulating the search which has been thus crowned with success in so many quarters.—Eb. «« On my arrival in this part of the country in the month of April, I heard a report that some bones, turned into stones, as the natives called them, had been discovered on the Island of Perim in the Gulph of Cambay, and in latitude 21° 39. I lost no time in going there to see if the report of fossil remains was correct, and although I do not pretend to be a geologist, or to know much about fossil osteology, still I consider my labours most amply repaid, by my first visit to the island; for I obtained a most perfect specimen of the teeth of the mastodon ; one also that I think belongs to the palzotherium ; and the femur, vertebre, and many other bones belonging to mammiferous animals now extinct. Being well aware from the perusal of your scientific Journal, how highly, and I might say justly, remains of this sort are prized, I shall take the liberty of forwarding to the Society for their acceptance a box containing specimens of these fossil remains. The formation in which they were discovered is a tertiary conglo- merate, composed of nodules of sandstone, indurated clay, anda small proportion of silex, cemented together by a yellow clay ; most of the fossil remains have been exposed to view, by the sea having washed off the upper part of the matrix, but still they are firmly attached to the rock, and the only way they were to be obtained, without breaking, was by stone-cutters carefully working all round them ; large quantities of petrified wood were lying about in every direction. The following is a list of the strata as they appeared to me, com- mencing from the surface, viz. lst. Loose sand and earth. 2nd. Conglomerate, composed of sandstone, clay and silex. 2 P 290 Discovery of Fossil Bones in Western India. (May, 8rd. Yellow and whitish clay, with nodules of sandstone. 4th. Conglomerate as above. 5th. Siliceous sandstone with a few fossils. (Calcareous.—Eb.) 6th. Conglomerate. 7th. Indurated clay more or less compact. 8th. Conglomerate, in which the best, and I may say nearly the whole of the fossil remains have been discovered. The deepest strata of conglomerate are about 3 feet, but they gene- rally do not run more than 18 inches to 2 feet, and for the most part lie horizontal. On the western side of the island, however, the strata are much disturbed, being fractured, and dipping at an acute angle to the east; on the southern end of the island, sandstone appears below the fossil stratum of conglomerate, dipping to the north at an angle of 25 degrees. There is a tradition among the inhabitants of Gogah, that the island of Perim was formerly joined to the main land, by means of a stone bridge, which has, in the course of time, been destroyed; remains of some buildings are still to be seen, running into the sea in the shape of piers, &c. It must have been a very stupendous undertaking, for there is a channel now between the land and the island of the depth of 75 fathoms, and nearly 500 yards in width. On the island there are the remains of a considerable fort, and buildings of Hindu architecture, for I observed in an old temple that had tumbled down, the broken figure of Buddha rudely sculptured in a sitting posture ; also the remains of a large tank wall, and bauli. Among the other curiosities of the island are two elephants cut out in the rock ; they are covered now by the sea except at very low water; one is finished, and I should say, measured about 10 feet long by 8 or 9 feet high. Capital fresh water is procurable on the island, 20 feet below the surface; it is found below the stratum of sandstone. I will here enumerate the varieties of specimens of fossil remains, which I think have been found. Teeth of mammoth; ditto mastodon, paleotherium, hippopotamus, or rhinoceros, and a number of other smaller animals. The head of some large saurian animal; part of a tortoise; ditto of elephant’s tusks. Femora, vertebra, and other large bones ; one shell in siliceous sandstone, and the half of a deer’s foot. With this vast variety before me, it requires a person much better qualified than myself in the art to say to what particular animal the different specimens belong, and I therefore forward them with the hopes of hearing the opinion of the scientific in Calcutta. It has occurred to me, on reading over the Journal for Aug. 1834, that the conglomerate in which the fossil remains in the valley of the 1836.] Synopsis of Siwalik Fossils. 291 Nerbudda have been discovered, is very nearly similar to that in which the Perim fossil are found ; and if my conjectures are correct, we shall be able to trace the formation along the whole line of the Nerbudda valley and the greater part of the Kattiwar coast. Should such be the case, and I have but little doubt in my own mind that it will be so, what a vast field has thus been thrown open, for discovery and research ; I still hope to see my conjectures fulfilled with regard to finding coal in the Tajpipla or Kattiw4r range of hills before the lapse of many years. Not wishing to take the credit to myself of having been the first person to discover these remains, I should mention that I believe Dr. Lusu was the first ; he having, I understand, found a tusk of some ani- mal on the island. During a second visit to the island, I was accom- panied by three other gentlemen, who have most kindly given mi, permission to forward any part of the specimens so obtained, that Ik think may be acceptable. Doubtless on further research and on breaking up the stratum, more perfect specimens of bones will be discovered : for I must mention that all those sent were covered at high water, the highest point of the island not being above 60 feet higher than high water mark; the length of the island is about 14 miles to 2 miles, and in breadth 4 to 2 mile ; large sand hills are formed on the south-west side, and it is inhabited by about 12 houses of coolies, who cultivate bajri there during the monsoon. A light-house has been established there for some years, and kept up by the Government, of which a serang and five lascars have charge: the expenses are defrayed by levying a duty on all boats passing. Should I be able to make any further discoveries either in fossil remains, or as to the formation of the Kattiwar hill, I shall trouble you with a further communication ; that is to say, should you consider the present worthy of occupying any part of the pages of your ‘inter- esting Journal. Gro. FunusameEs.” VII.—Table of Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Genera, in the Dddtpur Collection. By Lieuts. W. E. Baker and H. M. Duranp, Engineers. The following table is intended to illustrate the proportion in which the respective genera have been found to occur, and is deduced from the specimens in our collection. The results might have been presented in a more simple form by confining the table to the two last columns ; but as information with regard to the number of perfect and imperfect specimens on which 2p 2 292 Synopsis of the Siwalik Fossils (May, the entries admitted into these columns are based may be deemed interesting, the following headings under which the specimens were counted off are also given. Craniums, which title includes all specimens showing a considerable portion of the head. Upper Jaws. Allotted to such palates as possess either one or both lines of molars complete. Lower Jaws. Under this heading are numbered those lower jaws which are perfect, and also such as, though wanting the symphisis, present the line of molars complete. The shape of the lower jaws of the ruminantia renders them very liable to fracture immediately in front of the molars; accordingly, a great number of half jaws are found, which, being deprived of their symphisis, afford no means of aecurately joining together such of them as may have belonged to the same individual. Some pairs may therefore have been overlooked; an error nearly inevitable, and which would account for the apparent excess of lower jaws in proportion to the upper. Fragments of Upper and of Lower Jaws. Within these columns, as the heading imports, fragments of maxillaries, containing one, two, or more molars, and also those detached molars, the maxillaries of which are not in the collection, have been ranged. As the table enters into no detail of species, the latest discoveries which it comprises may be cursorily noticed. These are a very perfect cranium and lower jaw of a species of Vulpes ; an equally perfect cra- nium and lower jaw of a species of the genus Gulo; also an addi- tion to the Pachyderma, consisting of the anterior half of a head, of which the posterior half was unfortunately broken off; and owing to the carelessness of the excavators, none of the fragments have hitherto been recovered. The lower jaw is locked within the upper; so that the exterior surface, and the outline of the upper molars can alone be examined ; the characteristics of the teeth being thus imperfectly deve- loped, and the occiput wanting altogether, the specimen has been inserted in the table under the general title ‘‘ Cuvierian Pachyderma :”’ by which, however, there is no intention of conveying the idea that it has been identified with any of the Pachydermata of the Paris basin ; for although it affords some analogies both to the Paleotherium and to the Anoplotherium, its essential peculiarities are sufficiently remark- able to cause it to be separated from either genus. In the present early state of the search, the accompanying list can only be considered as an approximation to the relative numerical pro- portions in which the different fossil genera existed. Viewed as such, it tends to prove that species of the genera Elephas, Mastodon, Hippo- potamus, Cervus, Antilope, and Bos, were abundant; that the genera 4 1836.] in the Dadipur Museum. 293 Rhinoceros, Equus, Sus, Canis, and Hyena, were of less frequent occurrence, and that the Camelide and the Sivatherium were rare. The habits of these genera may be adduced as reasons for modifying this general summary of the state of a former zoological period. Nore.—Having been favored with the perusal of the forthcoming papers on the Hippopotamus, in the Asiatic Society’s Transactions, it becomes requisite to remark, that the specimen placed under the genus Anthracotherium is the same which in a note at page 59, is considered by Dr. Fatconer as belonging to a new genus, Cherotherium. In our opinion, it is a new species of Anthracothe- rium, under which we have accordingly numbered it. Mr. Dawe has brought to our notice a specimen in his possession, which consists of the right half of a lower jaw belonging to the Hippopotamus Dissimilis of Dr. FatconrR and Captain CauTiry. It is valuable as showing two molars which have suffered but little detrition, and which, instead of the tapering conical collines, with summits close to each other, as in the large Hippopotami, has its colline apices widely separated, the tapering taking place from the point of contact of their bases outwards: the outer side of each colline is nearly perpendicular, and from the manner in which the sloping and the upright surfaces meet, the colline top loses the mammillar aspect, assuming a flattened almost trenchant form. The wear indicated is the same as that describad in the paper above alluded to. Table of Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Genera. to o > ei arate! ala z ie a | z HlB/Ele |Boizie Class. Order. Genus. E AS |¢ Ae Remarks. AAR Earle e\sl2les|2.2 8/28 m i o|c ol lanl cc La Sel Ls Mammalia, |Fere, Ursus? ....{ 0} 0} 1} Oo} O}| Oo 1 Canis,. .. 3] 0) 6] 2 eS rez Hyena, . 2| 0} 4| 9 | 15 /11) 19 EMIS S cid pipes 2; 0} 0} O 2) 2) 2 Gutor sy, sre. | ONO) ee Ge to end Glires, Musas JAE NOLL! Ol) OF)> axa) 4 Hystrix,....| 0) J} 0) 1 2h Pachyderma,|Elephas,....| 9] 6/22] 46 | 31 |61| 53 56 doubtful Mastodon,..{ 3| 6/28] 39 | 31 (43| 59 | ¢ mutilated frag- ments omitted. Hippopota- | mus, .. .. {11/14/20} 21 | 43 [46 63 SUSse teaver ole Olea ay pueda 120 : fis. D), lik Obs tnd Jo jak od ie ? 0| o] 0} 2) Of} 2 Oo } Cuvierian. Anthracothe- ENP) cot |) Oly 8}, O}5 0 Vo Ole Rhinoceros, | 3} 3} 7) 18 | 6 |24| 13 Equus, ....| 0; 0] 2) 20 | 14 |20) 16 Sivatherium,| 0} 9) 1/ 8 | S| 8 9 Ruminantia, |Camelus, ...} 1] 0} 1} 1] 2] 2) 3 Cervus, ....} 3/31/17] 25 | 84 [59,101 |) Many doubtful Antilope,....| 8)18)35) $ | 45 |34) S0 \ fragments not Bos, ......| 2| 3/12] 35 | 25 }40] 37 counted. Reptilia, Sauria, Gariala,....| 0} 0) 0} 0 | O | O| O {5 fragments. Crocodile, ..| 0} 0} 0} O | O |} 0} O |3 fragments. 5 whole—many Chelonia, |Emys, ....| | 0} 0) O| O] Oo} O fragments of bothEmys and Trionix Pisces, 3} 0, O| O} 0} 3} O Déddizpur, April 27th, 1836. 994 Note on the teeth of the [May, VIII.—Note on the Teeth of the Mastodon a dents etroites of the Siwalik Hills. By Captain P. T. Cautuny. PJ. XI. [Read at the meeting of the Ist June. | Without further preface I refer the reader to the 1st volume of the Osemens fossiles, page 268. Figures 1 and 2, plate 4, under the head of “‘ Divers Mastodons.”’ These drawings were presented to Cuvier by M. Favusas, and the fossil was found near Asti in Upper Italy. Cuvier merely alludes to this fossil as one of the varieties into which the true Mastodon a dents etroites passes by a greater subdivision and an irregularity of position of the mamille ; the proportions of length to breadth of the tooth retaining their full and perfect character. By comparing the accompanying drawings with the figures above alluded to, there can be no demur, I imagine, in identifying the Siwalik variety of Mastodon now under review with the Asti fossil. It remains therefore simply to note the peculiarities in form of the tooth : al- though it may be a point of consideration hereafter, whether, as the character of the tooth is so marked, and its peculiarities so rigidly adhered to throughout the whole of the remains found in the Siwé4liks, it may not be placed under a sub-genus, that of ‘‘ angustidens,” with the specific denomination of M. Sivalensis. There is no cortical substance or crusta petrosa ; the tooth consist- ing of enamel and ivory only, the former being very thick and mas- sive, as is normal in the mastodons. The coronal surface consists of a double line of conical and obtusely pointed mamillz : those on the external side being in most cases per- fect, whilst those on the inner side are divided by a fissure or fissures into two or three irregularly formed obtuse points. These mamille are not, as in the true Mastodon angustidens, placed transversely or at right angles with the line of surface, but meet each other from right to left alternately, so that the furrow on one side is interrupted by the mamilla on the other ; and the mamillz on the whole line of tooth lock into each other in the same way that two serrated edges opposed to each other might be supposed to do, were they placed in contact. The outer surface of the enamel is smooth, and the space or furrow between each mamilla both on the external and internal surface is marked by a small tubercle, the presence of which however does not appear to be constant. The surface of the tooth of the lower jaw wears obliquely and out- wardly on the grinding surface, as in the ruminants, in which respect it differs entirely from the elephants. The wear of the coronals is marked at the commencement by irre- gularly lobed figures, which, as the detrition advances, become confus- 1836.] Mastodon Angustidens. 295 ed, and gradually unite, until the mamillz are worn away entirely, when the tooth is left with merely a surface of ivory surrounded by enamel. The drawings are intended to represent the tooth at these diflerent stages; from the state of germ, to the old and worn down tooth, shewing the intermediate state of detrition at different ages. Pl. xi. Fig. 1. Fragment of tooth in germ, with the enamel on one of the mamille fractured. Fig. 2. A very perfect molar of a young but adult animal, the front surface being moderately worn, and the rear portion in the state of germ. This is the right molar of the lower jaw. The length of this tooth is 9°2 inches or ‘234 metres, and the breadth measured on the base or lower bulge of the mamille 2°95 inches or -074 metres ; it consists of six pair of points or mamill, with apparently (as the fossil is slightly fractured at this point) a bilobed talon in the rear. The coronal surface is here shewn. Fig. 3. An internal view of the same tooth. Fig. 4. An external view of the same, exhibiting the obliquity of wear on the coronal surface. Fig. 5 and 6. Fragment of a tooth ofa greater age than the preceding. Fig. 7 and 8. Fragment of tooth with jaw attached ; this is a portion of the left molar of the lower jaw of an animal of the same age as that represented in figs. 5 and 6, distinctly shewing the cup-like cavities formed by the detrition and gradual junction of the ma- mille: the obliquity of wear towards the outer surface is here very distinctly marked. Fig.9 and 10. Fragment of a tooth of the same age as the pre- ceding. The three last specimens have belonged to animals of nearly the same age; the mamillz are much worn, and we see the gradual oblite- ration of their independent hollows, reducing the coronal surface to the appearance exhibited in figs. 11 and 12. Fig. 11. Shews the detrition at an intermediate state between figs. 9 and 10, and fig. 12. The posterior portion of this specimen still retains the encircling lines of enamel on the worn down points, whilst the portion in front has arrived at its last stage of wear. Fig. 12. May be considered as a representation of the tooth in its final state of detrition, when all marks of the mamillated form of crown is obliterated, and nothing remains but an outer border of enamel encircling a deep internal hollow of ivory. I wish to draw attention particularly to the alternating position of the mamillz, which I consider to be the chief specific character, and which is distinctly marked throughout the whole series ; and, referring 296 Meteorological Register kept at Bangalore. [May, again to the Asti fossil as figured in Cuvisr, I think that a clear iden- tification is established. As my object in writing this note is simply to point out the dis- tinctive characters uf the teeth of the mastodon a dents etroites, which have been found in the Siwalik hills, it is unnecessary to make any further remarks until we can enter upon a general description of the fossil mastodons and elephants of these hills ; noting however, that from the half of a lower jaw of this species, with its ramus attached, which is now in my possession, we may look forward to some pecu- liarities of form, differing very materially not only from the fossil and existing elephant, but also from the other species of mastodons. Up to this period I am only aware of the discovery of two species of mastodons in the SiwAlik hills; namely, the variety of M. angus- tidens which is the subject of this note, and the M. Elephantoides of Clift. The former is very rare, and the latter in very great abundance. 1X.—Meteorological Register kept at Bangalore. By Dr. J. Movat, Medical Surgeon, 13th Dragoons. If the accompanying meteorological table, kept at Bangalore, for the year 1835, be of any interest, you are at liberty to make any use of it you please. It has been drawn up for the medical reports, which I am in the habit of transmitting to the heads of my department, and the transcription of which is all the trouble it now gives. The original table, as kept every two hours for the entire of 1834 and 1835, are also at your service ; but they are two voluminous and bulky, I should think, for any useful purpose. The column of monthly average was obtained by adding the state of the thermometer, kept every two hours for the entire 24 hours ; dividing this by 12, gave the average for each day. These added together for the month, and divided by the number of days in the month, give the monthly average noted in the table. The wards of the hospital are visited by one of the medical pupils or apprentices every two hours from 10 Pp. Mm. to 4 a. m., whose duty it is to give medicine, &c. to the sick, and, at the same time, to mark the thermometer. The corporal of the guard, when relieving the sentries, is responsible, and sees this duty performed ; and, in the day time, the hospital serjeant, apothecaries, pupils on duty, &c. mark it, the rest of the 24 hours; so that every source of error is endeavoured to be avoided. The thermometer marked S., or side, is fixed on the end of a shelf, some inches from the wall, and by its position, screened from the influence of the glare or reflected heat; the other, marked C. or centre, is suspended from the centre of the room, about seven feet from the floor, and the general agreement of the two instruments isa pretty good guarantee for their accuracy. The apartment is the surgery of the Ae * ae bg A - , Harti a A; Vie Jour As. $00. Wa PIC. del. 18335. ns 0 us ni 0h Wiss Tip hh wast Thy Use i ase gs) PEAT TH] YEG Yi Z Se SS aS eS ' ee — _—_— ey" st) any Hal \ WS Wy Wy) mit) ' ht ENG i BONG » iy Hf 47m Nt SS 1836. Meteorological Register kept at Bangalore. 297 hospital, 12 feet square, with a door facing the east and a window to the north. The former always, and the latter generally, kept open. ‘There are also two small ventilators on the west side, always admitting a circulation of air. The other table is from Sir. J. F. W. Herscuer’s suggestion of meteorological observations, &c. kept on four fixed days in each year* and the thermometer, &c. marked every hour. Abstract of Two-hourly Meteorological Register, kept at Bangalore, 1835. S. or Side. C. or Centre. Months. ay 2 a [tion Dec., ie Ann. Avg., an every 2 hours, day and night. Monthlyaverage of Ther., taken | ~1 o ~I - 69.93 79.19 74.39 ——. oe Barometer. Rain Ya a 3S we c ° . ape ones Be Ble Wind. Remarks. ee slee (sole alae an S19 = 442)/45 |42 |a5 [5 6 ope 27.10|27.00|27.05 Eas- {Weather delightfully cool ol terly.! and bracing—some foggy mornings, and after the 72.50 24th, cloudy days. 72.00 27.75|26.98]27.36]..|..]Eas- {Weather cool and pleasant 73.75 terly.j| —sun getting powerful. 80.50 26.95|26.88)/26.91].. |35]Ky. orjMornings cool, days hot, 2 Sy. and at times close and oppressive—one shower 78.50 of rain. 78.37 26,95|26.87/26.91} 4/16 Ey. orjGenerally close, hot, and : S. E.f sultry—the air cool. th.Wy: 78.50 78.50 26.85)/26.79|26.82 Sy 26.79/26.81'26.80] 3 26.75|26.78 26.76] 5 ~126.78|26.42 26,60} 4 26.$2/26,77|26.S413 26.84|26.78)\26.81] 5, 71.371. 92} 1 71.50 26.95}26.89)26.9 26.96/26.90/26.93}.. rain. Weather cool and pleasant, hazy or cloudy, with fre- quent showers, and some falls of rain. Weather cool and hazy, with heavy showers, and pleasant. Weather cold and chilly, with constant showers, and some heavy falls of rain. 97)Wy.th.twWeather cool, clouded, and V. andj pleasant—several heavy By. showers of rain. 10}®y. & tWeather cool and pleasant, N. E.{ with some heavy falls of rain. 24)Wy. ssiWy. 13;Wy. Co aVic 30/Ey. orlweather delightful, cold, N. E.f bracing and generally cloudy,some foggy morn- ings, and at times very cold, *-IN. E.} Weather cold,bracing, and & Ey.] delightfully pleasant and 73.85}26.95 |G2.82 26.89}44 invigorating. 02 N. B. The Thermometers marked every two hours—the Barometer at 10 A. M. and 3 P. M. * This daily register of the Barometer, at 10 a. M. and 4 P. M., would be par- ticularly acceptable, provided the instrument was a good one, which we almost ear could not be the case. (See below.)—Ep, 2a 298 Meteorological Observations, &c. [May, X.—Meteorological Observations, taken every hour, at Bangalore, in the Hospital of H. M. 13th Dragoons, from 6 a. M. of the 2\st to 6 P. mM. of the 22nd March, 1836, inclusive, in conformity with Sir W. Her- schel’s instructions. ES ea] ed . Hours of Ob-|° & servation. & 3 =| 3 2 oe onl March, 1836. 6 A. M. 2'st,/27,01 7 GUCCOR ees ret mer OL Saito... 4 O02 9 ditto,....| ,01 TO) ditto,.....)|) 0) LIMAIGEO Se es 1 OO 12 Noon, ..| ,01 1P.M ,00 2 ditto, ,00 3 ditto, ,00 4 ditto,....|26;95 Bho yeas le AOS 6 ditto,....| ,95 7 GUELO sae eiee! 95) 8 ditto,....| ,95 9 ditto,....| ,95 10 ditto,....| ,96 11 ditto,5...\ 97 12 Midnight,| ,97 1A.M. 22d,| ,98 De ditto. 398 BcHitto... o. | 08 4 ditto,....] ,98 5 ditto,....{/27,00 6 ditto,....| ,00 7 ditto,....|26,98 8 ditto,....|27,00 9 ditto,....| ,00 JO ditto,....| ,00 IT -ditto,....| .00 12 Noon. ..| ,00 Van Sing din 8 ELOK0) 2 GittGreans ||. 500 3 ditto,....|26,98 4 ditto,... 95 5, ditto...) si 593 6 ditto,....| ,93 Hourly Mean Average, ../26,98 Range of 2 Therms. o 5 5 se ein he 72) e) 76 76 77 77 78 78 80 81 81 84 82 84 $4 84 84 86 84 88 85 86 85 85 84 86 $4 86 84. 86 83 84 82 84 81 83 81 82 80 79 80 718 80 78 80 79 78 77 80 78 78 78 77 17 79 79 80 81 81 §3 82 85 83 86 83 86 84 87 85 86 85 87 85 87 84 87 $1.59|82.73 N. B. The observations were made in an apartment 12 feet square. By the same. Weather. ——— a ee ee Weather clear, cool, and pleasant. Calm ; the sun getting hot when exposed outside. Much the same; sun getting very hot ditto. Ditto ditto ditto ; gentle breeze. Very hot ; some light clouds ; ditto. Sun hot, air cool, some light clouds, wind rising. Sun at times obscured, light clouds, and the air cool and refreshing. Ditto, ditto, ditto. Ditto, ditto, ditto. Sun very oppressive, very little wind, and very hot and close; some light clouds. Very close ; the sun very lot, scarcely any wind. Getting cool, wind rising, and very pleasant. Calm and pleasant ; sky clear. Ditto and very close; light clouds ; some lightning ; Ditto gentle breeze ditto ditto. Gentle breeze ; some heavy clouds; Wy. ditto. Calm and very sultry; some heavy clouds hovering about; some lightning; S. E, Slight breeze from S. E. ; sky clearer, some light- ning, N. W. Ditto, clear sky ; frequent ; ditto ditto. Cool and pleasant ; ditto; gentle breeze from S. E. Wind rising and strong from S. E.; at times variable ; sky clear. Still strong breeze from S. E.; at times Wy. do. do. Gentle cool breezes ditto ; cloudless sky. Ditto ditto. ; Very gentle breeze ; not so cool as at 5, but pleasant ; ditto. Clear and pretty cool ; very calm, but the sun get- ting hot. Ditto ditto, ditto ditto. Much the same, but the sun getting very hot, scarce- ly any breeze. Getting very hot, very calm and clear, slight breeze, Gentle breeze from N.; sky clear, sun hot, but not oppressive. Calm and sultry ; light clouds ; sun getting very hot, Sky clear and cloudless ; slight breeze from N.; sun very hot. Ditto ditto, hot and sultry. Ditto ditto, ditto ditto. Very sultry ; little or no wind; sky clear. Ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto. One ther- mometer hung in the centre, 7 feet from the floor ; the other, at the end of a shelf, some inches from the wall, and quite protected from reflected heat.—The room has a door facing the east. and a small window to the north, both left open*. * The march of the Barometer seems so sluggish that we fear the observer neg- lected to tap the tube previous to reading off—an indispensable precaution with ordinary instruments,—ED. 1 836.] Horary observations taken at Dadapur. 299 XI.—Horary Observations taken at Dddtpur, in conformity with Sir John Herschel’s Circular. Lieut. Durann, Engineers. [The original, whence we have with permission extracted these tables for publica- tion, has been forwarded to the Secy. of the South African Phil. Inst. ] Barometrical Observations taken at Dadipur, Sept. 1835. | Barometer, |Mountain Pa by Cary. |Barom. by & Troughton. a —<—<——$$_——____— 7 OPsd eres Es AA eee 3 [od iS q we ESE | 1A feelas| 2 (eB g wio] . |sclad Sala oS B\e| © je AiSe| & |g] & Alsi e Ia |< mo lx es) H! D. | D.| D. |Inch. | D. |Inch. rae ° oO oO oO 20|18173» 1726 |73°2 128°690/73°6 »» |19]74°9 |74°8 [75° 695|75° 9) |20|75°4 175°7 |75°8 706)75°6 ») (21|77°2 |78° |78°4 727\78° 3) |22|80°9 sis |si-9 744/81°3 983 »» |23'81°6 |83°5 |S4°6 740/844! 981 +> (24,81°6 |84°6 |85°3 728/$4°2 963 21) 1182" |85°8 |86°3 704/85°7 934 yy | 2(81°6 |87°5 [87°7 665/S6"9 904 » | 3)80°4 {87°2187°7] 636/87°2| 872 »» | 4)79°4 |86°8187°2 609186°7 845 »> | 5|79°7 [85°21 |86°2 610'85°4 834 a) | 6|77°6 |82°2 |83° 711/82°4 810 » | 7/77" 180° 180°8 626'S0°2 823 oy) | 8|75°2 |78°2179° 604/79" $29 oo | 9(75°5 |77°7 |78°5 605|78°2 $49 9 (LO175* |76°417'7-7 612|78°7 860 9) 111]73°3 |75° 175°7 620|76'2 $70 Salles bee 2575" 618)75'°3 $42 99 113] 72° 73° 73°5 609,74°2 832 99 |14170°7 71°71 72°5 615)73° 846 99 |15)70°5 |71°2171°8) = 607/722 827 9» |16|70° \70"8 ee 607'71.5| $29 97 |17170° \70°3 Wels 622)71°2 $40 99 119)71°4 71°6 172° 637|72° 869 a3 bl ee 76°5 |76°5 663|75°8 $90 9) 121 78° |80° |so- 678/79°2 907 5, |22]79°6 |82° |Sa-3 690|S1°5 916 49 '23/80°2 |sa-s $3°9 633/83°4 918 9) |(24|80°4 (85°21 95°5 674184°5 903 22) 1'81° ley: 87°1 647)|86'5 872 3 | 2|80°8 |87°3 |s7°6 605|87°5 $39 yy | 3/81°2 |88°1 !gg°5 584|S7°7 823 »,| 4/80°8 87°8 |gs-4 873|87°7 795 | 5 eae 87° 572\86°3 790 »,| 679° "S26 |64°2 568|83°5' 786 By Col. Couvin, Lieut. Baker, and Remarks. \23°924|Calm. Mist cannot be seen through for 300 yards, appears less over head. 932|/Ditto ditto clearing off alittle, with just a breath of wind from east. 942/Ditto ditto ditto objects becoming visible 800to 1000 yards off, air just perceptible E. 960) Wind S. W. light and variable, clear except light wreaths of mist along the horizon. ditto very light ditto, with light low transparent clouds, apparently the re- mains of the mist. W. light ditto, still a few light clouds. W. light and variable, ditto ditto ditto. W. light breeze, ditto ditto ditto, W. ditto ditto ditto, except the line of mountains which is clouded. W. by N. ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto, N. to 8. E. in white masses. N.W. ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto N. E. to S. E. ditto. Ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto. Ditto much fallen, ditto light clouds over the mountains and on the S. W. horizon. Ditto as before, ditto ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto, stars bright. Ditto light ditto ditto. Ditto breeze in gusts, ditto ditto. Ditto ditto light ditto ditto. Light air westerly ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto ditto- Ditto ditto ditto do dawn appearing. Calm, ditto mountains cloudless. Ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ditto, except light clouds over the mountains. Ditto ditto ditto ditto N E. to S. E. A very light air from E. ditto large white clouds on and behind the mountain range. Ditto ,, W. ditto ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ,, W. ditto masses of ditto ditto ditto N. by E. to S. E. N. W, light breeze, ditto ditto ditto. », Ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto. », Ditto in gusts ditto ditto ditto ditto, 5, ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto. W. ditto ditto ditto, mountains clear to N. cloudy to E. and S. E. W. light ditto ditto ditto ditto. ” ? 9? 7 ” o9 99 27 id ” ” ” ”? Observation commenced at 60°30" A. M, of 21st September, common reckoning. 300 ~ ~~ nme Barometrical Observations taken at Dddipur. [May, Barometrical Observations taken at Dadipur, March, 1836. etached Thermo- meter. S | Wet. Bulb. allele 91 3 of 4 | 5 | 6 99 a | § v1 9 mito 67°0/75" 66°2/74°5 64° |71°2 64°8)71° 62°2'66" 60°4|63° 59° |60°5 58°5|60° » | 670° [76° Barometer,{ Mountain Remarks. Wind E. Wind E. sky clear, over head light clouds to South, Sirmur mountains clouded. Wind E, light clouds over mountains ex- cepting the sub-Himalayas, which are visible. Ditto ditto ditto ditto. Wind 8S. E. light but steady clouds in di- rection of mountains cover more of the sky. Wind E. Gusty, clear over head, light clouds all round the horizon. Wind N. by E. unsteady, clear over head, cloudy from N. W. to N, E. outline of mountains visible. 026 Wind N. by E. unsteady, clear to S. W. by Cary. Bar. by Troughton. as) 3 q (ower | . Oo > . sey, 2 joe! = S|) eee s Ss » 25| ama |< aa D. |Inch. | D. | Inch. 70°6/28°988)|70" |29°128 73°2| = 982/72°3 116 75°5 970\75° 105 78° 954|77°3 080 78°5 923/78" 053 Tissue) 912)74°6 023 75°2 913|74°5 03S 7z §07|71°2 vals) 902|70'6 020 G72 897|166°4 014 64°1 892/64°1 010 62° 900|/61°5 027 61° S9si61°* 030 59°5 §94/59°5 018 58°5 $84/59° 011 57. 881/56°5 000 55°5 860/55" |28°996 54°5 656|55°5 984 So" §54/53°2 982 52°3 §55/52° 884 i iey) 863]51° |29°003 Se §81]50°2 02) 55°7 915}54°7 059 62°7 948|61°4 097 67°7 964|66°7 116 ie 971|70° 11] 74° 934/73°2 091 76°5 944175°7 077 76°8 923/76'1 036 78°5 900|77°9 023 78°5 868]7S° 000 7S8°3 $64|77°5| 28°994 760°7 867]76° 99) Elsewhere clouded, stormy appearance to north. Wind N. light. Clear to S. W. Elsewhere light clouds, outline of hills visible. Ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto. Wind S. E. night clear. Ditto very light, night clear. Clear. Clear star light. Ditto ditto. Wind N. very light, clear star light. Ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto. Wind N. brisk, clear star light. Dawn commencing, Wind N. light, sky clear. N. by E. ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto. Calm, sky clear. Wind S. E. light, sky clear. Ditto ditto ditto. Calm, sky clear. Wind S. W. light, sky clear, except light clouds over the mountains. Wind W. light ditto ditto ditto, Ditto ditto ditto ditto. Ditto ditto ditto ditto. Time ascertained by one observation of equal altitudes. Observation commen- ced at 10h. 21m. 31s. of 21st March, common reckoning, and was continued at exact intervals of one hour. omitted in the table.—ED.) (For convenience the minutes and seconds have been 1836.] Horary Observations taken at Dadipur. 301 Memoranda relative to the above Table of Barometrical observations for Septem- ber 1835. By Lieut. DuRAND. ; Instruments employed.—Colonel Cotvin’s Barometer was made by Cary. The cistern is of ivory, the Instrument is adjusted for observation by bringing the surface of the mercury to a level with the slit in the socket of the stopcock of the cistern, by means of a brass screw at the bottom of the cistern. This instrument was, when compared with the standard Barometer in Calcutta, by J. Prinsep, Esq., found to be correct. Lieut. Duranp’s Barometer is one of TRovcHTon and Simm’s mountain Barometers. When compared with the standard Barometer, it stood 0.043 too low. In order to determine the amount of change which the two instruments might have suffered, relatively to each other, in consequence of the jour- ney from Calcutta, a comparison was instituted between the heights shown by the two Barometers, during the month of June 1835 ; the following is the result. Mean, Attd. |Detd.| Moist - : Height of Bar.| Ther. | Ther.|Bulb, | Time. |Mean of the foregoing. —- —_____—— 28.744 90.4 | 89.51 | 83.15 [10 a. m [28-6944] 92.92 | 91.83 (84.145 28.6488 |95.44 | 94.25 | 85.14 | 4 P.M. | | 28.7486 _|87.83 | 86.51 | 83.22 |10 a. m. |28.7035|88.616/87.236) 83. 98.6585 189.4 | 87.96 | 82.79 | 4p. m. (ie | Whence may be deduced, that Cary’s barometer suffered considerable derangement from the inevitable jolting, &c. attendant on so long a jour- ney. ‘TRoucguton’s had evidently been less disordered, probably but little so; without a second comparison with the standard barometer, however, the comparative accuracy of TrovueuTon’s rests upon supposition. Previous to the day on which the hourly observations were to commence, Cary’s Barometer was accidentally put out of order, and it became requi- site to re-fill the tube with mercury ; this was accordingly effected, but the means for safely heating the filled tube not being at hand, and the tube appearing to the eye free from air, it was inserted into the instru- ment ; the observations show the great difference which this untimely accident caused in the heights of the two mercurial columns. Thermometers.—The attached thermometers of both barometers read off to degrees. The thermometer employed as a moist bulb, is one made by Trovucu- ron and Smmms. When compared in Calcutta it stood 1:3 too high ; the scale is graduated to degrees. The detached thermometer also by Troventon and Simms, reads off only to two degree divisions ; when examined in Calcutta it was found to be 0°4 too high. From the foregoing remarks on the thermometers, it is evident that the division of the scales of these instruments did not admit any perfect accu- racy in reading off the decimal parts of a degree: the decimal parts in the table are therefore only careful approximations, and under particular cir- cumstances, such as reading off at night, &c. small inaccuracies must have been unavoidable. Time.—The time of apparent noon and the rate of chronometer were ascertained by a series of observations of equal altitudes of the sun, on the 17th, 18th, 19th and 20th September. Location of Instruments.—The instruments were placed in a verandah facing the north, perfectly shaded, and sheltered from the wind, without, at the same time, hindering a free circulation of air. Cary’s Barometer stood about 4/¢. 6, from the wall; Roveuron’s about 1/t. 6, from the wall, the Space partitioned off and allotted to the instruments not admitting their further removal from the northern front of the buildiog. Place of Observation.—Dadupur is situated on the right bank of the Jamna, a little below the junction of the Sombe ;: the position of the Canal Cary’s Barometer. TROUGHTON and Stmm’s Barometer. 302 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [May, Department depot is somewhat north of the village, and is in latitude 30° 12 N. and about longitude 77° 23 45” E. as deduced from an obser- vation of the transit of mercury on the 5th May, 1832. The range of low mountains separated from the more lofty and older formations by the Kyadur Doon is about 20 miles from Dadtpur. The word mountains which enters amongst the remarks on the particulars of the weather, must be understood to allude to the distant ranges of the Himalayas, and not to the low and neighbouring mountains. It is necessary to add,that the hourly observations were taken by Colonel Convin, Engrs., Lieut. Baker, Engrs., and Lieut. Duranp, Engrs. Dédipur, Nov. 24th, 1835. The same remarks are applicable to the March observations, Cary’s Barometer not having been yet boiled ; the site of the instruments was Coane et being now under a thatch erected for them in a free circulation of air. XII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Wednesday evening, the 1st June, 1836. W. H. Macnacuren, Esq. Vice-President, in the chair. Messrs. W. Bruce and R. W. G. Friru, proposed at the last meeting, were ballotted for, and elected members of the Society. Dr. Lumeva, proposed at the last meeting, was, upon the recommenda- tion of the Committee of Papers, elected an honorary member. The Rev. R. Everest, requested his name to be withdrawn from the list of members. Captain W. Fotery regretted, that private circumstances obliged him also to retire from the Society, Read letters from Colonel J. Convin, Engineers, Colonel Cautriexp, and Colonel Sracy, acknowledging their election as members of the Society. Read letters from Nicnonas Caruiste, Esq. Secretary to the Antiqua- rian Society of London, and J. Forsuaut, Esq. Secretary to the British Museum, acknowledging the receipt of copies of the Index, Xe. Read a letter from Captain H. Harxnsss, Secretary to the Oriental Translation Committee of the Royal Asiatic Society, stating, that arrears of the Society’s subscription were due, to the amount of £31 10s. from 1833 to 1835, inclusive. Ordered, that the arrears be paid up, with an apology for the delay. The Secretary stated, that upon an application from himself on the part of the Society, the Government had been pleased to grant exemption from postage on all certified ‘‘ proof sheets,” addressed by him to authors or editors for correction, as well as on their return, similarly attested to his address. The Government was also willing to grant exemption from duty on objects of Natural History or Curiosity, imported for or exported from the museum ; application to be made in each particular case. Library. Read a letter from Captain R. B. Pemserron, forwarding a copy of his report on the eastern frontier of British India, with an appendix and maps, for presentation to the Society. Also, from Dr. McCurtuianp, a copy of his work entitled “ Inquiries in Kemaon,” Statistical and Geological. Read a letter from James R. Ewarr, Esq. forwarding on behalf of Captain J. Jervis, a copy of his publication on Indian Meteorology. Die Philosophie der Hindu Vaedanta Sara von Sadananda des Ram Krishna Tirtha von Dr. Oramar Franx—presented by the author. Ueber das Bild des Welthaumeisters, Visvakarma, von Orumar Frank —presented by the author. / 1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 303 The Indian Journal of Medical Science, No. 61, June 1836—by Dr. Corbyn the Editor. The following books were received from the booksellers : LARDNER’s Cabinet Cyclopedia, Swarnson’s quadrupeds. —_— , Greece, Vol. 2nd. <<< —_____—____—__—__, Rome, Vol. 2nd. Illustrations of the Botany and other branches of the Natural History of the Himdlaya mountains, by J. F. Royrsz, Esq. F. L. 8. and G. S. and M. A. S., parts 7th and 8th. Museum. Four gold and silver fish, from Nipél, were presented by Hari Da’s, Mahant of Patna. A drawing, supposed to be of the Allahabad lath ; as it stood when perfect, was received with a note from Dr. Movuart, H. M. 13th Dragoons at Bangalore. This drawing accords more exactly with the lath in Tirhut, for which it was doubtless intended, (See Vol. IV. page 122.) LInterary. A paper on the valley of Cashmir, by the Baron Hucst, was read. The author’s detention at Bombay has enabled him to communicate at greater length the observations made during his recent visit to the valley. The Society is much beholden to this illustrious traveller for thus disinterestedly placing at its disposal the results of his personal labours, notwithstanding he has doubtless the intention of publishing himself on his return to his own country. The latitude of Kashmir town (Srinagar) is 34° 22’ 58” and (if Vizirabad is correctly laid down in ELPHINSTONE’s map), its longitade is 75° 12’ 30’’ by cross- bearings taken by the Baron from the latter place to the Pirpanjabl pass, the bearing of which was also taken at Kashmir town. In most maps the situation of this place is 34° 40’ lat. and 75° 58’ long :— in Hamixton 33° 23’ lat. 74° 47’ long.: and in H. T. Prinser’s RANsSEET Sineu, derived from Capt. Murray’s information, 34° 9’ and 75° 32’ re- spectively*. A paper by Mr. Avpaun, entitled ““ A Memoir of a Hindu colony in ancient Armenia,” was submitted. [This will be printed in our next. ] An attempt to fix the epochs of the four principal Buddhas, by Captain Forses, of Ceylon, was presented. Mr. Csoma’s translation of the Bhotian Banner Inscription, presented at the meeting of March, was read. [Printed iu the present number.] Facsimile of inscription on the Bhittree léth near Ghaézipur, was pre- sented by Lieut. A. Cunninenam, together with a drawing of the pillar. A memoir on the geography of Peucelaotis, and elucidations of ALEx- ANDER’s march, together with drawings of all the coins and relics disco- vered by himself, and a map of the country from his own surveys, intended for presentation to M. Jacqusr of the Paris Asiatic Society, was obliging- ly entrusted by the author M. Court, of Mahérdéja Ranusrr Sinn’s service, to the Secretary, for free communication to the Society of such information as they may think worthy of extraction. Physical. Extract of a letter from the Baron Hucet to the Society, was read, announcing the important discovery of a bed of fossil bones in Perim island, in the gulph of Cambay. [Printed in the present number. ] * In the note on Kashmir published in the March No. p. 185, we asserted the latitude to be 34° 35/ with meridional (double) altitude, 72° 4’.—We supposed the latter corrected to the Sun’s centre; as that was not the case, 15’ must be de- ducted, while 3’ must be added for difference of declination from Greenwich—mak- ing the latitude as above, 34° 23’.—Ep. 304 President's Address to the (May, Specimens of lignite and fossil wood from Nipél, were presented on the part of Subadar Jopa Sineu, Specimens of quartz fossil wood and shells from Van Dieman’s Land, presented by C. K. Rostson, Esq. A note on the teeth of the Mastodon angustidens of the Siwélik hills, was received by Captain Cauriey. Also, by Dr. Fatconer and Capt. Cauriey, a memoir on the Felis Cris- tata, a new fossil tiger from the Siwalik hills. A skeleton of a tortoise (Carey’s Kuchuya), presented by Mr. J. T. PEARSON. Specimens of the Indian Barbet, ( Bucco Indicus, ) Woodpecker, ( Picus Mucei, ) and smaller green pigeon, ( Vinago Vernans, ) presented by Lieut. C. Monrriov, Ind. Navy. A specimen of the wandering Albatros, (Diomedea exulans,) present. ed by J. Cuttp, Esq. A specimen of the Bald Ibis, (Ibis calva,) presented by Dr. A. CAMPBELL. Skulls of the tiger, (Felis Tigris, ) Leopard, (F. Leopardus, ) long-lipped bear, (Ursus /Jabiatus,) and Gurriyal, (Garialis Gangeticus, ) presented by Dr. McCosu. A specimen of the ornamented snake, (Coluber Ornata,) presented by Mr. Kyo. A specimen of Gecko vittatus (var.) by Dr. A. Jackson. XIII.—Address read before the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, on the 27th January, 1836. By the Rev. Joun Wusson, President. [This address, obligingly communicated to us by the author, gives so valuable a review of all that has been done by the Bombay Society, that we make no apology, but rather feel a pride in transferring it to our pages entire: the rather because Bom- bay does not yet boast a Journal of its own, like Madras does. Since the establish- ment of the latter journal, we have discontinued inserting the Proceedings of the So- ciety at that Presidency, conceiving the means for their preservation and circulation to be more appropriately provided for.—ED. ] This Society has now been in existence for upwards of thirty years ; and it may not be improper for us, in our present circumstances, briefly to advert to its past proceedings, and to some of the various subjects of inquiry, and especially those connected with our situation in western India, which still invite our attention. In the discourse delivered at the formation of the institution, by its first President Sir James MacxrytTosn, that great man declared himself *‘ambitious of no higher office than that of conveying to India the desires and wants of the learned at home.” A more worthy ‘representative of the curiosity of Europe,” could not have presented himself in this country. It must be admitted, however, that, powerful as was his influence, and remarkable as has been the zeal and success of the members in prosecut- ing some of the objects proper for investigation by an Asiatic Society, their contributions on the topics to which he more particularly directed attention, have not been so numerous and extensive as might have been reasonably expected. On Natural History, on which he dwells at greatest length, there are in our Transactions only a few distinct contributions, while the subject is only partially adverted to in the papers descriptive of particular dis- tricts of the country. This is undoubtedly a matter of regret, for the 1836.] Bombay Asiatic Society, 1836. 305 study, directly conversant as it is with the works of God, and with the intimations which they give of His wisdom, power, and goodness, is, in all circumstances, possessed of the highest interest, and conduces both to intellectual gratification and to moral improvement ; and in such a coun- try as India, so vast in its extent, and so grand and multifarious in its productions, it is possessed of peculiar charms. It is a study, in many of its branches, so intimately connected with national resources, and the useful arts, and the means of humane amelioration, that it is powerfully recommended to every economist and philanthropist. It is a study in which most who have received a liberal education may engage, and to atlvance which, all who give it an ordinary share of attention, may consi- derably contribute. The sojourners in Bombay have, in the mountains, forests, and islands, in the neighbourhood, innumerable objects, connected especially with Geology, Botany, and Zoology, which both from their comparative novelty, and intrinsic interest invite attention. The Society cannot do better than encourage their investigation, and imitate in refer- ence to them, the laudable procedure of the sister institution in Bengal, with regard to those of a similar nature more particularly connected with that province, and among whose highest honours must ever be, its having numbered among its members such men as Roxsures and Watnicu, and fostered their earliest attempts to unfold the beauties and mysteries of creation. The report of observation and discovery connected with them, if given in this place, would form an agreeable entertainment even to those who may be most ardent and persevering in their researches into the other important objects of the Society’s investigation. That a studious atten- tion to both of them, by individuals, is not impracticable, is well evinced in the cases of Jones, and CoLEBROOKE, and Carey, and others, who have been distinguished in India both for their science and literature; and who have been not less remarkable for their knowledge and expositions of the thought and feeling of man, as connected with the objects of his devout regard, or superstitious reverence, and the language by which he holds communion with his fellows, than for their lively cognizance, and philo- sophie interpretation, of the varied phenomena of nature. The Statistics of any country are intimately connected with its Political Economy, and are consequently highly worthy of attention. Their import- ance was not so generally admitted, as at present, on the formation of our Society ; but it is strikingly set forth by Sir James Macxintosu. The tables which he himself presented, connected with the population of Bombay, and the remarks with which he accompanied them, are valuable. Similar ones, of a later date, are desiderata, and when compared with those given by him, would furnish curious information. The Notices of Jambusar and Loni, given in our Transactions, by Drs. MarsHaty and Coates ; and of certain districts of the southern Maratha Country, and of the Jhurejas, of Kach, in the Journal of the home Society, by Dr. Brrp, and Lieutenant Burnes, are good specimens of what is required of other localities and tribes. Without the assistance of our liberal Government, little can be done with satisfaction in this department. Such assistance, by instituting special inquiries, and by delivering up documents already in its possession, or which could be procured by application to its judges, and magistrates, and revenue officers, it could easily, and with great advantage to itself, render*. Only one paper on the subject of Political Economy, as connected with * A proposition has, I understand, been made, by an able and zealous officer of this Presidency (Capt. T. B. Jervis) to the different Governments of India, relative to the periodical publication of the returns of population, revenue, and cultivated and waste lands. 2k 306 President’s Address to the (May, India, has been laid before our Society. It is by Mr. Bruce, and has been transmitted to England, where it will not fail to be appreciated. Of all the topics of inquiry meriting attention, that of the History and Present Condition of the People, in the different provinces, in regard to language, religion, literature, science and art, means of support, and manners and customs, is paramount. It is very extensive ; and has met, from the members of the Society, with considerable attention. The Parsis, the great body of whom dwell amongst us, present them- selves as special objects of inquiry. The history of their original country, has been ably unfolded by Sir Joay-Maxcotm ; and on its ancient chrono. logy previous to the conquest by ALEXANDER, and its state from the battle of Arbela in A. C. 331, tothe rise of Arprsuin BaBEGan, much light has been cast by our late learned President, Colonel Vans Kennepy. Mr. Ersxrne’s papers respecting them, are remarkably interesting, as con-~ taining an able review, and analysis, of the Works of Anquerin pu Prr- ron, who followed Dr. Hype as the expositor of their tenets ; the results of his. own observation; and valuable disquisitions on their sacred books and ancient languages. The researches of Professor Rasx, in his paper given to this Society, whatever may be the opinions formed of the parti- cular conclusions at which he has arrived, and it must be admitted he has reasoned ingeniously in their support, are also interesting. For the ori- ginal tracts, with remarks, in the course of being published in France by _M. Mout, we owe our gratitude. The History of the Early Kings of Persia by Mirxuonn, translated by Mr. Suea; and the History of Vartan and the Armenians, by Mr. Neumann; and of the Shah Namah, by Mr. Arxinson, for which we are indebted to the Oriental Translation Fund, contain much historical information on the religion of Zoroaster. Still more may be expected from the translation of that singularly curious work, the Dabistan, which is about to appear. The curiosity of the public respecting the Parsis, however, is far from being satisfied, as is evident from the inquiries which frequently reach this place both from London and Paris. We need amore exact translation of the books which they esteem sacred, than that which is furnished by AnquetiL pu PERRon. Such a translation has been promised by Professor Burnovr, whose attain- ments in oriental literature, and ardour in oriental study, afford good ground for hope that our wishes respecting it will be realized. Should he fail, the attempt may be made in Bombay, where there are still a very few Zand scholars among the Zoroastrians to be found, and whose assistance, as well as that te be furnished by the translations into Gujurathi, may be procured*, We require information particularly on their popular super- stitions, and domestic manners and customs, and general habits, as exhi- bited to the native community, and which, there is reason to believe differ not a little from those generally observed by their European acquain- tances, and for which they have received, in the opinion of the most intelligent of their own number, a more than quantum sufficit of credit. It was with the view of adding my mite to the information possessed on these topics, and not because I conceived it possessed of any intrinsic merit, that I lately, presented the Society with a translation of their Gene- ral Srroz. There are extant narratives of their settlement and history in India, versions of which should be presented to the Oriental Translation Fund. At a late meeting of the Committee of Correspondence of the Royal Asiatic Society, some of the more liberal natives in Bombay, were invited to form themselves into an association, with the view of aiding in collecting information on some of the topics to which I have now adverted. Little, I fear, can be expected from them, without the co-operation of * Six Fargards of the Vandidad can also be procured in Sanskrita. 1836.] Bombay Asiatic Society, 1836. 307 Enropean scholars, or without the proposal to them of special queries cal- culated to direct them in their communications. I am decidedly of opi- nion that it would be of advantage to both parties, were some of them associated with ourselves ; and I would fondly hope that should any of them, possessed of competent attainments and zeal, and a respectable character and influence, ask membership of our body, it should be readily accorded. There is no institution which has furnished more able and interesting illustrations connected with the Musalmans than our Society. The ques- tion, so interesting in the history of the errors of the human mind, Was MunammaD an impostor or an enthusiast, has been discussed by our late President Colonel Vans Kennepy ; and though many may dissent, as I myself do, from the conclusion at which he arrives, the ingenuity with which he conducts his argument, and the varied learning which he displays must be readily acknowledged. The same distinguished orientalist has furnished us with the most correct estimate of the literature of the Musal- mans in Persia, which is extant; and has given us a minute and precise abstract of the Muhammadan Municipal Law, with a constant reference to acknowledged authorities, and with an arrangement particularly lumi- nous, being suggested by that of Buackstone in his Commentaries on the Laws of England. His paper furnishes an important aid to the under- standing of the state of Government, and society in general, in Muham- madan countries. The points at issue between the Shias and Sunnis, and which have been, and still are, the cause of the greatest distractions and animosities among the Moslems, are well illustrated by the translations and remarks of Sir Joan Matcorm ; and the sentiments of the Sufis and Mehdivis, by those of the late Lieutenant Granam and Colonel Mines. The account of the Axutax-1-Nasirti, by Lieutenant Frissenu, and the translation of one of the discourses of Sap1 by Mr. Ross, throw much light on the Musalmaén Economics and Ethics, both theoretical and practical. What we chiefly want in reference to the Muhammadan religion, is a fuller account, drawu from a comparison of all the existing authorities, of the state of Arabia at the time of its origin, and from which we could form a more enlightened judgment than we do, of those great revolutions brought about by its author ; of the history of its religious influence, dis- tinguished as much as possible from that of the military exploits and civil arrangements of its followers, which have hitherto almost altogether engrossed attention ; of the general arguments by which its doctors have urged its pretensions in opposition to Christianity* ; of the Bohorast * Some interesting information on this subject, is to be found in the Controver- sial Tracts, by the Rev. Henry Martyn, and his opponents in Persia, and the pre- face prefixed to them by Professor Ler, and in the last of the letters addressed to me, by H’asi’ MAHAMMAD H'ASHIM, and published in Bombay, As the discussion of the points at issue, however, is an ancient one, it seems desirable that a collection should be made of the hints respecting it which are to be foundin the Musalm4n works of theology. + To any person, whose leisure may permit inquiry into this body of Musalmans, the following memorandum written by me on a visit to Suratin the beginning of last year, may not be unacceptable. ‘‘ The Bohoras of Surat are divided into three sects, respectively denominated Ali, Suliman, and Daud. In the first of these, there are only five or six families; in the second, about fifty; and in the third, about five thousand, with a population of about twelve thousand. They have accounts of their tribe, one of which I have seen in Arabic, which carry back their history about six or seven hundred years. They generally support themselves by the vending and ma- nufacture of cloths, hardware, household furniture, &c. They profess to be quite distinct from the agricultural Bohoras, who are to be found in the Baroch districts, and of whom a considerable number of families have now also settled in Surat. ‘¢ The Bohoras are under the religious, and, to a great extent, the civil govern- ment of a Mulla, whose head quarters were originally in Arabia. The Mulld in 7p 308 President’s Address to the (May, and other curious sectaries ; and of the peculiar practices, superinduced probably by intercourse with the Hindus, of those who profess it in India, and particularly in the provinces with which we are most intimately connected. That the latter subject is not unworthy of interest, will appear to any reader of the work lately published by Dr. Herxxors, and to the notices given of certain festivals by M. Garcin pe Tassy. From these documents, as well as from Colonel Kennepy’s paper on the religion in- troduced into India by the Emperor Axsar, it appears that the followers of Muhammad, cannot only, when circumstances tempt them, lay aside their intolerance, but accommodate themselves to existing prejudices, and indulge in the boldest speculations. In the almost universal neglect of historical records by the subjugated Hindus, we must principally look” to the Musalmans for any historical information connected with this country which refers to the times which intervene between the commence. ment of their conquest, and that of the European powers. The History by Ferrisura, translated by Colonel Brices, though neither, as was to be expected , very philosophical nor rigid, is valuable. Captain RowLanpson and Dr. Brrp, have done well to translate two works which treat of the history of Malabar and Gujerat. They contain much interesting inform- tion. Another history of the latter province, by a very intelligent Brah- man, but principally from Muhammadan authorities, and which may prove worthy of translation, was lately presented to our Society by our zealous Secretary. There are materials to be found, in different places, sufficient to throw light upon the principal occurrences in almost every province of India. Of various tribes of the Hindus, as the Katis, the Bhils, the Banjaris, the Pandu Kolis, the Dakhan Kunbis, and the Karadi Brahmans, and the inhabitants of Sindh, very curious notices are to be found in our Transactions. Of many other tribes, accounts have appeared in separate publications*. Many more, however, with marked natural pecularities, and in a strange social state, still remain to to be described. Those who Surat sits upon a throne, and is highly respected. He is thrice saluted by every person wnen he is in cathedra ; and his attendants give him all the attentions which the princes of the land receive when they are in Darbdr. He has deputies in all the towns in India where Bohoras are to be found, and even in Maskat, Basora, Jadda, and Mokha. He has avery large income, arising principally from donations at births, marriages, and deaths; but from his funds, the poor of the sect, whether resident in Surat or occasional visitors, are supplied. He nominates his suecessor, having a principal regard to his talents, information, and capacity to govern. “The Mulla, or Mulldjias he is called by way of distinction, reads the Koran, and addresses the people during five or six days of the Moharram, and one day du- ring the month of Ramazan, when his auditors are numerous. In the part of Surat principally inhabited by Bohoras, there are many courts, in each of which there isa Mulla to conduct worship early in the morning. The people, however, seem most to relish praying at the tombs, or great mausoleums, which contain the sepulchres of some of the ancient Mull4s and their relatives. They actually, as we observed, kiss the chunam covering of the graves! *“ In regard to marriage, it may be observed, that the number of wives permitted by the Kord4n is allowed, as in the case of other sects of Musalmans. The follies of the Hindus have found a place among them, in the manner in which marriages are contracted and celebrated. Girls are espoused at the early age of five years, and without much regard, on the part of their parents, to the age of those with whom they are united. The processions, and feastings, are conducted much as among the other classes of the natives. “‘The shaving off the hair, which is viewed as a kind of sacrament, is performed on the 7th or 21st day after the birth, either of a son or daughter. “‘ Expulsion from caste follows the practice of ‘gross immoralities, and par- ticularly the drinking of ardent spirits. ‘Funerals are conducted with considerable solemnity. Those of the higher class- es are attended by the Mulld.”’ * Among the fullest, and most interesting of these, is the History of the Ramo- shis, lately published by Captain MAcKINTOsH. 1836.) Bombay Asiatic Society, 1836. 809 are found resident in tne jungles, and in mountainous districts, and who are probably the remains of the Aborigines of the country, are particu- larly worthy of investigation. Attention to them is called for, by all who desire to advance their civilization, and to elevate them from their present degradation. Description must precede any considerable efforts made for their improvement. Perhaps some similarities may be dis- covered in their language, religion, and customs, which may lead to important conjectures as to the ancient history of India. Of many of them it has been already ascertained, that they have had no connexion with Brahmanism, except in so far as they may have felt its unhallowed influence in excluding them from the common privileges of humanity, and banishing them to the wilds, or dooming them to ignorance, and unwilling and unrewarded servitude*. Though on the Hindu religion and literature in general, our publica- tions contain rather scanty observations, some of our members have added greatly to the information communicated by the distinguished literati of the other side of India, and of Europe. Our Society was the first body to submit to the public a proposal for a union for the promotion of trans- lations from the Sanskrita. Its claim to this honour, it is right again to re-assert. It will be established by a reference to a letter addressed to the Asiatic Society of Bengal, in 1806, by Sir James Mackrnrosn, and published as an appendix to the first volume of our Transactionst. Such translations were practically encouraged by the Society itself, in the case ofthe Lilawati,a treatise on Arithmetic and Geometry by Buaskara AcHAR-~ va, and the Prabodh Chandrodaya, a curious: allegorical play illustrative of the opinions of the Vedantikas, and both published by the late Dr. Joun Tayuor. The first general account, of any considerable size, of the Hindu Pantheon, is by one of our members, Major Epwarp Moor. In Colonel Kennepy’s Ancient and Hindu Mythology, we have a work, than which none more important, if we refer either to original quotations from the Shdstras, or learned disquisitions, has yet appeared. I make this remark with the more freedom, that circumstances called me, on the pub- lication of the work, to animadvert on the estimate which it forms of the moral character of Bréhmanism in a manner which gave the learned author offence. Inthe Essay on the Vedanta by the same gentleman, we have the best account of that very curious system of speculation, considered in a philosophical point of view, which has yet appeared,—an account which proves it to be a system of spiritual pantheism, and as such entirely dif- ferent, except in occasional expression, from that of the Mystics of Europe, to which it had been maintained to be similar by Sir Writ1am Jones, and other writers{. It was in this place that the first defence, by a Native, of both the exoteric and esoteric systems of Hinduism, in reply to those who seek to propagate the principles of our Holy Faith, appeared ; and it was here that a rejoinder, embracing briefly the consideration of * See particularly Mr. BABER’s Answers to the Queries of a Committee of the House of Lords on the state of Slavery in the South West of India. + Page 310. } In the works of the Mystics, and of the pious writers, to whom Sir WILLIAM JONES alludes in the course of his reasonings, there are figures of speech, and other expressions, very similar to those used by the Vedantists. Others, still more strik- ingly similar, could easily be produced. I give one from the Poems of RIcHARD Baxter. ‘But O! how wisely hast thou made the twist! To love thee and myself do well consist. Love is the closure of connaturals ; The soul’s return to its originals: As every brook is toward the ocean bent : And all things to their proper element : And as the inclination of the sight, How small soever is unto the light : 310 President’s Address to the [May, both these subjects, was published. About two years ago, a portion of the Rigveda, the most considerable which has yet been printed, was pub- lished in Sanskrita, Marathi, and English, by one of our members. A translation of the whole of this work, to which I believe Prof. H. H. Witson has turned his attention, and of the Bhagawata Purdéna, which, though it cannot claim an antiquity much exceeding that of six hundred years, is certainly the greatest practical authority at present, at least in the West of India, are greatly to be desired. On the different sects of the Hindus, and on their provincial superstitions, much light has yet to be cast. On the North of this Presidency, we havethe Vaishnavas ; in our immediate neighbourhood, the Smartas ; and in the South, the Shaivas or Lingavants, in the practice of all their peculiarities. In the Dakshan, we have a general worship of deified heroes, as yet unnoticed, except in the most incidental manner. Many curious classes of mendicants, of whom little or nothing is known*, are to be found within the sphere of our peculiar observation. The religion of the Jainas, on which most valuable manuscripts, procured by Mr. Waruen, are deposited in our library, is still, in many respects, to be unfolded. Our Transactions have only one paper, by Captain McMurpo, which refers to it. In the posses- sion of the Jainas, there are many works calculated to throw much light on the religious history of India in general, with the use of which some of them would not be unwilling to favour a European student. I fondly trust and believe, that there are among our members, those who will con- tinue to contribute, as circumstances may call them, to the exposition of the systems of faith, which have so long exercised their sway in this country, and the various literary works, which, though, unlike those of Greece and Rome, they are of little or no use in the cultivation of taste, are valuable as they illustrate the tendency of these systems in their connex- ion with social and public life, and as they explain a language the most copious in its vocables, and powerful in its grammatical forms, in which any records exist. Destitute of a knowledge of these systems, and the works in which they are embodied, the native character, and the state of native society, will never be sufficiently understood, a right key obtained to open the native mind, and all desirable facilities enjoyed for the in- troduction among the people of a body of rational and equitable law, and the propagation of the Gospel and the promotion of general education. There are some respectable patrons of the latter supremely important work, who overlook its importance ;_ but their number is on the decrease. As the touch’d needle pointeth toward the pole ; Thus unto thee inclines the holy soul: It trembleth and is restless till it come Unto thy bosom where it is at home.’’ No person who is familiar with the Upanishads can fail to mark the coincidence of the language of BAXTER in the preceding passage, with that of the Transcend- entalists of India. This coincidence of language, however, does not warrant the inference that there is the least agreement of statement. In proof of this position, we have merely to quote the lines which follow those now given. ‘¢ Yet no such union dare the soul desire As parts have with the whole, and sparks to fire ; But as dependent, low, subordinate, Such as thy will of nothing did create. As tendeth to the sun the smallest eye Of silly vermin, or the poorest fly. My own salvation when I make my end, Full mutual love is all that I intend, And in this closure though I happy be, Its by intending, and admiring thee.’’ * Of one of these, the Mdnbhavas, whom I had particularly in view in making this remark, I have just received an interesting account from Captain A. MACKINTOSH, the author of the History of the Ramoshis. 1836.] Bombay Asiatic Society, 1836. 31i They ought to consider that the situation of those to be instructed, is to be attended to, as well as the instructions to be delivered. While divine truth must be propagated with unwavering fidelity, and all hopes of ulti- mate success rest on its own potency, its suitableness to the general cha- racter of man, and the assistanee of divine grace, judgment ought to be employed in the mode of its application to those who vary much in their creeds, and differ much in their moral practice. We have the highest authority for an accommodation such as that for which I plead. Though the great truths proclaimed by the apostle Pau were the same in all cir- cumstances, they were introduced invery different ways to the Jewish Rab- bis and people, and to the members of the Athenian Areopagus. I must hold, that there is no little unsuitableneas in India, in addressing a Pantheist as a Polytheist, and vice versa: in speaking to a Jaina as to a Bréliman; in condemning that at random which the natives may suppose to be unknown, and in using theological terms, and general phrases, without any very definite sense of their application by the natives themselves. The more a knowledge of Hinduism and of Hindu literature is possessed by any teacher, the more patiently and uninterruptedly will he be listened to by the people, and the more forcibly will he be enabled, and principally by contrast and concession, to set forth the authority, and the excellence, of the doctrines of Christianity. In connexion with the subject to which I have now adverted, I may allude to the peculiar duty which devoives on us of collecting Sanskrita manuscripts. They are to be found in a purer state in the Dakshan than in any other part of India, and the poverty of the Brahmans leads them readily to part with them. Those which were lately purchased by us are very valuable. The contributions of the members of our Society to the elucidation of Hindu Antiquities, have done much to extend and support its credit. The proximity of the ancient excavations, which may be classed among the wonders of the world, could not fail to excite curiosity and inquiry. The descriptions and illustrations of those of Gharipur (Elephanta), Sashti (Salsette), Karali (Carlee), Veru/a (Ellora), Bag and Ajanta*, though a few errors and oversights may be detected in them, are highly interesting. Mr. Ersaive has satisfactorily shown the distinguishing characteristics of those of them which are respectively to be attributed to the Baud’dhas and Jainas, and the Brahmans. It is to be hoped that the inscriptioas which are to be found on some of them, and which are in the Sanskrita language, and in ancient characters very similar to those which have late. ly been published in the ably conducted Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, will be soon understood. The Rev. Mr. Stevenson has already been successful, to a great extent, in decyphering, and translating those of the temples of Karali, and thus leading to inferences by no means unim- portant. Some of those of Kanadi, on Salsette, I should think, from a partial trial, present no greater difficulties than those which have been already overcome. The stone bearing the inscription of the temples at Elephanta, we learn from Dieco de Couto the Portuguese Annalist, was sent to Joun the Third of Portugal about the year 1534, and is probably now either in the Royal Museum of Lisbon, or in the University of Coimbra. The Royal Asiatic Society may, without difficulty, procure a transcript. There are excavated temples in the country, such as those of Nasik, and Junar, and others which have been erected, such as those of Abu, Palitana and Girnar, which have not yet been particularly described. What we principally require in reference to them all, is information as to the time at which, and the views with which, they were constructed ; an estimate of them as works of art, or as indicative of the resources of those to whom they. are to be ascribed ; and an inquiry into the religious rites and ser- vices, for which they have been appropriated, and the moral impressious * Written by Messrs, SALT, ERSKINE, Col. SYKEs, &c. 312 President’s Address to the Bombay As. Soc. [May, which they seem fitted to make on those resorting to them. ‘They are worthy of attention only as they may illustrate the civil and religious history, or practices, of the country. The grants of land, engraven on copper-plates, many of which are still to be found in different parts of the country, are next to them in importance in the advancement of antiquarian research, One of these was translated by Dr. Tavitor. Mr. Warsen has been successful in decyphering the most ancient of those in our museum ; and the results, as stated by him in his communication in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal for August last, are both curious and useful. Ancient coins are occasionally found in different parts of the Presidency, and the Native States to the northward, which may aid in the correction, or enlargement, of such Genealogical Tables as have been lately published by Mr. Prinsep of Calcutta*. There is asmall body of Armenians in Bombay, from which something interesting might be learnt. A dissertation by one of them on the anti- quity of their native language, with notes by Mr. Dickinson, has lately been transmitted by us to the Royal Asiatic Society, and cannot fail to be acceptable. There cannot be a doubt that the Armenians can fill up im- portant blanks in our Church History, which, to the undue neglect of the orientals, is principally formed on the authority of the Roman and By- zantine Fathers. The Beni-Israel of Bombay, and the adjoining territories, amount to about eight thousand. It is to be regretted that no considerable account of them has yet appeared, particularly as they have been long settled in the country, refuse the appellation of Jew, and are probably a portion of the Ten Tribes, never amalgamated, as the body of them probably was, with those of Judah and Benjamin. The researches of our members on antiquities, and other subjects of observation and rational inquiry, have not been confined to India; but I cannot longer detain you by alluding either to their results, or by attempting to form, what is unnecessary, and what in me would be presumptuous, an estimate of the enterprize and intelligent observation and research of our Matcoums, Expainstones, Potrincers, Ricaes and Burneses. The con- tiguity of our Presidency to Persia, Arabia, and Egypt ; and the prospect of increased intercourse with these countries, by steam navigation, afford ground to hope that our geographical and historical knowledge of them will ere long be greatly enlarged. There is scarcely a country ‘of Asia, which, even, in our present circumstances, does not furnish visitors to Bombay, who prove themselves ready to communicate to intelligent inquir- ers, informatiyn on places never as yet surveyed by any modern European traveller. Mr. Warnen has been able, from conversing with Muhamma. dan pilgrims, to prepare a brief, but interesting, memoir of Chinese Tar- taryt. i owe to the meeting an apology for the many imperfections of the sketch which I have rapidly taken. I have rather endeavoured to mark our progress, than to point out, what would perhaps have contributed more to our encouragement, the advantages and means of further advance- ment. Our Society, I may be permitted to hope, will soon again be inspir- ed with its pristine zeal, at the same time that it is directed by its accu. mulated experience ; maintain the character which it has earned for itself ; and prove not unworthy of its incorporation with the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland, an incorporation which must be admitted, notwithstanding some disadvantages, to be beneficial, as it secures that literary sympathy and communication which is greatly to be valued, and the circulation of our papers, with no expense to ourselves, and now in a convenient form, throughout the world. * Such coins are occasionally worn as personal ornaments by natives, who have no idea of their value. + See Asiatic Society’s Journal for December, 1335. 1836.] Miscellaneous. 313 XIV .—Miscellaneous. 1.—On the Canis Vulpes montana, or Hill Fou. By J. T. Pearson, Asst. Surg., Cur. Mus. As. Soc. {Reprinted from the Bengal Sporting Magazine, Jan. 1836.] Cl. Mammalia, Cov. Gen. Canis, Auctorum. Ord. Carnassiers, Cuv. Sub-gen. Vulpes, Auctorum Fam. Carnivora, Cuv. Sp. Canis Vulpes montana, mihi. Rufous grey fox, with black throat, and tail white-tipped. Description.—Size, length from tip of the nose to the insertion of the tail, 2 ft. 6 in. ; length of tail, 1 ft. 7 in.; height at the shoulders, 1 ft. 1g in. *Colour :—general colour, rufous on the upper and fore parts of the body ; becoming grisly behind, at the sides, and at the sides of the tail ; behind the ears, rich velvetty black, edged at the outer middle third with short velvetty fur of alight fawn colour, and at the inner upper third, with light rufous ; tip of the nose, as is usual in the genus, black and naked : upper lip white, with a few black bristles, and a narrow band of white extending along just above the margin, which is brown, to the corner of the mouth, where it widens and unites with a somewhat similar but fainter band from the angle of the lower jaw, from which junction the white proceeds along the side of the throat as far as the shoulder, forming a boundary between the black of the throat and the pale fawn colour of the side of the neck. A greyish black irregular spot, upon which the whiskers are set, is situated at the side of the muzzle from near the nose to the eye, and extending behind in the form of a line to the root of the ear, where it takes an abrupt course downwards, and is lost under the chin; middle of the nose and crown of the head, greyish rufous ; inside the ears, side of the neck, and half the side behind the shoulder, (mid-way between the shoulder and hip) and the flank, light fawn colour, with a dark rufous band extending from between the ears to the middle of the back, where it becomes less distinct, and is continued along the upper side of the tail as far as the white tip. This longitudinal band is crossed by another over the shoulders, forming a well defined cross ; shoulders, outer sides of the hind legs, and sides of the tail, dark grisly grey, partaking at the edges of rufous ; outer, and back part of the paws, tan, with toes of min- gled rufous and black, ; throat, chest, fore part of the belly and inner side of the thighs, dusky black, having a few white hairs, interspered under the throat, a white triangular spot on the chest, an approach to a rufous tint on the belly, and being bounded by a white line in front of the thighs and hind legs. The remaining under surface, hinder pari of the fore-legs, and under side of the root of the tail, is of a light fawn, ap- proaching in some parts to an Isabella colour. Tail, dark rufous, waved with black above, grisly grey at the sides, fawn colour, gradually becom- ing waved, with black, underneath, and furnished for about the length of three inches with a white tip. The general ground colour of the fur is a dingy back, or dirty white, according to the shade of the part. It is long, thick, soft, and very warm, mixed with a few strong hairs ; it varies in length from an inch to one inch and half upon the neck, sides, and back. Upon the muzzle, shoulder, and outer side of the thighs, under the chin, and on the limbs, it lies close, and is short ; while behind the ears, it is very short, and has the gloss and softness of velvet. The tail is exceedingly bushy, some of the fur being full two inches in length, and at the tip, more than three. The hill fox appears to approach the marking of the C. Decussatus (cross fox) in the dark colour of a purtion of the under parts, and in the cross over the back and shoulders; but the cross is not black in this Species, as it is described in that. It is of a bright rufous colour in this, 2s 314 Miscellaneous. [May, and is rendered particularly distinct by the light fawn colour at the sides of the neck and behind the shoulders. The perpendicular stroke of the cross is 24 inches wide upon the back of the neck, and two inches imme- diately behind the shoulders, whilefurther back, it is wider, but indistinct. The cross band is two inches and a half wide, and very distinct, until lost on the shoulders in the mixture of rufous and grisly grey of that part. The hill fox is a very handsome animal. Its colours are, for the most part, bright, and often well defined at their edges, offering a strong con- trast with those adjoining, or, as upon the neck and anterior part of the thighs, separated from one another by a narrow distinct line of white. It seems to be intermediate between the Vulpes vulgaris (common fox) and the cross fox, which, indeed, may, after all, be probably varieties of the same species. As nothing is known of the habits and manners of this animal, it would be conferring a boon upon zoological science, if any person, well acquainted with the subject, would describe them. It is said to be a native of the lower range of the Himalayan mountains. 2.—On the Soil suitable for Cotton, Tobacco, Sugar, and the Tea plant. By H. Prppineron. [Read at the meeting of the Agricultural Society, March 1836.] I preface what I have to say to the Society on the soils placed on the table with a few remarks, which I trust may be thought worth placing on record. My object in doing so is again to impress upon members of what vital importance it is to the advancement of the agricultural interests of the country, and to the safety and success of every agricultural specula- tion, to procure samples of all soils from other countries in which valuable products grow. The same climate and soil are, we know, in a greater or less degree the essential requisites for obtaining the production of one country in another ; and for our present purpose we may perhaps say that plants find their food in the soil, and are enabled to digest it by the climate. They do digest, we know, and this in the strictest sense of the word. The popular ideas of climates are vague enough, but it may be roundly asserted, that scarcely one who uses the word knows what is really meant by soil; or rather what is really meant by ‘‘ the same soil.” This arises from our vague notion of the thing itself. The very words used to dis- tinguish soils express, more frequently than any thing else, their appear- ance, and some of their physical qualities ; scarcely any their essential— that is their chemical properties. We talk of light and heavy, of sandy and clayey, moist and dry soils, which are all physical properties, and two clayey or two sandy soils may be actually as different as light and dark- ness from each other! The words ferruginous and calcareous are, it is true, chemical terms, but such vague ones that they designate whole classes of soils, of which each sort is widely different from its neighbours. The tea soils and the Arracan tobacco soils on the table are both ferruginous soils, but differing as widely as soils can do; for the iron in the one isa carbonate of iron, and in the other the red oxide of iron. Cotton—Nothing then but asample of the soil and a correct analysis of it can assure the speculator, that while he is trying to rear any given fo- reign product, he is not (misled by loose names) absolutely blundering in darkness, and attempting an impossibility. I begin with Cotton as a most prominent example, though my proofs on the subject are not quite so full as I could wish ; and I shall surprise the Society not a little when I say, that all the expensive efforts which have been made hitherto to obtain good cotton have probably failed from this one cause, that we have been at work on the wrong soil ! How far, with the American cottons, differen- ces of climate may also have operated is not here the place to examine, 1836.] Miscellaneous. 815 -but vegetable productions do, toa great extent, acclimate themselves ; while it is probable that nothing cau compensate to them the want of a principal constituent of the soil. Now I have not been able to obtain spe- cimens of the American cotton soils, but I have good authority for stat- ing that the soil of the Sea Islands is wholly a calcareous sand—in other words a light chalky or shelly soil ; so that it may probably contain from 50 to 60 per cent. of calcareous matter (lime generally in the state of chalk), and we have been attempting to grow this cotton on a soil which barely contains a trace of it! The soil of the Botanic Garden, for instance, not containing more than 13 or 2 per cent.: Indeed we may say generally, that till we reach the kankur districts, none of the soils of lower Bengal, out of the reach of the inundations, contain any great portion of lime. I showed some years ago*, that the inundations deposit lime, and that much of the fertilising effect they produce is due to it. The American cotton is, then, on account of differences of climate, a case not strictly in point, but the Bourbon cotton—grown both at Bourbon and the Mauritius—which sells for a shilling, when the Sea Island sells for 13d. and the Manilla cotton, which sells for 11d. when the Bourbon is worth a shilling, are both cottons of hot climates like our own; and both these are grown in highly calcareous soils. The soil on the table before yon is from the Mauritius; it is sent me by M. Geneve, of La Riviere Noire, one of the finest estates on the island, as an excellent cotton soil, and contains 32 per cent. of carbonate of lime, (or in plain English, one. third chalk ;) there is, moreover, phosphate and perhaps not less than 40 per cent. of calcareous matter! Its iron too is in a peculiar state, that of protoxide or the black oxide of iron ; and in this respect, it probably resembles the black cotton soils of Southern India. No wonder that the Bourbon cotton, though it grows well in many of our gardens near town, where it meets with plenty of calcareous matter amongst the lime-rubbish with which most of them are filled, is said to degenerate when cultivated in the open fields, which do not contain 2 per cent. of lime. I know, from the experience of several years, that it does not degenerate if it is duly supplied with calcareous matter; but that it will produce most abundantly, and for years, cotton worth from 10d. to 11d. per lb. ina proper soil. If the soil does not suit it, it will produce little else than leaves and wood, and the staple will deteriorate. Samples of American cotton soils are wanting now to make our theory on this head perfect ; but I would advise no man to attempt foreign cottons in a soil containing less than 15. per cent. of lime, and its iron mostly in the state of protoxide or black oxide. Tosacco.—Tobacco soils are the next, and here we are more fortunate, for there are on the table soils from Arracan (Sandoway) ; a soil from Singour in Burdwan, near Chandernagore, the tobacco of which, though of the same species as that of the surrounding country, sells at the price of the Arracan sort! and the soil of the best Bengal tobacco, which is grown at and about Hinglee, in the Kishnagar district, near factories for. merly held by me. Col. Hazera and Dr. Casanova are our authorities for saying, that the tobacco soils of the Havanna are red soils, and those of Manilla, I know, are also ved soil. Now the red and reddish brown soils contain most of their iron in the state of peroxide, or the reddish brown oxide of iron; while the light-grey soils contain it only in the state of protoxide, or the black oxide of iron. I believe the quality of the tobacco to depend mainly on the state and quantity of the iron in the soil ; while it is indifferent about the lime, which we have seen is so essential to cotton. None of these tobacco soils contain any lime. Their analysis shows them to contain :— * Trans. of the Phys. Class, As. Soc. Vol. I., see 316 Miscellaneous. [May, ; Aracan soil. Singour soil. Hinglee soil. Oxide of iron (peroxide)............ 15.65 10.60 6.00* Water and saline matter........ .... 1.00 0.75 1.50 Vegetable matter and fibres........ ol RISERS 1.10 75 Silex iiive tes ke Ree ae aso eee btniee) 6190 80.65 87.25 Aleta ina race. ie ees i. eee He 2.00 4.50 1.50 99.40 97.69 97.00 Water and Loss........00s .60 2.40 3.00 100.0 100.00 100.0 —from which it will be seen that the best tobacco soil we have hitherto found in India contains 16 per cent., or nearly one-sixth, of iron, which is mostly in the state of peroxide, and that the inferior sort of tobacco grows ina soil containing only 6 per cent., one-sixteenth of iron of which is moreover mostly in the state of protoxide or black oxide. TI thought it worth examining what the quantity of iron in the different sorts of tobacco would be ; and I found that, while the ashes of one ounce, or 480 grains, of Havannaand Sandoway cheroots gave exactly 1.91 grains or 0. 40 per cent. of peroxide of iron, the ashes of the same quantity of the Hinglee or best Bengal tobacco only gave 1.50 grains or 0.32 per cent., and it appears to exist in the first two in the state of peroxide. and in the last, as a protoxide, of iron; rendering it highly probable that the flavour of the tobacco to the smoker depends on the state and quantity of the iron it contains! for we have now, observe, traced the iron from the soil into the cheroot. Green copperas water, which is a solution of sulphate of iron, is often used by the American and English tobacconists and planters to colour and flavour their tobacco ; and this would be decomposed by the potass of the tobacco, and sulphate of potass and carbonate of iron be formed. Carbonate of iron is of an ochre yellow colour. I took care to ascertain that this process had not been performed with the cheroots used for my experiment ; and I do not believe our Bengal cheroot-makers know of this method. Sucar.—Sugar seems to depend both on the state of the iron and on lime in the soil. The sugar soil before you is also from the Black River, (Mr. Greveve’s,) an estate upon which from 3000 to 7000, and even on one spot the astonishing quantity of 12,000 lbs. of sugar have been obtained from an acre, of from 12 to 150 bazar maunds per bigah ! Captain SLEEMAN is my authority for these statements. Now the peculiarity of this soil is, you will observe, that it is a red soil, i. e. that its iron is mostly in the state of peroxide ; and it contains more- over about 9 per cent. of carbonate of lime, with probably some sulphate and phosphate of lime, say perhaps altogether 10 or 12 per cent. of calcare- ous matter. We have in many instances endeavoured to cultivate this cane on soils destitute both of peroxide of iron and lime, and we complain that the cane has been found watery. Itis clear that the cultivator who would succeed in sugar should pay attention to these peculiarities ; for without doing so he may have veturns, but often no profits. His profits, in a word, may depend upon his canes, his cotton, or his tobacco, being fed with the food which they require. I used the words feed and digest because it cannot be too often repeated that plants are living beings, and that the vigour of their life depends, as with ourselves, on abundant and suitable food. Tra Soirs.—The tea soils, though I notice them last, are not the least interesting. The first is a soil from Assam, for which I am indebted to Captain Jenxins ; and the second is from the Bohea Hills in China, sent * Mostly protoxide. 1836.] Miscellaneous. 317 round by Mr. Gorpon, the Secretary to the Tea Committee, and obliging- ly given to me by Mr. Granr, of the Honourable Company’s Export Ware- house. How very alike they seem, you will at once have noticed, and their analysis gives as follows :— Tea soils of Assam. Tea soil of China. Surface At 23 feet soil. deep. Nake ioc ene nw esha ioiose vos 2.45 2.00 3.00 IPRA O TIAL EON 5 penne renee verres tron nrve termes 1.00 .80 1.00 BOAR COL PEO os sna nennae por evadon sane cone 7.40 6.70 9.90 ALUMINA ower ovrere ne ee rene ce ne ee noe vos oe nee mentee ere ree 3.50 5.45 9.10 SW (De ea eect lie OLE LORE DODD LE POLE TO TODO TOPO DODD TO OP 85.40 84.1 0 76.00 a 99.75 99.05 99.00 races of phosphate and sulphate BIE PIMIG ANG, LOSS, -- ona ncnt aces scedataci op ini i ee 100.0 100.00 10.000 There are two peculiarities in these soils ; the first, that they contain no carbonate of lime, and only traces of phosphate and sulphate ; and the next, that their iron is almost wholly in the state of carbonate of iron—a widely different compound from the simple oxides. They would be called poor yellow loams ; and cotton, tobacco, or sugar-cane would probably starve upon them: but we find that they suit the tea plant perfectly. It is a striking coincidence, that we should find our tea soils and those of China so exactly alike. I fear to grow prolix, though I have much more to say on the subject of soils ; I shall therefore break off, trusting that for the present I have amply shown the necessity of a careful examination of the soil; and that the commercial public, who can do so much for us in this way, will not neglect their own interests in procuring specimens of soils for us; for to go to work in ignorance of this great element of success, is absolutely to blunder on in the dark where chemistry would lend us an unfailing light. {We have also received specimens of the tea soils for analysis, but for want of space must postpone the notice of ourresults, which agree for the most part with Mr. PIDDINGTON’S. We have also an analysis of the Assam tea soil by Dr. McCLEeL- LAND.—Ep.] 3.—Action of Copper on Ink. A curious case lately came under my notice of the effect of saline mois. ture and copper united on writingink. The Bengal Bank referred to my examination three bank notes sent in by a native, who protested he knew not how the numbers and signatures had disappeared ; that he had left them in a small copper box on his departure into the country, having precisely noted the amounts and numbers—and that on his return they were thus altered. The Secretary of the Bank disbelieved the marvellous statement, because the endorsements remained untouched. I conceived it would be very easy, at first sight, to restore the writing by the usual method of slightly acidifying the paper, and then testing with prussiate of potash, which if the smallest traces of the iron remained, would develope the letters in blue. The only effect however of the appli- cation of this re-agent was to develope a copious red-brown upon the entire surface of the paper, proving how strongly it had been impregnated with a solution of copper :—in one of the three papers there was a general faint blue where the signature might be expected, but not the faintest trace of a number or letter could be recovered. It immediately occurred to me, that a solution of copper would in fact dissolve away the iron while it deposited the copper, and thus leave none of the former metal to be acted upon by the prussiate. To prove this point beyond a doubt, I select- 318 Miscellaneous. (May, ed paper containing blackfwriting that had stood for many years uninjured and placing it between two clean copper plates, allowed a current of acidulat- ed water to passthrough. In a minute or two the whole writing disappear- ed, and could not be restored by the prussiate ; although where the colour of the ink was merely discharged by acid, the usual effect was manifest. The native ink being carbonaceous remained uninjured throughout ; and where even aslight proportion of this ingredient was mixed with the English ink, the removal was so far prevented. This circumstance presents a ready mode of obviating such accidents for the future, forthe present is not, it appears, the first occasion of the kind. A poor native pilgrim took some notes to Jagannath in a small copper roll kept on his person for safety. After the customary period of bathing in the sea, he returned, and found his notes effaced, nor would the bank at that time make them good to the unfortunate holder. The preventive alluded to is simply to mix Bengali or Indian ink, half and half, with the English metallic ink. I have long been in the habit of doing so for the labels of mineral cabinets, where it is known that pyrites and other substances frequently obliterate the traces of common writing ink. J.P. Sec. 4.—Suspension Bridge at Fribourg in Switzerland. {Having alluded in the last number to this surprising work on the authority of private descriptions just received from relatives in Switzerland, we imagine our Engineer friends in this country (so many of whom we are proud to reckon among our readers) will be curious to hear more of it. We therefore hasten to extract the following account from JAMESON’S Edin. Phil. Journal*.—Ep. | The town of Fribourg is built on the left bank of the Sarine. Both sides of this small stream are very steep; and rise to the height of about 220f feet above its bed; and travellers coming from Berne to Fribourg were formerly obliged to desceud the hill, in order to reach a small wooden bridge which crosses the river, and immediately after by a steep ascent of about 200 feet to reach the top of the opposite bank before coming to the centre of the town. The passage through Fribourg thus occupied nearly an hour; but the case is changed since the erection of the new suspension bridge. These difficulties and delays were long considered the unavoidable conse- quence of the local situation of the town, until some bold spirits conceived the idea of uniting, by means of a suspension bridge, the steep banks of the Sarine. It was necessary that the bridge should pass over a great part of the town itself, and the scheme was considered completely utopian; yet certain of success, the authorities and some active citizens determined to submit the measure to the consideration of engineers of different districts. Various designs were accordingly offered, and the government of the canton gave the preference to that of M. CHaALtey, of Lyons, whose plan has since been executed under his immediate superintendence. The gateways at either end of the bridge are of Doric architecture, and are about 65 feet in height. The tops of their arches are about 42 feet above the roadway, and the arches have a span of 20 feet. The masonry of the gate is 46 * We take this opportunity of correcting a few errors in our observations on the Roof of St. Petpr’s Church in the Fort. 1. The central vault had not opened in the vertex from end fo end, but only a little towards the east end. We remembered having seen it apparently cracked, but this was merely from the knocking away of the Gothic moulding to examine its state—Its firm condition should have been an additional argument against condemn- ing it. 2. The present groined roof of the nave has noé a flat roof above it, this is con- fined to the side aisles. 3. We understand that the additional expence to Government has been only about one-third. We alluded however only to the roof, in supposing that the cost had been ‘‘ doubled or tripled.’?—Ep. + All the measurements have been reduced from French to English agreeable to: the ratios given in the Annuaire du Bureau des Longitudes. 1836.] Miscellaneous. 319 feet in width, and its thickness is about 20 feet; although the largest blocks of the hard limestone of Jura were employed in this work, iron cramps were used to complete the union of the stones, and above 24 tons of iron were used for this purpose. The width of the valley of the Sarine at the point where the bridge is built, or, in other words, the distance between the inner face-work of the two gate- ways on either bank of the river, and consequently the span of the suspended roadway, is 871 feet. It may be easily conceived that a good deal of doubt was entertained as tothe propriety of trusting to a span of so great an extent, and the idea of suspending the bridge at the middle at first occurred to M. CHALLEY as the best mode of forming the communication. On weighing the difficulty, how- ever, of obtaining a solid foundation for a pier 220 feet in height in the bottom of an alluvial valley, he soon relinquished this idea; and the bridge has there- fore been constructed with a single span of 871 feet. The roadway is suspended in the manner now universally known, by four cables of iron wire* passing over ie upper part of the gateways. Each cable consists of 1200 wires, each about ;1, inch in diameter, and 1140 feet in length. To avoid the difficulty of moving ‘these heavy cables, each wire was brought separately to its place, and they were united on the spot by the workmen, who were suspended during the work. Weare happy to add, that no accident of any kind occurred during this operation. It is calculated that the four united cables are capable of sustaining a weight equal to 2946 tons. The four cables are fixed in chain-pits or shafts cut out of the solid rock on either side of the river. In each of these pits four cables pass through a verti- cal cylindric chimney or pillar, which bears three heavy domes resting upon it, and at the same time abutting against grooves cut with much care in the rock to receive the springing stones. At the bottom of the pillars the cables are made fast to blocks of very hard stone, which are cubes of 63 feet. The cables, therefore, cannot slide without lifting the whole of these enormous buildings, strengthened as they are by their connexion with the solid rock. M. Cuautey began this work in the spring of 1832. He brought out of France, we think, only a foreman who had assisted him on former occasions, and engaging inthis arduous enterprise with the inexperienced workmen of the countryt who had never seen a suspension bridge, he completed the workin spite of all these difficulties ; and on the 15th October 1854, fifteen pieces of artillery drawn by forty-two horses, and surrounded by 300 persons, crossed the bridge through ; they united in one body as well on the middle as at the ends of the roadway. Nor was the least appearance of derangement of the structure discovered on the closest examination. Some days after the whole inhabitants of Fribourg and its suburbs passed over in procession, so that there were no fewer than 1800 per- sons on the bridge at the same time; and all classes of travellers, mercantile and curious, have since united with the natives of the Swiss cantons in testify- ing their entire satisfaction with the bridge. Although the severe proof to which constructor of this work subjected it, by loading the roadway with about 20 lbs. on each square foot, did not take place till the month of October 1835, yet it may safely be said that the colossal bridge of Fribourg was completely finished in two years anda half. The whole expense was only about £.24,000. The only bridge which can be compared for its dimensions with that of M. CnaALLey is the Menai or Bangor bridge, which joins the Isle of Anglesea to the main land of England. The largest vessels sail below it with full canvass set. It was constructed by the celebrated Engineer TeLForp; but the Menai bridge is only 550 feet in length, while the bridge of Fribourg is 871 feet. The roadway of Mr, TE.Forp’s bridge is about 106 feet above the level of high water, and M. CHAutry’s 167 feet above the level of the river Sarine. * It is not perhaps generally known that in all the suspension bridges in France ropes formed of wires are employed, instead of the solid links used in ‘England. + This remark reminds us of the Sagur bridge built by Col. Pr i ee oe under diffi- culties so much superior.—See vol. II. p. 538.—Ep. XV.—Meteorological Register. 320 {I poqenuisur Ajpenperd 19]eM YL} JWOPIAD SI JL YOM OWUT Eg. ‘juIUINIIsUT Mau ayy Jo A7ITIqGISUAS 19}va19 9Y3 0} aNp Ajyead st 419%} IN “IoJoCN0IeK, JOUIIOJ BY} JO UUINTOD UORsUaduIOD ayy Ur 4[NeJ AU 04 BIGeINQIII}e JOU st sInoY Om} ay} 7e Sutpear Jo aouorayrp ayy IVY? Surmays “yiuou ysvy sv ApJOVKe ‘pavpuLys AaUIIOJ AVL ULY) JOMOT GFO. “IN “d F Je PUL OLY. “WV OL 3 “UjUOW SIY] pOO}s Sey JojJauIOIeg piepuejs Mou ayL *puzz wor syjenbs Surueam *UII0}S Op oul *rvayla “wind ° 310 "und *Kzey op op “Timp "IAU ou *4S@010A0 op ‘imu Apnoya “TyawNd *JSBIIOAO *AQstur op op bP Cx) a} op op ‘IMU UUNO*I19 ou. BP ie) fy) ‘IMU ‘30g “Inu op “IMU "JPALYY op op *Azey *"7e11S “WIND *1[nuins “sn quit *1jMuNS *reayo ‘auy ‘ouy “a3s "und op op op *9ZdaI YSeTZ op op ‘ouy ‘azaaiq ysory =" Azey “Azey “I[Muind op "1S *19 op op *Azvy op op ‘umd "119 +4¥I}s ‘UND op *Ajstul op “nuns op op op op op ic) n) op op “Azey op op *pnos -auy cauy *pnos *TpauInd op op ‘guy op *1ynu ns * aso]a op op aug op und “119 *1e9]9 “rego *T]nuins > _ J co) = Cy - > = z 2 5. - z 3 ; a *IOYIBO AM “19M JO SSUIG ULY} BUOY B [OOO 03 adr Jo duiny v YIM ‘uLTd uOI[Eq at} UO paulejieose SEM qutod map oy 001 Suteq Jayem aind jo yey} ‘zp JO UOIsua, asvIAe UL popTalh YOIYM FFE] AT “ds JO ayep yey} 19332 pue—(suorsua} yo uuIN[OD das) JTas I ‘13 -ds Jo ysqZ ay} 03 dn ‘poe otunydtns Jo uoisuay snoanbe ayy uyeysaose 0} pasn Usaq YJUOUL SIy} sey Ta}aUI0Ieq Jom OUT “1e[nBaX UOOSUOW 0G‘T ,6°OIL { 39 LI FL (0'SL,.o°F1.0'FRIT 66 GFETEGE6S 88 8 (218/868 gcg* 0 ‘MS MS 100'T [OSSOL J0'3Z O9L1F'6 |6°€8'6'FG)009'—\G6L5 | ZePricoe. O*FL\1'9 lessigtZelees‘—levo® gest |ete< ‘0 “mS “MS BYAIL [€%2L | 18 |L‘bLl06 |F6L 9°16 E89°— GSB" jo9r leans | 98 |Z‘IZi2°Z \o*LZia‘ce|90s‘—l6g0* loge’ lepet ‘as "MS “a P'IZI 10°02 6L |S*ELir‘ 11 S08 B'e6|1e9'— ceas l6LF erp’ | $8 |Z°cZ\¢°9 le*eZlc‘Zalzes'—leao’ {ezo* eggs ‘as mS "MS fol'o jze‘rOr |P OL OSLLIL99 19°62 £68,695 —|696° lecc*|P1g* 8°EL\P°9 |6°RL19‘c8]Z09°—|ZFI‘GaleZ9° |Pege ‘as “MS = *- MS LOTTO [AOOL {8°18 68L1001/9'F8 ¢fcG|Z99'—|2a8° cee pZp* 0°8 |8°F8/80G/E19'—] 166°83|ce9* IPEct °MS “ms 3 BELL [a‘ol Sel Z‘98 ¢9g\eZ9°—|808* ers‘|19P‘ » \&°4 |6%68/6‘g8\995'—|Zo0" Jorg E09 ‘as “MS ‘au BGIL [P'aZ S°G1|h 68 1'26, S99'—/G08* |ens‘locrS > |9°8 l€‘Eal9‘Gs|l9s°—|6e0* esos jogs’ * MS *M “m [c0'0 jo'ber |p Sed O*S1\0°28 G°96|ZC9'—|988 jeEc*leLhs S [86 je‘tsle*gsi6ps—|eols |pZ9* | 189° ‘MN ‘as “as OSOIL JerZZ 66 |ZeLittsejers'—|sio* lzeg|1oss p |e IT/Stelo'16|FLo*—lnel® |6tL* |PL9° “as “as “a Of00T |POL 6°02/9°91/0‘e8 ¢°96|F89'—|898° |FLo‘|eecs * 109 |8°28]s‘ge|8eo—lgoel6a|P1Zs |PZ9° *s ‘8s “a SOIL |Z‘92 S‘TLI€‘T1/9°e8|0526|829'—|098 8s 99¢' |e 1% 106 |s°Esiens|s9z‘—|ece* |fP9t I819* AS SS OF6 0°08 Aap 16°68 0'95|99¢'—|e0e° |Z 1¢*|Ger* * |Axp |a‘zels‘oa|Zpa‘—|g0e* |IT19* |gegt ‘Ss "MS °S OFOL |S°08 wdF1‘e |8F8 z‘Z6|0re—I6Z15 {zar‘|6rrs 0'6 |8°€8|0%16|Zoz'—\FLe* |eos* |LZac* ‘Ss aS: Shs S66 808 32 IE ST8'F8 0°96, 90G'—|ZLEs* |cog'lerr’ L°8 (L°E8l6%o6|681'—lose* fol9s |6L¢° "a8 ‘ass "MSS c66 {2°18 loot L°cg efcg|FZ1°—|8c8* |\g9e‘|zoc* 1‘9 |1'F8}9%06/S91—Ila1b* |te9t |Z9g% ‘MS "MSS °MSS 896/808 0'9L/6°8 |F°CR OfcG|OPIS—|FESS 86h ‘10FPS 09 |U'PSITT6|Shr‘—|Zee* tee. |eecs oF “as ‘s BFOI S82 OL |5°28|\ T'9G|9ET—leee* | 12o*\gen< G*GLIOL IF*18/S°6818G1°—l99F* seo. |F6S‘ "as “33 “as SOUT 16°92 0'F 1/6508 $F6\860°—|IFPS {elg'leees Z°6 10°08|6‘88|601'—|Pes* SPL’ je69° i) *os ‘a OO |3°LZ OPLIEH1\S°08| Z°6|Z80'—|8ES* |e09‘|0z9‘ OL 9OTIEIBITT61080'—|F99* |Z8Z° IpPZ‘ "2S ‘as aS B°EZI OtLZ 0°0L)S*ZT 8°08 $'96|890°—lSt9* lelo‘je19% GFL /L°6 |IT8IT6glFoo'—|FoZ* joo’ ise‘ “MS ‘aS “MS OTL |6*GL 0°1¢/8°F3)9'¢4/9°GG|6E0'—|G0E* |c09'| FFG! £1 9°6 |8°6L|Z*p8|680'—l19* jea9* 099° “MS “MS = -°MS BGIT |S°22 $°09|/6°91|2°18|6°g6|620°—|Ztb* | Lz¢*|GoP* PCL £°8 |L°08)L°88\GT0—l6Zo° jelgs |T6S‘ “MS fMS MS Sel |L°8L “os|P0gle‘oZ e101 C00 |@ers leceslonrs 1°S1/0°01|8°6216'68|000'+ |ezo* j6go* jez9° | 6 “MS “MS ‘S BFOL 6°LL S*TLIO‘LZT\2'b8) 1ootZ00'4 {226° |Log‘ \oLe* BOLL [6°CBIL°68|0Z0+ |ezos jeeo* {209% 8 ‘Ss ‘Ss ‘Ss L°0GL j—— =| &8 S*2L|Z°G1)9°e8| ‘FG 10+ |S0S* l6teFors | S6 |T'cZic*z |F‘I8le‘agi tend peo’ loro’ leces L *MS “mS oT) 9°8L | 08 |0°09/L*E1/6e8/e‘gGg 6F0't leors Jrog'|pprs | 86 |x‘9Z/2°9 le‘eelaeelatost lopg* logs lees’ | 9 “AS “mS "MS SCOT JO°ZL | $8 19°69|0°ST/9°28/g'FG,0204 |oNSS frocloces | 6 le*cZ|c*Z lo‘TRlocoglZto4 \ge9* ler9* |16¢° g “MS “MS ° MAS O'GIT |hGL | OL [0°PS/6‘BI/0‘9L|Pscg\E90'+ lees’ lere*|oLe* | 68 Lorje*6£Z19°68\Zo0*+ logo'6slerg*® jee9s ‘4 “MS “MS = °MS VZIL [GZ ff 9g JO'TSIE‘LzI6‘1Z o 5» 816] 28] _o [selegezizasz| & | Sa (ESSe als elceiealcalie| & | ZS/RPSERS § = e le S SS leae BP le als eles a eam Seuio (> |anieoleg| & {8 SE alo 8 A o> Oe? ce PE | So [STBEBTCEES| § | Sq [BFlioadds [a(S "ZE28) § |se i asiSac| & % . . . tal QO a S 5 . ia 0 j=4 B} 24°] 8) SP g) & | Be Se) PR EE Pe| Se|" 8) 8 | es] Ss/See) F - 1 co ‘ o i Chap ec | ° *pulm joJSMIOUIIEY, ‘W °d fF 7% SUOTIVAIOSGO “WV OT 8 SuOoljeAresqo e Iajsisay > “9E81 ‘hoy fo yruopy ay? sof ‘nynaInQ ‘aoc hossp ay2 yo gday ‘uajsehayy jvovb0j0.10aja fT JOURNAL OF mee ASLATIC SOCTET YW. No. 54.—June, 1836. 1.—Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities, with an attempt to fix the dates of the appearance of the last four; being those of the Mahé Bhadra Kalpa, (or Present Age.) By Captain J. Forsxs, H. M. 78th Highlanders. 1. Of the Buddhas who appeared prior to the Mahd Bhadra Kalpa, the names of the earliest Buddhas mentioned in Buddhist writ- ings, are Brahma Buddha. Gautama Buddha*. Tanhankara. Medhankara. Saranankara. The following are the names of twenty-four Buddhas, who succes- sively foretold the advent and exaltation of the present Gautama Buddha. 1 Deepankara, 12 Sujato, 2 Kondhanyo, 13 Piadassi, 3 Mangalo, 14 Athadassi-Atthadassi, 4 Sumano, 15 Dhamma dassi, 5 Reweto, ? 16 Siddatto, 6 Sobhito, 17 Tisso, 7 Anomadassi, 18 Cusso, 8 Padumo, 19 Wipassi, 9 Narado, 20 Sikhi, 10 Padumutto, 21 Wissabhu. 11 Sumedo, Commencement of the Maha Bhadra Kalpa. 22 Kakusanda, 23 Konagamma, 24 Kasyiapa. * Not the Gautama Buddha now worshipped. 2T 322 Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. (June, Every Buddha, on having attained the object of his ambition, not only appropriated to himself, and received from his followers the innumerable titles of former Buddhas, (many of which were apper- taining to the gods,) but by visiting the same places, enjoining the same observances, retaining the same moral laws, and imitating all their actions; he identified himself with the meritorious deeds as well as with the moral doctrines of his predecessors. From these cireum- stances it is not easy to particularise the acts of any individual Buddha; and the difficulty has been increased by writers on this subject, who in general have preferred aimless dissertations to histo- rical incidents. Of Kaxusanpba, The first Buddha in the present dispensation, B. C. 3101*. At the commencement of this the (Mahd Bhadra Kalpa) most auspicious age of the world according to Buddhists, Kaxusanpa Buppua appeared in Magadhat, when Ksuemat was king, and the name of the capital was Kshemawattinuwara§. He visited Ceylon, which then was known by the name of Oja Dweepia, and first manifested himself from Adam’s peak, at that time called Dewiyakuta,. and on the summit of which he found memorials of the religion of former Buddhas were still existing. The Mahamuvuna gardens (com- prising the plain on which the most sacred edifices at Anuraadhapura are situated) was called Mahatirtiwana ; and to the eastward of these was the city Abhya, the residence of a king of the same name; here also was situated the Piyal Kula mountain, (afterwards called Mehint- allai) and a cave which the Buddha chose for his temporary abode. A pestilence which had swept off multitudes, having ceased at the time of Kaxusanpa’s arrival, the people, believing that it was by his miraculous interpositions, eagerly listened to the exhortations, and adopted the religion of their benefactor. The garden Mahiatirtiwana having been offered to the Buddha, he sent to Kshemawatti to pro- cure a branch of the Maharibodi tree; that it might remain as a memorial of himself, and an emblem of his religion. The tree was * The period not of his birth or death, hut of his becoming a Buddha. + Magadha, Bahar. + Kshema. § Kshemawatimuwara or Khemawatinuwara, probably Saewatnuwara, or Gaya; the great antiquity of which city may be inferred from the manner in which it is mentioned in the Ramdyana. In the transmigrations of Gautama Buddka, before he attained the perfection necessary for a Buddha, he is said to have been incarnate at this time as this very king Ksuuma, vide Siddhamasuma, Thupa Wanzae, &c. 1836.] Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. 828 sent by the king Ksuema under charge of the priestess RUCHITANANDA and the priest Mauaprwa, and accompanied by numerous priests, priestesses, and attendants; they arrived safely, and the tree was planted by the king Asuya according to the privilege ; and with the ceremonies which had been usual on such fortunate occasions by former monarchs of the island. The place selected for the tree was near the plain Sirisam4la, where the Buddha had once rested himself, and which in after times became the site of the Lowa Maha Paya”. Having preached from where the Thupa Ramat afterwards stood, and made innumerable converts; Kaxusanpa bestowed his drinking cup as a memorial to his followers ; appointed Rucuirananpa chief over 500 priestesses, and ManapEwa over 1000 priests, to maintain religion; then having seen the consecrated places of Ceylon, and revisited Deviya Kuta, he departed to the continent of India. From these particulars it would not appear that the commencement of the Mahé Bhadra Kalpa was marked by any general revolution in the face of nature; but the commencement of an era at that time may be rationally accounted for, by the successful ministry of Kaxkusanpa Buppna; this would also account for the same era being styled Kali yuga (age of vice) by the brahmans; and Mahé Bhadra ane (the most auspicious age) by the Buddhists. In support of my opinion for fixing so remote a period as the commencement of the Kali yuga B. C. 3101, as the era of this Buddha; I have the unanimous assertion of Buddhist writers, that he appeared at the commencement of the present age, or Maha Bhadra Kalpa. Sir Wimiu1am Jonzsi writing on this subject says, ‘‘ The best autho- rity after all is the Bhdgawat itself, in the first chapter of which it is expressly declared, that Buppwa the son of Jina would appear at Cicata§ for the purpose of confounding the demons, just at the beginning of the Kali yuga.”” Again I quote from the same authority]: '« Bhrigu says, From this Mzunu named SwA YAMBHUVA, ‘ or sprung from the self-existing,’ came six descendants, other Menus, or per- fectly understanding the scriptures, each giving birth to a race of his own all exalted in dignity, eminent in power— * At Anuraadhapura. In the remains of this building are still to be seen (1600) rough stone pillars. + At Anuraadhapura. A Dagobah and Wiharé, now in ruins; the slender, but elegant columns of which, have not inaptly been compared to the Areka tree. + Sir Witi1aMm Jonzs, Asiatic Researches, VII. 122. § Bahar. || Sir Witt1am Jones, Laws of Menu, Article on the Creation, Section 61. oa 2 324 Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. [Junz, « Sw4rochisha,—Auttami,—Tamasa,—Raiwata likewise, and Chac- shusha beaming with glory, and Vaivaswata child of the Sun.” Chacshusha is evidently the same name as Kakusanda, the final letters being a usual honorary affix in Cingalese. He is called by Brentury, Chaksooso*, by Witrorp Chashushat, by Witson Chakshusat, by Cotresrooke Cucuch’handa§; he is also called Karkutchandj, Prachanda Dewa§], and Krakuchanda** ; and appeared as a Menu or Muni, (which in Cingalese is a term applied to a Saint or a Buddha,) previous to Vaivaswata, who by many of the most eminent chronolo- gers has been considered identical with Noah, B. C. 2984.t+ The Cingalese works state that Kakusanpa was of the race of Samata Raja. The first Menu, also the first king, and elected by the people, after they had lost immortality and become subject to earthly passions}t. At the time of Kaxusanpa Buppua, Adam’s peak was called Dewi- yakuta, (peak of God;) when Konacamma Buppua visited it B. C. 2100, the name was Samantkuta, (peak of Saman.) This appellation I should infer from Cingalese history it obtained from Saman§§, _ brother of Rama ; whose era is fixed by the date of the partial sub- merging of Ceylon, B. C. 2387, which is three years previous to the date of the flood||||, and thus refers Kakusanpa Buppua to a period preceding that event. The following quotation is from Topn’s Annals of Rajasthan ; “Though a passage in the Agni Puran indicates that the line of Surya, of which Icsuwaca was the head, was the first colony which entered India from Central Asia, yet we are compelled to place the Patriarch BuppHa as his cotemporary, he being stated to have come from a distant region, and married to Exua the sister of losuwaca.” Referring to the era of R&ma as already given, viz. B. C. 2387, and * Remarks on the eras and dates of the ancient Hindus, Asiatic Res. V. t+ Wiurorp’s Chronology of the Hindus, Asiatic Res. V. ~ Sanscrit Dictionary. § CoLEBROOKE’s observations on the Jains, Asiatic Res. IX. l| Asiatic Journal, 1832, p. 380. . ¥ Asiatic Journal, 1834, p. 220. ** Asiatic Journal, No. 48, p. 87. tt Dr. Luoyn’s Bible chronology. tt Jananda Pota, (Cingalese work.) §§ Saman, LacksHMANA, brother of Rama. I] According to Dr. Luoyp’s Bible chronology, Noah was born B. C. 2984, and the flood commenced when Noah had lived six hundred years, two months and seventeen days, Gen. vii. 11 ; or B. C. 2384. 1836.] Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. 325 allowing 20 years as the length of each reign of the thirty-six so- vereigns from Ra’ma up to Icsuwaca, would give the date B. C. 3107: as the time of Icsuwaca, and confirm the above passage regarding Buppua being contemporaneous with this monarch; and a similarity of sound, as well as coincidence of date, tempts me to suggest the possible identity of Icsawaca with Ksuzma or Ksnemaxa, who is‘ described as being the royal patron of Kaxusanpa Buppna*. To explain why I have fixed the era of Ra’ma, B. C. 2387. The Rajawalia states that from the time of Rawena until the era of Gautama Buppna (at which time a connected Cingalese history com- mencest) 1844 years had elapsed. In several Cingalese works} the partial submerging of Ceylon is mentioned as having occurred im- mediately after the death of RawzNna; and the consequent decrease in the circumference of the island is stated to have been 133 yoduns or 2128 miles§. It was in this visitation that the splendid capital Sri Lanka-pura (which was situated to the north-west of the present island) is said to have been overwhelmed, and ‘* Towers and temples through the closing wave A glimmering ray of ancient splendour gave.’’ Of Konacamma, The second Buddha of the present dispensation, B. C. 2099. At a time when long continued draught had caused scarcity and sick- ness in Ceylon, Konacamma Buppwa appeared||; and seasonable rains having fallen, the consequent prosperity of the country was at- tributed to his power and presence. At this time the island was called Wara-dwipa, and the peak on which he, according to the cus- tom of his predecessors, commenced his ministry in Ceylon, was * Thupa Wansae, Buddha Wansae, Mahawansae, Saddhama Sumana, Raja. walia, Rajakatnaikara. + Translated and arranged by Mr. Turnour, from B. C. 543 to A. C. 1815. t Rajawalia, Kadaimpota, Lank& Wistrie. The Kadaimpota also records a similar calamity as having reduced Lanka to its present size, B. C. 267. § In Gurziarr’s History of China, the following near coincidence of dates with regard to the deluge occurs. ‘‘ We are now arrived at a period which Con- Fucius himself has delineated.’’ ‘““Yaou began to reign B. C. 2337." ‘‘ There is an extraordinary catastro-: phe mentioned in the reign of Yaou, which is one of the greatest events in the history of mankind, the deluge. Mane-tze (Mencius) in speaking of the same: event, remarks, that at the time of Yaou the deluge had not yet entirely sub- sided. During the reign of Yaou,yu commenced the draining of the waters, and the confining of the rivers to their beds.’’ . || Kanaxa-munt, Asiatic Journal, 1834, p. 220. 326 Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. (JuNE, called Samanta-kuta or Samanella; from thence he visited the capi- tal Wadhamanika, situated on the south side of the Maha-Mewuna gardens*, which then bore the name of Maha-Antowana, and being acknowledged asa Buddha the king Samurpua dedicated to him these gardens by the name of Anopawana. At the request of the prophet, the king Sosyana sent from the continent of India a branch of the Udambara tree, accompanied by many priests and priestesses ; the whole were received with due honor, and the Udam- bara tree planted by the king Samurpua became the emblem of the new Buddha. Konacamma Buppua (after having visited the various places consecrated by the presence of former Buddhas in Lank&) gave charge over the priestesses to the chief priestess KanaKADANTA, and over the priests having placed SupHama, he bestowed his girdle as a memorial to his followers, and departed for the city of king SopHana. Regarding the date which I have assigned to this Buddha, viz. B. C. 2099. I have connected the reign of Prapyora king of Magadha, with the time of Konacamma Buppua, by the various accounts of the incarna- tions and transmigrations of Gautama Buppua ; these all state that at the time of Konacamma, Gautama was incarnate as that fortunate king of Magadha, Parwartia or Parauyatat; whom I consider the same as Prapyota of Jones and Bentiey, Prapuyotra of WitForp, and Pripvor’HANA of Top. These authorities all agree that in the reign of that king a Buddha appeared, although they have all assigned differ- ent dates to the event. I follow that of Sir Wm. Jonzs, who gives his authority; a quotation from the Bhagawatamrita. ‘‘ He (Bud- dha) became visible the thousand and second year of the Kali yuga being past.” “PurANngAYA son of the twentieth king (of Magadha) was put to death by his minister, Sumaca, who:placed his own son Prapyora, on - * At Anuraadhapura. Py + Lest the father of Prapyota being a murderer, and himself an usurper, should be made objections against this being the king PARwamia, in which Buddhist writers have declared thatGautama Buppua was incarnate, I quote the life of the most revered of Buddhist sovereigns, DHARMaSOKA, as it is written by Buddhist priests, and which may be thus abridged : He commenced his career as Asoka, a prince and a br4hman ; attained power by becoming a fratricide and usurper; B. C. 323, retained it as a zealous Buddhist, and died king of India, at Patalipura, (Patna.) His memory has been extolled by all Buddhist writers, and his name and deeds are sanctified by the appellation DHARMA (the righteous) prefixed to AsoKa. We also find, that GAuTAMa was believed to have been incarnate as SAKYA, a chief of the YaksHAs, and as AruLa a king of the Nagas. 1836.] Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. 327 the throne of his master; and this revolution constitutes an epoch of the highest importance; first, because it happened, according to the Bhagawatamrita, two years exactly before BuppHa’s appearance in the same kingdom; next, because it is believed by the Hindus to have taken place 2100 B.C.; and lastly, because a regular chronology, according to the number of years in each dynasty, has been esta- blished from the accession of Prapyora to the subversion of the ge- nuine Hindu government.” In the Cingalese accounts we find Kona- GAMMA received that protection and assistance from the king Sosna- na*, which his predecessor had received from the king Ksozma. In the list of kings of the line of Buddha, of the Ooru or Oorvasu branch, in Colonel Ton’s tables, and about the year B. C. 2050, we find the name of the king SovaHana; and in supposing SopHana and SovaHANA identical, there is neither discrepancy of dates nor designation, for Konacamma Buppua only appeared B. C. 2099, and as there is no letter v in Cingalese, Sovanana would be written Sosnana, that being the nearest transmutation. Of KA&syapa, The third Buddha in the present dispensation, B. C. 1014. On Kasyapa visiting Ceylon, he found it called Mada-dwipa; and the capital Wisala, situated on the west of the Maha-Mewuna gardens, was the residence of the king Jayanta. The people were divided into two hostile parties, the one headed by the next heir to the throne, SamippHo; the other by the king’s ministers : the armies had approach- ed each other, and were only prevented from engaging by a dreadful conflict of the elements, accompanied by darkness, and succeeded by showers of fiery sparks. Kasyapa at this time descended from the peak, which was then called Subhakuta, and having succeeded in reconciling the contending parties, was acknowledged as a Buddha, and the Mah-Mewuna gardens were offered to him by the name of Sagara gardens. From Brahmadatta of the Okakat race, king of Baranas{, he procured a branch of the Nigrdédha tree, which was accompanied by numerous priests and priestesses ; and was planted in the consecrated ground of Sagara, by the king Jayanra, with the ceremonies which had been performed on such occasions by former kings. Kasyapa after converting the people, and visiting the places hallowed by the presence of former Buddhas, bestowed as a relic to his followers, the bathing cloth which he had used; then giving charge over the 500 principal priestesses to the chief of them Sup- HAMMA; and over 1000 priests placing Sarwamanpa to maintain religion, he departed from the island to return to Baranas. Regard- * SoBHANA, + Okaka, same as Ikshwaka. + Benares. 328 Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. (Jung, ing the date which I have assigned to the commencement of Kasya- pa’s ministry :-— In a fragment of a poem which has the appearance of having been rendered into Cingalese from Sanscrit, called the Leechawee history, Braumapatta, king of Baranas, is mentioned, and that Buddha was then residing in that city. The date is given in round numbers 2000 years after the commencement of the Kali yuga, which corresponds with . SUE Ee: ER RP bE, ds B. 'Cz+ BOL Passes a fiases of Rhode aon the abe shies bicleteel en eS The Chinese place the birth of Buddha*, ...........sececevccevceseee 1036 Mi ABA, oe cect can oines « ke Reaas CRemeS ns otk ait es gk Matonan Sin, a Chinese Historian, . .c0sc00 sce s+ 0 sive ade cdes Bom eee De Guignes, from Mongolian records*, ......+.5se0+ eeccseeseccoveses 1027 Japanese Encyclopedia fixes his birth, ........esccsccsscccceccccecee 1027 Ditto dittothigideath, 4. 2). ed ORAS eee Inserigtionjat Buddha, Gya™,\i 0210. 5 «csislse'clce ig sjsicieice'e voc ulee oe lea phoralatee ae Eee Mongol ’Chronolapy of. )Pallasycus. 2 isoyes adie, soa nlaidn 04 /enlenlelniecicloisieels mame Cassiano by the calculations of the Tibetians appeared], ......eseeeeee. 959 Dittorditto died), 7.016 sisicle.sre opsis .< oya[y heseibitetowie' sas cl pieisis intel salsa ren eee Re OU Giorgi, death of Buddlia,. . 52 o0.c0 cc vec coos ones «0 00 wists ols vs eec en oo La mort de Bouddha, on plutot de Shakyamuni le premier de Bouddhas, est placée par un monument d’une authenticité incontestable, L’Ency- clopedie Japonaise, en 950 avant notri Ere§, .....e ce cece se eecece ee 950 From these concurring dates, I am inclined to believe, that the death of Kasyara Buppua occurred about B. C. 950, and the earlier dates given above, are either that of his birth or of his having become a Buddha. Of Gautama, he fourth Buddha in the present dispensation—Became Buddha, B. C. 588; died, B. C. 543. B. C. 543 is the era of Gautama Buppua, and generally used in the religious and historical works of Ceylon. It is this Gaurama whose moral doctrines are recognised as the rule of conduct ; whose name is still invoked as the present Buddha by the Cingalese; and the existing records of whose life and minis- try are so minute and credible, that they may fairly claim to be admitted into genuine history. The following are a few of the most remarkable events of his life, particularly as connected with Ceylon. * From Sir W1LL1Am Jongs’s Chronology of the Hindus. + Prinsep’s Chronological Tables. “{ Witrorp’s Chronological list of the kings of Maghada. § Messrs. Bournour et Lassen. 1836.] Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. 329 Prince SippHarra, the son of king SuppHopana, by one of his queens Mya, was born at Kapilawasta or Kumbilwatpura, a town of Central India* ; at 16 years of age he was married to the princess Yasopar4 (called also SusHADDAKACHCHANA), and when 29 years of age his wife brought him a son (who was called Ranuta, and after- wards became a priest). On the same day that his son was born, SrppHarta forsook his family and country, and commenced a life of penance and meditation, which he continued for six years in the forest of Oorawelle ; during this period existing solely by charity, and feed- ing on wild fruits. He fasted for 49 days, and after a severe struggle having finally overcome Marya and his attendant host of demonst, became a Buddha by the name of Gautama. Gautama Buppua proceeded to commence his ministry, and first expounded his doctrines at the grove called Isipatana in the neigh- bourhood of the city of Baranas. In the ninth month after he became Buddha, Gavurama arrived at the town of Mahawelligam{ the capital of the Yakshas in Ceylon, and which then covered a space twelve miles in length and eight in breadth on the banks of the Mahawelliganga. The majority of the Yakshas appear to have been converted, and to have driven those who adhered to their ancient superstitions into an island called Yakgiri. Tradition places this island to the south-east of Ceylon, and the legends which are preserved (on that coast) of sunken cities, may refer to some territory, of which the Bass rocks are all that now remain. A portion of the hair of the Buddha was enclosed in a golden cas- ket, over which a Dagoba was built at Myungana§ in Mahawelligam, and this relic is said to have prevented the return of the Yakshas|| (devils) whom Buddha had expelled : i. e. the worship he had super- ceded. * Madhya-désia. + It might be translated overcame death and deadly sin; for (mara) and (mara) signifies death, destroying, lust; also a name of Kama, god of love. CxiouGu’s Cingalese Dictionary. + Where Myungana now stands in Beentinne. § Myungana is still a sacred place of pilgrimage near the village of Been- tinne; the Ddgoba originally built by the chief of the converted Yakshas, was afterwards enriched by the addition of the Griwa (neck bone) relic, and enlarged to the height of twelve cubits; it was increased by the king Cuuta Buya to thirty cubits, and Dataigaimind, between 164 B.C. and 140, raised it to the height of ninety cubits. {| The superstitions of the Yakshas had again become general in the time of PanpuKABHyYA (100 years after Buddha), and continued to prevail until B. C. 307. Pia ty 330 Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. [Junt, The second visit of Gautama Buppua to Ceylon was B. C. 581; on which occasion he reconciled two rival princes of the Nag4s, CauLopra and Manopra, who had been carrying on a destructive war. These . princes were near relations, and their capitals of Kellania* and Wadenawagallat were situated in that part of the western coast of Ceylon which was then called Naga-diwinia. On the termination of their feud, the throne for which they had contended, was made an offering to the Buddha, and enshrined by the Nagas in the Dagobah of Kellaniat to be worshipped as a memorial of their teacher. Gautama Buppua a third time came to Ceylon B. C. 577, and hav- ing revisited Kellania, from thence proceeded to Samanella (Adam’s peak), Diganakhya in Ruhunu, the eight places at Anuraadhapura, and all others which had been sanctified by former Buddhas; then took his final departure from the island, and proceeded to his principal residence in the temple of Jaitawanarama in Saewatnuwara§ of Magadha. Gautama Buppua continued to be indefatigable in pub- lishing his doctrines, and to be eminently successful in increasing his followers, and at last died placidly at a short distance from the town of Kusin4ranuwara in Malwa, in the 81st year of his age, and B. C. 543. Of Maittri, THE EXPECTED BUDDHA, WHOSE ADVENT IS FORETOLD BY BUDDHISTS. Buddhists believe that to complete the predestined number of the Buddhas, allotted for the Maha Bhadra Kalpa, and to renovate the faith of a degenerating race, Mairri BuppuHa will be born of Winare Dewt1, who in her last transmigration was the daughter of KELLania Tissa Ra’sa, and who about B. C. 220 became queen of Magam|, and wife of Kawantissa RAga. The emblematic tree which will be selected by Marrri’ Buppua, and become sacred from the time of his appearance until the end of this Kalpa, it is predicted will be the Nagaha or iron-wood tree. * Kellania, four miles from Colomba. + Wadenawagalla in the Swinkorles. t This Dagoba still exists. § Buddha Gyais probably Saewatnuwara, and contains amidst its shapeless ruins the remains of GAuTAMa’s residence ; as well as the wreck of those splen- did temples which were built to commemorate his worth, or cover his relics. || The ruins of the city of Magam, extend over a considerable space, and in- clude several large Dagobas ruined and overgrown with jungle; they lie on the left bank of the Menick Ganga, and between Katragama and Hambantotti ; from the latter place to Magam is fourteen miles. 1836.] Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. 331 II.—Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. By JoHannzs Avpat, Esq., M. A. S. ' A singular account of a certain colony of Hindus, that emigrated from India into Armenia, is recorded in the historical work of ZENosBtus, a Syrian Bishop and primate of the convent called Innaknian*, who flourished in Armenia in the beginning of the third century. The narrative was evidently written in Syriac, and intended for the Syrian nation, though the writer seems to have subsequently re-written the same in the Armenian language, but with Syrian characters; the letters of our alphabet having been invented a century posterior to that period. By a very long residence in Armenia, ZENOBIUS was success- fully enabled to acquire a perfect knowledge of the Armenian language, in which his history has been handed down to us. This interesting work was published in Venice, in the year 1832, being carefully collat- ed with five manuscript copies, written in different periods. I shall, in the present memoir, first give a description of this Hindu colony from the narrative of ZeNozrus, and then an account of the religious wars waged between them and the first propagators of Christianity in Armenia. “This people had a most extraordinary appearance. They were black, long-haired, ugly and unpleasant to the sight. They claimed their origin from the Hindus. The story of the idols, worshipped by them in this place, is simply this: Demretrt and Kersaneryt were brothers, and both Indian princes. They were found guilty of a plot formed against their king, Dinasxkry§, who sent troops after them, with instructions either to put them to death or to banish them from the country. The felons, having narrowly escaped the pursuit, took a shelter in the dominions of the king Vatarsaces, who bestowed on them the principality of the country of Taron. Here a city was founded by the emigrants, who called it Vishap or Dragon. Having * bE ULUybiLy Innaknian, literally meaning, nine springs or fountains, which existed in the place. tT PEUESP DEMeEtR isa Greek name, probably borrowed by the Hindus from the Bactrians or the descendants of the troops of ALEXANDER the Great. t ShULLUE KeIsAnry is derived from Fel esd Keis, which both, in Armenian and Persian, signifies a ringlet or a curling forelock. Thus we have in RICHARDSON peel phe ogunss locks fragrant as amber. § PhYULUPE Dineskry is the name of the Indian king mentioned in the Armenian text, for which I have in vain searched in all old historical records and chronological tables of the dynasties of ancient India. 2u 2 332 Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. (June, come to Ashtishat*, they raised idols there in the name of those they worshipped in India. Fifteen years after their settlement in the country, both of the brothers were put to death by the king, for what fault I do not know. He conferred the principality on their three sons, named Kuar, Mrcuti and Horain. The first built a village, and called it after his own name Kuars. The second founded a village on the plain, and called it after his own name Meghii. The third also built a village in the province of Palunies, and gave it the appellation of Horains. After a certain space of time, Kuar, Mucuti and Horan, of one accord, resolved on changing their abode. They sojourned on the mountain called Karki, which to a delightful temperature added a fine and picturesque appearance. It abounded in game, herbs, wood, and all that is adapted for the comfort and convenience of man. Here they raised edifices, where they set up two idols, respectively dedicat- ed to Kersaney and Demetr, in honor of whom attendants were appointed out of their own race. Kuisanry had long flowing hairs, in imitation of which his priests allowed the hairs of their heads to grow, which custom was afterwards prohibited by authority. This class of people, on being converted to Christianity, were not deeply rooted in their faith. They durst not, however, openly profess the religion of their pagan ancestors. They continued, therefore, dissem- blingly to allow their children to wear plaited hairs on the crown of their heads, in remembrance of their idolatrous abominations.” The description of this idolatrous colony is entirely accordant with the colour, appearance, manners and religion of the present Hindus. The cause of their emigration from India is distinctly stated by Zenosivus, but through what route or in what period they found their way into Armenia, it is very difficult to determine. It is, how- ever, clearly evident that they had formed a permanent settlement in our country prior to the commencement of the Christian era. Vauar- SACES, under whose government they found protection, was grand- son of Arsaczs, the Parthian, and brother of Arsaczs the Great, by whom he was appointed king over Armenia, Anno Mundi 3852, ora century and a half before Christ. I shall now proceed to give a translation of Zenosius’s narrative of the religious wars of this Hindu people with the first Christian converts of Armenia. “TLE Sreu.s Ashtishat was a city in Armenia Major. It was socalled from wcs sacrifice, and TALS many : for innumerable sacrifices were offered there to the gods and goddesses of Armenia. It might, perhaps, be well compared te Jagannath or Kali Ghat of this country. 1836. ] Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. 333 *‘ Having taken our departure from Thordan, we intended to pro- ceed to Carin and Harc. St. Gregory was informed by some of the, princes of the existence of two idolatrous temples in the province of Taron, the inhabitants of which offered sacrifices to the devil. Here- upon, our course was changed to the place where these temples stood, with a view to effect their demolition. Having arrived in the country of Palunies, in the extensive village called Keisaney, near the town of Kuars, we met there some of the heathen priests. Having ascertained from the prince of Hashtens that on the following day the great images of Keitsangy and Demetr were to be levelled to the ground, they repaired to the temples in the dead of the night, and removed from thence all the treasure into subterraneous places. Intimation of the impending danger was forthwith sent to the heathen priests in Ashtishat, who were earnestly urged to collect warriors, and quietly join them on the morrow in order to také an active part in the battle, which was to be fought by the great Kuisanny with the apostate princes. In like manner the inhabitants of Kuars were also instigated to lie in ambush in the hedges of gardens, and ruffians were sent to waylay the Christians in the forests. The head priest, called Arzan*, and his son Demertr, took the command of the troops stationed at Kuarstan, and halted there, awaiting the arrival of reinforcements from other quarters. On the following day they made a descent to the skirts of the mountain, in order to indulge in marauding and pillage. “St. Gregory, accompanied by the prince of Arzruniest, the prince of Anzevazies, and the prince of the house of Anglt, and followed by a small number of troops amounting to about three hundred, ascended the mountain in the third§ hour of the day, where Arzan lay in am- bush. They had not the least knowledge of the position of the ene- - my, and never expected to meet him there. Ona near approach to | UPI, Arzan, literally means in Armenian, statue, image or idol. i UlSPARUPP Arzrunies was the title of a satrapy in Armenia, and signifies eagle-bearers. The Satraps known by this appellation, used to carry eagles before the Arsacian king VALARSACEs and his successors. tULUbeLSihy Angitin, the genitive of which is Lure 9, SILY Anglian, means the house of Ang! |14,9.9_ or vulture. This was a title of distinction, conferred ona noble family in Armenia, compared to that bird of prey, on account of the ugliness and deformity of their features. § This is to be understood according to the mode of the computation of time, obtaining in eastern countries. The hour mentioned here, corresponds with nine o’clock in the morning. Thus we have in the Acts: ‘* For these are not drunken, as ye suppose, seeing it is bu¢ the third hour of the day,”’ 334 Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. [JunE, the acclivity of the mountain, Arzan and Demerr rushed out from the ambuscade, and on a signal being given, the trumpets of war were sounded, and a furious attack was instantly commenced. This was enough to alarm the Christian princes, whose horses took fright from the sound of the trumpets, and began to neigh and plunge, and create the greatest confusion. Hereupon, the prince of the house of Angl raised his voice and cried, ‘ Prince of the Seunies, step forward and see whether these are the troops of the prince of the north.’ The necessary inquiries were made, but no satisfactory information was obtained. The prince of the Seunies returned and insisted on the removal of St. Gregory and his companions to a secure place, lest, he feared, they might be made prisoners by the enemy, which event would surely excite the anger of the kmg, and bring the Christian princes into disgrace. ‘Send then,’ added he, ‘a trusty person to recall our troops, for the number of the enemy is alarmingly great, and innumerable flags are seen waving in the air.’ ** No sooner was the warning given, than the prince of the house of Angl, gave charge of St. Gregory to the prince of the Mocks, with instructions to convey him to the castle of Olkan, and there to await the issue of the battle. Information of this was immediately sent to the troops. The prince of the Mocks, accompanied by St. Gregory, descended the declivity of the mountain, wishing to repair to Kuars. They met with great resistance on the way from a party of the enemy, but by the help of Providence, at last succeeded in effecting their escape. We were, however, pursued by a number of villagers, but being mounted on swift horses, took refuge in the castle of Olkan, where we met with a timely assistance and protection. The villagers having proceeded to the town of Kuars, informed its people of the place of our retreat. The castle of Olkan was, therefore, instantly besieged. We were thus seized with apprehensions for our safety, and forthwith dispatched a messenger with letters to the prince of the house of Angl, conveying him information of the peril- ous situation in which we were then placed. He immediately sent us four thousand troops, all selected from the army, and furnished with swords, who crossed the river and reached their destination on the following day. After a siege of three days, they took possession of the town of Kuars, and reduced its walls to ruins, and razed all its houses to the ground. The people of the place, that had escaped the stroke of the sword, were conducted to Meghti. ‘* The Christian princes being apprised of this, ascended the moun- tain, and descried ARZAN in ambuscade with four hundred men, more or less. They immediately made a sortie on the enemy, and put 1836.] Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. 335 Arzan to flight. The Armenian troops having heard the din of battle, immediately crowded to the mountain. Upon this, Arzan began to rally, and heap on the Armenian princes torrents of abuse. ‘Step forward, said he, ‘ ye base apostates, who disbelieve the gods of your ancestors, and are opposed to the glorious Krrsanzy. Do you not know that it is Ketsanzy that wages war with you this day, and will subdue you under our hands, and inflict you with blindness and death?’ The prince of Arzrunies, having rushed forward, said, *Thou worthless bully, if you fight on behalf of your gods, you deceive yourselves ; if you fight on behalf of your country, you only display your own folly. Behold the prince of the house of Ang], and the prince of the house of Seunies, and the other nobles, whom you know too well.’ To which Demerr, the son of Arzan, thus replied: ‘Listen unto us, ye Armenian princes! it is now nearly forty years since we are-engaged in the service of the mighty gods. We have an experience of their powers, and are assured that they fight with the enemies of their servants. We are not, however, able to cope with you in battle. This is the habitation of the king of Armenia, and ye are his nobles. But, be it known to you all, that though it is out of our power to conquer you, yet we prefer to die a glorious death to-day in upholding the honor of our gods, than to live and see their temples polluted by you. Death is, therefore, more welcome to us than life.” Having spoken this, Demerr challenged the prince of the house of Angl to-a single battle. «The prince of the house of Ang] having accepted the challenge, made an instantaneous attack on ArzAN, who inflicted a wound with his spear on one of the thighs of his antagonist, and was on the point of levelling him to the ground. The prince of the house of Angl having, by an adroit movement, regained his position, thus addressed the enemy: ‘Know thou this, Arzan! that this spot must receive the appellation, by which you are called; for here thou art destined to fall, and be fixed like a statue!’ No sooner was this spoken, than he lifted up his arm, and aimed a stroke of his sword on his right shoulder, by which his head, together with his left shoulder and leg, was instantly severed from the body. Thus fell ARzAN, and was fixed like a statue on the ground. He was buried on the very spot, which to this day is called, after his name, Arzan. *‘ Hereupon the heathen army was immediately swelled by re-inforce- ments sent by the priests from the city of Vishap. The people of Par- tukh, and Meghti and Astaghon, also crowded to the spot of battle, 336 Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. (June, and the number of the army was thus increased to five thousand four hundred and fifty. “‘ Their arrival in the summit of the mountain, created great noise and confusion in the ranks of the two armies. The heathen priests made a simultaneous attack on the Armenian troops, and by a vigor- ous pursuit after them made them descend the declivity of the moun- tain anc fly towards the village. The villagers, who lay in ambush, having encountered our troops, stopped their progress, and these being thus hemmed in on both sides, were put to the sword. But the prince of the house of Angl having passed through the ranks of the heathen priests, directed his course towards the mountain, where several men were kept in reserve, and caused great mischief by flinging stones at our horses. Dsmerr having observed the prince of the house of Angl ascend the mountain, left the rest below and pursued his steps. He was immediately followed by his troops, all mounted on horses. «The battle was resumed on the top of the mountain. Our army waited in expectation of further re-inforcements. The whole of our troops had not yet assembled on the spot, of whom four thousand remained in charge of the prisoners in Meghti, and three thousand proceeded to Basain and Hare. The rest were given to pillage and marauding in the field. Ere decisive blows were exchanged, the approach of night put a stop to further operations. Both armies were, therefore, obliged to encamp on the spot and wait the dawn of the morn. On the following day the expected Armenian troops made their appearance; and a re-inforcement of about five hundred men, from the city of Tirakatar, came to the assistance of the heathen priests. The number of both armies were swelled in this manner. The heathens amounted to six thousand nine hundred and forty-six men, while the Armenians were only five thousand and eighty in all. The trumpets were sounded, and the battle commenced on both sides. In the beginning the Armenians proved victorious over the heathens. But the prince of Hashtens, formerly attached to the party of Demzrtr, but now commanding the Armenian army, deserted his post, and joined the ranks of the heathen priests with seven hundred men. The Armenians met with a formidable antagonist in this deserter. Our troops were seized with fear and dismay at the desertion of this brave warrior, whose superiority in military operations was generally acknowledged, and whose extraordinary prowess had rendered him an object of respect and admiration with all the Armenian princes. The rebel attacked our army with the greatest fury, and was flushed with the success of his arms. Hereupon the prince of the Seunies 1836. ] Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. 337 cried to him in a contemptuous voice, ‘Thou whelp ofa wolf* ! thou beganst to display the disposition of thy father, and feel a delight in feasting upon carrion.’ The rebel replied in a bold and reproachful manner, ‘ Thou vainglorious eagle}! thou only piquest thyself on the power of thy wings; but if thou ever fallest in one of my traps, thou shalt soon feel the weight of my arms.’ The prince of the Seunies could not brook this taunt, but furiously rushing on him, directed the axe which he held in his hand to his helmet, and having driven him to some distance from his troops, pursued him to the eastward of the mountain. Here, opposite to the convent of Innak- nian, he brought him to the ground by a violent shove from the horse ; and having himself alighted, instantly severed his head from the body, which he precipitated headlong from the mountain. ‘ Now,’ said he, ‘let vultures behold you, and know that the eagle has killed the hare.’ Immediately after this, the prince of the Seunies returned to the army; and the place where the prince of Hashtens fell, is to this day called by the appellation of the Kagles. «« The Armenians were emboldened by this success, and the prince of Arzrunies attacked the head priest of Ashtishat, called Meraxus, whom he dragged to the summit of the mountain, commanding a view of the battle. Mrraxns here made a violent resistance, and inflicted a wound on one of the thighs of his pursuer. The latter, burning with rage and a spirit of revenge, levelled a stroke of his _ scymetar on his neck, which he cut off from the body. He threw down the headless trunk, and the spot where the deed was committed, received the appellation of Metsakol. ‘«‘ The prince of { Arges seeing this, consulted his safety in flight, and, secured himself in a place of concealment. The prince of Arzru- nies, seemingly not noticing this, gently approached the fugitive, and made a sudden and unexpected attack on him. The wretch fled into the forest, where the sharp point of one of the branches of a tree, having passed through his breast, hastened his fall and dissolution. The conqueror returned with the horse of the dead, and the spot was called the vale of Arges. «Immediately after his return he found Demure and the prince of * HLELILUIP PRY Gailakoretin, literally, means a young wolf, or the cub of a wolf. TUL7 3 WPoNhN3s Qe is an abusive mode of expression in Armenian, similar to that of Y¥"Q TAL QULG “ou son of a dog. pC HILyy UWPLARS Prince of Arges was another title of nobility in Armenia, literally signifying the prince of the bears. 2x 838 - Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. [Junez, the house of Ang] wrestling together with the greatest fury. Having made a violent rush, he chopped off the right shoulder of the former, and threw it on the ground. The severed head he carried away in his knapsack. The victorious Armenians put the heathen army to the sword, and the number of the killed amounted to one thousand and thirty-eight. The rest were made prisoners, and stripped of all they were possessed of. The son of the prince of the Mocks fell in the battle by the hand of Demxrr, and this melancholy event spread universal sorrow among the Armenian troops. «The fall of Demerr was made a signal of cessation from slaughter, and the trumpet of peace was sounded by order of the prince of the Seunies. The two armies immediately desisted from the continuance of carnage. The surviving heathen priests gladly availed themselves of the occasion, by soliciting the Armenian princes to sanction the interment of their dead. Their request was readily granted. The killed on both sides were collected in heaps, and buried in pits dug for the purpose. Monuments were raised on their graves, bearing the following inscription, in Syrian, Hellenic, and Ismaelitish charac- ters. UMA ALSEPLAU A CLEP 3I3b UWLUSPY ALSEPLAUPU PLUS CPALD FKPUULIGSY AP HLS WSU Vb PULULPLY br COP DU LP SUA GPEUNRD GP Ape br 2380 ALSEMLLU LPP LL PULUEILS ONS GR LOU PPPUSI UP = « THE FIRST BATTLE FOUGHT VERY FIERCELY, THE CHIEF COMMANDER IN THE BATTLE WAS ARZAN THE HEAD PRIEST, WHO LIES HERE INTERRED, AND WITH HIM ONE THOUSAND AND THIRTY-EIGHT MEN. WE WAGED THIS WAR FOR THE IDOL KEISANEY AND ON BEHALF OF CHRIST.” Here concludes the narrative of the religious war. Our historian, it appears, was an eye-witness to the scene he describes. This vic- tory was celebrated by the Armenians with the greatest pomp and merriment. The heathen temples were razed to the ground, and the images of Kersanny and Demeter were broken to pieces. They were both made of brass. The length of the former was fifteen feet, and that of the latter twelve feet. The priests of the idols, with tears in their eyes, intreated the victors to put themselves to death, rather than destroy their mighty Kerisanry. Six of the priests were killed on the spot, for the resistance they offered to the Armeni- ans. On the restoration of peace, the prince of the Seunies proceeded 1836.] Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. 339 to the village of Kuars, and succeeded in persuading its inhabitants to forsake idolatry and embrace the Christian religion. Being duly prepared for baptism, they were conducted to the valley of Ayzasan, where they were baptised by St. Grecory, and thus admitted mto the fellowship of the Church of Christ. ‘‘The number of persons,” says ZeNostus, “ christened on the first of Navasard*, including men and children, amounted to five thousand and fifty.’ Females, it appears, were excluded from this number, and baptised on another day, appointed for the occasion. Some of the heathen priests and their families, however, tenaciously adhered to the idolatrous practices of their forefathers. The paternal persuasions of St. Gregory had no effect upon their minds. ‘‘ Remember this well,” said they to the Armenian princes, ‘“ that if we live, we will make you a recompense for your treatment; but, if we die, the gods will wreck their venge- ance on you all on our behalf!’ Hereupon the prince of the house of Angl ordered them to be taken to the city of Phaitacaran}, where they were imprisoned and their heads shaved. The number of these prisoners amounted to four hundred. It is impossible to know what was the number of this Hindu colony at the time of their emigration from India into Armenia. We are, however, certain, that from the date of their first settlement in the Armenian province of Taron to the day of the memorable battle, a period of about four hundred and fifty years, they must have consi- derably increased and multiplied, and thus formed a part of the popu- lation of the country. No vestiges of this Hindu race can, at present, be traced in Armenia, save the record of their exploits, handed down to us in the narrative of Zenoxztvust. * VILRILULLE'Y Navasard is one of the ancient Armenian months, corre- sponding with the month of August. An account of these months is given by M. BrosseEt in the Nouveau Journal Asiatique for December 1832, page 526. F PILSSILUULPILY PAattacaran was the capital of an extensive province of that name, where SANATRUK, the great Armenian Satrap, proclaimed himself king immediately after the death of Trr1patxEs. It is situated on the eonfiuence of the rivers Araxes and Kur. * t Our historian was also called by the appellation of PLILY Glak, whom St. Grecory appointed primate of the convent of h4,qILuYbILy Innaknian, which afterwards received the appellation of Q., [Ly Gia. yes SP 340 Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. [Jung, III.—Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. Fearing that many of the inscriptions with copies of which I have been favored by my mofussil correspondents, may be mislaid or lost sight of unless committed to print, I am led to anticipate the full ex- planation which many of them doubtless might receive from those who have learning, industry, and will, to decypher them, but want the necessary leisure at present to undertake the task,—by transferring them to the stone at once, and recording them in the Journal along with the notes that accompanied them, where they may be at all times available when accidental discovery may open a clue to their interpre- tation. Some indeed are of a promising nature, andhave been in a great measure made out, while others have been alluded to in former Nos. of the Journal or in the proceedings of the Society, to which refer- ence alone is all that can be offered. I must proceed in the inverse order of the plates, having numbered them without consideration. Konkan Inscription. No. I. of Plate X. is the reduced facsimile of an inscription on a slab of stone from Wara in South Konkan, presented to the Bombay Literary Society by Captain T. Jervis, of the Engineers, by whom it was supposed to be in the Cufie character. It was communi- cated to the Bengal Society by our associate the Rev. Mr. Baruman, in January, (see p. 58.) Those who have noticed the series of ancient Hindu coins depicted in the November and December Nos. of the Journal of last year, will doubtless recognize in the present inscription the peculiar form of the Nagari character on the Saurashtra group of coins. The ¢risul sur- mounting the inscription would indeed have been sufficient to negative the possibility of its Cufic origin. From the position of this symbol, which we must suppose to have been in the centre of the slab, it is probable that a third of the inscription on the left hand is broken off, which alone would prevent the possibility of coming at the purport of it. This is a pity on more than one account; for the initial invo- cation might have afforded a clue to a few of the letters, to the language, and to the sect of Hindus that erected the monument ; al- though the latter may be considered to be sufficiently established by the symbol! of Siva surmounting the legend. The chief peculiarity of this form of alphabet is, that the tails of the letters are lengthened and turned up backwards in a loop. Abstracting this portion, the essential part of the letter resembles the Gujerati type of Mr. Watuen’s inscriptions, (See vol. iv. p.477.) The vowels also belong to the same type: the y is subjoined to the s and other Vot.V PL.X. a IKON KAN. migenel Slone with the té. Soc. f Sonbay-) pe eae [sasd net ae ae ie ee jPagea ; 1 dh de ae EU TALE 1 9° J Inseription at the Damatha Cavern , » Maulamyeng (M JomDOrHs voy jn sare ron. ren 19° seitsvess Sap of Bistio~we dhe Ge Fhe Vino Bad og a oo Rp ow po Ua BLAH agen 9 OC£2 2039) 0900 “(S098 pone Ba) Fan 19 oc Bi CPR DAR ) Lt 29 2 saer BOMGS pockis of gH w poengoh o apne eeeoeec: Rie ahs eGo ou" 29939) 036 Ge rela Lost esous oft maDes Fh Gopqa; Fam pesap koa 3035 DoSaBsir 0 JGop 5 ae) ied ye es) iff J. Prin nsep Lith. 1836. ] Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. 341 consonants in the same manner; and, in short, there can be little doubt that both are of one family, and that the monuments bearing these characters may boast of as high an antiquity as has been allowed to the coins, (Pl. XLIX. vol. iv. page 684,) of the Saurashtra group. Some of these, it will be remembered, have a trilingual symbol, in com- mon with the oldest form of coins dug up near Seharanpur ; and the head on their obverse is supposed to be imitated from the Greek coins of Kodos, probably a Parthian successor of some of the petty Greek chieftains on the Indus. Other coins have a trident on the reverse. In the first and third lines there appear to be numerals, which may be read 333° and S ee, 1110 and 1100: the figure one being rather like the Bengali than the Ndgari form. These however can hardly refer in any known era to the period assigned to the coins. Moulmein Inscription. No. IT. of the same plate, is the inscription in the Barma character and Talain language found in the Damatha Cavern near Moulmein by Captain W. Fo.try, and mentioned in his paper, (page 274 of the preceding No.) 1 have appended a translation by Ratna Pauta in a postscript to the same paper, but nothing can be made of such an enigmatical jumble of figures. Chunar Inscription. No. I. of Plate IX. is taken from a pencil sketch of a stone slab in the Fort of Chunar near Benares, by Lieut. A. Cunnineuam, Engineers. This young officer, who during his short residence at Benares has brought so many facts and antiquities to light as to make me blush for my own inactive residence there, had some time previously sent me a Nagari transcript of the same inscription, in its present mutilated condition, written out by a Benares pandit, who also supplied the missing part of the text from a copy taken, he asserted, some years ago, before the surface of the stone had peeled away. An imperfect copy of the same, as it formerly existed, was also found among the Fort Adjutant’s records at Chunar. On comparing the three, however, many discrepancies were perceived, and the position of the erasures was not marked in the pandit’s transcript. I therefore again wrote to Lieut. CunnincHam, who proceeded to the fort and took the copy himself from the stone, whence the present lithograph is made. Having such abundant materials for making out what appeared a most simple inscription, I entrusted the whole to a young pandit, late of the English class in the Sanscrit College, to put together and trans- late. He made several alterations in the Benares pandit’s readings, 342 Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. (Jung, and substituted what he considered would better fill up the gaps; the sense was, however, so completely jumbled by these amendments, that I was loth to trust the translation to print without first troubling our Tearned Vice-President, the Rev. Dr. Mrut, to look it over: and it was fortunate ] did so, as will be seen by the comment his valuable notes afford on the attempt of the Benares pandit! As for the Bengali’s ver- sion, it was so much worse as to be unworthy of notice. I had first imagined that the Suawas up-piNn, whose invasion and assault brings upon him the epithet of eur (the wicked-minded and tyrannical Yavana,) must be the first Patan sovereign of that name, whose overthrow of Raja BanXr of Benares in 1193, A. D., is circumstantially recorded in Ferisuta. The date, however, which cor- responds with Thursday, the 5th August, 1333, A. D., falls in the reign of MuHAMMED SuHAu ; and Dr. Mitt has succeeded in discover- ing the actual owner of the title Shahab ud-din referred to. The inscription has some interest in a historical view, as supplying the names of three successive rajas of Benares in the 13th century, of which no clue is to be obtained from other sources. Neither local tradition nor history supply any information regarding the holy city sub- sequent to the overthrow of the fort by Curs up-p1n, until a cursory notice of it occurs as the site of an encampment, in Baser’s Memoirs. Dr. Miut’s restoration of the text is as follows, placing the inter- polations in smaller type. 1 have inserted his notes on the pandit’s version, as affording an useful example of the caution necessary in such cases, and proving how utterly void of trust are the attempts of the pandits of the present day, unless they have to deal with one capable of understandig what they would foist upon the unsuspicious as faithful transcript and good sense. pees ieet Verse. : Sit awaTqaa az: | 1 or atfaté get MeHSaRt ata ATTA: | THA: SIA ATA AVATAR ASAT || 2 u* aufatt waenfeerar fear SC OHELE | ba ~ siifeatea: wait: veqgayaT: | 3 WL. TASHA sta: *aCaT SaalHare | iS Alon ~ TACs Us a fae: TEOTAA: | IV. etfausivaseg ten safe uae | 4 Tals wawaa lie (were: eat Jae y Vv. wesetfequmaaawaeet | Journ.As, Soe. Vo7.V. Lal, SRG he INSCRIPTION FROM THE FORT ar CHUNAR. 3936. —— C a Dy reraaane alam Wea: Wy LD, BT AAATAE AT LP PB fp sham mMAAg an Age ad THA AAG d { Wy Mii pe yp. Aa Beso oad ara I) AMAA, AZARAYAAIIAA A q CAG AUNAGAAUNMAATHIRAgrace Aza AxmMaAnzsan 3 : mMarIAMaRH AA ai(Ha Tire shad &d pords are new peeles oy J- Prins 2. INSCRIPTION erom BARAHAT in GARHWAL 4 og why hUeratqrafun tsa Pagahanasavichag age weg WSO ugeu hvsaty LAY FA FAW QUA FEY TAN KSAT A 1 2 wEAG BHa eT WA YVYE TTI AES UPA Naaadary Mas Bee CF ques; TIST33N9Hy WHA aARARUNTIY UNA RAI YH LY 45 1 5 Ga: Gagy Mandi gg id qa wad Lanreanorr Pais Mesgpy laa kM |g 2EdseraR Gab gar INS AT Sy yeu7011 . wa RE Ce WOT OD . A (8) a 7 FP (CM Vraill { WD SVC 16 Or 3. Inscription ona Grancte-rock near [skarde, in Litkle Libel. “eentder «a bas-relvef of BuktLha. by xe) w7 a Re ay i | ASSAY U4 (effaced | i24 a : eer : = : Two ether cnscrihlon w cid TES EFOALSs Ts K LAG, MU Uy, £ e | Z i ce oy io THA OIHKADUN WoO GEvawnyYy a as TS: TION DTHEIAY II IH) TLHYA WHY AT SS ees Ai ‘Aa RAL TS FE. ee 2S ARRAS O to be Beetercted.} BNAD SVG N EY YH NOTURApP spe NSE AANITLE US BAM IKI TD) Vigne 3 é Dis duscription on Lhe enlrance of a chamber containing an image ophuddha , um the Caves of Adyjuntea. ~ =P s 74 Beer. FF cans ye 7 a LLBKmev KF TUM I Bg oy icy 5 Tae fh ii ENE = 6. Facstmule ofa doubtful Wanrce £72 the Bihtaré Inscriptcon. (see Pl. VIM. ) & ty © g5M ‘i See AGarn ing harm fh Sy ae : 2 ‘ Pye iv en 1836.] Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. 343 -s ~ ~ n~ A Scat fal feata part strata aurfater 4 5 vi. wutrefa*[aes qar Saige faa: | aq Feat FT aa: RAT a I Vil. Waa] itferbarsTet Fu: ara [ = jefald 6 ~ © BSAA ALTA ATA SETA: | Sal wertisifaar 4 foarsfe aarfaha: | has only the advantage of mine as to the antepenultimate syllable of the first half, viz. the 2nd & being somewhat more like what appears on the stone. In every other respect where there is any difference, any one may see how entirely he varies from the characters there visible, beside being incorrect in grammar and prosody, and quite unintelligible. Only three syllables of mine are conjectural, in a place where the stone is broken. VI. All of this verse, which is not distinguished by small letters, is most clearly traced on the stone: but the B. P. has retained nothing of it but the three first syllables of the second line, (in which also he has thrust in another syllable with a visarga without warr rant) in his reading, which is— ASI HANS ACA: WHA WT LATAT: aa: Far @ yra: aeAha HIG aa: Il most entirely gratuitous! beside that it annexes the first to sl. 5, and begins the 6th with the other. VII. VIII. In these two verses, between which there is an interval ina broken part of the stone sufficient to contain a half-sloka or line, and which may throw some reasonable doubt as to the precise divisions of the slokas or distichs, the B. P., who divides differently from me, has not attempted to retain any thing of the yet remaining large characters on the stone, except in the first line, and the beginning of the last but one; while any one who compares his reading with mine, will see how much more he varies from his Ss His reading is in five lines, as follows : E aeae fewer: aqaraciaa: i Here are anarrowis misspelt. ] May Si TAG samrayaaa: | [No Heat as on the stone.] afaaw = a Si Way Az Afaa: || [A false concord here.}_ wae aq WIC VATA GaGa: | [All but the first syllables quite incompatible with the stone.] WAH SKATHY SACs: Fa? BW || IX. This the B. P. read quite differently ; but any person comparing his two first lines with mine, may judge which is the nearest to the actual inscription. His third line is altogether gratuitous. AAGUS VAT: F cH a farateara aa aq ay Hy aaIsey Haga Qql aa SAT ATA AF sl s Sate: i X. In-this sloka, which is in the lyrical measure sie Sdrdéla vikriditem, the B. P. has made the following very serious mistakes, Ist, making its second pada or hemistich the first, (veading it otherwise quite correctly) to the exclusion of all the legible syllables of the first pada, whose place in the measure is so palpable, viz. the 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 15th, 16th, 17th, 18th and 19th or last, which are on the stone clearly as they are here represented in large letters [having gratuitously supplied their place by a 3rd Anustdbh line to verse IX. !] 2ndly. 1836.] Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. 347 Filling up the place of the 3rd and 4th pddas by a crowded three of his own making entirely, except the eight last syllables of the last—though so much more of them are clearly legible on the stones at their proper intervals—just as T have placed them in the midst of the conjectural supplements. The B. P. has Hara WARIS: arate: | Yet WY PSST SCAM F Se TU VifAR: | (This 3rd pada has a glar- WATNTHRAGARATMAT S ae ee ing false quantity.) wreanfeaufaarsiy y ga: aI SH Sa XI. This last verse, which is Anustabh, like the nine first, is read by the B. P. as I read it, except that the 2nd quarter is with him afwayg faafea quite unlike the stone, and that the 3rd he begins differently, viz. qaqa borrowing to this place what he had omitted in the 2nd. The stone gives clearly throughout what I have written above. After the date and the word aT, the B. P. has gratuitously expanded the rest into a sloka, as oe ¥ 7 TUT WAS TSY MCUTATITATR: | aeqeiaaaa: Wal Ft Fcisra: |! I will add, that the inscription, as itis now legible, affords no counte- nance to the B. P.’s supposition, that the discreet Sva’m1 Ra’sa acted under his elder brother CuanpraGana. He rather appears to have been his successor. W.H. Mit. Barahat Inscription. No. III. of the same plate, is the inscription from Barahdét in Garhwal, presented, in duplicate, to the Society by the Commissioner, Mr. Traitu. This inscription also has been deciphered in part by the Rey. Principal of Bishop’s College, who has kindly communicated its contents to me in the following letter : “IT have the pleasure of sending one of the Kemdoz inscriptions, that of Barahdt in Garhwdl. It opens with the invocation @f@ 3%: Svasti Sri, addressed gpEazcut ly to a prince, and the first line contains the words y@ 44 Va as $ltaka Sls ‘ whose and where is a palace which is on a lofty peak and splendidly magnificent.’ The second line of the inscription is a turgid verse in the Sdrdila vikridita measure, as follows : GATS AS AURATYY ASA TACT: HAMAAATAGVACAT AT SIATA: | aaa J 4 cmaaica: Teac: W ai (understand #47) VARTA BCIIAIA TAPRITTA: II “His son, whose ample condition was exalted by a numerous army, devouring the juices of the earth like the sun of summer, then arising sat on the throne, and even with his bow unbent, still ruled with a) Sve 348 Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. (Jung, sage counsels, and the abandonment of all selfish passions. He who was originally by name Udara-charita, (the man of generous deeds,) being skilled in all holy duties, did even thus at once, as the best of the lords of power, reduce to fragments the army opposed to him, though crushing all other adversaries, chariots and all.” This is the whole of the second line. The third and last which is in prose begins gta: Tra@ “the beloved son of a beloved father, and ends with the words ...... faaa waes foun araaifa:” Qatwayicwacay THE UF fegca “As long as the sacred mark remains in the body, so long has the glory of these two illustrious ones (father and son) been concealed: but henceforward may the immortality of this king be unshaken !” The meaning is not very good, and the word gait: for Illustrious, is unusual, if not semi-barbarous, in its formation ; but I can make nothing better of it, neither can I spell out the father’s name from the strange characters of the first line. The second one is the only part on which I have no doubt. W. H. Mint. : Iskardo Inscription. No. 3 of Plate [X. is a copy of the inscription on a granite rock near Iskardo, the capital of Little Tibet, taken by Mr. Viens, the English traveller, who sent it down through Captain Wapz in hopes that M. Csoma pE K6érés would be able to decypher it. Being found under an image of Buddha, it may be concluded that this inscription is but an extract from some of the sacred volumes of his followers; but it is in too imperfect a state for M. Csoma to be confident of the rendering, although a large portion of the letters may be read with ease and certainty. Their accurate form would pronounce them to have been copied by an artist, if not by one ac- quainted with the Tibetan alphabet. Ajunta Inscription. No. 4 of Plate TX. This mutilated inscription is from the caves of Ajunta. I am indebted for it to Mr. Raupu and Capt. Gresey, of Aurangabad, who paid a visit to those celebrated excavations last year, and I am not aware that this particular inscription has been yet published. Mr. Raupx states that it was found “ not in the largest Bauddha cave, but in the first which we inhabited, and the one where a square was formed by four pillars each way. The letters were on the right hand of a doorway of a small apartment leading into one containing the figure of BuppHa; but here he was not represented with the two African statues of attendants, nor is this the cave where the Grecian helmets are found. The rough sketched countenances which are plac- 1836.] Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. 349 ed under the writing are in keeping with those that cover the whole of the little chamber, at distances of two or three inches from one another —these appear to be portraits of disciples seated,—all half lengths.” Captain Gresiry has favored me with a ground plan of the cave from memory, but as accurate measurements were taken by Dr. Birp in 1828, for Sir Joun Matcoum, for the Royal Asiatic Society, it is unnecessary to insert it. “The large cave, 40 feet square within the eight columns, has more brilliant figures in fresco painting than any I have visited. It is the one which contains what some have miscalled the zodiac, a portion of a large circle on the wall outside the first cell on the left hand on entering the cave-temple, where many small figures may still be traced.”” Some damage has been done since 1828, and it is the opinion of these travellers that time and rain will soon render the caves altogether inaccessible. The first letter of the inscription is sufficient to shew to what alphabet the Ajunta writing belongs: it is precisely the y of the Allahabad and Gujerat inscriptions ; the second letter is dh of the same alphabet, and the third is the m of the coins of the same period, differing slightly from that of both the inscriptions above named. The collocation of these three letters, agreeing exactly with the commencement of the sacred text so constantly found on all the ancient Buddhist images lately brought to notice from Ava, Benares, or Tirhut, Ye dharma, &c., led me to look for the remainder of the stanza; but it was evident that the text would not bear such a con- struction. Perhaps the Rev. Mr. Srrvenson, whose attention has been successfully engaged on the Carli inscriptions, than which however the present seems considerably more modern, may be able to fill up the chasms and rectify the mutilations of this short legend, if indeed it be worth while to do more than recognise and record the style of Ndgart to which it belongs. No. 5 of Plate IX. is merely a word in an inscription from the Behtart column, Ghazipur district, concerning which, as it occurred on the Allahabad column, a difference of opinion existed: Captain Troyer reading it Yagna Kacha, and Dr. Miu, Ghatot Kacha: the latter is evidently the most probable, if it be not quite certain ; but I hope to be able to insert the whole inscription (taken down with great care by Lieut. A. Cunninauam, Engineers) in my next number, with a full interpretation by the Rev. Principal of Bishop’s College. I had lithographed it as Plate VII. to precede the present two, but the translation was not ready for insertion. J.P. 350 Catalogue of Terrestrial and (Jung, IV.—Descriptive Catalogue of Terrestrial and Fluviatile Testacea, chiefly from the North-East Frontier of Bengal. By W. H. Bunson, Esq. B. C.S8. The species of land and fresh-water shells described in the following pages, form a collection, chiefly made in the hills on the N. E. frontier, which was purchased by the Asiatic Society of Bengal in 1833. One of the land shells, Scarabus triangularis, and two Neritine and a Melania among the fluviatile shells, inhabit the jungles and streams of the Gangetic Delta, and were probably collected on the route to Sylhet. Several shells belonging to the genera Cerithium, Cancellaria, Planavis, Phasianella, and Pedipes, which occur in the collection, have been omitted, as being, in all probability, marine, or semi-marine productions procured from the embouchures of the Deltaic rivers. 1. Vitrina Gigas. Testa tenui, corneo-virente, ovato-depressa,. auriformi, velociter crescente, supra planata, rugis concentricis et striis radiatis decussata; subtus tumida; ultimo anfractu valde ventri- coso, pené totam testam efformante ; apertura transversa, rotundato ovata, preegrandi; labio valdé arcuato. Diam. 1.15 poll. This shell is so flattened, and enlarges so quickly, that it has very much of the appearance of one of the macrostomata, to which I refer- red a specimen from the caves of Sylhet, recently fossilized with calc- tuff, when I first saw it. It has only two whorls exclusive of the apex, and differs in size, in the depression of the spire, in the very arcuated left lip, and the more extended mouth from the European species V. elongata. 1 believe that it is the first shell truly belong- ing to this genus which has been ascertained to inhabit India. Since I became acquainted with it, I have met with a second species alive, ‘adhering to dead leaves at the roots, and to the lower part of the trunks of trees in the teak-wood attached to the Botanic Garden of Calcutta; but the characters of the animal restrict it to the genus Helicarion of Cuvizrr. Whether V. Gigas belongs to Cuvier’s Heli- colimaz or to Helicarion, cannot be ascertained without an examination of the animal; I therefore leave it in the original genus as defined by Lamarck. 2. Nanina decussata. Testé corned, discorded, sub-depressa, umbi- licata; spira exsertiuscula, obtusa; anfractibus septem supra planatis, ultimo obtuse angulato; epidermide supra arguté decussata, infra radiatim striata; apertura transversa, lunatéa. Diam. 1 poll; axis 0.35 On a cursory inspection of this shell, I erroneously considered it to be a variety of the species “ vitrinoides” Dasuayes, belonging to Mr. Gray’s genus Nanina, (Zool. Proceedings, 8th July, 1834,) which I indicated under the name of Macrochlamys in the first No. of the Jour- 1836.] Fluviatile Shelis from Sylhet. 351 nal of the Asiatic Society for January 1832, pp. 13 and 76, and which I altered to that of Tanychlamys in a paper on the genus read before the Zoological Society in August 1834. Mr. Gray’s characters, drawn up from specimens preserved in spirits, and from General Harpwicke’s drawings, having the advantage of priority of publica- tion, his name, although inexpressive, will necessarily be adopted. Several independent observers have united in stating the necessity of separating this genus from Heliz, on the characters of the animal ; witness the observations of Lieut. Hurron, Journal of the Asiatic Society, vol. ii. p. 83. The species under review. differs from N. vitrinoides in sculpture, has a more exserted spire than the generality of specimens of that shell, has a more angular periphery, is of a lighter colour, and, pos- sessing the same number of whorls, is larger and of a thicker substance. ‘The epidermis is apt to peel off the under side. I have a third species belonging to this country, which I lately took at the foot of the Rajmahal hills. It differs in its smaller size, its lighter colour, and in the form of the aperture from both vitri- noides and decussata, and from the former it altogether differs in its habits even when inhabiting the same spot, abounding on shrubs and bushes, while N. vitrinoides is confined to the ground, to rocks, and to brick work. 3. Helix plectostoma. Testa reversa, depresso-conoided subtis tumida ; spira exsertiuscula; anfractibus supra planatis, radiatim pli- catis, rugis transversis decussatis; ultimo angulato, angulo subtis marginato. Apertura lunata, plica, (ut in Helice personata) interdum inconspicua, ultimo anfractui adherente; umbilico profundo, anfractus plerosque exhibenti. Diam. 0.35 poll. paulo plus. This shell has a salient plate on the penultimate whorl connecting the two extremities of the peristome, as in H. personata, but differs from it in its other characters. The peristome is more rounded than in H. Cocyrensis, the spire more conoid, and the satures less conspi- cuous. It belongs to the subgenus Helicodonta of Dr Frrussac, but in the angularity of the periphery it approaches to Helicigona. 4. Helix Ozytes. Testa ferrugineo-corned, depressd; spira con- vex, apice planato; periphzerid acuta ; anfractibus obliqué subplicatis, suturis non excavatis; peristomate subreflexo; umbilico lato et pro- fundo anfractus usque ad apicem exhibenti. Diam. 1.8 poll. In form it exactly resembles H. acumen of Dalmatia, but exceeds it in size, and differs in colour, in its sub-reflected mouth, and in sculpture, the whorls being destitute of decussating striz and of the polish which adorns the latter. It belongs to De Furussac’s groupe 352 Catalogue of Terrestrial and (Jung, of Helicigona, and to the 2nd division, Vortices. It would stand as a Carocolla of Lamarcx. Whorls six, exclusive of the apex. 5. Helix climacterica. Testa subdepressa, subtis tumida; spird sub-conoidea, gradata; anfractibus omnibus angulatis, supra planatis, arguté plicatis; apice obtuso. Peripheria angulaté. Peristomate acuto, non reflexo. Umbilico nullo. Diam. 0.75 poll. This species resembles H. barbata of Cephalonia in its general habit and in the peculiar form of its spire, which rises like a flight of steps; but the apex, though obtuse, is more exserted, and is desti- tute of the flattening observable in the Cephalonian species. Whorls eight, exclusive of the apex. It belongs to Helicigona of Dz Frrussac, and to its first groupe, which is destitute of an umbilicus. 6. Helix Serrula. Testa subdepressa, sub-conoided subtus convexa ; apice acuto; anfractibus supra confertissimé radiatim plicatis, margi- natis, marginibus elevatis; ultimo anfractu infra leviore, peripheria marginata, serrata. Umbilico profundo, mediocri; peristomate acuto. Diam. 0.55 poll. : Whorls seven, exclusive of the apex. This is also a Helicigona, 2nd groupe. It is allied to a new unnamed species which I have from Malta, but has a smaller umbilicus in proportion, and a more acute . spire. It is also larger. 7. Helix tapeina. Testa sub-conoidea, supra conyexd, subtis tumida; epidermide minutissimé corrugata; peripheria angulata, peristomate non continuo, subreflexo. Umbilico mediocri, profundo ; omnes anfractus exhibente. Diam. 0.6 poll. Whorls seven, exclusive of the apex. It is allied to Carocolla Lapicida, but differs in sculpture, in its discontinuous peristome, less angular periphery, and more conoid spire. The aperture is also more open. It belongs to the 2nd groupe of Helicigona of De Frrussac, and to the genus Carocolla of Lamarck. 8. Helix delibratus. Testa depresso-plana, subtis tumida; epi- dermide cornea decidua; anfractibus transversé striatis ; apertura transversé rotundato-ovata ; peritremate vix continuo, reflexo; umbilico . lato, anfractus plerosque exhibente, Diam. 0.9 poll. Whorls four. Of the same type as the European species H. cornea, from which it differs in colouring and in the form of its spire, which resembles that of H. deplana of Croatia; but from this species it differs in the form of the mouth, and in the markings, as well as in its more open umbilicus. From Helix granulata (mihi) of the Western Provinces, it differs in the more transverse mouth, more flattened spire, and wider umbilicus, in its plainer colouring and greater size, and in the want of that minute shagreened appearance, under the lens, which 1836.] Fluviatile Shelis from Sithet. 353 renders that species so remarkable. It belongs to the subgenus Helicella of De Furussac. The epidermis scales off like that of the Solenes, whence the trivial name which I have conferred upon it. 9. Helix Cestus. Testa subdepressd, corned vel fuscescente, radiatim striata, subtus convex4, perforata; spira sub-conoidea ; apice obtuso ; ultimo anfractu sub-angulato, fascia unica rufo-fuscad, media, reliquis fascia saturali cinctis; peristomate sub-reflexo. Diam. 0.65 poll. Whorls five. H. cestus approaches in form and colour to a species which I possess from the Tyrol, and which is marked ‘“‘ H. zonata,”’ but which does not agree well with Lamarcx’s characters of planospira, of which he gives Dz Ferussac’s zonata as asynonym. It differs from it in not having a white or a much reflected peristome. It belongs to the sub-genus Helicella. 10. Bulimus citrinus. .Lamarcx. This is the reverse variety of a handsome shell, of which South America is recorded as the habitat by Lamarck. It is perforated, (of which character he makes no mention,) and of an uniform yellow, without bands or marks, and being weathered, no polish is observable. Length one inch. 11. Achatina tenuispira. Testa elongato turrita, corned, longitu- dinaliter striata, versus apicem attenuata, columnari; anfractu ultimo interdum fasciis quibusdam albidis transversis ornato; suturis im- pressis; apice obtuso. Long. 1 poll. circiter. Lat. 0.55. This Achatina, belonging to Ds Frrussac’s subgenus Cochlicopa and to his groupe of Hyloides, is remarkable for the attenuated columnar form of the terminal whorls of the spire. 12. Achatina crassdabris. Testa turrito conica, levi, cornea, lon- gitudinaliter striata; anfractibus convexis, suturis excavatis; labro intus incrassato; columella przarcuaté; apice obtuso. Long. 0.7. Lat. 0.3 poll. This shell has the habit of a Ceylon species which I believe to be A. nitens of Gray. It differs in greater size, in its incrassated outer lip, in its somewhat more ventricose form, and in its sculpture. It approaches to Swarinson’s genus Achatinella in the arcuation of the columella, but differs in the absence of the thickened pliciform termi- nation to it, and in having the incrassation quite at the edge of the outer lip, instead of removed to a little distance within it. 13. Clausilia lovostoma. Testa sinistrorsa4, fusiformi, medio ven- tricos4, corneo-grisescente; anfractibus convexis, levigatis, striis obsoletis ; suturis confortissimé crenulatis ; apertura elongata obliqua, bi-plicata, supra angustiori, infra dilatata peristomate reflexo ; columella prearcuata. Long. 0.85 poll. 22 354. Catalogue of Terrestrial.and [JuNE, _ Out of a collection of 32 European Clausilie, I find none with a similar obliquity of mouth, from which character I have named the species. The outer lip projects beyond the plane of the aperture. The crenulations of the sutures differ altogether from the papillary appear- ance which is common to several species, such as papillaris, albo- guttata, &c., and they are not elongated as in C. nitida. 14. Scarabus triangularis. Testa compressa ovato-conica; xtate subtriangulari, cornea, fasciis castaneis plurimis interdum obsoletis cincta, rugis longitudinalibus salcisque transversis, distantibus, inter- ruptis decussata. Spira acuta breviori; suturis obsoletis. Anfractis ultimi varice saliente lamelliformi. Apertura quadridentata, biplicata ; dentibus, uno insuper columellarium, tribus super costulam intro- labialem sitis; plica una columellarii duplici, pandata, altera columelle recurva, parva. Umbilico lineari, transversali, pené clauso. Length 0.9. Breadth 0.65 inch. This shell, independently of its form, sculpture, colouring, and acute varix, may be at once distinguished from Scarabus imbrium by its peculiar umbilicus ; that feature being rounded and perforate in the Malassan species. The number of teeth on the rib, which is situated at some distance within the outer lip, is very variable, ranging from three to seven; of these three are always more prominent. In wea- thered specimens the subordinate denticulations are generally unob- servable. Occasionally the whole of the shell is of a dark chestnut colour, with obscure bands of a more saturated colour. In his Synop- tical table, Dz Ferussac mentions two species from Bengal, S. plica- tus and S. Petiveri, both distinct from S. imbrium. As he gives no description, I am unable to say whether our shell is identical with either or both: the latter contingency may possibly be the case, consi- dering the great difference of form observable between young and aged specimens, and the uncertainty attendant on the species S. Petiveri, which appears to have been established solely on the inspec- tion of a plate, no reference being made to any museum. All the specimens of the shell in the collection are weathered, and in that state appear of a livid purple colour; this circumstance was, however, amply compensated for by an excursion which I made with Dr. Pearson to the alluvial island opposite to Fort William, in quest of objects of natural history, during which that gentleman discovered the live animal under decayed vegetation, and under bundles of the hoogla grass cut down for sale. From these retreats, which it occupied in company with the amphibious Ass¢minia Gangetica, we made a large collection in a short space of time. I have searched for it in vain on the neighbouring mainland, in the vicinity of the Bishop’s 1836.] Fluviatile Shells from Sithet. 355 College and the Botanic Gardens, as well as on the opposite side of the river; but specimens of deserted shells were taken by a friend, as low down as the junction of the Damoda with the Hooghly. It is only of late that French naturalists have verified the terrestrial habits of the genus. The present species is much distressed when thrown into water, and crawls out of it when immersed. Its decidedly amphibious companion, Assiminia Gangetica, | have met with, on dewy mornings, more than a furlong from the river’s bank, crawling among moist grass. 15. Cyclostoma involvulus. (MuuuEr.) This elegant species, which is abundant in a living state at Rajma- hal, Secrigally, and Patharghata in Behar, attains a large size in the Silhet collection. When adult it is always possessed of a beautiful orange colour on the peristome. It is Cyclostoma torquata of Lieut. Huron, J. A. S. vol. iii. page 82, and is the species alluded to by me in vol. i. page 12, in my remarks on the genus Pterocyclos. 16. Cyclostoma zebrinum. Testa albida, strigis plurimis rufo- custaneis, angulato-flexuosis picté, spira depressiuscula, acuminata ; anfractibus plicis paucis transversalibus distantibus, ultimo rugis un- dulatis longitudinalibus sculptis ; carina media subacuta. Apertura ampla, peritremate reflexo ; umbilico parvo. Epidermide crassa, fusca, plicis longitudinalibus, his setis fortibus munitis, instructis. Diam. 10.35 poll. I was.at first disposed, from a consideration of the habit of this shell, to view it as a variety of a Tenasserim shell, described by Mr. G. B. Sowrrsy in the 5th volume of the Zoological Journal under the name of Cyclostoma perdix; but a careful comparison with specimens which Mr. Sowersy had kindly presented to me, has enabled me to distinguish itas a separate species. It differs in its sculpture, in its more developed keel, more contracted umbilical cavity, and in the possession of a singular epidermis, of which Mr. Sowxrsy’s speci- mens of C. perdiz, though one was taken alive at Tenasserim, appear to have been destitute. In the latter species the markings are white mottled on a chestnut ground; in zebrinum they consist of distant zigzag flames of light chestnut on a white ground. 17. Pterocyclos hispidus. Spiraculum hispidum, Prarson, Journal of the Asiatic Society, vol. ii. p. 391. The acquisition of several live specimens of this genus (established by me in the first No. of the Journal) during the last rainy season, at the hill of Patharghata in Behar, where I first met with dead speci- mens of P. rupestris, enables me to disprove the conjecture of Dr. Pzarson that a branchial apparatus or projecting syphon is attached 222 356 Catalogue of Terresirial and (June, to the neck of the animal, as well as to confirm its affinity with the genus Cyclostoma, with which Mr. Sowrrsy has classed it. The name originally annexed to the genus was altered by Dr. PEarson, on insufficient grounds, as, independently of the violation of received rules of nomenclature*, of the existence of the tabular appendage in perfection in only one species of the genus, and its non-existence in others, the new name tended to convey an erroneous impression of the use of the anomalous excrescence observable in the shell of P. hispidus. Dr. Pearson assumes that the specimens of P. rupestris from which the characters of the genus were taken, were immature shells, but a strict search in the habitat of the species, and the acquisition of 16 specimens of different ages and growth, of which 12 bore all the marks of being adult, dispelled all doubt of the obtainment of the perfect shell. The retromitted and retroverted tubular. wing, afford- ing an index of a former mouth, and which does not appear to have been accompanied by a reflexion of the peristome, exists in that form in P. hispidus only, and the sinus under the wing which crowns the final aperture is never so strongly marked as in the other species, bearing more resemblance to the channel under the wing of Gray’s Cyclostoma Petiverianum, which shell indicates the passage to the Genus Cyclostoma, not only by this feature, but by the intermediate form of its umbilical cavity, and its operation. A comparison of the animal of Pterocyclos (my four living specimens of which I assumed to be female, from the absence of the exserted organ so conspicuous on the neck of the male Cyclostoma) with that of Cyclostoma involvulus shewed only the following differ- ences. In P. rupestris the mantle is sinuated, to correspond with the sinus at the crown of the aperture, and its edges are reflected over the edges of the sinus, but there is no organ projected through it by * In conferring generic names it is an obvious rule that the part should not be put for the whole, by designating the genus from an organ, without a change of termination, or the addition of a distinguishing epithet. The circumstance of the feature being peculiar in the family to which the groupe belongs, will not justify a departure from the rule; were a relaxation from it allowed in one instance, we might be called upon to recognize an anomalous form among the acephalous mollusca (to suppose an extreme case) as the genus ‘‘Caput!’’? In the present instance the effect of the proposed substitution, is to set aside a name published by the first describer of the genus, which name is equally appli- cable to every species hitherto discovered, as it is not contingent on the presence or absence of a sinus or a tabular, or other perforation, but on the existence of a wing attached to the otherwise circular aperture. Hence the supposed neces- sity for a change of nomenclature is not apparent. 1836.] Fluviatile Shells from Silhet. 357 the animal, nor does the mantle line the interior surface of the wing. No organ likely to occupy the sinus is observable either when the animal is crawling or when it is drawn out to its fullest extent. The foot is shorter in proportion than that of Cyclostoma, hardly appear- ing beyond the disc of the shell when the animal is crawling, and the curious cup-shaped operculum is received into the wide vortici-form umbilicus of the shell, which it almost fills, whereas the thin flat operculum of C. involvulus is carried behind the shell. My living specimens of Pt. rupestris were taken at Patharghata* dur- ing amorning shower in September. I had in vain searched the ground and bushes among the moist rocks and dripping jungle, where multi- tudes. of Cyclostoma involvulus, the reversed Helix interrupta and Nanina vitrinoides were moving about, and had nearly abandoned the search, when I thought of trying an open tract of the hill whence the jungle had recently been cut. Here, on the exposed side of the hill, as well on the bare surface, as under leaves, I at last discovered the sought-for shell. At the foot of the hill a single specimen of a small conoid Helix, which I had recently discovered at Berhampore, was found adhering to the leaves of a shrub. Pierocyclos hispidus, is perfectly distinguished from P. rupestris by its greater size, the flatness of its spire, its sculpture, hispid epidermis, retromitted tube, and the inferior development of the adult mouth. Coming from a climate where it enjoys damp throughout the year, it may possibly use the perforation for a breathing hole when its aperture is closed, but in P. rupestris the operculum is drawn in beyond the sinus, so that no such use can be made of it for breathing air, for which, moreover, it has probably little occasion during the season of drought and torpidity. 18. Pterocyclos parvus. Spiraculum parvum, Prarson, Journal of the Asiatic Society, vol. ii. p. 592. This species, which is coloured like one of the varieties of P. rupes- tris, never attains more than half the size of that species. The numer- ous specimens brought from Silhet have all a perfect, reflected peris- tome. It is also distinguishable by the greater tendency of the sinus being often in strict contact, though the circle is never completed by * Besides some other plants in flower which I had not leisure to note, I observed a little blue-flowered Tradescantia, a dwarf Ruellia, and a beautiful large-flowered Pesticia with spikes of flowers of a pale verdigris-green colour, which I had only once before seen ornamenting a corolla in a species of Ivia (J. maculata ?) In December 1831, the jungle on the side of Patharghata was flam- ing with tke rich blossoms of Holmskioldia coccinea. On Kotanasi, a hill between Patharghata and Terriagali, I captured a fine specimen of the splendid Buprestis Chrysis. 358 ‘Description of two new Species of (Jung, the confluence of the shelly matter. The impending wing also shews a greater tendency to a retroverted and tabular form. It is probable that SowrrsBy’s Cyclostoma bilabiatum, from Salem in the Madras presidency, will form a fourth species of Pterocyclos, distinguished by the sinuated addition at the back of the true lip. When I examined it in London, I thought that it was identical with P. rupestris, and that my specimens of the latter had not attained their full growth ; a further search in the locality of the species, and the consideration that the sinuated lip must have been of previous formation to the reflected circular aperture, have contributed to alter my opinion on the subject. Cyclostoma suturale has the aspect of an immature Pterocyclos. Its habitat is, I believe, Demarara. I had prepared the whole of my notes on the collection both of land and fresh-water shells during a period of leisure previously to the close of last year, but I have since then been prevented by want of time from correcting and arranging them. Dr. Pxrarson’s hint, in his report on the Museum, has called forth this first brochure, consist- ing of the land-shells, I fear in rather an unfinished state, for which I trust that circumstances will prove an apology. The fresh-water shells shall follow at the earliest practicable period. V.—Description of two new species belonging to a new form of the Meruline Group of Birds, with indication of their generic character. By B. H. Hopeson, Esq. Resident in Nepal These birds have the wings, tail, and feet of Turdus ; and if we conti- nue the comparison from the external to the internal characters, we find a similar construction of the tongue, stomach, and intestines in both. Both, too, have a similar regimen, habits, and manners. Yet they are strikingly contradistinguished by the respective forms of the bill. In the thrushes that member is compressed, and has its arched maxilla freely exserted from the frontal feathers, and very little cut out by the nasal foss. In the birds now in question, on the contrary, the bill is so much depressed as to be more than twice as broad as high at the base; and its straight maxilla, greatly incumbered by the frontal plumes, has the nasal fosse so far produced to the front as to pass the centre of length of the bill. In the birds before us, too, the head is furnished with a garruline crest; which is never observed in Turdus. The tarsi are lower than in the generality of thrushes ; and the tail is somewhat longer and less even at the end. Like most of the Nipalese thrushes, these birds are common to all the three regions of the kingdom. They are shy in 1836. ] the Meruline Genus of Birds. 859 their manners, adhere exclusively to the woods, live solitarily or in pairs, breed and moult but once a year, nidificate on trees, and feed almost equally on the ground and on trees. I have taken from their stomachs several sorts of stony berries, small univalve mollusca, and sundry kinds of aquatic insects. These birds are not generally or familiarly known to the Nipalese, - but the foresters, whom I have met with, denominate them Cocho: and by that name, latinised into Cochoa, I have designated them generi- cally in my note book. As a Meruline genus, placed close to Turdus, the following charac- ter may perhaps serve to mark them. Wings, tail, and feet, as in Turdus. Tarsi rather lowe? and tail somewhat longer. Bill straight, considerably depressed : the maxilla excided beyond the centre by the nasal fosse: the nostrils very large, and nearer to tip than to gape. Head crested as in Garrulus. The two species at present known to me I shall call, from their prevalent colour, Viridis and Purpurea. The following is their description :— Cochoa purpurea. Purple Cocho, Mihi. Male, dark purple: cheeks black: crest, tail, and upper apert portion of the wings, soft grey blue, more or less purpurescent: lower part of the wings and tip of tail, black; and both black internally : a white speculum on the wing, just below the false wing: bill and legs black: iris brown. The fe- male, brown where the male is purple ; and the upper part of the wings also brown. The young are rufous below with black bars: brown above with rufescent white drops: head blue as in maturity, but barred. The species is eleven to eleven and a half inches long by six- teen to seventeen wide, and weight three and half to four oz. Co. Viridis. Green Cochoa, Mihi. Brilliant parrot green, paler and changing into verditer blue on the belly and thighs: crest, cheeks, and neck posteally, brilliant blue: upper part of the wings and tail, the same, but paler with a grey cast; and both black internally, and apertly towards the ends, as in the preceding species; through the eye to the nostrils black: bar of same hue across the pale portion of the wings, caused by the long coverts and bastard wing being tipt with that colour : legs fleshy brown: bill black: iris brown: size of the last: sexes alike.—N. B. This species is apt to vary considerably before it has reached maturity as well as under moult, when the back is sometimes lunated with black; and the soft blue portion of the Wings is smeared with brownish yellow. At first, the young males are exactly like the female. The following more particular description of 360 On anew Genus of the Meropide. (Jung, the several members and organs is equally and exactly applicable to both species. Bill to head as five to four: sometimes merely equal to the head: considerably depressed, except near the tip; at base more than twice as broad as high; straight; culmen produced among the frontal fea- thers, which are soft and turned back; sides of the maxilla cut out beyond the centre by a broad membranous and plumose fosse: tomiz locked, trenchant, and entire; towards the gape somewhat incurved— towards the tip, straight: tip of upper mandible inclined and notched ; of the lower, subrecurved and subemarginated, sometimes straight and entire. Nares nearer to the tip than to the gape; at fore end of the nasal fossze, lateral, longitudinal, elliptic, large, free, shaded above by a small nude process of the fossal membrane, and set over with tiny incumbent hairs: gape scarcely to the fore angle of the eve and sub- ciliated: wings reaching to centre of tail, firm, first quill bastard, second long, fourth longest ; all four slightly emargined on their inner web. Tail composed of twelve firm feathers, rather longer than in Turdus, the four laterals gradated in a small degree, more than in Turdus. Tarsi submedial, stout, rather longer than the central toe, usually smooth, sometimes crossed by three or four scales. Toes simple, ambulatory, compressed, moderately unequal; outer ba- sally connected ; hind stouter and subdepressed. Nails compressed, obtuse : the central fore with both margins dilated but entire. Head furnished with a soft, full, garruling crest. Tongue simple, flat, medial, subcartilaginous, with cartilaginous, subjagged, tip. Stomach muscular, of medial subequal thickness, the lining tough and grooved. Intestinal canal 20 to 25 inches long, of subequal calibre throughout ; close to anal end, two grain-like ceca. The intestines are longer in proportion than those of Turdus: but otherwise similar. VI.—On a New Genus of the Meropide.—By the same. Order Insessorzs ; Tribe Fissirostres ; Family Meropide, Vigors. Order PassEREs, Section Synpactyx1, Cuvier. Genus new. Bucia, Mihi. Generic character :— Bill much elongated and arched throughout, strong, greatly com- pressed ; the sides nearly vertical, and the ridge flattened towards the base. Wings moderate, full, not acuminated, fourth quill longest, 1836.] On a New Genus of the Meropide. 361. one and two considerably and subequally gradated. Nares entirely concealed by incumbent setaceous tufts. Tail longish, quadrate, strong. Feet and tongue as in Merops. In the family of the Mero- pide but one genus has heretofore been recognised. If the above characters be admitted to differ materially from those of Merops, and if the birds to which they apply are distinguished by a marked and consequent diversity of manners, I presume the propriety of the generic separation will not be questioned. Now, the bee-eaters proper, according to my experience, have invariably a long and acuminated wing, and aérial swallow-like habits corresponding to that form of wing. Again, their bill is considerably spread laterally except towards the tip; the general form being tetra- gonal, and the ridge acute. In Bucia, on the contrary, the wing is not so much acuminated as in the thrushes. It is distinguished for considerable, uniform, breadth ; not at all for length ; and the habits of the bird are quite foreign to per- petual questing on the wing in the open country: they lead it to seek: the deep recesses of the forest,—and there, tranquilly seated on a high tree, to watch the casual advent of its prey, and, having seized it, to return directly to its station. The bill, again, is greatly compressed with vertical sides and ridge flat towards the base, convex towards the tip. This organ is, moreover, strong, longer, and more arched than in Merops. The Bucie are of rare occurrence, and are solitary wood- landers ; whereas the bee-eaters proper are gregarious, and common tenants of the champaign. Our birds are found in the lower and cen- tral regions of Nepal; but seldom or never inthe northern. The Nipa- lese call them Bukay-chera; chera being merely a corruption of chiria, or bird. I latinise the former word to procure a generic appellation. I have as yet discovered but one species, of which the following is the specific name and character. Bucia Nipalensis. Nipalese Bucia, Mihi. Bright parrot green, shad- ed on the belly and vent with bright buff: lining of the wings and lower tail covert, pure buff: wings internally and basally, and tail on the inferior surface, the same: forehead and gular hackles, blue: the last, formed of a double series of long, composed, drooping plumes, ranged opposite to each other on either side the trachea: bill plumbeous, with black tip: iris brown: legs greenish yellow. Length thirteen to fourteen inches: breadth between the wings seven- teen to eighteen: weight three to four oz. : sexes alike. The bill is more than twice as long as the head. It has a consider- able and uniform arcuation throughout; is hard, strong, entire, very moderately excavated internally ; at base scarcely broader than high ; 3A 362 On a New Genus of the Meropide. [Junz, and nearly twice as high as broad immediately beyond the base. The ridge above, though narrow, is quite flat from the brow to the centre of length; beyond it and below, convex. So great is the lateral com- pression, that the sides are plane and nearly vertical : the cutting edges are trenchant and unemarginated: the tips pointed and nearly equal. The nares are rounded, lateral, basal; the fosse evanescent; the aper- ture covered closely by a small incumbent tuft of setaceous plumulli. The tongue is long, flattened, pointed, cartilaginous, and feathered towards the tip. The gape is scarcely cleft tothe fore angle of the eye, and smooth. The wings are of very moderate length, but of great and pretty uniform fulness or breadth: the tertiaries and primaries equal: first and second primaries considerably and subequally gradated: third and fourth nearly equal. Fourth longest: first not bastard; more than half as long as the fourth. The tail is rather long, and is composed of twelve very firm, broad, and equal feathers. The tarsi are very low: knees and more plumose: acrotarsia scaled: paratarsia smooth : toes long and typically syn- dactyle ; the soles being quite flat, and the exterior toe joined to the central fore as far as the second joint—the interior, as far as the first. Nails subequal, much compressed, falcate, feeble, and acute: the central fore with a large unpectinated comb. From the chin to the breast depends a row of plumes, inserted opposite to each other on either side the trachea. They are more than two inches long, of composed web, and medial equal breadth. Their mobility gives the living bird a very grotesque appearance. Some such appendage seems to distinguish one of the true bee-eaters, viz. that called amictus. These birds feed principally on bees and their congeners: but they likewise consume great quantities of scarabei and their like. They are of dull staid manners, and never quit the deepest recesses of the forest. In the Raja’s shooting excursions they are frequently taken alive by the clamorous multitude of sportsmen, some two or more of whom single out a bird and presently make him captive, disconcerted as he is by the noise. It may be worth while to add, in conclusion, that the true bee-eaters are never seen in the mountains: nor the Bucie ever, I believe, in the plains. The intestinal canal in our birds is usually about twelve inches long, with ceca of an inch and more in length, placed near to the bottom of it. The stomach is muscular, and of medial subequal thickness. Such, too, is the character of the stomach and intestines in Merops. 1836.] On a new Piscatory Genus of the Sirigide. 363 VII.—On a new Piscatory Genus of the Strigine Family.— By the same. Order Rartores. Family Stricipaz. eines i Genus new. Cultrunguis, Mihi. i A; i Generic character :— ; Bill subequal to the head, straightened as far as the cere, gradually curved beyond it, moderately compressed, strong. Wings medial, equal to the tail, four and five longest and subequal ; three first con- siderably gradated, first not pectinated. Tarsi rather elevate, partially or wholly nude, reticulate. Toes nude, and reticulate with three or four scales next the talons; the anteriors subequal. Talons medial, stout, subequal, compressed, cultrated below*. LEgrets as in Budo, disc and ears as in Noctua. Tail short. ; It is some time since Gen. HaArpwicke made known to science an owl with nude tarsift. The circumstance was remarkable, but it does not seem to have led him to any further investigation. Some years back I discovered a similarly-characterised species, and at the same time noted that the talons were sharpened like a knife on their lower edge. In process of time I discovered another species with the tarsi half naked; and this also had cultrated talons. But my specimens of both species happened to have the stomach empty; and I had no immediate means of observing the manners of the birds. In 1830 I had opportunity to note that both species flew well by day, and were constantly found on the banks of rivers. Analogy with the eagles then led me to suspect that these birds might possibly be fishers : but still, until I had seen them fishing, or had obtained specimens with fish in the stomach, I could have no safe ground for assuming so extraordinary afact. I have now, however, procured specimens with the stomach full of fish, and fish only{ ; and I presume that the expost- facto inference from structure to habits will scarcely be questioned. Whether Harpwicke’s owl will, when better known, constitute another genus of the fishing owls, remains to be proved: but that bird is sufficiently distinguished from either of mine by its shielded tarsi. In forming a new genus for two new species, essentially alike, and very materially differmg both in conformation and habits from all known birds of this family, I rely upon the sanction and support of men of science. And I shall only add, before proceeding to give the specific characters, that those of the genus have been derived from a freer use of ordinary external characters than has heretofore been made in * Hence the generic name, culiratus and unguis. + Of the yet earlier Strix nudipes of Daudin, nothing seems accurately known. t~ I have just discovered that they prey on crabs as well as common fish. B. H. H., 2nd July, 1836, 3A 2 364 On a New Genus of the Strigide. [Junz, respect to the Strigine birds. Cuvier regarded these birds as consti- tuting but one genus. Vicors raised this genus to the rank of a family, advancing Cuvier’s subgenera to genera. But Vicors left Cuvirr’s character as he found them,—whether wisely or not, I shall not presume to say. I suspect, however, that, as species multiply and become accurately known, resort will be had to characters analo- gous to those by which the Diurnal Raptores (to go no further) are generically distinguished, if not from a sense of the superficialness of the old characters, yet from a want of determinate new ones. It is surely reasonable to distinguish all the Raptores upon similar princi- ples; and, as the external construction of the Strigine birds certainly renders this quite practicable, so, I believe, that the analogies thus necessarily suggested to the student between them and the Falconide, would tend to the higher uses of the science. First species : C. Flavipes, yellow-footed Cultrunguis, Mihi. Head, neck and body below, bright rusty, each plume striped down the shaft with saturate brown; the stripes narrower below than above: disc and leg-plumes immaculate: back wings and tail, saturate brown, transversely barred, and largely emarginated and tipt, with rusty ; the bars interrupted on the shafts, and frequently resembling triangular indentations: four bars across the great quills and tail feathers; and the tips of both largely paled: plumes of the thighs and tarsi downy: half the latter nude: nude portion and the toes, flavescent fleshy grey : talons horn yellow: bill blue, witha dusky tip: iris bright yellow : edges of eye-lids black : twenty-two to twenty-three inches long by 55 to 58 wide. Weight three and a half lbs. N. B. The sexes resemble each other both in size and colours. Second species: Cultrunguis Nigripes, Mihi. Head, neck, back, and whole body below, pale earthy brown, with a fawn tinge; paler and albescent on the abdominal surface; each plume striped down the shaft with a saturate brown mark, which is narrower below than above; and each also crossed with numerous slender zigzags of brownish fawn colour: wings and tail saturate brown, triangularly indented or cross-barred, and broadly tipt, with obscure rufous yellow, which is freckled, for the most part, on the tertiaries, and scapulars, with brown : great quills and rectrices, quadricinctate, as in the preced- ing: disc earthy brown: thighs pale fawn: both immaculate : throat white, and almost or wholly unmarked: wings albescent towards the roots of the feathers: bill dusky horn: iris bright yellow: edge of eye-lid black: tarsi and toes, purpurescent dusky: talons the same, with black points: thighs and knees to the front, covered with downy plumes : tarsi and toes, nude: size of the last. Vol VEL EXE 4 {he Yj YY PLS es \ 4a : seh ol 2 it Uv Y ef we ¢ ae “it Mews “be eee Caltrunguis Flavipes willy Wigrepes lype of the Genus Cultrunguis KB. inner side of the foot: sixe of nalite. + ral LG. J mets 1836.] Report on Nepal Rice, Wool, &c. 365 N.B. This species bears an extreme resemblance, in point of colours and size, as in other respects, to the Striry Hardwick. But it may be at once distinguished therefrom by its reticulated tarsi. The sexes, as in the preceding species, are alike both im size and colours. These birds moult once a year, between June and October, inclusive ; they breed in February-March; and are almost equally common in the several regions of Nepal, notwithstanding the great diversity of climate. The structure of their stomach and intestines offers no marked pe- culiarity. The intestinal canal is from three and half to four feet long ; very thick-coated throughout ; considerably wider above than below ; and furnished with two thin ceca, from three to four inches long, which are situated near the anal extremity of the canal, and widened considerably at their distad end. The stomach is rounded, considerably and equally thickened in its coats, and provided with a toughish and rugose lining, which is easily separated. The coats do not consist of proper muscle, but of a substance be- tween gland and cartilage ; for which I know no name, commonly as it occurs. The succentorial stomach is purely glandular, with soft papillated lining, not distinguishable from the body of the organ; the points of the papille being, in fact, mere excretory pores directly in contact with the secreting substance. The following detail of dimensions is taken from a male specimen of Flavipes: but so similar are the two species, and the sexes of both, that it will equally represent the average size and proportions of the males and females of both species. St. in. Rip billitatipt tails, OF. edya Le ak Md ee LO BIE eM Of ferade 2.5 af clie's prt a ctaiiere Nelw sia 'e p89 O nce ASA MEE DE Ol meres malsiaib=oisfaacie sickes em LO mek) & MasalDTeRAt Of, eee sce e sees rs O Lys PAE ia fateh oietole.cccetelain ecabintele:s aka b¥e areas be Owe G. PURERNIAD Beeee ls Braet Ayal eho’: S Ura ehs ss eros oan torches re cake oe BewiEIRLOE OM Sel cas late ee alee akin OLAS PP SANAE OL: SUIS, alata) <5 seis) oto Sissel lel oats 4OU0 Metall: sis diaraakae one cts ccrits aos te BELO: VIII.—Report of the Society of Arts on Specimens of Rice, Wool, &c. Srom Nepal and Assam. [Communicated by Government.] The Society having received from their Committee of Colonies and Trade a report on sundry articles sent to them for examination from 266 Report of the London Society of Arts [JuNnE;.. the Honorable Court of Directors of the East India Company, have been pleased to approve the same, and have directed their Secretary to transmit a copy of the Report forthwith to the Honorable the Court of Directors, with an assurance that the Society will at all times be happy to receive from them any communications connected with the objects of this Society. (Signed) Arruur Aixin, Secy. Report. The Committee of Colonies and Trade having been directed by the Society to examine sundry articles sent to the Society by the Honor- able the Court of Directors of the East India Company, and referred to this Committee 4th November, 1835, report as follows : I. The Soomla or Himalaya paddy, or mountain rice, received from Mr. Hopeson, Resident at Nepal, appears to be of the same kind as a sample (comprising five varieties) sent to the Society of Arts in 1821, by Dr. Watuicu. From the great height above the level of the sea at which this grain is cultivated in Nepal, it is suggested that it may perhaps be advantageously introduced as an agricultural crop in the North of Europe. Before this can be determined in the affirmative, it is necessary to prove, first, that this grain is capable of coming to maturity in the climate of the North of Europe ; and, secondly, that the clear profit of a crop of hill-rice from a given area shall be at least equal to that of a crop of oats, barley, or rye from the same area. Several parcels of the former quantity of hill-rice were distributed by the Society to persons residing in various parts of England; and several were likewise sent to France, to Switzerland, to Germany, and to Russia. Of those sent to the Continent, the Society has received no intelligence ; and of those distributed in England, the result has been, with one exception, that the seeds did not germinate. A notice likewise was inserted in one of the French journals a few years ago, from which it appeared that various attempts had been made to grow the hill-rice of Nepal in some of the districts of France from seed distributed by the Government of that country, but wholly without success. Mr. AnvrErson, the Curator of the Apothecaries’ garden at Chelsea, was one of those who undertook to make an experiment on the possi- bility of growing the hill-rice in England, and was, in consequence, furnished with some seeds of the five varieties at that time in the Society’s possession. They were sown in March, and some of each kind germinated and did very well while they were kept in the 1836. ] On Rice, Wool, and Cotton, from Nepal, &c. 367 hot-house. In May they were removed to the green-house, where they became stout, healthy plants. In the end of June they were transferred to a sheltered place in a basin for the growth of aquatic plants, having nine inches depth of water and twelve of mud; here they grew and promised well till the beginning of August, when, the weather becoming cloudy and rather cold, they became sickly, and were all dead by the beginning of September without having come into flower. _ It seems, therefore, evident that the temperature even of the warmer parts of Englandisnot sufficientfor the successful cultivation of hill-rice. The latitude of Sirinagar, where this grain is cultivated, is about 30° ; that is, under nearly the same parallel as Cairo; and although, from its height above the sea and its vicinity to ridges of snowy mountains, the winters are severe, yet in such situations the summers are much hotter than on lower levels in higher latitudes, where the average temperature of the whole year is not perhaps greater than that of the middle of one of Europe. In Florence, and even in Rome, frost and snow are by no means of unfrequent occurrence in the winter, and yet the summers are hot enough to bring to perfection many annual vegetable products, rice among the rest, which will not succeed north of the Alps. Concerning the second head of inquiry,—viz. the comparative profit of land cropped with hill-rice, and with barley or oats,—the Committee are not in possession of a single fact on which to found an opinion. But they may be allowed to state that, as the farinaceous food of Europeans is consumed chiefly in the form of bread or of cakes, and as rice is not capable of being made into either one or the other of these preparations by the simple process of kneading with cold water and then baking, either an additional process of cooking would be necessary in the attempt to substitute rice for the ordinary European grains, or the new habit must be superinduced, of doing without bread and replacing it by boiled rice. In érder to obtain a correct opinion of the comparative value of hill-rice with the other qualities of this grain in the London market, a sample was sent to Mr. Ewsanx for examination. That gentleman reports that fine Carolina rice, imported in the state of paddy and cleaned here, is worth 30 shillings per cwt.; that fine Bengal rice cleaned here, is worth 23 shillmgs per cwt.; that rough and inferior East India rice, imported half-cleaned and finished here, is worth 14 shillings per cwt. This latter was purchased from the importer at eight shillings, lost 20 per cent. in cleaning, and the cost of this process was two shillings per cwt.; so that there remained only two shillings per cwt. for interest, profit, &c. 868 Report of the London Society of Arts [JuNE,; The hill-rice is nearly of the same quality as the latter kind, being dark coloured, opaque, and not at all calculated for the English market. The opinion, therefore, of the Committee is, that the hill-rice cannot be successfully cultivated in Europe; and that, if capable of being so cultivated, it could not enter into competition in the European market with Bengal rice. II. The wool of the Hooniah sheep of Tibet consists of two samples,—one, of the wool in its natural state ; and the other, of a portion from which the black hairs have been separated. The former is of precisely the same quality as a parcel sent last year (1884) to the Society by Dr. Wauuicu ; and the market price of it in London, at that time, was, according to Mr. Essworts, of Basinghall Street, from 10 to 11 pence per lb. The two samples, after being examined by the Committee, were also examined by Mr. Essworrn, and by Mr. Souruey, of Coleman Street. According to Mr. Essworru, the value of the wool in its unsorted state is from five to seven pence per lb. A considerable quantity of similar wool from India, but rather coarser, has been sold in the London market during the last two years at from two and half to seven pence per lb. The sorted wool is worse than the unsorted ; for, in se- parating the dirt, all the finer filaments have likewise been taken away. Mr. Souruey estimates the value of the unsorted wool at about 10 pence per lb. ; and states, that it greatly resembles a large portion of the wool imported from Jutland and Denmark. Mr. Hopeson’s expression that the ‘‘ wool is said to be superb,” does not in the least apply to the sample actually sent by him; but as he has stated that the animal “is of trans-Himalayan origin, and will not bear the heats of Nepal*,” it seems probable that the wool in question was grown in that country, and has greatly degenerated ; it being well known that the sheep of Barbary produce hair rather than wool. The Committee think it incumbent on them to notice an opinion expressed by Mr. Sournzy, from the great attention which that gentleman has paid to the growth of wool; namely, that the Hooniah and other coarse qualities of Indian wool, of which many hundred. bales have recently been imported, would be very materially improved by the introduction of some well-selected rams, of which an ample supply might no doubt be obtained from New South Wales. * This expression completely confirms the observations previously made respecting the hill-rice of Nepal, which thus seems to grow in a climate too hot for the production of wool. 1836.] On Rice, Wool, and Cotton, from Nepal, &c. 369 III. Two large pieces of cloth made from the down of the Simool or Tree-Cotton, Bombar heptaphyllum, from Gowahatty in Assam, the place of their manufacture. On examining the cloth it appears that the fine short down of the Bombaxr has been spun into a large wove slightly twisted cord or roving, and that this is made into cloth by interweaving it with a warp and short of common thin cotton-thread, much in the manner of carpeting. It composes a loose cloth, incapable, probably, of being washed without injury, but considerably warm, very elastic, and light. From the shortness of the staple and the great elasticity of the fibre, it is not at all probable that it could be spun by the machinery now in use for spinning cotton; but the combination which it exhi- bits, of fineness of fibre with great elasticity will, no doubt, make it rank high as a non-conductor of heat, and therefore fit it for making wadding, and for stuffing muffs, and perhaps mattresses. When carded with wool it might probably form the basis of fabrics of great warmth, lightness and silky softness. IV. Sample of Safflower made at Myrung in Assam, by Lieut. RUTHERFORD. The Committee not wishing to rely entirely on their own judg- ment in this case, more especially as the whole quantity placed at the disposal of the Society is not enough for a satisfactory compa- rative trial either on silk or on cotton, have availed themselves of the opinion of several dyers and brokers, the concurrence of whose judg- ment with that of the Committee induces them to consider it as correct. Mr. Grieve, silk dyer, of Booth Street, considers the sample to be clear and of good quality. Messrs. Racinr and Jaquss, silk dyers, of Spitalfields, consider the sample to possess a fair proportion of colour, though not of equal quality with the best from Bengal. Messrs. Jounson and Rennuy exhibited to the Comm JO UOT}IAAIOD B aIOYM ‘YJUOUT 4se[ 9UOP Udaq aavY P[NOYs sF *1eg *puRys P90 ay) JO asoy] WLOIZ SPULpvaL s}I Sunonpap Aq uaxyeq os SUOISUd) ay, *.0G 7B ' 49 “ds OBP‘T JO Plow JasuOIs v 1OJ pasuvyo seM 4I UOYM “YIS™T AY) JO UOOUIDIZe 9Y} 0} dn pFE*T Jo AjtAvAD ogiosds B pey ,,Ja}aWIOIVG Jam 5, 942 UT proe ormydins ay 7, : *syjuouL Sutpaosid Om} ay} SuLinp poyseural se sSarpee SULUIAD pue sumi08ul 8} UsaaijJoq suUaTIAYIp oules oY} Surais ‘plepuejys IIUVIIOF Aut UVY} IOMO] “Wd F Je SPOS pues *W tv OL Ie ZEoS YQUOU SLY} Spuvj}s JoJQWOIeg plepuejys mou euL “piemyorq Joyyer uted _2 SR RRRAAIMPRTY OMI "i 0'F 6001 9° 94 98 6'9h 89 vl 0°06 eae ooF* 81F* 16 L‘gtia’e {Z6¢ \9*Z8 Les’ lezo*Ge ‘uvay “urex *Azey “138 ‘119 “as “aS “MS OPOL |PLL O LLP Ee Io \o‘oR e8ls jonas |6LF ‘PEE L's 10°9 |Z‘osi6er' jare’ |rist jogr® its “1nurnd *482019A0 op ‘MS “MS ‘ms [SO' le*POL jot, OL |L°B \0°ZE'G2a*|EZS ES BtHS 96 IL°b |G: onipels loles |pee’ leags 62 op op *1e9]9 ‘as AS ‘a Ici o96 8b 9% \F'E latpslOsl® \6La° lé6cr‘|gar* | 26 8% |s'e joPAl6or’ lgces |Zze° leapt | az op ‘Alamoys , ‘ales “uLeL ‘aud “a ‘a (SUT .p'26 6 |0'¢Z ¥6 \e*LLle'e |S iffteZ8lf |s0ts je6e‘\ecas 5 PLL |S°E |6‘eslPsls [eres |eoe’ j99z° lz op snd *1quiu ‘AN ‘ou au fost loos leat | 6 OcZZ\a% 2‘ jefcalZoa® jo9u' |Z9a‘|acat | 6 BYE \€°F \6PRORTS z6t* |eZes laces | gz ‘Aramoys «= “JBJS “tund op ‘ou 8 ‘a JOLS \eO0l |StZZ | bo |S°BLIrb |9°F |cs6giSIs* OPT’ |gve‘lizes | 68 &°9 |8°Z \eOulaEs’ joze’ jose’ |iteS | og *Ayeo1yy op “11119 au *as "uw 10°SOL {8°92 OOLIGSOT|G°E6|6FS OFS |e6e'|ThE* aL \6°L |Laglses’ lps’ eset ILLS a “und * 119 “yuma op "el, eA, ‘0 SOIL [8°22 GILLIL (E°Z jet T6l018. OGL. jo0r|09e* RFL|0'8 |8°8 IA‘BBlOlS’ jpzes lpegs |ZorS | ez op "yes umd op "eS "MSM 0 L°gtt |g‘o4 oat |0'8 |Axp | /°68/P0G. |Pzo! |Bar | 18e° eOL|Ph |S°o \tZele6l’ jags’ {199% Isees | as *Apnoyo “nuns op SO8F MS) soo as T6000 |8°¢L O'ZL10°9 |TB |2°88|906° jFGat |onge*|Zor‘ l'9 |€*€ {eZaiTsl’ joer’ |r1t9f jae. ita op *9t11s “WIND “wind “MS GS HOES FBSLOT L542 S‘OLIP‘S 19°9 9'L8/F0" JOZES |Pas‘|oRPS LQTS |€S [6'9R|P8T" loghS jpeg’ leno’ | oz *Aqvaryy ‘ou op “MS ‘s ‘Ss POOL |Bfrl / 9OL\PD \PE |LooB\PSt joes’ (Pie*|esrs (‘9 |6° je‘Zegi9Bt* loses jole® |eecs | 6L op op ‘umd “119 ‘as * MS "38 10°83 (8°92 E°9L10'S |S'h | 898 IBIS |Poe’ legp‘|pops 0S9LISS JE'S IQOR\FELS Inop® Ipege lERes gL *Apnoyo op *"yexys “Nd ‘as = * MS) CMS ale |e‘eZ OfLL lop Ge PEsiOsr® jose’ [9re|FaF’ OBZi0% IPE lg‘ZelZelS lipps jezg*s |edos LI ‘Ayearyy “ays “und op *as ) Ss OOIT |6'8Z &6 IL°GL(O'S j9%h \g‘Ze\lIe* |Pre* lezetleaps # 88 69 1¢°9 |G°RR/B0GS JITP. jezos jenes 9I ‘Azar “TMU op “aN “Ms 3 « {&isot jOfRe | 68 \g*e2 0°9 j€°9 |6°L8 LIB. 063. |Logti Lops | 96 Be |0P j9'98)/206° jeaes inses josss | et “qs ‘uno *4S@019A0 sumo | “MS “AL *s [98 F2OL 0°18 18 |ZOL|2°6 |€*OL 9°SU|FESS 1898S" Jalpi9ars | 16 S‘g |0°9 {O%9R|96L* Ieze* |e9e* gag‘ I Aquiu = “Ha ‘wma = suet ava] "AA *S ‘Ss ’ foes locce | aa jatosa‘9 |acz pag est’ foes lasptlecrs | 86 Sh ITS [cogiLGL'—leop* logge |Z9c° F st ‘ul au = “WO}s "198 * Gund ‘Ss Ss ‘o PLT | — |atee | en jo‘oL} Aap [eT 1) 1'G6|81a—|F2e*ez|ape'|a9c" | 68 lorpsiot9 |P°L |6*Zel8o9° lear’ |999° |oe9° | at ‘IMU ‘WIO}s ‘T1190 "wind ‘12 Op ‘Ss °MS aS) fe ap 18 |O'9LIZ°9 |6°8 |8°06|8P9' |998* |PIg‘|69P° | GB |Z*2710°2 |I‘Z letoGl909' e10SGaleau. |PEg‘ Il op ‘Mund = *pulm Suorjs}| “-Ms “AAS “AASS 1°86 |0*@8 lg 69 |6°6 RB°FG/OS9S (BIB |gop|8cps | 98 le*g7iP*Z |Z°8 |o‘oG|9z9° loge’ legst lets’ OL ‘auy ysaizourmoyq = “und *9 "8S *MS °S j0,26 OTs | 8 o°¢ |1°Z |pe6lGP9* |Pel’ jeepticas’ | 16 6F |P'9 \A°06)E29" i906. |Rest |LBP* 6 op “und "uund "MS SMS is O16 = |T°68_ sf 6B S°9 |S°8 |6°S6|Z59" j96L° lecpj90rS 4 36 PG |9°9 |1506|/S09' |zens |Lec. {L6r° | 8 ‘azaalg Yysoay BAIS “ND “JUIJS ‘UND | "MS “MS 45 OOOL |StI® | 8 O*0T|96 |6°F6\099" |89L* IgaptieZe* | 16 9'¢ |6°9 |L°0G|919" jFoG‘Bzjoass |L4p° FZ op *114T0 ‘ass 0°86 |a‘Ta 3 “Azey *T[TNUIND ita) ‘as tas ae 6°86 p*Z2 98 |F9LI9°L |b°6 |L°t6/Z99° [88° lcgplEbhS § 88 \o*ez|0‘Z |8°8 |p'Ggicse* goo’ loses legs‘ g *AVSTUL op *zeajo Ss ‘as *as OfZOL |1L | 38 |9SGL/OOT\ESI/G*FG|S89° \PPBS Ii~eg<|SLb° | G6 lo*gzi9%¢ IIL letagiogss jzgu’ |er9* 109% P op auy “198 ‘wind op “S| "MSS! °08 . J8OOL 8°89 | GL j9'eL|S°IL/eers*eG|629° jZzle* |reg|6Lb* | €6 lgrczie‘e |F°9 |o°2Z81199° |agns6z\oc9’ |6Bs‘ & op -Aystur *TynuNn9s op “AAS ‘as AS Sh" 1686 10°89 L°8 \65O1\T°E6\€S9° 908. |ecps}ZOPS | 88 Ipfezio‘g |S°Z le*ggi98s' lege’ leas’ |Faes 3S ‘JU 4Je*IUOUYy *4S2012A0 “und ‘MS = -* MS *S |03'0 {3°96 (0°04 | 98 [e%FZ|6°L |9°6 |9°c6/1Z9'—|208'8zleap<|6LE6a4 £6 |pc/I8%h \6°S [p‘HA|69S'—ipZo‘eclers’ 46762! 1 > _ 2 i — foo] ° 09 ori & Isic 4 n= aw ] 2 Waals a = je = S = = ~ 8S EI P| Fl , Rep ehizaes S| PS iPoa Pas cecmtssiga S | es iaboa re ¢ z : 5 2 Pf Ss] | Sal ao [SSB eerie) # | eS Pe gape a Sale ee tire| # | ee esti sa] < ce 2 a 5 2 a os ee eels ols ees g 2 og pol OB oye pols “IE EBS g a ad Pie 2 Bho "a [ho [STREP cigaes| & | oP | siSesps BeiS S| 5 se | S8lessl s e |B UP ey Sirota) & |e ieeieBay arg Si? "["3i ® | 8 | Peletel & *SOWIOIIX A = *19YICOM “pul yOJOULOUTIOY,L ‘W ‘d P 42 SUOTIVAIOSqO ‘NM ‘VY (QT 3®@ SuOI}yeAIasqo = I9jsisoyY > ‘9ES] ‘aun Jo yzuopy ay2 vos ‘nj]najnQ ‘aug Avssp ay? yn day ‘4azsthay 1p91h0]0.109}0 AT te JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. No. 55.—July, 1836. 1.—Translation of a Témba Patra, which was found ina field of the village of Piplidnagar in the Shujdlpur Pargand, by a Krisdn engaged in ploughing, and presented to Mr. L. Wiuxinson, the Political Agent at Bhopdl, by the Jagirddr. [In a letter to the Editor of the Journal of the Asiatic Society.] It is incumbent upon the friend of research to contribute every piece of information, however trifling, thrown in his way by accident or opportunity, by which the future researches of our successors in regard to the history and chronology of this country may be, in any degree, promoted. With this view I have thought it proper to for- ward to you the copy of an inscription on a copper plate lately found at Piplianagar, in this neighbourhood. For the benefit of the purely English reader, I have added a translation, which, if pound correct, you can also insert. On referring to the Chronological Table of the rajas of Malwa, given in the number of your Journal for December 1835, I find that this plate confirms the Ujjain Inscription in regard to the order of succession of four princes. Three other copper-plates have since been found at the same vil- lage. I have not yet had time to translate, or indeed to decipher them. L. Winxinson. [This inscription does more than Mr. Wiuxrnson allows, for it adds four important names to the Ujjain list, below that of Jayavar- mA, (see Chron. Tab. 105,) and having a date A. D. 1210 to Arsun the last of the list, it exactly fills the blank between the former prince (1143), and Birsan in 1220. We have no space for comments, but we offer our best thanks to Mr. WiLkInson 3 his valuable contribution.—Eb. ] 3c 378 Text of a Copper plate grant Trenscript of the text in Modern iis ail Aa TANT USTAUa UMTS II ufataraat Ba AAT armafars | HUTETCAA ferarfesiat ayats TWA STACAUATaT AS? TUT LUTTE | aeurtsra art rq ta aTqat wR il Fa detecararfata: ufaat Vz | mrad ta ata a tH HAVA FT 3 Wl varia dat ats Tatet S afutec: amreagat slag geara fataa: 4 8 GUAR: Rasatear VT | BAASA LATA ATHARAATT: | YW | aaquateatefa fenainat fina fauquax: ysiy jsciatiatad ve aaraqcarteat faanaiy aaRTaa | qaraTeMA CaCI HE hea WO AGIATIEAAI A qaterataeraa: l afa ataqfrareat Wee ATATSAT: | = | aenigatesadit ACAAT LTP TT: | qarPyRCM BATRA aehyati et ufaward fageat RoriGcee qa | qanacat faa waraanatetiay ve I aaata aia ya: AfaatET: | qeeaaaansratfays: TT WA A aaattonra WAAC AAT | WaALISe frsieit FTA ASAT |) VR I ATLATHAAT are curfas Erncat | aaitty Taser sTHaAT Ag | 22 | AQAM IT: TV FAAACgiUAe | au: quzeata dafasaeraa | 1X2 | ae sata fewsig: wae: | arattaqaavaty asso | UH I fay Ta afeazavsaaute: | STAT UUSAAT Ulat TAFT TAG TUT ji V_ | {Juny, 1836.) found in the Shujdlpur pargand. - 379 aaaaTea Ty safeerartae | feaarerere aaa oat fea fare fard | (9 | RIBAS acafatiat 4 aa Biya | WMICMIILT TTSR TRRAWAT | ey aq fafaudita feaatad aw | wayaey waifa safe RGA | Ue | aug Aaa Sahacainageufasacwa fafsfats ata GAG TWHTLAT A ATS AT ATT ufafrarfang faa saqeteta aTYAAs afated aa asucinratwacents: wasataTa allem Wa aaade HTS ®RZo ET IGICCR LEC ala Hde warfare sat LUralcat SET aurts | arava fauafas Feat hmaA ATTA faaata ara: | margarasrs teat ALIA YH! FRI WAS Ucat- HATA | fa aafaqMeTaaaitaa qarseera ta fastara at sevamrenatta a ATATATATA auras Te Taf TaLT aaqafanzama guts ufeaataedirara ufsa dates yaa yeifeatifienaa areata sawing: RRS tras: STATA RT acm: «= See: wala aaa: afafaant arafiarcraas quanviaget WaT. Aiwa AAAARTT ATIALAT WAIT Waa aeayed Tem aa- aT atratfangfarsats tat etaara arate fecer. fer < eq arama fat asraretaya at asaaal Tae ata TaaTUAS qamenscacty wife maT eet avVaAATaay: WITS SAT | qsfaseur wart cert leaciicit: | we ae aa uta SA TY At WF | qeut went a at eta qauci | a fasrat fatayar freta: ae ante xfs aaaesiafigarat faa aati ary sifraa | aanfacaqered a aaa fe Tee qoataat fara: | Haq w2go aTemMyAE to Wet cfaafas auufsa AHfewdass CMH ALAA | 3¢2 380 Translation of a Copper plate grant (Juny, Translation. To Virtue, the most worthy object of desire to man, hail! 1. May the best of Brahmans, who gives happiness to the whole universe by accepting a small portion of the earth as an emblem of the whole, give happiness to you. (Or, may SHesHa, who gives happiness to the whole ss uphold- ing (by contact with) that portion (resting on his head), give happi- ness to you. Or, may the moon, who gives happiness to the whole world, and who receives (in an eclipse) the shadow of the earth, give happiness to you. ] 2. May that Parasnuurdma, who gave to the Brahmans the whole earth, after it had become red as the setting sun, being drenched in the blood of the race of Cshatriyas prostrated in terrible conflicts, ever be praised. 3. May that Rama, who victorious in battle, quenched in the flood of tears, caused Manpopari to shed the fire that burnt in the breast of the virtuous Si’ra, when torn from her consort, give salvation to you. 4. May Yuputsutuira, whose feet the valiant Bui’ma kissed in humility, and whom Cuanopra, the founder of his race, formed wholly in his own likeness, live for ever. 5. The illustrious Raja Buosa Deva, formerly reigned: he was the chief of the Paramar princes, and in glory equal to the conqueror of Kansa. He traversed the earth in victory even to its ocean limits. 6. On the appearance of this glorious king, the fame of all hos- tile princes in all regions of the earth faded into obscurity, as white water-lilies in a ruffled lake bowing their heads submissively, lose their brightness before the world-pervading glories of the rising full moon. 7. To Raja Buosa succeeded UpayApitya, whose constant de- light was in the pursuit of pleasure: he was singularly endowed with the virtues of a hero; and stripped his enemies of their glory and fame. 8. How many proud princes with their terrible armies did not this Raja overthrow in ever-memorable battles, which resembled the war of elements in the universal deluge by the rapid discharge of his irre- sistible and fast-flying arrows; or he was like the whirlwind, which rising up at the universal deluge by its irresistible force, overthrows whole ranges of terrific and inaccessible mountains. 9. After him succeeded Raja Naravarma, who smote his enemies to death. He was wise and steadfast in support of religion and virtue : a very paragon of excellence, and a perfect model to the princes of the earth. 1836.] found in the Shujdlpur pargana. 381 10. He restored to religion, who stood infirmly on one foot in this iron age of guilt, its four-fold support, by making daily grants of land to Brahmans. 11. Yasnovarma, the chief ornament of the Cshatriya tribe, succeeded to him: and to him succeeded Asayavarma, distinguished by his wealth and victories. 12. His son VinpHayavarma, glorious in his life, next followed. He was distinguished for his heroism, and by his personal prowess, and directed his ambition to the reduction of the country of Guzerat. 13. The sword of this warrior assumed a threefold edge, when up- raised to yield protection to the three worlds. 14. His son AMusHyayana, equal to Indra in glory, next ruled the people. SusnatTavarMa, whose aim was directed towards con- firming the people in the practice of virtue, succeeded to him. 15. The angered prowess of this conqueror, like the fiery rays of the sun, which exercised its thundering rage on the city of Pataz in (or cities of) Guzerdt, is witnessed to the present day in the forest- conflagrations that still prevail in the country. 16. On the ascent of this prince to heaven, his son, Arsuna Raja, succeeded, who still holds oa his arms the circle of this earth, as a bracelet encircles the wrists. 17. This prince, when stilla child, put Jaya Sina Raja to flight even in child’s play ; the eight Dikp4ls (or rulers of the eight corners of. the world) smiled at his success. Thus his fame reached the ends of the world. 18. He is a very treasure of poetry and melody. Saraswat, delighted by the accomplishments of this prince, gave him her own lyre and her sacred volumes. 19. To whom but to him, who is equally renowned for the three- fold virtues, learning, valour, and generosity, can we attribute the enlightenment of the three worlds ? To this Raja belongs all prosperity. By these presents he informs the officers of Government, all Brahmans and others, the patél and rayats of the village of Piriwiri in the Shakapur pargan4, that in the fort of Mandu, this day 10th Phaélgun Shakla of the Samvat year 1267, he has given away this village in free gift, in commemoration of his accession, after the prescribed ablutions and due worship of Samsau, and with due regard to the fleeting vanities of this world. 20th verse. As the clouds are drifted along by the wind, so enjoy- ment from the senses lasts but for an instant: the life of man is like the dew-drop depending from the tip of a blade of grass; and virtue is the only friend that will avail in the world to come. 382 Translation of a Copper grant.. (Juny, Thus reflecting upon the vanities of this world, he resolved to seek the (sure though) invisible rewards of a future state. He there- fore gave this village to the Brahman Govinpa, his purohit, the son of JAITRAH Sinu, the son of Somapeva, the son of DeLana Avasa- vik, of the Tribe (Prawar) of KAsuyapa, VatsAra and Naripuruva, of the family (Gotra) of KAsuyapa, and a follower of the Madhyan- dina (or Wajasaneya) shakha or branch of the védas. He gave the whole village to its utmost limits, and all its groves of trees, with the full usufruct of its rents and revenues and rights, and of all the moveable property therein, including all right to trove property found therein, that he and his father and mother may increase in good works and in reputation. This gift is to last so long as the moon, and sun, and the earth shall endure, being duly made with consecrated water on a befitting record and with all reverence. Let the patél - and all the inhabitants of this village, bearing the royal generosity in mind, obey his orders, and make over to him the full usufruct of all the rights and dues heretofore paid to Government, excepting only such endowments and grants as have been made to temples and Brahmans. And let my descendants, and all who may succeed me, though not of my blood, well understanding that they will there- by be entitled to a participation in the fruits, preserve and maintain this grant in its integrity. It has been written,— ««Sacar and many other princes have enjoyed the earth in succes- sion. But every prince who maintains in full force any grant of a predecessor, acquires the same religious merit and title to future reward as the original donor.” And again it has been said,— «The Raja, who resumes grants of land made as a religious offer- ing either by himself or by former Rajas, shall become a vile worm to roll in filthy ordure: and shall drag his ancestors down into the same pollution. Reflecting that power and wealth and even life itself, are as unstable as the drop that floats on the leaf of the lotus, let every man refrain from detracting from the good name and from perverting the religious merits of another.” Written on Thursday, 10th Phalgun, Shudha of the Samvat year 1267, by the Raj-Giru Manpana, and with the concurrence of the most learned Pandit Binnana. 1836.) Note on the sacred Tibetan Scarfs. 383 Il.—Note on the white satin embroidered Scarfs of the Tibetan Priests. By Major T. H. A. Luoyp.' With a translation of the motto on the margin of one presented to the Asiatic Society. By Aurx. Csoma K6r6s!. Having received lately, with a letter from Butan, one of the silk scarfs mentioned by TurNnER as in use in that country and Tibet, which, though rather dirty, is of a superior manufacture and more highly ornamented with figures of deities than those I have heretofore met with, I think it may be presented as a specimen to the Society. I can fully confirm TurNner’s account of its general use in all inter- course, and am sorry I have not had any opportunity of ascertaining the origin of the custom, which is, I believe, peculiar to Tibet, Batan, and Sikhim. I applied to Mr. Csoma K®6rési for an explanation of the sentences woven in at the ends of the scarf, and that gentleman has kindly transcribed and translated them. I enclose his notes on the subject, and to save you the trouble of a reference, I shall copy what Turner says on this subject; to whose account I can only add that these scarfs are almost indispensable in all religious offerings, as well as on the occasions he mentions. Titalya, 31st May, 1836. T. H. A. Luoyp. Extract from Turner’s Embassy, 4to. Edition, 1800. Page 67. ‘‘ We each advanced, presenting, one after the other, a white silk scarf, or long narrow piece of pelong, fringed at both ends, as is the custom in these countries, to the Raja, who, keeping his seat all the time, took them in his hand, and passed them to his zempi. Page 71. We delivered to the zempi, or master of the ceremonies, a silk scarf for each of us, which being thrown across our shoulders, he dismissed us. Page 72. An inferior, on approaching a superior, presents the white silk scarf; and, when dismissed, has one thrown over his neck, with the ends hanging down in front. Equals exchange scarfs on meeting, bending towards each other, with an inclination of the body. No intercourse whatever takes place without the intervention of a scarf; it always accompanies every letter, being enclosed in the same packet, however distant the place to which it is dispatched. Two colours are in use for this manufacture, which is of China, white and red: the latter is rather confined to the lower orders: the white is respectful in proportion to its purity and fineness ; there are various Cegrees in both. I am yet ignorant of the origin of this custom, but shall endeavour, at some future time, to obtain an explanation of it. 384 Note on the origin of the Armenian Era. (Juuy, P. S.—I may also mention that the kow-fow or nine prostrations, as knocking the head nine times on the ground, is in these countries always performed by inferiors approaching their superiors.” Translation of a Tibetan sloka, found on a white piece of China scarf, called aA Sar wrqnasy : 5,krashis kha 6,tags, or “ scarf of benediction.” wo1 qyarqy asa awdaqea aay 1 Fyadanwya”e: IAs’ 1 a ~ a Vb SYA a a Vv Qa HHA SH’ DNA YQ 1 AMSA S HQ AN AY The same in Roman Character. Nyin-mo éde-legs mts’han bde’-legs, Nyin-mahi gung yang bde- legs-shing, Nyin mts’han rtag-tu drda-legs-pahi, dkon-chog gsum-gyi dkra- shis shog. Translation. «‘ Blessed the day ; blessed the night ; the mid-day also being blessed: may day and night, always return (bring) the special favour of the three most precious (holy) ones.” (Or thus ; the favour of the eminent three holy ones) the az QSN'Y being rendered, in Latin, insignis, eminens, &c. Norr.—On the cloth the Ayn is not sufficiently distinct ; I took it first for Oa" Qaw as in the two former lines; but now I correct it as it probably stands on the cloth. 30th May. A. Csoma K6rés1. III.—Note on the origin of the Armenian Era, and the reformation of the Haican Kalendar. By Jouannes AvpALL, Esq., M. A. S. While the Abyssinians, Babylonians, Egyptians, Persians, Bactriaps, and other primitive nations of Asia, have each had their respective epochs, the people of Armenia, where the descendants of the second grand progenitor of mankind began to increase and multiply, are not without a national era of their own. It is not my intention to enter here into a description of the various eras that have from ancient times obtained among the people of the East, as they have been successfully treated of in the chronological works of learned authors. I shall only confine my observations to the origin of the Armenian era, and the reformation of the Haican or Armenian kalendar. 1836. ] Jote on the origin of the Armenian Era. 385 It appears from our historical records that the Armenian era origi- nated in A. M. 3252, immediately after the coronation of the Arme- nian king Paroyr. Arsaczs, prince of the Medes, it must be remembered, having availed himself of the assistance of Paroyr, and of BeLtests NaBonassar, a prince of Babylon, succeeded in subvert- ing the Assyrian kingdom, and proclaiming himself king of Assyria. Ensigns of royalty were conferred by the conqueror on both of his powerful allies, each of whom returned from the field of battle to his respective country. This memorable conquest of Assyria was signa- lised by the commencement of the era of NaBonassar in Babylon, and by the origin of the Haican era in Armenia, which dates 743 years before Christ. The Armenian era was from the commencement regulated accord- ing to solar years, like the eras of the Babylonians, Medes, Persians, and Egyptians. The ancients were of opinion that the solar year con- sisted of 365 days, without paying any regard to the addition of the six hours, which formed the concluding part of each year. Conse- quently, the Armenian era, like that of YEzpEcrrp the third of Persia, anticipated the Julian year by one day in every four years. They divided the year into twelve months, giving to each 30 days, and added five days at the end, called (\ebjbug Aveliaz, which signi- fies added, and is equivalent to the Greek word pagomen (zayouev.) Thus the Armenian calendar year was made to comprise 365 days, leaving out the six hours. And according to this mode of computa- tion all the Armenian years are common, but not intercalary. The following are the names and days of the Armenian months. Armenian months. Days of the mths. Total of the days. yu wowpe Navasard, 30 320 i Here in fa order of the 0 d rmenian months are to be seen ocr Hori, < a By not only the number of days YuSup .. Sahmi,.. 30 90 thereof, commencing from Na- Eee oy Prey,...<. 30 120 vasard, which is the first month 5 f th di th SgewteeKarhos::. 0 e year according to the * LI se ars a0 = Armenian era, but alee the Urry --. Araz, .. 30 180 total of the days of the year up yresbhyut Mehekan, 30 210 to Aveliaz or Pagomen, which Uphq ... Areg, «. 30 240 invariably consists of 5 days, Gates Plein, © 30 270 even in leap years. Yepeph. Marery, . 30 300 Wepre » Margaz, . 30 330 Sprnly - « Hirotiz, .. 30 360 Uebpe ag Aveliaz,.. 5 365 According to the above mode of computation, the month of Nava- sard will commence on the 24th of August in the year 1836, and after a lapse of four years it will begin on the 23rd of August 1840. 3 D 386 Note on the origin of the Armenian Era. [Juty, In this manner it will anticipate the Julian year by one day in every four years, and after a period of 120 years the difference between the Armenian and Julian epochs will be 30 days. The lapse of 1460 years will increase this difference to a whole year, and the beginning of Navasard will again fall on the 24th of August, the day on which it will have commenced in the year 1836. It is stated in ancient Armenian chronological works, that the Armenian era was recommenced on the 11th of July, A. D. 552, on which day fell the first of Navasard. But the want of an intercalary day in the Armenian year creates a deviation of the beginning of the month of Navasard from the day of the Roman month, on which it originally commenced. We know on the authority of Armenian authors, that the month of Areg in the early part of the fifth century corresponded with the month of March. Nrerses the Graceful con- cludes his letter to the Greek Emperor Emmanuet thus: ‘ Written in the Armenian era 619, in the Armenian month of Areg, and in the Roman month of October.” And in an old manuscript copy of the Armenian Ritual is stated thus: ‘‘ Written in the Armenian era 670, in the month of Mehekan, which corresponds with the month of August.” In the year of Christ 551 the Armenian Kalendar was reformed by the Armenian Pontiff, Mosrs the Second, a native of the village of Eliward, in the province of Aragazotn, and eminently distinguished for his extraordinary talents and profound erudition. On his eleva- tion to the pontifical throne, he devoted his attention to the reforma- tion of the Armenian Kalendar. A council was accordingly convened by him in Duin, consisting of learned Bishops and scientific indivi- duals, by whose co-operation he succeeded in remodelling the Arme- nian Kalendar, as much as the circumstances of the times permitted, by newly commencing the cycle. Thenceforward the Armenian nation adopted the reformed Kalendar, and generally began to reckon their years in accordance with the rule laid down therein. In order to know the Armenian era, deduct from the Christian era 551 years, and the remainder, whatever it may be, will be the Armenian era required. For instance, if 551 years be deducted from 1836, the remainder will be 1285, which is the present Armenian year. It is usual with the people of Armenia to reckon the hours of the day from sunset to sunset, in imitation of the custom prevalent in ancient times amongst the Italians. The day, consisting of 24 hours, is called in Armenian |\

aioe 3 a jha H/2a |e mes Oo & Be ou o 3 2 tia tl m || S2 5/2 | |< ll gx Il Ho ES ot ee ZS (SAlP aA lea lSal/8, faa ]ekal £6 rd & o) CO [4 | aa a ae ; } : A oP 4 ae SR SPY SIRE ate, J ha a AAs) TT as i 7 ie a Ls oe *e: / f deve ia) y ri , ; ¥ \ BER LE hey ? | > ti P. 6 é pre , ‘ AN an S rt Some vy ace N Sprite J ere x ol a a CO ne ie c ar : vert» 1m 06 Peter 4 ’ - 7 yal Vol. V.PL.XXIL Soc. Jour: As. or Hygromet 40 Centestmat Tensions 3\0 “0 €és 70 degr 60 Ti Contesimatl Depresstons observed $0 Therm 30 of Wee- bulb SE 20, NSSTONS Complements « a 20 2 Daniels Lapl I4e------- a ease al ee eS Andersons Clin cerns Barometric Pressure of the Atmosphere pS NN aa of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. a “Before proceeding to detail the experiments directed to the~eluci- dation of this point, it may be as well, as we have already become acquainted with the theoretical expressions of other authors for the / maximum, to see how they also bear upon the intermediate depressions. The formula of M. Gay Lussac makes no provision for aught but the maximum depression; but the omission may be readily sup- plied on the same simple principle as has been adopted by Professor ApJouN ; namely, by the addition of —/”, the aqueous tension at the dew-point, to /’: thus, by the latter author, in all cases d = 87 f’ —f”. At first sight, this would seem a simple arithmetical ratio, like Dr. Hupson’s, but inasmuch as the tensions (f) are themselves in geome- trical ratio to the temperature (#), the same parabolic curvature will extend to the centesimal depressions ; or f? —/” will follow some low power of ¢— 7’. Captain Hersert’s rule has the same happy intr oduction ‘of a ies We have therefore but two theoretical enunciations to put to the test of comparison with experiment: for which purpose I will now bring forward such evidence as I have accumulated. In this branch of inquiry ~ materials are so numerous in my registers kept at Benares and Calcutta, that it becomes expedient to gather selected data into groupes adapted to elucidate various points of the hygrometric scale. Moreover, as unity, or the maximum depression, varies in amount at each temperature, all observations must be brought to common centesimal terms before they ean be compared in the manner which is best adapted to give a quick perception of the relation of such phenomena; namely, by a diagram, as ‘in Pl. XXII. First, then, to enumerate the data afforded by method 5, or comparison with the dew-point, of which, in addition to my Benares ob- servations, I have profited by the presence of an American ice-house on the banks of the Hughli to collect an accurate series made thrice per diem in the hottest period of our Calcutta year. Tas. Iv. —Comparison of intermediate Depressions with aqueous tensions, ascertained by the dew-point method, at Benares. ‘Namber of obserya- Temp. Wet- Dew- Centesimal | Depres- Comple-. Tabular cente- tions agreeing close- of air. bulb, point. tension. sion. ment cent. sim. tension 5 lyin their respec- t—t' depn. deduced. tive particulars. tai t ue fvf j\ord, D-—d o 0 0 Tee, 7 Obs. mean, 85.0 81.5 79.4 83 S89 84 +01 12 Obs. ditto, 87.5 81.8 78.7 76 5.7./ (83 76 0 12 Obs. ditto, 90.0 80.5 75.7 65 9.5 74 64 —01 6 Obs. ditto, 94.0 81.0 73.2 202 13.0 66 04 +02 6 Obs. ditto, 92.5 75.5 64.5 41 17.0 55 40 +01 13 Obs. ditto, 88.2 67.3 42.9 23 20.9. 43 26 +03 8 Obs, ditto, 92.6 68.3 36.4 16 VES a 20 +04 3G 2 . 412 Experimental Researches on the Depressions (Jury, Second series, from observations in Caleutta. fll xsd ne of Sof dads. Alege 6 Obs. openair, 82.1 79.4 78.1 .88 Dell, 92 -88 6 6 Obs. ditto, 84.6 79.9 76.7 .78 4.7 86 80 +02 9 Obs. ditto, 85.6 79.7 75.5 Arh) 5.9 82 75 © 02 15 Obs. ditto, 87.7 80.2 74.6 .66 as 79 70 +04 2 Obs. ditto, 96.0 85.6 78.3 .58 10.4 74 .64 +06 3 Obs. ditto, 93.8 82.9 71.2 49 10.9 71 60 +11? 4 Obs. ditto, 87.3 76.4 67.3 .53 10.9 68 58 +05 3 Obs. ditto, 97.1 80.8 71.8 .45 16.3 59 45 0 6 Obs. ditto, 97.3 73.6 55.5 .26 PRE 41 .26 0 1 Steam pipe, 19.0 92.5 74.3 .04 97.5 6 04 0 3 Vacuum-pipe 92.8 80.8 74.8 .58 12.0 68 57 —O01 Third series, extracted from other observations. 7 Obs. by Her- beré on ri- ver Ganges, 91.4 82.1 78.1 66 9.3 74 65 —01 6 Obs. by Ap- GONy Nes a: 70.0 60.8 54.5 -60 9.2 64 52 —08 4 Obs. ditto, (heated air,) 93.2 69.0 53.7 -28 24.2 35 22 —06 In the following series the air was dried to two fixed points of hygrometric tension by means of sulphuric acid, of which the drying power was known beforehand by the table which I published, from careful experiment, in my note on the hair hygrometer before alluded to; but I preferred verifying those determinations by fresh measure- ment of its barometric tension, in the mode I had adopted to correct the tables of aqueous tension during the past year ; namely, by mois- tening a barometer tube with the acid solution, and mounting it in the ordinary manner. The daily readings registered in my monthly tables for May-June afforded a more accurate average than a cursory trial could have yielded; but the result was in perfect accordance with my former determination*. Fourth series—current of air partially dried. Number of observations Temp. Wet- Known Hair |Depres- Comple- Tabular F in similar circumstances. of air. bulb. cent. Hygrom.| sion. mentcent. centes. & tension, t—t' dep. tension. mg t z or, D D—d Load 2 Obs. with gasome- D ter current, Sulph. ° = ° acid, 1.344, S02 wvoeo 45 75 14.9 58 45 0 2 Obszidittoyin & .ie% 87:2. 7201 44 74 15.1 56 43 —O01 2 Obs. ditto, 90.3 74.4 44 74 15.9 56 43 —O01 1 Obs. ditto, ...... 96.4 79.4 44 74 17.0 57 44 0 WObsedittoy-.--. .- 94.0 76.6 43 73 17.4 54 40 —03 2 Obs. sulph. aeid, WAG eee coteasey.: S80 > Or, WODee 18 43 23.6 33 -20 +02 1 Obs. ditto, .... 87.7 61.1 18 AS 26.6 24? .12 —06 1 Obs. shorter tube, 84.4 62.0 18 43 22.4 aya elite) 0 2 Obs. brass tube,.. 87.8 64.3 18 42 23.5 30 RZ, —O01 * It will be seen by the Meteorological Register for May 1836, that pure sulphuric acid caused the barometric column to be higher even than a boiled tube. but acts in an opposite sense with acid or water. capillarity in my registers. This must be attributed to capillarity, which is negative with mercury, No allowance is made for 1836. ] of the Wet-bulb Hygromeier. 413 On inspection of the columns of complementry centesimal depres- sion and centesimal tension in all the foregoing tables, the constant excess of the former is their first predominate feature; whence the cer- tain conclusion that the ratio is not direct. But to arrive quicker at a conclusion of what it may be, let us view the position of the whole series in diagram 6, Pl. XXII. Here the base line designates the hygrometric tensions /”—f and the ordinates denote the corresponding centesimal depressions D—d —D. If amid such a straggling and scattered nebula it be allowable to trace a normal line, the curve D d will have a pre- ference over any other. Pursuing its dubious course, it passes through the two principal test groupes, upon which more dependence ought to be placed than upon isolated comparisons with the dew-point in still air. Now this line D d nearly coincides with the curve I suggested in 1829, from my Benares experiments, making H (or f’—/) follow the ratio of D — d'"°; or, calling D = 100, H = D—d '*° ; in other 100 words, the centesimal tension is as the difference of the actual and the maximum depression raised to the 1.5th power ; a form obviously very convenient to be worked by logarithms. This formula has been used for constructing my general table ; and its errors may be judged of by the last two columns of the preceding experiments: but it need by no means supersede the elegant formula d = 87 f/—” when the table is not at hand. The curve corresponding to the latter formula at 90° is also entered in fig. 6. At lower temperature it will have less flexure. On the same diagram I have traced the curve of the hair-hygro- meter indications, both according to Gay Lussac’s data and those of my original plate in Branpr’s Journal, on purpose to shew that the depression curve passes between the two near_the summit :—it was hence I derived the rule for correction of the rough maximum de- pressions, (Table I. II.) by taking it in the direct ratio of the hair- hygrometer indications: and the near accordance of the maxima so deduced, with the observed maxima in dry air, is an additional testi- mony in favor of the assumed parabolic curve. It seems an unmerciful increase of the tax upon my reader’s patience to extend this train of comparison further: yet it would be hardly fair to omit any thing that can tend to elucidate the subject or assist future investigation : I will not, therefore, forego, through a false and unphilosophical delicacy, the insertion of an abstract I had prepared for my own satisfaction, of three years’ comparative deductions from the wet-bulb and hair-hygrometer. It detracts somewhat from its value, that a constant index error of 4 degrees has to be substracted from the readings of the hair-hygrometer during the period in ques- 414 Experimental Researches on the Depressions [Juuy, tion. This I only discovered on checking all the instruments, as is my custom, before commencing the present experiments; but the hygrometer has been untouched during the interval, and as its scale embraces the 100 degrees with as much sensibility as when it was constructed in 1825, there can be no hesitation in making the required correction throughout. The extreme points of this instrument should indeed be verified at least once in a year ; as the index point is, from its delicate construction, easily shifted 2 or 3 degrees. Tas. V.—Comparison of the monthly averages of the Wet-bulb depression, and the Hair-hygrometer, for 3 years in Calcutta. At 10 A.M. Tension, At4p. mM. Tension, Temp. Dep. Hyg. byDep. by Hyg. Temp. Dep. Hyg. by Dep. by Hyg. t) o Jan.1833 68.0 8.4 81 100 .61 72.4 VIMG 74 -47 A9 1834 67.5 6.4 83 64 64 71.1 DE 03 o2 1835 67.8 8.0 80 -06 wy 70.7 alsa VAL -42 43 Rebs). 01 474.0 278,2.:82 -60 63 78.7 1207 2 44 44 .49 De TEA Hetsye teh 64 70 77.8 TG Tai 48 .o4 3: 4nd: 6s Oe, 87 70 72 76.6 LO 2 tad. Ay? .52 Mar. 5 (83.009 9-8). od 59 Ary) 89.2 1723.66 “3 43 Diese os hea. eb 67 -68 | 86.7 2D Lb 52 252 3.79.8 8.3 85 2630) iees6D 83.6 13.0. 740 47 44 April, 1 S720 Os OS 79 74 91.6 10.8 79 -60 py s Pk oia eels tee! 65 67 93.2 Sys, “Dy 99 | 3 84.6 7.6 86 .68 70 88.1 12.7.075 +52 ol May, .1 87.5 6.1 91 PY A) -80 90.0 8.2 86 67 70 207. 729) 86 -69 .70 94.6 10.9 80 58 -o9 3 86.8 6.5 89 74 76 88.3 7.5 86 79 79 June,. 190.5 6.4 88 75 74 92.8 Sal 82 -70 -66 2798/0) 24S oN -80 -80 87.8 6:1 90 79 78 BP S621 556) 487 76 72 87.4 6.9 85 72 68 July, . 186.3 4.0 91 83 .80 87.9 4.6 90 -83 78 Za00.0) ) 2 del, ol -80 .80 88.0 6.0 90 76 78 2) ite Ay/ eee lel etiets) 77 74 85.3 4.8 88 -80 74 Aug... 1 85.0 4.1 92 -82 -82 86.8 4.9 89 79d 76 PPO els sO) -82 82 86.7 By) Sh 78 -80 3 84.0 4.0 92 ,82 -82 85.0 ATS aeOW 81 80 Sept.. 1 86.3 4.4 91 76 -80 88.3 5.5 88 -82 74 2 S5s9u e49) 5 292 Hoa) ey 86.4 59 91 76 80 Pot Oeste Ott O)k -80 .80 85.0 6.8 89 7AL 76 Oct se IV85r2)) Hrb2h 87. 76 72 86.8 7.6 83 .69 69 2 S29) 4.0 oe 82 -84 83.9 5.0 91 wie) 80 lo) So.0) Ges Bod, adil «2 85.1 9.3 82 61 63 INov.n La 95 6.9 84 -69 -66 82.1 Oa, By / 54 ZAI Led BGO .66 -68 79.4 10-178 00 56 oy Han 9 ars koh} 64 68 HAS) 10.0 79 59 Df Decry: L779 5-85 189 70 68 74.3 7.2 82 .68 63 2 72:4 6a 987 .67 72 75.7 9.0 81 “By 61 3 69.8 6.1 84 68 66 72.0 igs) 7s: 090 56 SS a ns Means, 81.2 6.1 86.8 shit 72, | 83.8 8.9 81,5. .63 -63 The actual tension of vapour in inches, found by multiplying Datton’s maximun tension of vapour at ¢ by the percentage here given, is, 1836.) of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 415 at 81°, 2= 1.040 x .71 = .738 ; at 83°.8=1.128 X.63=. 711 (or.716 at 81°.2) being at the two periods of the day, on an average, very nearly equal ; though, relatively, the air is much drier in the afternoon. A similar comparison to that afforded by the above table would have been published with my journals for 1825-6 in the Philosophical Transactions for 1827, had the registers been allowed to stand as they were; but the columns of aqueous tension were struck out, although from the elaborate care I had taken in valuing the degrees of my hair hygrometer they were entitled to some reliance. It is, however, not worth while to republish them, as the wet-bulb instru- ment was then situated outside and the hair hygrometer inside the house*, and the two columns are not strictly comparable. One little table, however, deduced from four years’ daily experiments at Benares, which was also suppressed at home, I think likely to prove useful, while it bears directly on the wet-bulb theory, and exemplifies the truth of the assumption of its immediate dependence on f/’. This table shews the actual evaporation in depth per month, as measured by a small evaporameter suspended in the open air, for the opposite extremes of the year. The instrument is described in the fifteenth volume of the Asiatic Researches. I have collected on the left hand the observed quantities, and have now inserted on the right the theoretical num- bers which should express the ratio of evaporation. The results are even more satisfactory than could have been anticipated; and lead to the following very simple rule to find the amount of evaporation roughly in inches per diem. ‘‘ Multiply the aqueous tension at the wet-bulb temperature by the observed depression in degrees, and divide by 34.’’ Omitting the latter operation, the product will express in round terms the evaporation per month in the open air, or in a moderate breeze. Tas. VI.—Rate of Evaporation and simultaneous depression observed at Benares. Months. Year. Temp. Wet- ODepres- Obsvd.Eva- Ditto |}, 4.- Depres- Calculated ofair. bulb. sion. poration per {32% sion x daily eva. t. t d permonth diem |S & tension, poration, ° Fy 3 inches, inch. |S 33 aXf. aX fe April 1823 88.0 68.9 19.3 13.9 ~ 34 aie sade) 71.8) 91.3 °° 11.9 Ma 1825 92.3 74.2 18.1 14.7 ys 1826 90.4 69.8 20.7 15.1 Means 91.2 70.9 20.3 13.9 0.463 |0.748 15.18 0.447 182Z58079.8)r 462.0 17.8 March, 1824 81.4 66.5 13.8 —" Lo 2) iS) or “I or —_ nan _ “N I —_ > ok DCOO aonn ee Means 79.4 64. 1553 7.3 0.243|0.599 8.16 0.240 * The Calcutta Oriental Magazine, 1827, contains the whole paper. 416 Experimental Researches on the Depressions (Juxy, 1823 80.5 78.2 2.3 2.3 Sf’. dxf! dxf’ July and} 1824 85.6 82.1 3.5 2.6 are August, |) 1825 86.9 81.3 4.6 4.4 1826 84.4 80.8 3.6 3.6 Means 84.4 80.6 3.8 3.2 0.107|1.020 3.88 0.114 1823\60:. 55.7° 4.44 2.3 edge 1824 61.8 56.6 5.2 4.0 Jandary): \ 2825:003.5) M8:3 65,2 5.6 Y> [1826 63.8 54.9 8.9 3.1 Means 62.3 56.3 6.0 2.5 0.085|0.462 2.77 0.081 per. an The if 65.6 twelve ee Means 78.9 70.1 8.7 64.4 0.179/0.729 6.34 0.186 permonth 5.37 I have, as yet, had no opportunity of applying the principle ascer- tained from this table, to the circumstances of other places*. § 3.—Influence of the Barometer on the Wet-bulb depression. All philosophers agree in rating the influence of atmospheric pres- sure on depression as inversely proportional to the height of the barometer ; so that when the depression under a pressure of 30 inches is known, it may immediately found for any other pressure by multiplying d into p being the observed height of the barometer, That the evaporation increases with diminution of pressure nearly in the above ratio, has been proved by various experiments; and it might confidently be anticipated, from the necessary connection be- tween the evaporation and the refrigeration, (as exemplified in the concluding table of my last section,) that the same law would prevail in the depressions: but the only two experiments directed to this point that I am acquainted with, lead to an opposite conclusion. These were cited in my former paper: but as they are not accessible to many readers, I will here repeat them. Mr. Daniexu’s experiment will be found in Jour. Roy. Inst. XVII., and Mr. AnpERson’s in Brewster's Cyclopedia, Art. Hygrometry. Barometric Evaporation | Depression | Incre- { Depression | Incre- pressure. Ratio. | in grains by | of wet-bulb | ment. | of wet-bulb | ment. Daniell. by Daniell. by Anderson. 30.4 . 1,24 9 0 5 i) 15.2 3 2.97 12 +3 9 +4 7.6 z 5.68 15 +3 13 +4 3.8 8 9:12 18 +3 18 +5 1.9 1é 15.92 21 +3 9 = 29.33 24.5 3.5 5 3 50.74 26 #15 * The tables now published by the astronomer at Madras will afford good data; but his mode of measurement must be first known, as his evaporations seem double of my own. 1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 417 Now in these instances the evaporation certainly followed the in- verse pressure law ; but the depression was made to receive only a con- stant arithmetical increment for each geometrical decrement of the pressure ; in accordance with which I assumed that the proper correc- tion for variation of pressure should be d ye rather than d22 ; and even this would require a different co-efficient to make it suit fe two cases quoted above. Under such an uncertainty as to the real amount of this important correction, I was induced to direct a fresh series of experiments to this particular object ; and as my results differ greatly from what has preceded, it is incumbent on me to describe my process a little in detail. I first prescribed to myself the necessity of working with a current of air as similar as might be to that of the maximum series, as with- out such a precaution it would be impossible to ensure the permanent hygrometric status of the air in contact with the wet-bulb. The bell glass of an air-pump, under which I imagine the experiments of Danistt and Anperson to have been conducted, could not possibly fulfil this indispensable condition, since a partial halo of moisture would encircle the bulb of their thermometer ;—nor do they appear to have used a hair hygrometer to inform them how far this might be the case. Mr. Danieux it is true had a dew-point instrument fitted into the side of the glass receiver, but for slight aqueous tension this instrument becomes wholly useless. The extent to which his air was dried can be calculated pretty well from his own datum that the depression at 50° was nine degrees, which by my table would indicate -263 — (9 — 87 pte ade in the latter case requiring a cold of 8 degrees, and in the former of 16, below the freezing point to produce deposition. But to return to my own experiments :— In place of the short open glass tube connected with the gaso- meter and glass balloon in which the wet-bulb was before exposed to the current of air, (fig. 1,) a thin horizontal brass tube (fig. 7) was substituted, having two lateral apertures for the admission through corks, air-tight, of the dry and wet thermometer bulbs (¢, ?’). From the same brass tube descended a glass barometer tube (p) into a reservoir of mercury, similar to the gage of an air- pump, for marking the actual pressure close to the thermometers. The other end of the tube was conducted by a flexible pipe F to the receiver of an air-pump, where a continual vacuum could be kept up by pumping without intermission during the course of an experiment. 3H centesimal tension *30: or by Arsounn’s formula 418 Experimental Researches on the Depressions {Juuy, and by manceuvring the stopcocks (k, k’) at the two ends of the brass tube, the pressure could be maintained at any point, and the draft of air regulated until the temperature of the wet-bulb had been satisfac- torily ascertained. Finding that the labour of working the pump was rather irksome in a climate of 95°, I afterwards availed myself of the vacuum engine of the coining-press room in the Mint to relieve me from this duty. In the pipe leading from the twelve recoil-pumps of the presses a vacuum of about (or rather 30—27) inches is constantly maintained by the steam engine, so that by adapting the tube F to this with a stopcock, I was enabled to regulate the pressure, and prolong each interval with the utmost ease and comfort. It will be seen from, the table of experiments below, that by em- ploying a current of dry air the freezing point was readily attained under a pressure of 74 inches, while the dry thermometer, only one inch from it, marked 92°: whereas all who have tried Lusuin’s pro- cess for freezing have found it exceedingly difficult in the hot weather of this country to produce ice with a vacuum nearly perfect. The reason has been already explained: in the latter case the partially moist atmosphere arrests the progress of refrigeration ; whereas in the latter, the vapour rising from the evaporating surface is continually removed ;—it is, in fact, like sitting under a punkah or without it, an illustration that requires no comment to an Indian reader! Of such influence is the motion of the air in the experiment, that, as will be seen presently, a cold much below the freezing point may be attained under a pressure of 43 inches, with common air at 92° containing six- tenths of its vapour of saturation (dew-point = 75°) and without the aid of sulphuric acid, or any other artificial means of previously drying it! This unexpected result opens a wide field for speculation as to the possibility of modifying the apparatus of Lusuie for the artificial production of ice; and I hope, when leisure permits, to resume the thread of this collateral and highly interesting discovery. The nature of the problem teaches us @ priori, that if a temperature of 20° can be attained under a pressure of 43 inches, the cold at two inches ought to be many degrees below zero of Fahrenheit’s scale ! Out of four experiments made with the air-pump, and eight with the Mint vacuum engine, it will be sufficient, after quoting the numerical results of the whole, and referring to the accompanying diagram (Pl. XXII. fig. 10.) for a comprehensive view of their general bearing, to select two or three of the most regular examples for analytical dis- cussion. 1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 419 Tas. VII.—Depressions under diminished pressure. Temp.| Hyg. |Temp. of wet-bulb, under a pressure of of air.) tens. |20. 22.5 15. 17.5 6.0. 5.5 5.0 in. 1. Expt. with air pump, air ° oO 0 oO dried by Sul. Ac. 1.48, {| g4.0 .18 161.0) .. |56-0| 48. . Ditto, corks fitted closer, | 94.7 Byictee ||) ok lO eee . Brass tube, better fitted, | 94.4 | .18 |62.0/57.0/50-3} 32.0 . Ditto, careful expt... .... | 87.8 .18 (64.3/55.0149-0] 35.0 . Common air, in Mint vac. tube; dew-point 79°.5,| 88.5 | .75 |81.3/76.4'69.0| 48.0 | .. | 32.0 . Partially dried, hair- wid in balloon av. 34, 5 92.1 -12 |64.2/60.1/52.9] 31.0 | 24.0] 20.0} 18.0 - Nearly dry air ; hye. 1°,.. | 91.0 | .00 |58.3/54.4/48.7| 20.0 | 20.4) 18.5 75. Partly dried ; hyg. Oe Onl s0 BOS sce NOS su|DS. 91. ee 25.7| 20.0 93.2 92.0 i=) on om & bd 8. Hygrom. variable, ay. 20.. 05 |79.1\75.1|59.€| .. a 9. Dry air; hyg. 2°, .01 '59.563.2 56.3] 38.5 | .. | 26.4] 20.0 The last experiment is evidently affected with some accidental error, since the depression is Jess at 22.5 inches than at 30. I ima- gine the external air was admitted through an unobserved leakage of the tube, or a drop of water may have fallen in the tube, and thus moistened the air before it reached the wet-bulb. I now detached the gasometer and balloon, and admitted the air of the room directly into the tube at stopcock & (fig. 8) keeping up a pro- longed current at intervals of every two inches of pressure from 30.0 upwards to 5 inches, and then descending in the same manner : taking care to wet the thermometer from time to time as its water evaporat- ed. In ascending the scale I regulated the pressures in the barome- ter-gage principally by manceuvring the stopcock (A’) next to the vacuum pipe, the orifice at & remaining constant: whereas in de- scending, I allowed #’ to remain untouched while I brought the gage to the desired point by gradually opening the outer stop- cock k. The effect of this will be understood on viewing the apparatus: the current of air was considerably stronger in the last case than in the first, and in consequence the depressions are somewhat greater. To this it must be added, that in the ascending scale the depressions will tend to lag below their full amount, while in descending they will err in an opposite sense ; all of which is well exhibited in dotted curves numbered 10, 11 ofdiagram 10. The mean of the two series (marked by a plain line on the diagram) may be assumed as a good foundation for the analysis we have proposed. Experiments 10 and 11, on depressions under diminished pressure. Temperature of the room 92°.2 ; dew-point 74°.8 = centesimal tension .58 ~ Hair-hygrometer, 79 = ditto o7 3 H 2 420 Experimental Researches on the Depressions [Suty, rom. i Ties. Descending series.| & 5) £2 Calcu- ee Se Wet Wet- * Temp. a a | a5 Mean | lated sure | of air. |bulb. bulb. bulb. bulb. | ofair.| 23 {| 2§ depres- depres- inches. =. ae sion ob-| sion. 30 1 hg 3 4 Az {lag | served-| dX p cn vie aeil Wim ato ae re Lan | ° 30 92.7 |S0.4 82.0 rewetted) 80.5 93.0 } 11.7| 13.0] 12.0 12. 98 79.7 80.8 79.2 12.6] 14.3] 13.1 12.9 26 92.9 |78.0 80.0 rewetted 76.8 79.2 13.9] 15-5| 14.6 14.0 D4 77.8 74.7 75.2 15.0} 18.0} 17.0 15.0 22 92.7 75.4 (rewetted 72.4 73.8 16.4, 20.4. 19.1 16.4 20 73.0 70.2 19.8| 23.3] 21.5 18.0 18 70.3 66.9 22.5! 26.6| 24.5 20.0 16 67.7 64.2 24.2| 29.3| 26.8 | 22.5 14 93.0 64.0 61.2 29. | 32.3 30.6 35.7 12 | 60.0 57.4 33. | 36.1{ 34.5 20.0 10 54.9 (rewetted 54.6 53.8 | 93.2 | 38.1/39.7| 38.9 ; 36.0 8 48.3 47.3 93,2 | 44.7| 45.9] 45.3 45,0 6 38.0 38.8 92.5 | 55.0| 53.7! 53.1 60.0 5 31.0 30.8 91.6 | 62.0; 60.8] 61.4 72.0 4.4 rewetted 23.7 89.8 | 66.1] 66.1 81.8 At the first glance towards the final columns of this table, one might at first be led to exclaim, upon the wonderful accordance between theo- ry and fact! The ascending series, especially, agrees exactly with the calculation in several points, and does not diverge materially until the pressure falls to six inches, far beyond the reach of any likely contin- gency within our observance. But allthis seemingly agreeable coincidence is, in a measure, delusory. The effect is compounded of two different influences—1, the rarefac- tion; and 2, the diminution of humidity which is consequent thereon. We know from our second section of experiments how to appreciate this latter disturbing cause, and so isolate the reduction of tempera- ture due to the diminished pressure alone; but the prior experiments give us an opportunity of estimating it in a more direct manner. Thus, taking experiment 7, we have the following data: the temper- ature being 91°. Fahrenheit. The fourth column contains the hypo- thetical depressions on the supposition of the inverse-pressure ratio. Barometrical Depression Increment Theoretical Increment Calculat- pressure in dry air. observed. depression. d+ 30 q ed co-effi- inches. D p—d POSES Pp cient. ° A p ri) A—6 30.0 32.7 32.7 27.5 35.6 + 2.9 43.6 + 10.9 27 15.0 42.3 + 9.6 65.4 + 32.7 29 7.5 61.0 + 28.3 130.8 + 95.1 -29 6.0 70.8 + 30.1 165.5 + 132.8 23 5.5 72.1 + 39.4 176.5 + 143.8 .27 5.4 72.8 + 40.1 179.8 + 147.1 27 The rate of increment observed, it will be remarked, here invariably falls short of the calculated rate in the fifth column, but it bears al- ways the same proportion to it, about one-third; as shewn in the sixth column : therefore in this example the law of the inverse pres- sures holds good relatively, but it requires a co-efficient to reduce the absolute amount. Thus, the maximum depression in dry air at any 1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 421 pressure will, by the experiment, be equal to d + .27 (@ a) instead of d + ( d = —d ) (or simply d="). I will not seek to en- quire the cause of this deviation from theory ; or whether it be pecu- liar to the form of apparatus I employed; or whether the effect will be constant under all circumstances :—I will merely suggest that the supply of heat from extraneous sources—the brass tube (only half inch diam.) radiation, &c. could not fail to reduce the cooling effect of the mere current of air; and here we have the measure of their united disturbing power, which it is satisfactory to find constant throughout. Let us now see whether the same constancy can be traced in the more elaborate experiment with common air (10-11.) The first thing neces- sary is to calculate the percentage of moisture for each step. Now, as under 30 inches the centesimal tension was found to be ‘58 by the dew-point, and as no source of fresh supply was at hand, the tension at any other pressure should be directly as the pressure, or inversely as the volume ; since it is evident that a double space, for instance, will require twice as much aqueous vapour to bring it to a given state of humidity ; the aqueous tension, therefore,will be ‘58 x a for this series of experiments. Again, from our table of depressions, (from the diagram or from the formula) can be obtained, with the reading at these variable states of humidity, the depression either in dry air or in air of the initial tension ‘58. I have, in fact, given both in the fel- lowing table, and have set in the three last columns the calculated de- pressions by the expression just found of d+ .27 a d Tas. VIII.—Experiment 10-11, reduced to a constant hygrometric state. Barometer. | Centes. ;Tabular , Observ-|Deduced} Deduced aqueous |centesi- | ed de- | depres- jdepression {Cajculated | Calculated |Calculated tension |mal de- [pression |sion for | for dry | depression| depression| depression calc. {pression [variable |aq. ten.| air, D = | for varia- |for aq. tens. 'for dry air. H x 2_|corres- faq. tens.}.58 ps dx 100 ble aq. tens. 58 He dt 30 oqine e dx > T fof second 9 ° ° ° 30 -58 32 12.0 | 12.0 12.0 37.5 28 .54 34 13.1 12.2 12.3 38.2 26 .50 37 | 14.6 |} 12.5 12.6 39.1 24 -46 42 A i by 3 12.8 40.1 22 42 44 TOL) ses 13.3 41.4 20 39 47 21.5 | 14.7 BIA 42.8 18 235 50 24.5 | 15.7 14.3 44.6 16 rst 54 26.8 | 15.9 15.0 47.4 14 2d, 58 30.6 | 16.9 15.9 49.7 12 23 62 34.5 | 17.8 17.1 53.5 10 19 66 38.9 18.6 18.7 58.9 8 15 72 45.3 | 20.2 19.4 69.6 6 1l 76 Job | 22:3 25.7 80.4 5 096 78 61.4 | 25.1 29.1 91.0 4.4 |.085 | 79 | 66.1 | 26.7 429 Experimental Researches on the Depressions (Jury, ‘With exception of the four lowermost entries, the three middle (or observed) columns of this table accord wonderfully well with the three last, which are calculated by the formula above given multiplied into T, (the tabular cent. dep.) ; which is variable in the first of them, (that of the experiments;) is equal to ‘32 for the case of humidity ‘58; and is of course = O for the final case, of extreme dryness. Were we to suppose that the dryness of the air did not mount higher than -18 (second column) from some unperceived cause, the calculated depressions would suit equally well from beginning to end; and it must be remembered that any disturbing force will be much more felt in the low pressures. Moreover, it can hardly be expected that the depression should continue to follow the same law, after the evaporat- ing surface has congealed into ice. Had the ascending series of de- pressions only been used, instead of the mean, the accordance would have been greater towards the middle of the scale. It is hardly necessary to analyse any more of the present series, after ascertaining that the same co-efficient is equally applicable to dry and wet air. We may therefore proceed at once to the conclu- sion, that the depression of the wet-bulb thermometer, ceteris paribus, varies inversely as the barometric pressure, the actual variation being for every case twenty-seven hundredths of the calculated variation. § 4.—Depressions under augmented barometric pressure. It would perhaps have been better to have preceded the last enun- ciation, by a description of the experiments included under this head, since they obviously form part of the same series, and must be go- verned by the same law. They need not detain us many minutes. The modification of apparatus now employed is depicted in fig. 9. Between the gasometer and the brass tube furnished with the two thermometers was introduced a condensed air blow-pipe; while at the other extremity near the discharge cock k’, was adapted a syphon barometer capable of shewing an increase of pressure up to + 12 inches. By keeping up the action of the pump with the discharge cock more or less open, a current of condensed air could be maintained at any pressure until the readings of the wet-bulb became stationary; for, as before stated, it was upon the current only that reliance could be placed; and my endeavour was always to maintain the same rapidity in the passage of the air, although small variations in this particular do not, and ought not, to produce any sensible error. Not having used a hygrometer in this series, I trust to the de- pression itself (at 30 inches) to supply the datum of the humidity ; and here of course, under condensation, the moisture increases directly 1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 423 with the pressure. On the diagram this is very conspicuous in figs. 13, 14; and asthe air approaches dryness, the line formed will be seen amalgamating with the curvature of the former experiments. Tas. IX.—Depressions under increased pressure. Barom. { First Experiment. | Second Experiment., Third Experiment. ) Fourth experiment. Mres=)*) | .2 2 ess _sure. inches, Temp. Depres- Hum-|Temp. Depres- Hum-|Temp. Depres- Hum-|Temp. Depres-Hum- air. sion. idity,| air. sion. idity.| air. sion. idity.} air. sion. idity. Oo oO o o £0) oO 30 93.5 23.5 .24] 93.5 23.7 .24) 85.0 24.0 .15] 86.4 26.8 .10 33 sss 93.6 20.9 .26 — —_— 36 PA SPL itl a fetere amet) 14.0 .18 22.8 .12 42 19.5 .34] 94.3 15.5 .34}) 85.2 11.4 .21 20.7 14 In the last experiment the air was maintained for along time at each pressure, whence its results are perhaps entitled to greater con- fidence than the rest. The direct theoretical depressions, d x mS Pp would be 26°.8, 22°.3, and 19°.1, which corrected by the co-efficient before found, would become 26°.8, 25°.6, and 24°.7; these again would have to be diminished for the altered humidity to 26.8, 24:5, and 22.8; still, however, differing materially from the experiment, which I attribute to the difficulty of keeping up a sufficient draft at the high pressures, in consequence of which the humidity is not fairly estimated. If we examine the first experiment we shall have, The direct geometrical depressions,.............. 23.5 19.6 16.8 These modified by co-efficient, .27..;....... ...- 23.5 22.4 21.7 Corrected to the incipient state of humidity will be, 23.5 20.0 18.1 The observed depressions being in this case,...... 23.5 21.5 19.5 nearly midway between the modified and the corrected numbers, and as much above the latter as they were below them in experiment 4,—s0 it will be not unreasonable to conclude that our formula would hold good for augmented depressions, if proper care were taken in conducting them. We have now examined every case of depression that can be ex- perienced in common air, and we may finally sum up this lengthy investigation by uniting the members of the formula, that it may com- prehend both changes of humidity and changes of atmospheric pres- sure thus :— d= 84f/-—f" + .27 i nu a); Pp The latter member of the equation may be converted into a table of multipliers for heights of the barometer other than 30, which will leave the table I have appended to the present paper applicable to all 424 Experimental Researches on the Depressions [Juny, circumstances that can occur. The rule for its use will be given in the proper place. § 5.—Depression of wet-bulb in other gaseous media. It has been seen that the theory of the wet-bulb thermometer is entirely based. on the relation of the specific heats, or capacities, of water, of vapour, and of air. It may be made therefore to furnish an unexceptionable and easy method of solving the much-contested ques- tion of the relative capacity of different gaseous fluids, by substituting any of the latter for common air in the experimental determination of the depression. | By Gay Lussac’s formula we perceive that the depression varies precisely in the inverse ratio of the air’s capacity, ¢ (see p. 405.) Aprsoun’s. formula is based on the same datum ; thus the specific heat of vapour at 50° being 1129 (= 967 - 212 — 50) ; that of water being 1; and that of airc = 0.267; “ one part of air in cooling through d degrees will raise the temperature of 0.267 part water through the same number, and will consequently be adequate to vaporize a quan- tity of water represented by oer a Now, as *267 d (=e d) isa constant quantity, any change in the value of c must affect d in an opposite or inverse sense, that is c’ = Ze d' being the depression ob- served in other medium than common air. As most likely to exhibit any difference of specific heat, and without reference to any prior determination of the question, I selected two gases, hydrogen and carbonic acid, as far at variance in essential points as could be wished, and proceeded with them exactly as had been done with ordinary air. On account of the mode of preparing the two gases by distillation through a water-trough, they entered the gasometer surcharged with moisture: and, as noticed below, even after being well dried by the acid in the chamber, they took up mois- ture from the discharge-pipe on their passage to the wet-bulb. I could only approximatively remedy this evil by immediately filling in common air, and finding how much moisture the latter also absorbed in its passage. The error was of course less, if at all, perceptible at the high temperatures, and in a fresh series of experiments it was obviated by the introduction of my tell-tale hair hygrometer. Wishing to save the gas, it was made to pass into another gasome- ter instead of into the open air; on which account the current both of hydrogen and of carbonic acid passed more slowly through the steam- heated tube than the gir had done, and their temperature only rose to 160 and 170, in lieu of 180 and even 190 as at first. Here follow 1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 425 the readings which were considered as coincident, but, as before, there was difficulty in keeping the dry thermometer stationary, Tas. X.—Depressions with Hydrogen gas. First Series. Tabular de- Therm. Wet- Depres- Hygro- Tension pression in Ratio. inair. bulb. sion. meter. centesimal. dry air. o o co) d—D 1. Through steam pipe, 92.0 67.8 24.2 — = 37.1 2. Ditto, steam on, .. 160.0 83.2 76.8 — _ nearly dry. 81.5 .94 3. Ditto, GEO, a0... 137.0 76.4. 60.6 — ditto. 65.3 93 4. Ditto, cold, ...... 93.8 67.5 26.3 44°? SE: 38.1 The hydrogen of the gasometer in the first two experiments was supposed to be dry, but it was found that it acquired moisture in pass- ing through the pipes, which had been moistened by the distillation of the hydrogen ; the amount of error was estimated by filling com- mon air in, and finding how much its depression differed from the full rate. The gas of 3, and 4 was passed out into a vessel containing the hair hygrometer ; but still no great confidence was placed in the series, and on two subsequent days fresh gas was prepared. Second Series. 5. Protracted current of hydrogen gas,.. 85.4 60.0 25.4 6. Common air treated exactly in the RMUOG RS ATUI CTS ar, crc e)o\ci cay cig miele abaere'e\ ee 90.6 59.0 31.6 = 29.1] at 85°4 Ratio of 29°.1 to 25°.4 as 1.00 to .87 This was still unsatisfactory, as there was no mode of testing the hygrometric state of the gas: I now therefore fitted the glass cham- ber enclosing the hair hygrometer, (as in fig. 1) and took the follow- ing readings after intervals of a day each. Calc. Maxim. Depress; i in in Ratio. t v d h Hydrogen. Atm. air. d-——D 7. Hydrogen, current, 87.8 60.5 27.3 8 29.5 34.8 84 8. Ditto, fulldraft,.. 88.0 59.7 28.3 5 29.8 34.9 .86 Sewitto, ditto, ...... 84.0 57.1 26.9 4 28.0 32.8 85 10. Ditto, ditto,...... 88.5 58.5 30.0 4 31.2 35.2 88 11. Common air. .... 87.0 54.8 32.2 4? 33.5 34.4 PZULO, 2.2%. aestu Ooel law) ae 2 32.6 32.4 Still a fourth series was thought necessary ; and in this all access of moisture to the tubes being prevented by passing the gas over sulphuric acid before it entered the gasometer, and leaving it for a week to dry thoroughly, the hair hygrometer marked extreme siccity : precaution was also taken to cool the wet-bulb with ice below the de- pression point, before inserting it in the tube. Fourth Series, Hydrogen gas. t t’ d h. D d—pD Moa dratt,|7..c S6u% 15835)" 28.2 0 34.2 82 Ae Ditto. 2 acs 8 San 7.402760 0 33.4 83 inet PIttO,* = onl = i) DHHORDONDHODOANHEDONHOWONHONHORHE ss gad © | Chih DH HOSCOOSCORRER ERE DHDHDDHDDAADARSSSS = io} ioe) ee le on s| 3 | sh oS DONHDONDOAMNDONDONHONONHODAMNKHHDONHE a — SCI1OHKSDOSOSCHOHOORARRRERRDDHDDDARADHDOSOORAAAA i) s Ge) Le ieee i oe Be Be Be eth: Ss n = & HORAANHODOAHMHAANHOHOHMNNROANHHOAWHH o- A wml o~poweOrrnnndDndnDNDDDRAADADSSIVOOA SHH AAAN = s int ee ee ee BS] o sD Fim Soe PAP GHAACHHHAAHSLPSOATONANHNSOMHOA KOS oS SCl1OORRRE RD DHHDDADARSSIOOSOHAHAANAANHMNHD MH v nN Ee ee ee Oe a ee ed eel ~~ .t) SS CHONHFRHAIWMOHAAPRHATHNOAAHHAHNOMGAN D pe SCRrRDDDNDDARDRAVRNDSCOCSOAHAARAATAAARAANAAHA Haw HwH = wm Re ee ee > n BB ED OOS NLD Wis a AN STO Ss tO OXY ID ES S09 Bee DCD COIS DA CL ODMDDAADADSSOSOTAAAAAAHHHHHHHOHH HOS Tr) = To ae ee Oe Oe Oe ce ee oe ee ee ee ma ° a a NEN OAGHAOHONDOHMOARV HAT BHOAHANHONNS’ Ay WD lL_SODHDROSCDTCSOAAATAAANANAHHAHMAHHAHOGOCEHER®OD g [7 3s FF aS et FR es aes SB OI SIS eM eS SI eS ee ee = CAAMNAHROMOANOCAMSCOMN-wANHALCOVON ~ COSRHANAAHMHMNHTHAD HOO: mKFr-ononoamnodco- SSS oOo es S a a Ia fc mq | “oInjpet COBAMHAHONDASCAAVHMHHORDADROANNHNORMDNAS < | -3duay, DANMMMMMMMNNY HIM tH HMeGAHONHNOMHNH OHMS & 1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 431 : - MEN DNDDNDNDNDDARAARARDSOCOCOCSCOR A HAHHAAN § aleSCCSCCOoODoCCOoOCCOOCOCOOCOCOC OR FAA NA nee =< ‘ 3 = =) Me ose ee ee eee eee ae Sahu ee hed Bd elie) Noe oP) SS [>>] ° AOR FR BABB TMT TBF RNANANNANANNAINANANUNAN = H ‘= 1 eR SU St Sa Ne ere OC ie a AGAR SNC) SUIS) SOO ik > BD) SCARANAAAAANAAAAAAMHMHAMMHAMHMHMMOAAAM 5 a emer Su ON Sie Sa SR eth Cok ocr carp meu ee, Sunt RGD 'E™ Ee 000) ON S a AM MNAMNNNMNMNMNOHHHKHHHHNHHHAHDH Didnt > ~ ‘ss DADAAARNRHHONEDAGCAAVNHHNONDDONANANH S | ommnHtmrHeHaqeaqeea eon no hn bb ni wHoocoecods ~ s s MODASCHAMHEEMNDHDOAANHNONDAOAHHHOND g BR loaaaetewh oh HO HHRHHOSOOSCOOCOOOORARRARRR Ls See af SR EA Sea NRO SST ARS Oro SAAD aAsqe = 58 SCibihhhROSOODOOCOSCORARRR ERR DDHDHHDODDHDRASA s 2 3 35 +HOODROAMNODROAMHOHNAOAMHONMOTHNHOR = © | COSHSOSCORKRARARERRHHDHDHDHRRDORSESOSOOSS = — er S$ 3 % AHO NDOANHONDAAHHONAAMHOHHRAMNOHSON te SH DW] ORRRRRDHDDDDECDRAGDATSEOCSOOSCOOCONAHAHAA Re Ge le ee ee a ee Be ne eB ee ee oe i ° 8 FO ee ae eee ae eo Ne Thee ee ile AON Fi Sih an AON Ce ea A a ~ 8 DODNDRAAMRAARDRSSCHSOSCSSRAAAAAAANAANAMHNHAHNN = gs De ee ee | = | ~ o Sf] 2 pl Caton ornnmnarnmoenarntztoneontonrmMonand = & £1 PCARADDSSSSSSOAAANAAANNAAHMHHMOMHHHHHO = th i ce a ee ee Bc ree ee ee ee ee ee ee | o> ° ~ nw ~~ =| AANODOAHOMANHNHNOAHOCHOAMOHOAHrOADE = 5B CSR SSSSHAAAAARNAH MAH HHH HH HODOOSD oe Gy s = — 8 SS Ss eS eS eRe eS Se SS Ce a Bi cen re ee oe ee | 3 ae S| 6 AA MOHONYHOAPHAM*HATHHOAHNONHHRIN 8 d © 1SCOCHRHHAADAAMRHMMNHMHHHHNOKH OCS OONNRNED® ce Oo Se) i oe S od WA] 63 = 2 ANGHigs DIES HS Upc HERI MDI ols eh orange ea ER ISK I) SSRN le ve 2 SS HANANAAHHHMHHHHO HH HOOOORRKDHHDDAARAS o 5 wy ee er ee ee ee ee ee S ‘DR S & SHOBAHOANNOAAHHAHNOMOANHDNOMOSONH = A wl OmamnaretbbinbOSCORnRnDDHDRADOAWAAAN = O° Nn ~—a R ne ee ee en ey es es SAO ~ & AODAHTROHEFONODAWVAAHAANANAHAANDANOG ° Ot tH tip in OMrMrM™MmDHDDAMDOOCOFHRBAANAANYNM NB S oO Se ee eee ee We ee Sk eh hit SA GAGH. GW CRED CL AUG RCT Clee ~ s WANMODAN DAH DANMDNNAMGCOMNOHNANAGE 8 WlONMOOORnEPrDDDHDAAHDGCOCOCOAHAAAHMHAMHAHHOMNSO = Coal Tt St NNN N INN NNNNANN INAS + F n Z ANGSCHHAHADAOAMNMEHHDAGHSOHHABAHAHDAOOW © SESCORRDDDAARSDOSOHAHATDAHNHNTHHOHHOCORNRD DW a al AAR TIM tA BTAAANANAANAANAANANAAAAAA n <3) z DNOSHO A GOHAANAVOAPAYM A SSOHHPVEAMAS Q MW lLONADSCSOCHAAAANMDHHHHHOSKRRDHHABDOSGAN Q SSB ANANAAAANANANAAANAAAAAAAGIAAAMNM MH ® Ss PAOMVHOHAHAAHOMODNDOMNDHMNDMNODNNHONAKAHSY C1 OMANHDHHHHH HO SORRDHDRSSBAHAARNHH+HONO = ANANAANANAANAARAAAAAMDAHN NH OM OH OD OD ral 5 *I1NJVI SCH NNHNMORDACHAMHANORDDOAANAMHANHOPADRSOA =) -3dwoy COKDOCKOKCCOREERREEERERERDDHHDDDDHDDDAG 432 Experimental Researches on the Depressions, &c. fete teres eovsasHoge caesioalwd railessiesies salesiiea! ra mel enew ou exes cole . gues on g2 a3 9 Oras aaa 95 P33 3 OOO ND DAANSSAMAMAANRMOOHSOD aAaN ANAAAKHHHNMHNHMNHHNYHHHOOO 90 e oO 2°5 2: 2: 2:7 2:8 binininisinooCnnnas PASS Hot ip io 85 fo) 51 10°3 noo ANAM NO MOL HH Ht tt 1p 1 COSSSORHAOHA 5°3 3°8 3 3 . 4° 4° 4 5°6 4°7 80 ° #19 Om RRR Qonn OPO OD = fe ROH DDDRAO- HHH Tae 5°7 4°8 to) 6°6 6° 6° 6 6 7 3 6:2 Am Hw AAADH DSOTKTANNODHNeNANT SH w ir) = ~ L ad - i=) HQoecococentoroa-= ee ee ee Me oe oe on a x N isp} @ N 10) 1 2 3 7 "8 . 8.9 71 70 8: 8 8 8 ss} 8 ODA ooo oe oe ee aM BB ANYNOr-DON Con een Bl oe I oe Boe lo oe ee 10) ONYHNROEENN|DS NMOMAMNHDRA-NO Se ee eS | NaPorn ANANN Ss oO Oa ww maa a5 = Oo fo) 37°4 33°4 29°4 25°5 21°6 17°7 14° 15°3 a 12°0 ros 9°0 16°4 14.7 et 11°2 9°7 14°0 12°3 10°8 9°5 5 7 ‘ 9 e . oe | 3 15°1 13.5 11°9 10°3 16° 16 17 17 17 yh 0 2 5 7 0 33°2 45 0 15°4 5 5 6 6 6 16°8 17'0 7 17° 7 18°0 18°3 18°5 18°8 19 19 19 19° 2 5 7 0 3 36°9 40°1 41°5 (0) 7 7 uk Wer 15°J 15335 05'6 15°9 16° 16° 16 17 17°3 17°5 17°8 18 18 18° 18°9 34° 37°8 41°3 45°8 OOMMOAHNSMDOBSOMOHND ANNMNMMNMMrONM-SO NUNANNNANAANAANAAYNHYM + 19°7 20°0 20°3 0 0 0 1 i 44°6 48°4 50°2 35 WMANMWANAMAANANHANOMHO- 0 ro) MOHHHDODHOAMKROTA ANAANAAANAARAHHAA+H 30 22°2 57°1 55° 24°2 57°9 60° The centesimal tension of vapour, or percentage of humidity being 25 40 ° 4 4 5 5 5 26° 26°5 63°3 65°6 15 oO 6 6 7 7/0 8 3 28'°9 73°6 79°1 71°6 SMOHTOHANMHONATRANOH NNH+ Mon nOOKARADMOND NAMMNNMNMNNIANHHiNnHSONm 10 fo) 8 29° 9 30° 30° 1 31°6 78°3 WOOF OR OH RARAKRYNKEHaAdH RAN ~ DOORRDNDADSOHONHDHORNMS AMNANMNMNNANDHHTHHHMOORROO 3 oon 3 SOEONDHOONDHOSOOANWNMHKHAWS AN+HiodHORRMORUAUDOSS YUH HSH HgetytmMoonrndndadnd Pel 38° 8 39°: 39° 40°4 “OINZet onm a WORnDROHAAMS DD -oduiey BDADBRAAARSOODSSOSOSSSRaSS TABLE of the Depressions of a Wet-bulb Thermometer, for degrees of temperature, and every twentieth part of hygrometric saturation. (Jury, is table must be multiplied into the aqueous tension for l tension deduced from th ima the air, the centes in temperature, extracted from DALTON’s, Biot’s, or URn’s tables. To find the real quantity of moisture given the 1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 483 - V1I.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Wednesday Evening, 3rd August, 1836. The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the chair, Mr. W. Spiers, proposed at the last meeting, was ballotted for, and duly elected a Member of the Society. Mr. Conductor Dawe, of the Delhi Canal Establishment, proposed at the last meeting, was, upon the favorable report of the Committee of Papers, elected an associate member. Mexuara Meng, uncle of the present King of Ava, acknowledged his election as an honorary member in a Bengali letter, of which the fullow- ing is a literal translation :— Mexuara Ra’sa to the learned Members of the Asiatic Society of Calcutia, commands. Tam informed of the contents of the letter from this learned body, and of the honor they have done to me. But so difficult is the attainment of know- ledge, that I can by no means hold myself worthy of such a distinction, The progress of knowledge may be likened to the ascent of a lofty mountain,—he that attains the summit will gain the first glimpse of the rising sun, then he in the centre, while yet it is hidden from the crowd at the base. The sun is to them a thing entirely imperceptible. Afterwards, when the solar orb declines, it still remains visible and palpable to him who has surmounted the hill, while the others have a partial and fading remembrance of its glory. Thus are there gradations in the acquirement and appreciation of learning, and there is no limit to its increase, nor can any thing compare with its excellence. The enjoyments of worldly life are finite, and afford little variety—riches bring satiety ; but there is no satiety in knowledge. Every day brings novel food to the mind, and only whets the appetite for more. I do not then think myself learned, but it is a law of nature that the bulk of each species should remain on an equality, whether man, beast, reptile, tree, or land itself—and hold social commune with its fellows. My name has been inserted in the list of the learned men—I am glad to hear it, for the mind that cannct traverse alone the field of knowledge; in company of judicious guides, may derive instruction and advantage at every step. I shall know what I have not known—hear what I have not heard. All my doubts may be explained, my conjectures certified :—therefore am I filled with joy, for L would have my ignorance enlightened. Should the Society wish to know any thing relative to the Burmese literature of my country, I will do my utmost to supply every information. As the learned members are acquainted with various languages, I have caused this letter to be written in the Pali language* and in the Bengali character. The Secretary read the following reply from Government to the appli- cation made, in conformity with the resolution of the last meeting, on the subject of the publication of the Cochin Chinese Dictionary. 2 To James Prinstep, Esa. p Genl. Dept. Secretary to the Asiatic Society. IR, I am directed to acknowledge the receipt of your letter, dated the 1]th in- stant, and in reply to state that the Right Honorable the Governor General of India in Council will be prepared to sanction an expense of 5,500 rupees to be incurred in printing a Cochin Cainese Dictionary by Lithography in the manner * The letter contains an admixture of Péli words, but the substance is in Bengali, and is evidently a very imperfect rendering of the author’s expressions by a Bengali writer. 3.L 434 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Juy, proposed by the author; but his Lordship would prefer much, that in order to make the work accessible to seafaring persons and traders as well as to the learned, the explanation should be given in English as well as in Latin, and that a Vocabulary rendering the common English words into Cochin Chinese should be added to the volume. 2. His Lordship would hope that by compressing the writing in the page which is rather wide in the specimens transmitted, these additions could be brought nearly within the same compass so as to occasion very little additional expense. 3. The specimen which accompanied your letter is herewith returned. ? I am, &c. H. T. PRINSEP, Council Chamber, the 20th July, 1836. Secy. to Govt. “In consequence of the above suggestions, the Secretary had, in consul- tation with the author, returned the following reply :— To H. T. Prinsep, Esa. Secretary to the Government of India, Genl. Dept. Sir, . I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter, dated the 20th July last, communicating the acquiescence of the Right Honorable the Go- vernor General of India in Council to the proposition submitted by myself, on the part of the Asiatic Society, and of the most Rev. the Bishop of Isauropolis, for the publication of a Cochin Chinese Dictionary in lithography at an expense not exceeding 5,500 rupees. I have accordingly placed myself in communication with the author, with a view to arrange the preliminaries without loss of time, as well as to provide for the modifications recommended by his Lordship in Council. The Bishop is of opinion that the addition of a column of English meanings to the Dictionary in its present form would involve a very serious increase of labour in passing it through the press; it would also augment the bulk of the work very considerably ; while a very large portion of the words and explana- tions connected with literary and abstract terms would be of no utility whatever to the commercial class or to seafaring persons. The object contemplated by his Lordship in Council may, he thinks, be sup- plied with more facility by the addition of a Supplementary Vocabulary con- taining all the most common words, which might also be published in a detached form for the use of mariners and traders. This Vocabulary the author undertakes to draw up in the English, French, and Anamitan tongues, during the progress of the publication ; and precaution has been taken to include this additional matter in the estimates which have been called for. His Lordship’s remarks on the appearance of the lithographed specimen, and the obvious advantage, if possible, of securing to a standard work of this nature the advantages and neatness of typography, induced me to communicate again with the Proprietors of the Serampore Press, before any final arrangements should be made. ‘ The Bishop on his own part handsomely consented to relinquish 500 rupees out of the 4,000 rupees of personal remuneration for which he had at first stipulated. I was thus enabled to offer a clear sum of 2,000 rupees to Rev. Dr. MarsumMaNn for the execution of 500 copies of a quarto volume, containing nearly 500 pages, with the native words in the Cochin-Chinese character. This offer, although much below the usual Calcutta printing rates for ordinary works, has been in the most liberal manner accepted by the Rev. Dr. and Mr. J. MaArsHMAN. I now therefore only wait for the final sanction of Government to place the MSS. &c. in their hands. Tam, &c. (Signed) JAMES PRINSEP, Calcutta, 1st August, 1836. Secy. a e 1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. ~ | 435 To this letter the following reply had just been received :— To James Prinsep, Esa. Secretary to the Asiatic Society. Sir, _I am directed by the Right Honorable the Governor General of India in Council to acknowledge the receipt of your letter dated the Ist instant, and in reply to state that his Lordship entirely approves the arrangement made by you on the part of the Asiatic Society for the publication at the Serampore Press of the Anamitan Dictionary prepared by the Most Reverend the Bishop of Isauropolis, at the charge already sanctioned, of 5,500 rupees. 2. The modifications made in the original proposition seem to his Lordship in Council calculated very much to improve the work, and entirely meet the wishes expressed in my letter dated 20th ultimo. 3. The Governor General in Council has much satisfaction in acknowledging the disinterested and public-spirited offer made by the Right Reverend author, to forego a portion of the remuneration allotted to him in order to obtain the advantage of having the work published in type; and the terms accepted by Dr. Marsuman of Serampore appear to his Lordship in Council to be not less liberal ; for the rate at which they have agreed to print the work in the original character is such as can afford them little or no profit. 4. Itis the wish of the Governor General in Council that additional copies should be printed of the Vocabulary proposed to be added ; and if this should occasion an increase of expense, his Lordship in Council will have no objection to defray the amount that may be charged on this account, taking for Govern- ment an additional 100 copies of this part of the work. Iam, Sir, &c. Council Chamber, the 3rd Aug. 1836. H. T. PRINSEP, Sec. to Govt. The liberality of the proprietors of the Serampore Press in undertak- ing to print the work without any hope of profit, or even at the risk of some sacrifice, was fully appreciated by the Society, and the best thanks of the meeting were conveyed to Dr. Marsaman, who was present. A bill from the Orphan Press for printing the Ist part of the twentieth volume of Researches, 248 pages, amounting to C.’s Rs. 1806 6 4,'was pre- sented and passed. Oriental Publications. The Secretary reported the completion of the Naishadha-Cheritra (1st part, 900 pages) one of the Sanscrit works transferred from the Committee of Public Instruction ; of which copies were ready for distribution. By the terms of agreement with the Editor, Prema Cuanpra Pannira, of the Calcutta Sanscrit College, who had supplied the tika or commentary, 100 copies were to be given to him in lieu of pecuniary remuneration, which was approved. Library. The following books were presented :— Results of Astronomical Observations made at the Madras Observatory dur- ing the years 1834 and 1835—presented by the Madras Government, through Colonel Casement, Mil. Sec. Sup. Govt. Jahr bucher der Literatur, No. 69, 70, 71, and 72—presented by the Baron Joseph Von Hammer. ‘ i : Notizia di Diciotto Codici Persiani della Biblioteca della Regia Universita di Torino—by the same. Memoire sur deux Coffrets Gnostiques du moyen age—by the same. Mamik und Afra, a German Poem, translated from the Persian—dy the same. on 2 436 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Jory, Historical Oriental Translations and Researches, 2 vols. quarto, by the Rev. W. Taytor, Madras—presented by the author. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland, No. 4—by the Society. A descriptive and illustrated catalogue of the Physiological Series. of Compara- tive Anatomy, contained in the Museum of the Royal Coilege of Surgeous in London, Vol. III. Part I.—dy the President of the College. The Sixth Annual Report of the Society of Natural History of the Mauritias— ty M. Julien Des Jardins, Sec. Madras Journal of Literature and Science, No 12, for April and July, 1836— by the Madras Literary Society. The Indian Journal of Medical Science, No. 8, and Review of Works on Sci- ence—by F. Coriyn, Esq. the Editor, Meteorological Register for June 1836—by the Surveyor General. The following hooks were received from the booksellers :— Lardner’s Cabinet Cycltopedia—Botany, 1 vol. , Foreign Statesmen, vol. 2nd. Museum. _ Read a letter from J. Bett, Esq. Secretary Agricultural and Forti. cultural Society, for warding for the acceptance of the Society two blaukets and two woollen cloths on behalf of Lieutenant H. Verex. The blankets are made from the Siméil tree ; the woollen cloths are of Bho- tian manufacture. Literary Communications. The Government of Madras referred for the consideration of the Society, through the Supreme Government, a proposition submitted by Cavetity Venxata Lacsumta, Pandit, tore-establish the system of Histo. rical Research so successfully pursued by the late Col. Corin Mackenzig in the Peninsula, by coliecting inscriptions, manuscripts, grants, &e. as well as to translate and digestthe mass of materials alieady collected, and now in the possession of the Royal Asiatic Suciety. CaveLLY VeNKATA had drawn up a report-progress of the researches, in which he states himself to be still engaged, classifying the different dynasties, ancient and modern, of South India, on which light iias been thrown by the Mackenzie collection. This paper and the correspondence were refersed to the Committee of Papers for their examination and report, previous to discussion of the question in the Society. Mr. W. H. Macnacuren presented an elaborate Memoir by Lieut.- Colonel Burney, Resident in Ava, entitled “ An account of the wars between Burmah and China, together with the journals and routes of three different embassies sent to Pekin by the king of Ava, taken from Bur- mese documents. [Referred to the Committee of Papers. This account has peculiar interest at the present moment, when the offer of Mr. Gurziarr to penetrate through Chiva to Ava or Assam has been much discussed. | Mr. Treveiyan on behalf of M. C. Masson presented a third memoir on the coins discovered at Beghram. This paper is a careful and laborious recapitulation of all that has been done in this curious branch of discovery, with the addition of the results of a third year’s search. The acquisition of new coins and new names naturally becomes every day more rare; so that notwithstanding the addition of 2,294 coins to his Tg 1836.) Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 437 cabinet in the year 1835, the only real novelties are an unique coin of ARCHE- Lius, one of DiomepEs (found in 1834) the confirmation of ADELPHORTOs and Tpartrisus. Three Euthydemus’, and one Antiochus have been gained; the ratio of the more common Bactrian and Indo-Scythic names is much the same as in former years. We shall hasten to publish such portions of M. Masson’s most industrious labours as have not hitherto appeared in our pages. Mr. Avpany brought to the Society’s attention a singular narrative, in translation, of the interview between Arsacss, king of Armenia, and the Persian Monarch Sapor (ALaknar.) [We hope to find room for this curious morceau ere long. } The Secretary read extract of a letter from the Counsellor Josepa Von Hammer, of Vienna, (now Baron Purestatt,) forwarding a continuation of his translation of the Mohit, an Arabic nautical work by Sint Capupan, of which the first chapter was printed in the third volume of the Journal. The present chapter contains a catalogue of the islands along the shores of the Red Sea, and directions for thirty different voyages from Loheia, Aden, &c. to the various ports of India, Persia, and the Straits of Malacca. It is a fact difficult to be accounted for, that the learned author offered to translate the whole of this very scarce and curious work for the Oriental Translation Committee, who have given to the world so many of less consideration; but he was not honored with a reply. Extracts were also read from other Tete Correspondence. Pro- fessor Wirison reports his having forwarded the Society’s memorial regarding Oriental publications to the Roval Asiatic Society, which, in concurrence with the Oriental Translation Committee, had warmly espoused the object of its prayer. The Foreign Societies had also sup- ported it, as far as the voice of protestation and argument by a body of the most distinguished oriental scholars can lend its influence. Paris has set a further example which it would be unjust to the cause to omit mentioning. Colonel Troyer, having presented to the Société Asiatique a German transla- tion of the first Six books of the Rdj Tarangini, (one of the Sanscrit works suspended by the Government order, a lately completed by the Society here,) was invited to undertake a French version of the same for publication with the Sanscrit text at the Society’s expence, estimated at not less than 6,000 francs. 1t may be hoped that the edition completed in India; of which specimens must soon after have reached Paris, will spare a portion of this money for the many other objects embraced by this active association. M. Jacquet avnounces the contemplated institution of a new professorship of the Oriental Janguages in the University of Ghent, which well desire to ac- cumulate manuscripts and printed works from this country. The late discovery of coins and inscriptions in India bad excited the most intense interest on the Continent, but General Ventura’s collection had not yet reached Paris, on account of the detention of General A1uarp by illness in the South of France. With regard to the coins of the Kadphises group, M. Jacquet having seen HoniGBERGER’s collection would read the name Mokadphises, which he sug- gests to be Mahdtricha of the Sanscrit. We await his papers on this subject in the Journal Asiatique. Physical. A collection of specimens made by Captain Hannay in his recent expedition up the lrawadi to the Amber mines, was presented by Colonel “Burney. The collection includes many varieties of white and gray marble— Serpentine, agates, jaspers, heliotrope and crystal, particularly a pale 438 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Juny, green prase, much prized by the Chinese, and called by them Yu ; it is found about 80 miles N. W. of Mogaung. Wrist rings are cut from it. With the specimens'was a substance called by the Burmese earth wax, which they say exudes from some high precipitous rocks above Ava. They add, that monkeys are particularly fond of this substance, and that those animals swarm about the rocks which yield it. The wax has all the appearance of common unbleached wax. There was also a specimen of the tea prepared by the Singphos of Payen- dwen ; and a poisonous plant used by the Mishmis, supposed by Dr. WaLLIcH to be identical with the Bish of the Gurkhas, (Aconitum ;) another herb myen- thé, used by the Mishmis for the same purpose, had more the appearance of an Acanthaceous plant. The fossil bones from Perim in the Cambay Gulph, presented by the Baron Hueet, had arrived. Among them is a large and indisputable frag- ment of a buffalo’s horn, which the Baron refers with probability to the - Nerbudda fossil bos ; two smaller horns imbedded in matrix, (a calcare- ous and ferruginous conglomerate.) Also shells from a similar conglo- merate in Gogo, and specimens of the cornelian, natural and burned, from the Ratanpur quarries. A geological series from Pulos Floer, Trotto, Ledah, Tingy, Pigeon Island, Birdnest Island,.and Dehli point, in the Straits of Malacca, was presented by Dr. Brann, of H. M.S. Wolf, with a note of their locality, and some remarks on the genus of shells denominated Pterocyclos by Benson (Spiraculum by Pearson), found in abundance on the islet of Susson, opposite Queda Peak. {[Dr. Brannp’s notes shall have early insertion. | Specimens of a calcareous and silicious Scoria, forming the substance of a small hill at Bédiginta near Courtney, about 11 miles west of Bellary, was presented by Lieut. Newsonp. [The accompanying note will be inserted.] Mr. C. W. Smiru having purchased a collection of specimens of Natu- ral History from the Eastern Isles, presented the Mammalia, the dupli- cates of the Birds and the Reptiles, to the Museum, on condition of the remaining birds being mounted for him. The Mammalia and Reptiles consist of the following specimens :—The grey Roussette, ( Pteropus Gri. seus) two specimens ; one of a species of JVoctilionina, and one of Ves- pertilionina, probably new genera; one of a species of Marten, agreeing in specific characters very exactly with the Pine Marten, ( Martes Vul- garis ; ) two young specimens of a species of Ictus; one of the Barang Otter, (Lutra Lutreola?) one of the slender Delundung, ( Prionodon Gracilis ;) one of the Sumatra Cat, ( Felis Sumatrana ;) one of the Ma- dagascar Squirrel, (Sciurus Madagascariensis ;) one of the Jeralang, (Sciurus Leschenaultii ;) two of the two-banded Squirrel, (S. Bivitta- tus ;) and two specimens of the Java Musk Deer, ( Moschus Javanicus. ) -The Reptiles are a specimen of the Eastern Box Terrapia, ( Cistuda Am- boinensis ; ) and one of the Clouded Monitor of Gray’s Synopsis, ( Moni- tor Nebulosus. ) A specimen of Bengal Vulture; (Vultur Bengalensis,) presented by Major Fane, 1836.] Miscellanea. 439 The specimens of birds presented at the last meeting were exhibited, having been mounted in the Museum. Physical Communications. A memoir on the Fossil Rhinoceros of the sub-Himélayas, was for- warded by Lieuts. Baxer and Duranp, of the Engineers. [This, with the lithographs and engravings kindly prepared by the authors themselves for the Journal, will be published in the ensuing number. ] Mr. Honeson, of Nepél, continued his contributions of new species in two papers: 1, on the thick-billed finches; 2, on two genera of Colum- bide. Twenty-two ornithological plates were also added to the magnificent series of illustrations now under dispatch home. A note on nest of the Bengal Vulture was submitted by Lieutenant Hurron. A Register of Rain at Delhi, by the Rev. R. Everssr. A living specimen of the new genus of venomous snakes denominated Hamadryas by Dr. Cantor, was exhibited to the Society ; it measured nearly 10 feet in length, and was caught in the Sundarbans. VII.— Miscellanea. Madras Journal of Literature and Science.—It has not been hitherto our custom to enter into criticism of the contents of contemporary journals, but we cannot refrain from noticing the number issued by our sister society of Madras in July, which has just reached us and has excited—not our envy, but—our astonishment and our joy.—To say that it rivals or eclipses our own humble production in what is called ‘‘ the getting up,’’ would be, perhaps, considered little of acompliment. The fresh zeal and exertions of a new editor, (Dr. CoLEz,) are not less conspicuous in the judicious selections he has made from other works, and the valuable notes with which he has embellished them, than in the host of able contributors he has summoned to his aid ;—some of whom, alas ! we have hitherto boasted as our own*, but whose transfer of allegiance is but natural, when so legitimate a rival arises to claim it. The present number (four-monthly ?) contains 240 pages, price only 3 rupees. Of its most rich contents we should be tempted to glean with unsparing hand, could we afford space. Dr. Benza has another excellent geological paper on the country between Madras and the Nilgiris. Mr. Coie has done a service to geology, by an accurate definition and description of the laterite formation.— Mr. Tay- LoR’s view of the present state of astronomical science is highly interesting. It shews, that he is not one of those who merely keep up a supine routine of accustomed observations, but that all his observatory does is directed to useful ends—to the elucidation of those desiderata in the science for which its situation is best calculated. Nor is he a Flamstead, jealous of giving his labours into other hands, and tardy in working out results himself; for his third volume of observations, reduced and classified in the most compendious manner, has just issued from the Madras press. We may be indeed jealous that our Presidency should boast no similar production, and that even the astronomical labours of the Grand Trigonometrical Survey in the northern mountains should be as inac- cessible and unknown as all their other operations! Colonel Monteitu, Engi- neers, whose survey of part of Persia we noticed some time since, is imparting the statistical contents of his note book, accumulated during 18 years’ residence in Persia. An account of the Thuggee system, by Lieutenant ReYNoLps— Observations on original and derived languages, by the Rev. B. Scumrb, and on the language of the Battas of Sumatra, by Lieutenant Newsotp, and the Rev. W. TAyLor, are amongst the most interesting contents of this very creditable volume, * Dr. Benza, Mr. T. G. Tay Lor, Lieut. NewsBo.p, VIII.—Meteorological Register. 440 "LT ‘awid ‘oads jo S1 plow MINYydins ay} SsyuUeWLIadxa 1eyjO Ut poAojduna useq sey xroj9mI0IsAY Ley ay] —xeput uonvsuaduod $}I YITM YO peel uaeq sey JoJaWlOIeg pIepuLys p[O ay} YyUOU wast dant uy : SESL B°E6 lp'gt PF LL Ee BG Z°9Rt03" 7086S F0S'| 0Sh6S 9298 (Eh |UPBIS8L° LIP *s(s6s*Gs!gee"iG “wean | {ee | SE A a fe eS Ge hs asl ‘aug *4SB010A0 *gs8019A0 ‘38 ag 5 08° 2°63 a'ph atcl|e‘e ad GTR 98l' loess gor‘ OP be \S'h |L'18 ZOTS jepps jOrg9s jFZzs* ‘Apnoyo “ALD MOUs uled hole OF (OUR 293" |S Fe piles OF | G8 O61" |68E. ogs* POLE IPE [os 98l* jons’ 919% iepy' *ALamouys aug ae A oe ‘Ss o'eB [Btud o°11)0°9 8°88 RBS" |09E* gig* og KS IBS [OGHIEGLS foBbs jeZ9" laeoe *Azey > kzey 14s ‘wind TAs bod 'S Goi gits e'gsie*Z i128 ees eres eng. 092 9S |UD lSfeul9sL JOGFS [989* {6z9* yeas ‘wind OP op oe Ss ‘S 8°6 Likt 09! sus ges’ \pces ogg * yZ2\9°S {269 \e‘9alz1es josrS |e02* jergf *Kiamoyus aug op MS : s : S L'L6 ia 821199 | £05 “es looet 1e¢* ogee lee lecalaar’. Ler cx9* | 2e96 *1js ‘wind °y21}S- 10 op “ms ‘as a lo46 g's LicLia'Z 1°68 886° |6.e* eg‘ BLL pe |L'S joccni6ors jirgs JOIZ’ jecos oP op Pe ae Ge lie Eee Es Eaealre gcd] |S fetcalosrs fear’ fant |eeot op uy op iS 2 3 IS 9°91 1% | /0°G8) OFT 668° Gres BiLiee \e'h loccsigsr® jeeps {229° |PEegt f op ee EAP i Ae ‘a8 She 016s ofee O°RL/9°E | 6:98) 961% poe* e0g' leo/lt'e (9% |6es]9Z1* ash’ |Fl9e |res* A139 moys yeas ‘uma __ “aug fee eg cae a {s0°T ofcor gird B81 19S G*Egie6l’ |8tss c6e* OLLIE |S'b IoPsjg6l’ |pees joess Jods feet wind *119 {csi fag ute ANS 0 °6 gike Lg £¢ 16°98, 666" OTS cog‘ Pol\Le \8°h |stealaers jeces PISS jecé a zey 2 OP 43s “und Bi FQN AS: og AB ioe, hs L194 S'gL |S 6°98 E26" [896° bars SOLOS [09 \Pesicst® |g0r* |16S* j6E9* amoys auy Baek a8 ee AS oe NS +08 0/88 6°94 9°82 95S lepelaor’ (eles rigs OLLIE \E°S lecSlIGL* |ZPPS [869% |T09* “ys “wunD aug mas HS | atte lated | Q6L|a \6T {Zenl220* |6Lps j9s9’ jorgs ; snquira oP FE ‘as "mS So. B56 ores : F ogee |LiS |TEeslbZt’ jarbs* |9I9* joLs* _ phos eure iti) SoBe a ANS, pa 260, 28 Bee PRLS |9°E 6fes|PZTS |16e° Jegs‘|6rg* Z BLE |GL |Loa|Zers \o9rs 1209 josse 7801940 azeyy OTTER ae a a's Oud 0508 etae BELLU [acs lettBiBL’ (Sle. |OGP.| IPD e9/|1'% |956 |9*IB|09LS {288° |ZPS* jeas* SR auy OP ; fae vas 3 “a a RT 4 (21/68 [eco |T*oR/BGI" joGs! lear. aPrs 11/0 \9%% |Z’esleors eee jogs. jers® ‘Kramoys urer mtd Neon ‘A 9 "HfO9F [0806 fabs eLL|Se joe epee’ |e0z* joae<| Tse. BGL/8°S [85 IZsl19l’ |F8at abe [o1gt yseoreao OP ured aD rou a folk ja%96 —a‘9e egL|S'e |O'S SPR ONS. lzIZ’ jerr‘|ese® BOLE |b |TEBIIZTS JTRS [O6r. JO9b yea yeays “WIND op 0 tas JOEY je ts0r j9rrd B°6LIS'S [O'b [tical PBL’ jelo’ Zep “91p® neZioce |L% |r'ea|o2t¢ jeles jase’ |Z19% neue no Selinp op [0 cm “ese [00'S ,0°86 god BBLIES [90'S lEHQ 961. [693° cor} TEP orgLioce |b laccpl9Zt® jgce® jess jLos’ fF 6 ; 1amoys siomoys ce ‘au "3u a 08 0°16 Bol FAL o*s 8°9 8°98 116° 0ca. | 19 |aor® 1% \oe |L.eglests jZes* jarss 06P* 8 wes "us = “az ‘pnoys a a ag a 0:94 Lig 19°! jo°Gg/Zes. |1es° jegp<|s6E* ceLiace \6% \occa| 161 joe: [toes ster | 4 Fie sioMous qeajo "og “au 10 09% 0°26 joree G ELIE ake jeccgle6l’ [eaZe. |TLpyesbs J + [otosihie [PP locpa/RAT® 80p* {96¢* {Bho 9 Pero ROUS: Azul , op ABS). 2°28 ‘a fO9e — fOfeTT 0°64 BF |6°L |B°LB/E1G" 89a" | 18p*|Esr* PLLlO# US leces|ezt* jeoes joso* Lest | Ss fesse unto ou DUM MEUNDE Nia, O88 | Oe oe op ka, 0 Oe Of9L|0°S ITZ [*eBlae’ [ace losp‘|0zr* orgzicte |s‘e jereslest® |pget |Zpst jorge FF eae ae S819 A0 pS ee AE esa Or Of. a‘Gh GLLIG'E [aC [LHR 88I" [068" |BLp*|Gor* 9% |p] Ipcaglest® jozes jogs’ |Pige | & a z9Keus) yuna oP see ANS y'S GL‘0 0°06 0°62 acl Les LL |6°L8)861' rea. = |zep|c6E* ofe (89 lpsogiZes* eae’ jorss BLY" 6 ulayye aug aug. eS MS °*MS 6 16 {@LZ BOLIL'S 18°L |T<68/90G° |9¢6°6S/ GOP ‘IFZr6s OLLILSS 10°F 18°GQ/8L1°—|99E 6S|FFS “6G/91S I is = = eee 2e ia) gm Bre oir) 5 = Boze Ts ie Stole SZ 9 : Se 15 5 EE] SF) o (BElSeebiesez! & | 2S (PSPS Ee Zelzslfz] & | es |oesi=se| 2 2 : 5. St ae SP FP sa] 38 fee ssiBeetice! & fet PMs spas) See esas! & LE" 8 alskat o F E die eee S5) 85 [a aisesc/eea3] 8 [ea l2eceee [owleciecec! 8 |eaFl Sslasal = i : 4 ; - map Se ols a) PISSSaR IAS] ylSols st o S ge) 8 Pal a) Serle] & ee (ele el ale) Se [os & | Ge | Seite] & ; : ‘ 3 ie *SsoMeII XA ° "Taye M *pulAr OJOUIOWIOY,L, “W *d } 3¥ SUOTIeAIOSGO ‘W *V QT 38 SUOITBAIOSGO 3 Jeysisey ; > ‘9e9 | ‘Ang fo yquopy ay? sof ‘0jjna}0y ‘a0fQ hossp ayz 10 day ‘uagsihaxy y09160)0.L0a,0 fT JOURNAL OF EE AS LAT ECS OCTET Y. No. 56.—August, 1836. 1.—Ezxtracts from the Mourr (the Ocean), a Turkish work on Naviga- tion in the Indian Seas. Translated and communicated by JosrpuH Von Hammer, Baron Purestaut, Aulic Counsellor, and Prof. Orient. Lang. at Vienna, Hon. Memb. As. Socy. &c. &c. [Continued from vol. iii. p. 553.] [ We know not how to express sufficient gratitude to our illustrious cor- respondent for his courtesy in allowing these pages to be the medium of publication of this curious manuscript of Sipi AL1 Capupan. The manner in which it was discovered by the Baron at Naples, after 30 years’ fruitless inquiry, was described in the preamble of the former extract. The value set upon it by this eminent oriental scholar, induced him to offet to translate the whole for the Oriental Translation Committee ; but through some accident, (we can ascribe it to no other cause,) an offer so generous has remained unacknowledged. ‘‘ Without doubt,” our correspondent writes, ‘ the book would deserve much more the care of the Committee than many of minor interest published by it; but although to my volunteer I got no more answer than to my offer of an edition and translation of Wassor, agar hdéjat bished, asthe Persians say, and with the assistance and remarks of some Indian sea-faring gentlemen on the parts already translated, I hope to send chapter after chapter to your Indian Journal, and thus we shall be independent of the Committee.” On the last occasion we derived some little assistance from the Nakho- das of the Arabic vessels, in recognizing the places alluded to in the Sec- tion on the monsoons. The same plan we have been prevented, in a great measure, from following now, through the absence of these traders, who only arrive here towards the end of the south-west monsoon (August- September) and return with the setting in of the north-east wind in Fe- bruary-March. We have, however, been able to trace most of the principal names on the map, and have marked them in foot notes. The catalogue of the names of islands in the Red Sea would be—and may, we hope, still be— of great use to the officers of the Indian navy now engaged in its survey. 3M 449 Translation of the Mohit, [Ave. We have discovered many of the islands and capes mentioned by Sr’p1’ in the large manuscript chart sent roundfor the use of the steamer Forbes in its passage up the Red Sea: but by far thegreater number of islets remain unnamed ; and to them, with a little local inquiry, Si’pr’’s list might doubtless be easily applied. The book is also of great service in pointing out the maritime channels of Arab commerce, at the period perhaps of its highest prosperity, before the Portuguese, the Dutch, and the English had diverted the majority of the Europe supply to the newly discovered route by the Cape of Good Hope. : The Baron* is in hopes that the presence of sea-faring Arabs will also enable us to assist him in understanding the prior and more difficult chap. ters of the work, wherein is discussed the manner of ‘‘ making the pole,” (ule,) or taking the altitude of the polar star. Here, however, we have little chance of success. The present navigators have adopted the im- proved methods of Europe: —they take their latitude by the sun, and with the modern sextant ; and the richer merchants even provide their vessels with chronometers:—not that the Arabs yet possess translated tables or ephemerides by which to work the course themselves ; but they almost universally employ an English sailing master, to whose superior intelligence they implicitly confide. Nothing then have we been able to learn of the instrument used by the early navigators in taking their latitude from the circumpolar stars ; or of the measure of an are called issabé (es~!) inch, and its subdivision into eight zdms (¢!5;!) We find however on inquiry that the latter term is still applied to terrestrial measurement, and is well known to nautical people of the present day as the fifth part of a geographical degree, (twelve nautica] miles.) Though this measure does not at all accord with the sailing distances quoted by S1’p1’ Capupan, from well known places, it will be seen presently to correspond exactly with the value of the celestial inch or issabé as deduced from the internal evidence of the work itself. The Baron Hammer in his private letter to us writes thus: “‘ Concerning the measure of elyj! the first section of the IlIfrd. chapter explains as follows: ‘ The zém, lis is either the practical one, ustres or the rheto. rical, Use tbolt 3 The practical is one of the eight parts in which day and night are divided : the rhetorical is the eighth part of an inch, tio! in * It seems we erred in giving that designation to Counsellor VON HAMMER in 1833; but our announcement proved prophetic ; the Emperor having conferred the title on him in December 1835, upon his succeeding to the little state of Hoinfeld, bequeathed to him and his male descendants by the late Countess PURGSTALL (Cranstoun). The present paper is a proof that this accession of honors will not detract from the zeal of his Oriental studies.—Ep. + We are inclined to think that this word smile! istilahiy, is an error of the transcriber, and that it should be us) bo)” ustur ldbiy, appertaining to the divi- sions of the astrolabe.—ED. 1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 443 the ascension, elss)] and descension bih='} of the stars. For exam- ple, if you go north and make the star USO>, eight zim; it is ele- vated one inch: and if you go south, it is by eight zéms, one inch depress- ed 2s”, ‘This is the whole section on the measure of the eli (plural, e!53)) an explanation which, however, helps me not a bit to understand the true measure of a zém, in the reckoning of the ship’s course so fre- quently employed in the subsequent chapters. Nor have I been able to obtain any explanation from our astronomers.” We will now venture to offer the explanation which has occurred to our- selves from perusal of the present translated chapter of voyages, and the above extract conjointly. 1. The zdm, in practical or vulgar parlance, is said to be the eighth part of the day and night. This, doubtless, applies to the nautical division of the twenty-four hours into 8 watches, generally prevailing among ori- ental nations, and exactly corresponding with the 8 pahars of the Hindus*. 2. Again, the zém is seen above to be the eighth part of the ordinary inch or issuba ; as the jo, or yava of the Hindus, is the eighth of their angil : and the /ine of Europeans is the eighth of their inch : it is, in fact, the vulgar subdivision by two and two, both of the unit of measure and of time. Perhaps, indeed, zém may be a mere corruption of jo. It would seem, that to suit ordinary capacities, both the issabé and the zém had been transferred to the arc of the rude quadrant or astrolabe used by the Arab seamen, in lieu of the more scientific division into de- grees and minutes. Or it is very possible that in still ruder times the al- titude of the polar star above the horizon was actually measured by fin- gers’ breadths, the hand being held out at the natural arms’ length in front of the face: for the measure of the arc thus subteuded would nearly agree with the value of the issabd derived from other considerations. The actual value of the issabé in degrees and minutes may be readily found from the latitudes, or polar altitudes, of known places extracted from Si’pi’s work. Thus the elevation of the pole Cape Guardafui is always quoted at.4} inch; while at Jedda it is called 10 inches ; differ- ence, 5Zinches. The difference of latitude by our mode of reckoning is 21° 28’—12°, 00’= 9’ 28’; which gives nearly 1°37’ for the tssabd or inch. Now, as before stated, we were informed by an Arab Muallim that the zém was 12 of our minutes, or 5 zéms=1 degree. Therefore, 8 zéms or 1 issabé should be equal to 96’; or 1° 36’,—so close an accordance with the foregoing result, as to leave no doubt of the value of the issabé and zim being 96’ and 12’ respectively on the celestial arc. It still remains to explain the divisions of the lower are of their rude instrument, and the kids, or point at which the readings of the upper and lower index coincide, as also the point whence the divisions commence on both quadrants, or what may be called their index error. * The subdivision of the pahar into eight gharis, is like the ‘‘ eight bells’? into which our nautical watch is counted off. 3M 2 444 Translation of the Mohit, [Ave. In the description of the islands of the Arabic coast, it will be seen that as the readings of the upper limb increase, those of the lower quadrant decrease, their sum being constantly 144 issabd. Thus, at Saibén, (Loheia,) the upper reading is 63, lower 74, sum 144. at Jedda, ditto LORNA 41, 144. It is evident, therefore, that the kids occurs at 74 inch, or 7 issabd 1 zdém, the half of 144. Again, for the zero point we have the following data :— true lat. issaba zero point By the Jedda latitude, .. ........21° 28’— 10 % 1° 36’ (= 16° 00’) = 59 28/ By the Guardafui, latitude ,........ 12 00 —4—§X 1 36 (= 6 36) =5 24 By Darwesh, or Dorish, ....7.....18 30 —8 X 1 36 (= 12 48) = 5 42 By Loheia or Saiban, ~< ..j....<.-. 15 41 — 63 x 1 36 (= 10 48) = 4 53 By Wasaliat, (Fossailiat,).. ......17 42 — 73 * 1 36 (= 12 24) —5 18 TEU D EIS eign Qaida He UCT Soo Mar 19 31,.— 83 X 1/36 (= 13) 32) 559 By Haseek sinave, (Harik-simadr), 19 50 — 83 X 1 36 (= 13 56) =5 54 The average index error or zero point is thus found to be 5° 31’, or in round terms 53 degrees, to be added to altitudes taken by the issabd scale. The only conjecture we can offer as to the origin of such an arbi- trary arrangement is, that the zero has been fixed at the lowest elevation at which it is safe to trust to the measurement by the polar star: so that mariners, on finding polaris fall below 0 inches, would then know they should take their latitude by Farkadain, or g and y urse minoris. The zero point of the under quadrant may be easily deduced from the foregoing to be at 28° 18’ below the horizontal line. This we may suppose was the highest elevation of the polar star observable by navigators in the Red Sea or in the Persian gulph. Indeed the latitude of Suez and of the mouths of the Euphrates, the most northerly ports visited by their ships, being 30°, the difference between this and 28° 18’ is very nearly equal to the north polar distance of polaris (1° 42’): and in the period from January to July it would be only the inferior meridional passage that could be observed. It is generally supposed that the early astronomers regarded the polar star as stationary, and did not trouble themselves to attain even the accuracy we are giving them credit for; but an expression, which occurs in a following page, shows that this was not the case ; since it directs, that “if it be not time to take the polar star, then another star is to be substi- tuted.’ As a proof, however, that no great accuracy was attainable,it may be re- marked that the two stars called by the Arabs Furkadain (8 and y urse minoris) are accounted to have the same altitude; whereas in reality there is a difference of no less than three degrees in their declination ; but it is probable that the altitude was taken constantly by either the upper or the lower star, although we have no data here to decide this point. The following table will be found very useful for the conversion of issabas into degrees and minutes. In it the quadrantal difference of the Far- kadain is assumed at 6§ issabd, or 11°-+ 5° 30’, = NPD 16° 30', which is nearly the average north polar distance of the two stars. " 1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 445 Blevation of Polaris. Elevation of Farka- North Latitude. [at his inferior meridional passage ?] dain. Degrees. Minutes. |By upper quadrant. |By lower quadrant.| By upper quadrant. Issaba. Zam, Issaba. Zdém. Issaba. Zam. 0 0 3 33 0 54 4 0 2 30 5 0 4 6 6 0 5 30 ~ 0 0 14 2 6 7 7 6 1 0 13 2 7 7 8 42 2 0 12 2 8 7 10 18 3 0 1] 2 9 7 1] 54 4 0 10 2 10 7 13 30 5 0 9 Z 11 u 15 6 6 0 8 2 12 Ul 16 54 7 1 (ki jas) 7 1 18 18 8 0 6 2 19 54 9 0 5 2 21 30 10 0 4 2 23 6 11 0 3 2 24 42 12 0 2 2 26 18 13 0 1 2 28 18 14 2 0 0 With regard to the value of the zém in terrestrial measurement, 12’ or 12 nautical miles* would perhaps be applicable to many of the instances in S1’pv’s work ; for example, where he directs that in running down the Malabar coast the navigators should keep five zdéms distant from the shore, or 72 miles, which is the common practice. But to suit other cases, the zém must beassumed at halfadegree or upwards ; and this is probably attributa- ble to the very erroneous notions of the longitudinal distances of places pre- valent before good charts were formed. With the aid of a map, however, and the bearings given by our author, it is easy to describe the track of his several voyages. We have thus derived the probable measurements given in the following notes, in which we have also given the names of the places on our charts where they were recognizable.— Ed. ] THE NINTH CHAPTER. Containing an explanation of some Islands and Voyages, and precautions, the knowledge of which is requisite for Navigators in the Indian Seas. First Szotion.—The islands of the Arabic coastt. The island Okbdn', north of which the island Katdma?, afterwards Sil Noban’, the island Sdnat, then the two islands Badhidin®, the envi- rons of which are shallow; after them the islands Zithelath®, the J isk A BLS : we deo Praag HE ws star2y A os ,d * Has the terrestrial zdm any connection with the jojan or yojana of the Hindus, which is estimated at somewhat more than 10 miles? + This enumeration of islands commences from near Loheia, lat. 15° 41’ on the Arabic coast, in front of which lie the islands of Okbdne, Kotama, and Loban, with Camaran a little to the south. Most of the rest are not to be found by name on Capt. Exwon’s new chart,—Eb. 446 Translation of the Mohit, [Aue. island Hawai, the island Haula®*, which is situated behind Hawal ; the islands Zé Kassdr?+ through which great ships cannot pass; behind Zé Kassdr, the island Mokammar:t, and behind that the island Hodatfes§, on which are afew trees, and no passage between them on account of a great number of rocks ; the island Hodaife is the last towards Bakil’ onthe seaside : the water is here very unclean. On the east side of them is a small island called Masad’, but no passage between them; behind them the island Jihdn el Kebir*||, and near it on the nether side the island Jihdn ess-ssaghir’{ : the sea between them is full of shallows, to east of them the island Sdsoh'’ whichis a greatmoun- tainous island: on the western side of it a shallow called amariya'. Ap- proaching from the seaside the island Sdsoh is in sight before the amariya ; on this shoal the depth of the water is five fathoms (kuldj.) Between the two above said islands the great and little Jihdn is also an amariya or shallow. Be it known that the cape of Jazar Farsdn'?** lies north between Sharja'® and Jazd'* on the sea side are the two islands Zt Khardb's++ and Zi Saldb\*. Sdsoh is on the sea side of these two islands between south and west. On the sea side of Sdsoh are two islands, each of which is called Dohr jihdn (back of the world.) Be it known that the island of Sei] Mothan'"tt is the end of the Persian islands: on the sea side and north side there is no coast except that of the island of Irak Ozab'*. The back of Jazar Farsan'’§§, and the unclean places are on the side of Irak Ozdb ; towards the east side lies the back of the island Rakab”; the most eastern of all is the island Jozién"', from thence Borrassh” is in sight. There is a small ) 3 Comer oo o wo : Jy a Vm pad. o * Avo 3 ARS SD ® st © hase * SST ye * rail Ge 10 Spb 1] & pal 12 wauyi ym 13 bo yi es 5 Oy Er 16 ‘ , 18 os 19 Nese 20 $, 21 we ; 22 ie * Howali? on Abyssinian coast, 16° 30’, can hardly be intended. + Rasher ? below Camaran ; the R. may be miswritten for K. (See p. 449). ¢ Ras Majarmla? 14° 30’. 7 there may be small islands so called from their § Hodeidah Cape ? 14° asf proximity to these capes. || Zebayer islands, 15° 2': the Z is probably a miswriting of K. { Gebel Zogar, or Zeghir of map, on the 14th parallel of latitude. ** Theran? 17° 12’. The word Farsdén is applied farther on to the Abys- sinian coast,—it is probably an error of transcription. tt Gorab, 17° 10°. tt Mutharhane, 17° 287. §§ Perhaps the Cape Jazar Farsdn which is mentioned above.—H. 1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 447 bank' called Akdaf?. After the island Set! al Motahan there is nothing but sea, but on the border of the sea at the left are two sandy islands called Fossailidt?*. At their lower extremity are the islands Jaztra-i Somratt and Zahra’. Be it known that on the sea side of Rakab’ is a shallow in which the ground is visible, but is eight fathoms deep. Some say that parts of it are impassable for ships ; this amariya or shallow is called Ork’ Fossailidt ; after (south of?) the Fossailidt are three islands called Jamas*t. On the sea side towards the north is a great island called Zokak*§, and on the south side a long bank, on the outside of which are the breakers!®, called Tihdl"|| Merir'*, but the water has eight fathoms. This island and the above mentioned lie south on the sea side of mount Ssabaya°Y. From Tihal Merir in the direction of the sea side and towards the last is a Mira (shallow) ealled Irki Isa (Jesus’s vein :) the shallowest water is there two fathoms anda half, and the deepest eight fathoms. All these amariye (shallows not to be used) are in the Arabic sea. After Zokak is a great island called Maassaba** on which are some trees ; on its beginning” is a small ridge” called Bodér. After Maassaba are four great islands, called Bahr-ul- Kabir, (the great sea;) the two most southerly are called Lam and Han *: they are situated on the sea side of mount Ssabaya ; after them is the ridge Ablaj”++ ; on the south-west of it is a great bank” called Shobi Yahya; on the north side of the island Ab/aj is a mountainous bank, which is a long ridge, and extends till to the ridge of Kimdri, and is next the island Faraye*. Between them is a Ritka® ; that is tosay, arock. On the sea side of the mountainous ridge is the island Darwish*tt. On the sea and north side isa bank” called Helya*§§, and on the north side a great island called Shobain™||\|; after it the island Mushka®Q, and Patt 5) IS) ? colglaas Tayom © bry OS) T Gye 8 pweyem GH; Gb "leh “ye Uleta apane Melee Pr Ge a lel nd * stunk ola 24 OEE a oc 27 & |) 26 29 & 30 ine gpd 48S, pay d nat ~ dsl ed Sib * Wussaleat, of Capt. ELwon’s map, in latitude 17° 427. + Simer, east of ditto. t Shab el jurmah, 17° 34’. § Zoogah, 18° 5’. || Elalthaller ? 18° 157. 4] A mountain on the coast? Gebel Tase Sharme? ** Massuba, 18° 14’, tt Aboo Lelf (on the shore.) tt Dorish, 18° 31’. §§ Halli? S. of Coomefiddah. \I|| Shabbane, 18° 44’. 9{ Mooshka. 448 ; Translation of the Mohit, [Aue. west to it lies the island Shrka'*, which is alsoa great island; on the sea side a great bank’ called Shob Sowaidi*; on the north and land side of the island Shtkan is the island Zé Shajih*t. On the western side is a shallow® called Irk-ul-oytra® ; next to it a segment’ called Kitaei Zaidi®. Afterwards on the sea and north side an island called Tajedda°t, and on the sea and north side of this a ridge'’§ called Zohrai Kassr", and an island called Takshef”: on its sea side a ridge” called Zohrat Takshefi+; in the neighbourhood of this are great banks’ called Dakhakhin®. Beit known, that between the islands of Dének || and Tajedda both are in sight, if there is no hazy weather’’. These (of Dakhakhin) run down to Danek and Tajedda towards the west; from the Dakhakhin you see the island Shobaz-zokdr’{ ; these islands lie from Ddnek tewards the coast of Yaman, that is to say, south, on one side of Shobaz-zokdr is the island Wissil Omm Dahresh” : on the land side of Danek towards Syria, that is to say, north, are in some distance some segments (portions of rock?! ?) called Jbn Saaid”. The islands called Danek are three: the first to the south is called Shobaz-zokar, and the next northern one Khabire™, on the sea side of it is a segment™ called Omm Moen*, north of which lies Danek, the greatest of all; round it are four banks®. On the landsideis a passage between them and Dének ; they are called Mahdhan”, Makh- ref’, Korb”, and Kebla®. After Ddnek are four islands called Bahrez- zihar™ ; the name of the first is Matata®**, of the second Jodair®++, of the third Marma™tt, and of the fourth Zohrai Marmd. On the land side of them towards N.N.E. is a segment” called Zeinab®, and here N. the Shob Salim, a long bank ; from here towards E. S. KE. are three islands in sight. After Zihdr follow two banks and two called Homais” ; north of them are no islands, but only some Bees enn ° CO S2 9 Leenrct = ests : dye ; Bypdall 5ye " ashs fe: dy saab : Shox? i. Sy 1 y23% 4 Pe ages “re = BAS & palo yy ene ° opalene 17 cle ee 7 SH aera 20 Pon! yee, a 23 bate 24 Pee 25 wtp! 26 ee: 9 w =20 we 31 > 32 ke 33 Ly? alss he! = (bth. it 34 5 ae yv0 oP ha ot wb; oe eee * Shaker, 180 53’. + Doshagea. ; t Tegdah, 18° 58’. § Marked dangerous patches in chart. || Dahnac, 19° 32’. Q Shab Assugga, 19° 22’. ** Mutatoo, 199 45’. +f Jedere. tt Murrmah, 2 isl. 1836-] a Turkish work on Navigation. 449 segments, the names of which are Rehal', Majradtb?, and Hakan’; the last lies to the land side and north to Majradib ; on the western side of Hakan is a segment called Magharriya* above Kaidani ; after it comes Tofiya®*, after it the segment Ssordm’{, and after- wards Shob Kaméni*t, which is in the height Mantaj?. Afterwards Khoshaat"§ on the height of Ssdmfma'|, after it Irk-ghordb°Y, after it Mesmari***, which is on the height of the Black Cape, Radsol- aswadt+. These islands are the last of the Arabian seas. Seconp Section. Of the islands on the Persiant{ coast. The first are those of the islands Dahlak"*§§ situated south; the first of these islands is Mokaidah*, afterwards Mahlatan'*, then the island Zibbar", afterwards Zuikarsh Bent Aadai®: on the sea side of Zubbar and Zikarsh is a bank" called Zalfokda®. After Zikarsh is the island Sifala, afterwards Balaja”; on the sea side of it is the ridge Bent Tamarkass” ; after it comes great Hdteya and little Hdteya*4|||| ; after- wards Dozima®, afterwards Taraza”, afterwards Dalikaf”, afterwards - Delfaidal, afterwards Nahali®, afterwards Ghobdri®, afterwards Jadlab", afterwards Kabihi®?; between these two is Makhddha Bent Antar® ; afterwards Harmail*; this is the last of the northern islands on the seaside; but there are some islands on the western side near the shore. After Harmal towards the land side, and N. the island Rumiat*, afterwards Auwdli Bent Hatem®4Q, afterwards Auwdli Shura”, afterwards Ssil Katin®, afterwards Bent Alawa*, : tae ae, . we * be pRv0 : yl d.3 . asalo . er? jbeS Krai . : CO ON Eee tl Lee ee) te wo) bye i ies % Colmes td as le a wrbl "0 is ie pie ° aernt ld allaw 7 bel * Lab alendy rece. seppeeheat “deey 5 _ Bj yo eS SSN ® Jdsalo” foe 30 31 hs we Sm ? ot aes prbcisnrdidolse oe alee o> elec placed de yd idhe abi ne © Syle =! as re) * Tutteffah, 21° 0. + Serome Cliff. + Cobane. § Ul Cussar Shamier. \| Simama. q Urgo Gorab. ** Moosmaree. tt The Cape immediately south of Jeddah. tt By Persian it may be presumed Abyssinian must be intended. Perhaps who 5 is a miscopy for yaaa Habshdn or wig ys) African. §§ Dhalac, near Massua. None of the islands of this groupe can be traced by the names here given, until we come to the northernmost. ill! Two large islands north of Dhalac. {J Howalee Huttoob and Shoerah, 16° 30’ 3N 450 Translation of the Mohit, [Ave. afterwards the island of Dafna'. This island situated on the land side and N. is the last of the islands Dahlek. If you proceed from Harmal N. E. one day and night, your course leads you to the islands of Tahyrdi*, which are seven islands, four of which are situated on the sea side and three on the land side; one of those situated on the land side is called Delkas?, one Bent Hatem®, one Tastahel*, and one Rédka® ; the three on the land side are called Zalkordb’ ; after the four islands situated on the sea side are on the north two islands, a great one called Mosdmara’t, and a small one called Korb’. On the western side of Mosdmara, as far as the eye can reach, are two great islands and sandy shoals called Loka®{ and Dilsak!®; after them is on the north a great island called Zilkefla'', and further on thrée islands are seen. Next to them and at some distance from the shore near Zi’l asela'? is an island called Torinbo'%§. After Zilkefla on the sea and N. side is a small island called Tamarshah''||, there is a bank'® and on it a rock resembling a chair. After Tamarshah north is the island, little Bér-Miisa'®q], which is a little round island, on which are some tombs and trees and shrubs of tooth-pikes. To the N. of it, and at some distance, is the island Bér-Misa Kabir'”**, a great island on which large trees are growing ; afterwards, towards the land side, in the direction of W. N. W. is an’islandcalled Barkat'*tt, and in the vicinity of it a bank'® which is called Shobi Riéimdn®., From Barkat in the direction of true west is an island called Misa Maitbén”'. Beit known, that if one of these two islands is seen, the other is hidden; but if you pass between them, both are seen. After Bdr-Miisa Kabir to the N. is the island Hindjodr*tt; this is the last of the northern islands on the seaside. On the south side of these islands is a great bank called the long one”, and after it a small one. If you steer from Hindjodr true west, you come to the port Masrika*, which is at the height of Sawaktn®§§. ; us0 é wild * ebourd) * alias » aS}, , 11,9 i Spa lunve : 3 as, an Sold - - Kaila e Mid gals 14 Ma 15 % 16 . 17 He i hacer Ras ee Song y rbd 1 aug Sy 19 9 20 Meron 22 : 23 = 24 K pane 25 oy! i * Dahrat Abbeed, &c. 180 15’, t+ Mussarmroo, 180 50’. { Locha and Undeesellec. § Juttat Tromba. || Timershear, 18, 56’. ] Barmosa Segera. ** In lat. 19013’. +f Barkoot and its Shab. tt Hindee Geedam. §§ Suakin, one of the chief ports. 1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 451 Tux Turrp Sscrion.—Of Voyages and indications of the coasts being near. First Voyace from Bdbolmandam' to mount Zokar? and Sai- ban ; you go first in the direction N. W. by N. half a zdm', then steering N. N. W. you come to cape Zokar, and mount Ard? is in sight on the left side; if from Zokar you wish to proceed to Kamran’, and you steer N. by W. you come to Rakba’t. Here you see for the first time the island Zasha*t. The course from Zokar to Saibdn goes in the direction N. W. by which you come first to Abauel?, and then to Saiban§, which are seen on the right. Be it known, that if you steer true west you come to Mokaidah||, and if you take from Saban the direction W. by N. you come to the two Hatia (the great and small one.) If from Saibdn you follow the direction W. N. W. you come to Bent Antar and Harmal, which are islands of the Persian (African) coast; from Saiban going straight to the pole you come to Badhiain: from Saibdn going N. by W. you come to the two islands Jehdn (the great and small one), which are on the Arabian coast. Seconp Voyracs from Saibdén (Loheia) to Jedda. From Saiban to Jedda with an unfavorable wind, the voyage is performed from four inches to four inches by degrees in the follow- ing way. First from Satbdn where the pole wants « quarter to seven inches{], you steer four zims N. W. and afterwards N. W. by N. If the contrary wind is very strong, the course to be steered is E. by N. and true east, or near it; if the wind is a middle one, you steer N. E. or N. E. by N. If in your measurement the inferior quadrant" gives an inch** and a quarter, the ship is on a spot distant seven inches (measurement) from the pole. If in this place the northern wind ceases, you may lay to or tack. If it blows a hard northern wind, you look for the Arabic coast, and go te Badhiain" or near it. On the seaside of Badhiain is a shoal (amaria) ; that is to say, a place where you see the ground of the sea; with a weak northerly wind you go to Mokammar, or in the vicinity of it. The said islands are one near the other. If the pole is seven inches and a quarter, and the inferior quadrant seven inchest}, and a strong northern breeze, you go to Hsman and Mesed; and if there is but 8 * pdsolloly * ja aw a el; : | ye 4 wl oS K &A3 Bie; Pde! tle ugitiatguye |? ytnedy * Assaban of maps, off Loheia, 15° 41’; long. 42° 52’. + Saddle island in the Zebayers? + Rasher? § Or Loheia. || Dhalac island. { See introductory remarks, = Lat. 16o 18’. ** This should be 7Z inches. Tt Lat 17° 6’. 3N2 452 Translation of the Mohit, [Ave. little of. a northern wind, you go to Jihén and Ssail-ol-mathanat'*. If the pole is made by seven inches and half, and the inferior quad- rant wants a quarter to seven, and the wind blows strong from the north, you go from thence to Khobat?, where some shoals are seen ; with a little northern breeze you go to Fossailidtt ; if the pole wants a quarter to eight, and the inferior quadrant shows six and a half, and the northern wind blows strong, you go to Fossailidt, where it is the best to remain, because on its sea and north side is infinite rub- bish, that is to say, unclean places; with a weak northern wind you go to Maassabah*t or to the island Lam‘. If the pole is made by eight inches§, and the inferior quadrant marks six and a half (4 ?), and the wind blows strong from the north, you go to Darwishi|| or near it; if there is but little northern wind you go to Zoo Shajeeh], where much precaution is required on account of the bank Sowaia#’. If the pole is made by eight inches a quarter, and the inferior quad- rant marks six inches, and the wind blows strong, you go to Dakha Khein’ or to the island Takshef* or near it. With a small breeze you go to Dének. If the pole is made with eight inches and a half, and the inferior quadrant marks six inches** less a quarter, and the wind blows strong you go to Danek, and with a small northern wind to Hareik Semar®. If the pole wants one quarter to nine inches, and the inferior quadrant marks five and a half (Lat. 19° 30’), and the wind blows strong, you come to Hareik Semdr, and with a small northern breeze to Baher-zehdr", with a small northern breeze you come to Homais', where you stop. If the pole is made by nine inches and a quarter, and the inferior quadrant shows five inches, you go to Homais, with a small northern breeze you go to Réhel'?, or near it. If the pole is made by nine inches and a half, and the wind blows strong, you go to Majrddtb*++ or near it. With a small northern breeze you come to Ssorizim'*}{ or near it; ifthe pole wants a. quarter to ten, and the inferior quadrant shows four and a half, and the wind blows strong, you go to Ssoriim, and with a small northern wind you come to Jedda. If the pole is ten inches$§, and Matick) Jno Aue sk thea ¢ ¢ > yd Us dagaw ° ° 8 safe 9 - . a upmlee a BN SN eae Foy 10 hall ys? M dem 12 Jal, 13 eed) par? 4 (x? * Matharhane. + Wassaliat. + Massubah. § 180 18’. || Dorish. § Doshagea. ** Lat. 19° 6’. Dahnak is in 190 31’. Vid. sup. +t Maharabi of the map, 20° 14’. tt Serome, on the coast of Elwon, or Sarum island of HorsBuRGH, 21° 9. §§ Lat. 21° 30’. 1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 453 the inferior quadrant shows four inches and a quarter, you go right east four z@ms towards Jedda, if God please. Be it known that in the sea of Jedda you find as you find corals in the western seas. Turrp Voracs from Saibdn (Loheia) to Sawéken*. The way in which you perform a voyage from Saibdn to Sawdken is the following. From the place where the pole is made with seven inches} you proceed in the same manner, that is to say: first, if the northern gale is strong, you steer KE. 8. E. and 8. E. by E.; if there is but little wind, N. W. by W.; but the true way from Saibdn to Sawdken is by Jedda. If the northern wind blows strong you go to Mokaidah}, and with a small breeze to Hawateb' (the Hatyas) or near them. Be it known, that on the sea side of the islands of Dahlek? is an amaria (shoal) and an ahja’, that is to say, topook* or rocks which are not seen; the most remarkable of them is the Ahja Tamerkass’ on which the water is more or less than three fathoms deep; great precaution is necessary in all these places. If the pole is made by seven inches and a quarter, and the inferior quarter marks seven inches, and the northern wind blows strong, you go to the Hawateb, with a small northern breeze to Harmal and Bent Antar®, or near it. If the pole is made by seven inches and a half, and if the inferior quadrant shows seven inches less a quarter, and the wind blows strong, you go to Bent Antar ; with a small northern wind to Harmal, or it is seen at the left hand. Be it known, that from Harmal to the pole or N. by W. two rhumbs and a half is a shoal Merat Aart’ called Harbobat*, of which great precaution is to be ta ken. Going along the coast and the pole wanting a quarter to eight, and the inferior quadrant showing six inches and a half§, and the wind blowing strong, you turn to Torbet Khassizs° or to the north side of it: if the pole is eight inches and the inferior quadrant shows six inches and a quarter||, and the northerly wind blows strong, you go to Batn Hobdb," witha small northern wind to Aantab". If the pole is made by eight inches and a quarter, and the wind blows strong, you go to Mandel, and with a small northern breeze to Jein’® or near it. Ifthe pole is made by eight inches and a quarter you go true west ‘elm ; SOUR Se Le] a yak e Vas peils =] © yAhe endy " cssecsl)< Pee eg se ihe U2yas isi wk by eenhic 12 o> * Suakin by Captain Exwon’s chart lies in Lat. 19° 4’, Long. 37° 30’, + Lat, 16042’. +t Dhalac. § Lat. 179 54’, {| 18° 18. 454 Translation of the Mohit, [Aua. to Tahtiat' or it is seen on the right; if the north wind is but weak you go to Tamarsheh* or Zilkafla ; on the left hand at some distance are seen some islands, as Mosamara and Lauk@’+. If the pole wants a quarter to nine inches, and the inferior quadrant shows five and a half, and the north wind blows strong, you go to Tamarsheh or Zilkafla, and with a small breeze to Bar i Misa ssaghir}. If from Bar i Misa ssaghir you steer true west towards the continent, you go from Sawdkor or Bir i Misa Kalir to Matiyat’. If the pole is nine inches, and the inferior quadrant shows five inches and a quarter§, and the wind blows strong, you go to Barkat* or near it ; from Hind Jodr’*|| true west you go to Maserkai® §] ; this port is on the upper side of Sawdéken. If the pole is nine inches and a quarter, and the inferior quadrant shows five inches, you go with a strong wind from Hind Jodr to Sawaken; with a small breeze to the superior part of Sawdéken : where is nothing but mountains. Mark that if in these parts you go tacking with a north wind, the rule is to hold the middle between the Arabian and Persian (African) coast, and that if you side to one of them you never attain your object. On the south side the bank Rés-eshabak’** called Héwi® is opposite the island Tamarsheh. On the north side the end of Shabak is opposite Bari Misa. Fourtu Voyace from Jedda to Aden. The way of the voyage from Jedda to Aden is the following. If you start from Mesmdri you go two rhumbs{}+ 8. S. W., afterwards two rhumbs 8S. by W., afterwards two rhumbs to the south pole, turn then and steer 5S. E. by E. from thence you steer S. E. to Zokartt. From Zokar you run one rhumb S. by W. afterwards S.-S. E. to Babel Mandam ; from thence one rhumb in the direction E. S. E., then E. by 8. to A’ara’, from thence you follow the direction E. by N. to Adan in Yaman, which is a celebrated port, and is commonly called the Pearl Aden'’, though there are no pearls at Adan ; but as it is a great port, this name arises probably from its trade in pearls; in the same way you call the cocoanuts, which come from Bengal Kabi- lian, because they come by the way of Kabal. Cornelians of Yaman are found at Aden in immense quantities. wis? f kK; Ng whirbe ; Sty * da ddD : eK 4 Sh dN oly 3 US ;'d 9 $y 10 dye * Timershear, 18056’. + Dahreat Abged? { Barmosa Segere, 19° 3’, 190 54’; Shab Barkoot is in 19° 14’ || Hindee Geedam, 19° 21”. {] Mersa Arakea, on the coast, 20° 13’. ** Ul Shebek, 180 44’, tt Perhaps zams. tt Gebel Zoogar, 14° 0’. 1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 455 . Firrn Voyace from Sawdken to Aden. The way Sawdken to Adan is the following: The voyage may be performed in two different ways. From the 180th day till about the 230th of the Yazdajerdian year*, (beginning with the Nauriz ;) that is to say, from the 45th day till to the 95th day of the Jelaulian year, when the sea-faring shuts ; the voyage begins from underneath Shabaka' and you follow the coast till cape Mérdt*} ; from Mérat two zéms true east, then two zdms E. by S., then two zdms*? E. S. E.; from thence turning to S. E. you come to Satbdn ; if from Saibdn you wish to make Kamrdn, you go true east, till you see the islands of Koféma* and Okbdn® ; from thence to Kamrdn is the Sséheb Darke Robbdn® ? If you sail from Rakbat one zaum towards the south pole you come to the mountain of Zokar§, and from thence you proceed in the same manner as it has been mentioned before. The second way of performing this voyage is with the monsoon which sets in with the 280th day of the Yazdajerdian year (12th Aug.) which is the 145th of the Jeldlian, or near it. Sailing from Katka’|| you steer right east, because in this season the south-western winds prevail. If you do not set out below Shabaka, set out from above it, going between the islands and Shabaka, till you are passed the sea islands, little Bér-Misa4] and such ones, you follow the course of true east. As soon as the islands disappear you sail S. E. till the pole is marked seven inches and a quarter; you go then 8S. E. by E. to Saiban. This is the course with a favourable wind, but if it is not favourable it is quite different. Stxtu Vorace from Zaila’** to Kujurat. The way of performing it is the following. After having left Aibdn9 and after having passed the unclean places, you steer N.E. by E. till you see the mountains of Aden; from thence true east, till you lose sight of the mountains of Aden ; from thence E. by N. three or four days ; then E. N. E. If you do not see the mountains of dden you go N. E. by E. till the pole marks five inchestt ; from thence in the manner above said. Be it known, that in Gujerut grow indigo, ginger, cocoa- nuts, tamarind, and the tree Tari'*{{, each bunchof which gives every day a pitcher of wine; there is also the Pawn", that is to say, tanbil H 2 oe io we) Le : a bts ® hake ‘ wey BS ys wen>lo " 3B | ea; sae uss iM ae * 7th May to 24th June. + Amarat, 180 197. t Saddle island. § Zoogar, the zém must here be taken at one degree. || Trinkatah ? 18° 45’; another name for Shabak. { Barmoosa. ** Zehila, east of Babelmandal, to Gujerat. tf Lat 135 30’. tf The toddy palm. 456 _ Translation of the Mohit, [Aue. trees, and a great number of Tébau trees (Tuja)*, from the branches of which the bunches descend as roots; there are bats, the wings of which measure more than a yard; there is also a great number of Zokim treest, and an infinite number of parrots and apes, so that you might call it the country of apes. Seventy Voyrace from Barbara} to Gujerdt. If you start from Khorsaid? you follow the direction N. N. E. till you come to where the measure is equal§, which has been explained in the former chapters, and from thence you proceed in the way above mentioned. Ercutu Vorace from Aden to Gujerat. If you start from Aden, you go true east till you lose sight of the mountains of Aden; you continue to hold the same route a day and a night, then E. by N., till the southern wind sets in, then E. N. E. if possible, and if not, you followthe above course and go then E. N. E. ; if th ere be little motion with the Awelama* (?) there is no harm in it ; if a closer course is pursued you side to KE. by N. and return from thence again to E. N. E., till the measure*|| is equal; in this measure LyraQ is five inches, or Sagitta’ six inches, or Canopus and Lyra are equal to three inches and a half. Under this measure (height) you see in the sea frequently sea snakes, which ought to be taken care of, as it is agood sign; if you do not see them follow your way in the direction right east till you see them, and then change again your course to E. by N. till you see land. The best rule is to trust to the soundings and not to the sea-snakes, which, if they prove true, show themselves twice and thrice a day. Be it known, that sometimes in the monsoon Damani the ship is thrown by the current towards the Persian shore like mount Koholdd Dabbaghdt® ; at this time the ship finds itself in the barbarian channel; there great precaution is necessary against the whirlpools ; besides this place there are such between Gujerat and Sind in the gulph Jakad’**, where the wind blows continually from the sea, and the current comes from the shore, so that waves 3 Bry? z SA RAW 9m * bal.) : Ur ys be Os) ee 3 webs T AES * The Bur or Banian tree. tT Seej or Euphorbia ligularia, Ro xpuren. t Lat. 100 30’, Long. 45, 10’. § The kids or 16° 54’, || Lat, 160 54% q There must be some mistake in these stars, as Lyra would have a meridio- nal altitude of 680 30’ and Sagitta much more. Canopus also could not be above the horizon along with Lyra, as in the given latitude this star only rises after Lyra sets; and it attains an elevation of 19° on the meridian. ** Point Gigat, at the entrance of the gulph of Cutch. 1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 457 and contrary currents are not wanting, and a ship falling in with them runs great risk to be lost, if it is not saved by the grace of God; so it is necessary to avoid these places. You must turn from the Persian shore to the Arabian, and steer N. N. E. and N. E. by N. till you are out of reach of this dangerous place, after which you steer again E. N. E. Know that the wind of Canopus (S. S. E.) is not to be trusted till the pole is made with six inches or six inches and a quarter ; the flood runs then true E. The signs of a tempest are great distress, and the summer birds called in Yaman, ijam', also the birds bani safaf? and amm ul sanané ; these birds keep then to the shore, flying in the summer on the sea; sometimes you see them till where the pole is made with nine inches, (lat. 19° 54’.) Nintu Voyacs, from Kashan** to Gujerat. If you set sail from Lezben’ you follow the direction E. 8. E. and E. by 8. during night time, when for the most part the northerly wind ceases. From §. 58. EK. there is a heavy swell; therefore it is advisable to keep the high sea; if during night time the wind dimi- nishes and you find yourselves at sea, lay to till the wind becomes fresh again; but if it be fair, you go twelve zdm* true east, return then to E. N. E. till Sagitta is six inches or Lyra’ five inches, or Canopus and Lyrat come equally to three inches anda half. If in this height you see really sea-snakes, you follow the course of E. by N. till land is seen. If the sea-snakes are not seen, you steer true east till you see them, and return then to E. by N. The sign of the presence of the sea-snakes are great numbers of birds, as the Sowaidi* and korani®. In some years the sea-snakes and the birds Sowatdi are seen on the Arabian coast. If you are leaning towards the Arabian shore, and the pole is made with nine inches or near itt, it is guessed that you are come near the Indian land ; but this is not certain, because these birds do not deserve much credit, as some years they are seen, and in other years they are not seen; sometimes they are to be seen in great numbers, and sometimes but few. Teantu Voracs, from Khalafat'§ to Gujerat. If you start from Khalafat you keep the sea till you come to cape Fartak" ||, from thence you run twelve zdms true east, then to E. N. E. or E. by N., as it has been mentioned before. plese Bh hy bead Std Papal lj Tyla * Codage 8 gi S Meola 5,5 Up) * Kisseen on south coast of Arabia; Long. 51° 5’. + Wrong stars, (vide supra) Dr. Dorn calls Lyra u/sa!bak, not salbar. + About 20° N. Lat, § Maculla? || Cape Fartash, N. E. of Kisseen. 3 458 : Translation of the Mohit, [Aue. Exeventu Voyacs, from Zofar* to Gujerat. Setting sail from Zofdr you go 8. E. by S. or near it till you get into the open sea, into which cape Marbdat'} stretches out a long way. From thence you go E. N. E. or E. by N. till you come to the kids? (Lat. 17°) (the measurement explained in former chapters). At Zofdr grow also cocoanuts. Twetrryu Voyracs, from Kalhat* to Gujerat. Setting sail from Kalhdt{ you follow a true eastern course till you see the sea-snakes, and if you see them, you return towards the coast, till Lyra‘ is marked by four inches and a half; from thence you steer true east till you come to the shore; this is the course per- formed with the monsoon 4zib: but at the time of other monsoons » you follow the direction E. by S. till you are come to the kids (measurement explained in the former chapters), from thence true east till to the end. TarrTEENTH VoyaceE, from Maskat to Gujerdt. If from these ports you wish to make Concan’, you follow the direc- tion of E. by 8. and east; if you wish to go to Monembdr§, you follow the direction 8. E. by E., you come then to the mount Karata’, which is a famous mountain of Monembdr. Fourtreenty Vorace, from Aden to Monembar7, (Malabar.) The course is the same which has been already mentioned before from Aden to Gujerdt ; you go on till the pole marks six inches and a half or seven inches||; if from thence you can go tacking, you go in the direction of E. by S. or true east ; if it is impossible to keep this course, your way is E. by N, till the pole is made by seven inches and half or eight mches ; from thence you follow the direction E. by S. till the pole is made with six inches], then true east till land is in sight, which is A’zddiw*** or a place near it; you steer then towards the shore ; what is meant by the inches, assabd@’, and the pole or polar star jah has been explained in the former chapters. Firreentu Voyace, from Aden to Hormiz, (Ormus.) Sailing from Aden in the direction true east you see the moun- tains of Aden, and if you do not see them you steer in the direction of Dairai Bar" whichis E. N. E, till Fartak', from thence five zdms"tt u aly yop : ent tas : wll yhelaw Shh : al ys * hes ~ tM Portege ee aa NS wr * Dofar, a little further east of Fartak. + Cape Morebat; Lat. 16° 50’, Long. 55°, t Half way between Muscat and Cape Rasalgat. § Malabar. || About Lat. 170. q Lat. 150, ** Ajideeva near Ankola, lat. 14° 40’. tt The zdm here must be about 35 miles. 1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 459 N. E. by E.; then N. E. to Marbdath' and Mottika?, (this last is ealled Janjari*,) from thence you follow again the direction N. E. by E. taking care on your way of the island Hausakeya‘*, because on its sea-shore is a shallow; it is necessary to come forth between Siikara’ and the islands Khiré or Miria’t. After having found Stikara you sail five zdms N. E. by E. then three zdéms N. E., from thence five N. E. by N. to Mousir*t you may see it or not; if you see it, you follow the same way till the island is left behind: from thence four zéms to N. N. EK. from whence you return to N. by E. till Rasolhadd? ; from Rasolhadd you direct yourselves to the known Dairai Barr" till Ras Mosandem''§, from thence to the pole to Hormiiz. The pearls for which Hormiuz is famous are fished on the islands of Kais"*|| and Bahrain’*. If you wish to go from Rasolhadd to Dilsind'*4 you steer £. N. E. till you come to Pasani'® or near it; from thence to Dairai Barr’’, that is to say, E. by S. till Rds Karashi'"**, where you come to an anchor, waiting for the fishing boats with which you enter the port. The ancient pilots used to sail from Cape Alhadd to that of Kardshi in the direction E. by N. but it is better to go with the higher wind. Sixteentu Voyace, from Diu to Meshkass'*++. The time for this voyage is from the tenth day after the Vazdajer- dian Nawriz to the 60th day (7th Nov.—27th Dec.) which is to say, from the 240th day after the Jelalian Nawriiz to the 290th. First you follow the direction W. by S. two Terfa'’, that is to say, two inches, which make the poles eight inchest{ ; from thence to W. S. W. one Terfa; if it is the time to measure the pole (to take the height by the polar star) you take it: if it not be the time for it§§ you take the height at the setting of Aguéla”|||| by the Lyra™ which gives V bye 2 Abo grin SAikwle Pad ye Lye Phyo - podbean pol) rf Us 8 py? rs dia lyre G cohues * 2 Bye ot col Spal Pee P6335 7 Sled ig tl. f * Hasek of maps. + Curia Muria. i t Mazeira island. § Cape Mussendan, at the entrance of the Persian Gulph. | Kishma ? § Mouths of Indus. ** Kurachee on the northernmost mouth. tt Maculla? or a place nearer Morebat ? tt Lat. 180 18’. §§ This sentence proves that the meridional passage of Polaris was usually observed. \||| The Arabic name of the star here translated Aquila by the Baron enables us to clear up the difficulty in former passages. In the description of the Arabic celestial globe by Dr. Dorn (Roy. As. Soc. Trans. IT. 381, the star Colg!) pend (the falling vulture) is shown to be alpha lyre, or wega of the Alphonsine tables. The translation in the text, therefore, should be—“ take the height of Polaris at the setting of wega (in lyra), i. e, of alpha lyre. 302 ‘pie 9 os l ip), 10 460 Translation of the Mohit, {Ave. seven inches and a half, then you steer true east to Sdjer*, the moun- tains of Dain?} are visible on the right ; at this time of the year it is better to see them than to see Fartak, because the wind coming from N.N. E. is to be feared, which at this time of the year. (it being winter) is much to be feared, as it raises great dust and waves. Tf you cannot attain Sajer you pass Meshkdss ; if the polar star is seven inches and the ship at sea with a strong wind, turn again its head to the sea one or two days, according to the strength or the weak- ness of the wind; after the winterly wind sets in the monsoon Azib, and in this case you go back as much as you are come. If you start from Diu on the 70th or 80th day of the Yazdajerdian year (6th —16th Jan.) your way lies then in the direction W. S. W. till you come opposite the Cape of Fartak, which is the 300th day from the Jelalian Nawrtéz or the 310th. From opposite the cape Fartak you go true east; if the winterly wind blows, you haul down the sails and lay to, if possible ; if not, you go with as little sail as possible to get the ship free of the waves. After the ceasing of the winterly wind the monsoon 42) sets in, in which case you measure back your steps as much as you have gone, and this season is better than the former. Some years the winterly winds blow till to the hundredth day of the Yazdajerdian year, which is the 330th day of the Jelalian (14th Feb.) particularly from Fartak to Zofar; the signs of land being near are the birds Dhofaik? and Koraik‘, and of the sea beasts or fishes; the Tabbdka® and Lezdk®, and of the maritime plants the Kirmith’, and Kelhaf*. SEVENTEENTH Voyacs, from Diu to Shehr and Aden. The course lies first W. S. W. till opposite Fartak, from thence true east till land is in sight; this voyage is performed within the tenth day of the Yazdajerdian year, and the sixtieth, that is to say, within the 240th and 290th of the Jelalian (7th Nov.—27th Dec.) if it is performed within the 80th or 90th day of the Yazdajerdian year, answering to the 310th or 320thof the Jelalian (16th Jan.— 26th Jan.) the course to be heldis W.S. W. till the pole is six inches and a quarter or six inches, then true west. If you set out from Diu on the 110th day of the Yazdajerdian year, which answers to the 840th day of the Jelalian year (15th Feb.), the course to Meshkass and Shehr is W. 8S. W. and S. W. by W. till the pole is marked by five inches and a quarter; from thence you run true west ; at your right the island of Socotra is near in sight; as soon as you Vyale 7 dite * Shas * eho talkb ‘Git " be) sion eks * Seger. + Doan near Fariak. 1836. | a Turkish work on Navigation. 461 see it, if you are bound to Meshkass or Hiridji* you steer N. W. by W. and if you intend to go to Shehr you steer W: N. W. till you see land; the sign of your approaching Socotra is that you see of the sea-plants or an infinite number of trees of the species called Kirmith, but sometimes you see them and sometimes not; on the coast of Shehr men and animals live all on fish. Ereuteentx Voyaae, from Mahdim*t and Shit? to the Arabic coast. The time for sailing from these ports is from the tenth to the six- teenth day of the Yazdajerdian year, which answers from the 240th to the 290th day of the Jelalian year ; the course to be followed is W. by S. till the pole is marked by seven inches, from thence you steer true west. If you intend to go to Meshkass, Shehr, and Aden, the course to be followed is W. by &S., till you come opposite to Fartak, from thence you go true west to Fartak, and from thence to which port you please: if you set out from the above mentioned ports at the end of the season, the direction to be followed is W. S. W. till the pole is four inches and a quarter or four inches and an eighth, from thence you steer true west to Kardafintt. The ports Mahiim and Shiil belong to Deccan; from this country come the muslins called Candaharians, and those of Daulatabdd, Beripatari®, and Bairami®. Nivereenty Voyages, from Diu to the islands of Dib’, (Maildives.) Steer first S. S. E. the pole being made by five inches, side towards the land in the direction of E.S. E. and S. E. by E. till you see the mountains of Monibdr ; from thence to Daira Barra, till the pole is three inches ; from thence to the south pole, till the fardgad*§ are eight inches and a quarter, then true W. to the island Foywka®, and the islands near it. © TwentietH Vorace, from Daubil' to the islands of Dib. You follow first the direction W. S. W. till you lose the shore, from thence to Daira S. W. by W. till land is in sight ; from thence S. S. E. till the pole comes to three inches, from thence to the south pole and 8. 8S. W. till the Farkadain (g and + in the little bear) are marked by eight inches and a half; from thence true west to Foyika or its neighbourhood. Mark what has been said above: till land is in sight steering S. W. by W., that means, that the land is at hand. «GU F elyen "Spat * uysayS © silage rw erty" yall ys 8 PU . 9 . 10 3s) 3 BS g55 axle BS * pi * Maculla? and Hargiah near Aden. + Mahim, north, and Sheoul, south of Bombay. t Guardafui, N. E. Cape of Africa, lat. 12°. § The far kadain, or 8B and y urse minoris. 462 Translation of the Mohit, [Aue. Be it known to you that in some of the islands of the Maldives the inhabitants hunt with dogs, bred to the purpose, the Orang-ootang (Nisnaus) and eat it. The Nésnaus is an animal resembling a mon- key, but endowed with speech; but generally monkeys are also called Nisnaus. I have heard from the brother of Janim Hamza, the late Intendant of Egypt, that coming one day on commercial business at the extremity of Yaman, to a walled village, he alight- ed at a house where two boys lying on the ground were crying, and that out of commiseration he untied their fetters. The master of the house, returning, laughed at it, and said, these are Nisnaus, which we hunt. The next day the master of the house took his disbelieving guest with him, and he saw the Nisnaus hunted by dogs. Some Nisnaus emerge from the sea, their flesh is a great dainty ; that they are endowed with the power of speech is even recorded in the books of philosophers. Twenty-First Voyace, from Dit to Maskdt and Hormtz. The time of performing this voyage is from the 10th of the Yazdgyer- dian year to the 60th, (7th Nov.—27th Dec.) that isto say, from the 242nd day of the Jelalian year to the 290th ; but you must continually go tacking, because the wind which is at this time of the year the mon- soon Azib, blows very strong ; if it is impossible to pursue your course tacking, you must wait till the wind grows favourable, in which case you go till the Lyra! (?) is made by three inches and a half, and the land is at hand; because the interior pole is near the Arabian mountains ; from thence you proceed true west to Saatari?*, or its neighbourhood. If you set out on the 110th day of the Yazdajerdian year, which is the 340th of the Jelalian year, (7th Feb.) your way is W. N. W. till the pole is eleven inches ; from thence true west till to Td’, or its neigh- bourhood ; but if you set out on the 150th or 160th day from the Yaz- dajerdian Nawriz, which is the 15th or 25th of the Jelalian year (26th — March), then you proceed W. S. W. and S. W. by W. till you see the island of Socotra: direct your course then towards the north pole till Hausakiat, from thence to Daira (E. N. E.) towards the Arabian coast ; if the wind grows strong before Socotra is in sight, the western wind Kis you proceed tacking to N. W. by N. or N. W. or N.N. W. as you can till you see Mottuk', Khar*, or Miria®t. If these places are not seen, you must take care of Ghabbai-tin?§. In order to avoid it, you put the head of the ship to the sea and goon. The sign that you ybelw a ceylew Cea "Gye Fd Seige 7 atans * Swardi, near Muscat. + Hasek. + Curia Muria. § Cape Isolette ? 1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 468 are near Ghebba is, that the water grows yellow; as soon as you see signs of land being near you must be in guard against it, till Madreka' or Massira?*. If the pole is ten inches and a half, and land is not in sight, and no signs are seen; you have passed the Arabian shore, and then you have no chance but to steer for the Indian continent. You follow the direction E. by S. till the pole is ten inches to Man- galort or Soomdanat} or Shiirowaur* and Gilinaurt; but take care not to bring the pole to ten inches and a half, (22° 18’) in which case you necessarily come to Jaked’§ which is your damage and repentance too late. God be your guide! What is said of Indian whirlpools is all a tale, exceptthe whirlpools in the gulph of Jaked, and in the Barbarian channel near Kardafiin, where ships falling in are unavoidably lost; the causes of it are the heavy waves, the strong winds, the currents and the breakers of the coast, so that it is impossible for the ship either to hold the sea or to land on the shore, if God does not grant his parti- cular grace. If you guess that you may be drifting to Jaked you must take before hand your precautions and endeavour to reach from the coast of Makrdn either the port of Kalmata® or Kawader’, or Kapchi Makran® ; Bandar Kawauder||, is the place where cocoanuts grow; or you must try to goto Karaushi4 or to enter Khirdéiil Sind? ; that is to say, the port of Lahore, to get rid of the fear of Jaked. In Sind are a great number of liver-eaters, against whom you must be on your care; because if they meet a man who eats his dinner in public, they have the talent of eating up his liver with their eyes, and so kill him. This is not to be slighted. TweEnTy-SEcoND VoyaGE, from Cambeya to Aden at the end of the season. Cambeya is the district in the province of Gujerdt, comprehending the ports of Ahmedabad ano Patan; from thence comes the cotton of Patan; and Bahdder and some Indian stuffs. In this country is a profusion of Babaghari'® and cornelians: but the best of the last are those coming from Yaman. If you set out from Cambeya and come to Dié or its district, you must sail at night, because at the end of the season the wind blows from the west during the day, but dur- ing the night from the shore ; with this land breeze you go as far you can towards the south. In some years the wind is a strong north western in the place of the Maurara (sea-snakes), then your course is 8 Gu 9 . BS Wye = See 39> eset, * Mazeira. + Mungrole, 21° 30’. t Somn&th, Choorwaur, and Cooleynorky Pagoda. § Point Gigat, or Juggut, at the south-west corner of the Gulf of Kutch. \| One of the three Bunders on the coast of Gujerdt. q Korachee. 10 464 Translation of the Mohit, [Ave. S. W. by W. Your measure (height) be the pole and no other, till the pole marks five inches, then you go W. S. W. till the pole is four inches and a quarter or four inches and an eighth, then true west to Kardafin. The signs of Kardafién being near are the birds Karih' and Manji?, but few are seen of the last, those which are the most frequent are the Daghdt® and Kasld*; of sea animals you see the Tabbaka® (tortoise?) and sometimes the sea-horse ; as soon as land is again at a distance these signs vanish: it is also probable that the birds here seen are those of Socotra, Samaha® and Dorzan’. God knows the rest. If at this time of your course Socotra is on the north, you direct yourselves to Hadiai Socotra*, and if you go to Kardafiin, your course is along the Persian* continent. If you go from Hejrdi*+ to Ddrzin” you steer W. N. W. and if you wish to go from Mitt to Aden you steer true west till Aden is insight, then you follow the current, mdjri'’, till Bab Mandam. Twenry-THIRD Voyacs, from Dabil§ to Aden”. If you leave Ddbai at the end of the season, you direct yourselves W.S. W. till the pole is four inches and an eighth, from thence true west to Kardafin. Twenty-FourtH VoraGs, from Kiwwai Sindabur'*+t to Aden. If you start from Kuwwai Sindabir at the end of the season, take care not to fall on Cape Fal'>, because it is five inches and a quarter on the pole ; steer therefore W. by S. till the pole is four inches and an eighth, from thence true west. TwENTY-FIFTH VoyaGE, from Hennir' || and Baudaklaw"( to Aden. If you leave those two ports at the end of the season, go from Azddi«'*** or Angili'® side-wards, and then turn to the sea true west, if the wind be favourable ; if not, direct yourselves W. by S. or W. by N. your utmost being S. W. by W. If you cannot attain any of these directions, turn and steer to the pole till the wind grows favour- able, then turn again and steer W. by S. till the pole is made by four inches and an eighth, so you come then going true west to Kardafin : the vicinity of Cape Faw/ is known by the quantity of birds and a Me eke lS ileal ESL ee ‘ SybSwdy XD na ee oy? pie ASsh do. use? * pele 9) Jdsu} 9S a Se om, “i jp - Ys ols * tl a sx! * African. tT Harjieh ? t Mette, west of Guardafui. § South of Bombay, lat. 179 45’. || Honawer on Malabar coast, 14° 15’ lat. q Bhatakuli or Betkuldrag, ditto, 14°. ** Aujideeva, off Ankola, lat. 18°. tt Probably Cotwale Sonderbaut of Arrowsmith, north of Goa. 1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 465 great quantity of Kalhdf" that is to say, sea foamand Kerme??, or sea trees, Twenty-sixtH VoyaGeE, from Calicut to Kardafin. If you sail from Calicut with a favourable wind, steer W. by S. and sometimes W.S. W. so you come to the island Kolfaini* ; if at this time, that is to say, on the 140th day of the Yazdajerdian year, which is the 5th of the Jelalian (March), the sea shuts, theflood runs at this time N.N. W. from thence you direct your course to the south pole, and go tacking if the flood runs to the south pole, but if the wind falls lower, then this course to S. W.,S. W. by S. and. S. W. you may follow it a day andanight without inconvenience. If it should fall yet lower, turn and steer to the north pole or near it, particularly if the pole is made by less than three inches (lat. 10°), because it is profitable to be then high north, and the wind grows favourable ; ifit be already so, you run from Calicit till Kolfaini two zams in the direction of W. by S., then eight or nine zims W. S. W.t+ then you may rejoice, as you have got clear of the islands of Ful, from thence W. by N. and W. N. W. till the pole is four inches and a quarter, and then true west to Kardafin. Calicét is famous for its pepper plantations : its Prince is the Sdumervit who is at war with the Portuguese. On these coasts are a great number of elephants employed in dragging ships, launching them into the sea, and similar doings. TWENTY-sEVENTH VoyacE, from Dit to Malacca. Leaving Div you go first S. 8. E. till the pole is five inches, and side then towards the land, till the distance between it and between the ship is six zéms; from thence you steer 8. S. E., because in the neighbourhood of Ceylon, the sea runs high, the further you keep off the more quiet the sea grows; you must not side all at once but by degrees, first till the farkadain (g and y in the little bear) are made by a quarter less than eight inches, from thence to S. E. till the farka- dain are seven inches and a quarter, from thence true east at arate of 18 zams, then you have passed Ceylon. The sign of Ceylon being near is continual lightning, be it accompanied by rain or without rain; so that the lightning, of Ceylon is grown proverbial for a liar. After haying passed Ceylon you go E. N. KE. and E. by N. till the pole is made by two inches, from thence true E. till to the island of Sarjals which is one of the Nd@jbdri (Nicobarian) islands. After hav- ing left it behind you steer E. by S. tillland is in sight, you go along it to the islands Faliisanbilen*§ which are nine islands ; from thence to. F a e guls 3 hays Fi Csdaols : Oyu _ cy shuugls * Calpeni, one of the Laccadives. + This course is the ‘‘ nine degree channel’ through the Laccadives. + Saan Amir? of the Bider or Ahmedabad dynasty, A. D. 1505—49, § Pulo Sambelan or the ‘ nine islands’? on the Malay coast, lat 4° 5’. 3 P 466 Translation of the Mohit, (Ave. the south pole. At your right some islands are seen at a distance, so you go towards the south pole till you come to the islands to Folod- jomra'* which appear near, from thence E. S. E. where the seais more than ten fathoms, if it be 11 or 12 never mind, because after 12 is the deep sea, and you are clear of the Shob Kafaussi. You go till mount Folipdsalir?, is opposite, N. E. till the soundings give 24 fa- thoms, because there is a bent shd6® running out in the sea, which is to be taken care of—wherefore your course must be followed always in a depth of 24 fathoms till you see the mount Folupdsaldr N. N. E. ; then you steer towards the landand Dairai-barra(E.N.E.) till Malacca. The inhabitants of Shuli*t (?)go from Falisanbélen two zams to thesouth pole. TwENTY-EIGHTH VoyaGE, from Diu to Shatijdm’t, i. e. to Bengal. Sailing from Dié, your course, till you have left Ceylon behind you, is the same as the above mentioned, then you steer N. E. Ceylon remaining on the western side ; then N. E. by N. till you come oppo- site to Rakanj*§, where the pole is made with a quarter wanting to nine, and the Aselli scarce with six inches; if in this course you see land it is well; if not, steer E. N. E. till the pole is nine inches and a half, so you come to the island of Dardiw’. If you see it at this time it is well, if not go right east till you see land, but take care of Fesht Hayumiin'||, which is a desert rock, round which the water is twenty fa- thoms deep; take care also of Dardiw4] where the water is but five fathoms. If Rakanj is in sight, go N. N. W. with 25 fathoms of water. At this time Hayumién remains on your right, of which great care is to be taken. After having passed it you approach the land till your soundings give 16 fathoms, and with this course you come to Dardiw ; after having left it behind you go with 12 fathoms depth N. N. W., there you come to a great Khir? (?) called Bdakdl’***, and then five capes which are taken for islands by those who don’t know them ; thencomes a Ghobba", that is to say, a gulph full of shallows, shoals and breakers ; this place is called Kékar Diwa'*+t, then you come to the island Zenjilia'*{{ which is facing ayeagld % Matygld “ Cerads * ylabptaaylle sala, bli © Ads) dy" cypheegaendd 8 yd 1 JBL age Je SS led * The Arroas islands. Mt. Parcelar is a well known land mark on the coast, lat. 2° 50’. + The Sholas or Marhatta traders ? t Chittagong, once a place of great trade. § Arrakan, lat. 20° 10’. || Probably Oyster island, a barren rock off Arracan, or St. Martin’s reef. q Probably Nardiel or Narkoldeap of Horsburgh, off the Tes Naaf entrance. ** Probably Mascall island. tt Cutub-deep, southof Chittagong. tt There are now no islands seaward of the Chittagong coast to which the sailing directions of Srpi will apply: but Lieut. Luoyp, of the Indian Navy, who has surveyed this line, informs us that there is a long shoal called ‘‘ the patch,’’ parallel with the coast, which is nearly dry at low water, and may have formed the islands of Zenjilia three centuries ago ; for there have evidently been great changes in these parts, even in the memory of our own navigators. 1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 467 you, your way lies N. N. W. When you approach this island, side to the sea, because its southern cape is rikk', that is to say, a shallow, and the colour of the water grows white; meanwhile, on the sea side it is seen green. Hold that course, and you'll find better soundings by degrees till you come to 17 and 18 fathoms. Coming to this place you find the water again whitish, these shallows are on the south side of Fesht Guri- dn, which is a desert place: here the sea is noisy, don’t keep either too near to the island of Zenjilia, nor too far from it, but steer a middle course ; if the soundings give 18 fathoms or near it, you have passed Zenjilia ; then you go in the direction of the north pole, and continue to take soundings till you come to seven fathoms ; from thence you steer in the direction of the north pole, and to the rising place of the g and y of the little bear, till your soundings are six fathoms but notless. So you come to cape Khir* which is Shdtijam. Here you stop till the rebban? (tide) come, with which you enter the port. Bengal is abundant in ivory and ebony; the finest muslin turbans, the very best judar’t, and most precious Indian stuffs come from thence; the finest muslin sashes are called malmal‘, and the most precious of them malmali-shahi, which by confusion is generally named marmare-shéhi (royal marble) ; there are also sea-bulls’, the best of them are found between Bengal and Delhi in the interior lake; they are called sea bulls, although they don’t live in the sea, but in the interior lakes on'the land; but the merchants call them so; for in the interior northern lakes, in the mountains of the Afghans, are also found the rhinoceros (Karkaddn*, the name quite the same as the Krokotos of Ctesias), but their horns are but two palms long; it is related that those which are found in Abyssinia have much longer horns. Girafes are found but in Abyssinia and never in India. TWENTY-NINTH VoyaGe, from Malacca to Aden. Starting from Malacca you go first along the coast till to the moun- tain Foliipdsalér’; there you take care of the above-mentioned bank’. This mountain is seen in the direction E. by S., and on some distance you see Folddjomar® ; after having left it behind you your direction is that of the north pole till you come to the islands Falisan- bilent, from thence you steer for some time N. N. W. till you come to the islands Firak'’§ and Yaflibotof''||, from thence W. by N. till to the island Nadjban’’, from thence W. by S. till the farkadain (g : 3, oy; ; ei lees: 8 Urbs : yl ASS , lal y gle 5 ert * po augls yas atiglsl 7 gual (Nicobars) * The word Khér used here and elsewhere seems a corruption of the Bengali term ‘hal, creek or estuary. + Choutar, a fine cloth, so called from its four threads. t+ Pulo Sambelan of the Straits. § Probably Pera on the Malay peninsula, or Penang? || Pulo Bouton. oP2 468 Memoir ona Map of Peshawar [Ave. and ¥ of the little bear) are made with a quarter less eight; from thence true west, Ceylon being in sight at the right; if you don’t see it, continue nevertheless your western course till to the Maldives, and from thence to W. N. W. siding a little to N. W. by W. till opposite Kardafin, and till the pole is made by four inches and an — from thence true west till you reach the land. TuirtietH Voyacs, from Shdtijim, (Chittagong,) that is to say, from Bengal to the Arabian coast. Sail at the end of the madd (flood), that is to say, when three quarters of it are passed, and go then with the ebb W. by 8. two zams, the soundings being six, seven and eight fathoms; weigh the anchor as soon as the flood sets in and go to the wind, weak or strong, till the ebb begins again one z4m W.S. W. then two zams N. W. The water grows then black, and you direct yourselves S. 5S. W. till the Farkadain are made with eight inches less a quarter, from thence true W. Ceylon being in sight on your right, you continue true W. till to the Maldives, and from thence to Kardaftin in the way above mentioned. The measure of the stars (the taking of the height) and the distance of the inches has been explained already. I].—Extracts translated from a Memoir on a Map of Peshawar and the country comprised between the Indus and the Hydaspes, the Peucelaotis and Taxila of ancient geography, by M. A. Court, in the service of Mahd-raja Ranjit Singh. I.—ON THE PROVINCE OF TAXILA. The space lying between the Indus and Hydaspes was first known to the Greeks under the name of Tazila: whether as its ancient local title, or one given by the soldiers of ALExanpeER from the town of the same name, afterwards its capital, is uncertain*. Srraso says that the * Col. WiLForp identifies the town of Taxila with the Tacsha-sila of Hindu ancient geography, of which the extensive ruins were supposed by ELPHINSTONE to be traced at Manikyala. The Tacsha Sdila or Syéla tribe are still numerous in the Panjab. They state, the former name of their city to have been Uda-ndgari. (As. Res. VIII. 42.) There is deposited in the Asiatic Socie- ty’s collection a large manuscript map of the Panjab compiled by Col. (then Lieut.) WitForp from the route and compass surveys of a native, Mirza Mo- GuL Bre, expressly instructed by himself and employed from 1786 to 1796, in travelling and collecting materials to illustrate an account of ALEXANDER’S pro- gress ; the account however does not seem ever to have seen the light, and it is pro- bable that the map has thus suffered oblivion. It is considerably fuller than M. Courr’s Sketch, and as might be expected from the Compiler’s learning, more correct in the orthography of names. We regret not having collated the two before lithographing M. Court’s map.—Eb. h) mee ee Vv Fash a Serai AL ahd, oo Sa Hipur Qt >, —— eee —— 7" 7 a ii 7/2" a vane = _ pe « | B es «t | Sih és 5 B * Kaka Bayba Berkhont hunkisty %) sigderbhane See Kidder pac aeas - en Afercdes ies Po Malis fioT ce A ales be } « Kwot ROUTE MAP of the Provinas Conprisig (algae opt Kattoks ue uar ieee Yariasscin — Monery © s a the ancient TAXILA and PEUCELAOTIS in lhe Pare b made from Compass warings dad Stages by A Cour ancien bléve de lBcole mnilidoure de Sauit- Cyr in 1826-1835 Te 2 injiide. Kor $0 tithe fayree UNpAginin oBdhiny TA Many ZN Byhour, Sable Muraferabid | Digrar Princh oy, Trill oo a 2 ayn hiF Fatisunj HAI Ari Ty cash Tips Ductiad acl | cary Kiva Jerse Pabey a Bulbul Pars Nanje Gila otk ee ne Ve Asinigark py Bund Mirpur * Mangitli is \ nKanddre® *- Dephahane Pi, z 1 igh hindene) yg Sala latineny mi «x. Kaltas em a ait sy Mayr) Andinabid, B ( cI Bert Pindaadenthon ff Kilanpur Ape = wee © Gundpur eg Pendle: » Pandy Areggur wd SAtiané eAtalvad: o Ana Kallisin | Lundds © 4 raticcnn ie a Fevrusoh dct jing Tonge from Greenwich Hild Va) Ha oedema = Hin Kateri | | Nifytupira Shonatuer® Golaited oKirvanvali Devadelnagar a Rec Fendel Bidiceur Fy esstdpun Lae , eae “0 Sindawila Aalek soe Ao Hera Ranivale: eee ohn | thet tert i opera Hage Kata 30 846 = oe / chenmd — oltella # SS 3 he hls oHneke ae : > Patan Gerry y Khenis Sa 2 Sioral o Pet a eg he es” = aynuiagas Fasrur | yy Atalarrh ———— JU Tassin’s 1th! Press. Cle tan. 1836.] and the ancient province of Taxila. 469 native kings assumed the name on mounting the throne; and we find in history ALExaNDER obliging Ompuis, who governed the country, to take the name of Taxizes. The appellation is quite unknown at the present day. It appears that the Greeks confined Taxila proper to the central part of the region between the Indus and the Hydaspes ; for when they passed it, the northern portion was ruled by chiefs independent of Ompuis, while the south was in open opposition to both ALEXANDER and his ally. The geographical limits of Taxila are well defined on the map, by the two rivers and the chain of Pérpanjal on the north ;—from this range to Koshdb on the south it measures 120 kos, with a breadth from Attok to the Jelim of 74 kos*. It seems probable that the original inhabitants were Hindus of the Pandava race, and Chandra-vansis. With these were amalgamated Persians, Scythians, and even Greeks; for the Ghékers, of whom so much has lately been written, I take to be the descendants of the Macedonian colonists ;—they themselves trace their ancestors to the Khaiani race of Persia, but the word seems but-a corruption of Greek. Taxila contains the traces of a number of ancient towns of which the origin is now unknown. Massive walls of stone masonry are seen, and in some places brick work of Babylonish dimensions. The inha- bitants call them the ruins of temples of Deva Nagarit or Sita-Rama. The most curious, however, are the mausolea, cupolas, or topes. In the northern provinces are found colossal statues of plaster, marble, and stone, most of which have been mutilated by the bigotry of the Muhammedans. Smaller idols are also occasionally dug up of superior execution: some I have remarked with frizzled hair. The ancient religion of the country was Buddhistic. The worship of Bacchus, or the Sun, prevailed at the time of ALExaNnprER, and traces of it are visible in the names of towns, as Surya, Sita, and Causalya; the sun, his daughter and mother (?)” _ The present inhabitants, being of so mixed an origin, betray striking varieties of character and manners. The Musulmans who border the Hydaspes resemble perfectly the Hindus of the Panjab,—while those on the east bank of the Indus have all the peculiarities of the Afghans, whence they are descended—an elegant figure, pleasing features, and vivacity of expression. They are loquacious like the Persians :—and though living in servitude, they retain their national pride, and submit * Col. WiLForp’s map states that the sos of this part of the country varies from 10 to 22 furlongs, probably 2 miles will be a fair average.—Eb. + Doubtless the Uda-ndgari of WiLrorp ; see note to page 468.—Ep, 470 Memoir on a Map of Peshdwar [Aue. only to the authority of their chiefs, with whom they live on terms of equality. ‘I have everywhere witnessed their courage and intrepi- dity, in their encounters with the Sikhs, on whose bayonets they rush sword in hand. Against the Hindus a fierce and implacable bigotry is kept up among them by their Mullas, whom they regard with super- stitious reverence. They retain many traits of hospitality : are blunt, coarse in manner, and devoid of the polish of the Persians. Their dress is a long shirt, blue turban and scarf, which serves the secondary pur- pose of a cloth to pray upon. Their women are allowed comparatively much liberty, but do not abuse it: they perform as usual the whole labour of the household, while the men are in the fields. Their houses are constructed of mud roofed with timber, and again covered with earth to keep off the rain. The tribes of the plains, having a fine fertile land, are in good circumstances; but those of the Putwar, Thenni, and Khibbi districts are sadly oppressed by the Sikhs. The mountain tribes along the west bank of the Hydaspes are in a half savage state. Most of them live only by plunder and robbery, and think as little of cutting a man’s throat as asheep’s. Travelling alone amongst them is most hazardous. «The language of Taxila proper is the Hindustani corrupted, which pervades the Panjab: in the north, Cashmerian ; and on the Indus the Pashtéi dialect, peculiar to the Afghan tribes. The Persian is little used, except among the informed classes. «The principal towns in the southern division are Rawel Pindi, Jélam, Pind-dadan Khan, Nillé, Fatehganj, Khibbi,and Makhade :—in the central division, Attok, Khampur, Iskanderpur and Noachir :—in the northern, Muzafferdbdd, Birrh, Pakkheli, and Kaka Bamba.” M. Covurr describes minutely the whole of these and other re- markable places, repeating under the head of Manikydla the account of his interesting operations upon the fopes there, which was published in the Journal for 1834. We have lithographed his sketch of the principal tope opened by M. Ventura and his ground-plan of the place (Plate XX VI.) to shew the situation of the numerous ruins with which it is studded, and which he considers to be the sepulchres of ancient kings. The following explanation refers to the figures on the plate :— 1. Chief Cupola explored by General Ventura, (J. A. S. 1834.) 2. Cupola whence were obtained the coins and relics described by M. Courr in the same Journal for 1834, p. 556. 3,4, 5, 6,7. Ruinous topes of which the foundations have been dug up. 8. Cupola in which M. Court found an urn enclosing a glass prism. 9. Cupola wherein was discovered a box containing a bit of ivory. 10. Small mound whence were dug up fragments of bronze images. 11. Cupola which contained an urn of baked clay. 1836.] and the ancient province of Taxila. 471 12. Square buildings attached to many of the Cupolas. 13. Tombs. 14, Mound from which were extracted many medals of copper and of caracoly (a compound of gold, silver, and copper.) f Pl. XX. represents what M. Courr denominates a ‘‘ symbole,” also found among the extensive ruins of this curious place. We donot find it particularly described, but, from the general appearance of the sculp- ture it may be regarded either as a Buddhist ora Mithraic monument— probably the frame of some picture or shrine of a temple: and it is peculiarly interesting from the collection of symbols in the upper horizontal line, almost all of which can be recognized as belonging to the series of ancient coins about which so much has been written. The jar, the swastica, the sun, the altar, and especially the penultimate object on the right hand, which is common on the Kadphises coins. All the country commanded by the elevated summit of Manikyala is much raised above the plain of the Panjab. It appears to have been anciently a vast plateau, that in the course of ages, from the gradual action of periodical rains combined with occasional earth- quakes, has been cut into deep ravines now difficult to traverse, which make it look like a heap of ruins. It is covered with villages, the inhabitants of which raise a thin and precarious crop on its very poor soil. The neighbourhood of the mountains is covered with a thorny and leafless jungle. The whole district is called Potwér ; it was formerly very populous, as at least testify the numerous ruins of old habitations. The villages are said to have run into one another, forming a continuous line for 16 kos from Manikydla to Tammidk. The mulberry and other fruit trees used to thrive in its gardens. The ruins of Ramma are at 13 kos S. S. W. from Manikydla: they are attributed to Sita Rami (?) Those of Parvala, traced to the time of the Pandavas, are on the north at 12 kos. At the latter place, in the gate of an old castle, is an inscription in an unknown character. Traces ofa very ancient town, Dangéli, are met with 14 kos towards the east: the inhabitants ascribe its origin to the Diws. It flourished under the Ghiker sovereigns, who resided there. Makkyala near Kattas, Benda and Pakhi were also Ghiker towns. The modern town of Bégram is five kos lower down than Dangeli. It is now inhabited by Chandra-vansis, who are descended from the former rajas of the country. In the neighbourhood of Jelim (a modern town of the Peruzan zemindars) are the extensive ruins of another castle perched on the top of an artificial mound, where very old Hindu medals are found. 472 Memoir on a Map of Peshdwar [Aue. The inhabitants assert that a city surrounded it called Bidad-nagar, which through the wickedness and cruelty of the raja was destroyed by an earthquake,—a fact borne out by the appearance of the mound. This hillock had been in generations past dug up in search of coins and relics. The walls were of brick, very massive and large: there were two or three reservoirs and some wells within the enclosure, one built of stone. The Cashmerians for twenty-five years have been in the habit of digging here,. nominally for bricks, but evidently from their eagerness they have fallen upon more valuable spoil : the chief of Jelim has several times confiscated pots of copper and silver coins thus dug up. The greater part of these have a horseman on one side and a bull on the other*. At one time a number of squared blocks of red granite were dug up, anc some door posts which have been since converted into objects of worship by some Udasi fagirs on the banks of the Hydaspes. One of them is sketched in fig. 2 of Pl. XX, and is seen to be the door post of a Hindu templet. The fellow of it is set up at Khallih, three kos N. N. W. of Jelim, by some Ben-bdba fagirs. M. Court imagines this spot to have been the site of Bucephalia; and he would fix Nicea at Patti-kuti near Vessa, three kos E. of Jelim. In his opinion Jelim and Aurangabad} are the only positions in which two numerous armies could have encamped to dispute the passage of the river. Moreover, not a vestige of an ancient town is to be found on the west bank of the Hydaspes from Kala Mangala to Darapur, except at Sultdnpur, where the river debouches from the hills. In face of this spot is the fortress of Kala Mangala, attributed to Raja Sarwan. The opposite bank is too broken for Porus to have manceuvered his cha- riots. Below Sultdénpur, at the small hill of Bariti, the inhabitants assert a bridge of boats formerly existed. Two kos further down, at Menar, are seen the remains of a castle of very great antiquity: the river once washed its walls, but has now retired half a league. It is accounted the customary place of crossing the river in former days. * This description is insufficient to determine whether they are of the Azos group, or whether of the Rajput series ; but as they are called above, Hindu, we presume the latter must be the case; and this will account for the large quantity of these coins procured by Keramar Axi and Mowan Lat in the Panjéb. It may also account for the inscription Syd/apati on one series of them—‘‘ lord of the Sydlas,’’ whom Col. Winrorp fixes as the people of Taxila, (see above.) —Ep. + Capt. Burnes describes a fluted pillar witha capital very like the Corinthian order shewn to him by M. Courr. He says also, that the inscription on the slab was in the Arabic character. Travels, i, 58.—Eb. t Erroneously written Uzengabad on the map:—and Morungabad of Wi1- ¥wORD.—Ep. 1836.] and the ancient province of Taxila. ee Ya: M. Court recognizes the place of ALuxaANpER’s passage at Khili- patan, where is still the principal ford. It is five kos from Jelim, the Bucephela of our informant: agreeing with the passage in history, ‘«‘ ALEXANDER wishing to pass the Hydaspes, ascended four leagues higher up than where he had encamped, and there crossed his army at an island which facilitated the passage.’ This island is the one in face of Khilipatan, for at the village of Gitcali the river divides into two branches, one running towards Jelam, the other towards Suk- chandpur. They enclose a large plain of cultivable ground. The western branch is only fordable in November, December, and January: it divides again into two branches at Kiilipatan, thus forming several large islands, the largest being two leagues long by one broad :—the river beds are pebbly, and the current strong. The plain continues for four kos up to the ruins of Patti Koti; and here, doubtless, ALEXANDER must have had his encounter with Porvus’ son, and with that prince himself, who came to his aid. All that Puurarcu says of the passage and of the towns founded by ALExAN- DER, tallies well with the above explanation. The celebrated fortress of Rotas, now unworthy of regard in a military view, presents little beyond Muhammedan tombs and mosques in its ruins. Thereare, however, Hindu medals found there, but the particular class is not mentioned. Pind-ddden Khan, a modern commercial town, is the great mart for the rock salt of the mountains on the west, now monopolized by Rawn- sit Sincu*. Other ruins of an ancient town, Gagirakhi, extend along the banks of the Hydaspes from near Jeldlpur to Ddrapur. On leav- ing the district of Pind-dadan Khan by the route which traverses the salt range, the site of an Indian annual pilgrimage occurs, called Kattas. Here again are the traces of an old town ascribed to the Pandavas, where are found small images of a red stone, holding in their hand the ¢oppa of the Persians,—a species of iron club which would appear to have been a weapon of offence formerly in use. ALEXANDER was wounded by one in his attack on the fort of the Malli. The district of Thenni bordering upon that of Pind-dddan is famous for its breed of horses and mules. After passing Chekuvdl, Nilli and Dula on the Sudan river, a ruined castle is pointed out where the sovereigns of old used to keep their treasure. Medals are here found * See the description by Burnes in his Travels, vol. i. 52, and in the Journ. As. Socy. ii. 365.—Eb. 3Q 474 Memoir on a Map of Peshiwar [Ave. in the ruins. The whole country is indeed remarkable for the number of antique ruins it presents: the most striking are those of Tatta and Ris : those of Kounda are attributed to raja Hono (?). At Jend, 12 kos from Khébbi, towards Kushdlgarh is a small gold- washing. Fatehganj, a very old town, is remarkable for its sulphureous springs : Hassan Abddl, for its picturesque situation and pure waters: the remains of a palace built by Axzer here are still visible: it is on the high road from Attok to Lahdr. Of these places it is unnecessary to speak, as they have been fully described by Burnes and other travellers ; nor have we space to extract M. Court’s notes on Khanpir, Skanderpir, Naucher, &c. Near the former place General Venrura opened several cupolas, and a large one at Pdhler was explored by the native chief. Of the district of Pakhéri, called by Forster Pukholi, this author would make Peucelaotis of the Greeks. This M. Covrr refutes, plac- ing it (as noted in the memoir published last month) near Bajore (Bazira of the Greeks) on the west bank of the Indus. We must also take but a very cursory view of M. Court’s remarks on the physical geography of Taxila, hoping to see the whole pub- lished ere long in the Paris Journal, with the advantage of the com- ments of savans acquainted with the ancient history of the province. The mountainous tract to the north of the district boasts the boldest and most romantic scenery. It is the link between the Pirpanjal range and the Hindu-koh. In the winter months there are but two or three passes practicable for foot passengers, and that with much hazard. Parallel ranges of less elevation occupy the southern face of the principal mountain ridge for a space of 40 to 60 kos, forming between them the successive valleys of Kakabamba, Pakkhéri, and Mozafferabdd. Detached and irregular mountains and ridges cross the main chains at various angles, or form insulated groups, as is shewn on the map. There seem to be two principal lines of upheave- ment, which it would be abundantly curious to examine geologically on the principle of contemporaneous origin of parallel ridges started by M. Exiz pe Beaumont. The most interesting lines are the metalli- ferous hills N. W. of the Hydaspes, in general low, savage and uncul- tivated, but richin ores. Ferruginous, sulphureous and saline springs are plentiful, but are not now turned to more use than the mines, which were apparently worked in former times. The Hydaspes for- merly paid tribute in the gold of its own tributary streams. The Pind- dadan chain has abundance of iron. At Karengéli near Kattas are mines of antimony :—in the Guirih range, native sulphur : near Makhodi, na- tive alum: and at Pind-didan, the salt mines before mentioned. 1836.] and the ancient province of Tazila. 475 The vault of the large salt mine fell in shortly after the visit of M. Jacquremont. The section shews well the position of the salt, which is, in fact, a solid rocky mass : towards the upper part it divides into veins of white and red :—the latter are preferred ; the former contain- ing lime and gypsum. The western mine is greater in depth, but less extensive than the other. 250 steps were counted before reaching its focus :—the shafts were only wide enough for one person to pass at a time, each carry- ing a flambeau. The excavation is divided into two vaults ; one is now abandoned, being cut away to a dangerous precipice. The lamps rendered the air and heat nearly insufferable when Messrs. Wave and Murray visited it in company with M. Covrr. On the surface of this chain are scattered large blocks of gypsum, worn as if by the action of the sea. Some yellow slates are also seen. Vegetation is confined to saline plants and a few thorny bushes. Of the Indus and Hydaspes sufficient is already known. Danvitir has fallen into an error in making the former pass by Hashtnagar, which lies on a small tributary called the Jind. The climate of Taxila embraces extremes, from the healthy bracing cold of the snowy mountain to the excessive heats of the southern plains. ‘The soil of the southern portion for want of water, as well as from the presence of salt, is little adapted for cultivation, and the vil- lages are consequently very scant. In the beautiful valleys to the north, however, plentiful springs and a rich soil produce the opposite effects of fertility and a dense population ; but agriculture is neglected through the oppression of the Government. The perpetual verdure of the hills to the north affords abundant pasturage for cattle. II.—ON THE PROVINCE OF PESHA’WAR™. Peshdwar, the city, supposed by some geographers to be Peu- celaotis, of the Greeks, is said by its inhabitants to be built upon the ruins of the ancient Baghram. In dimensions it certainly much sur- passes Cdbul, but its suburbs and the number of gardens which extend southward, contribute towards this apparent magnitude. Its houses are slightly built of brick or mud, held together by wooden frame work. This mode of building has, perhaps, been adopted on account of the earthquakes, which are frequent, but seldom very serious. The houses are generally provided with Sard-khdnas, a description of cellar or underground room, where the inhabitants spend the day, to avoid the * In this part of the translation, which follows the original more closely than the foregoing, we are indebted to the same fair hand, to which we were beholden on a former occasion,— Ep. 3a 2 476 Memoir on a Map of Peshdéwar [Ave. intense and scorching heat of their summer. ‘The streets are narrow and irregular, and present every where the most uncleanly aspect. A large bazar runs across from east to west, commencing from the Serait Gaur katra, and terminating at the fortress of Balasir. A stream which draws its waters from the river of Bahréh, crosses the town from south to north, and would very much facilitate the establishing of fountains, if the Asiatics only knew the use and advantage of them. The population of Peshawar may be rated at 80,000 souls, consisting of Afghans, Kashmerians, and Indians. The latter appear to have been its primitive inhabitants ; but although they are still very numerous, they live in dependence on the Mahomedans, and are oppressed by heavy taxation, (taxés d’avanies.) All the com- merce of the country is in their hands. From Cabul, raw silk, worsted, cochenille, jalap, manna, asafcetida, saffron, resin, simples, and both fresh and dried fruits—all which are generally exported to India, from whence they receive in return, cambric, silks, indigo, sugar, and spices. To Cashmir the exports are gold sequins, gold and silver thread and lace, in transit from Bokhara; and the return, shawls, tea, and Persian manuscripts. They exchange the salt of the Kohat range with the rock crystal and the iron of Bijdwar: this last district, as also those of Sawat and Bunir, offer a ready market for the sale of their tissues of cotton ;—the trades and arts of the town are limited to mere necessaries of life, and are principally carried on by the Cash- merians, The Hindustani is generally spoken, also the Pashtu ; the use of the Persian language becomes nearly extinct on entering this province. Peshdwar musters about 40,000 horse, a thousand foot soldiers, and twelve pieces of cannon. The troops are very irregular, and are badly paid. The climate of the province is not very healthy. Fevers are very prevalent from the summer solstice to the end of autumn, at which period they generally prove fatal. They are brought on by excess in the eating of fruits, or by the unwholesome exhalations and vapours, rising from the rivers of the Duab. The irrigation necessary for the cultivation of the Turkish corn in May, may contribute to en- gender fever, the heat of the air being then very intense. The in- habitants, ignorant of the superior properties of quinine, make use of a very bitter plant which grows on the banks of their streams. In 1835 I was encamped in this country with the French brigade, 10,000 strong, when we lost by these fevers upwards of a thousand men. Great inconvenience is also here experienced from swarms of flies, which prevent any nourishment being taken during the day ; for if 1836.] and the ancient province of Tavila. 477 any of them be swallowed with the food, they occasion a vomiting, attended with very severe pain in the loins and in the chest. Snakes and scorpions are also in great abundance, and are often venomous. The spring sets in early: by the end of February the peach trees blossom luxuriantly; by the end of April the weather becomes un- pleasant ; and the heat is scorching during the months of June, July, and August. In June the Simum prevails; it is sometimes pestilential, resembling the desert blast (Samial) of Arabia. When it blows, one would fancy that one stood at the entrance of a hot oven. ‘‘ Heaven pity then,” the poor traveller, who is overtaken by this wind at mid- day in the open country! When first attacked the body becomes covered with blue spots, and putrefaction is almost instantaneous. This wind generally blows from W. N. W., in the direction of Jeld- laébdd, where it is frequently fatal. The hot season ends in September. ” The rains are heavy in the winter, when the sky is frequently clouded for a week together. There are intervals of rain also in April, but rarely. In July and August, the rainy season in India, little falls in these parts, but storms are very frequent, and very severe, and are always preceded by whirlwinds of dust, obscuring the atmosphere for hours together ; they are brought on by the S. W. winds, and are accompanied by claps of thunder in rapid succession. The lightning falls with fearful flashes. The environs of Peshawar exhibit little else but a vast space covered with ruins and tombs. I discovered and dug out several remains of Indian statues. These statues, some of which are in plaister, others in bronze, appear to be of very ancient date, for they are devoid of beauty and are ill executed. They principally represent Gawraknathi fagirs, or perhaps Jogis, who for a long time held the country west of the Indus. The image represented (in Plate XX VI.) was dug out of the village of Banamari, which lies west of Peshawar. Ata greater dis- tance are the ruins of Pirigel, where in the rains Indian and Bactrian medals are to be found. To the west of Peshawar is a mount upon which an ancient castle appears, which may be the one that Hupuas- TIoN besieged, and which was re-established by Timour Suau, and was subsequently sacked by the Sikhs. The Sikhs again re- built it in 1834, when this province fell into the hands of Ranygit SinGH, in consequence of a victory gained over the Afghans by the division under my command. The gardens which stretch from the south to the west of the town present the appearance of a forest of orchards, where they cultivate the plum, the fig tree, the peach, the pear, the mulberry peculiar to this country, the pomegranate, and the quince: but these fruits, although beautiful to the eye, are very far 478 Memoir on a Map of Peshéwar [Ave. from having equal flavour with those produced in the south of France. The grape is only cultivated at the village of Shekh Imadm Mehdi. Peshawar is situated in the middle of a vast plain, which stretches towards the N. E., and which is twenty-five kos in length from the east to the west, and fifteen in breadth from the south to the north. The mountains of the Kattiuks, and the Afrédis bound it to the east, and those of Kohat on the south. To the west it is bounded by the mountains of the Kheibars, and to’ the north the river of Nagumdn separates it from the districts of the Dudb and of the Yusafzais. This plain is crossed by the river Bahreh, which has its source on the southern side of the Koh-suféd, crossés the Kheibars, enters this district at A’lam-gijar, and after‘a short passage empties itself into the Nagumdn, seven kos east of Peshawar. Without it the district would be nothing but a bar- ren desert. From June to September the river is dried up by the many drains made to irrigate the cotton plantations and the barley fields. The principal water-courses strike off at the village of Serband, and are divided lower down into an infinity of lesser ones, which give asto- nishing fertility to the soil of this district, and promote the cultivation of rice, which is principally sown in the village of the Mdshturzais, and is much prized by the inhabitants of Afghdnistdn, and the Pan- jab. The river Nagumdn, which I presume is no other than the Malamantus of the Greeks, formerly ran to the west of Peshawar, and you may still trace its bed near the ruins of Rasheki. It appears that some sovereign of the country must have changed its course, in order to fertilize the land of the Mumunds, which extends to the south of the town. This tribe, as well as that of the Kaleels who in- habit the west, have often bloody contentions for the water. The districts of the Daidzais and of Kalessa are watered by the canal of Budeni, led from the same river of Nagumdn; its waters are so favorable to vegetation, that grass grows on its banks to the height of a full grown man. The territory of Peshdwar is, generally speaking, most fertile, rivallmg the best in Europe if it were but well administer- ed. The harvest is gathered in the summer, and again in autumn. That of the summer yields an abundance of barley and corn,—that of the autumn several kinds of maize, rice, oil seeds, arid abundance of cotton, which provides the inhabitants with a species of manufacture suited tothe climate. Wood is procured in great scarcity from the surrounding mountains, on which very little grows. This country on every side presents to the view ruins of ancient tewns, of the very origin of which the natives are ignorant. The most striking are those of Khohusser, more commonly known by the name of the Takkal, where are the vestiges of three massive 1836. ] and the ancient province of Taxila. 479 cupolas, of very ancient date. Not far from thence are the ruins of Rachekhi. Further off the remains of the town of Jamrud may be observed at the entrance of the defile of the Khetbar mountains. The route from Peshdiwar to Michin¢é betrays signs of old habitations at Pirbala and Pessank. The road to Kohdt presents also the remains of Boulidana, which may possibly be Embolima of AtexanpeER. Quite close to this, Deliter may be seen; and further off, at the entrance of the defile of the Kohdts, are the rus of Kargan, Akor, Zendin; and in the districts of the Mamunds may be also seen those of Aspinagar, Bassevanan, and Ormiil. The province is divided into six districts; namely, the Kaleels to the west, the Mimunds to the south, the Déivdzais, the Dudd to the north, the Kalissa to the east, and that of Hashtnagar to the north-east. These several districts yield a revenue of eight lakhs of rupees, without including the cantons of Mohdt and Lachiteri, which bring near two additional lakhs. The district of Kohdt is inhabited by the Bungeish, and is celebrated for the beautiful springs of limpid water which meet at the foot of the surrounding mountains. A coal mine exists in this territory, but the inhabitants derive but small profit from it. A mine of sulphur is also to be found there, but it is not worked; and some petroleum wells or mineral tar, which the inhabitants use to light up their dwellings. Adjoining to this pergannah are the districts occupied by the Theris, and beyond this is the province of Banitdk. The district of the Dudb is so called, because it is enclosed between the two rivers of Nagumdn and Jindi. It is very fruitful in rice and sugar-cane, and abounds in beautiful and fertile meadows. It is inhabited by the tribe of the Gigianees. In the district of the Abdzais are the ruins of Gound, but their origin is not known. Still further in the direction of Teagi is the isolated mountain of Azarneh, which might well be supposed to be the Aornus, the conquest of which was one of ALEXANDER’s most brilliant exploits. The fortress of Hissdr is only ten kos to the N. E. of Peshdwar: it is situated three kos from the river of Nagumén, in an island formed by two branches of the river Jind, which flows from the outskirts of Sawdt and Bajd- war. This fortress is conspicuously raised on a small artificial hill. At its foot are extensive ruins of an ancient town, apparently founded by idolaters, and upon which is built the actual town of Hashtnagar, a name meaning the seven towns*. Our geographers * Hashtnagar, meaning eight towns. The whole eight are named on Wi.Lrorp’s map.—Ep, 480 Memoir on a Map of Peshawar [Aue. think that this town is the same as Massaga, the capital of the Assaceni, but 1am more inclined to think that it is the Nysa of the Greeks. Its proximity to the Cophenes, and above all what Piv- TARCH states as said by AtExanpeER to his Macedonians, when they objected to fording the river on account of its depth, corroborate my conjecture. The inhabitants of the Duab, and those of the mountains of the Mourmards, appear to me to be the Assaceni, who were employed by ALexanveER in building the vessels, in which they sailed down the Cophenes as far as Taxila. To the N. E. of Hashtnagar is the mountain of Behhi standing alone on a vast plain, and close to it are the ruins of an ancient castle which is attributed to Rajya Varrah, and which, according to the traditions of the inhabitants, was the dwelling of the ancient sovereigns of this country. There are also some basso-relievos, and the traces of an aqueduct by which the waters were carried to the river Jind. This aqueduct commences at the ruins of Raji, which are situated nearly opposite Hashtnagar. Further off in the district of the Babi- zais, on another mountain, are the massive ruins of another fortress, ~ which can only be reached by means of a path cut through the rock. It goes by the name of Peli. Three days’ journey north of Hashtnegar are the districts of Sawdt and Bunir, where are the ruins of Gerira, Bonsekhan, Zakut, and Chim- kor. Near the latter are four massive cupolas of the same kind as those of Mantkyala. The small river Panjkori traverses the district, and joins the Jindi. It is much to be regretted that travellers do not visit with more minuteness this portion of the country, as they might, were they to do so, gain positive information as to the march of ALEXANDER on the banks of the Indus. It is in these districts that Birset, the Vizier of AksEr, perished with a whole army. The inha- bitants have, we are told, cut a road through the rugged rocks, leading to the north, by means of which they communicate with the Tartar tribes of Kashgar and others. All that tract of country lying to the east of Hashtnagar is inhabited by the tribe of the Yusufzais. The Indus forms the eastern boundary of this district, and Landeh on the river Nagumdn its southern. To the north are the mountains of Panjitar and Shemla. According to some historians, the province of the Yusufzais is the same as the Taxila of ALEXANDER, where the king Ompuis reigned, whose fidelity and devotion facilitated to ALEX- ANDER the conquest of the Indus. But, according to other historians, and more especially in the opinion of Piurarcu, the real Taxila was that country enclosed between the Indus and the Hydaspes. 1836.] and the ancient province of Tasila. 481 The province of the Yusufzais is divided into eleven tappas—viz : Principal Towns. Pee kavons Sedu-zais, Hound. Ppas.-- -+-+-+ 1 Otuman-zais, Toppi. Keder-zais, Khiva. Mamu-zais, Nohdéh. Five tappas, Rezers.. ¢ Malek-zais, Yar-hosein. 4 | Akukhels, Ismaila. L Mani-zais, Toulandi. Two tappas, Amazais. ae \ Kapurdigarbi. ; Kamal-zais, Otti. Two tappas, Kamalzais. ieamaliears. Tard, All these districts are governed by independent chiefs, who live in the greatest dissension. There are no taxes established, and each in- habitant rents, cultivates, and reaps the produce of his grounds, paying only a small sum as tribute to the chief of the district. It is only since 1822 that the Maharaja of Lahore succeeded by the force of arms in levying five rupees on every house and a certain number of horses, with which they are obliged to furnish him annually. The tribe of the Yusufzais is one of the most powerful in Afghanistan. It has always been remarkable for the independence it has preserved, and for some time it resisted the attacks of the Mogul kings, and even Napir Suan himself, who never thoroughly succeeded in subjugating it. The people of this tribe are vigorous, active, turbulent, and have given proofs of extraordinary courage in the wars which they have had to sustain against the Sikhs. When public danger is threatened, all the districts suspend their own quarrels, and gather together to make common resistance. Each one provides himself with weapons at his own expense, and volunteers as a soldier under the banner of his chief. This soil is extremely fertile in every kind of grain, yielding a plen- tiful harvest of maize, beans, peas, cotton, oil seeds, and excellent tobacco. The mountains towards the north afford excellent pasture for all kinds of cattle. The province contains no town, properly so called, but it is embellished by large and populous villages : the prin- cipal one amongst themis Kapardigarhi, standing in the midst of the ruins of a very ancient town, which might very possibly be the Caspa- tyrus of the Greeks, the capital of the Gand&éri, whom our geogra- phers place to the east of the Assaceni on the western bank of the Indus. Quite close to this village I observed a rock on which there are inscriptions almost effaced by time, and out of which I could only decipher the following characters. (See Inscription 5, of Plate XXVII.) Further off, on the opposite side of the mountain of Koh-ganga, are 3R 482 Facsimiles of ancient Inscriptions. [Aue. the ruins of an ancient town, which is attributed to a heathen race; and quite close to that is the village of Bazar, now inhabited by the Kamaizais. Not far from thence is another very extensive ruin, where several remains of statues have been found*. In the land of the Yusufzais also are the ruins of Motina near Yar-hosein; those of Gagriand Shirkand near Ismailia ; Kirkand near Mayar, in the district of Otti ; Kaleder near the stream of Kalapdni ; Mashari-Banda, on the river Landeh; and Pélusseddn, opposite Messa. Besides these ruins the country is covered with an immense quantity of small artificial hills, on which there are remains of ancient dwellings, and where, in the rains, Indian, Bactrian, and Indo-Scythian medals may be found. Near Panjitar are the ruins of Nogiran, where there are inscriptions in the same character as those noticed above. In the district of Shemla, which is further to the north, we remark those of Ndgari, where basso-relievos may be seen. On the banks of the Indus are the ruins of Péhour, Toppt, Hound, and Mahmedpur, of which I have already spoken. The river Landeh or Nagumdn sepa- rates the Yusufzais fromthe province of Katiiks. This country is very mountainous, and contains mines of sulphur, salt, springs of naphtha, and many slate quarries. It is inhabited by the tribe of the Kattuks and the Aferidis, intrepid mountaineers, who often intercept the route from Attok to Peshéwar. Their chief towns are Nizampur and Sirri in the interior, and Akhoreh on the right bank of the Nagu- mdn. This last town may be presumed to be the Ora of Arrian. If this be the case, the inhabitants of the mountains of the Katiiks are descendants of the Assacent. The province of the Kattuks is divided from that of Kohat by the district of Lachitri. I11.—Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions, lithographed by Jas, Prinszp, Secy. &c. [Continued from page 349.] Pl. XXVI. 1.—Asirgarh inscription. This inscription, for the knowledge of which I am indebted to the antiquarian zeal of Dr. J. Swiney, has been in the possession of Dr. Meuuisu since the year 1805, when, according to a memoran- dum on the original drawing, it was copied from a wax impres- sion of a seal found at Asirgarh by Captain Co.esrooxg, of the Engineers. By the three notes in pencil at the top, (which I have * We have lithographad in Pl. XXVI. a bronze head dug up probably at this place by M. Courr.. It bears a Sans¢rit inscription.—Eb. : a ; aeense & Poti € thent® A: Courd. Yaa ea i nm , ul Li ty SiS ‘ 2 Ks : piles : i, Piel os Hii) at pip wel Nai eh ‘ i ! i f b i re ss igo path: ‘ t Oy err i " 7 We i ot | sea ARUP Nite i i fee —_ 2 = == Wis ay Hf " al H ph aa rT a NSE A H : a mir7or Zs bncil (LBs NTT R ae = at Llc CP TS TirsitC = Ne «> # » : es ; hie ot Ae ise) eee i d fo) 1836. ] Facsimiles of ancient Inscriptions. 483 inserted), it would appear that the seal was surmounted by three series of figures, probably cast in bronze: viz. in the centre, Nandi the bull, with a state chatta over him, and supporters on either side, bearing, the one, a chatta and axe; the other a sceptre and axe. The inscription, hitherto undecyphered, is at once seen to belong to the old form of Deva-ndgari, now grown familiar to us; and I am indebted to the Rev. Dr. Miu, for the subjoined transcript in the modern character, as well as for the translation of the text, and remarks on the same. From the absence of a date it is not easy to assign a certain posi- tion to the five distinct successions which it embraces ; though, from the locality of the inscription in a fort of Khandésh immediately south of Mdlwa, as well as from the termination of the names in Varma, they may be assigned with some probability to the Ujjayani dynasty ; where, in the twelfth century, we find Naravarma, YasuvarMa, and three other Varmas recorded as having reigned. No one of these names, however, accords with any of the present list ; neither does the modern Nagari of their inscriptions, of which Colonel Top has published fac- similes, at all resemble the seal character, which is evidently of a much more ancient date. Itis customary, also, in Hindu records of this nature, to commence with the reputed ancestor of the race; but we find no allusion to VicramApirya or Buosa in the present instance, and must either suppose our seal anterior to these illustrious person- ages—or unconnected with Ujjayant. Itis certainly possible thata petty raja might have maintained independence for a few reigns in his hill fort, claiming descent from the unknown Hari-varna; but itis un- likely that he should have assumed the lofty title of Mahdrdjadhiraja. The twice recorded matrimonial connection with the Gupta family is also worthy of remark, as it may possibly have reference to the Canouj dynasty, whose coins have lately excited so much interest. The style of alphabet affords strong evidence of their contemporaniety. Transcript of the Asirgarh inscription in modern Deva-ndégari. Staal amrAa ea: TATU MTAAATIST: WHITATT SIT ACIS AANAVATITT AA SCA MSICIASCaa A grairegaifasa: AMAT ARS MGAA: MASAI waa qa qaafueqenrfasar TAA AANA: FASC BACT TA qaufaequattai TAMAS HIATT ASIST STA ax. ficra Tet yaumequitacty Ail WITATA STAT: FAST a SICA MUIARAATH SAT: | 32 Ont nann PWD = 484 Facsimiles of ancient Inscriptions. [Aue. Translation. ‘‘He whose glory was transcendent by reason of his four great goods*,—before whose splendour other kings bowed, sickened with envy,—who was ever occupied in the juridical decisions of learned Munies dwelling in leafy hermitages,—whose crooked ramparts were alike bright and impenetrable,—who was the spoiler of all such as were vexed with peace,—(such was) the great king Hari-varman. His son, whose excellent victories equalled those of his father, born of his noblet wife ANxa-pE’vi’, was the great king A’pITYA-VARMAN. His son again, whose exceeding joys equalled those of his father, born of Arixa’ri’{, eldest daughter of the Gupta race, was the great king I’svaRA-vARMAN. His son, whose magnificence equalled that of his father, born of Arixa‘rr’, eldest daughter of the Guptas, was the great king of kings R. Sryua-varman. His son, possessed of like exceed- ing joys with his father, born of Bua’ra Ka’ma-wart’, was the chief of the excellent lion-rulers, the great king of kings KHarva-vaRMAN, our worthy Lord.” It is observable—that the title of Raja-adhiraja, or king of kings— is here, as in the Allahabad inscription, restricted to the two last of the line of succession—viz. SinHA-VARMAN, and Kuarva-varMan. I do not understand the simple letter R. prefixed to the former name, (viz. at with a dot preceding and following)—unless it be an abbrevia- tion for Raja: nor am I quite sure of the three letters following the last name, which I have made Syt: W. H. M. Inscription on a bronze image from Peshdwar. The head depicted in Plate XXVI. is copied from a sketch in M. Court’s memoir and collection of drawings, from which extracts are published in the present and in the preeeding Journal, (see p. 482.) The characters are decidedly Deva-nagari, but whether from their indistinctness, or from errors in the copying, or from the language being different, their combination does not form any intelligent Sanscrit sentence. * i. e. Religious duty, way; wealth, ayy; pleasure, ara; eternal salvation, Ha. Such are the four Bhadras or goods according to the Hindus. Amera Cosha, ii. 7, § 3, sl. 57. If, however, for teqayxR we read Wax with PREMA-CHAND Pandit, the translation will be, ‘‘ He whose glory transcended the bounds of the four encircling oceans,’’—W. H. M. + The ordinary honorific epithet Srimati is here, contrary to the usual rule, introduced into the compound in the feminine gender. Regularly it should either be the crude form Srimat, or the locative case feminine Srimatyam.—W. H. M. t The recurrence of the same name and description is singular. It is impos- sible that they should be the same person, such incest being unknown even to the heroic age of India.— W. H. M. 1836.) Facsimiles of ancient Inscriptions. ' 485 The head has its hair gathered in a knot after the fashion of the Hindu devotees, and it is bound together by a triple-headed snake of the cobra species—an ornament not uncommon to Jain figures, but rarely seen in the simple head of Buddha. The ears seem to be lengthened and split, in the style of the Kanphati sect ; but the draw- ing may also be viewed as of earrings in ears of the natural dimen- sions. Pl. XXIX.—Inscriptions on Kemaon Tridents. On the right hand side of Plate XXIX. is depicted the bronze trident at Barahét in Garhwdl, reduced from the large native drawing presented to the Society by Mr. Commissioner Trait, last winter. The inscription on the shaft was published as No. 2 of Plate IX. with a translation and explanation by our Vice-President, Dr. Mitt. The copper letters being in relief from the shaft were taken off in facsimile. The same plan, Mr. Trarut says, did not answer with the trident at Gopésvara, although the ancient letters on its shaft are soldered on in the same manner.—The copy taken by the eye of a native draughtsman is unfortunately too incorrect to be legible: but the form of many of the letters shews clearly that this inscription is of the same age as that of Barahat. . On the upper part of the trident are three or four short inscriptions in the modern Dev4-nagari. These, Mr. Trait says, are cut into the metal. Three of them are illegible, or rather appear to be in some other language. One only is in Sanscrit; but in this also several errors have been committed by the transcriber. With the assistance of the Society’s pandit I am able to present it in a complete form :— it contains a name—the grand desideratum in such cases ; though too often, as in the present instance, it turns out to be a name unknown to fame! The verse is in the accustomed Sdrdila Vikridita measure, so often mentioned by Dr. Mizz. It opens with the invocation dum Svasti. Vv afa il war fefang aeray asiearadaifaat tr: aaeiag* wacifaMugaralaara |! Ware sfatiy ag fasraaa a fast aarSe Gasfatran fe weal ya AAA FA: | ‘ The illustrious Prince Anix Maun, having extended his conquests on all sides, brought together (quere, humbled or made low) upon this * The proper grammatical reading would be Zaeata 486 Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Remains > (Aue. holy spot sacred to Mahadeva, under the emblem of a pillar, the very sovereigns of the world whom his prowess had overcome ;— « And thus having re-established this same pillar of victory, he acquired reputation. It is a pious act to raise up a worthy foe when he has been humbled.” ‘ Parcere subjectis et debellare superbos’ seems to be the sentiment here inculcated ; and it is probable that the allegory of overthrowing and restoring enemies, alludes to the taking down the pillar (which may have been done to cut the new inscription) and its restoration, by some raja who had penetrated thus far in a successful expedition. The name of Matt occurs as a patronymic in more than one dynasty of Nipal. It is not impossible, therefore, that the name here written Antik Matt, may be the same as the Anya Matt of the Neverit race, who reigned in that valley about the year 1195 A. D. according to Kirxpatrick’s Sketch. ‘Anya, which is without meaning, should probably be written ANr’k. IV.—Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Remains of the Dadupur Collection. By Lieuts. W. E. Baxeur, and H. M. Duranp, Engineers. [We should be wanting both in candour and courtesy, were we not to point out to the reader, tbat the plates accompanying the present paper were furnished by our zealous contributors, and their esteemed commandant Col. Corvin. [n despair of the difficulty and expence of executing so many plates in Calcutta, it occurred to us that the same pens aad pencils which could produce such neat ori- ginal drawings, could, if provided with the requisite materials, furnish engravings and lithographs ready executed for our Journal. We accordingly dispatched some yellow paper, and a copper plate, by dik, to Dadupur ; and these are the first fruits. If not quite perfect, it should be remembered that the transfers had to travel 1,000 miles in the height of the rains ere they could be secured on the stone—and that the copper-plate, with its waxed and etched surface, had to be bitten by the acid after its arrival in Calcutta. The wonder is, that they should have turned out so well! We anticipate much greater success here- after. —Ep.] RHINOCEROS. The manner in which the organic remains of the Sub-Himalayas were at first deposited, and that in which they have been subsequently disinterred, have necessitated a system of search more favorable to the acquisition of specimens than to the accurate description of the localities in which they occurred. Hitherto the fossils were in general found widely scattered over the surface and throughout the ravines of the calcareous sandstone formation ; a dispersion which rendered glean- ing from the hill surfaces preferable to excavation at any one place, affording the certainty of a larger number and greater variety of spe- i Burn. As.Soc. Vat. Vi PLOT Brom the wax-tmprefsvon fa Seal found atlsti- gar, taken bf Capi. Cove prooke in 1805: preserved sy Dr. Merrisn. asqusifaie yen wa euyag US YBAUGEOAIYRSTA | | VETE DIA A Ay HAHALIEAEN SHAT Phe DAH OTELSA eres sais 512 afiumf Egiahayy ny YAH SLsy T3WOHTE ELT YB um rE@ Eh a ae 4) Zs VY A SY 4 BN sf S y) q ‘ope © di Y Ny Y : BRONZE HEAD dug up at PESHAWAR by M.A*COURT. Lb. Tessin t Ldh? Press Ciluta- Trident at Barahat in Garkhwal,- t f- os = ~ H exe ae We 8 fect he c - >: = & —To 2i wf é vigh. a: a . r >). ae port Slow. 13 YS RTS CEIIVFITI1 1/77 Pek 3 —— 2 Peat Gene | “Re | fe [i =! 1B | {2 ; 3 uso : Slo /L/ FL LL ASE 4 ea a Vol. Vo PiXXX. [AL De “a vy a. s | @)5 ae Trident at Gofsesvara. /6 feet high. i ss Pusu tty erect wun, Paver gmuouwn Meant de a a} Petree) drained vl ee ee) J 5 AVE ULIy reA eee - y \: ; ey Paras SS Wy 72 ¢ BIS GAL HaqZa7y Wadmiu)e weARUrd uy Qersre aa Arete i ~@ rs | das ai Ni! we NK A {| ! % t= gE [eb dn RAM EMD ICP TUN 3440 eye uuod, Lima euza ahaa ewaagae Agape. rate c= Se HeCSCAA wae -— aM 41 ym em dee A arderaey US aan precag-wae h : * Press Calculle, Be eS N oe Gj) sn. 42 i ‘ Peete 3 t so Sé } (3 : co aes é Haas Ancient Inscription onthe shaft of the Gopesvara trident, at A. 3 [S CAH QAuIeAEOePHYYDZIRM Har YSuAAzaIvAyal mam zazadae Ay HAIGMYS Hany LLerPA- Ar wwe? 2h Mj a Uetvt IPYABAL 20 Reg . , HoeELR SAYA ATRAGIZE Quen er PI cu Rae Um ERRTA TZ og FAB RE Yer Bey anes wd ene 3 : BBG ATE euggzagra : “WES RTRYLSY ARCHIAD Usa “Pa sid mF, wa 4 Aatct-mai a ncu 5 Ge 4 Se eUWodern Inscriplion ,at B, Madern Inscriptions af Cant D. |LF [Boe 6rS “Gel L19%Gs “Ura = Beak plea St Rane Os | eee i Dee eae OAC eS Perea (le do SR es | lr pee jee op *Azey ‘aS "A'S fesé | ‘tor esd | zg | LL LL | 26 \L‘ZL'c> lg |1'98le1s’ jeshS | og | sz 08 | 16 \e°LZZ|Z> |e°b jg‘oall19* joes 1¢ op op ines: cS O11 \P°Z2 Je] PZ GB G6 e‘ZLiat |r \1'Le\66r. |Zeps | og | PZ 08 | 16 |POLIT? \6°F \6*selonss |Tect 0g ‘Aomoys = “A438 “und | "aS “MS BIIt \e°ZZ | 9s | 12 08 | 06 |2°82\2°% |e‘ \FCB e0gs [LbPS | of | FL LL | G8 \g°9L|0°S €°98|F195 63 op ‘aug ‘M°S ‘*M'S O'FOL 13°84 } ¢9 | 09 Lo } G8 |g‘l c°8 116 |L'6Ricegs |2ce fT og | 8Z BF 16 [OGLIOT 10 |8*oeieZ9° |1F9S 83 ‘auy *FSBDIDAO [AA “S “MA *S HOTS g'c6 \o°FL | ZL | 99 L9 } 28 \o*cLio9 \1°2 |L'eelee9s jIZo° Ff Ze | 62 cg } $6 IZ‘9LIF'E IG'e |L'FglerZ® |069S 1G op *ulel “py — ‘as foo'p «6 OfS8 «(0.6L 1g | ¢8 GB OY FG IZ‘OLIS™‘E 6's le‘18\89¢* jes‘ 93 op “Apnojo ‘Se “opiates? Bre je'eL | ag | FL LL | 6 \9°9L\8‘b |1'G \S‘9Bieces |o82. § ze | I8 08 | G6 \o‘ZZ|0°R IPD IZ'Pelech’ j6ees GS op »Alamoys ‘as. aS 9*E0T jo'9L | BL | 08 LL | 06 |0‘'BL.a°F log [S“S8)09FS [FEES F 0g | GL 08 | 16 |8‘ZZ|e°F 10'S |6'98|FO9* |FPSS ing op ‘ouy ‘as "AS [025 €66 |0'cL | 2g} LL 08 | ¥6 I9°ZZio> |a%e j9'S8io6ps SRS F pe] LZ ze ft S6 \¢‘ZZIZ‘€ l0‘h l6‘ssigag’ Gees &% *Aramoys *yS¥010A0 | “as ‘as logs 66 |c°9L 1 ce | LL 08 | G6 \0°8Zio‘b |2*p \eL19°8 |L°9 \6°8B\g6e* {PISS 08 Gl E‘OL|P‘S |1°9 |¢*9e}o6os {EEO | € "34s ‘wIND op ‘as 6° MS feos g°96 j0‘SL a 09L,9%% \g*e |T‘Zele09* jes‘ el gL GGLinse Igce Ir°calesg’ |Po0* Z “Azey “qeris*uind | “aS “AAS Jol’ 8°96 |o°bZ el cl 9'9L.e% la8o 19°S8\e0g ‘6c|6EF 6S 08 G8 BOLICE (6G |VEBlORGOTIEFS CS) T ic3} > = ert ie) abla s gaye ePplo syle pola h Aieel Po cero =blobla sie molt nwz : es | = 5 [E| € | £ Bese eeasyse F1ss) 5 82) PS Ages Sees eae) = |S\2s|2z Fale 4) & g 5 5 = "ry elt ee et s Sie BS to mG roajorm ” S| is Slo g|ee ° 5 E ee 5 | & [SSSciZFssis |e ES/Ss/o8|5o| BufsSis — Fo8\a” mw (ESSER PesISB al S mB oa c e x Pele |© Bil B erles|s S| 58 €SyF Bs 208 o al Slsclesias| selessl s Pl Sy a} Sot si Tegel ol "el oe EM | SeRp sl Sis Bisel oe] “Fletay © *s9 Wad] xX *Aqrpruin yy *Ayrprumn Fy ° *IOUJES AA *pulm eee peye[noyep ‘Wd f }8 suoleAIesqo pezena[vD ‘WV OT 2@ SUOTIVAIESqC =. Joysisoy 5 ‘9E81 Gsnbnp fo yquop ay? wof ‘n2In9]np ‘29K hossp ay) yo yday ‘sazsihayy 1916070.L00}0 Ty e-FOURNAL Or foe ASIATIC.. SOCIETY. No. 56.—September, 1836. {1.—Leamination of some points of Buddhist Chronology. By the Hon. Grorcr Turnour, Ceylon Cwil Service. While the question of the authenticity of Buddhistical chronology, developed in Par annals, subsequent to the advent of Sa’kya Sinua, is under the consideration of the Committee of Papers of the Asiatic Society, I beg to offer a few observations on the Chronological Table appended to Professor Witson’s Essay on the Hindu History of Casumir, called the Raja Tarangini, published in the XVth volume of the Asiatic Researches. The first portion of this history, compiled by Kauna’na Pandit commences with the fabulous ages; it is represented to extend to A. D. 1024 ; and the author is reputed to have flourished about Saka 1070, or A. D. 1148. . Before tabularizing and adjusting the chronology comprised in that history*, Professor Winson gives the following details regarding the reign of the monarch Aso’Ka. ‘¢ The last of these princes (Sachinara) being childless, the crown of Cashmir reverted to the family of its former rulers, and devolved on AséKa, who was descended from the paternal great uncle of Khagendra. ‘This prince, it is said in the Ayen Acberi, abolished the Brahminical rites, and substituted those of Jina ; from the original however it appears, that he by no means attempted the former of these heinous acts, and that, on the contrary, he was a pious worship- per of Siva, an ancient temple of whom in the character of Vijayésa he repair- ed. With respect to the second charge, there is better foundation for it, although it appears that the prince did not introduce, but invented or originated the Jina Sdsana. We is said to have founded a city called Srinagar, a different place, * Want of space must excuse our inserting these tables, which will be accessi- ble to all our readers in our Chronological and Genealogical Appendix.—Ep, img 522 Buddhist Chronology. . [Supr. however, from the present capital, which is attributed to a much later monarch. In the reign of As6xa, Cashmir was overrun by the Miech’has, for whose expulsion the king obtained from Siva a pious and valiant son, as a reward for the auste- rities he had practised *.’’ ‘‘Ja’LoKa, the son and successor of AséKA, was a prince of great prowess : he overcame the assertors of the Bauddha heresies, and quickly expelled the Mlech’has from the country, thence named Ujjhita dimba : he then carried his victorious arms to foreign regions, and amongst others to the north of Persia, which he subjugated in the reign of Danas, and then proceeding in an opposite direction, he subdued the country of Canow).”’ ‘¢ The successor of this celebrated monarch was DAmMoDARA, of whose descent various opinions were entertained.’’ ‘‘Damopara was succeeded by three princes who divided the country, and severally founded capital cities named after themselves. These princes were called HusuKxa, Jusuka, and CanisHKa, and these appellations are strongly corroborative of an assertion of our author, that they were of Turushka, that is, of Turk or Tartar extraction: they are considered as synchronous, but may possibly be all that are preserved of some series of Tartar princes, who, it is very likely, at various periods, established themselves at Cashmir. The chief event recorded of their reign is the foundation of the three several capitals, named after themselves, but another and more important consequence of their sovereignty is said to have been the almost entire change of the national faith, and the nearly exclusive prevalence of the doctrines of the Bauddhas under a Bodhisatwa or heirarch named Na'Ga'rsunA. The period at which this took place is said to have been 150 years before the death of Sa’kya SinBA.” ‘¢ The Tartar princes were succeeded by ABHIMANYA, a monarch evidently of a Hindu appellation, and a follower of the orthodox faith, which he re- established in Cashmir.”’ In elucidation of the date assigned to the age in which Na’Ga’r- yuna lived, Professor Witson adds the following appendix. The Sanscrit quotation, which (if I have correctly read it) is here repre- sented in Roman, is there given in Déva-nagari characters. * The faith of As6KA is a matter of very little moment, as the prince himself is possibly an ideal personage: as, however, tne comparative antiquity of the Buddha and Brahminical creeds in Cashmir has been supposed to be affected by it, and the events subsequently recorded, it may be advisable to give the passages of the original, which shew that AsOKA was a worshipper of Siva: it is not impossible, however, if we are to attach credit to any part of this portion of theCashmirian history, that he permitted heretical, possibly Bauwddha doctrines, to be introduced into the kingdom during his reign from his Tartar neighbours. ‘¢Then the prince Aséxa, the lover of the truth, obtained the earth ; who sinning in subdued affections, produced the Jena Sdsana.’’ This may méan possibly something very different from the received idea, and may imply his neglect of affairs of state through excess of devotion, and his consequently omit- ting to prevent the intrusion of a foreign power, rather than a foreign faith, into the kingdom, the expulsion of which was the object of his son’s birth.— {Note by Professor WILson.] 1836.] Buddhist Chronology. 523 ‘¢ Appendix No. 7, to Professor W1ison’s Essay. “AIAIS? TWO SLABS of Breecia 16 by I| inehes , at Fark Ostenburgh Ceylon. 2. BJ Ot AY -DW = uIOU TH Be BF Ft IN OC 7 tye wr | Y¥ Oe aa Drew. Bland dei, TB insep lth 4. INSCRIPTFON at HaBuRENNI | KEANX LES WU YX hI CWLY HAM OUTNGSX AT GX 1 THISW LOL GIT HCTFWEHHS HFAVHIROKHAYAIFEKIITS | XIddwWRVVIOUbAD UA ZEW V Lrevdda SanVUVBSOVIS|X | UFXFXVFEXTAXEXHATUDEWUAYIYhHE DOWN IXSGFOUO HHO F DFIIFWUASSEUSIWUXSHIO+CLSWEFU RWFOOXLEIFFT DD | PIUSLATEXFIEFSTOAVATW SIW SOVSAUEOISUKIICWUITE KOI PUDNOMGOUUIHUHSVETIEFOFITAFOUARUADYASO FIALLUITHAIGSXFIEFIVIDLAIWYI@ANWARUENIF UPXLICWUASCUGI LFF VIDEW UG WFFFI WAY HAKAVUIDE WUHWEPLCAU 2 2X ALAIEOT DSFZOIGEWOAWIFFLIT WE DRAAVITEWUAWIF UAV EUSP YCSIEVADETA AIL CH WY AIS W IAAW CVE TIRFITT LU K3BIGYFAEONIU FAI GO —~~p 5. Letlers ofan Inseription,nearly obliterated, ona rock near Kapurdigarhe, Peshawer ALSA PY-~..A..U-4. PBA ~M--Y 7K U9 -3 “O35. 3 : A Court dal UiRby —— TeBrimep | Printed al the Oviental blk Press, Calicuslia » resco ee sed Bs oe se et ‘ 1836.] Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. 555 The origin of the fragments of inscriptions found at Trincomalee is similarly explained in Sir A. Jounston’s note upon a much longer and more perfect inscription from the same place, published in the first volume of the Roy. As. Soc. Trans. page 537. The whole of the ancient pagodas or temples of Trincomalee were destroyed as above remarked by the Portuguese in the 16th century, and their materials were used in the construction of the modern forti- fications. The late Chief Justice of Ceylon adds :— «The race of people who at present inhabit the province are com- pletely ignorant of the character in which the inscription is written : they, however, believe from the traditions preserved among them, that it isthe character which was in use throughout the whole of the northern and eastern parts of the island in the age of the two kings of Solamandelam, Manumetuy CanpesoLaMm, and his son Katocata Mawarasa, who are stated, upon what authority I cannot ascertain, in all the ancient histories of Trincomalee (of which I have in my possession both the Tamul originals and the English translations) to have reigned over the southern peninsula of India and the greater part of the island of Ceylon about the 512th year of the Kaliyug, or 4400 years ago*, and during his reign to have constructed not only these magnificent temples, but also the equally celebrated tanks or artificial lakes called Kattucarré, Padvilcolam, Minerie, and Kandellé, the remains of which may be considered as some of the most venerable and splendid monu- ments ever discovered.” There are three traditions respecting the contents of the long in- scription. 1, that it contains an account of the taxes which the priests of the temples of Trincomalee had a right to levy, and of the expences incurred in the buildings: 2, that it contains an account of the construction of the great tank: and 3, that it contains the heads of the civil and criminal laws of the country. However this may be, it is not likely that we shall very speedily be able to benefit by the preservation of this curious document, unless an actual facsimile be substituted for the manual copy published in the Transactions. It is evident from the form of many of the letters in that, and in Dr. Biann’s fragments Nos. 2 and 3, which have a strong resemblance to it in the lines drawn between each row of letters, that these are ina form of Nagari not very different from that of our early lath inscriptions, and there is little doubt that an accurate transcript would prove legible. Dr. Buanp’s No. 1 is apparently much more * The names above given are doubtless TrrRamApr CaANDA SHOLAN and Cari- cALA of the Sholan dynasty of Karnata, of Bucoanan. According to Turn- our, the Sholan conquest of Ceylon took place in the year 104 B, C.—Ep. 4c2 556 Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. [Sepr. modern—it is so like Tamul in many letters that I think a Madras pan- dit would find little difficulty in decyphering it. . Other inscriptions from Ceylon, Pl. XXVI. XXVIII. The preceding note has called to my recollection a number of other fragments of inscriptions in nearly the same character which were sent to the Society in 1833* by His Excellency Sir R. W. Horton. They were collected from various spots in the Matele district by Captain Forses, as marked on the accompanying plate: and, His Excellency says, thousands of the same nature exist on the island. The inscription from Haburenni offers the best chance to the decy- pherer from its very perfect state :—In the 4th line I read with ease the words paramara Maharaja....Sri mad....Vijaya Patisara puta deva. The same word QEW vijaya occurs very frequently in the course of the inscription. It is a name of great celebrity in the Ceylonese history, as the founder of the earliest dynasty. The opening letters of the in- scription are precisely such as appear on our first Canouj coins :—they run Mujénagama.. . : I am not aware whether the inscriptions so successfully decyphered by Mr. Armour, and published in the Ceylon Almanac, include any of this class—but I presume not, as they generally refer to periods much more recent, as the reign of Sauasa Mauua, in the 12th century, when we know by the coins discovered at Dambedinia, that the Nagari hardly differed from the present form. Moreover, they are stated to be in the Cingalese language. Inscriptions from the Caves of Ajanta, PI. XXVIII. When I inserted in a former Plate (IX. see page 348) the rude facsimile of an inscription taken for me by Messrs. RaupH and Gresuxy, I forgot that I had in my possession several of a similar nature collected by the same parties during a visit to these caves some years ago, which were in vain shewn to the pandits of Benares and to the Secretary of the College there. Not being aware that the measurements and drawings made by Dr. Brrp for Sir Jon Maucoum have ever seen the light, while the brief notice and rude sketch published by Lieutenant AtzxanpeER in the second volume of the Roy. As. Soc. Trans. is any thing but satisfac- tory, I think it but tardy justice to put on record the materials so kindly communicated to myself. One inscription (fig. 11) was taken with red paint on cloth from the base of a large statue of Buppua, and, curious enough, we here again trace the three initial letters “‘ ye dharma” of the Buddhist formula; but * See Proceedings As. Soc. 30th Oct, 1833. Journ. As. Soc. Vol. Vi PL XXIX fuserifplten sx from Ce len , corcltimwted . 6 SIGIR} MerTW444 US FatuDOr a FUANYVOOHUUWEU TTIIOAID BES WhRAR SOS FSOTUE GE LEGLOLCET RB UASEIOICVS DEGOTACLG ——— AMBOOL J. from D . memoOoLo dg 4SOlrmdd £RUASo OF WAGYNADHSOA A424 mega ews PUNY DIGUEANU ARENA eee OE, ea Se ree ) 4 DOnATTAO XK Co BO C7 er a) M1iXADEYRU~LCeuURNne-XhUvVeUHAS DAAZAGt+CO TBCAWLUUON—-% 9% Pu — AXgd -DuY () —- oT ae a LiG Lig Gia UNG hY-7IT4 3 -.. : 3 Dee eo IY 4 AG eT OU gy oie WS 7m yee “Ops Ce 8. from ALUE VIHARI, POALU Ne vA Forbes. ded + 8) a bo lL ar JL 4H 9. Lower part ofan Inscription in the Zodiac orShield Cave ut Anta. HAPS MUASEQPUSUYNAYZ 291 DEVAL AL OZ Ts SiR Ws 0, Another from the same Cave (supposed to be more modern.) Was vas WO wna pysezosuatezyAsUpangsaa7s ED 7%, TYEBRYSHVULIZW S RUT ANY UGS "borne, VERAY Ver OMUZ an M8 rganaeey , Sfaced. SoA YMEIITS TS YRAT Ap ji WaT TP La By 3 Wl, Another Inscription , zaken én Sacsimile from the slone. yy Pr BUIY BAY VBAas wh SF IZ WL MDW CDA ADAWE HAL Y By 4. Ss Fathh © Gresley ces. — TPeineep 1 Printed at the Oriental Lilh* Press. Calcutta. 1836.] Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. 557 the remainder is unintelligible, although the value of many individual letters can be readily assigned. The fragment (fig. 10) in the parallelogram-headed character, (of which an alphabet will be furnished under a subsequent heading,) is all that remains of what was once a long inscription in the zodiac cave. It is therefore useless to transcribe it in modern character, which might easily be done for the major part of the fragment. But it will enliven the dry recapitulation of such particulars to introduce the reader to the romantic scene whence these antique relics were derived, in the very language of Mr. Raupn’s most animated and scenic correspondence—written as he clambered up the precipitous and crumbling entrance, and threaded his way through the recesses of the hollowed hill by the light of the brahman’s torch. ‘‘ On the 6th of the month I left Aurwngabad, and went seven marches east- ward that I might join Captain GresLey, and induce him to come hither with me. When I found him on the 13th, we were near 50 miles from this place, to which we came in two breakneck marches, galloping over stony roads and rocky torrents at the rate of ten miles an hour. We then rested one day, and on the 18th arrived here at 9 a.m. During the two last days Grestey has been with me, and his exclamations of admiration and regret, the mere variations of won- der,—would fill three pages. Thepaintings, which are fast fading and falling away, demand consideration. There is nothiug in India like them. They give us glimpses of a former world—but, alas! how industriously these valuable and beautiful remains have been by violence destroyed! I shall now rapidly throw together my companion’s observations, among which are all mine, in which he agreed. Youknow I have no knowledge of painting or design—only a perception of what is beautiful ; but you must have remarked his skill in drawing and good taste in every thing. ‘ These caves are becoming daily more difficult of access. You pass along nar- row goat paths with a chasm of 50 or 80 feet below, the footing not nine inches broad, with scarce any thing to cling to. The rains yearly making the passages worse. G. and I admired the fires on the hill above us: grass and leaves burning all night. What followed? Why, last night every hour and oftener, stones and burning rubbish, large logs half consumed, rolled down close to the tent, and this morning the ascent proved more difficult. One cave is inaccessible, and several are approached at the risk of life. ‘ ‘ What a wonderful people these must have been! Remark the head dresses. ‘Now, is this a wig or curly hair? Ald the statues, the curved figures of BuppHa have them, How can I say? First wigs were made to represent hair, and then hair dressed to look like wigs. ’Tis the shape of your Welsh wig, and rows of curls all over. Then the head dresses and ornaments are different from every thing we now see. These are chiefly domestic scenes—seraglio scenes ;—here are females and males every where, then processions and portraits of princes which are always larger than the rest. The subjects are closely intermixed ;—a medallion is twelve or fifteen inchesin height ; below and above, closely touch- ing, are other subjects. I have seen nothing monstrous. No, certainly, there is nothing monstrous except where we see some figure evidently designed 558 roi Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. (Super. for ornament, as in the compartments of the ceiling. The ceiling—aye, every thing but the floor and larger statues and small figures—every thing has been painted. It is done while the plaister is wet—it is fresco painting. I have seen the operation while going about in Rome. It has been dug off, scraped and knocked off with iron instruments. See how the stone itself has been broken! Now, Ratpu, look here: can you see this figure? No. Bring the torch nearer. Give me the torch.” You can see it better now—hardly! Let us light dry grass. Bring grass now: place it here. Now watch while the light is strongest: you may now see the whole figure. This is a prince or some chief. It is a portrait. Observe how well fore-shortened that limb is—yes, I can see it now; but throw water on it—now the colours are more vivid. Here is a lovely face—a Madonna face. What eyes! She looks towards the man. Observe, these are all Hindu faces—nothing foreign. All the sweet countenances are of one complexion. R., now remark. Here are evidently three beauties in this apartment—one an African, one copper-coloured, one of a European complexion. Yes; and how frequently we see these intermixed. See this, R. is a fair man—yes, I think he is a eunuch. Another :—he has his band round her waist, and she one hand on his shoulder. Observe ; many love scenes, but little gross or grossly indecent : no nudities—nothing like the shocking sculptures on the outside of the temples in Telingana. This must be the inside of a mahal. Here is a woman ona chdrpéae or some stage with legs: See, they are bathing her: do you observe the ghara of water in the woman’s hand above? How well executed that figure is; the fore-shortening of the arms ; the waist—are not her haunches too full? No. Go farther off, and you will see the figure ina better light: it iscorrect. This beauty has delicate drapery—nearly falling to the knee: it is transparent, like sky- coloured gauze. Observe that Abyssinian black prince seated on a bed ;— remark his ornaments. Now the woman seated on his left knee whom he embraces is as fair as you or J. Did these fellows get Georgian slaves? He has two boys or pages tofan him. I wish I could make out this story—there certainly is a story. Here isa fair man of full age, dressed in a robe and a cap like some monk or abbot. Here is next to him a half naked brahman copper-coloured, with shaven crown and the single lock on his head. Here is a man presenting him with a scroll on which something is written. He is in a crowded court—he has come to an audience. What can all this be? This is a procession :—the ele- phants are passing under the windows, and women are looking out. I think they evidently express alarm. That one has her hand up, as making some exclamation. How often we see people of three complexions in the same pannel! Now this is the most extraordinary thing we have found. Here are three placid portraits —they are Chinese. Nothing can be plainer :—observe the style of the hair ;— the women have locks brought down in ringlets over the ears falling on to the neck, like some of the Hampton Court beauties. Observe the head dresses: there is something like a bandeau—yes, a muslin band, or the imitation of a turban by English women. The cap worn by the chiefs or nobles or princes is a tiara loaded with pearls mostly conical. Round the waist is a cloth, but it is not so full as a dhott. A sort of jhangia worn by the women, coming nearly to the knees, and this drapery often transparent. Are these paintings as well done as Europeans could have executed? In the expression of the countenances certainly they are. The perspective is not good, and the pieces are crowded :— yet here is a small building, the perspective of which is quite correct. 1836.) Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. petite 559 Small buildings, such as are open to a‘garden with light pillars, are the princi- pal domestic scenes: few or no trees. In two pieces are parties in a boat—the prow and stern both very high. Here is a hunt ;—here is a horseman and dogs. Ido not like the horses we see—rather poor. These are elephant-fighting ;—that head is sublime. Now, R. remark this saddle ;—here is a led horse, and the saddle exactly such as we see in England with a cloth below it—unothing larger—and the bridle too. This is a war scene—here are many spears. This zodiac, as they call it, is very elaborate. Why they call it zodiac I know not. There is in one part a bull, and in another scales. We must get a ladder to see it clearly. It might have been called the shield of Achilles as well as a zodiac. There have been eight grand compartments and sixteen smaller ones—how full of little figures! I think this is the best example in the whole series, and evidently done by the same painters who worked in what we call ‘ par excellence’ the painted caves. These medallions in the roof are very hand- some. I think they resemble compartments in a Turkey carpet, or what we see in a kaleidescope—wreaths and coloured radiated patterns. Here are five women with their feet all towards the centre of the circle :—their heads alone perfect. Are they angels? There are no winged and no two-headed figures anywhere. The zodiac is incomplete. I think about athird of it is wanting, and the lower part of the circle could never have been complete, for it must have been over this door of the cell. G. Perhaps they covered the top of the doorway with something in order to complete the circle. R. You admire it so much: you are willing to suppose it must have been complete. What a lovely female! Yes, the last one we discover seems always the sweet- est. Here is another heavenly face. This man is her lover:—a handsome fellow. You have his profile looking to the left. How eager—how full of ardent desire! The woman has just turned her face towards him, and looks with timid satisfaction and self-approving coquetry. It is excellent. But here is another beauty :—she is entreating: her head is turned towards some one above. Is she supplicating or in prayer? Shame to the villains who have destroyed these paintings ! These must have been convents, and these decorations to attract the multi- tude at festivals and to bring pilgrims from afar. This cave was never half finished. I can fancy that the site of a cave was granted to a society of monks with lands for their support. These, according to their ability, made it large or small, filled it with paintings when able to incur the expense.—The fewer theories you form, the fewer blunders and dreams you will make. R. We must form theories—we cannot remain awake and not do so. G. Some nation of conquerors who landed at Elephanta, coming from Egypt, first began there, and then got 2 or 300 miles to the eastward. There is no- thing like these in Telingana or to the south. R. No—only some very small caves with sculpture, rude and old,—the cave being as big as one of these ten cells. But the fewer theories you make, &c. Now, Ra.pu, look at this! Why, you are half dead—no, not half dead, but knocked up. When you have 25 years added to your present age, and have completed 30 years in India, will you labour so well or have so much zeal? ’Tis five to one against my being alive.—But do get up and come hither. This man is going to ravish this woman ;—he has a sword, too, in his hand. Here - 560 Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. (Supt. are other armed men. Ts if the sacking of a city? See how the water brings out the colours,—but I have given Prinsep more than two hours. Have they brought the oil? and the ladder,—they are all here. 21st.—A Dr. Birp from Sattarah, the Residency Surgeon, come with a design to draw up some account of the caves, dismounts from his horse at 8 a. mM. Mutual greetings. In three minutes my new acquaintance praises Mr. ERSKINE of Bombay ; quotes him and swears by him, and tells ine, ‘ These are Jain cave temples, and, like most others in this part of India, are dug in basalt. This is amygdaloid basalt: you see it incloses masses of quartz.’ Dr. B. says he has brought a learned pandit to examine the inscriptions ; that he is about to draw up an account for the London Asiatic Society, and carry away some of the paintings by taking from the wall. Can you draw, Sir ? ‘ No—I am sorry I cannot.’ Those who come here with that qualification are disheartened by the difficulty, or have other occupations which demand their attention, (as G.)—As for carrying away the paintings, you can do so in powder. I have ascertained that they will not quit the walls in lamine, but crumble under the touch. . ‘Tam sorry for that. I think a native painter might succeed in copying them.’ Certainly he might—but you must attend on your native painter, to give him confidence. This is a wild secluded spot, within a mile or two of the frontier ; barren rocks and chains of hills HE. and W. The nearest inhabited place is a poor hamlet three miles off. We find marks of recent fires in the caves and caverns, and know that small parties of migratory predatory Bheels who lift in these parts, haunt the caves, which are very seldom visited*. Dr. Brrp’s so-called pandit proves to be a Marhatta brahman :—can make nothing of the inscriptions—supposes them written by the Jains. G. For my part, I think it is the character I have seen on the pillar at Alla- habad, and on the column at Delhi, which no one can decypher. On the left of the portico to the zodiac cave has been an inscription four feet high and one and a half broad—the left and lower part utterly effaced by the weather. What re- mains, may afford a few whole words to one who has the key ; (see Plate XXVIII. No. 10). Under the foot of a colossal statue, there is part of an inscription, perhaps half a name :—outside another cave. In the zodiac there is some writing—and in the same cave one figure holds out a scroll on which the writing may be legible. Ma .tet’s figures in the Asiatic Researches would lead a stranger to expect statues—but the figures are entirely in alto relievo. Almost the only novelty is the thing I call an altar: it is nine feet high. There are four altar caves, or, as folks call them, carpenter’st caves. The first has the figure just mentioned at the back. In the second the altar differs in having an intermediate circle or section of a cone—another globular mass. [* Capt. OvANs visited in March 1827; Mr. LA1ne saw two in July; Capt. O., Mr. G. GIBERNE and GRESLEY were here in February 1828; Mr.and Mrs. R. on the 8th of that month; G. and R. 18th and 19th of the current month; and, lastly, Dr. Brrp, an intelligent young Medical man from Bombay. Lieut. ALEXANDER of the Lancers visited them in 1824.] + From the tradition regarding VisvAKARMA’S having constructed them ina night, See Sir WILLIAM Ma.uet’s description of Ellora, As. Res. VI., 389. 1836.] Sketch of the State of Miiar, Malay Peninsula. 561 In the third small cave, 45 or 50 feet by 20 to 24, is a more elaborate altar (dehgopa), having three globes superposed, and each stage ornamented with four pillars—on the top four figures, now much worn, supported a canopy, (evidently the ordinary Buddhist Chaitya.) But all these desultory descriptions and frag- ments of conversation can be of no use but to stimulate you to come hither, &c. &c.”’ In the same graphic style our visitor describes the kund or reser voir at the foot of cliffs 250 feet in height—and the Dehgopa or Buddha cave. Dr. Birp found no less than 25 chambers, some in an unfinished state, and now covered with earth. Notwithstanding pro- testations about defacing monuments, this visitor contrived to peel off four painted figures from the zodiac or shield! To have copied the whole, even had he been an artist, would have taken twenty days. Of the fresco figures, in three divisions of the shield, were extant in 1828, 73 figures varying from 5 to 7 inches high. It is a great pity that none of our European tourists, whose pencils every year produce such exquisite bijoux, can be persuaded to make a visit to Ajanta, before the remainder of these treasures of antiquity moulder away with the damp, or fall a prey to the hand of the spoiler. V.—Shetch of the State of Mar, Malay Peninsula. By T.J. Newszoxp, Lieut., A. D. C. to Brigadier General Witson, C. B. The information contained in this paper was obtained partly from personal observation, and partly from inquiries made while on a visit to the chief of the country at Gressik, on the Muar river, in 1835. The state of Maar lies to the south of the Malacca territory, from which it is divided, towards the coast, by the Cossang river, and inte- riorly by a suppositious line drawn between Bankon, Chondong and Mount Ophir. The Serting river separates it from Pahang,—Parrit Siput from the tract of Dattu Kdya Padang—and the Murbdwe Sa-ratius from Johdéle. Populatton.—The interior of Muar is generally termed Segdmet. The united population is stated not to exceed 2,400. This appears extremely scant compared with the extent of territory ; and arises from the misgovernment and apathy of the feudal sovereign, the Sultan of Johére—whence perpetual broils among the petty chiefs, causing insecurity of person and property, and eventually desertion of the soil by most of the cultivating and trading classes of the commu- nity. The honest peasant, in many instances, is compelled from sheer necessity to turn robber; and the coasts, instead of being crowded 4 D 562 Sketch of the State of Méar, Malay Peninsula. [Serr. with fishermen, swarm with pirates. These remarks may be applied generally to the whole of the peninsula under native sway, though to Miar more particularly ; the whole of which country appears to be one almost uninterrupted mass of jungle and swamp, if we can except a few straggling villages and clearings. Cultivated rice grounds have degenerated into barren marshes—an enormous forest, abound- ing with wild elephants, overshadows a soil naturally rich and prolific ; while the gaunt rhinoceros and uncouth tapir stalk unmolested over spots which, if tradition belies them not, were once the sites of large and populous towns. Such is the melancholy picture of the effects of misrule which this un- happy country presents to the eye of the traveller, who cannot avoid being sensibly touched by this forcible, though silent, appeal for me- lioration. The principal villages are Bokko, Langkat, Gressik, Ring, Segdmet, Pagoh and Pangkdlang Kota, the residence of the chief, on the river, Produce and Revenue.—The produce of the country consists of a little rice, sago, ivory, ebony, gold dust, tin, wax, aloe-wood, gum benzoin, camphor (small in quantity and of inferior quality), ratans of the kinds Battu and Jagga, Dammer Battu, Dammer Miniak, jaggery, Lakko wood, and Guligas, stones extracted generally from the heads of porcupines, and in much repute among Malays for medicinal purposes. The chief has been empowered by the late Sultan of Johdre to levy an impost upon every bhar of tin exported, of | 14 Spanish dollars. One hundred bundles of ratans,...... .. 1 = do. do. One bitar*cf'ebonys” Stes ees ee ie doe do. One koyan tree romported;. ee ee ar dos do. pete herr ea ery a 1 do. do. One katti of opium ditto, . mits 20 do. do. On smaller articles he ayieee a ‘daty ef 5 per cent. He has the power of exacting the gratuitous labour of his subjects, and derives some emolument from the fines he inflicts on them at pleasure. Government.—Mvar is under the sway of a chief bearing the title of Tumingong, who is a vassal of Johdre. Under the Tamingong are eight Panghdlis, four of whom are styled Ampat de Ilir—the remain- der, Ampat de Ulu. The former are the Panghilis of Gressik, Bukit, Raya, Liang Battu, and Ring ;—the latter, those entitled Besar, Tan- jong, Daggang, and Muncal. There is nominally a mosque under each Panghili, but in that of Umbum alone is the Juma-ahad held. This is in the jurisdiction of the Panghalu besar. The customs enjoined by the code termed Undang Undang Malayu ; and the Mahommedan law 1836.] Sketch of the State of Méar, Malay Peninsula. 563 of succession obtains, to the exclusion of the Trémba Pusdka prevailing in the four Menangkdbowe states. History.—M iar, like the rest of the Malay peninsula, was formerly inhabited by savage aboriginal tribes, among whom the Jacoons seem to claim the superiority. With regard to its origin, it is stated in the Sejdra Maldyu that Srt Iscander Shah, the monarch of Singhaptira, on his city being taken by the Bitdra of Majapahit, fled te Muar. This event took place about the middle of the 13th century; and it is asserted that he left one of his Maniris in the interior of Muar. No more mention is made of this state until near the middle of the 14th century, when the kingdom of the Sultan of Malacca, MozarrEer SHAH, was invaded by the Siamese under T’Hawt Cuacri. The Sultan on this occasion directed a levy of the population of Maar to be made, and the inhabitants to be assembled at Malacca. According to the Malay annals, the war between Siam and Malacca ‘continued for a long time, and great numbers of the Siamese perished ; but Malacca was not reduced. At last the whole Siamese army retreated, and as they took their departure they threw down large quantities of their baggage ratans in the district of Miéar, where they all took root; and that is the origin of the name Rotan Siam. Their stocks, which were formed of fig-tree wood, likewise took root in a place in the vicinity of Muar, where it still exists. The rests for the Siamese cooking places also took root and grew up, and are to be seen at this day at the place named Tumang Siam.” I was unable to find out the locality of the places here mentioned by the author of the Sejdre Maldyu, though every inquiry was made near the spots where these scenes are said to have occurred. The tradition, however, of the defeat of the Siamese was universally current. In 1511, Aumen, Sultan of Malacca, on his city bemg taken by the Portuguese, retreated up the Muar river to a place called Pagoh, about 15 or 16 miles from Gressik, now under the Panghilu besar, INcut Muir. Sultan Maumu’'pD remained at Battu Hampar, and founded a fort at Bentayen. According to the Sejdra Maldyu, the Portuguese pursued Aumep up the river, attacked and took Pagoh. Aumup fled further up to Panarigan, near Jompdle, and thence, accompanied by Maumup, repaired to Pahang. The latter subsequently established himself at Johdre. Many of their adherents remained in Miar and Segdmet, and in course of time erected a primi- tive form of government, directed by four elders, styled Tuah Campongs, who ruled under the Sultans of Johdre until 1119 A. H. The four campongs were those of Pagoh, Sungie Ring, Sungie Terap, and Gressik. A. H. 1119. A Mantri of high birth in Johdre, named SamapgE Rdsa, obtained a grant of the territory of Maar from the then Sultan 4p 2 564 Sketch of the State of Muar, Malay Peninsula. (Serr. of Johore, Appa JauiL Suan III. He settled at a place called Pantei Layang on the banks of the river, and ruled till 1145 A. H., when he died succeeded by his son Papu'ka Tuan; who, on his proceeding to the court of Johdre, on the occasion of his father’s demise, was invest- ed by the Sultan Aspat Jauriu with the title of Tumingong Padika Tuan. He died A. H. 1175, succeeded by his son Burox or Anox, who was confirmed by Sultan Appa Jatt Suan IV., then resident at Rhio, whither he had removed from Johdére. Burox died at Binga Tanjong on the Muar river in 1214 A. H. leaving two sons, Konix and Israuim. The former went to Lingga to present himself to Sultan Maumv’p III. by whom he was acknowledged as third Tuméngong of Muar. Koni died in 1246, A. H. leaving a son named Syzp, the present chief, who succeeded him: he also left a daughter. Syzp proceeded to Singapore, where he was confirmed by the late Sultan, Hussain Suau I., whom the English had recently placed on the throne of his ancestors. From him he obtained the title Tumungong Dattu Syed. It would appear from what has been advanced above, and by the subsequent Boundary treaties, that Muar has always been feudal to the Sultan of Johdre since the time of their ancestors, the ancient sovereigns of Singapore and Malacca. The Dutch, however, when in possession of Malacca, appear to have claimed Muar, as in the map of VaLentyn the boundary line of the Dutch territory is made to extend so far beyond the Muar river as the Rio Formoso. The Tumingong’s sway is confined to the villages immediately on the banks of the Muar river and on those of the stream of Segamet, which empties itself into the Maar about 12 miles above Pankdlang Kéta. He appears to be popular from his easy temper, and the inha- bitants feel alarmed at the idea of any change being made in the government by the Sultan of Johdre. We had an interview with this Malay chief at a village, about 18 miles up the river, called Gressik. He acknowledges himself a vassal of Johdre, and sends annually to the Sultan the amount of a duty levied on the houses of the settlers at Padang (one dollar per house) and 200 gumpits of rice. Malayan Albino.—On landing at Gressik I was struck by the sin- gular appearance of a Malay lad, an Albino, standing under the shade of atree on the river bank. His skin was of a reddish white, with blotches here and there, and thinly covered with short white hairs. The eyes were small and contracted; the iris of a very light vascular blue ; the lids red, and fringed with short white lashes ; the eyebrows scant and of the same colour; the pupil much contracted from the light. On calling him to come near he appeared to be ashamed. 1836.] Sketch of the State of Miar, Malay Peninsula. 565 He evinced an extreme sensibility to the stimulus of light, fronr which he almost constantly kept his eyes guarded by shading them with his hands. He told me he could see better than his neighbours in imperfect darkness, and best by moonlight, like the ‘‘ moon-eyed” Albinos of the Isthmus of Darien. He is morbidly sensitive to heat: for this reason and on account of the superstitious respect with which the Malays regard him, he is seldom employed by his friends in outdoor labour, although by no means deficient in physical strength. The credulous Malays imagine that the Genii have some furtive share in the production of such curiosities, though this they tell as a great secret. To this day the tomb of his grandfather, who was also an Albino, is held sacred by the natives, and vows (niyats) made at it. Both his parents were of the usual colour. His sister is an Albino like himself. Albinos, I believe, are not common on the peninsula, nor are there any tribes of them as, according to VoLraire, exist in the midst of Africa. In the only two instances I recollect observing, the eyes were, in both, of a very light blue; the cuticle roughish and of a rosy blush, very different from that of the two African Albinos seen and described by Vo.Tarre, and quoted by Lawrence; “ Leur blancheur n’est pas la nétre; rien d’incarnat, nul mélange de blanc et de brun, c’est une couleur de linge, ou plutét de cire blanchie ; leurs cheveux, leurs sourcils sont de la plus belle et de la plus douce soie; leurs yeux ne resemblent en rien & ceux des autres hommes, mais ils approchent beaucoup des yeux de perdrix.” Hssai sur les Meurs. WauitEtaw Ainstig, in his description of the Albinos of continental India, ascribes to them the same delicacy of constitution and shyness observable in the Malayan Albino, and that they are seldom known to live to an advanced age. The females, he remarks, rarely bear chil- dren; but when they do, their offspring is of the natural colour of the cast to which they belong. Observations on the Maar river.—The Miiar river at the mouth has an apparent width of about 600 yards, and at Gressik 18 miles up the stream is about 100 yards broad and 7 fathoms deep. The soundings at the bar varied from 2 to 4 fathoms low water. The current ran at the rate of 25 miles an hour. It has its rise, according to the natives, among the mountains of Jel/aboo, and falls into the sea about 30 miles south-east of Malacca. From these mountains the Serting river, which disembogues itself into the China sea at Pahang, and the Calang river, which flows into the Straits of Malacca near Salangore, have also their rise. The general direction of the Muar river from the 566 Sketch of the State of Mar, Malay Peninsula. __— (Surr. mouth to Gressik we found to be N.E.—its course tortuous, the banks for the most part low, muddy, and covered, with the exception of the vicinity of villages and a few Ladang clearings, with dense jungle. Among the trees near the river’s margin we observed the mangrove, the Nipah palm, (the Nypa fruticans of TaunsErG,) the Nibong, (the Areca Tigillaria of Dr. Jacx,) the Api-Api, (Pyrrhanthus Littoreus,) the Pedada, the Neridi, and the Bita-Bita. The water of the river was more turbid than that of the Lingie, which might be owing to the freshes from the hills. The paucity of cultivation, thinness of population, and the almost total absence of trading boats and even fishing canoes on the river, could not fail to strike the most careless observer. By this river there is a communi- cation, almost all the way by water, with the eastern coast of the peninsula, frequently adopted by the Pahang traders. The navigation was formerly under the control of a Bugis chief named Unxv’ Kta’na, who settled at the mouth of the river; and, after him, under his son Raja Issa: but on the return of the latter to Rio in 1826, it reverted to the Tumingong. | In former days the mouth of the river was a noted place of rendez- vous for the fleets of the Siamese, and in later times of the Malay princes, in their attacks on Malacca during the Portuguese and Dutch administrations. The last instance occurred in 1784, when Radja Hapsi, the Maida of Rhio, anchored there with a fleet of 170 prows on his way to invade Malacca ; an enterprize in which he lost his life. Gold Mines of Bukit Raya.—Gold dust is found a short distance from the left bank of the river at Bukit Raya, a low hill covered with forest, which was pointed out to us by the guides. There were, we were told, formerly gold mines on and at the foot of this hill worked by Malays, who were compelled to quit them through the exactions of the petty chiefs. The Tumingong had brought down with him in his own boat to Gressik, two Chinese miners, with the view of ascertaining whether any mining speculations there would be likely to turn out profitably or otherwise. I have not heard the result. Tin is also found near Bukit Raya. From Gressik we saw a range of hills at a great distance running down the peninsula in a south-easterly direction, one of the highest of which is called Siang-battu, the Cave of the Rock. From this mountain, the natives affirm, flow the rivers of Battu Pahat, (the Rio Formoso of the Portuguese,) Pontian, Undéwe, Roompin, Bennoon, and Johore ; the last of which streams empties itself into the sea at the extremity of the peninsula: on its left bank stood the capital of the MAA LNOUd MBIA NIWE- mn __=¢ | =H | | i i Satie iva | Tery ly Vol.V. PLXAAVI ie, = SSS : on Gj Lf Wy le wre fov4.g-90) Ag (pa.towoosyp SANTTIS #2 oI7PAL Journ.As. Soc. 1836.] Note on Grecian Sculpture in Upper India. 567 Malay empire of Johdére. This range of mountains seems to be a continuation, if I may so term it, of the broken chain running down the peninsula through the States of Quédah, Perak, Salangore, Stingie- ujong, Rumbéwe, Jellaboo, and Srimenanti, terminating near Point Romania, and probably having their origin in the lofty ranges which overlook the vast steppes of Northern Asia. VI.—Notle on the discovery of a relic of Grecian Sculpture in Upper India. By Lieut.-Col. L. R. Stacy. Plate XXXI. [In a letter to the Editor, dated Aligarh, 29th February, 1836.] I have the pleasure to enclose two sketches exhibiting the obverse and reverse of what appears to me a Grecian perirranterion (Mepippayrnpiov (1) in stone (Italian, tazza*). The block, which is three feet in width, three feet ten inches high, and one foot four inches thick at the base, is of the hard red sandstone with white spots, which is found so plentifully in the Agra district, particularly in the neighbourhood of Fattehpir Sikré, and of which the greater number of the ancient build- ings at Agra are constructed. - This relic was given to me by a friend at Mathura : it is in a very mutilated state, but fortunately sufficient development of it remains to determine, I think, its original character and use. The obverse represents SrteNus inebriated ; he is reclining on a low seat or throne, supported on either side by a young male and female Grecian. Two minor figures support the knees: the attitude of Sizznvs, the drooping of the head, the lips, and powerless state of the limbs, give an extremely accurate representation of a drunken man. ‘The figures of the youth and maiden are also in appropriate keeping. The whole is evidently the work of an able artist, who could not possibly, in my opinion, have been a native of Hindustan. The reverse appears to have been executed by a less skilful person, and the figures carry an Indian style about them. The back-ground represents a grove, and the trees are loaded with fruit. Four figures are conspicuous in front: on the left hand a Grecian girl, with short tunic and loose drapery falling to the ground; her sandals are orna- mented; her right hand is grasped by the right hand of the figure next to her, a young man, whose apparel is confined to a jhangi: he has a kerchief round the neck with a tie in front as worn by sailors. Next to this is another female in a Grecian dress ;: she would seem to right, who is in the act of putting on woman’s attire. The bracelets (1) Vide Potrer’s Grecian Antiquities, vol. i, pp. 224 and 262. *. Vide Moszs’ Antique Vases, Pl. 95. 568 Note on Grecian Sculpture in Upper India. [Szer. be highly amused with the person (a young man) immediately on her of this female reach half way to the elbow, and are most elaborately and beautifully executed, but the appearance of this figure is less elegant than that on the extreme left. At the feet of the group are goblets. The heads of the figures are bound with vine leaves. The figures on the obverse are on a larger scale than those on the reverse: the deficiency on the reverse is supplied by trees, forming a grove. The whole supports a circular bason or font measuring sixteen inches in diameter, and which must have been originally about eight inches in depth. As already noticed, this relic is sadly mutilated, and it is probable the bigotry of Muhammadans, (who perhaps consi- dered the work connected with Hindu idolatry,) occasioned the injury done to the faces and breasts of all the figures and a great part of the bowl. Enough, however, remains to identify it as representing a scene in the Bacchanalian festivals. For the present I will simply add, that should this piece of sculp- ture prove to be what I conjecture it to be, the correctness of WILTon and Jonss’ (2) opinions will be strongly evidenced, when they asserted a similarity of the gods of the Greeks and Indians, and that this led to intermarriages, and thus the former merged into and were ulti- mately lost sight of in the Indian community. (8) Norre.—The discovery of a piece of sculpture bearing evident reference to Greek mythology, if not boasting as unequivocally of the beauty and perfection of Grecian sculpture, might excite less surprize after the elaborate display we have lately had of coins found in Upper India and in the Panjab with Grecian legends, and a combination of Hindu and Greek deities. Yet, in fact, the latter offer no explanation to the former—on the contrary, they relate exclusively to a period comparatively modern, when the worship of Mithra spread through the world with the rapidity of the element of which he was the type, and superseded ina great measure the more an- cient superstitions ; whereas the worship of Bacchus—or of Sitenus, his wine-inspired counsellor, must belong to a much more remote period— nor can we trace any clue to it in the present mythology of the Hindus. True there have been traditions preserved in the West, of Baccuus’ expedition to India, and of the easy conquest every where following the steps of the hero who could make rivers run with wine—and fought with an army of laughing Bacchantes aad satyrs. (2) Vol. i. p. 221, Asiatic Researches. (3) This opinion of WiLTon’s is quoted in ConpErR’s History of India. I cannot immediately say in which vol. of the As. Researches it is to be found. 1836. ] Note on Grecian Sculpture in Upper India. 569 The Dionysiacs of Nonnus have been quoted by Colonel Winrorp, and analysed by Professor WiLson in our Researches—but without hinting at their hero having been grafted on the pantheistic system of India. Nishapur, Déva-Nahushanagar, and other towns, have been pointed out as the site of Nysa, Nicea, or Dionysiopolis, where the extravagant rites of Dionysos’ worship were celebrated with the greatest pomp :—where, according to some authorities, he was born— where, according to others, he founded a city in honor of a damsel, Nica#a, whom he encountered in his expedition through Persia and Bactria :—but all is vague and uncertain on the subject. The Indian origin indeed of the religion of Baccuus, long ago asserted and believed, has lately come to be suspected from the want of any arguments in its favor but a few slight resemblances of names and ceremonies. Professor A. W. ScHLEGEL expressly denies in his Indian Library, that the Greeks had, previous to the conquests of ALEXANDER, any idea of an expedition of Baccuus to or from India*. The author on whose authority this opinion is repeated, Mr. T. Keiecut.ey, thus traces the origin of the confusion :— «© When ALExanver and his army had penetrated to the modern ~Cabul, they found ivy and wild vines on the side of Mount Merus and on the banks of the Hydaspes: they also met processions, accompanied by the sound of drums and parti-colored dresses, like those worn in the Bacchic orgies of Greece and Lesser Asia. The flatterers of the conqueror took thence occasion to fable that Dionysius had, like Hercutzs and their own great king, marched as a conqueror throughout the east: had planted there the ivy and the vine, had built the city of Nysa, and named the fountain Merus from the circum- stance of his birth from the thigh of Zeus. At length, during the time of the Greco-Bactric kingdom, some Greek writers, on whom it is probable the Brahmans imposed, as they have since done on the Englisht, gave out that Dionysus was a native Indian, who having taught the art of wine-making in that country, made a conquering expedition through the world to instruct mankind in the culture of the vine and other useful arts. And thus the cultare of the vine came to Greece from a land which does not produce that plant! This last is the absurd hypothesis which we have seen renewed in our own days, and supported by all the efforts of ingenious ety- mology !’” Colonel Stacy’s group may throw a new light on this curious question. There can be no doubt as to the personage represented by the principal figure—his portly carcass, drunken lassitude, and * KrerGHTLey’s Mythology of Greece, 170. t+ Alluding to Col. Wrirorp. 4a 570 Description of some Gramineous Plants. [Supr. wine-wreathed forehead, stamp the individual: while the drapery of his attendants pronounces them at least to be foreign to India, what- ever may be thought of S1nunvs’ own costume, which is certainly highly orthodox and Brahmanical. If the sculptor were a Greek, his taste had been somewhat tainted by the Indian beau ideal of female beauty —in other respects his proportions and attitudes are good—nay, supe- rior to any specimen of pure Hindu sculpture we possess: and consi- dering the object of the group—to support a sacrificial vase (probably of the juice of the grape)—it is excellent. It would be time well be- stowed to survey all the temples and antiquities of Mathura, in search for other specimens of Grecian art. Colonel Sracy can have no greater inducement to undertake this pleasing task, than the posses- sion of the highly interesting relic which we have made a faint at- tempt to introduce to the eye of our readers in the accompanying lithograph.—Eb. VII.—Description of some Grasses which form part of the Vegetation in the Jheels of the district of Sylhet. By Witi1am Grirritus, Esq. Assistant Surgeon, Madras Establishment. Zizania ? cruiaTa. Spreng Syst. il. p. 1386; Kunth Agr.p.10. Leersia citiaTa. Roxb. Fl. Ind. p. 207. Puarus cruiatus. Retz. Obs. 5. p. 23. Gramen in aquosis proveniens, culmis gracilibus basi longe repen- tibus, articulis cylindraceis pubescentibus, ceeterum levibus. Folia subglaucescentia, linearia, acuta, supra lineata et tactu scabra, margine subsimplici scabro. Spice pauce, distantes, subsecundz, in paniculam nutantem alter- natim disposite. : Spicule solitariz, in apice cyathiformi pedicelli curvati articulate, subsessiles, uniflore. Glumez null, nisi cupulam membranaceam apicis pedicelli glumam existimes. Pale 2, chartaceo-coriacee, compresso-carinate, mutice, obtuse mucronate, brevissime stipitate, stipite crasso rotundato; exterior 5-venia, vena media (carina) duabusque marginalibus denticulato- ciliatis, duabus intermediis subglabris, interveniis scabris ; interior 3-venia, paullo brevior, carina denticulato-ciliaté, intervenio scabro, ceeterum leviuscula. Lodicule 2 carnose, acinaciformes, integre, glabre. Stamina 6, antheris longe exsertis. Vol. V. PUXXIV. Tour As, Soc. SMAw IAS : s : 3 8 S Tour As, Soe. RR NN RA Da ios ect eae NSS OL >: iis W. Grofith del. Sept? 1635. Lixania ? ciliata. , SL AG A o —— Vel. Ve PLXXIV, AB. Tasting Lith! Press. Coleulte. Petamochloa Reteii. 1836.] Description of some Gramineous Plants. 571 Ovarium ovato-oblongum, glabrum. Styli 2. Stigmata plumosa, divisionibus ramosis, ratione stylorum longa. Caryopsis .... Legimus in aquosis Jumalpore, in plagis inundatis, Jheels verna- cule dictis, Sylhet confinibus ; in collibus Khasiensibus prope Nunklow ; et nuperius in regione Assamica alta; annis 1835-36. With regard to this grass, we have Mr. Brown’s authority (Prodr. Fl. Nov. Holl. ed. Nees 1. p. 67, sub Leptaspide) for its being totally distinct from Pharus, to which it was originally referred by Rerzivs. Mr. Brown likewise points out (loc. cit.) that this and the succeeding, if not retainable in Zzania, will constitute a distinct genus. It will be seen that I have ventured to go farther, and I am only deterred from characterizing this as itself distinct, by the diffi- culty I find in distinguishing it from Leersia, with which genus I am only acquainted through M. Kunrtn’s Agrostographia. Its obvious affinity is with Oryza, from the awnless varieties of which it only dif- fers in the total absence of glumes; the presence of the membranous cup terminating the pedicel in Oryza proving, that it is not to be consi- dered as a modification of these envelopes. PotaMocHLoa. Griff. Syst. Linn. Hezandria Digynia. Order, Nat. Graminee, Juss. Spicule uniflore. Glume null. Palez 2 membranaceo-chartacee, carinate, aperte, exteriore in aristam producta. Lodicule 2. Stamina 6. Styli 2. Stigmata plumosa. Caryopsis...... Gramen fluitans ope vaginarum cellulosarum, dense cespitosum. Folia lata; ligula obsoleta. Panicula effusa erecta; pedicelli infra medium constricti. Poramocuioa Retz. Griff. ZiZANIA? ARISTATA. Kunth, Agr. p. 10. Legrsia AnistaTa. Roxb. Flor. Ind. 2. p. 207. Puarus Aaristatus. Retz. Obs. 5, 23, ex Kunth. Hab. In aquis stagnantibus prope Jumalpore, et copiosissime in inundatis, Jheels dictis, Sylhet confinibus. Legimus florentem Septembre, 1835. Culmi emersi vix pedales, glabri. Immersi longissimi, hinc illine radiculas capillaceo-divisas emittentes. Vagine immerse vel semi-immerse quam maxime cellulose, in- crassate et quasi inflate; emerse longiores cylindracee, minus cellulose. 452 Be Description of some Gramineous Plants. (Serr. Folia in exemplaribus spontaneis semper emersa et erecta*, lanceo- lata, basi cordata, obtusa, apice sub-cucullata, rigida, supra tactu scabra. Panicula erecta, axi ad ejus originem subito angustata; rami infimi subverticillati, divaricati, superiores alternantes, ascendentes. Spicule ramis adpressz, subsecunde, inferiores geminate, inequa- liter pedicellatz, superiores solitariz longius pedicellate. Pedicelli clavati, infra medium constricti, ibidemque annulo rubro Insigniti, spicularum infimarum curvati. Palez sessiles, apicum pedicellorum continue! vix compresse ; exterior major 5-venia, venis denticulato-ciliatis, ceterum parce hirta ; arista continua, recta, scabra, paleam excedens ; interior mutica, acu- Mminata, 3-venia, carina denticulato-scabra, venis lateralibus levibus, pallidis. Lodicule 2, subacinaciformes, magne, extrorsum gibbose et car- nose, introrsum sub-membranacee, glabre vel apice ciliate. Stamina 6. Filamenta longe exserta. Anthere lineares, longe. Ovarium oblongum, glabrum. Stigmata ratione stylorum longiuscula. Caryopsis non visa ; stipitata? It is this genus that appears to me allied to Zizania. It differs, I conceive, materially from the preceding in habit, in the shape and consistence of the pale, which are open during the period of inflo- rescence, and in the outer one being awned. Vossia. Wall. et Griff. Mss. Syst. Linn. Triandria Digynia. Ordo. Nat. Graminee, Jussieu. Char. Gen.—Spica compressa, articulata, rachi flexuos4 excavata. Spiculz in singulo articulo due, altera sessili, altera pedicellata, biflore. Glumez 2 dissimiles, exterior chartaceo-cartilaginea, plana, apice in cuspidem producta; interior chartacea, mutica, carinato-navicularis. Flosculi hyalini, mutici; superior (interior) hermaphroditus (in spi- cula pedicellata seepius masculus), bivalvis 3-venius. Lodicule 2, cuneate, dentate. Stamina 3. Styli 2. Stigmata plumosa. Caryopsis. . Flosculus inferior masculus, bivalvis, bivenius ! Gramen procerum, fluitans, cespitosum. Culmi 3—4-stachyi. Folia longissima, acuminatissima, plana, vena centrali crassa alba. Ligula indivisa, dense ciliata. Diximus in memo- riam b. Johannis Georgii Vossii, poetee Germanorum dulcissimi, eru- * In exemplaribus in horto botanico Calcutte cultis natantia, oblongiora et teneriora. CTPA) 994.) » WT supeen, og 6! pep “aunsd png Uiniyong . Wrz | arco DIPSSO . Le Vet. Ve FE. XXL Ludimun Sty yramen del Vossia procera. We Griffith: aaalysin del. SD, Tessa i's 459° Preis — (eal 1836. ] Description of some Gramineous Plants. 573 ditissimi, poematum grecorum et latinorum, imprimis Georgici Virgi- liani translatoris et commentatoris locupletissimi, rerum botanicarum et agrestium insigniter periti. Vossta PRocERA. Wall. et Griff. Mss. Iscuamum cuspipatum, Rowxb. Flor. Ind. ed. Carey, 1. p. 325. Kunth, Agr. 1. p. 516. Hab. In inundatis vernacule Jheels dictis prope Hubbeganje, flumi- nis Barak, Bengale orientalis. Florentem invenimus mense Septem- bris, 1835. Gramen glaucescens, in aquis stagnantibus leniter fluentibus pro- fundis nascens. Culmi immersi longissimi, crassi, cellulosi, radi- culas capillaceas ad geniculas emittentes, emersi 3—4-pedales, vagi- nis laxis, compyessiusculis, tactu scabris undique tecti. Vagina- rum axille gemmifere ; colla dense barbata. Ligula brevis truncata. Folia lineari, ensiformia, basi subcordata, longissime subulato-acu- minata, 2, 23 pedalia, supra parce pubescentia, infra glabra, vena centrali crassa, alba, supra plana, subtus prominula, marginibus car- tilagineis antrorsum denticulatis. Spice terminales, bine vel terne, rarius quaterne, digitate, 6—8- unciales, patentes, subnutantes, laterales subsessiles, rudimento alterius interdum adjecto, terminalis pedunculata, insertionibus cartilagineis plus minus hispidis. Rachis introrsum planiuscula, extrorsum con- vexa ; flexuris dextrorsis sinistrorsisque, marginibus scabris. Spicule pedicellatz, infimz summezeque tabescentes. Pedicelli spicularum inferio- rum articulis paullo longiores. Gluma exterior dorso plana, venoso- striata, apice producta in cuspidem ensiformem, longam, glumam ipsam fere bis superantem, rectam, vel subundalatam, venoso-striatam, marginibus denticulato-scabris. Interior navicularis, carina obliqua a medio supra scabra, breviter mucronata, irregulariter venosa, vena centrali nunc incompleta, inter- mediis incompletis et seepius, presertim spicule sessilis, cum vena cen- trali arcuatim confluentibus. Palez flosculi exterioris masculi membranacee, complanate, bivenie ! exterior apiculo brevi pubescente: marginibus mutuo involutis sub- ciliatis. Lodicule 2, carnose, maxime, cuneate, angustiores quam in flosculo hermaphrodito, dentate. Anthere longe exsertz, lineares, lutez. Pollen globosum, inzquale, leve. Rudimentum feeminei nullum. Palez flosculi interioris hermaphroditi consimiles, sed exterior trive- nia. Lodicule staminaque ut in mare. Ovarium subobovatum, glabrum. Styli duo, umbone nullo interjecto. 574 Description of some Gramineous Plants. [Supr. Stigmata ratione stylorum longa, ramis denticulatis. Caryopsis. . . Spicule stipitate flosculi minores, et superior interior rarius her- maphroditus. Obs. Genus habitu quodammodo Tripsaci, Hemarthriz accedens, sed discrepans precipue pedicellis flosculorum exteriorum glumisque interioribus spicularum sessilium solutis, nec axi adnatis, flosculisque exterioribus bipaleaceis masculis, nec unipaleaceis neutris. Ab Ischemo diflert preecipue paled exteriore flosculi hermaphroditi (supe- rioris) mutica. Panicum Brunonianum. Wall. et Griff. Mss. Panicula effusa, spiculis 1 vel 2 infimis sessilibus et in axis excava- tionibus seminidulantibus, reliquis exsertis seepissime solitariis, rachilla in aristam spiculam duplo superantem producta, foliis linearibus 3- veniis vaginisque glabris, ligulis 3-dentatis. Hab. In aquis leniter currentibus profundis plagarum Bheels dicta- rum prope Goalnagar ; florens Septembre. Gramen fiuitans : culmi longissimi, compressiusculi, ad geniculos ra- dicantes. Vaginarum colla nuda. Ligulz dens intermedius minor. Folia linearia, 2—3-uncialia, obtusiuscula, 3-venia, marginibussubsimplicibus denticulatis. Panicula terminalis, ambitu ovata, subglabra, axi inferne tetragona et excavata. Spicule 1 vel 2 infime in excavationibus semi- nidulantes ; reliquee exserte szpissime solitarie ; rachilla scabra ultra spiculam quamque si unica, ultra terminalem si geminata, in aristam subulatam, antrorsum denticulatam producta. Gluma exterior minima, membranacea, evenia, subcrenulata, decolorata; interior lanceolata, acuta, mutica, venosa (sub-13-venia,) marginibus parum involutis subciliatis. Flosculi dissimiles; exterior masculus, duplo triplove major: palea exterior glume interiori similis, sed scabrella et margines magis involuti; interior duplo minor breviorque, membranacea, glabra, apice bifida, cente setiformi minimo interdum interjecto, venis 2 indistinctis infra-apicem evanidis. Lodicule 2, palez interiori omnino externe, oblonge, subrhomboidez, integre. Stamina 3, antheris rubro-sanguineis. Paleze floris interioris foeminei membranacez, mu- tice, ovato-lanceolate, exterior evenia! interior latior, magis obtusa et involuta, incomplete bivenia. Staminum rudimenta tria. Lodicule 2 anguste, interdum coalite ? Styli 2, ima basi coaliti, longi; stigmata plumosa, purpurascentia, ratione stylorum longissima.. Caryopsis non visa. This species belongs to the last section of this extensive genus, as given in Mr. Brown’s Prodromus ; it is interesting, as it seems to be the only species of the section hitherto found out of New Holland. 1836.] Notes on Dehli Point, Pulo-Tinghie, &c. 578 In the disposition of the sexes it agrees with Isachne, but differs from it in habit, in the relative size of its glumes, and in the consist- ence of its palee. From Chameraphis this section differs only, we are told by Mr. Brown, in the number of its styles. The curious prolongation of the rachilla beyond the terminal spicula likewise occurs in some genuine Panica. REFERENCES. Plate XXIII. Vossia procera. Figs. 1, 2. Portions of a spike viewed on different faces. 3, Spicula detached. 4, Exterior glume viewed on its inner face. 5, Outer palea of the inner hermaphrodite flower three-veined (by a fault in the transfer the central vein in the original drawiog has been left out.) 6, Inner palea of ditto two-veined. 7, Outer palea of exterior male flower, two- veined. 8, Inner ditto, two-veined. 9, Inner glume, viewed laterally and on its in- ner face. 10, Pollen. 11, Ovarium, or rather Pistillum, with the two lodicule and the three filaments in situ. 12, Outer view of lodicula. 13, Inner view of ditto, the lateral stamina separate with these. 14, Portion of a branch of the stigma. Plate XXIV. Left half. Zizania? ciliaris. Fig. 1, Spicula. 2, Apex of pedicel, much enlarged. 3, Ditto with lower portion of the outer palea. 4, Lateral view of inner palea. 5, Lateral view of lodicule, stamina and pistillum ; palez removed. 6, Pollen. 7, Pistillum. 8, Portion of a branch of the stigma. 9, Genitalia, relative situation, from a young spicula; anthers removed, and the lodicule displaced. — The same plate, right half. Potamochloa Retzii. Fig. 1, Spicula with its pedicel, that of the second pedicel removed at the time of expansion. 2, Portion of the pedicel, shewing the construction. 3, Outer palea, dorsal face. 4, Inner ditto ditto. 5, Ovarium, stamina and lodicule, the two former in situ, the latter displaced. 6, Pollen. 7, Ovarium, styles and stigmata with the lodicule in situ. 8, One of the divisions of the stigma. 9, Lodicula, inner face. VIII.—Notes on Delhi Point, Pulo-Tinghie, 8c. and on some Pelagic Fossil remains, found in the rocks of Pulo-Ledah. By Wm. Buanp, Esq. Surgeon H. M. S. Wolf. [Accompanying specimens presented to the As. Soc. 4th July, and deposited in the Museum, next to those presented by Dr. Warp from Penang and Queda. ] Where the Malay peninsula terminates in the China sea, there is a tongue of land, called by the natives Delhi Point, somewhere about 104 E. longitude, for it is not very correctly laid down. Reefs are found here, running to the southward and eastward, upwards of a mile at low water. Along shore, for the space of two or three miles, is strewed with large masses of scorie many feet thick, hard, and emitting a metallic sound. Specimens Nos. 1 and 4 will show the kind of vesicular masses mentioned ; long lines of perpendicular strata are found stretching generally parallel to the shore, from three to 576 Notes on Dehli Point, Pulo-Tinghie, &c. [Sepr: eighteen inches in thickness, of which No. 6 is a specimen. Indu- rated clayslate, No. 9, is likewise seen in layers running parallel, and in juxta-position to Nos. 1 and 2, of a few inches in breadth. Quartz was found, No. 5, in layers from one to two inches in thickness, accompanying the others and occasionally crossing them, and again continuing its course: imbedded masses of siliceous matter occurred both in the scorie and in the strata. A nucleus, five or six feet in diameter, was examined, which presented the appearance as if lava in a liquid form had been forced up from below, with a gyrating motion ; circular layers having different shades of colour becoming wider and more extended, and were found edging away into straight lines parallel to the other strata. Of the tube marked No. 2, many were found from half an inch to two inches diameter; whilst No. 3 was got at the outer edge of the stratification. Of the remarkable specimen No. 10, abundance were seen, always standing up an edge: above the general level, and occasionally many feet in length, a piece might be found large enough to furnish forth the reticulations of a good-sized Gothic window. At the N.E. point of the reef, within a few yards of the sandy beach, and dry at low water, was found a fossil tree, of which No. 11 is a specimen, standing at least 15 feet high and of considerable diameter, attached toa mass of rock of the same kind, and so good was the resemblance to a decayed tree, that some of the seamen called out, ‘ Come and see a tree grilled into stone by the heat.’ The fossil in question must have been in a decayed state previous to its exposure to the mineralizing process, and it is the more remarkable, as it now stands, to all appearance, as it originally stood when alive :— it is the same as No. 9, composed of argillaceous schist. A specimen of coral No. 7, which has been exposed to the same general igneous agency as the masses scattered around, and found in the masses themselves, Madrepore No. 8, but the whole of the reef has coral of recent growth scattered over it, in all states and ages. Our stay on this point only extended to a few hours: little opportunity was given for minute observation, but it is a field well worthy the attention of future travellers in that quarter. Pulo-Tinghie will be found in the charts to the northward and east- ward of Delhi Point: this island rises to a considerable altitude, and terminates in a graceful truncated cone, with a lower cone seen to the southward of the former. The general surface presents irregular ridges radiating from the cone as a centre, running down to the circumfer- ence, 1. e. the water’s edge, which disposition of surface often obtains in volcanic islands. Be this, however, as it may; we found Pulo- 1836.) Notes on Dehli Point, Pulo-Tinghie, &c. 577 Tinghie densely covered with jungle, most difficult to penetrate, with- out more time than our public duties permitted ; hence the specimens are not numerous, and were found along shore, generally from masses lying about. Nostratum was seen. The island terminates to the east- ward in a high reddish coloured cliff, but at which we had no oppor- tunity of landing. Nine specimens marked Pigeon island, from a moderately high and cliffy islet some miles to the southward of Pulo-Tinghie, obtaining its name from the abundance of a fine cream-coloured pigeon, having the wings and tail tipped with black ; the same bird which is found on the small islands on the Tenasserim coast. No. 25, from a large mass partly beneath the surface of the sea. 21, high cliffs around, as well as No. 22. Returning from the eastward, we had an opportunity of examining a group of small islands called Pulo-Romania. These islets, about two miles to the southward of Point Romania on the Malay peninsula, are partially covered with wood, and appear to be formed chiefly of granite of two kinds, which was seen checquered by fissures in all directions, and intersected by Nos. 34 and 35, found standing above the general level in narrow ridges, the granite being more easily disintegrated than the intersections themselves. No. 31 found in layers of various ,thickness, and No. 29 in large irregular masses some 15 feet in length, on shore or partly immersed in the sea. Enclosed are thirty specimens, from a remarkable group of islands, lying between Jan Salang, (Juak Ceylon) and Pulo-Pinang, parallel to the kingdom of Quédah and im sight of the mainland. Passing over ma- ny islands visited, all of which will be found worthy the attention of the geologist, and the ornithologist, as well-as the conchologist, I shall only mention Pulo-Ledah, as one of considerable importance, from the circumstance of pelagic fossil remains being found in the rocks. Pulo-Ledah dedarat, literally inthe Malay language, ‘ Tongue island in shore,’ to distinguish this from another Pulo-Ledah de laut, or ‘ Tongue island at sea.’ This island is about a mile anda half in circumference, and rises to the height of 4 or 500 feet, crowned by a castellated looking rock with perpendicular strata: the whole appears composed of limestone, having a considerable proportion of siliceous matter deposited in it, with veins of quartz a few inches in breadth occa- sionally intersecting it. The general rock was found stratified from one to three or four feet in thickness, lying at an angle about 45° dipping to the eastward ; all the surface, wherever exposed, is rough and uneven, of which Nos. 15and 24 are specimens. Numerous caverns were found whose roofs not being so exposed were more smooth, 4F 578 Notes on Dehli Point, Pulo-Tinghie, &c. (Serr. which caves have been evidently formed by the action of the waves impinging against the rocks ; which action is still going on in certain situations. Some caverns were situated higher up, and not now exposed to the same agency, but it was noticed in a few of them that the entrances were smooth, similar to those in various parts of the world, which have been used, and smoothed down by the ingress and egress of wild animals : it turned out, however, in this case, that the agent that had worn these entrances was man himself, for these caves furnish him with troglodytic abodes during the season for collecting the nests of the Hirundo esculenta. Your attention may be more particularly called to the north side of Pulo-Ledah, where will be found large masses of the same rock, from 20 to 30 feet in length and breadth, and 10 feet in thickness, lying in juxta-position, and no doubt originally deposited en masse, but having been raised unequally, have been broken into their present form and appearance. These masses were found rich in fossil remains ; quantities of testaceous deposits were seen in all directions, partly above the general surface, undergoing disintegration along with the matrix in which they were imbedded. Of the fossil nautilus, No. 16, many were seen, as well as some others, concerning which some doubt may remain whether or not they are ammonites. As to the nautilus no doubt can exist, for the plain concave septe dividing the chambers of the shell are well marked, with the siphuncle in the middle. Had time and better tools permitted, better specimens would have been procured; but the matrix was found very indurated, and it requires time to take such specimens out of hard stone, in a perfect state. The labourer, always worthy of his hire, would here be richly repaid for his time and trouble. I add the rough sketch of a shell as it was a lying in the matrix, and of the natural size, which gives a tolerable idea of its general appearance. Siliceous cylinders No. 22, occur frequently, and a back bone was found in a fossilized state: from the round cup- like appearance of the vertebre, it is most probably that of a fish. Pulo-Ledah is one of the Lancavies, as well as Pulo-Trotto, (Giant’s island,) an island, high, mountainous, and worthy of being better known ; and Pulo-Tloer (Egg island) is a small one ; but the whole of the islands in question will be found interesting, as on this subject of fossil remains many of your correspondents in India are devoting their time and attention with great success. Iam sorry our time among the islands mentioned was so limited, but it is enough that I have pointed them out as a field worthy of future research, as well as the main land opposite. - 1836.] Fossil remains from the Sub-Himdlayas. 579 IX.—Fossil Remains of the smaller Carnivora from the Sub-Himdlayas. By Lieut. W. E. Baker and Lieut. H. M. Duranp, Engineers. The specimens which are the subject of the following note form a part of the Dadiptr Collection, and comprise varieties of the genera, Felis, Canis, and Gulo. The comparison of such, with their existing representatives, must necessarily be less satisfactory than that of the large Pachydermatous genera, which being local in their habitats either contain few species, as the Elephant, Hippopotamus, and Tapir, or when, as in the Rhi- noceros, the varieties are more numerous, the size of the animals, and the striking peculiarities of their osteology have claimed for them a minute description and comparison from Cuvier. On the other hand, the smaller carnivorous tribes have a far wider distribution, and their species are as numerous and as varied as the climates under which they are found ; their distinctions are chiefly drawn from the exter- nal characters of the animals. Minute differences in their osteology, if they exist at all, escape the attention of the naturalists who describe them, and would, in fact, possess little interest except for the fos- silist. We should not be warranted in pronouncing any particular fossil to belong to an extinct species, without having previously compared it with all the known varieties of its genus ; and even were such exten- sive means of comparison in our power, its result could not be deci- sive*, so long as there remained unexplored regions, whence new varieties might be derived. We shall, therefore, content ourselves with negative conclusions drawn from comparison of our fossils, with the skulls of those species only of their existing congeners now in- habiting the neighbouring districts, none other being at our command. Such conclusions, we hope, will not be without geological interest ; as, if we succeed in establishing one or two points of marked difference, they will be sufficient proof that the animals now inhabiting these provinces are not the lineal descendants of those whose remains are entombed in the strata of their soil, and thence may be inferred the occurrence of some great geological change during the lapse of ages, which have intervened between the periods of their several existence. Frxis. ' Of this genus there are traces of several varieties among our fossils, but as the larger ones, with the Hyena and Canis, may form the subject * For instance, in the 52nd No. of the Journal As. Soc. Mr. Hopason de- scribes two new species of gulo and one of felis. 42 580 Fossil remains of the smaller Carnivora [Sepr. of a future paper, we will confine our present notice to the Cat. The cranium represented in fig. 1, Pl. XX VII. though somewhat mutilated, is sufficiently perfect for comparison. The most serious injury which it has sustained (as being the only one affecting the measurements) is a slight crush or compression, which has apparently flattened, and per- haps widened the cranium. The proportions between the fossil and the skull of a common-sized wild or jungle cat are as follows :—the length from posterior of occipital condyle to anterior of canine tooth being taken as the unit or modulus, and those dimensions only being col- lated, in which the greatest differences exist. The two skulls may be understood to correspond in other respects. a ET Recent. Fossil. Length from post. of occipital condyle to ant. of canine tooth, assumed at .... cece ee cece cece ce we cee scenecs 1,000 1,000 Greatest breadth of cranium opposite mastoid processes,.. 908 ,581 Height of occiput from lower margin of foramen magnum to top of transverse ridge, ..-...-..--2sseeseseseeee 301 3333 Breadth across the occipital condyles, .......-..-2+ee+-. 9267 3346 Ditto measured externally across most prominent part of Aire Ofer O Se eeetateiel lel iets suis asc clk aide) cians In nauatah ee reuete 427 3489 Height of orbit perpendicular, but measured in plane of ODDIERS MMA UMN siete alle avers ckanavote's) Oo ee 2 Mey ¥ 1836. ] rom the Sub-Himalayas. 581 y belonged to asmaller animal than that which owned the cranium: it presents no difference worthy of note, from the lower jaw of the wild eat. The humerus, tibia, and metatarsal bones, forming part of this interesting little group, appear to have belonged to the same _indivi- dual as the lower jaw, and it is curious enough that their present bond of connection is the plate of a small crocodile. The carpal, meta- carpal and phalangal bones represented in fig. 3, obtained from the same locality, though at different times, may possibly be assigned to the same or a similar animal. GuLo. Of this genus we possess the fossil skulls of two individuals, one of which, represented in fig. 4, is nearly perfect : the lower jaws have been separated at their symphysis and otherwise somewhat mutilated, but as they were not found attached to the cranium, we may consider ourselves fortunate in having obtained them at all. The second cranium, fig. 7, has suffered considerable mutilation, and is without the lower jaws : we have, however, inserted it in the plate, because though other- wise less perfect, it has escaped a crush, which appears to have flat- tened fig. 4. Some differences of proportion between the two fossils would be accounted for under this supposition. The recent skulls with which we have compared the above men- tioned fossils belong to an animal known by the Hindustani name Bou y=¥ identical, or nearly so, with the Cape Rate/, (Gulo Capensis, Desm.) In classing the Biju and Ratel under genus Gulo, we follow the common system of arrangement; though, as remarked by Cuvisr*, both the number and character of their teeth would rather place them with the Mustela Putorius. They appear, in fact, to be indebted to their plantigrade motion alone for a place among the Gluttons. The fossils now under consideration correspond in dentition with the Rated and Biju, and the following table will shew that their resemblance to the latter in most other respects is very strong. * Tl convient d’autant mieux de comparer le Ratel au Glouton, que ces deux quadrupédes sont A peu pres de méme taille; mais outre que le Glouton a six molaires de plus que le Ratel, le crane de celui-ci est plus large en arriére, son front moins élevé, son orbite moins cerné, ses arcades zygomatiques moins hautes, et l’apophyse coronoide de sa machoireinférieure beaucoup moins haute, plus large, et plus obtuse. Les rapports du Ratel avec le putois, d’apres ses dents et sa téte, sont certainement plus importans que les différences de marche. Ossee - mens fossiles.—Tom. IV. Chap. VI. 582 Fossil remains of the smaller Carnivora {Sepr. aa er oa Fossil. Biju. |— A—— Fig. 4.—Fig. 7. Extreme length from posterior of occipital condyles to an- terior of incisors, taken as the modulus, and assumed at) 1,000 | 1,000 1,000 Preadth measured across mastoid processes, ......-..... _0,581 } 0,592 0,610 Greatest breadth of cranium opposite mastoid processes, -.| 0,457 | 0,443 0,474 Least ditto ditto at temporal fosse, 55 Men Seep nor cr atte 0,226 | 0,258 0,262 Height of occiput from inf. margin of foramen magnum COMSUps CMOCCIPItale Eide em emelneein es eicie. 2 ~ Detail of Measurement. fig.1.|fig.2.15 & 8.|fig.7.1c5 as ins. | ins. } ins. | ims. Jinches. Extreme length from post. of occipital condyles to anterior Of INCISOM CECE, 2... se sieie chive) sie SIS ER te 5,51} 5,08] 4,09 Ditto ditto ditto canine ditto, .................+--- | 3,27) .. | 5,13} 4,86) 3,83 Breadth measured across mastoid processes, ...... | 1,67) .. | 3,26] 3,10) 1,66 Greatest breadth of cranium opposite mastoid pro- , CESSES5 te ise wie = cies, Aisles ogabe..o'k aialabotaianre. pik yeneens bie L,GOM cic 2,44! 2,41 1,71 Least ditto ditto at temporal fosse, .............. 1,28) .. | 1,42} 1,33) 0,79 Height of occiput from lower margin of occipital foramen to top of transverse ridge, .......-.... 1,09; .. | 1,69} 1,741 0,90 Breadth from point to point of styloid le nia +s | -ee | 1,99} 2,00) 1,14 Ditto across the occipital condyles,. BN aN 1,13) .. | 1,33] 1,26] 0,96 Ditto of frontal from point to point of post. “orbitary APOPHYSeS, «ewer ese eee e ee cece cece SacbRia Sa LSOlharee 1,80} 1,59] 1,13 Greatest breadth across zygomatic arches, eves 2,72) vse lists QOh 2 ecules ae Breadth measured externally across superior canine TEE at Oe eee Seer, CE ee ee, Ue 1,00) <3. | 1,30), 2alee oe Ditto ditto most prominent points of line of molars, | 1,60); .. | 1,87|-1,65] 1,22 Perpendicular diameter of occipital foramen, ...... 0,45} ., | 0,50] 0,55) .. TTOLIZOMtALLATEGONCUETOS coc nie) stale ceremony xteieielo ae 0,55) .. | 0,62] 0,60) 0,51 Length from exterior of incisors to anterior of pa- TataleSUMUS 5 calete eal Aner eats US ad iti OIGD OsOo 1552/0 22 4p 2540200. Ditto from anterior of palatal sinus to lower mar- gin of occipital foramen, ....-...-++2+- see 1,68} .. | 2,56) 2,70) 2,05 Ditto occupied by molars and canine teeth, taken together, 0... ...e cece cece ce ce cece erence sietisle de, Hd ee| cee) || OSto aoe TAR) Ditto ditto molarsialanes sayy kere tangs ola eel ole a 0,95) 3. | 1,25) Ti 59 Diameter of orbit perpendicular, but measured in plane of orbit’s margin, ........+. .-+-- 5¢ 0,84} .. ; 0,62} .. | -0,58 Ditto ditto from point of post. orbitary apophysis to ant. margin Of orbit,....-.-- s+ sess ee eee ee eee fe Bo Punish arc 0,74 Greatest antero-posterior diameter of canine tooth, 0,19) . | 0,39) 0,34) 0,18 Width of tuberculous tooth, (in Felts and Gulo,) . 0,14; .. | 0,40) 0,35) .. Lower Jaw.—Length from posterior of condyle to anterior of canine, .......- essere ee ee eevee Ble reer’ af [Syd geOll = v6 at Ditto from ditto ditto to posterior of molars, ... fe (SO,OS/RISSSE o.. Es Ditto occupied by molars and canine teeth, taken together, ....-...+eseeeee eee Soman mhadhdés atels sey) | WSUS late re ste Ditto ditto molars alone, Breeds ele ectene sucked abel atowele cp “1G -- | 0,78) 1,37) «. fe Depth of lower jaw taken in front of carnivorous TOOLS ete ta wickets Metetspetats iets Meraloveneberie ener euale-ctenave -. | 0,44) 0,671 .. 0,45 Greatest antero-posterior diameter of canine tooth, -> | 0,20] 0,38) .. | 0,13 1836.] Continuation of a Paper on Heights of Barometer, &c. 585 X.—Continuation of a Paper (Journal, May, 1835), on the Heights of ihe Barometer as affected by the Position of the Moon. By the Rev. R. Everest. In a comparison of the heights of the Barometer with the position of the moon in declination, (See Journal, May, 1835,) I stated that it appeared, that though the greatest depressions coincided, or nearly so, with the times of the moon’s maximum declination, yet that many of the greatest elevations held a similar situation. To ascertain whether this idea was well-founded, the daily barometric heights were taken from the 4 p. m. column of the Meteorological Registers of the Journal; then the differences either in excess or defect from the monthly mean, were noted and placed in different columns accord- ing to the state of the moon in declination, as given in the Nautical Almanacks for noon of the same day. Then the average of each column was taken for the year, and continuing the process for the 13 years of which the Meteorological Registers are extant, a general average was finally taken of the whole, which came out as follows: Moon’s Decl. ...... pe alll TS ale Sa 5° 0° Average amt. of camiaediadd| F 1. F ; foe from a a ta ne 68 | 055 056 | 055 | 054 052 | If it be objected that this diiference, between the two extremes of the line, of ‘008, be small, we may answer that small as it is, it is nearly ith of the whole amount. The heights of the barometer at London for a period of 24 years were then examined in a similar manner, only that instead of classing the differences in columns according to the number of degrees of the moon’s declination on the same day, they were classed according to the distance of the day on which the observation was taken, from the day of maximum declination. Thus, the number of days from maximum north to maximum south declina- tion being nearly 14, the differences were arranged in 14 columns, numbered in this way : reat A REG IOY VS? 09)! 9 1Q> Seb vapQen. Te acagig and as a whole revolution from one time of maximum declination toits succeeding one is something less than 28 days, a column was occa- sionally left blank to keep the maxima always in the Ist and 14th. This method is rather less troublesome than the former one adopted, but it does not answer so well for a long series of years, as the moon’s maximum declination is very different in different years :—for example, in 1820, it was between 28° and 29°, and in 1829, between 18° and 19°. The average, therefore, was taken for the six years in which the declination was greatest, viz. 1818, 1819, 1820, 18921, 1822, 1823. The maximum declination was then always above 25°, 4a 586 Continuation of a Paper on Heights of Barometer, &c. (Sevr. so that the first column would correspond with the left-hand column of the former classification. North and south declination were then put together, and the results came out thus: Days, ...... 1 2 3 4 5 6 i Average amount of variation -935 | -221 | -223 | 227 | -216 | -218 | -217 from the mean, ... The average was iene taken for nine years, in which the declination was at a medium, say between 26° and 21°, so that the first column would nearly correspond with the second column of the former classifi- cation ; the seventh column being, as before, that on which the decli- nation was least. The years were 1814, 1815, 1816, 1817, 1824, 1825, 1826, 1833, 1834, and the results were: Days. ss = 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Average eee of raintion | ogy -220 | -215 | -200 | -201 | 215 | -225 from the mean, ......... The average was again taken for nine years, in which the declina- tion was least, viz. between 21° and 18°; that is to say, 1810, 1811, 1812, 1813, 1828, 1829, 18380, 1831, 1882. The first column, in this case, would nearly correspond with the third in the classification of the Calcutta barometer. The results were as follows : Days, ....- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Average amount of variation ire aan par aE oma 206 | -214 | -212 | -221 | -228 | -295 | -239 In this last case no increase of variation is perceptible towards the maximum, but then the maximum did not usually exceed 20°, or at the most 21°. I have as yet said nothing about the perigee, because it has been proved in Kurope that the perigee produces some effect on the weather. With a view to ascertain whether the effect produced was the same as that occasioned by the increase of declination, I took the same varia- tions of the London barometer, as before, for 24 years, and arranged them in different columns according to the state of the moon’s semi- diameter on the days on which they were taken. The general aver- age came out thus : )’s 3 diam. 1000" 990" 980" 970" 960" 950" 940" 930” 920" 910” 900" ggo"" Av. Var. Bar. :247 -227 +207 +229 +226 «+219 216 +214 +209 +224 -205 -918 -911 Here there appears a tendency to an increase of variation with an increase of semi-diameter ; but on examining the differences of the Calcutta barometer, no such increase could be made apparent. It remains, therefore, in doubt whether, in this climate, such an increase does exist—or whether, owing to some mistake, yet undetected, it has not been made apparent. Iam inclined to the latter supposi- tion—from this consideration—Ist, If no increase exists, no results eould be traced from it; 2ndly, Ifan increase exists, though not, at 1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 587 present, apparent, some remote results would probably be observed, which might be ascribed to it, as their cause. Thus, with an increase in the variation of the heights of the baro- meter, an increase both of dryness and moisture would follow. As an increase of variation also attends an increase in declination, it is probable that the greatest effect would be perceived when the two causes were in co-operation together. Now as there are certain years in which the moon’s perigee fell onthe same day with her maximum declination, either north or south, it is probable that, in those years, the extremes of weather, both of dryness and moisture, would be experienced. Is this then the case? Are those years in which the day of perigee is the same as the day of maximum declination, also those in which the extremes both of drought and moisture occur! By such results let these speculations be tried. For our present purpose, which is only to obtain some useful indications, the differ- ence between an absolute error and a barren verity is not worth mentioning. rr XI.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Wednesday Evening, the 5th October, 1836. The Rev. Dr. Mint, Vice-President, in the chair. Lieutenants Newzotp and §. Tickenn, proposed at the last meeting, were balloted for, and duly elected Members of the Society. Mr. Vincent TreceEar, proposed at the last meeting, was, upon the favourable report of the Committee of Papers, unanimously elected an honorary member. Mr. G. F. MacCuinrocx was proposed by Mr. MacnacuTen, seconded by Dr. Mitt. The Secretary then read the Report of the Committee of Papers on Mr. C. Browntow’s proposition relative to the publication of the Alif Leila. [See below. ] Resolved— That the Society approve and adopt the Report of the Com- mittee :—that it feels honored by Mr. Brownuow’s desire to publish the work under its auspices ; and that in addition to its own subscription, the prospectus shall be circulated among individual members, and the patro- nage of the Government shall be respectfully solicited to Mr. Browne Low’s undertaking. Library. The following books were presented :— A Discourse concerning the influence of America on thé mind, being the Annual Oration delivered before the American Philosophical Society on the 18th October, 1823, by C. J. Incersoxti, Esq.—by the Society. Notice Historique sur Caaries Tetratir, Esq. Fondateur et President de la Societé d’Histoire Naturelle de Vile Maurice, &c. &c.; by M. Jurien Des Jarpvins—by the Author. 462 588 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Serr. Nouveaux Choix des Poesies Originales des Troubadours; by M. RayNnovarp —by the Author. Opinions on various subjects, dedicated to the Industrious Producers; by Wn. Macsere, Esq.—by the Author. The Indian Journal of Medical and Physical Science—by F. Corbyn, Esq. Editor. Gay’s Fables translated into Bengali Poetry, by Maharaja Kati Kissmn Behadur—by the Translator. Conclusion of the Guldestah, or Nosegay of Pleasure, by Manshi Mannv’ La’t—by the Author. Map of the Indus River and of the neighbouring countries, from the recent surveys, compiled in the Surveyor General’s Office—by Mr. Tassin, Royle’s Himalayan Botany, 9th part—/from the booksellers. Read a letter from the treasurer of the Academy at Bordeaux, Mr. Durrovinies, forwarding by the hands of Dr. Laverene a packet of secds for the Botanic Garden of Calcutta, and requesting in return such seeds from Tibet or other colder parts of India as are likely to thrive in France. The seeds have been made over to Dr. Watticu, who will kindly reply on the subject to Bordeaux. Literary and Antiquarian. _ An account of some of the Petty States lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces, drawn up from the journals and reports of Dr. RicHarpson, was submitted by Mr. E. A. Bhunprexti, Commissioner of these new pro- vinces ; also a sketch of the history of Labong, by the same. Capt. A. Cunnincusam, Engineers, A. D. C., presented to the Society the very extensive collection of statues and other specimens of Bauddha sculpture discovered by him in his exploration of the well known monu- ment or tope in the road between Ghazipur and Benares. The following note on these interesting relics was read. ‘¢ The stone figures, bas-reliefs, and inscriptions were all found near Sarnath, a Buddhist monument about eight miles from Benares. The greater number were dug up within a small space of 10 feet square, and nearly all in an upright position side by side, Along with them were 40 or 50 others now lying near S4rnath, and which were left behind from their being of the same description as those now presented to the Society, and from their being in a less perfect state, and from their wanting inscriptions. I learned from a villager that when JAcarT Sineu the Dewan of Curnru Sineu, Raja of Benares, was digging near Sarnath for building materials for the ganj which now bears his name, his workmen lighted on a small temple the walls of which they carried away—and it was within that temple that these figures were then seen ; but owing to some superstitious feelings on the part of the workmen, no steps were taken at the time for their removal. The three seated female figures, one bearing an inscription, were found in the ruins of a small temple consisting of only two rooms, and the long bas- relief containing the alligator’s heads was discovered in a stone tank 13 feet nine inches square, upon clearing away the rubbish from the pukka terrace which surrounded it. I am induced to offer these figures to the Society, in the hope that the in- scriptions upon their pedestals may be translated, and help to throw some light upon the Buddhist religion, as well as upon Saérnath and the ruins of the differ- ent buildings in its neighbourhood.”’ The special thanks of the Society were voted to Capt. Cunnineuam for this valuable contribution to the Museum. Physical. The Secretary presented on the part of Mr. Dean, Assoc. Mem., some fine fossil specimens lately obtained by him from the bed or banks of the Jumna river. 1836.) Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 589 Mr. Dean had maintained for some time an envoy to explore such parts of the river as he had not been able himself to examine. Out of the produce of this adventure be had selected the specimens now transmitted, because they served to settle the question of the existence of three animals in a fossil state, which had hitherto been doubtful,—or rather which had been for the first time advanced with hesitation from his former collections in the Jumna ;—the camel, the buffalo, and the antelope. They consist of the femur and cranium of the fossil buffalo, about one-sixth larger than the present race ;—fragment of the femur of a camel ; cores of the horns of an antelope, and waterworn portions of the horn of the axis. To make the recognition of these fossils as clear as possible, Mr. Dean had placed side by side of each the corresponding recent bone, so that no doubt could remain of their identity. The splendid discoveries in the Sivalik range have meantime removed all uncertainty on the subject, and have even pointed out two distinct species in the fossil camel, on which a paper has just been print- ed in the Researches. A paper by Messrs. Fanconer and Cauriey was submitted on the fossif bear of the Sivélik range, with drawings pointing out variations from the existing species. The knowledge of this animal is derived from two fine fragments of the head, The chief peculiarities are observable in the teeth, which are constructed more after the type of the higher carnivora than any other described species of the genus. A paper entitled ‘‘ Some remarks on the development of Pollen,’’ was submitted by Dr. W. Grirritx, Mad. Est. Indications of a new genus of insessorial birds—by Mr. B. H. Honeson. A Table of the breadth, current, and depth of the river Satlej, from Hari ke patan to its junction with the Indus at Mithankot, was communi- cated by Capt. C. M. Wane. Also a note on the spring of Lohand Khdér—by the same officer. Two large cases containing a fine collection of butterflies, moths and other insects from Si/het, was presented by Mr. Grorece Loczg, C. S. Observations concerning certain interesting phenomena manifested in individuals born blind, on their restoration to sight, were communicated by Dr. F. H. Brerrt. Report of the Committee of Papers on the Autre Lama. The Committee having deputed the examination of Major Macan’s manuscript to those of its Members most eminent for their knowledge of the Arabic language and literature, think it will be more satisfactory to submit the separate minutes of those gentlemen to the Society than to embody them in a general report. They are unanimous in their opinion of the genuineness, general cor- rectness, and value of the manuscript, as well asin advocating the support of Mr. Browntow’s undertaking: and they think the patronage of the Government should also be respectfully solicited. For the correction of the press, they believe Mr. Browniow to have made the best arrange- ment ;—nevertheless, as he has solicited permission to publish the work under the auspices of the Society, it may be proper that a file of the sheets as printed should be furnished to the Secretary to be occasionally submitted to Members of the Committee and other competent judges of their accuracy. They consider the price fixed by Mr. Brownriow, 48 Company’s rupees for four royal octavo volumes of 600 pages, to be very moderate, and they trust he will experience the advantage of it in a full list of subscribers. For the Committee, J. Prinsep, Secy. 590 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Supt. Minute by Mr. W. H. Macnaghten. Of the genuineness of Mr. Browntow’s manuscript, there cannot, I think, be the slightest doubt. I have compared the third volume of the «© Contes Inedits,” by M. Tresurien, with the fourth volume of the ma- nuscript, and, as far as I can judge from reading three or four of the commencing and concluding pages, and looking over some of the inter- mediate pages of each of the six last tales, I believe that they corre- spond almost exactly. I have also carefully looked through the third volume of the MSS. The anecdotes which are at the end of the third volume of the French trans- lation, are contained in this volume; but they do not, in the Arabic MSS. appear to be so numerous. They are chiefly introduced between the stories styled ‘ Histoire d’Adjib et de Gherib,” (the last story of the first volume of Tresutien,) and that styled “ Des ruses de Dalilah et de la fille Zeinub,” (the first story of the second volume of TresuTien.) I have not had time to compare all the “ Anecdotes.” They are not entered in the same order as in the French version, owing to which the comparison would necessarily be a work of time—but I have been able to compare the anecdotes styled ‘‘ Divorce et second mariage de Hind fille de Naaman,” page 464, and that styled “ Conduite du Vizier Ibn Aamir,” page 487, and I find that they minutely correspond with the Arabic MSS. On comparing the story styled “ Histoire d’ Abdallah I’ habitant de la Mer et d’Abdallah I’ habitant de la Terre*,” I was much struck with the mutilated state of the story as contained in the French version. I sub- join aversion in English of the French and of the Arabic stories. It will be seen at once, how much the former has been shorn of its fair proportions. Story of Abdallah the inhabitant of the Sea, and of Abdallah the inhabitant of the Land. There was oncea fisherman, called Abdallah, who was father of a numerous family. All his riches consisted in his nets, with which he went every day to the sea shore to supply the wants of his family ; he lived in this way from day to day. His wife was confined for the tenth time of a boy: that very day there was nothing at all in their house. The wife told her husband to take his nets, and to throw to the good luck of the newborn. The fisherman took his nets, and threw them in with prayers for the happiness of his son. When he drew them out the first time, they were filled with sand, gravel, reeds, and mud, and he did not find even one single fish. It was the same also the second and third time, In vain did the poor fisherman try another place: the night overtook him before he had caught the least thing. “Great God!’ cried he, ‘‘ is this the luck of my new born! has thou cre- ated him that there may be no happiness for him! It cannot be so: he who has opened his lips to form a mouth, has taken care of his existence.’’ Overcome with sadness, he threw his nets upon his shoulders and slowly took the way to his dwelling, thinking what he could say to his starving children and his lying- in wife. He passed before the shop of a baker where he was wont to buy bread. Seduced by the smell of the hot bread, poor Abdallah stopped before the shop, and cast looks of starvation on the bread just brought from the oven. ‘* Do you wish for bread ?’’ asked the baker of him. ‘‘ I would willingly have some for my poor children,’’ replied the fisherman, ‘‘ but I have no money to pay for it, for I have not caught a single fish to-day : nevertheless, if you are willing, I will leave my nets in pledge.’’ ‘‘ How,”’ replied the baker, ‘‘ could you earn money to pay me, if you leave me your nets in pledge? Hold, here are ten loaves, what you are accustomed to take, and, moreover, ten pieces of money which I lend you. If * Pace 89 of Vol. III. of TREBUTIEN. 1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 591 you are successful in your fishing to-morrow, you will pay me, and if not I will give you credit.’’ ‘* God will reward you,”’ said the fisherman, taking the ten loaves: and he went to the market to buy some vegetables. The next morning he went out very early, and threw his nets all the day without catching any thing. In returning home that evening he did not dare to approach the baker’s shop ; but the latter having seen him, called him and gave him, as he had done the night before, ten loaves and ten pieces of money. Things went on in this way for forty days, and the fisherman was in despair to see his debts thus in- creasing without any means of discharging them. The forty-first day he said to his wife, ‘‘ I am going to tear my nets in pieces ; because I see that I ought no longer to reckon on gaining my livelihood in that manner. I am ashamed of being such a burden to the baker, and I must do some other business to pay what I owe.’’ ‘‘ God is great,’’ replied the wife; ‘‘ and since he has given us such a generous benefactor, he will grant us also the means of clearing ourselves to him. Do not despair then, continue to throw your nets and put confideuce in God.’’ The fisherman followed the advice of his wife; he threw his nets in the name of God, and said, ‘‘ Be favourable to my fishing, O thou who dis- pensest the gift of destiny! If I catch a single fish I will carry it to my bene- factor.’’ The nets this time were of an extraordinary weight. Abdallah worked with all his strength to bring them to the shore, but the poor fisherman, to his great despair, found nothing but a dead ass, which exhaled a pestilential smell. ‘¢ There is neither might nor power, but in God,’’ cried Abdallah, in clearing his nets of the carcase. ‘‘ It is my accursed wife,’’ added he, ‘* who gave me this fine’ advice ; I told her that I was going to give up the business of fisherman, but no, “ God is great; do not despair, continue. to throw your nets.’ See what it is to follow women’s advice! Nevertheless, Iam going to tempt fortune again to-day for the last time.’’ The fisherman sought another place to avoid the stench of the ass, and threw his nets: they were still heavier this time than the first, and Abdallah found in them a being with a human form. At first he thought it was one of those genii that Solomon had cast into the depth of the sea, after having shut them up in brazen vessels. He, therefore, cried ‘‘ Pardon! pardon! O Genii of Solomon !’’ ‘‘ Fear nothing,’’ replied the figure in the net, ‘‘ 1 am a human being like thee ; the only difference which exists between us, is that I live in the depth of the sea, and you inhabit the earth.’’ ‘‘ Then,’’ replied the fisherman, re-’ assured by these words, ‘‘ you are neither a genii nora demon ?’’ ‘ Not more the one than the other,’’ replied the inhabitant of the sea ; ‘‘ 1 believe in God and his Prophet.’’ ‘‘ But who threw thee into the waves ?’’ I am, by nature, an inhabitant of the sea, and I serve God. When I was caught in the nets, I was trying to be useful to thee, and I allowed myself to be taken; because it would not have been difficult for me to break your nets, if I had wished to escape; but I re- cognized the finger of God in this event, and I see that we have both been creat- ed to be brothers and friends. The earth produces grapes, melons, peaches and pomegranates: the sea abounds in coral, in pearls, in emeralds, and in rubies, Bring me fruit, and I will fill your basket with the precious stones which are found in the sea.’’ ‘‘ This proposition suits me marvellously, my brother,” said the fisherman ; ‘‘ swear to me that you will keep your promise, and recite the first chapter of the Koran.’’ When the first chapter was recited, the fisherman laid down his nets, and asked his companion his name. ‘I am called Abdallah of the sea; and thou, what is thy name?’ “It is truly extraordinary,’’ said the fisherman ; ‘‘ my name is also Abdallah, and to distinguish us one from the other, T will call myself Abdallah of the land.’’ ‘‘ Very well,’’ replied Abdallah of the sea ; ‘‘ we have been created one for the other ;— wait for me here an instant, I am going to search for something which I wish to make youa present of !’’ At these words he plunged into the sea to the great grief of the fisherman, who regretted having given him his liberty. ‘If I had kept him, thought he to himself, I. could have shown bim for money as a curiosity, and in that manner I might have gained my livelihood.”’ An instant after the inhabitant of the sea re-appeared, with his hands filled with rubies, pearls, and emeralds, ‘‘ Do not take itill,”’ said heto the fisherman, “ that I have not brought you more of them; I had nothing to put them in, but I will 592 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Serr. give you as many to-morrow again, and every day, if you will come here at sun- rise.’’ Transported with joy, the fisherman went to the baker’s, to whom he gave all his pearls and precious stones, thanking him for all the favors which he had hitherto heaped on him. After that loaded with as much bread as he could carry, and after having bought with the money which the baker had given him, meat, fruit, and vegetables, the good Abdallah ran home to inform his wife of the happy adventure which had happened to him. ‘‘ Keep well your secret,”’ said his wife to him; ‘‘ it is a thing that ought not to be related to every one.’’ ‘‘ If I must conceal it from every one,’’ replied the fisherman, ‘‘I cannot at least make a mystery of it to the baker my bene- factor.”’ The next day, having got up very early, the fisherman went with a basket of fruit to the sea shore, which he reached before sun-rise. He cried there: ‘‘ Where art thou, Abdallah of the sea?’? ‘‘ What will you?’ replied a voice from the depth of the waves; and at the same instant the new friend of the fisherman came out of the sea with a load of emeralds, rubies, and pearls. After having break- fasted together, they retired each going his own way. The fisherman gave, in passing, two more necklaces of pearls to the baker, and carried the rest home. He went afterwards to the bazar, and shewed all the pearls and precious stones to the syndic of the jewellers. ‘‘ Stop him,’’ cried the latter; ‘‘ he is the thief who has stolen the queen’s pearls !’? Abdallah allowed himself to be loaded with bonds, and to be conducted before the king without saying a word. They pre- sented to the queen the pearls which they took for hers, but she declared that the pearls were much handsomer than those which had been stolen from her ; that they did not belong to her, and that she would buy them at any price. ‘‘ Retire, infamous informers,’’ said the king ; ‘‘ asif God could not give riches to the unfortunate also! Retire.’’ When the jewellers had departed, the king turned towards Abdallah : ‘‘ Now inform me from whence did you get this treasure. I am aking, and I do not possess such precious stones.’? Then Abdallah related to him his connection with Abdallah of the sea. ‘' Venerable man,’’ said the king, ‘“riches ought to be joined to power ;—aslong as I reign you need not fear violence ; but I would not be answerable that after my death my successor will not cause you to be put to death to seize on your treasures. I wish, therefore, to give you my daughter in marriage and to make you my vizier, so that after me envy may not assail you.’’ After that the king ordered Abdallah to be conducted to the bath, and caused him to be dressed in magnificent clothes. They sent letters for his wife and children, who were loaded with marks of honour. The contract of marriage was drawn up according to all the forms. Abdallah of the land gave as portion to the princess all the treasures which he had received from Abdallah of the sea. The next day the king having observed the vizier betake himself with a basket of fruit on his head to the sea shore, asked him what he meant by so doing. Abdallah replied that he was carrying breakfast to Abdallah of the sea. The answer displeased the king. ‘‘ This conduct, my son-in-law,’’ said he to Abdallah, ‘‘ is not suitable for a vizier. Take your choice to remain in the palace, or to drop instantly your load.”’ Up to this point the French and Arabic versions correspond with great minuteness. The French version, however, terminates in a very abrupt and unsatisfactory manner. It conveys no moral, and leaves Abdallah the inhabitant of the land to enjoy his good fortune, notwithstanding his ingra- titude towards his benefactor. The French version proceeds—‘‘ Abdallah liking better to preserve his place and the favour of the king, returned no more to the sea shore and lived happily to the end of his days.” The Arabic version is altogether different, and if it possesses no other merit, it has at least the advantage of conveying a moral and teaching a cheerful resignation to the will of Providence : it proceeds thus :— ‘¢ Abdallah said, I fear to break the promise which I have made to him. I shall then be accounted a liar, and the world will accuse me of falsehood.’”’ The king replied, ‘‘ You are right. Go, and God be with you.’’ He then went into the city, and the people recognized him. He overheard them saying, ‘‘ This is the 1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 593 king’s relative : he is going to exchange fruits for jewels ;’’ but they who were ig- norant and were not acquainted with him said, ‘‘ O fortunate man, stay a little, and let me form acquaintance with you.’’ He paid no attention, however, to any one, and proceeded onwards till he joined Abdallah of the sea, and presented him with the fruit and exchanged them for jewels. Having so done, he returned to the baker’s shop, which he found closed, and learnt that this had been the case for ten days. He then proceeded ta consummate his marriage with the daughter of the king, with whom he lived on terms of affection. He went daily to the man of tke sea and returned by the baker’s shop, but found it always locked. He was at a loss to conceive where the baker had gone, and asked the neigh- bours where he had gone, and what had happened to him. They told him in reply, that the baker had fallen sick and could not leave his house. Having inquired where his house was situated, Abdallah sought him out. His friend seeing him out of the window bearing a full basket, on his head, descended and opened the door, and throwing himself upon him, embraced him and cried. Upon this, Abdallah said to him, ‘‘ Where have you been, my friend, this longtime; I have come daily to your shop, but have found it shut, and have been unable to find you. Are you in distress ?’’ The baker replied, ‘‘ No, but I heard that the king had seized you and charged you with being a thief, whereupon I became afraid, and skut up my shop and concealed myself.’’ Abdallah answered, This is true ; and then recited his adventures with the jewellers and the king, and how he had married the king’s daughter, and had been made his vizier. He further desired him to take as his portion what was in the basket, and not to be afraid. Saying this, he left him in a happy mood, and returned to the king with his basket empty. The king said to him, ‘‘ O! kinsman, I fancy that you could not haye met your friend Abdallah of the sea to-day.’’ He replied, ‘‘ I did meet with. him, but what I obtained from him I gave to my friend the baker, to whom I am under an obligation.’? The king asked who is this person—to which he replied, he is a baker by profession, and behaved to me in such and such a manner during the period of my distress, and never neglected me. The king asked his name. Abdallah, said he, is called Abdallah the baker—my name is Abdallah of the land, and the name of my companion is Abdallah of the sea. The king rejoined, My name also is Abdallah*, and the servants of God are brothers; send _and bring him, we will make him our second vizier. Then were sent for him the vizier and the nobles, who caused him to be clothed in the habiliments of a vizier, and brought him into the presence of the king. He was then made the second vizier, Abdallah continuing the first. Abdallah of the land, the first vizier of the king, continued after this fashion a whole year, and never omitted for a single day to go with a basket of fruits and to return with a basket of jewels and precious stones, and when fresh fruits were not procurable he used to carry raisins, almonds, walnuts, figs, and such like. Whatever he took was cheerfully accepted, and in return his basket was filled with jewels according to custom. One day it happened that he took a basket of sweetmeats. Abdallah of the sea accepted it, and took his seat upon the land by the sea shore. They entered into conversation and mutually told stories, when the following dialogue occurred. ‘ Is it true, my brother, that the prophet {on whom rest the peace and blessing of God!) is buried among you on dry land, and do you know where he is buried? I do, replied he of the land. In what place? Ina city called Yusrub. Do the inhabitants of the land go to visit his tomb? Yes. Happy then, exclaimed Abdallah of the sea, are you denizens of the earth, that you are enabled to visit the tomb of this gracious, clement and merciful prophet who intercedes for all those who perform the pilgrimage ! Have you, my brother, ever visited his tomb? No, I wasa poor man and had not enough to pay my expenses on the road, but since I became acquainted with you and you have bestowed upon me this exceeding prosperity, it is a duty incumbent upon me to doso. I have a strong desire to visit the holy city, and nothing but the affection 1 have for you prevents my doing so. I cannot, however, bear to part with you for a single day. Do you, said he of the sea, prefer my friendship to that of the prophet (on whom be the blessing and peace of God), who will * Servant of God. 44 594 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Sepr. plead for you with the Almighty on the day of resurrection? who will save you from the fire, and give you admission into heaven by his mediation? Do you abandon the pilgrimage to the shrine of the Prophet Mahomed, (on whom be peace and blessing of God) through love of the world? To this he of the land replied, ‘‘ No; I swear that I should prefer the pilgrimage to all things ; I only require your permission to perform it this very year.’’ ‘‘ I have granted you per- mission,’’ rejoined he of the sea; ‘‘ but when you arrive at the shrine, submit my salutation. I have an offering to present. Enter with me into the ocean, so that I may take you to my city and admit youto my house—that I may entertain you and entrust to you my offering, in order that you may present it at the shrine of the holy Prophet, saying, This is an offering from Abdallah of the sea, who conveys his salutation, and intreats your intercession to save him from hell fire.”’ The story proceeds to state that the fears of Abdallah of the land hav- ing been removed by the assurances of his companion, and his body having been rubbed over with a certain ointment which gave him the power of living in the water, he entered the ocean with his marine friend. Then follows a long description of the wonders of the deep ; Abdallah having seen “wedges of gold, great anchors, heaps of pearl, inestimable stones, unrivalled jewels—all scattered in the bottom of the sea’—and many other things undreamt of even by Cuarence. The story concludes thus :— Having taken leave of the king of the ocean loaded with jewels, Abdallah of the sea took his companion back towards his city. On the road he put into his hand a packet, saying, Take this,and present it as my offering at the shrine of the holy prophet. Abdallah of the land took charge of the packet without knowing what it contained. Abdallah of the sea then proceeded to convey him to the shore, but on the road there appeared an assembly of persons rejoicing and singing, and eating and making merry. Upon witnessing this, Abdallah of the land said to his companion, ‘‘ For what are these people rejoicing? Is therea marriage among them ?’’? His companion answered, ‘‘ No—but some one among them has died.’? ‘‘ What,” said he of the land, ‘‘ do you eat, drink, and make merry on the occasion of a death ?’”’ “‘ To be sure we do,’”’ said the inhabitant of the sea: ‘‘ do not you do the same on land ?’’ ‘* Not we indeed,"’ said his com- panion ; ‘‘ on such occasions we cry and weep, and the women beat their faces and tear their clothes, and make all sorts of lamentation.’’ On hearing these words, Abdallah of the sea exclaimed, ‘‘ Deliver up my offering.’’ This he did with fear, and having got upon dry land, Abdallah of the sea said, ‘‘ I have parted with your friendship—you shall never see me again, nor shall I ever again behold you.”’ “‘On what account is this?’’ asked his companion. ‘‘ It seems then,’’ replied Abdallah of the sea, ‘‘ that you dwellers upon earth, whose life is a mere deposit by your Creator, cannot endureits being taken back, but you must weep thereat. What then would be the case with my deposit for the Prophet? When a child is born you rejoice that God Almighty has endued it with life as a deposit, but when that is taken away again you feel it as a grievance, and you cry, grieve, and lament. I have no occasion for such company.’’ Saying this he vanished. Abdallah of the land having put on his clothes and taken his jewels, proceeded to the king, who received him with much joy and gladness, and asked him how he was and what had befallen him. Abdallah then recounted his adventures, and mentioned all the wonders of the deep which he had seen. The king was astonished, but upon hearing what Abdallah of the land had said to him of the sea, the king observed that the former had erred in making the communication which he had done. For a long time afterwards Abdallah continued in the habit of going to the sea shore and calling upon his former companion, but he never re-appeared. The king and his friend lived happily until the destroyer of delights—the spoiler of all things came, and they both died. Then praise be to God who never dies, who is the living God, Lord of kings and angels, and who has power over all things ! At the conclusion of the tale which immediately precedes the above, and which is styled “ Histoire D’Aboukir et D’Aboussir,’ M. ‘TReBurtien’s 1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 595 version, is, “ Aboussir le fit inhumé et lui eleva un monument sur lequel on grava une inscription qui renfermait un sens trés moral.” In the Arabic MS. the inscription is given at full length. I here subjoin a translation of the Elegy, which is not without elegance in the original, but which seems rather intended to inculcate the advantage of prudence, and to convey the moral that “ honesty is the best policy,” than as a suitable epitaph on the tomb of the treacherous friend over whom it was erected. After a series of efforts to ruin his friend and benefactor, the treacherous man came to an untimely and ignominious end, while he whom he designed to ruin, and who buried his corpse (which was found tied up in a bag on the sea shore) attained the summit of prosperity. ‘« By his deeds a man is known among his equals. *¢ The qualities of a free-born and noble person resemble his origin. ‘© He does not revile, though he be reviled ; ‘“‘ For how often what a man says recoils upon himself. ‘* Abstain from evil words and use them not, whether engaged in serious or trifling matters. ‘* How many a great man has been subjected to abuse, ‘¢ From one whose value is not equal to a fragment of his shoe ! ‘* What is triumphant exultation? even the lion is taken in the toil through ignorance. “« The sea bears on its surface the rotten carcass. But the pearl lies resplen- dent in its lowermost sands. ‘ T never saw a sparrow oppose a hawk, but I thought of its insignificance and want of understanding. ‘‘It is written on a lofty pillar in Hindustan, Whoever cultivates virtue shall be recompensed in the like. ‘¢ Abstain from the attempt to make sugar of coloquintada ; ‘¢ For every thing must partake of the nature of its origin.”’ Scorr, in the Preface to -his translation of the Arabian Nights Enter- tainments, has observed, “‘ The stanzas, elegies, and other poetical quo- tations which so frequently occur in the original, M. Gatuanp has indeed omitted, but such omission (at least in the humble opinion of the Editor) is not to be regretted, for he thinks that to the European reader their insertion would have been an intolerable interruption to the narrative.” M. Tresutien does not seem to have been generally of this opinion, for he has on most occasions faithfully rendered the verse as well as the prose. Where he has not done so, the fault, I suspect, was in the original —not in the translation. I have compared the MS. of Mr. Browntow with the printed edition of Hasicur and the lithographed work edited in Calcutta, as well as with Scorr’s and GaLuannp’s translations. The comparison was made with one of the old tales, and I took at random the first voyage of Sindbad the Sailor. This examination has afforded additional proof of the genuine- ness of Mr. Browntow’s MS. M. Hasicut’s edition comes next to it in fulness and accuracy. The Calcutta edition is very faulty and defective. I cannot help thinking that an entire and correct translation into Eng- lish of these beautiful stories is still a desideratum, and that no better original could probably be procured than that belonging to Mr. Brown. Low. Scorr’s, which is the best translation, seems very inaccurate. Take for instance the following passage in the story of Sindbad the Sailor. Reflecting on the time he had lost and the profligacy of his past life, he says that he called to mind the saying of Solomon, that three things are better than three things: ‘ The day of death than the day of birth—a living dog than a dead lion—the grave than a palace.” This has been translated by Scorr, ‘‘ 1 remembered the saying of the great Solomon, which I had frequently heard from my father, that death is preferable to poverty.” 4H 2 596 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Supr. I leave to other Members of the Committee the task of examining the first two volumes of the MSS.; if indeed any further examination be thought necessary to establish the genuineness of the work. I am quite satisfied as to that point, from the examination which I have made of the third and fourth volumes. The stories of Sindbad the Sailor are intro- duced at the commencement of the 3rd vol. of the MSS. ; consequently it may be assumed that the ‘‘ Contes Inedits” which I have not compared are to be found in the first and second volumes of the MSS. and a com- parison of them with the Arabic might be still more satisfactory. Upon the whole, I have no hesitation in stating my opinion, that the MS. copy of the Alif Leila now submitted to the Society is a most valu- able addition to the literature of the East, and worthy of every encourage- ment. I have little doubt that the work would find a ready sale both in Asia and in Europe. I do not believe that Mr. Browntow requires any pecuniary aid from us. As a Society, we might subscribe for a certain number of copies, and individually I should hope we shall not withhold our aid from this highly public-spirited and meritorious undertaking. To Government, I think, we should make an earnest appeal for support, found- ed on the credit which must accrue to our nation, from presenting to the Mussulman population of India, in a complete and correct form and in their own classical and beautifal language, these enchanting tales, which even in the estimation of Europe enjoy almost unrivalled celebrity. Our Maulavi, if competent, might be desired to assist in correcting the press, and I for one should be very happy to aid in this duty, as far as my limited abilities and leisure might permit. Sept. 20, 1836. W. H. Macnacuren. Minute by Mr. H. T. Prinsep. I have examined the four volumes of the A/if Laila as far as my time would permit, and am able to confirm entirely the testimony given by Mr. Macnaeurten in favor of the accuracy and completeness of the copy. So far as my examination has gone, the tales and anecdotes given in the list at the commencement of the first volume of the ‘ Contes Inedits” are all to be found in the Arabic, and those that have been translated are more full and complete in our copy than in the French version. I did not find the numbering of the nights exactly to correspond. Thus the anecdote of Zobeide in the bath is between the 382nd and 383rd nights, and the secret entrusted to the wife at the end of the 384th; whereas, ac- cording to the French list, these ought to have been found first in the 384—385th, and the other in the 387—388th night. The French version of the ‘‘ Contes Inedits” is not, it is to be observ- ed, avery close translation ; nor does it give in regular order the tales omitted by previous translators. It is still merely a selection, and made not exclusively with reference to merit or the interest of the tales. It is evident, however, that the original must have corresponded very closely with the copy brought to India, by Major Macan, and was probably from the same. Whether it was as complete in all respects, and as carefully made, may well be doubted ; for the getting up of this manuscript is of a very superior description. I do not find that the German edition in the original Arabic corresponds exactly in the arrangement of the tales with our copy, but the text does not materially differ of the same tales, which is an additional confirmation of the accuracy ‘and genuineness of the very complete set of these tales now laid before us. : I join heartily in the wish expressed by Mr. Macnacuren, that a com- plete edition of this work in the original Arabic may be printed in this country from Major Macan’s copy, and I doubt not that many subscribers 1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 597 may be found to contribute towards the expense of carrying it through the press, if this should be deemed necessary. The offer of Mr. Mac- NAGHTEN to correct the press with the aid of the Maulavis of the Persian office, is one that will be appreciated by all who wish well to the litera. ture of the East, and it ought to determine those who hitherto have felt hesitation at the idea of attempting so great a work. I am afraid that no capable person has leisure here in India to under- take the translation of these four volumes into English. But certainly it would tend equally to the credit of our literature were it possible to put this also in hand. Were I myself an idle man, I should like no better amusement than to take up such an occupation. Sept. 25, 1836. Hi. T. Prinsepr. ——= Minute by the Rev.-Dr. Mill. I entirely agree with Mr. Macnacuren and Mr. H. T. Prinsep as to the undoubted genuineness of Mr. Brownitow’s MS. The style of these tales is very strongly impressed on the memory of every one who has read any large portion of them in the original: and on comparing the detached portions I have read from this MS. during the three days it has been with me, with the recollections of the Voyages of Sindbad which I have repeat- edly perused from M. Laneu‘ss’ edition (Paris, 12mo. 1814)—there is the same delightful ease and simplicity of style, with the total absence of the rhetorical effort so general in other works of imagination in the same lan- guage,—the same purity of Arabic idiom, with the free introduction of e. g. the Persian Shardb- foreign nouns, which (even independently of the khdnah and Or own well external evidence) bears witness to the common eae athe darken origin of all. This MS. is apparently much termination) which I ob- closer in its order and readings to Baron Von serve in Night 284, vol. 2, Hammer’s Cairo MS. (bought at Constantinople) of this MS. from which M. Tresurten’s “ Contes Inedits”’ are published, than to the Tunis MS. from which M. Haxgicur’s complete edition of the original is now publishing at Breslau: and for this reason, peousst others, I do not think that work need preclude the publication of this. The part which I have taken almost at hazard for critical examination, is the part shortly preceding that which has been so ably examined by Mr. Macnacuren, It is the curious adventure (near the beginning of the 2nd volume) of Isaac of Mousul the musician, and the consequent intro- duction of the Khaliph Mémin to his future bride, the daughter of his Vizier Hasan ben Sehl. This occupies from the middle of Night 277 to 280 in the MS., but from 279 to 282 in Treeurien, (this slight difference arising rather from a different division than from any deficien- cy in this MS. as the collation of the preceding tales shews.) A com- parison of this story with the same in TresBurien’s third vol. (p. 289— 295,) has convinced me that the text of Macan’s and Hammer’s MSS. is as nearly identical as those of any two ordinary MSS. of an oriental work, and that whatever discrepancies appear between the Arabic and the French in this part at least, arise from the translator rather than from his text. An example or two will best prove this. MS. (literally translated.) There appeared something hanging from the adjoining houses, andlo ! a large basket decked with silk at the four han- dies. I said to myself, ‘‘ Surely there is acausefor this,’’ and I remained amazed at my adventure. But intoxication Trebutien. Je vegardai ce que ce pouvait étre, et, & ma grande surprise je vis une sorte de corbeille garnie de soie. Comme le vin que j’avais bu dans la soirée m’avait un peu troublé le cer- veau, je me plagai dans cette corbeille 598 so far transported me, that my mind said to me, ‘‘ Sitdown init.’’ Accord- ingly I sat down, and when those who let down the basket to me felt J was within, they drew it up to the top of the wall: and behold four damsels who said, ‘¢ Alight freely and without restraint.”’ And one of them walked before me with a taper till I entered into a house: and there were sitting rooms strewed Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Sept. sané savoir ce que je faisais, et au méme instant je me sentis enlever en haut. Je fus recu sur la terrasse par quatre belles esclaves qui m’engagér- ent a descendre dans lamaison. L’une d’elles marcha devant moi, un flambeau & la main, et me conduisit dans une salle, dont la magnificence ne pouvait étre comparée qu’a celle des apparte- mens du palais du Khalife. out such as I had never seen evyen* in the Khaliph’s palace. To the method so apparent in the above extract, of seizing only the points of the narrative, and neglecting the orientalisms of style and man- ner by which they are introduced, I should ascribe even the places where the two copies appear discordant ; as, where in TREBUTIEN (after the long interview with the lady described in substance exactly as inthe MS.) Isaac is made to go down by the basket as he came:—“ On me descendit dans Ja corbeille ;” whereas the Arabic MS. distinctly says in that place, “A damsel went down stairs with me and opened [the door] to me, and I went out and walked to my house.” (Night 279): where it seems to me at least as probable that the translator hastening with the story after his manner, left out the circumstances of descent and added “ dans la cor- beille” afterwards, on revising his French, than that he found the basket in his original. The conclusion of the story furnishes another striking example of his manner, and of the disadvantage which these tales suffer by being so translated. MS. (literally. ) Then we went out: and he said, ‘¢ O, Ishak, do not tell this story to any Trebutien. Nous sortimes de la maison, Le Khalife m’ ordonna de ne pas parler one ;’’ so I concealed it till the death of Maman. Never had any one an interview such as I had during these four days, sitting in the day with Maman and in the night conversing with Kha- de ce qui venait de se passer; etj’en ai gardé le secret jusqu’a sa mort. Ces trois nuits, dit Ishak de Mossoul, je les mettrai toujours au rang des plus agréables que j’aie jamais passées dans dija. By Allah I never saw any one _ la plus aimable société. of men like Mamfin, and never did I behold a woman like Khadija, who even approached her in wit and under- standing and eloquence. But God knows best. Similar conclusions were obtained by comparing the preceding story in the 2nd volume of the MS.—the adventure of Abdallah the son of Abu- Kolaba, and his discovery of the paradisiacal city of Sheddad the son of Ad—occupying from p. 284—289 of Trebutien (who calls him Abdallah, son of Kotaiba, and with whom his ndkah or she-camel is a mule). The text of the two Egyptian MSS. of M. Tresutien and Major Macan must be almost entirely the same. . Very different, however, is the text of Professor Hasicur’s edition, which, if it contains either of the above “ Anecdotes” of M. TrREeBUTIEN, must place them in a very different place from that in which the numbers led me to search for them without success. And this is not wonderful, as the arrangement of the nights is altogether different in the two editions. For example, the Voyages of Sindbad in both the Egyptian MSS. (MS. vol. 3, and Trepurtien, Preface p. xlvi.) occupy night 536—565, but in the Tunis MS., Night 250—271, as appears in Hasicur’s 3rd and 4th volumes. * The discrepancy from the French may here very probably arise from the omis- - “ aw 4 sion of the word yj by the copyist—but the mistake may just as probably lie on the other side. 1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 599 On the other hand, the first of the unpublished Tales in both the Egyptian MSS.—where it occupies from Night 34—38 (MS. vol. 1 and Treb. p. xli.) occupies all from the 139th to the 218th in Hazicur (iii. 66—166). It is not, however, actually longer in the latter than in the former: and as this tale, viz. the History of the two Viziers of Mohammed Ibin Soleman Alzini [in Hasicnt “ Alrasi’] has never been translated either by GaL- LAND or TRreEsBuTIEN, I selected it for the collation of the two Arabic texts. Here, though I found the printed and MS. text to tally in the main from beginning to end, not only as to the succession of incidents, but in the poetical passages interspersed throughout, the variations were very con- siderable both in the prose and the verse: whole clauses appeared in the one which were not in the other; the advantage of fullness being some- times on the side of Mr. Browytow’s MS., but more frequently on that of the Breslau edition. On the whole, I should strongly recommend the publication of this text without any reference to that of M. Hasicur—even in the parts which might be compared with advantage. (Mr. Macnaguren’s offer of assisting in the correction of the press is one which should be most thankfully embraced, however learned may be the Maulavi engaged for the pur- pose.) When both texts shall have been published, (belonging, as they do, apparently to two very different editions or recensions of these celebrat- ed tales, one long current in Egypt and Arabia, the other among the Maghrebin Arabs of Barbary and Spain,) they may enable the critics of Europe to form perhaps a judgment as to the true original text of both. The work of a translator is one of greater difficulty: and we have none probably in India, possessed at the same time of ability and leisure for a work of this description. The ease and vivacity of M. Gaxuann’s translation, so deservedly popular among Western readers, would be a good model for imitation—avoiding, however, his liberties with his origi- nal, except, indeed, in the too frequent cases where decency requires curtailment or omission. M. Tresurien is far more faithful in giving the whole of his original: but in the mode of representing it, a due medium between his too occidental style of paraphrase, and a servilely literal version of the Arabic text, would be, in my opinion, at the same time more accurate and more pleasing. W. H. Mit. Minute by Mr. J. R. Colvin. I have no pretensions to the name of an Arabic scholar, and shall not presume to offer any opinion of my own on the genuineness of these volumes. But I can bear testimony to the late Major Macan’s opinion of their genuineness. He was a highly competent judge, and had made inquiries which satisfied him on the point before he bought the manu- scripts in England. I cordially join in the wish to give encouragement to the publication of a complete edition. J. R. Convin. Minute by Mr. C. E. Trevelyan. Neither have I the least pretension to be called an Arabic scholar, but it is not necessary to be one in order to appreciate in some degree the beauty of the Arabian Nights. I think it very desirable that a correct version of the original Arabic should be published, and still more so that it should be well translated into English. Such a translation, if it were well executed, would be a most valuable accession tu English literature, and I believe that for one person who would read the book in Arabic, five hundred would read it in English. Nobody, in my opinion, is so eminently qualified for this task as Mr. Macnaguren, and if he could be persuaded to undertake it, he would lay every person who reads English under an obligation to him. C. E, Trevetyan. *“YJUOUL JseT JO SUOT}LAIASqO aag AyIpruInYy PayZlNoVg » JOF IS[G OY} WoIy syuamIIedxe Jayj}0 0} pardde sem sAsjoMOISAY Weyoyy, *Ajeanoadser ‘w ‘ap Jeged’ pue “WV OL IV syFO" *SUIGX JO 9SO[O ‘asueyo © sch “bI | sor (6°GL 8°89] $89 6°FL)/8°9 |0°8 |L‘28|186°6a|Ee9‘6s, O‘cL| scl SGLIL‘g \e°e (1°98 /9L96a|PE9'6a)‘uEoN ¥ *1quilu ‘ajed “App | ‘mS = “Ms bc6 \o°eL cl 69 9*9L)¢°9 \8°9 |\1°egites*s {99%° cL O'S Ip |e*nBisec® jegas 0g *UI10}$ UIeIJUBSSaIUL| “AN aA ‘N }S0°9 | 018 10‘3L 06 68 BYOLIG'T 16'S |L6Liceps sors 06 88 B°91/6°S j9°S \oGLi9ec’ {25° | 6 “Apnoyo “Azey “A “A 'N 09 | 0°68 je‘ae LL 6L OGL eh 18°F |T'e8lzos* 69° 08 £8 S°BZ9'E 16° \6'PR|0L9° |Te9° | 86 “ured "prey ‘ynund =a N “N [0ST | 3°96 |SbZ £9 6¢ e'oL\S°o |TTLis*68igo9 j6es' £9 69 S*ELip‘Z |8°L |1°88\869° 1179‘ 16 “Azey ‘aug SNe ck 9OIL |0'8Z L9 69 GEZL|9'L 118 |e98l PROS {eGg° 09 +9 0°22|\6°8 |6°6 |L*Zei90Z° |pS9* |. 96 “rea]o *Ieayo *N “N Z°ZIt \9%0L 6g 8P OTLIVELP PLL T6\az¢° j909° 19 6S STLI9OT\POL/6.9g\eF9° |109° GS “AromOys ‘sug ‘op | ‘mu ‘au [oso | 8‘bIL |0‘ZZ &¢ 6S SIZIZ°6 \OLTIL‘ L6\gpe* =| GL‘ &L o‘Z |4°9 |L'8Bipa9* |1E9° Xd < ‘auy ‘110 ‘Mund «| aT Ny CAA IN BSI |O°LZ Si 09 BSL GLT/OTT)Be6|0¢E9° |OLG° 99 gL 0*¢2\9°9 \0°9 le‘sgiisZ* |zeoL‘ &@ Ss “tynuINs *119 “1va]o ‘a°*S (MS UGOL \0'Z2 €¢ 6g OGL 9‘ TOILE 'G6)\ Fe9° 069" 89 Td S‘eLig'9 \L'Z \6*Z8lgcl< jg0L‘ 6 2 ‘aug seu “M “S “MM 'S OTIIE |3‘Z8 09 09 g*GLie8 |LOLEa6\G19* jess" Z 8 9cL\9°h |6°V |o‘9gisTZ® |bL9° 16 = *488919A0 ‘ynumd |"a's ‘es 109°L | 0°96 |o‘o8 | 28 | eZ 82 | 6 \0‘CLIE’D |6°F |6°P8\co9* a9 | 92 | 89 QL | 06 |a%cr\p°¢ jors |etdglesgs |op9o | 0G S ‘ouy ‘op op ‘ms °° B°COL [0°62 § 99 | €9 99 | $8 lPHZie's |o°8 lo‘6siags’ joes’ | 92 | 89 GL | 68 \0%PZ\2Z°¢ 109 19°98/Z89° 9F9 61 fe op oul ‘Mua MO Lit (O24 | eo | ¥9 bS | LL leSLIT'at LLL 16\aze* joes | OZ | 22 Lh | 98 \s‘cL\a‘9 |e°9 |e*cgizgo* jgzo° | BI ee: *ITMuino *yseo7a2A0 |*mu ‘MU O%ZL |O'ZL | LP | ae 98 | 4 |p IZ\Z*1ToFLl616|1ag* cos’ | go | 9 99 | $8 \OeZIe°% |9°Z ja‘Zglo69% 9¢g9° LT 3 “1mp "yes‘wns | “A CMS OTIT [P82 | 19 | 8g GD | 18 |o‘TZ\00T|Z6 |8‘s8ioge® ILE. | oz | £9 99 } 98 |FZL\0'8 |2°8 |6‘98|602 |¢c9‘ 9L a3 “aug op “mu *M ON OfGIT \OSGL | LP | 9S Gb | &Z ipes ©*€1\6°06\0z9° {22° } 99 | +9 £9 f $8 IPT 0‘8 lefagiseZ* |669% ST > *1e9}9 *1e9]9 “Us {Ni S‘6UL |Z°9L | GP | €¢ og | 2 \2°69 PSL|L68ige9° 689" | zo | 9 8S | G8 |2°TZ/0°8 (2°6 lo‘ceiseds |aoL‘ v1 sS ‘ouy *ystoI9AO | “MU +O B°LOL |orL | 2o | E¢ £9 | OL [gZL\o°STlgSlie*o6|Zo9* \9rS° | of | SL GL | 68 \0‘GL\G% lo%e jetcglard’ ool‘ &1 = *AIOMOYS = UTeX *[}U09 | “ms ‘oO fos =| OTFOT [OL J 88 | 28 G8 | 26 [L°2L\6%% joe |e*celop9s 009% | 06 | F6 66 | 96 109210 jo‘t |r‘eZigeL° |r1Z GL Ss *auy. “‘sniii0 ‘wnd} “Ms “Ms [OLé OO |1°ZZ FZ} IZ OL | 88 |g°LI8°S l0'2 jatgs|ezos ols 98 | 68 18 | 76 |0°L1/3° Iph jo‘es|ZeZ* |g69° IL ae “4SBOI9AO =“ UIA *]JUOD |" “SM “S-OTS OIG |s‘eZ | 08 | $8 LL 1 16 \eZLI9%e |o%e \otesl66g9* {265° | 0G | 06 06 } 96 |0‘g2/z‘% \a‘% Ie*ts\Po8’ jeeZ‘ or © “Apnoyo ‘ou ‘M'S “M {g9° 8°88 |Z°9L | 2B | 98 18 | G6 O°A2/2'E jo*b |T*csig69° |989* | tg | 28 68 } £6 |062)\0'e II‘h \otes|s6Zs jecd‘ 6 PS ‘Aep [fe -urex = yseor0ao | “mM AA 06S =| B‘FOT |c‘eZ | 9a | 88 06 ] $6 |o°ZLI2°S |a°s |L‘tgjceo* {969° | gg | 98 L8 | 56 |€‘eLic%s Io's |peLicol® 129° | 8 | op op “aS “a'S fee’s | 9°16 |2'sh | 06 | GL 08 | 96 \6*9L\9%e [9%p le‘peliass |gesk | gg | 8 88 | 96 |0‘6L/9%% 12° |a‘rslos9s |zEe9* LE ’ op *Aramoys |" "S “a's fo0‘o | OTe [p92 | 88 | 28 8 | $6 \oreLip’e |p'e jaccaltas’ |AZp' | og | €8 | £8 | FG lo‘GZ|Fe \6‘e |e*palsco’ |elos | 9 = "wITeO ‘op op ‘aS “A'S (010 | 66 [9°92 | 88 | 94 08 | 96 |L*9Z\c°E Iam leccglugr’ IS0b. | Fg 18 } £6 GP |o°F IT98|0e9° OLS g = ~Aramoys op Sic FO OFOT \S°9Z | BZ | &Z GL | 06 |S‘ZZ/0°S |a°9 |L°28\1EP° le. J of | LL 9L | 68 \0‘8Ll0°¢ Ig‘¢ \t‘ogloge*® jZ1S* v ad ‘ouy ‘und op *as 0 ecor |0'9L | FZ | 92 9L } 88 |0‘6L/6'S 16°¢ \g‘Zeigcp* 00% 94 | 8L 82 } 68 J0‘6LI0*¢ |9‘¢ |Z‘ogleccs gts‘ & Doimitch) “A = fSc°0 | OfOTL |a°92 8Z | eZ 82 | 06 \e‘BZis‘h |pfo \L‘oglbres ors G *Apnoyo yerjs ‘und | °° “S “A'S 0801 {0'9L | tZ | 69 TL | 88 |O°ZLi9°9 |e°L \6*se|1ZP‘62|40P°62a] og | 08 GL } 16 |E"8L\n°h |o’s |2°cg|09°6a|6FS'63] os > om a Te) (1) ie) ho} ej y/>mwola® Qpy] S'S F Ohm =e] ° +312 Bolt wo 2 ec cles 6. g | & [esieeeSeciee) © |Ss| oe T zi CPSlS agiee Seize SGleE| YESSY eM Eclees S B. B. es 5 | g (egtsSizessla | 3 egies Fe)38 | Plecise|"sosls |, meleabalestlesal s > = = re oe U ot o = lay ma on as e & : 2 | 3 |PossiF_ s(8n) FleelZsiog) 38) SS/PoeS| 27 3[8.] 2 eeleeies| Sblessl Po] SY a! Zee si iseieel el "el sat RH” | BeAr sl Bis eiee| 6] “Pletal & ; *SsoUloly xy *AVipruin Fy * Apruin yy 5 *JOYIVA AA *pUurIM snemeuiey se peyepnojeg “Wd 7 38 suoeArasqo peyepnoyea ‘W ‘VY Q[ 78 SUOIZVAIOSQO = Iaystsay : "9E81 ‘waquazdag fo yjuopy ays sof ‘n2ynajvD ‘a0Q fussy ayn yw yday ‘uajsrbary joorbojouoazayyr 600 -_ ' y P , 4 ‘ ‘f i x . ‘< L) s . ¢ + ¥ ‘ i ¢ ae sie Pe vate Y Lb! : A ° bie = Journ. As. Soc. | Val. VPLELIN. « . ? . Names of Palaces in D*Richardsons 3 tours inthe Tenasserim provinces. | / 00363 a0§ 2 pdloas] 3 20994) 4 coon ¢) 5 age 6 weg] 7 qvas say 9 99d 40 ug oop: i (90 14 cog?) 390) nosro(R¢] Is ePe: 16 APE) 7 oqoogsl 1 OGCArmeS 19 o€B 20 a anda 21 EX) 22 39: (0%) 23 nan) 24 ebb (af? 25 oad) 56 Gena d} 27 aah 28 Scd) 29 20805: 19 gjpn: 200g: 31 nfm 32 ond): 33 a §{aB: 34 oad 35 Sams: 36 6 op 37 2 ira d| a8 gangs 39 CLO 40 M07) 4) IGP 42 43 44 geod As o¥6) AG 47 3 48 AY aged 50 ny] s2. Sox 53 54 ss adaye) x Oonk 37 58 59 Go god 61 age 62 63 64 GOO IC) ~ 06 ~ 65 OR9 66 oy 67aEM ey 68 @O) 69 70 aotp aS) 7 6 006) 72.90HE2 73a oF J aqongy’ 75 ge ge 76 5): (GO 17 wg da(p 2 70.9 ee oS) 79 ae 80 faa) ai avo onabet) 2 (A a3 wo? BA 299 gh (6 sage sapery s7 Aadays ee QBigvd 9 00) oo go aon dy 9) Span (GO 92 aod) 93 Oo 94 003 339% gs orgoasd 96 (ae a0 97 (Beor 96 Bsooné 99. 49° 120 30 6p 0005) /01 69\932: 2 CAGE cog 103 gislo ps’ 104 gpxsd 105 106 cag eh joy cog 108 oF 9 109 of ors? 0 {Sooaf mo (arops. ud ost ° 113 8 BD & a) ( The blanks are se in the oréginal ) IP lithes. | | Mi Masson's Sketch of the sculpture ak Bameian. inthe niche of She S 4 Ldot, econ it VUlt yyy AR inn tw Be My . "A Leite *rinted ab the oriental Lith? Press, Cabeulta, JOURNAL OF G24. ASAE LC ...8:0O-C1LE TY. No. 58.—October, 1836. {.—An account of some of the Petty States lying north of the Tenas- serim' Provinces ; drawn up from the Journals and Reports of D. Ricuarpson, Hsq., Surgeon to the Commissioner of the Tenasserim Provinces. By E. A. Buunpexiy, Esq. Commissioner. {The small figures refer to the accompanying Plate, where the native words are cor- rectly written in the Burman character. ] Of the numerous petty states north of the Tenasserim provinces, those only of Zimmay?, Labong® and Lagon*, on the east bank of the Salween and the slip of country on the west bank inhabited by a wild, barbarous, but independent tribe of mountaineers called Red Kayens°, have hitherto been visited by Europeans. Of the vast extent of country between the Salween® and Cambodia rivers, we know little or nothing, though it is hoped the expected opening of an overland trade between the frontiers of China and the Tenasserim provinces will extend our knowledge of the intermediate country. The town of Zimmay (or Changmai) is situated in Lat. 20 N. and Long. about 99 E. That of Labong is distant from Zimmay only 10 miles S. E. ; Lagon about 50S. E. from the same. The several states are named after these towns, but their respective boundaries are not well defined, and, together with those of Moung- pay’ and Moung-nam, appear to be the patrimony of one family. About fifty years ago, when the whole of this country was under the dominion of Ava, seven brothers succeeded, with the assistance of Siam!®, in throwing off the Burmese yoke, ejected them from the above named towns, and having been confirmed in the government of them by Siam, have continued tributary to that kingdom, and successfully resisted all the attempts of Ava to regain possession. The elder brother was invested with the title of Chow-tchee-Weet, or “ Lord 41 602 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr. of Life,” with the supreme authority over the others, and the title has descended to each brother successively alive till it reached the youngest, whom Dr. Ricnarpson found on his first and second visits, but who died at the advanced age of 73 years, during his third visit. It is now in abeyance in the family, and awaits the decision of the court of Siam. ‘ Of the original inhabitants of this country but a very small por- tion now cbtains,—perhaps not above one-third of the whole, owing to the great number that were carried off by the kings of Ava when they overran and subjected the country. The remainder consists chiefly of Burmese'', Peguers!? and Shans", from the different states tributary to Ava; either refugees or slaves ; for slavery exists in this country in its worst features. The unfortunate wretches are kidnap- ped and seized by the hill tribes on the west bank of the Salween, of whom some account will be given, and eagerly purchased from them at very low rates, by the people of this country. Dr. Ricnarp- SoN was unable to form an opinion as to the amount of the popula- tion. He was told that the towns of Zimmay, Lagon, Moung-pay and Moung-nam contain each about 20,000 and Lalong 14,000, but he thinks these numbers exaggerated. In person the Shans bear a great resemblance to their Bur- mese and Siamese neighbours, though somewhat fairer. They are muscular, well formed, .and healthy in their appearance: eyes moderately linear; nose small rather than flat; the mouth large, and disfigured by black teeth and gums, which they cherish as a beauty; the hair is long, straight, lank, and almost always black. They tatoo the lower limbs, but to less extent than the Bur- mese. Their dress consists of a cotton putso or cloth round the loins, generally blue, a blue cotton jacket reaching well over the hips, and a coarse red cotton turban; though many go uncovered. The dress of the chiefs is of the same description, but the materials are more costly,—Chinese crape or satin jackets, with gold or silver lace, the putso of silk. The women are fair and good-looking, and their dress more becoming than that of Burmese or Siamese,—not open in front as with the former, nor tucked up between the legs as with the latter. It is, however, fastened in the same way round the body without pin or string. Old and young have the bosoms bare, or but partially covered by a small scarf thrown round the shoulders. Many of the women are disfigured with goitre, but it seldom attains a large size. The people are a quiet, mild, good-humoured race, and not addicted to many vices. Opium smoking and gambling are scarcely known, and drunkenness is uncommon. ‘The religion is that 1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 603 of Buddh, and consequently their ceremonies and festivals differ in no material manner from those of the Burmese, which are now well known: indeed there is little other difference between the two races than that of dress and language; which latter is a dialect of the Siamese with a distinct alphabet, bearing in the formation of the letters a great resemblance to the Burmese character. Of the resources of a country so thmly populated and so constantly subju- gated to the devastating inroads of both Siamese and Burmese, according as one or the other of these powers held the sovereignty, it is not practicable to form an estimate. Speaking of the soil and cultivation, Dr. Ricuarpson says—‘ The soil in the low paddy and garden lands is a rich black loam apparently inexhaustible, in which the crops follow each other in uninterrupted succession. Cultiva- tion is conducted with a good deal of care by irrigation and trans- planting, and the return on good lands is about 120 and on inferior about 75 fold. The general seed-time is in July and August, and the harvest in December and January, though some descriptions of paddy are perfected in three months. Their plough closely resembles those used in the south of Scotland without the culture or ploughshare, and is often drawn by one buffalo. The principal articles of cultiva- tion are the cauth-brier, or glutinous rice, cotton, maize, sugar-cane, tobacco, ground nut, chillies, several kinds of pulse, radishes, and turnips. Of grain, wheat, and other corn they have none. Pepper, cloves, and all the finer species of spices are unknown.” Both the soil and climate seem well suited to the cultivation of Pernambuco cotton, which is now being introduced into the Tenasserim provinces ; and it is much to be regretted that the seed with which Dr. Rrcwarp- son was furnished on his last visit proved bad, as the people evinced great desire to cultivate so valuable an article. If the cultivation of South American cotton is found to answer in the Tenasserim pro- vinces, of which great hopes are entertained, every exertion will be made to introduce it into the neighbouring countries. Tin, iron, and lead ores appear to be abundant in the country, and some of them very rich, though it does not appear that the extraction of the metal is engaged in to any extent. Dr. R. was informed that the tin ore yields 80 per cent., and some iron ore that was shown him seemed equally rich. There are extensive teak forests in that part of the country immediately adjoining our provinces, but owing to the difficulty of bringing the timber down the Salween river in con- sequence of rocks and rapids, it is doubtful whether we shall be enabled to avail ourselves of that supply to any extent. The country abounds in cattle, to procure which originally, and subsequently to 412 604 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr. ensure the supply, has been the object of Dr. R.’s several visits. An immense saving has been effected to Government: in obtaining from thence sufficient cattle for provisioning the European troops on the coast, in lieu of procuring them from either Bengal or Madras. The trade of the country is unimportant. An annual caravan visits it from the frontier provinces of China, bringing silks, satins, velvet and woollens, (the latter chiefly English,) cooking vessels, musk, and trifling articles of Chinese manufacture ; and carrying away chiefly raw cotton, the produce of the country. It is expected that a portion of this caravan will this year extend their journey to Maulamyne", and hopes are entertained that this will lead to annual visits in increasing - numbers, and the opening of an important overland trade between China and our possessions on the Tenasserim coast. From Maulamyne are received British piece goods, chintzes, muslins, hardware, &c. in return for cattle, ivory, and a small quantity of stick-lack. With the hill tribe on the west bank of the Salween they exchange cattle, grain and betelnut (the latter from Maulamyne and Bankok), for slaves, tin, lead, and stick-lac. It is evident from all that Dr. R. observed and reports, that both the chiefs and people of this country are not only desirous of conti- nuing on the most friendly and intimate footing with us, but that they are really grateful for the immense benefit which our presence in their neighbourhood has conferred upon their country ; and there is no doubt that should any future danger menace them, they would gladly place themselves under our protection, and see their country under our rule. Our occupation of the provinces has spread peace and happiness over a wide extent of country entirely independent of our authority, by putting an end to that ruthless and devastating system of warfare that had been for ages carried on between the Burmese and Siamese, whose object was not conquest, but solely to plunder and to carry off the defenceless people into irremediable slavery. On many occasions, as Dr. R. passed through the country, the common people and cultivators expressed to him how different was now their state to what it was in former years, when they scarce dared leave the walls of their towns to cultivate their lands ; were obliged to be armed and constantly on the alert, and to leave their wives and families in the town ; whereas now the country is in every respect equally secure, and they are enabled to follow their avocations without apprehensions of any kind. The fact may be observed here, that our occupation of the Tenasserim provinces has also proved of incalculable benefit to a large portion of the population of Burmah themselves, as it is well known that the 5s ay Pig aa Nae-nales teh: peat ¢ tapi autia Hr tee ey oli pavrieive: ue te fost ; pn Ye he . wy WF } bel. V PU_XT. ‘ ROUTE MA P Of Dt Richardsons Journeys tla the interior of the Tenaggerim Provinces “ — Wawa nighe Vesely (( AMS “tl ites \ Y \\ Mon- le Lay (CONTI hy \ RY \ } S Uy, biz RZ * : EZ Z A a es % PS EY , EEE i. Bi ‘a i ‘ ag Si Se TAN MARY A) RKQU ATR aS ~ as Se Ae te eo a Nae ys Ze Sakae gee sl \ alla Ri a © ° Seeks Ate a bs pa q &, i. <| aw Ss $ b ¢ g v Z ‘ Se re Ss J 3 33 > Say SREz 5 - Sy) ES Ose: ra ==! = oy ii HK = SUES Zr \ SSNs Fajpe . ‘‘ The march to-day continued to descend gradually, with a few trifling accli- vities till 12 ; since which nearly level; the climate proportionately improved ; the jungle has assumed the same character as on the other side of the hills, but more open. “‘ We are now fairly in the valley of the May-ping, and have the prospect for the next three or four days of seeing something of the level country, but the whole extent of the country between the Thalween and May-ping, with trifling exceptions (such as the little valley of the Mein-lun-ghee), is one succession of mountains ; nearly all of the primitive series, principally gravel gneiss trap, lime and sandstone. ‘¢ We crossedthe May-papie thirteen times to-day. The village Maun-Haut con- tains about sixteen houses of the most uncomfortable appearance ; it is about 12 days from Bankok, with which the communication is frequent; the river here is about 200 yards across, and rather rapid; there are a number of palmyra, cocoanut and other fruit trees, both here and on the opposite side, where there is also a small village. ‘¢ The river here is a little wider than above or below the village, and just for- dable by elephants ; there are few fish in the river, and the people almost igno- rant of the art of catching them. On endeavouring to procure boats as the easiest conveyance for the sick, I was not a little surprised when only one small canoe could be procured, in which only one of the worst cases could he sent forward. ‘* Remained here one day at the request of the persons who accompany me, in order to transmit intelligence to Labong of our approach. ‘© 13th. Direction North, 20 Rast. Time, 5 hours; distance, 15 miles. “9.15. Road lies along the foot of the western hill; the river turns towards the eastern hills, which are distant about 20 miles.—1l1l. 55. Crossed the Nam. May-tcheem*, wide 100 yards; fordable by elephants.—1. 45. River 200 yards wide ; full of shoals.—2. 5. Crossed the May-ping, and halted on its eastern bank in an open jungle, where a house* had been built for our reception. The road to-day has been nearly level and much frequented ; the whole of the valley was inundated last year to a greater extent than is recollected by the oldest people, the paddy being nearly all destroyed, and the people obliged to take to the hills. ‘14th. Direction North, 30 East. Time, 5 hours, 15 minutes; distance, 16 miles. “8.15. Road good level.—9. 55. Grassy plains.—1. 30. Crossed the May-lie*®, which falls in the May-ping four miles to the westward, wide about thirty or forty yards; halted on the eastern bank at the village of Naung-long”. 614 An account of some of the Petty States (Oct. ‘¢15th. Direction North, 60 East. Time, 7 hours; distance, 21 miles. ‘©8.5. Road good, passable for banaies.—12. 20. Grassy plains intersected with jungle.—1. Western hills distant 20 miles ; eastern hills, 4 miles ; hills n sight to the northward.—l. 30. Paddy ground; numbers of buffaloes and black cattle—2. 10. Halted between the village of Bansan-kanoy*® and Ban- Soupta®! on the western bank of the May-ta‘?, a small stream, which falls into the May-quang® about a quarter of a mile from this, andfrom thence into the May- ping a quarter of a mile further to the south-west. ‘The road to-day has been very good, much frequented and passable for a bullock cart; throughout marks of recent inundation are still very visible ; oranges, pummaloes, pine apple, mangoe, palmyra, cocoanut, guavas, and other fruits are abundant; the first and the cocoanut are the only two now in season. The people have much improved in appearance; some of the women and chil- dren are nearly as fair as Europeans: many of the latter with light hair; the eyes are large and expressive, not at all like the Chinese ; the nose, however, is small, like the Burman. ‘“‘They have had a report current here for the last month, that the English were coming up with 1,000 men, which has alarmed them a good deal. A letter has been dispatched to the people here to-day, telling them who I am, and order- ing them to supply me with every thing I want; and the messenger begged I would remain here two or three days, till the road was made smooth and every thing ready for my reception at the capital. There is no way of avoiding their ridiculous delays.”’ Dr. R. was delayed here a few days, on the plea of preparing for his reception, and ascertaining from the astrologers a lucky day for his visit. ‘20th. Direction North, 20 East. Time, 2 hours, 10 minutes; distance, 6 miles. *©10, 20. Started on horseback with ten or twelve elephants, each having a little either of my baggage or presents. At 11. 35 I was met by the second son-in-law of the Tsodoa, the 3rd chief of the province, with fifty elephants. On each were mounted some of the numerous relations of the chiefs. They had brought a spare elephant for me, on which after complimentary speeches of welcome, I mounted, and we continued our march ; the elephant on which I rode being last. In this procession we proceeded slowly towards the town, occasion- ally stopping to let the elephants pull the pine apple plants and plantain trees out of the gardens of the poor people, with whom the chiefs chatted on the most familiar terms. ‘* At 12. 30 we arrived at this spot, about a mile from the town, which they had fixed on for my encampment. My tent was already pitched in a little square of sheds, which they had built for the people. The chiefs remained with me about an hour, examined the muskets, talked of our soldiers, &c., and then took their leave. On inquiry I found there were two chiefs from Lagon, but none from Zimmay present. There is only a small portion of the walls of the fort visible from this, and none of the houses; and from the immense number of cocoanut and betelnut trees growing inside, it has more the appear- ance of a forest than a fort; the tops of two pagodas (one of which is gilt) are - 1836. ] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 615 visible over the tops of the trees ; the whole country is so covered with food that not twenty houses are to be seen from this place: there are as many round the Fort as there are init. It stands on the right bank of the May-quang**, which is here about 30 feet wide and three deep at this season, though navigable for boats of some burthen during the rise of the river. The May-quany falls into the May-ping about half a mile from this (in the valley of which river both this town and Zimmay are situated), which pursues its course amongst the hills from this to within a few days of Bankok, where the hills terminate, and the country spreads into a plain populous and fertile. The valley varies in breadth from 10 or 12 miles to 60 or 80; the soil is a rich sandy loam, and from the beds of the river apparently of great depth; the hills are of very considerable height, but no snow is visible from this, though the thermometer at 7 o’clock is seldom above 53°. The distance from this to the frontier towns of China is about 40 elephant marches (probably of 12 or 15 miles each) over the northern hills, and throughout that distance no snow is said to be encountered ; but to what other cause than snow the rise of the river can be attributed, I am igno- rant; as it is thought a heavy monsoon if there are three or four days of heavy rain ina month. The annual rise of the river is considerable, and last year was sO excessive as to drive the whole population from its bank. ‘*T have had no communication with any of the chiefs to-day, but a letter was sent to the person (a Benya) left here to provide any thing I might want, to keep the Pungees and the people from crowding round my tent, in consequence of a representation of mine yesterday. The bearer of the letter said it was the wish of the chief that I should be presented to-morrow, and begged that I would not bring any pocket pistols or any other hidden instrument of death; I request- ed to know if I should wear any sword, as it was looked on by us as a mark of respect ; to which they also objected. The materials have this evening been brought to build me a small house. “2st. At 12. 30 sixteen coolies with seven large silver, and nine copper calats (salvers), and a body of peons armed with spears, came out to carry the presents and conduct me to the presence of the chief. “The walls of the fort are formed of the red ferruginous porous stone common in Burmah at the bottom and the top of bricks of the most slender construc- tion; the sides of the streets for a few yards were lined with the common people, bearing muskets ; the shed (about quarter of a mile from the gate) in which the chief received me, was about 60 feet long and 20 wide, with three sheds at right angles built for the occasion, occupying the whole of the front, all of which were filled with people ; many of them near relations of the chief, and all in the crouching position common with the Burmans; nearly all armed either with swords or muskets. The presents had already arrived, and were placed at the upper end of the centre shed. Having made a bow to the chief, I went imme- diately up to his seat (a small light chair) and presented the letter. I said that I was fortunate in being the first to open the road of friendship between the two countries, that it was the wish of the English Government that the mer- chants of each should be as uncontrolled in the territories of his neighbour as if they were in their own, &c. &c. He answered, he had long turned the eyes of friendship towards us ; that he was happy the gold and silver road had been open- ed ; that he hoped we should now be as one people, but that the presents must be 616 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr. sent to the king of Siam, whose instructions would be taken. He wished to know what terms we were on with the Burmese. I said on terms of friendship: that after a war of two years they had sued for peace, and had obtained it—that they had nearly fulfilled the terms of the treaty, and that it was a principle of the English to forget an injury as soon as reparation was made. He said such was not the case with them; that they had been at war with the Burmans for ages, and that they killed or made slaves of them whenever they had it in their power—that the Burmans were equally inveterate. He then asked if I thought T could obtain an order from the Commissioner of Maulamyne for the Burmese to give up some tribes of Shans who had originally formed part of their king- dom of Siam. I said they were Burman subjects ; and though we had conquer- ed the greater part of their kingdom, it had been restored to them, and that we had now no control over them. He said that we had the Thenieu®* or Siriam Shans with us; that they were originally from Caung-Ghan*®; and that if they wished to return to the land of their forefathers, he hoped that they would not be prevented. I said, that they were our subjects, and that if they wished to return, every facility for doing so would be afforded them. ‘‘ I thought this too favorable an opportunity to be missed, as I knew nearly every one in court was aware of my being acquainted with the circumstance of thirty or forty families of Burmans having been carried off by his people when coming to Maulamyne with a pass from Sir A. CamMpseLt. Seeing the person who carried them off in court; and a Mussulman merchant being with me who had represented the impropriety of their proceedings at the time, and fearing that an unfavorable construction might be put on my silence and a precedent for like enormities in future; knowing also that Major Burney had demanded and obtained from the court of Siam the liberation of several hundred people carried off by the Siamese from about Mergui and Tenasserim ; I thought it my imperative duty, as the business had already in some degree been agitated, to endeavour to obtain their release, notwithstanding my instructions were not to interfere in the matter if it could be avoided. I therefore said, I hoped equal indulgence would be granted to the Yaline people who had been taken with the British General’s pass. He denied having seen the pass, though I believed at the time and have since heard that it was shewn him when several of the Zimmay and Logan chiefs were present—that their liberation was agitated and opposed by the Zimmay chiefs. The chief who carried them off being in court, and having been before pointed out to me, I immediately put it to him, and he acknowledged that the pass was still with him, but no one present understood English; that they were ignorant of its contents, but it should be brought to my tent inthe evening. CHow-TcHEe-WEET said it should be made known at Siam, and that they must abide by the instructions from thence. I mentioned the circumstance of Major BurNry’s mission, and said I was sure jt only required to be made known to his Siamese Majesty. The old chief was evidently much embarrassed during this part of the conversation; however, in case of any thing further being done towards their liberation, he cannot again plead ignorance. I repeated the hope that our intercourse might be free and unrestrained, and was again told that they must wait for instructions from Siam. I said that they might come to our settlement on the coast with the same freedom they would go to Lagon or Zimmay, and requested that Ponya-TcHE (who had 1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 617 asked me to make the request) might be allowed to accompany me to Maulamyne, where he would see the facility with which business was carried on amongst us, and the advantage to both countries which would arise from an unrestrained trade. He said he was about to send him to Bankok with the presents I had brought in the course of next month. I hoped he would find it convenient to send some one else, and from the great number of chiefs I there saw round the hall, I thought it could easily be managed. I thea took my leave, and in the evening Ponya-TCHE called on me, expressed himself much disappointed, and begged I would not give up the point. He was persuaded if I repeated the request he should be allowed to accompany me, and as he is one of the most intelligent persons I have met here, and the ultimate object of the Mission likely to be forwarded by his ac- companying me, I promised I would do so, Iasked him if there was any objection to my riding through the fort, &c. &c. He told me Coow-tcHE-WerEt lad desired him to tell me I was at liberty to go where I pleased in the day, but that the gates of the fort were shut at night, and that it was rather expected IT should call on some of the lesser chiefs, his numerous relations. I proposed calling to-morrow on his son-in-law, and one or two others of the chiefs who met me on the road and remained bere the day I arrived.’’ The following are extracts from Dr. R.’s journal during his resi- dence here, which are the most likely to interest the general reader. ‘¢ They had no idea that any European would attempt to cross the hills. I visited Caow Hova*’* ; he is an intelligent man, about 40, of quiet and agree- able manners, to whom the chief government of the province is entrusted. The whole conversation was of the war with the Burmans, their hatred to whom is only exceeded by their dread, and their expressions of friendship for us propor- tioned to their idea of our power from having conquered the Burmese. The Zimmay chief whois nephew to CHou-TcHE-WEET is by no means so friendly to us as the others, and there is some sparring between them now, about my being allowed to come here. On my return in the evening I found CHow-n1-mo1-Koin at my house with two of the first chief’s wives and several musicians, waiting to entertain me with a natch and singing; the music was particularly pleasing. One man, a northern Shan, sang remarkably well, both as to taste and execu- tion, much in the style of the Chinese, but much superior to any thing I ever heard in that country. I presented a cotton handkerchief and a Madras rupee to each, with which they were highly pleased. ‘© 24th. Rode round the fort to-day, which is of an irregular form; the largest end towards the south. The east, west, and southern faces are nearly of the saine length (probably 15 or 1600 feet); the north end not more than 1,000. The wall is from 15 to 23 feet high outside, and from 13 to 18 inside, and of the most flimsy possible structure, with four gates in the east and two in the south, two on the west, and one in the north face, surrounded on three sides by a wet ditch of 60 or 70 feet wide and in good repair. On the east side the river flows: at this season it is not more than knee-deep; at the gates ‘are guards of half a dozen coolies without arms. On the eastern bank of the ‘river opposite the fort are the remains of an old stockade of equal size with the fort, with brick angles and bastions. The houses are more numerous with- aut than within the fort. On the western side is an extensive plain of rich * The title of the heir-apparent to the chieftainship. 4.1 618 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr. paddy ground as far as the eye can reach from north to south, and five or six miles from east to west covered at this season with many thousand head of cattle, buffalos, also elephants in considerable numbers. Saw some of their bandies, which are the best specimen of their workmanship T have seen; the wheels are exactly like, and equal to those of a common English cart. ‘(25th. Ihave heard to-day that orders have been given to the people not to buy any thing from the merchants who accompanied me, and not to come about my house. Yesterday they endeavoured to exchange their goods for cattle, but the people dare not sell without orders, though anxious todo so. I sent the interpreter to CHow-TcHE-WEET, as is the custom here, to intimate my intention of calling on him. He excused himself on account of indisposition. I told the interpreter also to say I was anxious to return on Saturday or Sunday at farthest, and to inquire if there were any objection to my going to Zimmay, to which I received no answer. ; ‘6 Called on Cuow Rasawoon, an elder brother of Coow-tcHE-WEET’s, but by aconcubine ; he lives in a small bamboo house outside the fort, but has gold betel apparatus, the gift of the King of Siam, which is only given to chiefs of rank. He has twenty-eight wives, and told me with evident exultation that they were all taken prisoners by himself but one. He was chief of the Dum- myas, or licensed robbers, for many years,—a situation of some honor and danger, where the most barbarous system of border warfare is carried on with the most rancorous hatred, and where the State looks upon the prisoners taken by these treacherous midnight robbers as a principal source of its population. ‘T represented to Cow Houa the inconsistency of the friendly expressions towards us, whilst the very object of my visit, from which they ought certainly to expect much advantage, was defeated by prohibiting their people from pur- chasing the things they were anxious to be in possession of, from the few poor people who had accompanied me ; that it was bad encouragement for future cara- vans on a larger scale; but to convince them we perfectly trusted in them, the merchants would remain till their things could be disposed of, and that I would give a note of their names and numbers. “26th. I received a visit from Crow Hova to-day, the purpose of which was to induce me to remain here for two months, till the presents I had brought were sent to Bankok®® and the King’s sentiments known. I told him my recep- tion had been such that I could have no objection to remain twelve months, but that the purpose of my visit had been to assure them of our friendly disposition towards them, and open a friendly communication between Maulamyne and the Shan country ; that we had been on the most friendly terms from time imme- morial with the King, or I could not have been sent to any of his allies or dependencies ; that they were now aware of our sentiments and our anxiety to be at peace with all our neighbours, and that I wished to return on Sunday the 31st. ‘© 29th. Paid my second visit to Coow-TcHe-WeeET to-day, who sent in the morning to say he would be glad to see me; I was received as before, but with less stiffness and more cordiality, and there were no armed people in the street. He repeated his declarations of friendship towards the English, which I see no room to doubt; and saidthe only reason we were not on the same terms as natives of the country, was the bad feeling of the Zimmay chief towards us, and 1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 619 that they had sent to Siam to endeavour to bring him under the king’s displea- sure for having received me as he had. ‘*T begged to know if CHow-n1-Mo1-Ko1n and Ponya-TcHE would be allow. ed to accompany me, and told him I was anxious to start on Suaday 3lst. He said in that case it would be impossible for them to accompany me, and hoped I would wait nine days, when every thing would be ready, and a lucky day, and they should then proceed along with me. After some consideration, I said that though my instructions were to return immediately, I would take on myself to remain. ‘ Then,’ said he, ‘ every thing is settled very soon; if you have any thing to ask or communicate, do it without reserve.’ I then produced the General’s pass, which mentions 1100 people, though there are now scarcely 100 remaining, the others having escaped as opportunity offered ; and asked what were his intentions regarding those people ; and as I had little doubt of his refus- ing to liberate them, and I had no authority to demand them, I added, that as our friendship was sealed and they were apprehensive of the King of Siam, I did not wish to press their immediate release, but begged he would allow the heads of the villages now left (who was the person they had selected to bring the letter to Maulamyne) to accompany me, and communicate his case to the Commissioner, that from the constant and friendly intercourse we had with the King of Siam, and his having given up our people who were carried off from Mergui, 1 had no doubt of the result. He readily agreed to the man’s accom- panying me, but begged jocularly that I would not give him up to the Burmans, who were a thorn in their eye, which seemed a signal for the conversation to become general; amongst other things he told me he had 80 wives, 18 sons, and 16 daughters, of whom one is an inferior wife of the King of Siam, but has unfortunately no children; that his relations in the three towns amount to upwards of 700; that there were 30 guns in this town, and 40 in Lagon and Zimmay each; (a Burman prisoner here has offered to eat all above ten in the three places ;) that there are 1,000 inhabitants in Laboung, 40 or 50,000 in each of the other towns:—this is also of course very much exaggerated. The people who accompanied here to-day, after many pros and cons, received an order to buy forty-two bullocks for carriage. A Chinese who is here (father-in-law to CHow-TCHE-WEET) is to start to-morrow for Zimmay, to bring up some of the principal Chinese traders said to have arrived there, and I have strong hopes, from the enterprizing character of the Chinese, they may be induced to visit the coast, ‘¢ T was invited into the fort at 3 Pp. m. to an entertainment, and had the cere- mony called ‘‘ Powk’’*® performed ; beyond which I am told there is no possible mark of friendship. It consisted in two old men saying a prayer of some length for long life, riches, and happiness to one of the English Chiefs of elephants and horses and conqueror of the Burmans, and tying seven threads of white cotton round my wrists: the latter ceremony was also performed by CHow Raya Woon, the chief’s elder brother, and by Coow-n1-mot-Kotn, and I returned the compliment to them. Two large bouquet of flowers, one ornamented with a num- ber of thin silver plates, and some of the flowers being of very considerable but oppressive fragrance, were presented. Sweetmeats were also served up to me, and rice with various curries, both to the people who accompanied me and to the natives, in large silver bowls, to the number of probably fifty, varying in size 4L2 620 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr, from a foot and a half to a few inches in diameter: the workmanship of many of those of the lesser size was remarkably good, nearly all gifts from the King of Siam; after which seven of the chiefs’ wives danced to the music of the Bankok band, by which they set great store, and the music is certainly very pleasing. Many of the women possess a very considerable share of Asiatic beauty : their eyes in particular are large and expressive, without a trace of the Tartar ; their skin remarkably fair, and had it not been for the little Burman nose, some of them would have been really handsome. There were probably not less than 300 people present—all the chiefs of ZLaloung, many of those of. Lagon, but none from Zimmay. ‘* February 8th. 1 have at length prepared to start in the morning by the shortest and best route to Maulamyne. The only reason for not starting to-day is its being a black one, and it would be disrespectful to me, as well as danger- ous to themselves, to begin a journey to-day. J took leave of the chief to-day, and have been allowed as an especial favor to buy one (and CHow-TcHE-WEET has presented me with another) young female elephant, and sends one as a pre- sent to Mr. Mainey. ‘‘ Had another visit from some Zimmay people to-day, who agree with the others as to the very friendly feeling of the people there towards us. They say they so fully expected me there, that houses have been ready for the last ten days. On taking leave of Cuow Hova he gave me a rhinoceros horn, on which he seemed to set a great value, as a charm against every evil; and as I had expressed some impatience at their delays and suspicion, he begged I would not suspect them of any want of friendship in so long withholding permission to purcbase bullocks and trade with their people ; that our character was perfectly new to them; that they were like an elephant crossing the river ;—they must feel before they proceeded; that their difficulty was now got over, they were aware of our intentions being good ; and that we should now come there on the same terms as subjects of Siam, ‘‘In proof of their sincerity and the trust thus reposed in us, Breyna-rcnr would accompany me with 50 or 60 people, 2 or 300 cattle, and a number of elephants ; that they all lived by trade or agriculture, and that some of the Cuow’s sons would certainly next year visit oursettlement on the coast. He invited me to repeat my visit next dry season.” On the 9th Dr. R. started on his return: he gives the following account of the route he took, which, until the 15th, was the same by ‘which he had travelled on his way up. ‘© 15th. Direction South, 30 West. Time, 4 hours; distance, 10 miles, ‘6 12.35. I started: most of the people having gone on before me. ‘¢ 1, 30. Came amongst the hills and commenced to ascend. “2,12. Broke off from the old Mein-lun-ghee road, leaving it a little to the westward.—2. 20. Crossed the May-papie in a few inches of water; path narrow, through low bamboo jungle; hills range about south 70 west, north 70 east.— 3.45. Crossed the May-Gnoot® and halted on the western side in long grass ; the bed of the stream rocky and wide 20 or 30 feet, with but little water at this season. Saw two wild cows and a tiger this evening. ' 4©16th. Direction South, 50 West. Time, 6 hours; distance, 13 miles. - ' ©9, March along the banks of the May-Gnoot, and continued to ascend with 1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 621 few declivities ; the path rocky.—10. Rocky steep ascent for half an hour.—10. 55. Saw the first pine trees. —11. 30. Left the May-Gnoot.—1. 20. We entered pine forest, and no other tree is to be seen but a few stunted yews.—3. Halted on the N. E. bank of a small stream called the May-lie, which falls into the May-ping to the eastward ; the path has been pretty good, and though rocky in many places, I think less difficult than the Mein-lun-ghee road : it is the old road to Martaban®', and has been little frequented for the last seven years ; the rocks in all the high hills are granite of very dark colour externally. A good deal of thunder and rain this evening ; this halting place is famous for tigers; several people have been carried off from it. “17th. Direction South, 30 West. Time, 3 hours, 20 minutes; distance, 11 miles. “8. 30. Crossed the May-lie.—9. 30. Proceeded by a nearly level path along the top of a small connecting range of hills in a noble pine forest.—11. 30. Descended.—11. 50. Halted onthe banks of a small stream, the May-tome®?. Path remarkably good and nearly level for the last two and a half hours; some of the pine trees measured eight or nine feet in circumference, and are much taller and straighter than the same trees in Europe. “18th. Direction South, 45 West. Time, 3 hours, 15 minutes; distance, 14 miles. “8.45. Crossed the May-tome, and continued along a good path ; descending for nearly half an hour.—9. 30. Crossed a small stream.—1].15. Crossed another small stream, and ascended with occasional small descents till 10, when we halted on the southern bank of the May-tuan®, running to the eastward. ‘«The whole march to-day through the same fine open forest of pine; the path good and the hills not at all steep. Shot a jungle cow to-day: these are abun- dant in some of the valleys near our route ; the flesh was harder than the worst buffaloe. Tigers and the common deer are abundant. «19th. Ihave been obliged to halt to-day to refresh the elephants, as the passes are said to he difficult and no forage for three days for them: (there are seventeen large and four small ones.) We are now on the site of an old city®¢ formerly inhabited by Talines (to whom all the country to the westward formerly belonged) and more lately to the Shans, but has been deserted some years on account of the devastation committed by the Burmans ; the valley is of some few miles in extent, and throughit runs the May-tuan river, which at this season is about two feet deep, and asit falls into the May-ping, was formerly navigable for small canoes to Bankok; its course is extremely winding. ©20th. Direction South, 50 West. Time, 6 hours, 30 minutes; distance, 30 miles. ‘¢ 9. Ascended along a rugged bad path. ‘* 10.17. Descended. The firs which have been gradually diminishing in numbers through the whole of to-day’s march, are now only to be seen in single trees towering above the other trees of the jungle.—3.48. Halted ina ravine of very thick jungle on the west bank of the May-tuan, running to the north. ward. ‘¢The march to-day has been the longest as to time, the most toilsome and disagreeable since leaving Maulamyne; the path has been either up or down steep: hills, or along the bottom of ravines into which the sun can only shine a few 622 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr. hours in the day ; and since half past ten through a thick jungle. Our course has been all round the compass, and I have been obliged to note its direction no less than eighty times to get at any thing like a correct general direction ; we are again on the banks of the river which we left this morning, the course of which is even more tortuous than the road we have come. We are encamped on a small level spot of a few hundred yards, surrounded by high hills; the jungle extremely thick, but abounding on the hills with deer of all sizes, cows, buffa- loes, tigers, leopards, and rhinoceros. We passed the end of the road, which runs more to the eastward, along which the bullocks are to come; path is much better, but there are no inhabitants in that direction. ‘“‘ 21st. Direction South, 65 West. Time, 7 hours; distance, 15 miles. “9.15. Proceeded along a narrow ascending path in thick jungle.—4. 45. Halted on the May-Koung®, wide 30, deep 14 feet, pebbly bed, a short way from Kanoo®, a Careen village. The march to-day has been over a succession of hills, some of which were nearly perpendicular, and J should think almost im- passable for a loaded bullock, though the elephants have travelled with ease. The path is well shaded, and there isabundance of water : indeed thejungle has generally been so thick that we could only see a little of the path before us, and a ravine or a hill close to the road ; the march on the whole was less disagreeable than yesterday,’ having been more on the hills. Between 10. 20, and 10. 40, passed a hill, on which there are a great many lofty cinnamon trees, the only ones known by the Careens to exist on any of the hills, and are not at all prized by them; the bank is about two inches thick, and of good flavour, when fresh, but acquires a bitter taste when dry. Passed some immense trees, called by the Burmans Couck-Moo*, of which the canoes are made; said to be large enough to make a canoe for 5 or 600 baskets of paddy. ‘(22nd. Direction South, 40 West. Time, 2 hours, 30 minutes; distance, 7 miles. “9. Path pretty level; jungle extremely close.—9. 20. Along the bed of the May-Koung, pebbly with large rolled mosses overhung by rocks 1 or 200 feet high.— 10. Jack trees ; said to be the site of an old city.—11. 30. Halted in a thick jungle with some betel-nut trees on the western bank of the May- Koung. March nearly of the same character as the last two days, but the hills less steep. ‘¢ 23rd. Direction South, 55 West. Time, 8 hours; distance, 17 miles. **8.4, Ascended.—9.10. Wound up the face of an extremely steep hill from east to west, in a southern direction; and at 9. 20 ascended along the brow of the hill.—11. 40. Crossed the May-Yia®, and proceeded along a ravine. —l. Recrossed the Tia.—4. 45. Halted on the east bank of the May-Gnow, wide 90 or 100 feet, running north, 20 west. The hills to-day, with the exception of those on the 2lst, were as steep as any we have crossed; and our progress slow and difficult ; some of the highest hills to-day had been cleared for paddy, and the ground is said to be productive. Met a Zimmay s!ave merchant return- ing by the route ; he had six slaves, three of whom are about five years of age, for each of whom he gave four bullocks. ‘24th. We have been obliged to halt to-day till the old road between Mar- taban, and this, which kas grown up from disuse, be a little cleared by the Careens for the next two marches, when it again joins the route followed by us in our march up one day from the Thaung-Ein. 1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 623. “25th. Direction North, 80 West. Time, 2 hours, 30 minutes; distance, 7 miles and 4 furlongs. **9. 45. Crossed the May-Gnow several times along a level road. At 10 passed a small Careen village, and left the May-Gnow to the northward. The Careens had cleared the path through long grass, along the banks and in the bed of the May-Satang®, a small stream of afew inches deep, At 10. 15 halted on the banks of the May-Satang, in thick jungle with wild plantains. The path to-day has been nearly level down the course and across the valley of the May-Gnow. *26¢h. Direction North, 65 West. Time, 3 hours; distance, 7 miles. **9. 30. Proceeded along a pretty good path, crossing the May-Satang.— 10. 45. Descended and crossed the May-Satang, the last time.—11. 40. Side of the hills less steep to-day than some parts of our march, but path very narrow on the brink of a precipice.—12. 30. Halted on the brow of the hill. The road which we have come to-day will be good when more frequented. Except a very steep hill at the beginning of the march, the Careens declare there is no better path through these hills. A considerable part of the march to-day was through an old paddy hill on which the trees had not yet acquired any size, and many of the other hills had been cultivated to their summits within the last year or two. The Careens in this part of the hills must, of course, be pretty numerous. ‘697th. Direction South, 70 West. Time, 5 hours, 13 minutes; distance, 11 miles, 6 furlongs. ‘9,10. Started, and crossed several hills, or rather heights, on the hills.— 2. Came on the paths we travelled on the way up.—2. 25, Halted at our former halting place on the banks of the Seindzoy-Keum7™. The path to-day has been good for elephants, and very passable for bullocks. ‘98th. Direction South. Time, 6 hours, 40 minutes; distance, 12 miles. ‘9, Crossed the Seindzoy, and proceeded along the path pursued on our way up.—l. Passed our old halting place on the May-tha-woe7'.—3. 40. Halted at our former halting place on the banks of the Thaung-Ein’. ‘“‘The first half the march to-day, which was extremely distressing to the elephants from the steepness of the hills, was performed in two hours and a half on our march up, and took us four hours to-day. The last half of the march was more level along the little valley of the May-thoe-woe, which we crossed 8 or 10 times, and was performed in very little (10 minutes) more time than we took in the way up. ‘“* March 1st. Halted to-day on the banks of the Thaung-Ein. To-morrow I shall proceed alone, and the Shans will wait for the remainder of the cattle on their own side of the river. The golden sword-bearer is to accompany me one march with four elephants. ‘©2nd. Direction South, 20 West. Time, 4 hours, 5 minutes; distance, 12 miles. ‘10. Crossed the Thaung-Ein at an elephant’s ford about % of a mile above where we crossed before.—12. 10. Passed Ween-Wee7*, our old halting place. «©3,.5. Halted on the old ground at the top of the waterfall’. ““The path for much the longer proportion of this march was good, and per- 624 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr. fectly level; the elephants consequently proceeding rapidly, and were up with the people. ‘‘3rd.. Direction South, 20 West. Time, 4 hours, 20 minutes; distance, 10 miles. “10. 20. Descended the waterfall.—1l. 15. Reached the Yum-byue? river. —2.45. Crossed the end of the Yum-dyue path, by which we marched on our way up, and halted on the beginning of the Dagyue7® path, near our former halting place. ‘The descent of the waterfail was less difficult than I had anticipated. The bullocks left Ween-Wee this morning, and were up a short time after us. The voad on this side of the Thaung-Lin, though still amongst the hills, is less moun- tainous than we have travelled between Mein-Woot and that river. “4th. Direction South, 45 West. Time, 2 hours, 45 minutes; distance, 7 wiles, 4 furlongs. “9. Crossed the Mian-Koung7, the path good but narrow, from not having been cut by the Careens. 9.45. The whole jungle of short bamboos intersected in all directions with clephants’ tracks.—12. 30. Crossed the Chline-Boye7® river, now with only a few inches water, but the bed of the river is $0 or 100 feet wide, with deep banks, probably 18 or 20 feet.—1. 10. Halted on the north bank of the Kwee--Keung’ or buffaloe stream, 10 or 12 feet wide, running to the westward. The path to-day was particularly good and level, but not cleared for a few miles. Some of the people saw to-day a herd of 20 or 30 elephants, amongst which there were several males, and some young ones. ‘‘Sth. Direction South, 45 West. Time, 2 hours, 45 minutes; distance, 7 miles, 4 furlongs. ‘©9. Crossed the buffaloe stream and marched along a good level path.—11. Halted on the banks of the Ou-ko®, after searching half an hour in vain for a path; the Careens who were sent for this morning at daylight have not yet arrived. The path to-day good, open and level, and, as yesterday, much inter- sected by elephants’ tracks. ‘‘This part of the country was formerly inhabited by the Lowa-Talines®!, and the places still bear Lowa names ; the same race extended to the Moy-Toum, before the country was devastated by the Burmans, whose blood-thirsty rapacity has depopulated the whole of this part of the ancient Taline kingdom. ‘“¢6th. Direction South, 30 West. Time, 4 hours, 15 minutes; distance, 12 miles, 2 furlongs. “*8. 30. Good path through open jungle and long grass.—11. Remains of Careen villages.—1l1. 20. Plains of considerable extent ; marks of wild cattle. —l2. 25. Halted in consequence of the jungle in advance being on fire.— 1. 40. Proceeded, and at 2 halted on the south-western bank of the Chline-Boye (which falls in the Gyne®, a short distance in a South 70 East direction from this.) Such is the level nature of the country that some of the stream runs into the Chline-Boye in the beginning of the rains, and out of it after they have fairly set in. The bed of the Chline-Boye, which rises 20 or 25 feet in the rains, is here 80 or 100 feet wide, the water about knee-deep in some places, in others of greater depth, and frequented by alligators; and that of the Chline- putty about 30 wide and 25 deep: they were both choked up with fallen trees, and the latter dry at this season. 1836.]} lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 625 *‘The march to-day has been through a level country ; the jungle open with long grass, and four or five small plains covered with small bamboos much cut up by the jungle cattle. Elephants’ tracks still intersecting in all directions. Saw some rhinoceros’ marks to-day; their feet are smaller than the elephants, toes more apart, and the nails longer ;—sent off two sick people to proceed down the Ghine in boats, under charge of the head Careen. *‘ 7th. Direction South, 20 East. Time, 2 hours, 30 minutes; distance, 7 miles. “8. 30. Proceeded along a good path and level.—9. 30. Plain with long grass. At 10.45 large plain and paddy stubble covered with upwards of two hundred buffaloes belonging to the Careen village of twenty-eight or thirty houses called Twine-woot or Twine-bot.—11. Halted at the end of a plain. **8th. Direction South, 35 West. Time, 2 hours, 20 minutes; distance, 10 miles. “10.10. Proceeded along the level path, through a country of the same character as yesterday.—2. Bed of the Tham-dou* river.—2. 30. Halted at a broken bridge over the Atsong* river on the high road from Martaban to the town of Gyne, about ten miles from Gyne, aud at an equal distance from Domi- tha®, and within sound of the evening gun of Maulamyne. The town of Gyne was destroyed in a revolt of the Talines about twenty years ago. ‘The road to-day good and level ; very beautiful plains, less water than usual, but plenty for cattle and passengers. “9th. Direction South, 20 West. Time, 6 hours; distance, 17 miles. *¢8.10. Route continues through level grassy plain with occasional patches of jungle.—11.11. Paddy stubble.—2. 10. Halted near the Thaung-thoo vil- lage of Naung-laung®, containing about thirty houses, and probably about 200 inhabitants : found here a body of about one hundred of the annual caravans of the Shan-Gaung-bee® Shans, who have been nearly four months on the road from their own country in the north. The road to-day level, and generally free from jungle, through plains of fine long grass. The path has been extremely tortuous, and for the last two hours most unnecessarily winding in all manner of directions through a plain of short grass or paddy stubble. The whole of the plains in this neighbourhood are covered with rich green grass, enough for the subsistence of an immense number of cattle throughout the dry season. The waters of the monsoon recede very late from this part of the country, and at that season boats pole across this plain to Yam-soline®*, and from thence up the creeks to Shewe-Ghin®, and Toungoo”. ‘‘The path along the plain was much exposed to the sun, and many of the Talines, who suffer more from the sun than the natives of India, were ten hours on the march. ‘610th. Direction North, 20 East. Time, 8 hours; distance, 26 miles. ‘© 7, 15. Marched along the continuation of the plain till 1. 45, when we halted a few hours at Dzadi-been®'!.—6. 30. From this proceeded in boats to Maulamyne, where we arrived at 9. 20 P. M. [To be continued. ] 4M 626 Political and Commercial Relations with the fOcr: II.— Outline of Political and Commercial Relations with the Native States on the Eastern and Western Coasts, Malay Peninsula*, By T. J. Newsoup, Lieut., A. D. C. to Brigadier General Witson, C. B. Note.—It will be convenient to preface, that the subjoined outline follows the geographical order of the States on both coasts of the peninsula; com-_ mencing on the north-west with Quédah, and proceeding southerly down the Straits of Malacca to Point Romania—thence turning northerly along the east- ern coast up to Potdni. The following is the order of the States, with their supposed boundaries and estimate of population, chiefly derived from native sources in 1835. Quédaht—from the Trang river, in 7° 20! N. to the Krian, 5° 10’N,. Popu- lation 50,000. Pérak—from the Krian to the Rinkup, in about 3° 59’ N. Population 35,000. Salangére—from the Réinkdp to the Lingie, in about 2° 35’N. Population 12,000. Malacca—(British territory,) from the Lingie to the Cassang. Population, (1833- 1834,) 34,333. Johére—from the Cassang to the Sediliy, on the East coast, 2°15’ N. Popula- tion 25,000. Pahdng—from the Sedilly to the Kemdmang, in 4. 15’ N. Population 40,000. Kemdmang—is situated a mile or two up the river, little or no territory along the coast. Population 1,000. Tringanu—from the Kemdmang to the Basut. Population 30,000. Caléntan—from the Basut to the Bariéima. Population 50,000. Paténi—from the Bartina to Tana, in 7° 20’N. Population 54,000. The population of Pinang in 1833 amounted to 40,322,—that of Province Welles- ley to 49,553,—and that of Singapore, in 1834, to 26,329. Quédah, Ligére, Patani, Merdilous, Junk Ceylon.—The upper states of the peninsula, viz. Quédah, Ligére, Patdni, Merdilous, and the island of Junk Ceylon, are considered in the treaty concluded by Major Burney, with Siam, in 1826, as provinces of that empire,—a con- cession to that arrogant power, scarcely just or politic. Quédah.—Our relations with the latter four states are merely of a commercial nature,—an unrestricted trade with the ports of Sin- gapore, Malacca, and Pinang. With regard to Quédah, it is stipulated in the above treaty, that the Siamese shall take proper care of that country and its people, and that they shall remain there: the inha- bitants of Pinang and Quédah enjoying mutual trade and intercourse as before. The Siamese engaged not to levy any duty upon stock and provisions ; such as cattle, buffaloes, poultry, fish, paddy, and rice, which the inhabitants of Pinang, or ships there, might have * This paper, though rather more of a political nature than is suitable to a Scientific Journal, cannot be refused publication, as it forms the wind-up to the valuable series of notices of the Malacca States already printed in our pages.—Ep. + It must be borne in mind, that a tract of the Quédah coast, called Province Wellesley, about 35 miles long by 4 broad, extending from the embouchiire of the Miéda to that of the Krian river, is under the Pinang Government. 1836.] Native States in the Malay Peninsula. 627 eccasion to purchase in Quédah: and the Siamese should not farm the mouths of rivers or any streams in Quédah, but should levy fair and proper import and export duties. The English engaged to the Siamese not only that they would not attack nor disturb Quédah, but that they would not permit its depos- ed sovereign or any of his followers to attack, disturb, or injure in any manner the territory of Quédah or any other territory subject to Siam. They also engaged that they would make arrangements for the ex-king of Quéduh to go and live in some other country*, and not at Pinang or Prye, or in Perak, Sulangére, or any Burmese country. In case the ex-king did not remove, the Siamese were at liberty to levy the export duty upon paddy and rice in Quédah. With Quédah for Pulo-Pinang or Prince-of-Wales Island.—Pulo- Pinang was formally ceded to the British on the 12th September, 1786, for the annual sum of 6,000 Spanish dollars, by the father of the present ex-king of Quédah, through the agency of Mr. Lieut, to whom it had been presented the preceding year as a marriage portion with the Malay king’s daughter. In 1802, Sir Gzorce Letru finally arranged that the English Com- pany should pay annually to His Majesty of Purlis and Quédah 10,000 Spanish dollars, as long as the English should continue in possession of Piilo-Pinang and Province Wellesley. This last is the line of coast, on the opposite shore, on the main, that lies between the river side of Qualla Muda on the north and Qualla Krian on the south; measuring inland from the sea side 60 orlongs. _ The Company are bound to protect this coast from all enemies, robbers and pirates that may attack it by sea from north or south. The treaty consists of fourteen articles, and terminates with the following remarkable paragraph. ‘‘ These fourteen articles being settled and concluded between his Majesty and the English Company, the countries of Puriis and Quédak and Pulo-Pinang shall be as one country ; and whoever shall depart: or deviate from any part of this agreement, the Almighty punish and destroy him; he shall not pros- per.” Pinang was formed into a regular government in 1805. Pérak.—Pérak is the next state, on the west coast, south of Quédah. A notice of its relations has been already given. . Salangore.—A treaty of commercial alliance, precisely similar to that entered into with Pérak, was concluded with Salangére in 1818 by the British Commisioner, Mr. Cracrort. _™* He resided and drew his pension in Malacca till the close of 1835, when he left it ostensibly for Dedli in Sumatra. 4m 2 628 Political and Commercial Relations with the [Ocr. By Major Burnezy’s treaty with Siam, 1826, the British are bound not:to allow the State of Salangére to attack and disturb that of Pérak. The Siamese are likewise bound by the same treaty not to go and attack or disturb Salangére. In 1786 the Dutch dictated atreaty to the then R4ja (Iprauim), by which the latter was compelled to acknowledge the sovereignty of the Dutch, who were then in posses- sion of Malacca, and to hold his kingdom from them asa fief. In 1818 the Dutch wished to renew this treaty, but the Salangére chief refused, relying on his newly acquired relations* with the British. Johére for the occupation of the island of Singapore.—In 1818 a commercial treaty was entered into, by the then Resident at Malacca, Major Farquaar, with the monarch of Johdére, who was acknowledg- ed by the Dutch; viz. Sri Sultan ABDURRAHMAN SHAH. Since that time, however, the elder brother of this prince was set up and acknow- ledged by British policy as being the rightful successor, and in order to obtain a legal title to the island of Stmgapore, which, as will be shewn, was ceded to the Company by the latter. By Major Farqunar’s treaty with ARpURRAHMA’N SuHA’H, mutual liberty of navigation and commerce in the ports and dominions of Johdre, Pahdng, Lingin, Rhio, &c. was secured to British subjects, or persons under the protection of the Company, on the footing of subjects of the most favored na- tions; the subjects of Johdre enjoying similar advantages and pri- vileges in the harbour of Fort Cornwallis, and in all other places dependent on the British Government of Pinang. Sir Stamrorp RaFF ies, in a letter to Sir Roser H. Ineuis, states that the Dutch no sooner obtained possession of Malacca, (in Sep- tember, 1818, the month after Major FarquuHar’s treaty with ABDURRAHMAN SHAH had been concluded,) than, notwithstanding our treaties, which had been publicly communicated for their information on the cession of Malacca, they sent an overpowering force to Rhio, where ABDURRAHMAN resided; declared the chief to be their vassal, treated our negotiations with him contemptuously, and dictated a treaty which excluded the British trade from the port, &c. In consequence partly of the delivering up of a place, so advan- tageously situated as Malacca, to Holland, it was deemed politic by the Marquis of Hastines, in order to protect the British trade, and to secure one of the two passages to the Eastern Archipelago and China, to attempt the improvement of our relations with Achén at the * Salangére, formerly renowned for its warlike and enterprizing colony of Bugis, has dwindled into a weak, piratical state. They were apprehending and preparing for an attack from Siac in the middle of last year. The present chief is not remarkable for talent or enterprise. His name is Sultan ManomeED. 1836.] vative States in the Malay Peninsula. 629 northern entrance, and to form a settlement at Rio, an island advan- tageously situated near the southern extremity. ~ For these and other political purposes, Sir Stamrorp RaFFLes was appointed and associ- ated with the Resident at Malacca, Major Farquuar, by his Lord- ship, and proceeded on his mission from Bengal in December 1818. On arriving in the Straits he found Malacca and Rhio in the hands of the Dutch, as already alluded to ;—consequently, Holland at this time held in her hands the keys of both those gates to the China Seas, the Straits of Malacca and Sunda. The Carimon isles and that of Singapore were almost the only eligi- ble spots now left. The latter, with the concurrence of Major Far- QUHAR, and, some say, at the suggestion of Captain Ross, was judi- ciously selected by Sir Stamrorp, and the British flag there hoisted on the 29th February, 1819. The new settlement was placed in charge of Major Farquuar ; who, from his great popularity among the Malays, and local experience, was admirably fitted for the office. - It appears that Sir Stamrorp when off Singapore was visited by the Tumungéng of Johére, a chief inimical to the interests of Holland, and by no means friendly to the claims of the Sultan newly elected by the Dutch, ABpURRAHMAN Sua’H, with whom a reluctant and exclusive treaty, as far as regarded the commerce of other European powers, had been concluded by Dutch agents at Rhio, which gave them possession of that island. The Tumungéng represented to Sir Stamrorp, that the British were still at liberty to establish themselves on the island of Singapore under the sanction of the legitimate sovereign, whom he considered to be the elder brother, Hussain Manomep Sua’u, whose lawful claims had been set aside by the Dutch in favor of those of his younger brother, AspuRRAHMAN SHAG, with whom they had concluded the arbitrary treaty already mentioned. As the recognition of Hussain Sua’u as lawful sovereign of Johdre was anecessary preliminary to treating with him, he was now invited over from Rhio to Singapore by the British Commissioners, and being acknowledged by the two hereditary elective officers of the empire, viz. the Bandahdra of Pahang and the Tumungéng of Johére as their law- ful chief, was recognized and treated with as the legal sovereign by the Commissioners ; who forthwith entered into arrangements for the immediate occupation of the port and the establishment of a settle- ment at Singapore, pending a reference to the Supreme Government. By the arrangement with Hussain SuAu, of the 26th June, 1819, which appears to have been rather loosely drawn up, it was decided that the British jurisdiction should extend only over a limited part of the island; viz.—from Tanjong Mallang on the west, to Tanjong 630 Political and Commercial Relations with the [Ocr. Kattang on the east; and interiorly as far as cannon-shot range all round the factory. The council for the government of the island to be composed of the British Resident, the Sultan and the Tumungong. This state of affairs continued with little alteration until 1824, when final arrangements for the entire cession of the island to the British were made, and a treaty of friendship and alliance concluded by the then Resident, Mr. Crawrurp, on the part of the Company, with their highnesses the Sultan and Tumungong of Johére. This took place on the 2nd of August. By it the island of Singapore, together with the adjacent seas, straits and islets to the extent of ten geographical miles from the coast of Singapore, were given up in full sovereignty and property to the East India Company, their heirs and successors for ever. The Company agreed, in consideration of this cession, to pay to the Sultan the sum of 33,200 Spanish dollars, together with a stipend dur- ing his natural life of 1,300 Spanish dollars per mensem; and to the Tumungong the sum of 26,800 Spanish dollars, with a monthly stipend of 700 Spanish dollars during his natural life. In event of the Sultan and the Tumungong, their heirs or successors, preferring to reside permanently in any portion of their own estates, and to remove for that purpose from Singapore, the Company agreed to pay the Sultan, his heirs or successors, the sum of 10,000 Spanish dollars; and to the Tumungong, his heir or successor, the sum of 15,000 Spanish dollars. The Sultan and the Tumungong, in return, relinquishing for themselves, their heirs and successors, to the Com- pany, their heirs, &c. for ever, all right and title to every description of immovable property, whether in land, gardens, houses, &c. of which they might be possessed within the island or its dependencies at the time of their withdrawal from Singapore, for the purpose of re- siding permanently within their own states. It was also mutually stipulated, that neither party should be bound to interfere in the internal concerns of the other Government, or in any political dissensions or wars which might arise within their re- spective territories, nor to support each other by force of arms against any third party whatsoever. The Sultan and Tumungong bound them- selves that, as long as they continued to reside within the island of Singapore, or drew their respective monthly stipends from the Com- pany, they would not enter into any alliance, nor maintain correspon- dence with any foreign power or potentate without the knowledge and consent of the Company, its heirs, &c.; to maintain a free and un- shackled trade every where within their dominions, and to admit the trade and traffic of the British nation into all the ports and harbours of 1836.] Native States in the Malay Peninsula. 631 the kingdom of Johére and its dependencies on the terms of the most fovored nations. Such are the conditions under which the British hold Singapore from the Sultdn of Johére. Pahang.—Pahédng, though virtually independent, is nominally a de- pendency of Johdre ; governed by one of its elective officers, the Banda- hdra. It has consequently been included in the relations with that state. Tringanu and Calantan.—By the 12th article of Major Burnezy’s treaty it is stipulated, that Siam shall not go and obstruct or interrupt commerce in the states of Tringdnu and Calantan. English merchants and subjects shall have trade and intercourse in future with the same facility and freedom as they have heretofore had ; and the English shall not go and molest, attack or disturb those States upon any pretence whatever. Patdni.—Patdni has already been adverted to as having become a province of Siam, on which empire it borders. Present condition of the Malay States.—Waving thus traversed both the eastern and western coast of the Peninsula, I will briefly advert to the political condition of the Malay States as it existed at the time of my quitting the Straits in 1835. The Siamese retained, in spite of their struggles, firm hold of Quédah and Patiéni, which are still groan- ing under the yoke. The rightful Raja of Patdni remained a close prisoner in Siam, and his country in a state of depopulation and dis- tress under a Siamese governor. Tringdnu and Calidntan, being less under the withering influence of the monarch of the White Elephant, are in a more prosperous condition, carrying on a considerable trade with Singapore under their own princes. Both Tringdau and Calantan have been lately menaced by Siam, in violation of their treaty with the British, by which they are interdicted from interfering with these States—Kemamang is a small state, lying between Tringdnu and Pahang : of the former it is nominally a tributary, but bears a mala Jama on the score of piracy, —a practice said to be countenanced by its chief. The pirates are chiefly tempted by the prows trading from Patdni, Caldntan and Tringdnu to the port of Singapore. Pahdng was in a peaceable and flourishing state under its Bandahira, carrying ona pro- fitable trade with Singapore, chiefly in gold-dust. The shores of Johére, though nominally the possessions of our stipendiary the Sultan, are miserably neglected ; the creeks, bays, islets, and rivers of this ex- tensive tract affording safe shelter to the hordes of pirates that threat- en to extirpate the native commerce of Singapore. The states in the interior of Malacca were, by the last accounts, stillin anarchy and con- fusion, arising from the fierce feuds and broils which have for some years 632 Political and Commercial Relations with the [Ocr. past been raging among the native chiefs. Salangére was labouring under serious apprehensions of an attack from Siac on the opposite coast of Sumatra, the chief of which was said to be collecting a fleet of prahus for that purpose. The Raja of Salangére was employed in repairing his fort, and remounting the numerous guns that lay scat- tered on and around the hill on which the fort stands. Pérak was quiet, and occupied in agriculture and the tin trade. Our old ally, the ex-king of Quédah, and the Sultan of Johdére were living on their hand- some pensions at Malacca. The latter has since died (September 2nd, . 835). Near the close of 1835 no steps had been taken with regard to the succession. According to treaty, the pension was to expire with the Sultan ; but out of consideration to his widow and children, an allowance of 100 Spanish dollars per mensem has been granted her by the Straits Government, pending a reference to Bengal. The late Sultan first married with the present Bandahdra of Pa- hang’s daughter ; by whom he has no issue. By his second wife, the present Tumingong of Singapore’s sister, he had a son, surnamed Tuanku besér, who married one of the Tuméngong’s daughters, but died without issue. His third wife was a woman of low birth, by whom he has a son now living at Singapore, named Aspat Jauiz. He is about 21 years of age. Not being of noble blood by his mother’s side, his claims to the succession are not considered good by the Malays. By the fourth and present wife, who is of royal extraction, he has two sons, fine lads,—and two girls: they reside with their mother at Malacca. The eldest of the boys is considered the late Sultan’s heir. The ex-king of Quédah, I believe, left Malacca towards the end of 1835 for Delli in Sumatra. He had, in 1838, expressed to me his determination of doing so, being disgusted at the answers given to his earnest and repeated applications for redress against the Siamese, and to his request for permission to reside at Pinang, which had then been recently refused by Lord Witt1am Bentinck. He said that he had many friends at Delli, and hinted at the possibility of his mak- ing a final attempt to expel, with their assistance, the Siamese from his dominions. Pérak and the whole Malay population of Quédah, and probably that of Patdni, are greatly under his influence; and it would require but little persuasion to excite the whole of the neigh- bouring Malayan States to take up arms against their haughty oppressors. With regard to British influence over the Malay States, it might unquestionably be much greater than it is; and indeed we might possess almost sovereign power over the whole peninsula, were we 1836.] Native States in the Malay Peninsula. 633 only to exert the political means already under our control. Of later days the fashion has been to treat with them as independent powers ; while the chiefs themselves, from a combination of circum- stances too long for detail here, are for the most part with difficulty and unwillingly brought to consider themselves so. Experience has shewn the necessity of the existence of a predomi- nating power, capable and willing to afford effectual mediation, to which these divided States may look up in their frequent disputes. The Dutch during their ascendancy were fully alive to, and took every advantage of, the influence their commanding position gave them; as the numberless treaties concluded with almost every petty chief on the peninsula and in the Archipelago fully evince: but, by a series of tyrannical and impolitic acts, more particularly the dis- graceful system of forced labour, they alienated the affections of a generous race of men, and lost, as a natural consequence, the fruits of their able, though selfish negotiations and political alliances. Britain now occupies a prouder situation with regard to these Eastern States than Holland ever did. Two princes, representatives of the two most noble dynasties, Quédah and Johore, derive a handsome subsistence from British bounty. British colonies occupy, and carry on an extensive commerce from the site of those two ancient seats of Malayan empire, Malacca and Singapore; while British ships retain undisputed possession of the seas. It alone remains for a wise and liberal Government to consolidate and uphold the moral influence of public opinion,—that extraordinary talisman by which is held together the greatest of colonial empires. In the face of such considerations, deterred by the fallacious theories of non-intervention and non-territorial extension, we are incurring the heavy moral responsibility of permitting so great an extent of power, delegated, no doubt, for philanthropic and humane purposes, to lie inert,—a power which, if wielded with discretion, would not only strengthen our political and commercial relations in this part of the globe, but effect the decided amelioration, and, eventually, the radical extirpa- tion of the evils under which these oppressed States now groan. The absence of the strong hand of power, guided by the dictates of humanity and common sense, to settle the endless feuds of the native chiefs, which are too often excited and supported by the crimi- nal cupidity of native merchants and others residing under our autho- rity (as in the case of the late massacre at Likdét, and the disturb- ances still prevailing at Lingie); the morbid dread of intervention, exemplified in our late treaties, and in our systematical non-support of the native established sovereigns in just authority over their rebel- 4 N 634 Political and Commercial Relations, &c. [Ocr. lious vassals ; the worse than uselessness of British law, applied to a state of society for which it was never framed, are, it is my firm con- viction, the remote causes of the present system of piracy now pre- vailing ; of the numerous unpunished murders and outrages which disgrace not only the territories of Malayan chiefs, but also territories lying nominally under the protection of the British flag; and of the impoverished and disorganized condition of the Malays in general. The resources of the soil have been almost hermetically sealed to the occupier by the frequent and protracted feuds already alluded to. Hence the peasant, driven from his village and lawful means of sub- sistence, and tempted by the smooth seas, the favorable navigation and shelter from pursuit afforded by the unexplored rivers, creeks, and numerous islets of the Straits, and by the charms of a life so congenial to the free and restless spirit of a Malay, is induced to scour the water for a precarious subsistence \by fishing or plunder, or by both, as opportunity chance to present*s * The prdhus used by Malay pirates are from eight to ten tons burthen, extremely well manned and remarkably fast, particularly with the paddles com- monly used. They are generally armed with swivels on their bows, centre, and stern, of small calibre, but long range. When preparing to attack, strong bulwarks of wood called Api/ans are erected, behind which the crew ensconce themselves, fighting with their long guns until their prey is disabled; or till the gong sound the signal for boarding. But what they mainly depend upon for safety and success is their skill in paddling, (Malay pirates scarcely ever attack except during the lull between the land and sea breeze, or in a calm,) the swiftness of their boats, and their knowledge of the intricate channels between the islands, or over the bars of the rivers into which they generally contrive to escape, baffling their pursuers, and often leaving them aground on one of the numer- ous shoals or mud-banks which their own superior knowledge enables them to avoid. The prahus of the Sulé and Ii/dnin pirates are much larger and better equip- ped than those which commonly infest the Straits. The Malay pirates make their attacks and move in small fleets of from six to twenty prahus. During the months of October, November, December, and January, they will be found cruizing up and down the west coast of the peninsula and the opposite shore of Sumatra. From June to the end of September, they are often to be seen among the islets south of Sizgapore, and in the creeks and rivers of the Johére coast. February, March and April are spent in fishing, collecting sea- weed, and preparing for future piratica]l expeditions. The crews are armed with boarding spears (some of very great length), krisses, Malay hatchets and swords (the parang and kleywang), muskets, blun- derbusses, and a variety of missiles, such as sticks pointed aud burnt at the end, stones, &c, ‘ The most noted haunts for pirates on the western coast of the peninsula (according to information derived from a Malay of Salangore, who had in his 1836.] A brief account of Shakarganj. 635 I conclude with afew suggestions touching the suppression of piracy now existing to so alarming an extent in the Straits. Its remote causes, I have already remarked, are alone to be removed by the adoption of a more enlightened policy towards the native powers ; and, it may be added, by the gradual spread of civilization and diffu- sion of useful knowledge. lst. The employment of one or more small armed steamers, together with eight or ten large boats, of the fastest possible con- struction, (particularly for rowing ;) manned fully with Europeans, and well armed for both close and distant fight. Qnd. A discreet surveillance over the conduct of the present Tumungong of Johére ; who is more than suspected of being the main- spring of the daring system of piracy which has so long been an opprobrium to the eastern extremity of the Straits. A threat of with- drawing the stipend he enjoys gratuitously from the British Govern- ment might be useful. | 3rd. A careful survey of both coasts of the peninsula, the unex- plored rivers, creeks and islets. This, in addition to other obvious advantages, will afford opportunities of observing the character and pursuits of the natives inhabiting the sea-shore and banks of rivers, who are always more or less in league with the pirates, and of collect- ing information of piratical haunts and places of rendezvous. 4th. The suspected native chiefs should be peremptorily called upon to lend their assistance and information: particularly the chiefs of Kemamang, Salangore, Pérak, and Caldntan. And lastly, the co- operation of the Dutch Government should be secured. III.—A brief account of Masvu’p, known by the name of Farid Shakar- gay or Shakarbér. By Munsui’ Manan Lat. {Dated Derah Ghazi Khan, 10 miles off from the right bank of the Indus, 10th February, 1836.] When we reached Ramu, a village on the left bank of the united streams of the Hyphasis or Bids, and Hesudrus or Satlaj, about 150 youth exercised the profession himself) are the Bénting, Aroe, Cocab, Ptsang Dinding and Sambilang isles ; those on the Salangore coast, and the islets between Cape Rachado and the Lingie river. The rivers Mirbowe, Birman, Perak, Puteh, Koroo, Muar, Rio Formosa, or the Battu Pahat river, and for- merly the Lingie river: the Straits of Calang and Dryon, Point Romdnia and its vicinity, and the Carmion isles to the south. On the eastern coast are the creeks and small rivers of Johére up to Pahang ; the Kemdmang river; those of Tringdnu and Caldntan, also the islands of Timoang, Puio Tingie, Redang and Aor. 4 Nn 2 636 A brief account of Shakarganj, [Ocr. miles S.-W. of Lodidnd, we heard that between the two waters of the Hyphasis and Acesines is a town called Puk Patan. It was built in ancient days, and is looked upon as a place of devotion, since the body of Suexn Farv’p reposes there. We crossed the river in a small boat, and bent our route to that direction. The road commenced in a fear- ful forest, and ended in an extensive hard clayey plain, which envi- rons the above town. It is constructed on a precipice, which is 70 feet high from the surface of the land. The houses are small, both of burnt and unburnt bricks, and the baz4rs are narrow, contain- ing some poor shops. In the year 600 Hijri, or A. D. 1235, the town was celebrated by the name of Ajwaddhan, and was governed by a Jogi of that name, tributary to the neighbouring Mahomedan chiefs. When SHErku Fart’p (whose original name was Masvp) after travelling into Asia and Arabia chose his residence in this town, with the power of his piety he persuaded the Jogi to believe in the true faith of Munammap, and changed the name of the town from Ajwaddhan to Pak Patan. Pdk in Persian means holy, and Patan in Panjabi signifies ferry, (holy ferry.) It is added, that after passing some period, the Suz wished to undertake the Mujdhedah, which, I think, imports to labour in defence of the faith, and asked the permission of his Murshid, or the guide to salvation, who rests now in the charming place called Qutab, about nine miles §.-W. of Dedl/. Suexu Qursuppi'nN Baxurty&r, as he is called, answered his pupil SHexu Farr'p to make a “ ta?’ or fast for three days. Fanri’p did accordingly, and ate nothing for the fixed time. On the eve of the third day some person presented him with a few loaves, which Fart’p ate, thinking that they were sent to him from the invisible world, or. ‘“‘ Ghaib.”” Meanwhile, a crow holding the polluted intestine of some dead animal in his beak came and sat on the bough of a tree. Fari'p, on the very first sight, felt an abhor- rence in his heart, and, ejecting the bread which he had eaten a few minutes before, his stomach became quite empty. He told the cir- cumstance to QurBupp!'N Baxuryé&4nr, his spiritual guide, who replied, that God has bestowed a great favor on him, otherwise this meal would have hurt him. ‘“ Go now, Masv’p, and fast three days more.” As he had not eaten any thing from six days, he became very weak, and the heat of hunger began to burn his heart. He stretched his hand on the ground, and, taking a bit of clay, put it into his mouth, and found that it tasted like sugar. This was the effect of his pure mouth. The following verse says, 1836.] the Muhammedan Saint. 637 88,5 68 4) a6 9 2; 8955 4S g) md d CSiw Sang dar dast o guhar gardad, Zahar dar kam o shakar gardad. ‘¢ Stone in his band becomes pearl, and poison turns sugar in his mouth.’’ Farr’p attributed this favor of God to the tricks of man, so he threw it out of his mouth, and fell deeply again into the contemplation of the Omnipresent. At midnight hunger rendered him weaker than before, and he again got some pieces of earth, and after putting them in his mouth discovered that they were as sweet as sugar. The same thought of deceit came again in his memory, and he threw them once more out of his mouth, and engaged again in prayer as before. By the end of the night Farr’p reflected to himself, that the feebleness caused by hunger might render him unable to stir, so he picked up again some bits of clay and they became sugar in his mouth. He thought they might have been sent to him by God, ate them, and broke his fast in the manner he was directed by his guide Qursuppi’n. When the sun rose he went to Qursupp1’N, who told him, “ Farry, you did well to break your fast with the sustenance sent to you from the invisible world. Go: you will be sweeter than sugar.”” Hence he was called ‘“‘ Fari’p SHAKARGANJ SHAKARBAR,” or the treasure of sugar. Books have been written of the miracles wrought by Fari’p. TuGHLAQ, a man of obscure origin, and the inhabitant of dbir, seven miles from Pak Patan, presented him with a load of fuel, and asked nothing for its price. The only petition he made to Fari'p SHaxar- GANJ was, to plant him on the throne of DeAli; and it happened so by the benediction of SHaxars&r. The reign of this person may be remarkable for other things for aught I know; but the large and strong fort he constructed now presents nothing singular to the view except heaps of rums. It was called Tughlagdbdd, and is situated six miles south of Dehlt. Fart'p SHakarcGans had many followers; one of them was Niz4m- uppI’N. His body rests in the most handsome place out of Dehli. He was the patron of the famous poet Am1'r Kuusrau, who, by the Persians, was denominated ‘‘ Totie Hind,” or the parrot of India, and sleeps on the same charming spot. The mausoleum of Fari'‘pD SHAKARGANS is visited by the pilgrims of different quarters. The Hindus of this country believe him to be an inspired man, and pay respect to his monument, like the Musalmans. After descending a few steps we came into a square laid with bricks, and entered the cupola in which the Farr’p is interred. It is floored with marble slabs, and opens by a door towards the east. On his left hand is the tomb of his son, Sazexu Bapruppi’'N, neither differing in size nor in materials. Over them is a pompous canopy of green 638 A brief account of Shakarganj. [Ocr. brocade tied with string against the roof of the monument. A small ‘window covered with oil and dust is made in the direction of the south. It is called the ‘‘ Darwazah Bihisht,’’ or the door of Paradise, and is opened every year on the fifth of the month of Muharram, which is the death day of that holy man. The people flock on that day, and, pushing each other forward, rush in at the Darwazah Bihisht, and come out by the next door. By doing this they have been persuaded to believe, that they shall have the first place in heaven when they depart for the next world. The monument is 20 paces in circumfe- rence, and 30 feet high. It was erected by his disciple SHuxku Nizému- uppIn, Auliyd, or the Saint. It is whitened with lime, and has a beautiful appearance when nearly viewed. Fari’p was born in 569 Hijri, and died of colic in the year 664 H., at the age of 95. The following verse gives the above dates. Bid sa) 5] dale W,3 Ave \e 8 em) OE Oyxuwe ato, P| AUT ady 58 AW Rahm farm4 shud tawallud 4bid 4zAdah umr, Shud Fariduliah s4le rahlate Mastd asar. The words Rahm farma we should take for the date of his birth, as, ( Led em) ) 140 200 80 40 8 200 or 569 Hijri. The words A’bid azddah stand for the year of his age, as ( $]5) dale ) 70 4.1 + 2+4 +1+7+174+4+4+5 = 95. Shud Faridulldh shews the date of his death as (alld 545) 54304304144 +104 200 + 8044 + 300 = 664. “ Farid asrv’” or the gem of the time, is another date of his death as (spac 3/5) 10 4.200 +:90-4. 70.4.0.4 4) 1054/2800 + 80 = 664 H. Next to this monument in the same square is another dome built by Tucuiag Suku. It contains the tomb of Sarxw ALAn-upDI'N, Moizzuppi’N and Suexu Fazu, &c. &c. the descendants of Fari’p. The height of this dome is nearly 50 feet, and the circumference 36 paces. Itis larger than the former, and has a door opening to the south. It looks older, because it has never been repaired. All of the graves were veiled with dust, but a few flowers lying over them showed that they are also occasionally visited by the people. The accompanying is the drawing of the Fari’p’s monument, which I have done by the means of a camera obscura*. * Our young friend has evidently not yet acquired the knack of the camera obscura (lucida?). Out of consideration therefore for the memory of Dr. Wol- laston, its inventor, we omit his unsuccessful attempt to use it.—Ep. 7 rend 5 wren Vol.V, PU XXXVL Connection of Mithratc with Hindu Gins. o £ me O35, Ger x' s SS 25 2359: fitndi Coins. Canouf Serces. i : with Ardokro x OU ADO SPs Te rk: reverse. 1536.) Coins of the Mithraic Series. 639 we Iv. —New varieties of the Mithraic or Indo-Scythic Series of Coins and their imitations. By James Prinsmp, Sec. As. Soc. &c. _ From the variety of the Mithraic reverses already made known, it might have been imagined that the series was nearly exhausted. Every year, however, adds a few new types to our previous list, or produces finer” samples of these hitherto considered indistinct. So multiplied, _. indeed, are our resources at the present time, that we can afford to be _- fastidious, and not only reject coins of the baser metals, but limit ‘the admission even of golden novelties to those of one size, weight _and value ! My object in Plate XXXVI. is to develope more fully the transi- tion from the Mithraic or Indo-Scythic coinage to the Hindu series, . for which my numerous friends have furnished even more unequivocal _ links than those engraved in my former Plate, (XX XVIII. of Vol. TV.) I must begin, however, with a few novelties of the true Mithra type. __ Fig. 1 is the first to rivet our attention and curiosity. It is an unique of Mr. Masson’s discovery. The obverse has the usual stand- Jing figure of the Raja sacrificing, with the legend PAO NANO PAO _ KANHPKI KOPANO. The reverse has an armed figure, nearly the "counterpart of the other, but without any altar, and with the usual ‘monogram : the legend being in» Masson’s drawing, OPAATNO. Not- having the coin itself before me, the reading I venture to substitute for this, is of course liable to correction; but the strong similitude between the commencement of this legend and of the two curious ones formerly noticed, namely, APAOXPO and APAH@PO, Jeave little doubt in my mind that the one before us should be read APAATNO ; the word arno representing the Sanscrit @fy “Agni, the god of fire; whom we may reasonably suppose to. be substituted for Athra, as the Sanscrit qa Arka has been for Mithra in the Indian- E E “ized designation, OKPO. The Pehlevi affix APa Arda (generally written - APTA by the Greeks) implying ‘the great,’ bears an evident — -connection with qa Arya, a common Sanscrit epithet of the same : ‘signification, “excellent;’ or are A'rya, holy, venerable ; as Baa ~~arya-man, the sun, Baya dryavarta, the holy land, (India) &c. -Aria also occurs in combination in Persian names beginning with ~ consonants, as Ariobarzanes, king of Armenia,—a derivative from Berzin; the planet Jupiter of the Mithraic system*. ’-. Further search, should these conjectures be well srounded, will probably bring to light coins with the single appellation ATNO, which has not hitherto been observed. *-Vaillant Ars. Imp. I. 183. 640 New varieties of the [Ocr. Fig. 2 is misplaced: for the imperfection of the Greek legend on the obverse, ought to condemn it to a lower grade in chronological order. All those legends which have the family name of KANHPKI are clear and better formed than those of OOHPKI to which this coin belongs. The latter, too, have generally the bust of the sovereign substituted for the full length sacrificer. The name on the reverse of fig. 2, ®@APO, is new; nor is it at first very obvious what meaning it may be intended to convey. It cannot well be a corruption of A®PO, because the standing figure faces the opposite way—holds a spear, and wants the flames on his shoulders. Mr. Masson observes on this coin: ‘“‘ Here is another peculiar legend, but evidently signifying the sun as source of light and majestv. Pharos was the term applied to the Alexandrian light house, and Pharoah is the well known Scrip- tural title of the old kings of Egypt. The bust on this coin affords a remarkable contrast to other coins of the family.” It is certainly probable that the word has some affinity to the Greek aos, lumen, dies, solis ortus, but no more than is naturally found between lan- guages of common origin. The word Phraa, or something like it, certainly existed in the ancient language of Persia, as the personifica- tion of light or heat—analogous to Mithra, the sun*. In compounds it is frequently found, as in Phraates, Phraortes, Farnaces, aud Phradates; the latter being altogether congenerous with Mithradates, or as the Greeks translated the name, Apollodotos. From the same root are descended the modern Persian verb upd yys to inflame, whence jis! illuminating, so often employed in compounds. Perhaps the uncouth name of Unad-Pherrou, on a numerous class of the deteriorated Bactrian coins, may spring from the same root. VAILLANT, however, gives a different and, I think, a less satisfactory etymology of the above class of names in his history of the Arsacide. «« Phriapates seu et Phrapates, idem ac Aphra Pates, seu et Papatius ; nam apud Persas idem Aphra est, ac Pa apud Turcas Scythasque, scilicet elevatus, supremus, maximus, que nominibus propriis ut et art preponuntur.”’ (Arsac. Imp. I. 2.) Now if the word aphra be merely an intensitive preposition, like the Sanscrit WX para, the Persian ber, the Greek rapa, and the Latin pre or per, the word to which it is affixed should be a significant adjectival noun, as UIA: par akramas, the very heroic ; pried | Ardashir (Artaxerxes), the Soa SS or very valiant, &c. The participial nouns Mithradates (quasi sold *y¢* the given of Mithra) and Phradates (sdlol, 5] the given of Phra) require the first member of the compound to be a noun. * Phre in Egyptian has precisely the same meaning as mifr in Persian, ‘king, prince.’ 1836.] Mithraic Series of Coins. 641 Fig. 3. A type familiar to us, in copper—and known before in gold of a smaller size. It was, in fact, one of the two coins first extracted by M. Ventura from the Manikyala tope. In Mr. Masson’s coin the spelling accords with the vernacular pronunciation MIIPO, and the solar glory is irradiated on its edge, to shew more plainly its reference. Figs. 4 and 5. Two more gold coins of Mr. Masson’s collection, having the legend of the reverse respectively NANO PAO and NANA, both proved to be equivalent to NANAIA by the peculiar attitude of the allegorical image. The introduction of PAO in the first of the two would almost seem a mistake of the engraver, who had in his mind the PAO NANO PAO of the obverse. I have nothing to add to my former remarks on the word itself, except to draw attention to an extract from the Armenian Chronicles with which Mr. Avpauu has favored us, proving that NANAIA and the Persian ANAHID were not positively identical, each having her separate temples and votaries even in Armenia. «« Anahid was the tutelary goddess of our country, and was known equally by the names of Artemis and Aphrodite in our mythological works. She was always considered identical with the planet Venus, though possessing all the attributes of Diana.” As Nanea, on Mr. Avpatt’s authority, means maternal or motherly, it would hardly be proper to ascribe such a designation to the moon, the chaste Diana; neither has her effigy on our coins the lunar emblem, so distinctly portrayed on the MAO and some other types. Rather then let her be constituted the Venus of the group, who plays an equally conspicuous part in the Mithraic system*. Fig. 6. Isa gold coin from M. Covurt’s drawing, of the a@po reverse. The obverse legend is PAO NANO PAO OOHPKI KOPANO, Fig. 7 is likewise from M. Covrt’s collection. Init I was struck by the strong resemblance of the head-dress to that of the Parthian or Sassanian coins. The legend is wanting, and that of the reverse is quite illegible, though the monogram and device are in a perfect state. Fig. 8 has been already engraved in my plate of the Manikydla relics ; but as one of the most interesting of the Mithraic series, it could not be denied admission in a plate exclusively devoted to them. I wish- ed further to place it in juxta-position with the sitting figure of the APAOKPO reverse, because it might be conceived to be the parallel Hindu /unar coin to that form of the Hindu solar effigy, OKPO. * The Baron Hammer says that the word Neith of the Egyptians is evidently ‘the same as the Persian Nahid—whence also may be traced the German Nacht sand the English Night, 40 642 New varieties of the [Ocr. Like OKPO, this figure has four arms, and is therefore Indian: further it is a male divinity ; and thirdly, it is identified with MAO, the moon, by the crescents of that luminary arising from its shoulders. It must therefore be Soma or Chandra of the Hindu pantheon, who is represented with all these characters in Moors, though a later work by Mr. Cotuman makes him to be a two-handed divinity. The appellation manaoBaro, which so puzzled me on the former occasion, has at length, I think, found a satisfactory explanation. Mang, S560 in Persian, is an ancient name of the moon,—and Bhaga wa in Sancrit, means splendour, glory ; and is given as asynonyme of the moon as well as of the sun. In the Zend, then, the link between the Persian and Sanscrit, we may naturally look for a compound of these two terms, such as manao-bago. It is well known that the my- thology of the Saxons was derived from a Scythic or central-Asiatic source, and their male deity MONA (whence our modern term, moon*), has been by the learned referred to the Persian Mang. Ihave, how- ever, found a much more convincing proof than these analogies afford, that such is the correct explanation, in the Baron Von Hammer’s Prize Memoir ‘ sur le culte de Mithra, son origine, sa nature, et ses mysteres,” Paris, 1833 ; for a copy of which | am indebted to the learned author’s perusal of my observations on the curious relics from the Panjab. In the catalogue of Mithraic inscriptions discovered in various parts of Europe, the Baron points attention to one in particular among Gruter’s collection, i which the word MENOTYRANNUS denotes the deified moon : ‘* Cette inscription est une des plus interessantes 4 cause des deux mots de Menotyrannus et de Persidicus: le dernier indique l’origine persane du culte de Mithra : le Menotyrannus peut se traduire par, seigneur du mois ; mais malgré les objections de M. Rolle contre l’existence du dieu Lunus, je crois que cette existence peut trés-bien étre prouvée, non seulement par tous les monumens astronomiques des orientaux modernes, dans lesquels la lune est représentée sous la figure d’un jeune gargon de quatorze ans, mais encore par la coincidence de la mythologie Egyptienne dans laquelle la lune, d’aprés les decouvertes de M, Champollion, est une divinité male. Enfin le mot MHN dans lequel M. Rolle ne voit que le nom d’un mois, est effectivement un nom persan de la lune qui s’appelle mah et mang ; c’est le moon des Anglais et le mond des allemands, lesquels lui ont conservé son genre oriental.” * In like manner I feel strongly disposed to connect the strange OAAO of our coins with Odin or Woden of the Saxon mythos, an acknowledged derivative from the Sanscrit ¢q Buddha, Mercury. Itis not a little curious that the verbal root x] of two of our present days of the week, Monday and Wednesday, should thus be discovered among a parcel of old coins dug up in the Panjab! 1836.] Mithraic Series of Coins. 643° After this we can have little hesitation in translating MANAOBATO * lord of the months :’'—indeed if we derive BAro from the Persian or Scythic eS beg, ‘ lord or prince,’ we shall have precisely the cor- responding term to tyrannus. Fig. 9. A gold coin of Kanrrxos from a drawing by M. Court. The rao in this seems to have a case for his bow strung behind his back. The reverse is similar to that of a fine coin of OOHPKI in General VENTURA’S series (fig. 9. of Plate XXXVIII. Vol. IV.) which however differs in having the bust in lieu of the full length of the prince. The legend APAOXO has been before explained as “the great sun*.” One of his attributes it may be presumed rather than the god himself, is intended, by the female holding the cornucopia—typifying the ferti- lity he bestows on the earth. Fig. 10 is amost important acquisition to our Mithraic series, as being the very link of connection between them and the Canouwj coins. Immediately after the publication of my former plate, Lieut. Cun- NINGHAM wrote tome from Benares, pointing out a coin in his cabinet of the class I had designated links, having the seated female with the cornucopia, but more perfect than those I had engraved, inasmuch as the legend to the left was preserved and legible as ApAOxPo, the same as that of the standing figure. A duplicate of the same coin was also in Colonel Sracy’s cabinet, and on reference to the Asiatic Researches, Plate I., the letters of APAOXxPO were clearly legible on the - reverse of fig. 6, a gold coin procured by Mr. Witson from the bed of a tank in the Higii district. The cornucopia as a device seems to have been copied from the Roman coins of the Emperors. It is seldom or never to be seen on the genuine Greek coins—nor is it found on our Bactrian series until the age of Azos (with exception of the copper coins of ANTimacuus and PurLoxenus, the date of which is uncertain). Whether it bears any direct allusion to the legend may be doubted,—at least such allusion is entirely lost sight of the moment we pass the boundary into the Indian series. Hindu coins imitated from the Ardokro type. Since my former paper on the Gupta coins of Canouj appeared, very important acquisitions have been made to our knowledge of this before unknown dynasty, through the medium of coins and of in- scriptions; for both of which we are almost entirely beholden to the researches of Lieut. A. CunnincHam and Mr. V. Trecear in the neighbourhood of Benares. * The OPOOKPO of the copper coins may be deemed a still closer imitation of the Sanscrit Baa Aryarka, APA is the Persian orthography. 402 644 ’ New varieties of the (Oct. The inscription in an ancient character upon the column at Allahabad interpreted by Capt. Trovzr and Dr. Miz in the 3rd vol. Jour. As. Soc. had made us acquainted with the four first of the family* ; namely, 1, Gupra, a Raja of the solar race: 2, GHaror Kacua, his son: 3, Cuanpra-curta, his son: 4, SamupRa-Gupta, the fourth in descent : —and there the Allahabad record broke off with an intimation that a son was expected. The Bhitari lath brought to notice by Messrs. Treerar and Cun- NINGHAM, fills up the line of succession for three generations further (see Plate XXX. of the present No.). We may so far anticipate the translation of this highly important record promised to us by Dr. Mitt, for the illustration of our subject, as to state that the infant of Sa- MUDRA was named Cuanpra-cupta II. His son was, 6, Kumara- GuPTA ; after whom followed, 7, Skanpa-Gupra—and there again this new authority breaks off. Now to all of these (excepting perhaps the first) we can at present assign their respective coins from undoubted and numerous specimens, and the succession of the devices on the obverse and reverse will be seen to follow just that modification from the original Mithraic model of the Ardokro coin, as would be expected when the source was nearly for- gotten, and Hindu ideas became predominant. Moreover, we can, from our coins, add the name of Maurenpra-aupta, and perhaps of Assa- Gupta to the list, and there is presumptive evidence of a second - SamuprRaA as ofa second Cuanpra. Altogether we may reckon upon nine or ten generations, which at an average of eighteen years will fill a space in Indian history of nearly two centuries, of which no writ- ten account can be met with ; unless the passage in the Vishnu Purdnat, that the Guptas, a Sudra family, reigned over a part of Magadha, at the time of its compilation, be regarded as alluding to our dynasty. The sites whence their coins have been most frequently obtained, certainly agree with this description; but the date assigned to the Purdna must in this case be carried back a few centuries, and by the Mlechhas of the Indus must be understood the Indo-Scythians rather than the Musalmans. But I had intended to confine myself to an enumeration of the new coins, and to postpone speculation until we are thoroughly acquainted with them. To proceed therefore : Fig. 11. One of two gold coins of Capt. CunnincHam’s cabinet (the first procured at Benares, the second in Calcutta, now with Dr. Swiney). It is a duplicate of my own (from Lieut. Conotiy) with the unintelligible legend, engraved as fig. 23 of Plate XXXIX. It was * See Vol. 3, page 344. + See Witson’s analysis of the Vishnu Purana, Jour. As. Soc. I. 440. 1836.] Early Hindu Series of Coins. 645 then alluded to as having the letters a little different from mine, and was read Kragipta Paragu (pta). Upow full consideration of each individual letter as compared with those of other coins, I do not think the second letter ag; it is rather a bh, and the reading altoge- ther gUTgucaAs, Kubhavu paraguja (adding the ja from the obverse of my own coin, where it is quite distinct). Now we have gained ex- perience enough from our reading of this class of coins to expect that the legend, where it does not merely embrace the titles of sovereign- ty, will express some extravagant epithet. The final ja also (imply- ing born of,) shews that the said epithet belongs to his father; and this will account for the omission of ja on one side of the coin, which would have the effect of making the epithet apply to the son also. The present compound may thus be made up of @& ku, a diminutive par- ticle ; wra bhava, the mind; YU upa, a particle implying similitude ; cd Ragu (for Racuv) the grandfather of Rama, and Sa, born of * or, uni- ted by Kubhdv-uparagu-ja ‘ of the humble-minded, resembling-Raghu- born.” The name is unfortunately cut off from the margin. Two let- ters of it are visible under the Raja’s arm on the obverse, and look like 4a Asa: but on reference to my own coin, I have there no hesitation in reading it yx Samupra. The coin is in this case wrongfully placed at the head of the group in the plate, but as there are two coins to one in favor of the reading Asa I still hesitate to remove it, for Assa- gupta is a known name in the Casimir list; and it is, moreover, so like our Azos, that one feels inclined to discover in it a coin of YAVAN- Aso himself, the supposed founder of this Canouj dynasty. Fig. 12. This beautiful coin is an unique in Mr. TrEeeEAR’s pos- session. It is valuable on every account: as giving an additional link with the Mithraic coins (fig. 9), in the standing cornucopia- female ; as adding a new and much desired name to the coin list; and as teaching a good lesson, in the most unequivocal and well form- ed Nagari, of the style of legend adopted by these sovereigns ; to whom, whether from their extra-Indian, or their low origin, or their limited sway, the panegyrist seems to have avoided applying the usual epithets of royalty, mahardja dhirdja. On the reverse the reading seems to commence, waist Sarva- rdjochhatra, ‘ the chatta or overshadower of all the Rajas’—then, on the right of the obverse, alaaqwaaa ¥.... Kdma-naruttama-ja Gha- (tét ?) and under the left arm, written perpendicularly in the Chinese fashion = Kacua. ‘ Son-of-an-excellent-man-resembling-Kama, * J have worked out this solution, dictionary in hand; for the Pandits could not aid me in the least : itis therefore quite open to criticism. 646. New varieties of the [Ocr. Gua(tot) Kacua.’ The only portion of this inscription missing is the second syllable of Ghatot, which may be replaced with confidence. The Ra4ja is sacrificing on the small Mithraic altar, and is dressed much in the Kanerkos style, though more fashionably. Fig. 13. Next in succession to Kacua comes Cuanpra. Of his coins I have already supplied several examples, (see Nov. 1835, fig. 18, also Marspen MLVII.,) but to keep up the comparison of the re- verses, I here insert a very perfect sample from Lieut. CunNINGHAM’s cabinet, procured at Mirzapur. Legend on the obverse tIM4tay Raja Srt Chandra (the rest only partially visible), and under the arm again as Chandra; on the reverse W\faaa Sri Vikrama. 1 do not find any in- stance of the name on this form of coin being written Chandra-gupta, although it is distinctly so on the pillar-inscriptions. He is the first to change the trident standard of OOHPKI for the (quasi) Roman eagle. He also prefers the bow to the spear. Fig. 14. Lieut. Cunnincuam’s, from Gaya, similar to my own (Capt. Wape’s) of fig. 16, Plate XXXVIII. Vol. IV. Fig. 17 of that plate is another ; and seven are now known of the same type, dispersed among us: but few, if any, have the marginal inscription so well developed. As all the coins bearing simply Vikrama on them may be set down to Cuanpra-ocupta, so all having 4tt@H~a: Parakrama may be assigned to his son SAMuDRA-GuPTA the first. This legend is attached to the same sitting female as before on the reverse. The Raja on the oppo- site face is just like his predecessors in costume and attitude, with spear and eagle standard. By means of Messrs. CUNNINGHAM’S and TREGEAR’S Coins, adie to my former specimen, the long legend on the obverse can be nearly all restored; it appears to be Wat WA AAA... .. AsTASTAT.. .. Samara satamataga (ja).... which may be translated ‘ having the strength of 100 must elephants,’ and on the opposite margin vijayajatara.... In my former specimen, however, the final portion read Aparajita davya. Under the arm the word #a_% Samupra is written in the perpen- dicular form, the uw being apparently placed above the m, because the d had taken its proper position below. Fig. 15 is another Chandra-gupta, from Col. Stacy’s box, of which Mr. Trecear has a duplicate. Another is engraved in Mars- DEN, fig. MLVIII. From the alteration of the device, and particularly the omission of the fire altar on this coin, we might with plausibility set it down to CuanpRra-Gupra the second,—but on the same authority we might make two Samupras ; for these princes seem to have imitated one another so closely, that we find the device of the Raja and his wife . & 1836.] Early Hindu Series of Coins. 647 (?) like that of the Raja and eagle standard, repeated on the Samudra coin (fig. 12,) and at a later period on a coin of SKANDA-GUPTA (fig. 24, of Plate XXXIX. Voi. IV.) with a change of costume. The Raja’s name on this coin is disposed in two perpendicular lines one on each side of the spear 33 Chandra-gupta—the second line, not very clear in Col. Sracy’s coin, is quite distinct in Mr. Trucxar’s, which reached me just too late to be substituted in the engraving. On the reverse, the cornucopia lady is seated on a sleeping lion—as if to express ‘ all will go on prosperously if ye rouse not the wrath of your ruler.—On the left hand are the words Y= q¥y: in the ancient character. The upper prolongation of the p, perhaps, indicates an anuswara, and thus the reading may be Get: Panch-chhavayas, ‘ the five excellencies ;? to wit, of a king.—There is a fault in orthography, however, here, as in the legend of Ghatot kacha : the words should be written way gay: Pancha-chhavayas. Whether the word chhavaya, ‘ light,’ may have any allusion to the five luminaries of the Mithraic worship; the sun, the moon, fire, Jupiter, and Venus, it is impossi- ble to say :—but that a king should possess five virtues, we learn from various Hindu authorities. Fig. 16. An unique in Captain CunnineHam’s collection from Gaya. The female of the reverse having in the last quitted her Gre- cian seat, has been here installed in one of a more genuine Hindu character—the lotus flower. There isa peculiarity also in her at- titude, both hands being turned up, and the elbows resting on the knees. The legend is unfortunately cut off. On the obverse, how- ever, to the left of the usual Raja, we have in very conspicuous letters superposed in the usual style Gait: Kumara—proving that this is a coin of KumAra-cupta, the successor of CHANDRA- GupTA the second, and thus far in accordance with the Bhitari monument. Lieut. CunnincHam has another of the same prince, of quite a different type, (described in Vol. IV. page 637,) but what confirms Kumara’s succession to CHanpra the second, is, that there are devices common to the two which belong, as far as our researches yet go, to no others,—as if on the accession of the new prince the mint had continued the preceding device, mutato nomine, until an- other was subsequently selected by the rising monarch. (See figs. 27 and 28, Plate XXXIX. Vol. IV.) Figs. 17 and 18. For our acquaintance with the owner of the _next coin in our series we are entirely indebted to Lieut. Cunnineuam, He first extracted his name from the Bhitari-lath inscription,—and subsequently traced it on these two unique coins in his own, and on 648 New varieties of the [Ocr. one of my, collection, already published ; (fig. 24. of Plate XX XIX. Vol. IV.) Fig. 17 is from Gaya, and fig. 18 was dug up near a village four kos from Ghazipur. On the obverse, the general attitude of the Raja is the same as usual—the waist a little more fashionable, the gaiters absolutely those of the last century! and the hair or wig. commencing to be curled jn parallel rolls, as will be more fully developed hereafter. The name perpendicularly disposed under the arm of both figures is quite clear, or w= Skanda ; while on the reverse of Fig. 18, itis as decided- ly (in the old character) SYRUYUA Sri Skanda gupta, the very name of the Bhitari-ldth successor to KumAra. Cn comparing the plates in the Researches and Journal of the coin given to me by Mr. Bacon, many years ago, and then thought rather suspicious, Lieut. CunninaHam soon found its legend to be identical with his own,—a fact fully confirmed by re-examination of the coin it- self. These three, however, are the only coins yet known of this name. One of them No. 17, exhibits a new name on the reverse, for, unlike 18, itis certainly not Skanda-gupta, but HAA: Kramamanda, which may be looked upon as a rhyming epithet—‘ equal to (or sur- passing) Manda” (Saturn or Yama). Mr. Trecear has lately got a duplicate of this coin—in which the reading is rather mM#HaT&:—one and both may possibly be intended for #ta#¥*H: Sri Mahendra. Figs. 19, 20. We now pass to another new acquaintance made out jointly by Lieut. Cunnineuam and myself on a general inspec- tion of the Gupta coins. Fig. 19, is in the Society’s collection, and is engraved as No. 14 of the Plates in the 17th Vol. As. Res. unread by professor Wiztson. Upon recognizing the final letter = ndra, we soon perceived the preceding letter which I had before mistaken for a ph, or 2, to be the old ¥, A, and thus with the vowel above it, the name was immediately cleared up as Mlae*y! Sri Mahendra. Ano- ther coin from Gaya, belonging to Lieut. CunnineHam, turned out to be of the same individual as to the reverse, with some varia- tion in the legend of the obverse. Under the arm of the latter, the letter @ ku seems to denote a Kumara; but on the margin are evidently the words wya Wey Jayaté Mahendra. On the Society’s coin, fig. 9, the marginal inscription is more complex— UCHLSHAT, as yet unintelligible; then between the feet 3} Sri, and near the hand the letter ny gu (of Gupta) the intervening name being cut off. Pursuing the examination, we found the coins 29 and 30, of Plate XXXIX. Vol. IV. with the Raja on horseback, and the seated female _\ Jour As, Se oc. ane ‘Hr a(t » Canine hy + aad | j= t 4 ve Aes LNA ot Ateanaatt Second Series of imutations from the ‘Ardokro’ type Gis He TT NA) : ily’ yi Ni 1 ANY Qi A aa 4 yak i 1 Ny oy if J) OY y { ‘\ 4) ey 1) mul WNW ia i i VC 7836.) Early Hindu Series of Coins. 649 feeding the peacock, to belong alsoto Manenpra-cupra. Ajita Ma- hendra. on the reverse and Mahendra-gupta on the obverse of 30, are ‘quite clear. I was. before only misled by the letter h, which I read as the nasal » of the /dth alphabet. I shall have occasion to recur to this name in the next plate, which contains those new forms of the Canow coin that are without the cornucopia female, and have not such direct analogy to their Mithraic prototvpe as is palpable in the whole of the reverses included in the lower half of the present plate. Plate XXXVIII. Figs. 1, 2. These two coins, from Mr. Treezar’s cabinet, are variations only of the original coin given to me by Lieut. Conor, now became celebrated as having opened the door to the understand- ing of the whole group. In that coin, however, the archer holds his bow in the wrong hand, whereas in the two present coins, and the one following, the position is rectified and the lion is better developed, particularly in Fig. 2. Besides adding these fine specimens to our series, Mr. TrecuAr has made out the true reading of the legend on the reverse. Instead of. Saccha or Pradya the word is fa / ATIWISIV4 Journ.As. Soc. 1836.] Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. 657 Itisa great pity that the horde discovered at Korinder was not secured at once. Jt might have contributed very materially to our classification of this second Canouj dynasty. A great many specimens of the same sort must also be scattered about in the cabinets of retired Indians at home ; and we may hope now that Professor WiLson has commenced upon the task of examining the coins in the Royal Asiatic Society and India House collections, specimens will flow in to him from all quarters to be decyphered and described. V.—Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions, lithographed by JamEs Prinsep, Secretary As. Soc. &c. [Continued from page 561.] Inscriptions from Buddha-Gaya, Plate XXX. The neighbourhood of Gaya has long been known to be prolific of inscriptions :—yet, notwithstanding the various notices of them which have appeared in the Researches, of the Bengal, and of the London So- cieties, the theme is, as yet, by. no means exhausted. Mr. Harineton furnished our Society at a very early period after its institution wth copies of two inscriptions from the principal cave, lying in the hil’ of Nagarjuna, (the name, it will be remembered, of a celebrated Buddhist patriarch,) one of which was decyphered by Dr. WiLx1ns, and proved to be a record of the excavation of the cave by ANanra Varma, the grandson of Yacna Varma. The date is not given, but the character (No. 2 of the Allahabad lith) shews it to belong to an early cen- tury of the Christian era. Mr. Harineton mentions several other caves and inscriptions which have not yet been examined. Dr. Wixins also translated one inscription copied from a stone by Mr. Witmor in 1785, (As. Res. vol. i. 284,) dated Samvat 1005, purporting that Amara Deva, the author of the Amera kosha, built the temple of Buddha at Buddha-gaya. Dr. Hamitton (Roy. As. Soc. Trans. vol. ii. 44,) in his account of the ruins of Buddha Gaya, alludes cursorily to inscriptions on two images of Gautama, recording their erection, one by Jaya Smn and Kuma’ra Sen, sons of PunyasysapraA, son of Samanta, all untitled. persons: the other by Raja Visyaspuapra, of whom nothing more is known. The Burmese inscription found by the Embassy in 1831, was of a more interesting description. It is described in the Journal (vol. iii, page 214), and more fully by Colonel Burney in the last volume of the Researches. It was upon the occasion of my requesting Mr. Hatuorne, then magistrate of Gaya, to take a duplicate of the Bur- 4a 658 _ Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. [Ocr. mese facsimile, that this gentleman went beyond his commission, and kindly furnished me with facsimiles of several other inscriptions in the neighbourhood of the ancient temple, all of which, he says, are quite illegible to the learned pandits of Gaya. “No. 2, (No. 1 being the Burmese inscription) he writes, is on a stone lying near the Mahi Buddha temple.” A copy of this, noted by Hamitton as ‘ an inscription of considerable length,’ appears to be deposited in the E. I. C.’s Museum, labelled No. 113, but no further account of it is furnished. It is this imscription which I have litho- graphed in Plate XXX; but before proceeding to its discussion, it will be better to notice the other items of Mr. Harnorne’s dispatch. ‘‘ No. 3 is an inscription ona stone, inserted in the wall of a Brah- man’s house erected on the site of the old fort, said to have belonged to Raja Amir Sinn, who went over to the Burman empire, became converted to the Bauddha faith, and died inthat country.” This is evidently the inscription translated by Witktns ; the Raja Amr being the AMARA above mentioned, : and the story of his conversion has merely been altered a little in repetition, and mixed up with the more recent collisions between the Burmese defendants of the shrine and the Rajput expeditions against these infidels in the 12th and 13th centuries. Perhaps the similarity of the name to the celebrated Ha- MvRA Sinu of Chitor may have helped to confound the tradition. It is unnecessary to republish this inscription. «No. 4 is inscribed in a circular form over an image of Devi in the Mahant’s garden.” ‘This, again, is alluded to by Dr. Haminton as No. 99 of the India House museum, ‘‘ on a male figure now called Saraswatt (a goddess), is the usual pious sentence of the Buddhist.” It is useless to lithograph this inscription, which does not differ even in the form of the letters from the ‘“‘ Ye dharma hetu, &c.” of the Sarnath and Tirhut images. «© No. 5 is a word engraved on a pillar which now forms one of the stanchions to an upper story in the convent. The character you will observe assimilates to the ancient inscriptions.” This I have found room to insert in Plate XXXIII., but it is impossible to make any thing of it: perhaps it formed part of a longer inscription in the oldest lath character. No. 2, then, is the only one of the series which requires further observation. From my acquired experience in such matters, there was little difficulty in transcribing the whole from the facsimile (li- thographed on a reduced scale in Plate XXX.) into the modern Nagari, nor in preparing a translation with the assistance of the Society’s pandit, and of Ratna Pauna, whose acquaintance with the Buddhist 1836.] Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. 659 tenets enabled him to correct the former in several doubtful read- ings. The character may be properly designated as the Gaur alphabet, the parent of the modern Bengalé form. The specimen is chronolo- gically valuable to the investigation of the gradual alterations it has undergone, because it contains a date, Samvat 73 or 74, of an era that has been the subject of some misapprehension. Mr. CoLzsrooxs rectified Dr. Wi1x1ns’ mistake in supposing this sambat could refer to the era of VikramApitya, andassumed a position for it 1000 years more modern, in connection with the Gopala or Bhupdla dynasty of Gaur. The document before us corroborates this view ; but by the ex- pression, “ after the expiration of the reign of Laxmana Su'na,’’ it would seem that the term samvat applied generally to whatever epoch might be mentioned in the preceding sentence. Laxmana Sz'na, the son of Beat Sen, who built the city of Gaur, reigned in A. D. 1116—1123: so that the date of the inscription on this supposition would be A. D. 1197, only three years prior to the destruction of the monarchy by the Musalmans. The figures, however, are unfortunately doubtful, just where their identification is of the greatest conse- quence :—the first might be read as the Nagari 1, were not the nu- merals of the month so clearly of the Bengali form. If counted from the foundation of Gaur in 1066, the date would fall in 1140. Were there any possibility of assuming a starting point on satisfactory data, the day of the week, Thursday, would afford a sure test of its being correctly fixed, by the calculation of the luni-solar period elapsed: but according to the formula in my calendric tables, neither of the epochs above selected will bring about such a result. The following is the transcript of the facsimile in modern Nagari. One letter after Namobuddhaya is illegible, and the next word is con- sequently doubtful : anusvara is substituted for ¢. AT Ay PRU TICHLATalaar: TAT TAA Sanacucfa= ARCAYACLSHCATTSTIMAA HUSIfATTS ATAU CITIAA AT facfatanatinsnataefanfafarintasatad wiewafwafc STAT TST STAA HT AHS IH fT SSN ML TA AS AH ANCT ST qrasiifa wremiftaveaaaram fafrrustaa feeasitreta age DIP SSA AA AGI AAAS SAAT ATA SAS AA AAAI BIAGG «ASHE AATA Uae TIT AT AST TUT aa aie MARANA RHTTUTTS AT SIAM AA ATA Hox Fwia ate YX ALT 492 660 Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. (Ocr. Translation. ‘«« Salutation to Buddha.—May this votive aspiration of the devoted -votary to Mahdvira Swémi*—(Of him who is) in holiness like the blue-bee steeped in the honied lotus of the feet of a divine personage, and in might like the lion triumphant over the infuriate elephant, who reigns over the royal and puissant progeny of Hulkara Buupa’ta, named Krisuna Nripatiand GARUDANA/RAYANA, his inveterate anta- gonists—who is himself the gracious father (protector) of tributary kings—who, adorned with such might and virtues, sways the im- perial sceptre over 125000 kingdoms well people with mountaineer warriors—the king of kings—the auspicious and high in dignity Asoka Cuanpra Deva,— (of the aforesaid R4ja’s) younger brother, Dasaratua Kuma’Ra, supported and maintained through the lotus of his gracious feet, his dependent treasurer, a conscientious Bodhisatwa —the light of his tribe and family, by name Sawasrapa’pa, son of the dignified Sri’ Cua’ta Brana, and grandson of Mrisu1 BrauMA —may (this his holy act), united with the virtues of his teachers and guru, his mother and father, enable to attain the fruit of immortal wisdom, salvation from passions and delusions of sublunary existence, and absorption of his soul in the Supreme Being.” “Written after the conclusion of the reign of Sri mat Laxmana Sena Deva, in the year 74, on Thursday, the 12th day of the dark half of the month of Vatsakha.” The inversion of the sentence, and the multitude of epithets applied to each party, makes it difficult for an English reader to follow the sense through such a labyrinth :—in afew words, it prays that some good act (probably the building or endowment of a temple) may redound to the eternal welfare of one Sanasrapa’pA, the treasurer of DasaratHa Kumasra, the younger brother of Maharaja Asoxa Cuan- pRA Deva, the reigning prince of adynasty that had supplanted by conquest some descendants of the Buupata family, (of Gaur doubt- less,) by name Krisuna and Garupana’ra’yan. All these names and persons I believe are new to history: at least I find no Asoxa among the successors of Beua’n Sz'n. From his assumption of such a name it may be presumed that he was of the Buddhist faith, as the invocation shews to have been the case also with his officers of state. _ * Buppwa, the transcendently victorious hero. The construction of the sen- tence, which it is endeavoured to follow closely, will be hardly intelligible without explaining that this first epithet belongs to SaHASRAPA’DA, whose name occurs lower down. "a Jour, CaSoe tes ee SubArmatayan Fossil Remains. Sie. 4 wy Printed at lhe Oriental Lith Frets. Calcutta, 1836. ] Fossil Remains of the Dddupiir Collection. 661 Bhitari Lath. On the same plate | have lithographed from a drawing by Captain Cunnincuam an elevation of the Bhitari ldth in the Ghazipur dis- trict, of which so much have been said. It was Mr. Trecear who first brought it to notice in 1834; he sent me a rough pencil sketch, and promised further examination. This was accomplished in com- pany with Captain Cunnincuam ; when on clearing away the earth from the lower part of the shaft along inscription was discovered. It was immediately seen to be in the same character as No. 2 of the Allahabad léth—and while taking a copy of it in pencil, the names of Rajas Sri’ Gupra, GHaTOT KACHA, CHANDRA-GUPTA, SAMUDRA-GUP- Ta, were found following in succession, exactly as on the Allahabad inscription—other names, CHANDRA-GupTA, Kuma/RA-Gupta, and SKANDA-GupTA, succeeded ; proving that this pillar had been erected several reigns subsequently to the other, and confirming in an extra- ordinary manner the concatenation of the Canowj coins of this very Gupta family, as has been noticed in a preceding paper.—More need not be said at present, as the inscription itself will appear next month with Dr. Miuu’s interpretation and valuable comments. There are two other pillars near Ghazipur, at Zamineah, south of the Ganges, from which great expectations were entertained, of our making a further acquisition—but we have just been disappointed. Col. Povoueri writes me, that Mr. Murray has closely. examined the principal pillar without finding any trace of writing on it; he is about to dig around it, however, for the square portion of the shaft may possibly be buried below the soil. This is our only chance. VI.—Sub-Himalayan Fossil Remains of the Daduptr Collection. By Lieuts. W. E. Baxer and H. M. Duranp, Engineers. Genus Sus*. Cuvirr has confined his remarks upon the fossil remains of the genus Sus to a brief notice of their existence, in consequence, it appears, of the fact that up to the time at which the Recherches sur les Ossemens fossiles were published, the instances of the occurrence of fossils of this genus were rare ; and of the small number discovered the greater portion had been found in peat. The tables given in the * The Plates B and C mentioned in the ensuing descriptions, have been in- corporated in Plate XLIV., and had been reserved for the Researches, on account of their dimensions ; but we see they are mecessary to the article, and have in- serted them with Col, Couvin’s lithograph. —Eb. 662 Fossil Remuins of the Daduptr Collection. [Ocr. latest geological manuals show, that in the interval which has elaps- ed since the publication of Cuvimr’s work a few sites have afforded specimens, but still the remains in comparison with those of other genera are far from being abundant. By reference to the table of Sub-Himalayan fossil genera in the 58rd No. of the Journal of the Asiatic Society it will be observed, that, although here found in greater quantity than in European localities, the relics of the genus are, in comparison with those of most of the other Pachydermata, scarce. Notwithstanding their small number, the specimens in our possession, happening in general to be tolerably perfect, form a series which, though not continuous, is sufficiently perfect to illustrate the dentition of one of the species. To the consideration of this species we without further introduction proceed; premising only, that with the exception of the cranium of which fig. 6, Pl. B, is a representation, the whole of the specimens referred to are from the Maginand deposit, a general description of which prefaces our notes on the fossil unicorn-rhinoceros. Cranium. The fossil, of which figs. 1 and 2, Pl. XXXIV. are re- presentations, is the cranium of the sow of the species to be described. The specimen has been less crushed than is usual, but has not altoge- ther escaped. The nasal bones are not quite centrical, and in their natural position, being thrust over towards the left maxillary by a crush which acted on the right side of the head. The mastoid apophy- ses and the descending tubercles in their front are broken off; the extremities of the pterygoid apophysis are also mutilated :—the zygo- maticapophysis of the temporal, if perfect, cannot be cleared completely from the matrix which adheres to it, without the risk of destroying the process itself and the adjacent parts: both jugals are imperfect, being broken off (as shewn in the profile view of the skull) immediate- ly after their descent from forming the post. orbitary apophysis: the canines are wanting, but their alveoli are very distinct, though small for the size of the head; this circumstance, in conjunction with the minor development of some parts of the occiput when compared with other specimens, indicates the sex of the cranium. With the view of obtaining the difference of proportions consequent on differences of sex, the measurements which form the third column of the subjoined table were inserted; the half palate of the cranium from whence they are derived is given at fig. 5, Pl. B, but the occiput and nasal bones being imperfect, it was not deemed necessary to delineate the specimen either in plan or profile. The second column of the table is occupied by the proportions deduced from the dimensions taken upon the cranium of the sow ; and 1836.] Fossil Remains of the Dddupir Collection. 663 the first column by those obtained from the head of a wild boar killed in the neighbourhood of Hansi. These two skulls denote, by the state of their molar teeth, very similar ages, the existing being but little younger than the fossil species; they are therefore well adapted for a comparison. Fossil Fossil Existing | species, | species, species. | Female. | Male. Space occupied by seven molars measured on mesial REC, 5 dod dadd Gad va pale handel nce onac ole toads 1,000 1,000 1,000 From lower edge of foramen magnum to Cah ed OfMCEMMAGU ALY, join ws)aisie» winresiiolejsiolsieins sieleptee . 2,672 2,586 Fc Space between the 9th molars at their anterior, seoet 0,210 0,193 0,257 PREC AICO! ISHIGIELOS oie jo ciesiee ooimiele » Baie ielernlo eislers 0,371 0,356 0,418 Distance from Ist molars to extremity of inter- PRTG 6 ORGS URISUIAGDOIOES Dich otOOSoohoc piecistigd 0,858 0,680 Sip Ditto from lower edge of occipital foramen to Pos- terior edge of 7th molars, ..... 0,825 0,922 s Ditto from summit of occiput to extremity of inter. - TRON ERG Hi on Sb dood dao OnErd Op. OS Oo ec onbe 3,267 2,940 Ae Breadth of frontal plane at post. orbitary apophysis,} 0,876 0,831 0,928 Ditto of parietal plane at narrowest part,. ........ 0,358 0,241 0,301 Greatest breadth across zygomatic process of tem- IEAM OMES sapetcleyfelielstels fe (ere) u on oe Ditto from summit of occiput to ex- tremity of intermaxillary,.......... 14,77|15,20| - : oe nae ste Breadth of frontal plane at post orbi- PALME APOPHMYSIS, olc\ of the latter is + ; and I possess several species of both con- 672 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. {Ocr. forming to those formule. The peculiar dental system of Ursitaxus is in harmony with other material peculiarities of structure; and the animal therefore seems abundantly entitled to generic distinctness. As to the species, that is probably identical with the Ursus Indicus of Suaw, the Indian Badger of Pennant, and the Biju of Hindusthan, but which still wants (I believe) a scientific name. I suppose, there- fore, mine of Inauritus will be recognised, unless we are to persist in incumbering the science with the vague names and descriptions of a half informed age. IX.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Wednesday Evening, the 2nd November, 1836. The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the chair. Mr. G. F. McCurntocu, proposed at the last Meeting, was balloted for, and duly elected a Member. H. Watters, Esq. C. §., Dr. J. M. Bramiry, Dr. Drummonp, Newab Tauawur June Behadir, and Shah Qazsir v’pI’N were proposed by Mr. Jamus Prinsep, seconded by Sir Epwarp Ryan. Dr. Jackson was proposed by Dr. Pearson, seconded by Sir Epwarp Ryan. Read a letter from Mr. Vincent Treexar, acknowledging his elec- tion as an associate member. Read a letter from Mr. C. Browntow, returning thanks for the So. ciety’s patronage of the Alif Leila, and agreeing to the stipulation for the deposit of a file of the sheets, as printed, with the Secretary. Read a letter from J. C. C. SurHeruanp, Esq., Secretary to the Ge- neral Committee of Public Instruction, requesting to know at what price the Society would supply twenty-eight copies of the Naishadha and of the Raja Tarangin', required for the use of the Government San- scrit College. Mr. W. H. MacnaGuTen moved that the books should be given gratis if in- tended for deposit in libraries, as the encouragement thus given to the study of these works would promote the sole object the Society had in view in com- pleting their publication. The Secretary explained thatthey were required as class books; that the present application would doubtless be followed up by a con- stant periodical demand for this and other works; that when he guaranteed the Society against any risk in undertaking to finish the suspended volumes, he calculated on the necessary school demand for many of them as one of the means of repayment; and the prices fixed were calculated only to cover the gross amount expended in their completion: he proposed furnishing them at a reduced price. Sir Bens. MaLkin and other Members objected to a reduc- tion of price, and it was resolved by a large majority that the ordinary selling price should be charged. The Secretary submitted correspondence with the Secretary to the Com- mittee of Public Instruction, relative to the Oriental works deposited for sale at the London Booksellers, which the Society’s English Agent from a misconception had authorized to be transferred to the Society’s account, and to be sold at reduced prices. The transfer had been countermanded as soon as known; but the Committee refused to sanction any sales that might mean time haye been made at the re- duced prices, awaiting the report of the circumstances from their bookseller. 1836.] Proceedings of the Asialie Society. 673 Read a letter from the Secretary of the Royal Academy of Marseilles, acknowledging receipt of the Researches and Journals presented last ear. : Shah Qazir v’pi’N applied to the Society to be allowed the loan, forthe purpose of taking a cepy, of avery valuable manscript of the Koran in the Library, depositing 250 rupees, the price at which it had beeu pur- chased by the Society. Resolved, that he should be permitted to employ /dtibs in the apart- ment to take the copy, but thatthe volume could not be lent out for such a purpose. He also requested two copies of the last three volumes of the Alemgéri, of which the three first volumes had been supplied gratis to the Susseram Madrassa by the Education Committee. Resolved, that this request be complied with. Library. A letter was read from the Secretary to Government, General Depart. ment, forwarding for deposit in the Library of the Asiatic Society the un- dermentioned 95 volumes, being a set of the Reports and Publications of the Commissioners of Records, of which three copies had been recently sent out (as printed on the reverse of the title page) “for perpetual preservation in some public library of the Bengal Presidency.” Report from Commissioners on Public Records, 1 vol. Recerd Commission, Scotland ; Correspondence of U. P. Cooprr, Esq. Se- eretary to the Board, with Taomas Tuomson, Esq. Deputy Clerk Regulation, 1 vol. Reports from the Commissioners on the Public Records of Ireland, 3 vols. La Commission Des Archives d’Angleterre, 1 pamphlet. Public Records, the public advantages of entrusting the Records of the Ex- ehequer, &c. 1 pamphlet. Nenarum Jngquisitioues in Curea Scacearii, 1 vol. Reotuli Hundredorum, 2 vols. Valor Ecclesiasticus, 6 vols. Inquisitionum Post Mortem Calendarium, 4 vols. Manuscripts in the Harleian Collection, 4 vols. Placita de quo Warranto, 1 vol. Domesday Book, 2 vols. Domesday Index, 1 vol. Domesday Supplement, 1 vol. Sir H. Exxis’s Introduction and Index to Domesday, 2 vols. Placitorum Abbreviatio, 1 vol. Ducatus Lancastrie#, 2 vols. Pars prima and secunda, and Pars quarta. Rotuli Scotiz, 2 vols. Rotuli Litterarum Clausarum, | vol. Rotuli Litterarum Patentium, 1 vol. Rotulorum Originalium, 2 vols. Manuscripts in the Lansdown Collection, | vol. Inquisitionum in Officio in Hibernia, 2 vols. Rotulorum Patentium et Clausorum, 1 vol. The Acts of the Parliaments of Scotland, 10 vols. (first volume wanting.) Registrum Magni Sigilli, 1 vol. Proceedings in Chancery, 3 vols. Calendar to Pleadings, &e. 1 vol. marked Vol. II. Federa, 6 vols. Parliamentary Writs, 4 vols. Letters sur la Cour de la Chancellerie d’ Angleterre, 1 vol. Letters to Cuarutes Purton Cooper, Esq. of Lincoln’s Inn, Barrister at Law, on the appointment of a Permanent Judge in the Court of Chancery in ‘the place of the Lord Chancellor ; 2 pamphlets. 4s 674 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Ocr. Substance of the Speech of Cuartes Purron Cooper, Esq. as Counsel for the Rev, CHARLES WELLBELOVED, in the suit of the Attorney-General versus Suore, instituted in the High Court of Chancery, respecting ‘Lady HEWLEY’s Foundations ; 1 pamphlet. Memoria du Commissa6 dos Arquivos du Gran Bretanha dirigida aos Car- torarios Bibliothecarios e Antiquarios de Portugal, pello que resputa aos traba- thos e Exames da mesma Commissao ; 1 pamphlet. Proceedings and Ordinances of the Privy Council of England, 5 vols. Rotuli Curie Regis, 2 vols. Rotuli de Oblatis et Finibus in Turri Londinensi, 1 vol. Rotuli Selecti Ex Archivis in Dom. Cap. Westm. 1 vol. Excerptaé Rotulis Finium in Turri Londinensi asservatis Henrico Tertio, 1 vol. Fines 7, Ric I. 16 Johan, | vol. Rotuli Normanniz in Turri Londinensi, | vol. Statutes of the Realm, 12 vols. including 2 vols. of Index. Manuscripts in the Cottonian Library, 1 vol. Calendarium Rotulorum Patentium in Turri Londinensi, | vol. Calendarium Rotulorum Chartarum et Inquisitionum ad quod damnum, 1 vol. Taxatio Ecclesiastica Angliz et Walliz, 1 vol. Read a letter from Mr. H. A. Horneman, forwarding for presentation a copy of the first number of the Numismatic Journal, on behalf of Mr. Joun Yonce AxerRmAN, F. S. A. the Editor. Meteorological Register for September, 1836, was presented by the Surveyor General. Second Annual Report of the Statistical Society of London, presented by Dr. D. Stewart. Literary and Antiquities. Read a letter from H. T. Prinsep, Esq. Secretary to the Government of India, General Department, forwarding copy of a report furnished to the Government of Bombay from Colonel Cuesney, of the proceedings of the Euphrates expedition, in its various departments. [The substance of this report is published below. ] A memoir on the Antiquities of Bamian was submitted by Mr. Tre. VELYAN, on the part of Mr. C. Masson. The same member presented also a notice by Munsut’ Monan La't, of Uch Sherif, a town near the junction of the five streams in the Panjab, celebrated as the place of sepulture of many Mahommedan saints. Mr. 8S. G. Heattry presented through Dr. Corsyn, the first of a series of mathematical essays on the use of functions in geometrical analysis. Physical. A large fossil fragment of the acetabulum of an elephant was presented by Dr. Spmssury, found by him at Szgouni, the place where Captain SLEEMAN discovered the first indications of the Nerbudda fossils. Brigadier AnuuREy, Engineers, presented on the part of Mr. Sweren- HAM, Séme incrusted petrifactions of leaves from the calcareous springs in the Dehra Dun. A specimen of the red-billed parrot ( Psittacus Sinensis) was presented by Dr. Burtt, and a woodpecker by the curator, both mounted in the museum. The Secretary read the following extract of a private letter from Dr. W. Grirrirn, dated Sadiya, Assam, 12th Oct. ‘J have much pleasure in informing you that I have lately completed the arrangement of the collections of the Musci and Hepatice made during our late deputation into Assam. The collection of the former amounts to 154 species, or to about an eighth of the whole known number. It includes twenty-seven genera, of which I have ventured to characterise two as new. That of Hepaticze includes forty-eight species, of which thirty-one belong to Jungermannia alone, and ten genera, of which five appear to be new. Almost the whole of both these collections were made by myself on the Khasiya Hills between Chur 1836.) Report of the Euphrates Expedition. 675 ra Punji and Nunklow, and within a period of seven weeks. Both these orders have hitherto been almost totally neglected by Indian Botanists ; and the greater part of the few that have been described seem to have been sent from Nipdl by the Honorable Mr. GarpineR. Hence, owing to the impossibility of obtaining advice, and as my situation obviously precludes me at present from consulting the requisite authorities, I have determined on sending the MSS. and drawings to England, accompanied with a complete series of both collections. By the adoption of this plan the stability of my very numerous new species will easily be determined*.”’ X.—A General Statement of the labors and proceedings of the Expedition to the Euphrates, under the command of Colonel Cutisney, Royal Artillery, F. R. 8. The object of the present communication is not to anticipate the interest which must be felt, and especially by the members of the Geographical Society, as well as other public bodies, not only in the progress of the Expedition to the Euphrates, but also in the results obtained to science and general know- ledge ; for, to render these of any real value, they must be accompanied by the details of the means by which they were acquired. It is rather, therefore, with a view to the exhibition of how those means haye been hitherto applied, and how the capabilities of the Expedition have been directed, that the present statement is made; not, however, omitting those details which a brief notice of this kind will admit, when touching upon the labour, the progress, and the pre- sent condition of the enterprize itself. The voyage to Malta from Liverpool occupied a period of twenty-nine days, a great part of which time was taken up in working out the details, and consolidating the original plans of our commander. Among the scientific labours, indepen- dently of questions of general navigation and drilling the men, were the rating of the chronometers, observations in meteorology, the temperature of the sea, and researches in natural history. At Malta, some time was devoted to the determination of the intensity of magnetic forces, and the amount of the dip of the needle. ‘The cylinders used for the former experiments consisted of two pair that had been tried by Captain Sapine in Limerick, and another obtained through the kindness of Professor Lioyp, T. C. D. and tried at Duélin previous to departure. The whole set being subsequently experimented upon in London by Lieut. Murpay, R. E. and also at Liverpool. An exploratory tour was also made in the interior of the islands, Malta and Gaza, with the view of recognizing in a general way their geological structure and natural productions. Some fossil shells of interest were obtained, also the plants of the season (March), and some species belonging to the classes Tunicata, Acaleppa, Malacoderme and Polypi. During the stay at Malta, Colonel CuEsNrey was much occupied with the general objects of the Expedition, more particularly about the construction of flat boats. The George Canning had been separated from the Aldan Steamer her consort, by rude weather, off Cork, and it was found impossible to remedy this loss at the Mediterranean station ; but the Admiral, Sir Jostas Row ey, allowed the Columbine sloop to accompany the Expedition to the mouth of the Orontes ; and there was certainly every reason to rejoice in this arrangement ; for not only was the George Cunning taken in tow by the brig at all times when the weather permitted, but Commander HeNpDERSon and his officers secured the gratitude of every member of the Expedition, by the most efficient and zealous services in landing the stores. The difficulties and opposition to the landing of the stores are already known from the various reports that have reached England. Success was only obtained here in the first instance by the bold step of an immediate landing without a reference to the authorities of the country, and by exposing and remonstrating * We hope soon to receive from the Tea Committee some account of Dr. GRIFFITH’S previous labors. We hear that the several reports of Dr. WaLLicuH, Dr. GriFFITH, and Dr, McCLeELLAND have been some time sent in.—ED. 4s 2 676 Procecdings of the Asiatic Society. [Ocz. in the second, against the system of subterfuge carried oa by the Syrian Govern- ment towards the expedition; and its commander visited Iprani®s PACHA at Tripoli, in the hope of persuading him to give, at least for a time, that assistanee which had been promised unreservedly by the Viceroy himself. The connexion hetween the George Canning and the shore having been established by means of an hawser extending from the ship across the bar of the Orontes, a distance of 1200 yards, parties were sent on shore from the Columbine and George Canning with tents for their accommodation, and the disembarkation was carried on with such spirit and activity, that the site designated as ‘‘ Amelia DepOt’’ soon became a little camp with a very mixed aspect, replete with bustle and useful occupation. The bar at the mouth of the river was at times dangerous, and on one oceasion Commander HENDERSON with his boat’s crew narrowly escaped a watery grave. The observatory being now fixed, Lieutenant Murpuy applied himself to as- tronomical observations, more especially with the fine transit instrament that had come out with the Expedition. The survey was soon afterwards began under Lieutenant Murpuy, Mr. THomson, and Mr. Srenuowusn, (who was sent by the Admiral) at Lattaquia (Laodicea), but was limited to a determination of the outline of the coast with its soundings, and an examination of the coast itself. _My. Ainsworte also accompanied the party for parposes of natural history. The sitesof Heraclewm and Possidizim were recognized. On their return an excursion was made to the summit of Puiny’s wonder, Afount Cassius or Gebel. The succession of the various forms of vegetation was noted. The party bivouack- ed near the summit, on which, April 28th, there still remained some patches of snow. The results given by the Barometer, which was observed at various heights, compared with a register kept at the same time by Mr. Epern in the Depdt, coincided closely with those obtained trigonometrically by Mr. Munrpuy, and which gave for the elevation above the sea 5318 feet. But this mountain, notwithstanding its great height, is entirely composed of supra- eretaccous limestones, characterized by cones and cerithii. At its north-eastern foot is an extensive deposit of highly crystalline gypsum, and to the south- east diallage rocks and serpentines break through the same formations, accompanied by lacustrine martes and siliceous limestones. On the 29th of April, a party consisting of Lieutenant Munpny, Mr. Ains- WORTH, and Mr. Tuomson, left the Orontes in a country boat to commence the survey of the Gulph of Seanderoon and its neighbouring shores. The first points visited were Arsons and Rhosas, Av ascent was then made to Gebel Kaiseria, on which they bivouacked, Nextcame Seandernoon, and in its neighbourhood Jacob’s Well, the site of Myriandros ; to the south, the pass of Bylan, gates of Syria (Protemy), Amanian Gaies (SrRawBo), a defile in the mountains separating the Amanus from the Rhesas, and leading from Myriandros into the plan of Antioch or Umk. To the north the remains of a marble gate-way, commonly called Jonas’ Pillars, (Cilicia Gates of Protemy, Q. Curtrus and ARRrIAN:) this was the midnight halt of ALEXanprER. The description of ZuNoPHON refers to a narrow place contiguous to the sea; that of ARR1AN to the ascent of the hills that shut up the same plain contiguous to the sea. The latter applies itself distinctly to these ruins. Half a mile north of the Cilician Gates, is the river Markotsaye (Kersus), and beyond a wall terminating in the sea with a tower. Atthe foot of the mountains, the HKersus passes between two walls near the village of Merkets. This is the wall and gates of ZsNoruyon. They are built of stone. Farther north is Dyas (Baias Anton. Itiner. Aiyrcandros of W1LL1aMs’ Geography of ancient Asia) and there are several populous villages between Byas and the Issus (Pinarus). Ata subsequent period, in company with Colonel Cursney, this river was examined in detail, as also the ruins of a considerable town near some hills which enclosed the Issic plain to the north-west—the Giaour Dagh, or Amanus, being the east pass of Darius, Armenian Gates of AR- RIAN; the whole corresponding closely with the last mentioned author’s de- scription. Where the gulph runs to the west, there are ruins of forts, castles and gateways. From thence proceeding north-west by Kurd Kulac (Wolf's ears) (Jordequiea of D’ANViLLE and RENNELL) to Missis (Mesis) at a pass through 1836. ] Report of the Euphrates Expedition. 677 low hills of sandstone, are the remains of a road and archway constructed in part of sandstone, but chiefly of polygonal masses of basalt and laval, which no doubt have given rise to its name, Demir Kapon, Iron Gate, and Kara Kapon, Black Gate,—the Armenian Gates of Proremy; Amanicae Pyle of Colonel Leaxe; Upper Armenian Gates, RENNELL ; Timour Kapon, or the Gate of Ta- merlane, (Mecca itinerary by Geographical Society of Paris.) From hence the party visited Ayas (4ge@) the mouths of the Jihoun (Pyramus), where an interesting examination took place of the progress of alluvial deposits. The most westerly point reached was Karadash, the site of Mallus and Megarsus. The whole of the party being sick, the pass of Bylan was the only position examined on the return to Antioch. In the neighbourhood of Amelia Depét, the points of most interest were the course of the Oruntes, examined by Lieutenant CLfaveLANnp, Messrs. Eprn, CHARLEWOOD, and FirzJAmMeEs; and the ruins of Selucia Pieria also made the object of interesting researches. About the same time, various other under- takings were in progress. The gentlemen already named, in conjunction with Messrs. Hector and Bett, were in turns employed on different points, repair- ing and widening the road from the mouth of the Orontes to Antioch ; a work of considerable labour, especially in making the fords over the rivers practicable for waggons. Captain Estcourr and Dr. Staunton had gone on a journey of rewonstrance to the Civil Governor of Syria at Damascus,—visiting as they returned Buailliec andthe cedars of Lebanon. Lieutenant Lyncu was employed in improving the line of route from Antioch by Djezer haded to Bir ; and, lastly, Lieutenant CockpurN was employed (after Captain Esrcourt’s visit to Rescuip Pacua at Diarbek) in throwing up some slight field works, and con- structing slips at a spot selected for this purpose, 13 miles below Bir on the right bank, and now called Port William. To avoid the mischievous effects of idleness, as well as to carry the heavy weichts to Antioch by water (when denied all other local means by Govern- ment), the Ziyris was put together on the Orontes during the month of May as a working shell, in which state she was steaming experimentally, when the Pacua withdrew his outward opposition on the 3d of June. Towards the mid- dle of that month commenced the dispatch of the light stores on camels and mules, and towards its close some trains of waggons* passed through Antioch carrying heavy weights, but this being found a dilatory operation, the water communication was looked to once more, along a new line which promised many advantages. The Orontes, the Lake of Antioch, and the Kara-son, were, there- fore, examined ; and upon the reports and maps thus obtained, the Commander ordered a Depdt (the 2d) to be formed at Goozel Burge, ‘‘ pretty tower,” a village on the Orontes 3 miles above Antioch, when the infinite variety of ma- teriel, including the more ponderous objects, such as boilers, the eight sections (into which the Tigris had been divided,) diving bells, &c. were to be put on rafts, flat boats, and pontoons, in order to be transported by the Orontes into Kara-soo, (black water,) and along this navigable stream into the Lake Owja Dengis (white sea,) keeping along its western side on account of the deeper water, and ultimately ascending the Ultra Kara-soo to a spot called Moorad Pacha, near the Village of Gule Bachee, ‘‘ head of the waters,” a little beyond the junction of the Aswad and Yagra rivers, the whole distance being fourteen hours from Goozel Burge. ‘he abundant spring called Gule Paehee issues out of a pseudo-volcanic mound rising out of the plain. The Bridge of Moorad Pa- cha is chiefly a causeway resting on the soil, but in parts supported by arches, and crossing that part of the plain of Umk which is most liable to be inundated, for a distance of about three miles. This plain is inhabited by pastoral and No- made Turcomans living in tents, who are a quiet people. The ancients appear to have known in this tract the rivers Oinaparas, Arcenthus, Labotas, Ufrenus, and the ditch of Meleagrus. The actual fluents of the Lake are the Aswad, or Asond, the Yagra (uniting to form the Kara-soo) the Aphreen traversing the Cyrrhesteca, the rivulet of Hareem and the Orontes, but the first mentioned have various tributaries to the north, with different appellations. On the road * Twenty-seven vehicles of different kinds were constructed at Amelia Depdt, and there were thirty-three, including the artillery waggons, from England, 678 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Ocr. to the valley of the Aphreen are some Thermal springs, El Hammam, “ the Baths,” issuing at the point of junction of plutonic rocks with tertiary dolo- mites. The waters of these springs are said to have originated with different earthquakes, and present corresponding differences of temperature. It is a distance of about 111 miles across the so called ‘‘ Syrian Desert”? from Moorad Pacha to Port William. The first part of it is hilly but not infertile, between El] Hammam and Azass, or Arsace Menniza of Ant. Itinerary (MSS, of Colonel Cussnuy). The second part from Azass to Port William is for the most part level, at the best undulating, containing the valleys of the Kowick (Chalus) and the Sajour. These plains are every where fertile, for the most part cultivated, and abounding in populous villages, consisting of Fellah Arabs, Kurds, Turkish tribes, and mixed races, possessing bullocks in great abundance along the whole of the direct line which passed a little way southward of Aintab, the ancient Antiochea ad Taurum, and now a garrisoned town of large size and some commercial importance. The general arrangements for the transport were, that Lientenant CLeave- LAND and Mr. Cuaritewoop were tocarry the boilers, &c. to Goozel Burge, from whence they were to proceed under Mr. FrrzJames to Moorad Pacha by water, to be conveyed from thence to Port William by Captain Estcourt, assisted by Mr. EpeEN ; and as there was a line of waggons connecting the boats with the sea on one side, and to the Euphrates on the other, the three portions of the grand line were simultaneously ia operation, and also a fourth, viz. camels and mules, carrying the light stores direct from Amelia Depdt to Port William by the An- tioch route through DjezerHadid*. At first every thing went on well, and pro- mised a rapid conclusion. Lieutenant CLEAvELAND obtained bullocks with a mo- derate degree of difficulty, and his ingenuity and perseverancet did the rest by removing every thing to Goozle Burge, where they were successively embarked for Moorad Pacha; but here things were immediately at a stand still, and although the strongest orders (in appearance) were constantly issued by Inraut Pacua, very few bullocks could be obtained even at the highest pri- ces by Captain Estcourt, whose unwearied efforts could only secure the tanta- lizing but ingenious result of an abundance of bullocks along the whole line, except the first and last stages ; consequently tke boilers which had remain- ed for ten or twelve weeks on their carriages, might have continued at Moorad Pacha until now, if we had not exerted ourselves to bring them on, one at a time, with our own horses, instead of bringing on a number of the heavy weights at the same time with the bullocks; and theresult was, that the officers and men had to toil along the great line of route from Moorad Pacha, exposed for months to the great heats of noon, the chills of night, and to the baneful effects of what Humpoxipr expressively calls an extreme climate, the thermometer being as high as 110° in the shade, (July) and as low as 8° in the winter, during which some of the boilers were flooded, and the diving-bell actually lost in an extensive sheet of water near El Hammam. This had been in all likelihood the original object of the Packa, and the Euphrates being already complete, bullocks were given to perform the impossible (as was thought), task, of bringing on the Tigris’ boilerst, which were warped out of the lake by manual labor, and ultimately taken to Port William by Lieutenant CLEAVELAND, Messrs. EpEN, CHARLEWOoD and Hector, the only officers in the Expedition then effective. Not one indi- vidual officer or man employed on this enterprize escaped at least one serious illness, nor is it at all surprizing that some§ fell victims to trials so long conti- nued, and to a climate so often replete with morbid miasma as Moorad Pacha, the worst of the stations: yet the malaria only proved fatal when other causes combined to render it so; nor need the splendid scenery, nor the magnificent * Eight hundred and forty-one camels and 160 mules were employed in all, and the greater part of these caravans were stopped on the frontier by the Pacha, in order to cause delay by forcing us to bring others from the Sultan’s territory. + In addition to puilies, &c. the boilers were actually moved up the hills inch by inch with jack screws by Mr. CHARLEWOOD and Lieutenant CLEAVELAND. t Mr. Hecror found the diving bell by means of long poles, and then rolled it under water for the most part half a mile to its carriages, § Seven men of the Expedition and one workman. 1836.] Report of the Euphrates Expedition. 679 climate of Syria, be approached with fear, for its malaria is not a pestilence, and the circumstances under which the Expedition was placed, toiling on lakes and rivers, dwelling ic the marsh, with almost reckless exposure to the sun of the day, followed by the dew of the night, require a separate consideration ; and perhaps the surprize will then be, that a greater fatality did not occur amongst a body of men (about 85), in general unseasoned, during the laborious and almost unexampled transport of two large iron vessels, which, thanks to the care of all, have siuce been set up*, and are now steaming with their boilers, engines, &c. quite as safe and even more perfect in their working details than when sent out of the maker’s hands at Liverpool, notwithstanding along journey, with all the difficulties which could be thrown in the way by the Local Government un- derband. Previous to taking medical charge at the station at Moorad Pacha, Mr. AinswortH had made an examination of the less frequented countries imme- diately south of Antioch. He crossed the mountains at Beit El Moie (the Daphne of Pococks,) and entered forests which covered a great basin of tertiary rocks chiefly cerithia limestone, silicious limestone and lacustrine marles, with gypsum every where broken up and dislocated by serpentines and diallage rocks. It is only in the valley of Antioch, that the Pliocene formations shewed them- selves, and enabled Mr. A. to determine the period of the elevation of the plutonic rocks of the silico-magnesian series. From JLattaquia, he followed Maun- DRELL’S route by the country of the Maronites and Gebel Kraad, the northern prolongation of the Ansarian mountains, and by the valley of Bedame, rich in scammony (convolvulus scammonia) to that of the Orontes, which he joined at Djezer Shogher, the Larissa of Gosstiin, and Seleucus Belus of D’ANVILLE. A Roman road led to Koalat el Medyk, where are ruins of a highly ornamental character. Part of the town is enclosed in an ancient castle situate on a hill; the other ruins lie in a plain part of a strong wall, and an archway still exist, and also the remainsofatemple. In the adjoining lake are the celebrated black fish, the sources of a distant commerce, which were recognized to be the A/a- cropteronotus magur of naturalists. From Medyk he visited the little centre of primitive Christianity in the mountains of Reiha and Edlip, abounding in monu- ments of a then new hierarchy, returning subsequently by the borders of the great plain to Antioch. At this period, August 1835, Lieutenant Murray commenced the grand line of levels which was to be carried from the Mediterranean to the Euphrates, with reference to canals, and many other objects of deep interest connected with science and calculated to encourage this extensive work. Many obstacles occurred at first ; prolonged malaria had unfitted all for expo- sure to the sun. Lieutenant CockBurNE and Mr. Tuomson after a short exer- tion were both laid up. Lieutenant Mureuy was also seriously ill. Ultimately after another beginning, the last mentioned industrious officer left for Port William, where he was required in the observatory, and levelling was continued by Mr. Taomson, who has just completed this important part of the original plan. Nearly at the same time a party composed of Lieutenant Lyncu, his brother, Mr. Staunton, and Mr. Extror, set out on a mission of a friendly and conciliatory nature to the Arabs. They visited the tribes of Welda, Aniza, Geeza, the Bore-sipahi and some of the Turcomans, from all of whom they meta favorable reception. The Aniza alone shewed a doubtful disposition, and the Bore- sipahi, one of their tributaries, wounded one of the servants severely. This hostility did not, however, appear to be directed against the Expedition so much as with the view of plundering those gentlemen who had ventured amongst them, and the Sheikh immediately offered to compromise the matter by presents, which were declined as a matter of policy, in the hope that an unsettled affair of blood may tend to keep the Aniza in better order as regards their future inter- course with the Expedition. In the early part of January last, Colonel Cursney left his bed, and was ac- tually put on his horse to prosecute a scientific journey to the Taurus, and part of * The labor fell chiefly upon Captain Estcourt of the 43d Light Infantry, Lieut. CLEAVELAND, Messrs, EDEN, CHARLEWOOD and FiTzJaMEs, R.N, 680 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Ocr. Asia Minor. He was accompanied by Lieutenant Murpny and Mr. Ainsworrts, both invalids ; also Mr. Sraunton. The party proceeded by Antad to Killis, and thence to the Eastern acclivities of the Amanus, in the parallel of the Ivsus, but no passage could be effected at that season of the year. Repelled to the south, the mountains were passed by Pagrae, through the Beilan pass, to Scan- deroon, from whence the party proceeded by the Cilician Gates and Byas to the plain of the Zssus. Sufficient time having been devoted to the examination of the various questions of historical geography, connected with this most interest- ing district, the great road towards Constantinople was followed by Demer Kapon to Kurd Kulac,‘‘ the Wolf’s ear,’’ (Jardiquiea) and by the plain of Lachokour Ova, ‘* the valley of the ditch.’’? Crossing the Gebel Elnour, the mountain of the light, bearing on its rocky summit to the north, Shah Merar, ‘* the Castle of the Serpent,’ and along the left bank of the Jihoun, Djehan sao, “‘ the river of the world,’’ to Méssis, the ancient Mopsuestia, now almost in ruins, but once (like Tarsus) one of the chief cities of Cilicia. From Missis the party continued, cross the plain by Adana (head-quarters of the Pachalic) to the lust mentioned town, where they found the French Consul, Mons. Gruer, engaged in excavating a monument close to the place, of great solidity, and apparently very remote antiquity. It consists of an enclosure in the form of a parallelogram, with two transverse masses of similar form at one extremity ; the walls and masses were of the most solid construction, without the least appearance of any thing like a sepulchral chamber in any part of this extensive mass,—at least as low down as the level of the ground around it. The road followed on leaving Tarsus led over the sub-alpine country at the foot of the Tarsus, consisting of tertiary rocks in great variety. Near the centre of the Tauric chain the lead mines of Kulé Boghaz were visited: they occur in limestone belonging to the cretaceous series, and are in the valley south of the grand pass of the same name, but worked most injudiciously. The pass itself was then examined almost to the summit level, and the party regained the more level country on the south side of the great mountains, in erder to visit the town of Sis, and the border territories of the Sultan and Pacha. Here the inhabitants had so bad a name, that no muleteer or guide could be induced to proceed along the mountains in that direction, and whilst overcoming the difficulties made by the alarms of the people, Colonel Cuzsney and Mr. AInsworTH were separated from the rest of the party, and made their way to Sis on foot by one line, whilst Lieutenant Murpay and Mr. Staunton _ reached it by ancther; each traversing a romantic and beautiful country formed by the wooded abutments of the Taurus, and well peopled by the best disposed peasants imaginable, instead of being all robbers, as they were represented. During , about 125 miles of country, composed almost eutirely of tertiary sandstone, (ostracite sandstone of Kuprrer,) they crossed the Seihoun, the Jeihoun, the Corrykoon, and several smaller, yet good sized rivers watering this interesting country, which terminate at Sis, the residence of an Armenian Patriarch, the third in importance at the present day, with a respectable palace, and a large convent in his charge; whilst at Sis anincursion was made into the Taurus and the mountain of Kara Sis, Black Sis ascended, after crossing a part of the crystalline plutonic formations, The researches were then directed towards Anasaiba onthe plan. The ruins ofthe city are still extant, backed by an insu- lated mountain, bearing a castle of various architecture. Such solitary hills rising out of the plains are not unfrequent here, and they mostly bear castellated build- ings on their summits, as Sis Shah Meran, Toome, Anuasaiba, andothers. From Anasaiba the party crossed the plain of the village and district of Kars, and there entered the mountainous country which led by Analat to Marash. The chain was not crossed without much difficulty ; the narrow pathway was carried alongside, and down precipices that were very steep; so much so, that it be- came necessary at times to unload the horses, and carry the baggage over the most dangerous places. The culminating point of this part of the Taurus is called Durdoon Dagh. The chain is composed of mica slates, clay slates, with graphite or plumbago, quartz, schists, quartzites, and diorites, with up- lifted limestones belonging to the supra-cretaceous series. The great and massive mountain which rises above Marash, and is there known by the name of 1836. ] Report of the Euphrates Expedition. 681 Arga Dagh consists of tertiary sandstone and limestone tilled up by and re- posing on serpentine and diallege rocks, which would indicate different geo- graphical connections. The direction of the Arga Dagh is nearly from SW. to NE. ; that of the shistose chain of Durdoon Dagh, a little south of east; that of the Giaur Dagh (Amanus) is the same as Arga Dagh. Colonel CHEesnuy returned to Port William from Marash, leaving directions for the remainder of the party to proceed in the direction of Samsat, Orfa, &c.; but being thrown back on Romkala by the swollen rivers, they returned to Port William, survey- ing the river between those places. During the whole period of their progress the positions of the principal places, ancient and modern, were determined as- tronomically by Lieutenant Murpuy, and careful itineraries kept, in addition to bearings taken, when practicable, with the theodolite or Kater’s compass, ac- cording to circumstances. The results of these labours has been, in the first place, to connect the survey of the coast of Lattaquia and that of the Issus with that of Captain Beaurort; and, in the second, to join those surveys to the Euphrates. There are ample materials for laying down a map with such a de- gree of accuracy as will, it is hoped, enable the learned to determine many points of ancient history and geography, especially those depending upon the length of the stadium, the parasang, and other scales of measurement used by Srraso, PLiny, and Hrroportus. On the day following the return of the first party, another was sent out by the commanding officer to finish that part of the plan which had been inter- rupted. This one consisted of Lieutenant Lyncu, Mr. Epren, R. N. and Mr. AinswortH. Agreeably to the instructions received, the party took up the for- mer work at Romkala, proceeding from thence along the left bank, carefully sur- veying the river as far as Samsat, the birth-place of Lucian. The ruins of this celebrated place are just recognizable. The modern town small and poor, but the valley itself fertile, as it is described to have been in former times; and ferry-boats are still kept up to pass the river to and from Orfa,. The course of the Euphrates from this ancient Zengma, to that above Bir, differs from what has been represented on most maps: it flows, in fact, in the general direc- tion of south-west, and is not turned, as an incorrect reading of StraABo would infer, (RENNELL and D’ANVILLE) to the south-east. Samosat having been fixed, it was then connected astronomically as well as by an itinerary, with Orfa, (Calli-rhoe, Roha Orfah, in its progress of corruption, ‘Edessa, and Antiochea under successive masters.) To the north of the city are evidences in conic lines, and circles of elevations of pseudo volcanic action. The fish venerated so much in ancient times, are still preserved in the marble basins of the mosque of Adbrania, and were recognized to be akind of Barbel. From Orfa, the great Mesopotamian plain was crossed in the direction of Har- ran, ‘* Carrhas clade crassi nobiles,’’ and still more interesting as the resi- deace of ABRAHAM. Harran was also connected with its rival in antiquity, Se- rug, of which scarcely a vestige remains. In the plain around the ruined site of the latter place, the party met two colossal lions, sculptured in basalt with refined taste (Basanite basalt,with disseminated augite) ; these may possibly be the remains of that vanity which prompted ANTONIUS CARACALLA to assert that a lion had fought by his side in his Parthian wars. Doctor HELFER having been separated from the rest of the party when pro- ceeding towards the Taurus, a journey made by him to the Salt Lake south- east of Aleppo, led to the discovery of an ancient city near a basaltic range, four hours S. E. of the Lake. There are some remains of a temple and several Greek inscriptions which have been furnished, with a detailed description of this hitherto unknown place, by Mr. Hrtrer. Early in February an opportune reinforcement arrived,consisting of four sappers from England, and six seamen from the Columbine, which restored the Expedi- tion to its original strength; and the pendulum, dipping needle, and other experiments being completed, the Expedition was putin motion onthe 16th March. The Euphrates taking the lead to survey, and give the benefit of the rough charts, and a pilot to the Yigris, in order that she might follow at one ‘or at most two moves, and thus spare fuel as much as possible. 4T 682 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Ocr. Previous to the actual descent, the Euphrates passed up rather a bad rapid, and stemmed the strong current as far as the town of Bir in the most satisfactory manner, displaying the Sultan’s standard, and saluting him with 21 guns, which were returned from the castle and by the acclamations of the astonished Moslems, who crowded both banks to be really certain that iron could be made to float, and to surmount the force of a current, now overcome for the first time, and God was blessed for such a creation, and sending men amongst them, ten of whom could take their town, was added. Since the departure, 101 miles of the river have been carefully surveyed in the following manner. A boat was dispatched ahead usually for a distance of twenty or twenty-five miles, sounding, and taking bearings, which being placed on paper when the officer returned, he became pilot to the vessel for the distance examined ; anda second set of bearings, with a double set of soundings, were taken from the vessel’s deck. Simultaneously with the water operations thus carried on by Lieutenant CLeAvELAND, Messrs. Epren, CHar.Lewoop, FitzJames, and Hercror, there were two other sets on land; viz. a chain of grand trigonometrical angles along the principal heights, based on astronomical points, by Lieutenant Murpny, R. I.; and a smaller one, with a succession of short base lines from bend to bend, by Captain Estcourt, who is now laying down a map with his details of the ground, &c., and also embracing the labors of all his coadjutors : so that it is hoped, that the map of the important part of this great river will be sent home almost immediately*. A similar method of survey- ing is to be organized immediately on board the Tigris, so as to carry the work on to Bussora in the same manner, each vessel taking a separate section of the labor. Our land parties, as well asthe water, naturally involved much intercourse with Arabs, who have shewn themselves well disposed, except in one instance, when it became necessary to fire a 9-pounder blank to save a Sheik, their enemy, who was attacked whilst in our boat. The state of the river is very favorable, although we run aground, Owing to the deception caused for the moment by a bright meridian sun: but the deep part of the river was 420 yards wide at the spot in question, where we remained some days digging the vessel out, nor did she suffer in the slightest degreet. XI.—The Governor General’s Conversazioné. On Tuesday, the 9th of November, was held the first of a series of entertainments, which we hail as the harbingers of a new era for Science and Research in India. Acting on the example of the Duxe or Sus- sex, President of the Royal Society, Lord Auckuanp, as Patron of the Asiatic Society, has expressed a desire to assemble around him at these periodical parties, in a social way, not only the members of the Society, but all residents and visitors at the metropolis, who are known to culti- vate the fine arts, the sciences, or literature, and to collect on his tables for their inspection and amusement, in the language of our motto, ‘ whatever is performed by man or produced by nature.’ Thus without interfering with the formal proceedings and records of the several scientific bodies, those who contribute thereto will have the satisfaction of knowing that their donations or their inventions will be likewise viewed by the head of the Government, and by a much more numerous assemblage than could ever be enticed to an ordinary meeting. Distant merit will feel that it is sure of appreciation, and ambition secure of noto- riety. Schemes for scientific exploration—plans of national improvement —useful mechanical invention—promising talent in the fine arts,—will be brought forward, canvassed and encouraged, where encouragement is due, * Also the specimens already collected in the different scientific departments of geology, natural history, &c. + The above report was addressed to the Bombay Government, previous, of course, to the disastrous hurricane which wrecked the Tigris, and destroyed so many lives.—ED. 1836.] Governor General’s Conversazioné. 683 and the stimulus which has been wanting since the days of Minto and Moira, will again be restored. We have hardly room to describe the conduct of the first meeting, nor do we think any formal report of a soirée, intended to be private, and sans formalité, would be becoming. It is more to satisfy our distant readers as to the nature of the parties, which they can so materially benefit, to speak paradoxically, by their absence, that we venture to in- sert the brief notice, which appeared in the daily papers. ‘¢ The south-west or drawing-room wing of the Government House was taste- fully laid out with all the novelties in the arts, in antiquities and in natural history, that could readily be brought together. On the pier tables of the cor- ridore leading to the rooms, were disposed very numerous specimens of the plants now in flower at the Botanical Garden, each ticketed with its classical name. ‘‘ On entering the ante-room, a very splendid collection of insects was seen displayed on the tables and against the walls, in convenient cabinets: the newest addition to these, (which comprised a portion of Dr. Pearson’s and of the Asiatic Society’s cabinets) was the donation of Mr. Grorce Locu of the Civil Service, to the Asiatic Society, at a recent meeting. A fine collection of shells just received from His Excellency the Governor of Ceylou, was distributed on the side tables of the principal saloon. In an adjoining apartment were selected fragments of the rich and highly curious Buddhist sculpture, discovered by Captain CUNNINGHAM, in the neighbourhood of the Sa’rna’TH tumulus near Benares, and presented by him to the Asiatic Society. On another table the last fossil discovery by Dr. SpruspuRy, the socket of the thigh-bone of an elephant from the rock at Segount, whence Capt. SLEEMAN first brought to light the fossils of the Nerbudda valley. By its side were placed the femur of a modern and of a fossil elephant (the latter of an animal 15 feet in height) to shew that the present socket must, from its curvature, have belonged to a still more monstrous animal ! “On the round tables of the drawing room were spread out numerous beauti- ful drawings—of Mr. Hodgson’s Nipal Zoology ; of Dr. Canror’s collection of Indian Snakes ; of Dr. McCieLiann’s Assamese Zoology; and all the designs sent in to the Committee of the Metcalfe Library. In other convenient spots were displayed a wax magnified model of the human ear: stuffed objects of natural history, and models of Malay praws, presented by Capt. Cuaps, &c. ‘* After the company had severally made the round of these objects, their attention was drawn to the table which Professor O’SHAUGHNESSY had prepared for the exhibition of his very ingenious model of the application of the late galvano-magnetic discoveries to the practical attainment of a working power. ** It would be impossible here to describe fully the construction of this curious wheel :—a number of horse-shoe magnets of soft iron, with wire coiled round them, were arranged on its spokes, so as to present their poles successively in rotation before the opposite poles of a more powerful magnet {also artificial) fixed on a stand at the side; the wires of the several wlieel magnets were con- ducted in a manner not readily seen, so as to terminate in mercurial cups, into which were dipped the two wires of a small galvanic battery ; on charging the latter, rotation ensued, and by a contrivance, as each revolving magnet arrived by the force of attraction, at the fixed magnet, its poles were instantaneously reversed so as to cause repulsion, while the next magnet above was attracted. We hope to see a full account of the Professor’s successful adaptation when his apparatus is matured. The model worked steadily with 10 oz. power. ‘* The converse of the problem, or the development of a galvanic force from the ordinary magnet, was then exhibited on an adjoining table by a beautiful apparatus belonging to Mr. James Prinsep. Water was decomposed by the magnet ; a candle was lighted by it; and an electric shock was administered to many of the spectators, among whom the native gentlemen in particular betray- ed considerable astonishment at its effects. ‘* At the close of the evening refreshments were partaken of in the marble hall, and the guests retired at half-past eleven, apparently much pleased with the novel entertainment prepared for them by their illustrious host.’’ ad, Y : ‘payed Ajazernoov useq 394 4OU svy o[¥ds sj Ses sIOIIO Duryiay esnvo Au sty. L—‘pasesua ssiMJayjO Sulaq auo PO ay) JuaumMASUL Mau v WOIZ paiazUe YIUOW sIYyy a1v JaJaWMOASAY avy ay} JOSUUINJOISY,L “PILPULyS P[O ULYI TaMO] E90" “Wd fF 3B PUL GEO'O “Wd OL 3B daj}oWOLwg MAN ‘rayqeem Aap avapo Apeays [Aproyrou yysi! Bt‘0 | 9*sor [P99 | 8h | BF OF | SL 1'€9/6ST|9'ET'8'98/918°6%/ZoL 6a] oo | 09 09 | ZL jo‘99|e%6 |1°6 |8°18) 1 16°62|0L8'6s “UeaW *Axamoys *kpnoyo ‘MS ‘AU Ltor |2°69 | el | OL SL | gg \8°69/0%9 \€*9 |6*os|9GB" [aBL" | 19 | 09 v9 | 18 [a*co/E"8 G8 jo‘ 18/986" 168 | Te “Apnoy ‘yu aI | smu tu g901 |0'99 | Fe eo | LL OFT BTL /ZPe\9EB" OBL. | 9g | Bo 69 | 8L \0‘c9\9%8 je°8 |6°6L)826" lose’ | Oe ‘uy, raBuvyo Azey | smu ‘Mu BEOL \6F9 | Bo | OF 8 | OL SL 0ST GIT a palRI8® [BgL" | OF | €9 9 | Lo |o'b9l9‘L \1°8 |8'eLi2e6* lene! | 63 op Teela) ‘Mu “MU (OL |S*eq | IS 6h | ol 9°61 8°S1|L‘F8| FEBe eLL' br | 19 £9 | OL |6°c9\0'8 |0°8 |P'08 966° c88" 86 op op ‘MU CMU o‘Zot |0f89 | SP | IF LE | IL (Siloe*si/L'cric*pe|GP8" 18BL" | 9g | 9 Lg | BZ |0°S9/9°6 |p°6 [0°62 BEG. |G08, 13 op op SUN ECS Ss) OIL |2°8g | IF | oF PE | 89 0°29 3'S1/8'9T|T'hB/ PSB" e6L! | 9b 9p | ad 8°CT|9°S1|6.6L 696% | F26 , 96 op op 7° | {MO eSIt \o'e9 | IF ob | 89 B‘FTI9‘Stjo*eg|sBB° |esB‘ | OF | o¢ OF | GL [0%6s\0‘SIlg‘T1/E.08|S86" j6eG" | ss op op ‘oO ‘oO OLIL lg'19 | th | FF OP | o£ \6‘6¢ 9°e1 6*bT/E'b8| eSB" BBL" tg | lg LS | LL \8cg\1 0126 108 LPOS 916. tG < op op ‘NI “M OIL |e‘I9 | GF OF 169 OfF1 8 FT) P8 p98* Tos’ | bo | oe £G | ZZ \S‘19\¢‘01\9 01 0°08 816° |986. && = op op ‘U ‘oO UZIL |p‘I9 | Ib | oF OF | 89 O°Loe*hI| L'er| I'b8 L06 ee" | 99 | €9 09 | 84 |S*colZ‘8 I|p8 8°6L Se0* |€66, G 52 op op pies a BG0L \a19 | Sb 8€ | IZ BPr|scriZ*Fe|GI6" [ors | by | Be so | LZ |Z 09\9'o1/g‘0r|P08|zo0 |I46" | Iz > op op ‘uA POUL |SE9 | Gb | Eb LE | 69 [0°69 0'9T B.9T9%CR/006 jOFB’ | 9g | ZO 09 | 82 |T'b9\c's [68 |O°6Z\986* |196) | 0G S op op aU a OI |G 19 | PP | oF G Fol iotLelUEriorris*paiP8° 818° | 6g | o9 GS | 08 |B'r9l0's |o‘L |L°LZ/3L6° [686 | GL me op op “ou 8‘900 819 ealee ; _ fee lse] 92 | 94 lettoleorleor|togloos« jracs | gt ~S op op ‘Mu CMU BSIL jos | Ih | OF OF | 89 [at9g9'rs‘oT\o*Fe|9E8* OBL. | Fo | E¢ gg | 22 \0eci9‘or|g‘6 \e°ZZ\eeo° OIG At = op op “Mu * ANU BE0T \9‘6g | 62 | BE Le | 8G (G0S|6°6T|T'6T|p*o8\808" |8oL* | bE | OF GP | OL [9'PSig‘eT|1‘E1/S°82)006" 828 91 *s coy op nae” oe NL BIOL \o'Z9 | Te | be 0& | 09 |T’e9|8°8T\6°81\9‘98|ZE8* joBl* | oF | og Sb | GL |G%Gelg‘Fricer/S°I8icees [268° J ST > *ABOT9 op ‘mu * AA PLOT \o°0L | Ih | &F LE | 89 j0°29.8'9T\0'21|G'6a|8h8* |6LL' | be | 09 09 | LL |0%69\0%01|2°6 |I's8\9e6. |1se¢ fF FL = ay puto Aue GEIL |B IL | bP | OF Le | o£ 8°29|Z‘p1/9F1/8°06|/868* joel’ | 6¢ | 99 $9 | 08 |8°ZL\1'8 |p°8 |6*8/916. j6g8« | EL S “TynuNd “SNjUI}S “110 | “ou O‘EIT \0'@L | FE | 9S bo FLL (OTL OL/STL0%OR|EPB. Joe’ | 89 | OL 08 | £8 |9°EZip fc |Z" |6°F8|c06. Brae F SI S *48v010A0 ‘augumo j;*aum ‘ou fF STO | OTOL ja‘al | 2@Z | eZ 08 | Ze [S*o2ib'p [8c |pecsiOIs® TpeZ’ | os | OL LL | 98 \O‘PL\25¢ Jeo |€°S8/668° |z98« Il > *rea[o ‘snjeajs ‘so | ‘u =U 800 | Lcor letee | 9¢ | 8g 69 | BZ OCLITITIOOTEO6I0ZL. JeTZ® 99 L9 BTLie®s (LL [8°PB\EBB. jaege | OT ~ op “Azey oS c‘Lor |pel | bo | 8g lg | LL BOL/L66 |8‘0r/8L8/82Z2° |FIZ" | 6g | $9 29 | 08 |O‘ZLic'R [pe [pScBlOL8* [roa | 6 xs ‘auy ‘uma “1yNumMa “mu “MU 8‘G0r \s°0L | Fs | Lo 9G | ZL |0*tZ 6% |Z110%68\0PL" elo" | 19 | OL GL | 18 |S*TL\o°8 |p9 |p‘zele9Bs |808« | 8 | “xea9 op “mu TMU OILL |2°89 | ag | S¢ PI 1 OL |9°69 DOTIG‘TLERB/EGL! IPL. J gg | 6¢ 09 | 84 |0°89|8°8 126 |otts|9T6. |Z98« | 4 : “Tymurns op “mu AA BSIt OOL | Fo | FE Bo | LZ B89 L'TT|PZ1|S‘8B\N5L" |FZL" | og | 09 9 | 82 \0‘69/e6 |e jo%SR|GL8° Icke | 9 = op op “M *S “A'S G‘e0r |OCTL | OG | a ob | PZ [819 0%PT|P'PT|9‘BB/CS2* {989° | og | ce BS | BL [B*SOiN TIL t1/E°P8l FFB. [€GL« $ ra op op “MS ‘AS BGIT \SOL | Ih | 8€ BE | 89 0°09 0'9TO'9T|o6B|FFL. 6995 | $e | oe £9 | ZZ jo‘99\¢‘orlo‘orj9cFe|ocss |IZZ. | F a op op MANS *S? cS SOIL |6‘0L | Fh | Sb 88 | OL \0‘29 9'9T|L‘9116'88|802" |cE9" | Ge | 09 2 | 08 jo‘l9/e8 ja°e |L‘es\cel® |4eL, | esto “rea ‘N ‘G'N S60 |6°6L | 1g | ¢¢ Go | G2 |O°LOSOT|TSElo%sa|atZ’ |6S9" | gg | 6g 9 | 82 |O°Z9/1°6 |o°8 |E“ealFBL® Ord | & Ong ‘aug “MSS *M'S BCIL |LSh | Le | 09 19 | 6L |8TL|0°01|66 [9° 28|0F9°6G/289 6] gg | IZ LL | 28 |0°SL|9°¢ |e‘G |6°C8/S1L‘62|089°6G]_T es a a < FF Olea Sboblty ® DOSE alry 2h] S'S & Clon Sploplen|swolz# wz] 9 2 5 > s || B | & Bessie ayekl g jss/PsiSeicea Pacis s|sSeesaiebl ge |sslesiSo\eeiseel & g. EB 2b | ® | £ |g feelssizegsie |e |rzissl2al*su| Palesise|"gogle |, |me|Ssibe|es4lse) & =] ° = A — 5 iow 1 oo fad a oy anal u oF i & 2} gs |PoleS|> SIS) SE selEeirg| Sl Ss[Pole=] 27 s[Sa1 Se eEKIES! SElaas| s : 5 | 8 | EY | go8l =) * logles| sl *a) say 8° SSey al SISSiS5\° o| FPot al @ ae . carl D ie of FR 1 . vie ce a T . ~ 1/5 Ly ° Ka *SOUL8II XG -AQipruin “Ay pruny g *19Y IVI AA “pul 19IUIOUIIOY, pezenoreg “NM *d Je SUOTIVAIOSAO pazepnoyepD "HW *V OT 38 SUOIJCAIESqO a 1oysis9yY